Full text of "Records of the South Australian Museum"

See other formats

VOLUME 14. No, 1
1961

RECORDS
OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Published by the Board and edited by the Museum Director

Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide.

Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

voLumE | 4
1961-1964

2 ey
a — 2
ge a Ke > —,
SEER SSS S—_
SPALL aN FALE
y — ed zZ VL
8 ee EOD fe Be
mil EL

eaa es Ep

RECORDS
OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Published by the Museum Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale

Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide, South Australia

The title page design incorporates a sketch by Madeleine Boyce of Caloprymnus

campestis, a rare species of rat kangaroo, once considered extinct, but rediscovered

in the Lake Eyre Basin some years ago by the Honorary Curator of Mammals
(Mr. H. H. Finlayson)

The Museum Board accepts no responsibility for opinions
expressed and statements made herein by the authors of papers

CONTENTS

No. 1. Published 8th August, 1961

Aboriginal hammer-stones of South Australia. oe M.
Cooper) . ne

Cenozoic Biraieraphy une pee Bee Batenniolony, of the
Tirari Desert, South Australia. Si A. pana R. H.
Tedford and Alden H. Miller) .

Re-examination of the species of Pron deadvied i
H. Womersley. (S. L. Tuxen) .

Studies of the Acarina fauna of leat. litter and moss fetta
Australia No. 1. A new genus and species of Phaulo-
dinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis, from Queens-
land (Acarina, Uropodina). (H. Womersley) ... ..

Studies of the Acarina fauna of leaf-litter and moss from
Australia No. 2. A new Trachytid mite (Polyaspmus
tuberculatus, from spine aneae: sii
(H. Womersley) .

A new record of the little heer Automates oka tenis
(Michael, 1908) from New Zealand (Acarina, Polyas-
pidae), with aa gaan of the male and Breer
(H. Womersley) . .

A new species of Chlenias ee seaniera. Boaeniniey on
Acacia aneura with some Central Australian native
beliefs about it. (Norman B. Tindale) . :

On Central Australian Mammals. Part Iv. “The ‘Dis.
tribution and Status of Central Australian a
(H. H. Finlayson) . : : ease

Archaeological ening toe outa ‘Hock Shelter: a
preliminary report. (Norman B, Tindale) .

No. 2. Published 27th July, 1962
The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps) on South Aus-
tralian Coasts, Part III. (H. M. Hale) . ; :
Occurrence of the Whale Berardius arnuxi in Southern
Australia. (H. M. Hale) .
Rock Engravings at Sica seal Se net South
Wales. (Charles P. Mountford) .

Paar.

107

115

125
131
141

193

197
231

245

Some Tingidae (Hemiptera) in the South Australian
Museum, (Carl J. Drake and Florence A. Ruhoff) .
New Hylid Frog from the Central anes of New Guien,

(Michael J. Tyler) . :

Geographical Knowledge of the Kaiadilt Paaple of Bentinck
Island, Queensland. (Norman B. Tindale) .

Some Population Changes among the Kaiadilt People of
Bentinck Island, (raconalaa’ (Norman B. Tindale) .
Australian Quail-Thrushes of the Genus Cmclosoma, (H. T.

Condon) . Bris: iF oe eee
Aberrant Aceiralion increase Uitvadeehine Bugs
(Lygaeidae, Rhyparochrominae). (G. F. Grogs) .

Sacred Objects of the Pitjandjara Tribe, Western Central
Australia. (Charles P. Mountford) .

No. 3. Published 23rd August, 1963

Fossil Ratite Birds of the Late sey of Australia.
(Alden H. Miller) .

A Turtle Shell Mask of Toures Straits es in 7 the cies
Museum, University of Sydney. (G. L. Pretty) .

Australian Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera cd aaa (a. Fr
Gross and G. G. E. Seudder) .

Aquatic and Semiaquatic Biases jakon in ations
Timor by G. F. Gross of the South Australian Museum.
(Herbert B. Hungerford and Ryiuchi Matsuda) .. .. ..

A new Larval Neotrombidium (Acarina, eee Hn CLSNISC
from bat guano. (H. Womersley) .

Monunguis Wharton 1938, a valid genus US Trombid-
toidea). (H. Womersley) .

New records of Diarthrophallidae iesatna with desaspeun
of the hitherto unknown larval stage. (H. Womersley)

Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia, Part II.
Musical rocks and associated iat of the Pitjandjara
people. (Norman B. Tindale) . nae

Preliminary survey of the Biitirn Slate Tmplements of
South Australia. (Robert Edwards) .

The Aboriginal Skin Rugs of Australia. ( 0, P. Mountford)

249

203

2059

297

337

371

397

413

421

427

471

473

477

487

499

515
525

Three new species of the Gekkonid Lizard genus Beapodae.

tylus Gray from Australia. (Arnold G. Kluge) . . 545
A Tjurunga-like Stone Pendant from New South Wales:
(Norman B. Tindale) . » 595

Young Female Pigmy Spaeat Whales (ogia teres
Blainville) from Western and South Australia. (Herbert

M. Hale) . Ales 3 : wee. SF. tek” GOL
Fossiliferous euatean succession on Mnsigh ee
South Australia. (Brian Daily) . EE ee OLD

No. 4. Published 27th May, 1964
Obituary and Seigeannby of Herbert sips es (R. V.

Southeott) . ‘ 603
Aboriginal baited side 6 Miaanes peach Nae South Wate,
(W. I. North) . ae. 633

Rock engravings ae Bau snigheisenis of Pitcairn Station,
North-Eastern South Australia. (Robert Edwards) .. 643

Revision of the Ghost Moths (Lepidoptera Fromscitiettoe,
family Hepialidae), Part VIII. (Norman B. Tindale) 663

Flint implements found near Nipa, Central Papuan High-
lands (with comments by Norman B. ee (H. K.

Bartlett) . Sw 669
Systematic sutton of the hie (ites frog Hyllla ious

storfii Werner. (M. Tyler) . . 675
Pigmy Right Whale (Caperea neem’. in ‘South ‘Awe

tralian Waters, Part Il. (H. M. Hale) . ‘ 679

A new meteorite find from South Neier oo. -W. P.
STS, PR ee 695

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS

Pace.

Bartlett, H. K.

Flint implements found near Nipa, Central Papuan High-

lands (with comments by Norman B, Tindale) .. .. 669

Condon, H. T.

Australian Quail-Thrushes of the Genus Cinclosoma . .. 337
Cooper, H. M.

Aboriginal hammer-stones of South Australia ........ 1
Corbett, David W. P.

A new meteorite find from South Australia... ...... 695

Daily, Brian.
Fossiliferous Cambrian succession on Fleurieu Peninsula,
South Australia ........ resis) thane eee

Drake, Carl J., and Ruhoff, Florence A.
Some Tingidae (Hemiptera) in the South Australian
Menara, ee Me ee SL ARE De Rm tk ne ele

Edwards, Robert.
Preliminary survey of the Reniform Slate Implements of

South Australia ....... 515
Rock engravings and stone eaglensits of Piiaien Station;
North-Eastern South Australia .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 648

Finlayson, H. H.
On Central Australian Mammals. Part IV. The Distribu-

tion and Status of Central Australian Species .. .. 141
Gross, G. F.
Aberrant Australian brachypterous cee Bugs
(Lygaeidae, Rhyparochrominae) . : A 371
Gross, G. F., and Seudder, G. G. E.
Australian Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera Lygaeidae) . .. 427
Hale, H. M.
The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia a a on South
Australian Coasts, Part TIT .. .. 197
Occurrence of the Whale Berrie arnuxi in “Southern
Australia .. .. .. 3 sod

Young female pigmy sperm winlee Cai kvenioas
Blainville) from Western and South Australia .. .. 561

Pigmy Right Whale (Caperea marginata) in South Aus-
tralian Waters, Part Il .
Hungerford, Herbert B., and eatin ‘Heinen
Aquatic and Semiaquatic Hemiptera taken in Portuguese
Timor by G. F. Gross of the South Australian Museum

Kluge, Arnold G.
Three new species of the Gekkonid Lizard genus gk
tylus Gray from Australia .. . ng ;

Miller, Alden H.
Fossil Ratite Birds of the Late Tertiary of Australia . ..

Mountford, Charles P.
Rock Engravings at Koonawarra, Western New South
Wales ......
Sacred Objects of he: Bijendiace Tribe, Wrarieer Cantenl
Australia .. .... 4 ,
The Aboriginal Skin Bugs of Auatialla mark ge

North, W. I.
Aboriginal factory sites at Moonee Beach, New South
Wealee The 44 : 5 rere

Pretty, G. L.
A Turtle Shell Mask of Torres Straits + Type in the nee
Museum, University of Sydney . oer

Southeott, R. V.
Obituary and bibliography of Herbert Womersley ..

Stirton, R. A., Tedford, R. H., and Miller, Alden H.
Cenozoic Stratigraphy and Vertebrate pie AS of the
Tirari Desert, South Australia .. .. ..

Tindale, Norman B.

A new species of Chlenias (Lepidoptera Boarmiidae) on
Acacia aneura with some Central Australian native
beliefs about it . ee “pti

Archaeological Sid OM of Wacls. Rock. Shelter: a
preliminary report . :

Geographical Bete niiiire Ost thie ‘Kae Paante. of
Bentinck Island, Queensland .

Some Population Changes among the Kaiadilt | People of
Bentinck Island, Queensland . ;

679

471

545

633

421

603

131

193

259

297

Vii

Vili

Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia, Part
II. Musical rocks and associated objects of the
Pitjandjara people .. .. . 7

A Tjurunga-like Stone Pendant freee dete South Wales %

Revision of the Ghost Moths (Lepidoptera eee
family Hepialidae) Part VIII . :

Comments on Flint Implements fauna at Ripack APS 25

Tuxen, S. L.

Re-examination of the species of Protura described by
H. Womersley .

Tyler, Michael J.

New Hylid Frog from the Central Highlands of New
Guinea .. ..

Systematic position “of thes New ras frog Hyelta
wolterstorfi Werner .. .. ...... : :

Womersley, H.

Studies of the Acarina fauna of leaf-litter and moss from
Australia No. 1. A new genus and species of Phaulo-
dinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis, from seen
land (Acarina, Uropodina) . F

Studies of the Acarina fauna of lent Tae til moss ean
Australia No, 2. A new Trachytid mite (Polyaspmus
tuberculatus, from Queensland (Acarina, Trachytina)

A new record of the little known Calotrachytes sclero-
phyllus (Michael, 1908) from New Zealand (Acarina,
Polyaspidae), with description of the male and nymph

A new Larval Neotrombidiwm (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae)
from bat guano .. .

Monunguis Wharton 1938, a a valid genus ‘(Acarina Trom-
bidioidea) . Sah

New records of Diacihcounalidas Raat) with ‘jeacie
tion of the hitherto unknown larval stage .. .. .. ..

499
550

663
670

253

675

107

115

125

473
477

487

ABORIGINAL HAMMER-STONES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. M. Cooper, HON. ASSOCIATE IN ANTHROPOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper describes the various shapes and forms of the hammer-stones of South
Australia. It is suggested that lack of sufficient evidence at the present time precludes the
definite separation of the different types of this implement — so essential an aid to stone
age man — either into their correct material culture sequences, if any, or to define many of
their possible uses.

Jivrbert Mathew Itale, OBI.

Direelor of the South Australian Museum from 1928 wotil his retirement in 1960,

ABORIGINAL HAMMER-STONES OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By H. M. COOPER, How. Associate ris AnTHRoPOLocY, SourH
Avustratian Museum

Fig. 1-29

SUMMARY

This paper describes the various shapes and forms of the
hammer-stones of South Australia. It is suggested that lack of
sufficient evidence at the preseut time precludes the definite separation
of the different types of this implement—so essential an aid to stone
age man—either into their correct material culture sequences, if any,
or to define many of their possible uses.

DESCRIPTION AND GENERAL DISCUSSION

The writer, so far as his search has extended, failed to discover
any paper devoted solely and in detail to our local hammer-stones
although many references to them have appeared in various papers
relating to South Australian stone implements by Howchin (1934),
and Tindale and Maegraith (1931).

The opportunity afforded by the examination of several thousand
examples in the South Australian Museum together with the collection,
personally, of many hundreds in the field, suggested the possible
usefulness of a paper describing a representative series of types and
their variants.

It has been deemed preferable to refer solely to those from South
Australia owing to the possible existence of additional types else-
where in Australia (due to wide differences in its flora and fauna,
which exist in such a vast territory) and, in addition, local variations
unknown to the writer which doubtless occur.

Lack of much undisputable evidence in many cases tends to
advise the exercise of caution towards any arbitrary attempt to place
our hammer-stones in any definite material culture sequence, if indeed
any major changes have occurred during the antiquity of man in
Australia. It appears probable, however, that the hammer-stone,
which persisted into historic times and was indispensible in the every

2 RECORDS OF THE §,A, MUSEUM

day life of primitive man, had continued to exist throughout his
material culture periods in its fundamental conception although subject
to some modifications in design and size as necessitated by his subse-
quent change to many much lighter and smaller implements and also
to alterations in the flora and fauna provoked by his arrival in
Australia,

The principal need for the hammer-stone was a tool for the
manofacture of his stone inrplements, These implements could be
divided, broadly, into two groups—core and flake implements. A
hammer was held in one hand and in the other the workman Prasped
another rock destined to produce a stone implement. ‘The former,
more especially in early periods, could have been a fairly heavy stone
or water-worn pebble because at that time he depended largely upon
the weight of his implement for eutting and chopping. Sharp and
skilfully aimed blows, struck with his lammer-stone, in the correct
plane, removed unnecessary niaterial in the form of flakes from the
latter, and so provided him with a base of the required weight and
form for his crude implement,

Any sharp edged stone conld serve as a entting tool. However,
the working edges of the more refined examples were then improved
by means of secondary trimming, that is small flakes were more care-
fully removed along them hy means of hammer-stones, making his
large implement more efficient, This techniqne of removing flakes
from a block of stone vr a pebble produced a core implement,

The manulacture of a flake implement was commenced in the
same way, that is with » hammer-stone held in one hand and a block
of suitable stone in the other, In this case, however, the block of
stone itsell, instead of being trimmed to form an implement, was used
to provide flakes of the required size, shape and thickness, by striking
it in the correct place and thus breaking off flakes of the desired
dimensions. These were then, during later periods at least, carefully
given light secondary trimming along their working edges to provide
efficient tools snch as small knives, saws, scrapers or adzes, The
smallest microlith flake implements of Sonth Australia weigh no more
than .2 of a milligram,

The hammer-stones of South Australia, as elsewhere, at least
where an abundance of material was available, were selected from
examples possessing shapes that could be grasped conveniently in the
hand, Smooth water-worn pebbles were sought after wherever
possible; their surfaces tended to minimize injuries to the hand during
use, Angular blocks with rounded edges and even rough pieces were

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 3

sometimes employed, especially in those situations where more suitable
material was Jacking,

The large tnajority of South Australian hammer-stones comprise
(1) diseoidal and (2) ovate shaped water-worn pebbles, the material
employed, chiefly, being fine-grained qnuartzites very compact in texture
aid eminently suitable for the purpose, Other rocks used inelnde
granitic types, flint, chert, fossiliferous Cambrian limestone and
silicified sandstones, Hammer-stones with the slightest indications of
wear, due perhaps to use upon no more than a single occasion, are
very plentiful iu areas where pebbles abound such as upon the banks
of the River Wakefield (Cooper 1960) and in the vicinity of Cape
Jervis, but in districts where good material was scarce or entirely
absent aud supplies had to he transported or traded, hammer-stones
often exhibit extreme wear suggesting that they were highly valued
and jealously guarded, Cooper (1954) diseussed a similar situation
relating to adzastones, those in localities where suitable material was
lacking, being trimmed again many times until completely unservice-
able, whereas those in areas with a plentiful supply of raw material
were rejected as soon as partly worn and replaced by new ones.
These two examples serve to indicate that even primitive man had his
own particular economic problems,

The hammer-stone, m common with many other stone implements,
appears to liaye been employed for a variety of purposes, mostly
subsidiary, in addition to its primary function in the manufacture of
stone implements, An examination of the collection indieates their
use at fimes for such supplementary requirements as pounders and
auvils. Some of the secondary purposes, more particularly in the
earlier periods, can be assumed at present as imerely conjectural but
it is known that in historic times they were utilized in varions ways
such as for pounding nuts, bark, skins and in the recovery of marrows
contained in bones, Hammer-dressing of polished stone axe-heads, in
order to complete their trimming, was possibly another well defined
purpose, Crushed shells of periwinkles and other sea species, from
which it is difficult to extract the edible contents by other means, have
been discovered npon kitchen middens on Kangaroo Island (Cooper
1943) and upon the adjacent main, Hammer-stones would provide
the logical means for effecting this end,

Tt is believed that, prior to the use of hammer-stones as an estab-
lished material culture industry, primitive man, in at least some parts
of the world manufactured his crude implements by simply striking
or hurling a block of stone against a rocky face and thus breaking off

4 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in a haphazard way, for subsequent use, a portion of the block which
he had thrown. It is hardly possible to determine whether this was
standard procedure or not during the earlier periods of man’s oceupa-
tion of Australia although it appears to have been employed as a
temporary measure during historic times for the manufacture of an
occasional crude implement,

Baines in Evans (1872) records a further interesting method of
producing flake implements witnessed by him near Victoria River,
North Anstralia, during 1860. A native struck a piece of stone ttas
big as an ostrich eg@’’ held in the hand against a large rock with such
skill as to produce a perfectly symmetrical flake with a strengthening
midrib, its finished form indicating the removal of only three flakes
in all for its production, This implement, owing to its design and
locality of origin, appears to have been an interchangeable one used
in that part of Australia as a spear-head, a knife, or a pick,

The large accumulation of hammer-stones upon camp-sites in
many parts of South Australia, however, seems to offer sufficient proof
that they provided the means utilized in the shaping and formation of
the majority of that State’s stone implements including many types
which ocenr in thousands and are so standardized in form that
haphazard methods of manufacture would be impracticable.

Alternative implements to replace the conventional hammer-stone,
possibly utilized merely as a temporary mieasnre, are indicated by the
presence of occasional disearded working cores of convenient size with
evidence upon their surfaces of hammering and battering (fig. 26),
Many hand pebble choppers of the dorninant Kangaroo Island industry
bear extensive evidence of use upon their nether stdes which show
nnmerous traces of deep pitting over a considerable area, apparently
the result of use as temporary hammers. (Cooper 1943), (fig, 27).
A few of the large implements from Hallett Cove (Cooper 1959) bear
similar indications and also others, in addition, from the River
Wakefield area (Cooper 1961),

A earefol survey of the thousands of South Australian hammer-
stones already referred to disclosed that it was difficult, confusing, and
even impracticable to separate, arbitrarily, all conventional hammer-
stones, from a considerable proportion of pebble upper millstones,
anvils and pounders becanse in many cases the three latter groups
had been used, apparently, when the necessity arose, to perform the
functions of a hammer-stone in addition to their own. Examples of
all three have been inclnded in this paper, All types, to some degree,
tend to merge into one another,

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 5

A typical hammer-stone from South Australia may be described
as a smooth water-worn pebble, symmetrically ovate in natural shape
and derived from rock of sufficient strength to resist the wear and
stresses to which an implement of this nature is liable, These hammer-
stones exhibit degrees of battering and pitting from the very slightest
surface markings through all the respective stages to extreme wear
when the pebble is finally reduced from a rounded to an almost
rectangular shape (fig. 1, 2 and 3). The wear, doubtless the result of
diverge uses, is practically always evident upon the middle of both
sides, both ends and all edges. Well developed pit holes develop,
generally in pairs, the one above the other just higher and lower than
mid-centre. ‘heir existence in this interesting manner appears fe be
due fo the operator turning the hanimer-stone end for end from time
to time when using either one or the other of the two sides. They are
usually fairly similar in depth or nearly so, This may suggest that
the reversal of end was deliberate and not accidental because such
intentional action would tend to retain a better balance and extend, in
addition, the uselul life of the stone.

Dual deep grooves, due to battering, upon both edges of certain
hammer-stones, are found upon a eonsiderable number of ovate
examples; they oceur, chiefly, apon ecamp-sites on Yorke Peninsula
(fiz. 4), The depth of these grooves is roughly equable, which tends
to indicate that they were reversed deliberately end for end hy the
user in much the same way as in the case of the dual depressions npon
the two sides already referred to. An interesting variant bul not a
conventional type of hammer-stone is shown in fig. 5, where the two
central pitted or depression centres upon both sides have been made
in a transverse but slightly oblique direetion instead of the conventional
longitndinal position.

The other dominant South Australian hammer-stone, as already
stated, is discoidal in shape, its fine grained texture being generally
similar to that of the ovate form, Tt exists in large numbers, as does
the ovate type, and similarly bears evidence of nse from the slightest
to extreme wear, Both sides and the whole of its diseoidal periphery
(edwe) were subject to use. A typical and plentiful well-worn example
unlike the ovate type, however, exhibits only a single pit hole or
depression at the centre of one or both sides, This could be due to its
diseoidal shape because the blows of the operator, irrespective of which
of the sides was held uppermost would tend to fall in the centre
(fig. 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10).

6 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Both ovate and diseoidal forms yary greatly in size, more
especially the latter and many of them served no donbt as anvils
although some of these, in addition, bear evidence of marked use as
hammers upon their edges, The central pit mark upon the larger
examples is often very deep.

An occasional anvil possesses well defined pit marks, with jagged
edges instead of the normally smovth worn sides, his jagged deep
pitting also occlirs wpon small hammer-stones of various shapes but
of such a size as suggests use in (he hand. This condition seems too
harsh to indicate the use of either as a hammer-stone or anvil
respectively when used for pounding and breaking, as the case may
be, banes, shells or skins. It may be the result of much heavier work
atch as stone erushing or flaking, perhaps for some specific work,
when operating a hammer-stone plus anvil technique (fig, 10 and 11).

Small ovate hammer-stones, such as shown in fig, 12 and 13
occur, almost exclusively, upon camp-sites on the Adelaide Plains, the
coastal regions southwards towards Cape Jervis and Yorke Peninsula.
Hammicring is confined exclusively to the two extremities with no
evidence of wear elsewhere. The shsence of warks in their middle
sections is puzzling and suggests a possibility that they were hafted
In some manner,

Fig. 14 shows a hammer-stone made of tongh fine grained
quartzite with marked evidence of severe end flake damage to itself
incurred during nse; it is relatively common, inore particularly upon
the Adelaide Plains and adjacent regions, Stone implements and
working cores made from the same hard rock are abundant upon these
camping grounds. Such damage to hammer-stones appears to be the
result of attempting to strike off flakes from blocks of the same
intractahle material as that from which the hammers were derived.

Hammer-stonces, more elongate than the ovate type described, oceur
in small numbers. Wear in these examples appears to be mostly upon
the extremities suggesting a preference for pounding (fig. 15),

Many polished axe-hends, composed of various igneous rocks from
the South-Rast of Sonth Australia, possess a well defined pit hole
upon each side 4 little ahove the working edge, probably resulting from
use as anvils. Fig. 16 from that area, in addition, exhibits a deeply
battered depression upon both edges due to hammering,

Many upper millstones, when made from water-worn pebbles, in
addition to possessing the normal nether surface worn smooth by
grinding seeds, show distinct evidence of hammering upon the entire

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES 7

periphery of their edges, This implement, therefore, appears to have
had at least two important uses (fig. 17).

Long and narrow stones, shown in fig. 18 and 19, nondescript in
shape and watrimmed, are found sparingly. They exhibit near one
extremity, and nsually npon one side only, either a well developed pit
hole or a more widespread battered area, due to some form of hammer-
ing. They were termed by McCarthy (1946) ‘‘Brachinas’’ from the
Far Northern creek, where the first example was found by the writer.
Their use must have been restricted to work of a light nature because
of the inferior strength of the material composing them and also their
long and narrow form (Monntford 1939).

Tig. 20 shows a type of nondescript shape from Kangaroo Island.
It is severely weathered, thickly patinated and has an outer coating
af lateritie concretion. It weighs 6]b. There is a somewhat jagged
pit hole upon each side. Its chief use could have been as an anvil.
Fig. 29 was used, probably, somewhat similarly. Its peripheral edge
in addition, however, bears strong evidence that it was also employed
ag a hammer-stone.

The use or uses of very small hammer-stones—some weighing as
little as loz—may be somewhat more diffieult to define even although
they are often identical with their larger counterparts. It is obvions
that their lightness precludes association with any type ol work where
weight is a consideration, Tt is possible that they were utilized in the
addition of secondary trimming to certain of the smaller types of
implements and for the removal of small and frail flakes from working
cores in the manufacture of some of the microlith types (fig. 21, 22
and 23),

Tig, 24 and 25 represent a group of Kangaroo Island hammer-stones
smaller than those of more conventional size from that locality. They
may have heen used to fashion stone implements of lesser size such as
those described hy Cooper (1960),

Fig, 28 illustrates an interesting dual type of implement—of which
the South Australian Mnseum possesses over 80 specimens. It is
confined, so far as is known loeally at present, to the Far North West.
of the State and thence across the border into the adjacent districts
of Western Australia. Its battered ends indicate extensive use for
pounding and hammering, Its other, and obviously chief use, is for
employment as a kind of rolling millstune. Mr. N, B, Tindale, Curator
of Anthropology, South Australian Museum, has witnessed this latter
function in progress and will deseribe it fully in a later paper.

8 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The writer has not seen any water-worn pebble or other form of
rock, where the natural shape has been deliberately altered by
chipping, preparatory to its nse as a hammer-stone. This, of course,
is in marked contrast to the various stone implement industries.

CONCLUSIONS

The two dominant hammer-stone shapes, as described in detail,
disclose, it will have heen seen, some differences cansed by wear.
There appears to be very little definite evidence available relating to
at least some of these variations, although if is possible that there
may have been deliberate and important reasons for selecting the two
different shapes, and if this be true they may have at. least some
different functions. The two extremities of ovate forms, for example,
would appear ideal for the purpose of striking the necessary flakes
from working cores to shape them into implements or removing flakes
fram bloeks to serve, when completed, as future tools.

The possibility that they represent separate material culture
periods could be considered but such a hypothesis seems hardly tenable,
Both shapes, more especially the ovate form, exist in association with
the large hand pebble choppers of Kangaroo Island left hehind by the
natives fornierly inhabiting that locality but who, apparently,
disappeared a considerable fine ago,

The question arises, too, whether the earliest primitive man to
reach Anstralia brought with him the knowledge of hammer-stones
represented by one or more of the forms discussed herein or whether
it reached the continent through the medinm of later arrivals.
Primeval man, during the earliest periods of his existence, as his
native successor of today does as a makeslift, was doubtless content
to use any random fragment of rock lying upon the surface of the
ground in his domain in order to provide himself with a ecride
implement with which to eut, saw or chop. He toay have devised
later, as lis experience progressed, one more to his satisfaction by
hurling one rock against another and selecting a suitable fragment.
He appears to have learned, subsequently, by holding in his hand a
stone of suitable size—preferably a water-worn pebble which would
obviate ents and bruises—that it could more easily enable him to
fashion a rude implement but an improved one, from a rock of superior
material held in the other,

Recent excavations and Carbon 14 datings appear to extend the
antiquity of man in Australia to much earlier periods than previously

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES S

believed possible, It seems fairly certain, however, that Australia’s
first inhabitants were acquainted with the hammer-stone and its
functional use at least in a generalized way. The many thousands of
standard examples of the more recent material culture implement types
found in Australia indicate that hammer-stones—not haphazard
methods—were essential for their production, as already emphasized
in this paper,

It may be observed that wear upon the surfaces of the hammer-
stones disenssed herein is the sole evidence, in many instances, mpon
which to base even problematical deductions relating to some of their
uses, remembering that function is of far greater anthropological
significance than mere shape or form. It is most essential, further-
more, in order to minimize possible faulty conclusions, that these
dednetions should be associated only with those examples belonging
to any particular branch of the culture of primitive man, which oceur
in numbers sufficiontly abundant in order to prove, beyond reasonable
doubt, their respective existences as distinct well-established types,
These couditions appertain to all figured specimens in this paper with
the exception of fig, 5 which is deseribed in the text but with the
necessary reservations,

Stone, withont doubt, did not comprise the only material employed
through the ages for the purposes of hammering, pounding and batter-
ing. It is logical to assume that wood possessed advantages or at
least was suitable for some purposes. The latter of course, with the
passage of time, have long since disappeared.

Suitable rock, fortunately, is practically indestructible; neverthe-
less it ig useful to bear in mind that implements made of that material,
as for example in the case ol our hammer-stones, comprise no more
than part of any one of the many particular material cultures of
former periods of primeval man,

An examination of the stone implements of Australia, however
cursory, cannot fail to emphasize the vital importance of the hammer
stone to the native workman without which he would be as helpless as
4 skilled tradesman who has mislaid his footrule or his drill. The
correct vse of this simple tool in the production of flakes having the
necessary length, breadth and thickness—more especially when the
core to he struek is of equal strength and intractibility—required skill
in its initial achievement and in completing the finished product.

An account of the manufacture by a Shasta Indian of California
of an obsidian arrow-head derived from a flake—obseryed by an

10 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

unnamed writer—is referred to by Stevens (1870) and is deserving of
repetition, It reveals the skill needed by the native worker, not only
in its final trimming but also in his intimate knowledge of the various
types of rock used by him, because in many cases, owing to their
varied texture, they did not respond satisfactorily to produce the
required flaking unless treated correctly in anticipation of it,

This unknown writer states that a flake having been struck off a
block by the native ‘the commenced a series of continnons blows, every
one of which chipped off fragments of the brittle substance. It
gradually seemed to acquire shape. After finishing the base of the
arrow-head . . . he began striking gentle blows, every one of which
1 expected would break it in pieces, Yet such was his adroit applica-
tion, his skill and dexterity that in little over an hour he produced a
perfect obsidian arrow-head,

“‘T then requested him to carve one from the remains of a broken
hottle which, after two failures, he succeeded in doing. He gave as a
reason for his ill-suecess that he did not understand the grain of the
glass. No sculptor ever handled a chisel with greater precision, or
more carefully measured the weight and effect of every blow, than did
this ingenious Indian,’

The handicraft in stone bequeathed by our own native people of
more reeent years—still nomadic hunters and food gatherers, as were
the many generations which preceded them—cannot fail to disclose
the symmetrical beauty of their craftsmanship,

REFERENCES

Cooper, H, M,, 1943; ‘(Large stone implements from South Australia.”
Ree, 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369,
1954: ‘*Material eulture of Anstralian aboriginals.’’ Ree,
S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 11, pp. 91-97,

1959: “‘Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett
Cove, South Australia.’’ Trans, Roy. Soe. S. Aust.,
Adelaide, 82, pp. 55-59.

» 1960: ‘‘The archaeology of Kangaroo Island,’’ Rec. S,
Aust. Mns., Adelaide, 13, pp. 481-503.

1961: ‘‘Large stone implements from the lower River
Wakefield, South Australia,’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust.,
Adelaide, 84, pp. 105-118.

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES il

Evans, John, 1872: ‘‘The ancient stone implements of Great Britain.’’
London, p. 23.

Howchin, Walter, 1934: ‘‘The stone implements of the Adelaide Tribe
of aborigines.’’ Adelaide, pp. 69-73.

McCarthy, F. D., 1946: ‘‘The stone implements of Australia.’’ Aust.
Mus., Sydney, Memoir 9, pp. 57-60.

Mountford, C. P., 1939: ‘‘Australian and Tasmanian Implements of
unknown use.’’ South Aust. Naturalist, Adelaide, 19,
pp. 12-14,

Stevens, E. T., 1870: ‘‘Flint Chips.’’ London, pp. 77 and 78.

Tindale, N. B., and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: ‘‘Traces of an extinct
aboriginal population on Kangaroo Island.’’ Ree. S.
Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4, pp. 275-289.

RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES

RECORDS

OF THE S,A. MUSEUM

* ete l SE) tre
ALS

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES

A. MUSEUM

RECORDS OF THE 5S.

COOPER—HAMMER-STONES

18 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LOCATIONS OF FIGURED SPECIMENS

Fig. 1. Sellick Beach.

Fig. 2. Port Rickaby.

Fig. 3. Pennington Bay, near. (Kangaroo Island.)
Fig. 4, Tiddy Widdy Well.

Fig. 5. Normanville.

Fig. 6. Hallett Cove.

Fig. 7. Murray Bridge.

Fig. 8. Cleve.

Fig. 9. Baan Hill.

Fig. 10. Brachina Creek.

Fig. 11. Brachina Creek,

Fig. 12. Normanville.

Fig. 13. Port Elliot.

Fig. 14. Normanville.

Fig. 15. Buleara. (Kangaroo Island).

Fig. 16. Mundalla.

Fig. 17. Limestone Springs.

Fig. 18. Brachina Creek.

Fig. 19. Moorowie. (Mount Chambers Gorge.)
Fig, 20. Hog Bay River. (Kangaroo Island.)
Fig. 21. South Australia.

Vig. 22. Lake Albert.

Fig. 23. Loveday Bay.

Fig. 24. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.)
Fig. 25. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.)
Fig. 26. Moonta,

Fig. 27. Pennington Bay, near. (Kangaroo Island.)
Fig. 28. Pudalja.

Fig. 29. Bay of Shoals. (Kangaroo Island.)

The above drawings, acknowledged with appreciation, were
executed by Miss V. Richardson, South Australian Museum. Dr.
B. Daily, Curator of Fossils and Minerals in the same institution
kindly identified the principal types of rocks selected by the natives
for use as hammer-stones.

CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE
PALEONTOLOGY OF THE TIRARI DESERT,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R. A. STIRTON, R. H. TEDFORD, AND ALDEN H. MILLER

Summary

The origin and evolution of the Australasian vertebrate fauna has been the subject of
considerable speculation due to the lack of evidence from the fossil record. The
Pleistocene marsupials of Australia are fairly well known, but they tell us little about the
Tertiary evolution of their ancestors. Only a few undoubted Tertiary marsupials had been
reported prior to the investigations described in this paper. Baldwin Spencer (1900)
described a bushytailed opossum from Fossil Bluff, Tasmania, which was critically
reviewed and redescribed by Frederic Wood Jones (1930). This specimen was found in
marine deposits containing foraminifera which are said to belong to the Janjukian “Stage”
and probably Oligocene in age. Charles Anderson (1937) recorded diprotodontid and
macropodid remains from New Guinea which are possibly late Pliocene or early
Pleistocene. Edmund D. Gill (1957) and Stirton (1957b) have recently summarized the
evidence on the few Tertiary marsupials found in Victoria. The Beaumaris fauna of
Victoria is associated with late Miocene Cheltenhamian invertebrates, the macropodid
from Forsyth’s Bank belongs in the early Pliocene Kalimnan “Stage”, and the cuscus
from a podsol near Hamilton is referred to the late Pliocene (see review by Gill, 1957).
Recently Martin F. Glaessner, B. McGowran, and M. Wade (1960) recorded part of the
diaphysis of a “large kangaroo” femur from a place called Henty’s near Hamilton,
Victoria. This they consider as referable to the Balcombian “Stage” middle Miocene.
Some other mammalian remains from Chinchilla in the Darling Downs of Queensland
may be as old as Pliocene (Woods, 1956, p. 139; 1958, p. 189).

CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEON-
TOLOGY OF THE TIRARI DESERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By R, A. STIRTON, R. H. TEDFORD, aso ALDEN H. MILLER
Fig, 1-4

INTRODUCTION

The origin and evolution of the Australasian vertebrate fauna has
heen the subject of considerable speculation due to the lack of evidence
trom the fossil record, The Pleistocene marsupials of Australia are
fairly well known, but they tell us little about the Tertiary evolution
of their ancestors, Only a few undoubted Tertiary marsupials had
been reported prior to the investigations described in this paper.
Baldwin Spencer (1900) described a bushytailed opossum from Fossil
Bluff, Tasmania, which was critically reviewed and redescribed by
Frederic Wood Jones (1930). This specimen was found in marine
deposits containing foraminifera which are said to belong to the
Janjukian ‘‘Stage’’ and probably Oligocene in age, Charles Anderson
(1937) recorded diprotodontid and macropodid remains from New
Guinea which are possibly late Pliocene or early Pleistocene, Edmund
D. Gill (1957) and Stirton (1957b) have recently summarized the
evidence on the few Tertiary marsupials found in Victoria. The
Beaumaris fauna of Victoria is associated with late Miocene Chelten-
hamian invertebrates, the macropodid from Forsyth’s Bank belongs in
the early Pliocene Kalimnan ‘‘Stage’’, and the cuscus from a podsol
near Hamilton is referred to the late Pliocene (see review by Gill,
1957). Recently Martin F. Glaessner, B, McGowran, and M. Wade
(1960) recorded part of the diaphysis of a ‘large kangaroo’? femur
from a place called Henty’s near Hamilton, Victoria. This they con-
sider as referable to the Baleombian ‘‘Stage’’ middle Miocene. Some
other mammalian remains from Chinchilla in the Darling Downs of
Queensland may be as old as Pliocene (Woods, 1956, p. 139; 1958,
p. 189).

Stirton and Tedford eame to South Australia on Fulbright Awards
in 1953 to search for Tertiary mammalian faunas and if possible to
initiate studies on the stratigraphic sequence of the assemblages, In
his original invitation to us, the late Sir Douglas Mawson suggested

20 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

the eastern side of Lake Ryre Basin as an area to explore, The
expedition’ organized that year was sponsored by the Department of
Geology, University of Adelaide, the South Australian Museum, and
the Museum of Paleontology of the University of California, It is
interesting to note that after several months of most discouraging
prospecting in the Lake Eyre Basin during which we went down
Cooper Creek ag far us the Malkuni waterhole (Nmu Camp),
G. Davidson Woodard made onr first discovery of Tertiary mammals
af Lake Palankarinoa on Joly 27, 1953, This was the key that
omocked the door to the snecess of our subsequent expeditions. An
acconnt of the 1954 explorations appeared in Pacific Discovery (Vol.
7, No. 2, 1954), and preliminary deseriptions of some of the late
Tertiary Palankarinna mammals were reported by Stirton (1955).

When we left the field in 1953 we thought the Woodard locality
would prove to be an extensive quarry. Unfortunately at that site the
Mampuwordu channel sands in which the fossils ocenr had been
truncated by the overlying Tirari Formation. Consequently the 1954
party soon depleted the quarry. Later that season outerops of a
correlative of the Katipiri Formation along the Warburton River were
prospeeted from Cowarie to Kalamurina, and a locality was examined
on the Diamantina near Birdsville, Finally four of us (Connell,
Marens, Stirton and Woodard) drove across southern Queensland to
the Darling Downs, where we collected some fossils and measured
sections near the Condamine Biver on the Nangram Lagoon and old
Chinchilla Stations, Also exposures were prospeeted alone King and
Spring Creeks near Clifton and on Freestone Creek near Warwick.
Wheu the remainder of the parfy was returning to Adelaide, Lawson
found part of a small mandible in the Etadunna Formation at Lake
Palankarinna, This was subseqnently described as the holotype of
Pevikoala palankavinniea Stirton (1957a). At that time we were still
confused ahout the stratigraphic relations of the Mampuwordu Sands
and the Etadunna Formation, Consequently Perikoala was incorreetly
assigned to the Palankarinna Pliocene fauna.

The 1957 party made important contributions to our knowledge
on the stratigraphy, found other productive fossil sites at Lake
Palankarinna, and discovered fossils at Lake Kanunka and Lake

(1) Personnel of the expuiitions have been: 1952; Paul FP. Lawson, Richard A, Tedford,
Q. Davidson Woodard, and R, A. Stirton, The party waa luter joined by Harold 0. Reynolds.
A side trip to Lake Menindee was made by Norman B, Tindale, Tedford, and Stirton,
1954; Wim, A, Cassidy, James K, Connull, Leslie F, Marcus, Lawson, Stirton, and Woodard.
1957; Harry J, Bowshall, Brian Daily, Lawson, and Tedford. 1858; Lawson, Stirton, and
Tedford.

STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 21

Pitikanta, By shovelling numerous trenches through the weathered
surface materials across the exposures Daily and Tedford revealed
the correct stratigraphic relations of the Ktadunna Formation, the
Mampuwordn Sands, and the Tirari Formation. This party also
prospected along the Warburton River. For the first time now there
was sufficient evidence to reveal the columnar positions of four
vertebrate faunas,

In 1958 we collected extensively from the four faunas, The areas
visited were Lake Ngapakaldi, Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, Lake
Palankarinna, and from the Malkuni waterhole on down Cooper Creek
to within 16 miles of Lake Fyre. In the course of refining and eon-
tributing to our information on the stratigraphy we discovered the
late Pleistocene Katipiri channel sands with remains of Diprotodon
at Lake Palankarinna,

All of our efforts to find fossil vertebrates in the underlying non-
marine Winton Formation thus far have failed, There is one piece of
a large bone from Lake Howitt that may have come from that forma-
tion, but it is too incomplete and poorly preserved for identification.

Only preliminary identifications of the faunas are included in this
report. Detailed deseriptions of the higher vertebrates will appear in
separate publications. The Ngapakaldi and Palankarinna mammals
will be done by Stirton, the Kanunka and Malkuni mammals by
Tedford, and the birds from all four faunas by Miller,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This research and exploration for Cenozoic vertebrates and on
the continental stratigraphy in South Australia is a joint project of
the Sonth Anstralian Museum and the Museum of Paleontology of the
University of California, We are permanently indebted to the former
Tirector, Mr, Herbert M. Hale, O.B.1B, and all members of the South
Anstralian Museum for their cordialily and constant assistance.

As the recipients of Fulbright Awards in 1953, Stirton and
Tedford were sponsored by the Department of Geology of the
University of Adelaide. We gratefully acknowledge their sponsorship
and wish (o express olir appreciation to Professor Arthur R, Alderman
and all members of his staff for their helpful suggestions and efforts
to facilitate our work.

We are most appreciative of the support received through our
Fulbright Awards and in particular to Mr. Geoffrey G, Rossiter
(executive officer of the United States Educational Foundation in
Australia) who did everything possible to make our experience in

22 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Australia pleasant and profitable, The 1953 expedition was greatly
facilitated by a liberal grant-in-aid by Dr, Maleolm C. MeKenna. We
are equally grateful to the National Science Foundation and to Dr.
David D, Keck (programme director for Systematic Biology) for their
generous support to continue in 1958. The 1957 expedition was
financed by the South Australian Museum and by the Museum of
Paleontology; also some of the funds for the other expeditions came
from those institutions,

The encouragement and advice given by both the late Sir Douglas
Mawson and Mr. C. Warren Bonython from the time we first thought
of going to Anstralia has been of the highest order. Their confidence
in our ability to attain our objective gaye us the inspiration to
surmani all discouraging obstacles. Much valuable information on the
geology of South Australia was received from Drs. F, W. Whitehouse,
KR, ©. Sprigg and M. ¥. Glaessner, We are especially indebted to
Dr. Brian Daily for his assistance in working out the stratigraphy and
for sketching from aerial photographs promising areas to explore.
Mr. Norman B, Tindale, with his profound knowledge of geography
and aboriginal place names, has gen¢éronsly placed all of this
information at our disposal.

All suceess of our efforts in the exploration must be attributed to
the team work of all members of the field parties. The efforts of Mr.
Pan! F. Lawson however deserve especial recognition, He has assumed
all the difficult tasks of organizing and proenring the materials
necessary for all operations in the field. Furthermore he has found
most of the best specimens which will be designated as holotypes. His
assistance and suggestions both in the field and in the laboratory have
heen invaluable,

Australian hospitality was well exemplified at the Etadunna
Station where we were made welcome by Mr. and Mrs, EB. J, Oldfield.
There we stored our provisions and came at regular intervals for fresh
water. It is not possible to list here all of our other friends in
Australia who were equally generous and hospitable to us, but to all
we are most grateful,

GEOCHRONOLOGIC, STRATIGRAPHIC AND FAUNAL
TERMINOLOGIES

Geochronologie Terminology —Our most difficult problem in the
Tirari area is to determine the age of the rock units in which the fossils
occur, xcept for the upper part of the Katipiri Formation with the
remains of Diprotodon, our reference to the Lyellian time terms is

STIRTON AND oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 23

little more than a guess. Unfortunately we have discovered no voleanic
rocks to offer means of absolute dating with radioactive materials.
Nor does the age of the marine formations in Victoria and Tasmania
in which land mammals have been found help us at this time.
Mammalian remains are meagre and very incomplete in these forma-
tions, nor is there any indieation of closely related forms occurring
in the marine beds and in the Tirari area, althongh additional
specimens from these or from other formations may offer important
clues. Tf fossil pollen oecnrs in these rocks it nay be usefl in
vorrelation. This will necessitate a research programme in palynology
but this is beyond the seope of onr present project.

Onr suggestion of Lyellian time terms is based on our interpreta-
tion of the stage of evolution of the mammals, This of conrse is
largely specnlative because we have no phyletic control even in the
Macropodidae which are better represented in the fossil reeord than
any of the families of Australian mammals. If we assume that the
rate of evolution in the hypsobrachyodont Macropodinae is roughly
comparable to that ol the braclyhypsodunt to hypsodont Kquinae, then
we may reasonably conclude that the Mtadunna formation is as old
as Oligocene. This will be diseussed further when the faunas are
described in detail in our fortheoming reports. When knowledge on
the vertebrate paleontology and continental stratigraphy of Anstralia
offers adequate information for correlation, it will be interesting to
sce how far off we were in our first tentative Mpoch designations,

Our rock sequences are not eomplete enough to vepresent a
continous sueceession of chronostratigraphie unite, even from the
different exposed sections, Until the suecession of the Tertiary
vertebrate faunas is much better known, or other evidence is available,
we shall have no means of knowing the duration of the hiatuses
represented by the unconformaties and disconformuties between our
formations. The faunas, however, indicate that the longest is between
the Etadunna and the Mampuwordu.

Stratigrapie Terminology.—We have proposed four formational
names, The Btadyunna, Mampuwordu, Tirari and Katipiri, Wach of
these formations is distinguished on its lithologic character and on
the basis of its stratigraplie position in relation to the other forma-
tions, They are not defined on the basis of their contained fauna or
faunas. The maximum horizontal or vertical extent of these units is
not observable and therefore not determinable from the surface
expostires. The laenstrine Ktadunna Formation is evidently the most
extensive and our knowledee of the Mampuwordn channel and flood

24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

NORTHERN
TERRITORY

WESTERN
AUSTRALIA

NEW SOUTH
WALES

VICTORIA
1 2 SMESTON
MENTY'S, FORSYTHS B HAMILTON X @Melbourne
| BEAUMA|

Fig. 1. A map of the Australasian region showing the location of the Tirari Desert area
east of Lake Kyre. The other Tertiary and early Pleistocene faunal localities are indicated
by X (see correlation chart, fig. 3).

STIRTON AND oOTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 25

plain sands is limited to a local area at Lake Palankarinna, The red
argillaceous sandstones and arenaceous claystones of the Tirari Forma-
tion are also wide spread, possibly almost as much so as the Etadunna.
The Katipiri fluviatile beds possibly represent all of Pleistocene time.
They are exposed at Lake Palankarinna, Lake Kanunka, Lake
Pitikanta, Lake Ngapakaldi, along Cooper Creek, and probably farther
north.

Faunal Terminology.—Most vertebrate paleontologists, especially
those working with fossil mammals, consider their fossil assemblages
as biological entities and refer to them as faunas (or local faunas).
This procedure has been employed to implement efforts in the applica-
tion of the biologic evidence to the problems of faunal succession,
paleoecology, and geochronology. The term ‘‘fauna’’ as used here
(Stirton, 1936, 1940) need not be confused with the concept of fauna
as representing all the animals living in a given area at a given time.
In fact there is no local area of any appreciable extent in which we
can know, or hope to know, all of the animals that lived, or are living,
at any given time. In any event the evidence available to us can be
considered only as a representation of that fauna.

An assemblage of fossils from one locality may represent the
mammals living in a given area at a given time. Several assemblages
from different sites may be recognized as belonging to one fauna. A
single species or an individual fossil specimen may be our sole
representation of a distinct faunal unit and may be so designated.
Collections of fossils from different localities are recognized as
representing a fauna when the genera and species are the same.
Separate faunal names may be employed when the paleontologist has
reason to assume that the materials before him represent distinct
faunal units, even though the specimens cannot be precisely identified
to genus and species. Eventually additional evidence may necessitate
synonymizing certain faunal names; on the other hand a faunal name
as it has been applied to certain fossil materials may be found to refer
to two or more faunas. This need not be considered as confusing nor
misleading but as normal procedure as our knowledge increases.

This biologic approach offers basic control units in phylogenetic,
paleoecologic and stratigraphic interpretations. Many fossil mam-
malian assemblages occur in fluviatile deposits where there is no
chance of tracing the beds laterally and where there is little or no
chance of establishing suprapositional or infrapositional temporal
control with other rock units in the section. In other areas the strati-
graphic position of the sites where fossils are found may be obscured

26 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

by complex geologic structure. Therefore it is only exceptional when
mammalian fossils are sufficiently represented in a continuous
succession of chronostratigraphic units to permit the delineation of
Stages and Zones (Savage, 1955). One fauna may be distributed
throughout a considerable thickness of rocks because of relatively
rapid deposition of sediments. On the other hand due to a slow
accumulation of detritus, or alterations in the distribution of animals,
two or more distinct faunas may occur very close to one another in a
vertical section. Locally or within an area of 50 miles, marshland,
woodland and grassland environments may affect the composition of
synchronous faunas. Some animals with wide environmental tolerances
wil] frequently reveal the contemporaneity of such faunas. These
synchronous assemblages of different composition (faunal facies) when
discovered as fossils may be recorded by distinct faunal names,

We have recognized four faunas in the area here referred to as
the Tirari Desert. A type locality has been designated for each of
these faunas as is standard practice in introducing new formation
names. To avoid confusion these have been given local geographic
names that differ from the names of the formations. The reason for
this is apparent because we have recognized two faunas, the Malkuni
and the Kanunka, as coming from the Katipiri Formation. The
Malkuni fauna is represented from numerous localities along Cooper
Creek and at Lake Palankarinna, On the other hand we have found
the Kanunka fauna in remarkably similar channel sands only at Lake
Kanunka, Eventually one of our faunas may be discovered elsewhere
in Australia in a different formation. The Palankarinna fauna is thus
far restricted to two localities at Lake Palankarinna in the Mampu-
wordu Sands, Remains representing the Ngapakaldi fauna are more
widely distributed. There are numerous localities at Lake
Palankarinna, one at Lake Kanunka, and several at both Lake
Pitikanta and at Lake Ngapakaldi.

STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY

The term Tirari Desert was first used without explicit definition
by John Walter Gregory (1906) for the sandridge country between
the Warburton River and Cooper Creek oceupied by the Tirari
aboriginal tribe. As used in this report the Tirari Desert actually
represents a southern extension of the Arunta (or Simpson) Desert
east of Lake Eyre, bounded to the east by a north trending anticlinal
axis involving Mesozoic and early Tertiary rocks. The southern
boundary is the divide between the Lake Eyre and Lake Frome basins

STIRTON anv oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 27

formed by a north-easterly trending anticlinal axis involving Mesozoic
and Tertiary vocks, N orth of the Warburton River the Tirari Desert
merges with the southern Arunta Desert,

The present-day plystography of this region is dominated by a
remarkably linear system of parallel sandridges, the long axes of
which trend slightly west of north (Madigan, 1946), Characteristic
of the Tirari Desert is the great mimber of large and small saltpans,
basins of very local drainage, produced by large scale deflation in late
Quaternary and Reeent time. Donald King (1960) has given an
extended discussion of the sandridge deserts of South Australia.
Cutting across the sandridges and in places into the underlying forma-
tions are two large streain conrses, Cooper Creek and the Warburton
River, that carry flood waters from eastern Queensland into Lake Myre
North.

The stratigraphy of the area covered during these investigations
has never received detailed attention although the general geology of
the Lake Wyre Basin as a whole is fairly well known (see Sprige
(1958) for snmmary),

G, L. Dehney (1881a) gave the only account of the pre-sandridge
reology of the Tirari Desert in a report ou the results of attempts ta
locate shallow wells in this country oes the latter part of the last
century. Significantly he memtions (p. 146) ‘the broken face of the
escarpment, of the table hills, overlooking a salt lake 25 miles north-
west of Lake Killalpaninna, displays marly clays mixed with gypsum
and fossil bones. The fossils, which have been determined by
Professor Tate, consist of fish vertebrae, teeth and the bony scales of
crocodiles, and phalanges of a gigantic marsupial of the family of
kangaroo, from which it may be safely concluded that the marly clays,
sandstone, and #ypsiferous beds of the tableland country are of lacus-
trine origin’. This discovery was mentioned hy Ralph Tate (1889, p. 54)
whose list includes “nhalanges of an emu-like bird’? instead of those
of a kangaroo, In any event it appears that Debnuy discovered Luke
Kanunka where bones of the Kanunka yertebrates had weathered out
af the loose channel sands of the Katipiri Formation and occur as
font on the Btadunna exposures below. It appears from Dehney’s
(1881b) well logs at sites 1-4 that the Katipiri channel and flood plain
sands were well distributed ont from the present course of Cooper
Creek. Only at his well site 2 which is 44 miles north of Cooper Creek
and 23 miles east of Lake Hyre did he find a section like the ones we
have deseribed at Lake Kanunka and Lake Palankarinna. Evidently

248 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

that bore eut through the Katipiri and Tirari formations and some
six feet into the Htadunna.

John W. Gregory (1906) and Cecil Thomas Madigan (1945)
crossed the Tirari Desert, but give only a cursory discussion of the
sandridges and saltpans, Gregory’s primary interest was in the fossil
vertebrates reported from Cooper Creek and the Warburton River.
In so far as we can determine at this time, all the fossils collected in
the Tirari Desert area by the Gregory expedition belong to the
Malkuni fauna. He apparently was not aware of Debney’s discovery
in the sandridge country between these rivers, Recently D. King
(1956 and 1960) has dealt with the late Cenozoic deposits exposed in
the southwestern margin of the Tirari Desert along the southern
shores of Lake Eyre, but this is 50 to 60 miles southwest of the area
diseussed in this report.

Kxposures of middle and later Cenozoic rocks in the Tirari Desert
are widely scattered due to the ubiqnitous sandridge cover which
obscures most of the underlying deposits. Only here and there where
deflation or the major water conrses have carved deep enough into
the desert floor are exposures to be found. Therefore the margins
of the numerous saltpans (usually the western sides) and banks of the
entrenched Cooper Creek and Warburton River expose the only
significant outcrops of pre-sandridge rocks in the Tirari Desert.

It was found that the distinetive lithologies and superpositional
relationships of the formational units eould be recognized over wide
areas, even though the outcrops are discontinuous. In some instances
it has been possible to cheek these litholowical correlations with fossils.

Three genoral localities are dealt with somewhat in detail in this
report (Tig, 2). They were singled out because they have yielded
the most significant fossil vertebrate remaing and offered the best
exposnres of the formations. The type sections of our stratigraphic
units and the type localities for the faunas have been designated from
these local areas.

1. Lake Palankarinna—This is the best single section so far
diseovered, Late Mesozoic and middle to later Cenozoie rocks are
continuously exposed in a dissected escarpment stretching for abont
three miles along the western side of this saltpan, Lake Palankarinna
is south of Cooper Creek and about 18 miles southwest of Etadunna
Station at approximately latitude 28° 47’ 8., longitude 138° 25° B,

2. Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta and Lake N gapakaldi.Nearly
30 miles north of Lake Palankarinna are exposures along the shores

STIRTON anp OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 29

LAKE EYRE

NORTH

—— Routes of Expeditions

Hig. 2. The Tirari Desert area east of Lake Eyre, South Australia. There are many
more Ngapakaldi faunal localities on the west side of Lake Palankarinna than indicated
on this map.

of the two small lakes, Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta, and Lake
Ngapakaldi. There we have found important fossil vertebrate remains,
especially those from the lower channel sands of the Katipiri Forma-
tion and from the much older Etadunna Formation.

Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta are small saltpans only 14 miles
long and two miles apart in the same interdune valley at approximately
latitude 28° 23’ S., longitude 138° 18’ E,

30 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Three miles north of Lake Pitikanta lies the larger Lake
Ngapakaldi at approximately latitude 28° 18’ S., longitude 138° 15’ E.
Only the exposures of the Etadunna Formation on the eastern side
of this saltpan have yielded fossils of the Ngapakaldi fauna. The
same fauna occurs in outcrops of the same formation on the west
sides of Lake Kanunka and Lake Pitikanta.

3. Katipiri waterhole, Cooper Creek—There is an excellent cliff
exposure along the northern bank of Cooper Creek at Katipiri water-
hole, 24 miles northwest of Lake Palankarinna at approximately
latitude 28° 385’ §., longitude 138° 6’ E. There the superpositional
relationships of the upper fluviatile deposits of the Katipiri Formation
are revealed.

On the following pages a composite stratigraphic column for the
area investigated is described utilizing information drawn from a
study of the three sections listed above. A description of the strati-
graphic columns for each locality is given in Appendix A.

Late Mesozoic—Early Tertiary

The base of our oldest Cenozoic unit is exposed at the south-
western end of Lake Palankarinna. These basal green sandstones of

MEGAFOSSIL MAMMALIAN FAUNAS
*STAGES”

VICTORIA AND TASMANIA LAKE EYRE BASIN
PLEISTOCENE

WERRIKOOIAN
Hamilton t*
PLIOCENE KALIMNAN
aN Forsyths Bank f* Potankorinna ft
CHELTENHAMIAN

MIOCENE 0 Pe} -- - —- -- - - - =~ + =

ae ee ae a oe a oe ee ee

ee ee ee

EOCENE

x Directly correlated with the marine type sections or their generally accepted equivalents,

Fig. 3. Tentative correlation of somo Cenozoic mammalian faunas.

STIRTON AND orbkrs—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 31

the middle ‘Tertiary Htadunna Formation rest unconformably on
deeply weathered gray siltstones, clays and sandstones of the non-
marine Winton Formation, the uppermost Cretaceous unit recognized
in the Lake Eyre Basin. Immediately south of Lake Palankarinna
these older rocks ure gently upwarped forming a low anticlinal divide
separating the Lake Eyre and Lake Frome depressions. Superficial
silicification (the formation of duricrust) of an extensive peneplane
cut across the Cretaceous rocks and thin remnants of overlying early
Cenozois fliviatile deposits predates the deposition of the Htadunna
Formation, The Etadunna Formation lacks any trace of large scale
silicifieation and contains locally ut its base a limonite cemented
conglomerate of siliceows nodules derived {rom the Winton Formation.
The absence of any marked southward coarsening of the Etadunna
Formation against the duricrusted upwarp of older rocks suggests
that this anticline was not a prominent feature in mid-Tertiary time.

Middle Tertiary (?Oligocene)
Etadunna Formation

Stratigraphy —The term Etadunna Formation was first used by
Stirton in his preliminary deseription of the mammals from the
Palankarinna fama (1955, p. 267). In that paper Stirton credits the
term NWtadunna Formation to G. Davidson Woodard who proposed it
in a report on his pioneer investigations of Tirari Desert geology
(unpublished manuseript on file at the Museum of Paleontology,
University of California). [t was ussumed that Woodard’s report
would soon be published as planned, At that time the post-Winton
lacustrine deposits at Lake Palankarinna and the immediately over-
lying channel sands with the Palankarinna fauna were thought to
belong to the same eyele of deposition and hence to a single formation.
Later stratigraphic work by Brian Daily and Tedford hag shown that,
the channel sands are a distinct lithologie anit disconformably over-
lying the lake beds. As used here the term Htadunna Formation is
restricted to the lacustrine deposits und a new name, Mampuwordu
Sands, is proposed for the overlying channel sands containing the
Palankarinna fauna,

At the type section, the bluffs along the western side of Lake
Palunkarinna, the Etadnima Formation consists of a maximum of
97 feet of green claystone and sandstone interbedded with white
caleareous mudstone and dolomitic limestone (see Appendix A for
detailed description), ‘The basal green sandstone member of the

32 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSBUM

Htadunna Formation rests inconformably on the Winton Formation.
A discontinuons basal conglomerate may oecur at this contact. The
basal member o! the Mtadunna Pormation is succeeded by a sequence
of dolomitic limestones, Caleireous mudstones and elaystones with
several horizons of intraformational breccia denoting repeated
exposure and drying of the shallow water lagoon in which these
deposits formed. Poorly preserved gastropods, ostracodes and
oégonia of Chara were lonnd in the caleareous mudstones.

The sueceeding strata at Lake Palankarinna consist of an alterna-
tion of green claystones and argillaceous sandstones yielding abundant,
but fragmentary, remains of fish, reptiles, birds and some mammals
{notably Perikeala). These deposits give way to a ealeareous mud-
stone with interbedded claystone and calearcous sandstone, The
uppermost units at the type section are fossiliferous arenaceous green
elaystones and interbedded sandstones in places overlain disconform-
ably (probably with angular unconformity) by the Mampuwordu
Sands. Where the Mampuwordu Sands are absent, the Btadunna
Formation {is overlain with angular onconformity by the Tirari
Formation or locally by the suceveding Katipiri Sands,

At Lake Palankarinna the Etadunna Formation was folded into
a broad syncline before the Mampuwordu Sands and horizontally
bedded Tirari Formation were deposited, This folding may have
corresponded with movements along the Mesozoic—early Tertiary
anticlinal axis immediately to the southeast because the formations
overlying the Etadanna are poorly sorted fluviatile deposits rich in
Fragments derived from a duricrusted terrain,

The Rtadunna Formation exposed at Lake Kanunka, Lake
Pitikanta, and Lake Ngapakaldi is thinner than at the type section
but strikingly similar in lithology. There is a maximum of 24 feet
of Lake Kanunka dolomitie calcareous mndstones with prominent intra
formational breccias at the top whieh alternate with green claystones
(for measured sections see Appendix A). Artienlated mammalian
skeletons and parts of skeletons were found consistently at the top of
the lowest exposed green claystone and at the base of the immediately
overlying ealearcous mudstone. The positions assumed by the
articulated skeletons of the abundant small diprotedonts and small
macropodids suggest entrapment of the animals in boggy elay, Their
remains are truncated and weathered where they projected into the
overlying calearcous mudstone indieating exposure before burial
beneath the overlying calcareous sediments. Although it is impossible
directly to trace the fossiliferous horizon from Lake Kanunka and

STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 33

Lake Pitikanta to Lake Ngapakaldi, the unusual concentration of
mammalian remains at a similar stratigraphic position at each locality
is tentatively accepted as indicating approximate synchronous
deposition,

The Etadunna Formation at Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, and
Lake Ng‘apakaldi is nearly flat-lying. There the strata are disconform-
ably overlain by equivalents of the Tirari Formation and locally by
the Katipiri Sands.

It is possible that the dolomitic mudstones and interbedded thin
green clays recorded from the southern shore of Lake Eyre North by
King (1956) are part of the Etadunna Formation. The unconformably
overlying deposits at that locality cannot be correlated at present with
any of the post-Etadunna Formations in the area we have studied.

Paleontology—tThe vertebrate fauna from the Etadunna Forma-
tion is herein designated as the Ngapakaldi fauna with its type locality

LAKE KANUNKA

KATIPIRE WATERHOLE LAKE PITIKANTA LAKE PALANKARINNA
GOOPER CREEK { COMPOSITE }
Sm et 5} YEATICAL SCALE

W FEET

WIND PFT NES

MAL RUN) Y 5377-82,
FAUNA Vy 5ED9-E9

TT
WOAPARALDY Y SITE

fauna = V BERD
ETADUNNA

nedranazor) ¥3TTO
nearanaay Vane

Fauva ) S763
vS5765

FORMATION

LITMDLOGIC SyMBOLS \ vars

CET
Feoey CROSS-REODED Sahos = GLAYETONE

=
SANDSTONE ES CALCAREOUS MUDSTONE
GRGILLACEOUS SANDSTONE E
@RENACEOUS Ci ATSTONE fssse] INTRAFORMATIONS'. BRECOA

WINTON FORMATION

q LIMESTONE AND GCOLOMITIC
e} LiMeSTOME

Fig. 4. Colummnar sections indicating stratigraphic positions of faunas and formations in
the Tirari Desert area east of Lake Eyre, South Australia, Scale in feet.

34 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

on the east shore of Lake Ngapakaldi (U.C. Loc. V 5858). Its most
important representation is the locally abundant skeletal remains of
marsupials collected on the eastern shore of Lake Ngapakaldi and the
northwestern shore of Lake Pitikanta, Additional, but more frag-
mentary, marsupial material has been taken at the same horizon at
Lake Kanunka and from members 4, 6 (Perikoala), and 9 of the
Etadunna Formation at Lake Palankarinna,

A provisional fannal list for the Ngapakaldi fauna is given below
combining the material from all the localities mentioned. Only the
koala-like Perikoala has been previously described (Stirton, 1957a).

NGAPAKALDI FAUNA (?0LIGOCENE)

Mouuusca

Gastropopa: Poorly preserved gastropods have been found that
evidently represent three genera.

ARTHROPODA

Osrracopa; Some fossil ostracodes occur in the caleareous mudstones
but these have not been identified further.

OsTEICHTHYES
Dipnot:

CeratopontipaE: One locality at Lake Palankarinna yielded a
large series of lungfish teeth. These for the most part are smaller
than the teeth in the Malkuni and Kanunka faunas. Other teeth, how-
ever, found on the Etadunna exposures are as large as those in the
later faunas,

Treueostet: Bones of teleost fishes are as abundant in the Etadunna
Formation as they are in the later channel sands.

Repriuia
CuetoniA: Parts of carapaces, plastrons, and body skeletal elements
are abundant in this formation,

Crocoptnia: Pieces of skulls and lower jaws were found at different
sites, but these reptiles seemed to have been much less numerous than
the turtles.

Squamata:

Varanipan: There is one vertebra of a large, but not gigantic,
lizard.

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 35

AVES

More than 45 fragmentary bird bones represent a rather
diversified avifauna. The collection is sufficient to permit identification
to family as follows.

PELECANIFORMES:

Pevecanipan: The distal end of a tarsometatarsus represents a
pelican differing significantly from the modern genus.

CICONITFORMES;

Puoentcoprertipsr: The distal articulation of a tarsometatarsus
represents the genus Phoenicopterus but the species is about 50 per
cent larger than any modern flamingo. The family is not represented
in the modern fauna of Australia,

ANSERIFORMES:

Anatipaz: A complete humerus is tentatively allocated to the
subfamily comprising the spine-tailed ducks,

GRUIFORMES :

Gruipar: An imperfect proximal end of a tarsus is some form of
crane,

CHARADRIIFORMES :

Bururiyipar: A proximal half of a humerus apparently represents
this family of shore-birds, the thick-knees.

LanipaE: A distal half of a tarsometatarsus appears to represent
a gull or a tern.

MamMatia
MARSUPIALIA:

Dasyuripan: One of the most significant specimens found in the
Etadunna Formation is a new genus of dasyurid. The size of the
animal is comparable to Dasyurus quoll. This specimen consists of
I’; both wpper canines, P?, P*, M* and M? of both sides; M*; the left
mandible with the canine, Pi, the anterior end of Ps, Ps missing
from its alveolus, Mi-s in place; part of a pelvis and much of the ulna,
and numerous foot bones. The proximity of these parts in the clay-
stone indicates they belong to a single individual. The three premolars
with gradation in size from P: to Ps and the absence of the metaconid
on Mi; suggests that this animal may not be far removed from the
ancestry of Thylacinus.

36 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PHAsCOLAROTIDAB:?
Perikoala palankarimnica Stirton (19572)

The type and paratype of this species were originally described
as part of the Palankarinna fanna, We now know that they come
from the underlying Htadunna Formation and belong to the
Ngapakaldi fauna. As yet we haye found no specimens referable to
this species at Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, or Lake Ngapakaldi
where most of the mammalian remains have been found,

Macropopipan:

Poronorar: Part of a left mandible is referable to a group that
is possibly ancestral to the genus Bettongia. Most of the horizontal
and posterior parts of the jaw are missing. ‘The incisor is broken off,
but Pa, Mi, Mz and Ms are in place and little worn. The specimen is
remarkably like the living bettongs especially in the premolar, but the
details in the patterns of the molars are different.

Subfamily 7

One of the most remarkable mammals in the Ngapakaldi fauna
is a new genus of questionable subfamily relationships. The skull is
somewhat comparable in outline but more elongate than that of
Aepyprymnus, On the whole however the new genus seems to be
about equally distinct from each of the Recent potoroine genera as
well as from Hypsiprymnodow. There are two erania with mandibles
and parts of the body skeletons that belong to two individuals, as well
as two other lower jaws with parts of the maxillaries associated, and
parts of the lower jaws of still another individual. Features in the
molars offer some suggestion of their derivation from a primitive
marsupial with a tribosphenic pattern, Furthermore the transverse
lophs and lophids are more trenchant and not us depressed in the
middle as in the Potoroinae or the Hypsiprymnodontinae, The
characters in these Ngapakaldi specimens are much like those seen in
the living Setonia brachyurus as well as those in the three specimens
discussed later in the Malkuni, Kanunka and Palankarinna faunas,

Dieroropontipan: The most abundant marsupial in the Ngapakaldi
fauna is a primitive diprotodontid about the size of a domestic suid,
Unfortunately the bones of the skeletons we have found thus far have
been badly shattered by expansion and contraction in the surface
weathering zone, Nevertheless enough specimens haye been found to
make a restoration possible, although adequately preserved cervical,
thoracic and lumbar vertebrae, as well as bones of the sternum and

STIRTON anv oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY ay

ribs are still wanting. All of the bones in our collection have not yet
been fully prepared and restored because of their fragmentary con-
dition, The phylogenetic position of this interesting animal, as in most
ol the other Ngapakaldi marsupials, cannot be accurately determined
until more of the genera and species intermediate between if and the
later related genera can be found. The molars are sharply biliphodont
with only slight indications of forelinks and midlinks, Of the
premolars only P{ are present. They have a simple pattern and
are reduced in size. The lower incisors are rather widely spatulate
as in Palorchestes, not rounded as in the Diprotodontinae.

Late Tertiary (?early Pliocene)
Mampuwordu'*’ Sands

Stratigraphy.—The Mampuwordu Sands are locally exposed
stream channel deposits known only at the type locality, Lake
Palankarinna, This formation contains the Palankarinna fauna partly
described by Stirton (1955). Seattered remnants of probably wide-
spread stream channel and floodplain deposits outcrop along the north-
western side of Lake Palankarinna where some have cut as much as
16 feet into the uppermost member of the Mtadunna Formation. They
are disconformably overlain by the Tirari Formation,

Manmuwalian remains lave been found in local concentrations at
the base of these channels at two localities in pebbly cross-bedded
quartz sand and lenticular arenaceons claystones. Those remains were
commonly broken, but not badly waterworn. Broken fragments fonnd
separated in the fossil qnarries were frequently found to fit together
indicating no great distance of transport, Waterworn pebbles within
the basal sands tuclude durierust and quartz fragments derived from
the Mesozoie and early Tertiary deposits as well as limestone
fragments devived from the underlying Etaduuna Formation, The
presence of fragments derived from the deeper parts of the Etadnnna
Formation sugeest that the folding of these rocks preceded deposition
of the Mampuwordo Sands. Regional uplift is refleeted in the change
from fine grained clastic and chemical sediments of the Etadunna to
the eoarser fluviatile deposits of the Mampuwordu Sands and the
sueceeding Tirari Formation.

Paleontology—The Palankarinna fauna was taken from two
quarries in the Mampuwordn Sands exposed along the northwestern

(2) 4 Dieri name for a site at the northwestern end of Lake Palankarinna; approved by the
State Nomenclature Committee of South Australia.

38 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

side of Lake Palankarinna. The Woodard Quarry (U.O.M.P. locality
V 5367), the type locality, was discovered in 1953 and worked out in
1954. The Lawson and Daily Quarries (U.C.M.P. locality V 5769)
are two bone-bearing pockets in a single channel discovered in 1957
about 4 mile north of the Woodard Quarry. Stirton (1955) gave a
preliminary description of the 1953 collection from the Woodard
Quarry. A provisional faunal list for both localities is given below.

PALANKARINNA FAUNA (?PLIOCENE)

ARTHROPODA
CRUSTACEA:
Decapopa: Both gastroliths and pieces of the pinchers occur in
this collection,
OsTEICHTHYBS
TrLnoster: Numerous bones probably representing a diversified fish
fauna have been taken from the Woodard locality.

Reprints
Crocopinma: There are more than 125 isolated teeth, 7 dermal scutes
and 6 parts of crocodilian skulls and mandibles. The ravages of
these creatures may account in a large measure for the fragmentary
condition of the mammal bones,

AVES
CaSUARIIFORMES :

Dromicenpar; A tarsometatarsus seems clearly to represent a new
species of this family. It is the first Tertiary record of the
Dromiceiidae. The proportions of the bone are intermediate between
those in the emu and the cassowary, but the species clearly was an
emu and not a cassowary. <A detailed study of this bone should
contribute to our knowledge of the antiquity and evolution of these
birds.

MamMMAtia
MARSUPIALIA :

PERAMELIDAR:

Ischnodon australis Stirton (1955)

The type and only known specimen is the anterior half of a
right mandible with only the posterior half of the canine alveolus
showing. Piz and Miz in place. Ps is missing from the alveolus,
and Mz is broken across the talonid resulting in the loss of the
posterolingual corner.

STIRTON aND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 39

Macroropipab:

iSubfamily: One left mandible with well worn teeth, although of
about the same size as those of P. palankarinnicus, represents an
undescribed genus of the Macropodidae. The construction of the
molars, especially the less worn Ma, is much like that in the portion
of a right mandible with Ms and the anterior moiety of Ms in the
Malkuni fauna, which we have stated has Setonix-like molars, The
Palankarinna specimen however is larger than the Malkuni species.
When the species of this group are well exemplified, it may be thought
advisable to recognize another subfamily.

MAcRropoprn ag;
Prionotemnus palankarinnicus Stirton (1955)
We have a large series of maxillae, mandibles, and limb and foot
bones of this macropodid. Fossils of this macropodid are by far the
most numerous of any vertebrate in the fauna.

A tibia with macropodine characters and of about the same length
as those in Prionotemnus has a shaft nearly twice as great in diameter.
This obviously belongs to another macropodid much larger than
Prionotemnus,

SruenurmAr: There is a wide but short-crowned lower incisor
that is suggestive of those seen in the Sthenurinae.

DiPROTODONTIDAD:
Meniscolophus mawsoni Stirton (1955)
Our information on this species has not been augmented since 1955.

Another diprotodontid (Stirton, 1955) is more like Euowenia than
either Meniscolophus or Nototherium. More information on it must
await the discovery of better specimens.

Late Tertiary (?Pliocene)
Tirari® Formation

Stratigraphy: Flat-lying brick red argillaceous sandstones and
arenaceous claystones overly the Etadunna Formation at all three of
the areas discussed in this report. Reconnaissance investigations
indicate even more widespread occurrence of these deposits in the
Tirari Desert.

(8) From the Tirari Desert in which these deposits are widespread,

40 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The Tirari Formation is best exposed at its type section along the
western shore of Lake Palankarinna where almost 40 feet of
predominantly red, poorly sorted fluviatile deposits outcrop (see
Appendix A), The lower third of the formation is dominantly
arenaceous. Scattered pebbles of duricrust and milky quartz occur at
the base, but no prominent basal conglomerate is developed. Current
cross-bedding is common in these basal sands. The upper two-thirds
is dominantly argillaceons.

At Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta, and Lake Ngapakaldi the
Tirari Formation does not exceed 13 feet and is dominantly a red
arenaceous claystone with a few inches of coarser sand and duricrust
pebbles at the base. Eleven feet of horizontally bedded red and
mottled green and red arenaceous claystones outcrop at the base of
the exposed section at the Katipiri waterhole on Cooper Creek, These
deposits are also lithologically identified as the Tirari Formation.
Only at Lake Palankarinna, Lake Kanunka, Lake Pitikanta and Lake
Ngapakaldi can the Tirari Formation be seen uneonformably overlying
the Etadunna Formation,

The characteristic lithology and differences in the dominant grain
size between these three areas suggest that the Tirari sediments may
haye been derived in large part by stripping of red soils developed on
durierusted pre-Htadunna rocks exposed to the south and east. The
increasing dominance of argillaceous material toward the top of all
sections may indieate the lowering of the souree area and attainment
of base level.

All attempts to find fossil material in the Tirari Formation have
so far failed,

Pleistocene
Katipiri Sands

Stratigraphy—Overlying the Tirari Formation at all three
localities are stream channel and floodplain deposits which we have
grouped together as a single formation, the Katipiri Sands. It is
quite possible that some of these ocenrrences do not belong to the same
eycle of deposition. We have evidence that they are not the same age
everywhere yet at our present state of knowledge it is not possible to
distinguish subunits on any consistent lithologieal gronnds. Ultimately
it may be possible to separate this complex of fluviatile deposits into
two or more distinct units as future investigations reveal sections in
which the superpositional relationships of units and their faunal
assemblages can be established,

STIRTON aNp oTHERS—CENOZOIC. STRATIGRAPHY 41

The Katipiri Sands rest disconformably on the Tirari Formation
ai the type locality, Katipiri waterhole on Cooper Creek, approxi-
mately 24 miles northwest of Lake Palankarinna, These stream
channel deposits are dominantly arenaceous, consisting for the most
part of conspicnously cross-bedded quartz sands. At the base these
sands are poorly sorted, stained red, orange or yellow with limonite,
and enclose duricrust, black chert and limestone pebbles, clayballs,
ferruginous sandstone econeretions, casts of small logs, and frag-
mentary vertebrate remains which are frequently abraded. ‘Toward
the top of the type section the sands are buff or white, better sorted,
and finer grained, Gray arenaceous clay lenses and platy, spheroidal
and pipey gypsum cemented sandstone concretions are common
throughout (see Appendix A).

At the type locality the Katipiri Sands are overlain and deeply
channelled by later flnviatile deposits described below. The Kattpiri
Sands contain the youngest fossil vertebrate fanna so far recognized
in this part of the Lake Eyre Basin. This fauna inclndes the genus
Diprotodon,

Post-Tirari Formation channel and floodplain deposits also occur
at Lake Kauonka, Lake Pitikanta, Lake Ngapakaldi and Lake
Palankarinna far from the present channel of Cooper Creek. At these
localities they represent the youngest pre-sandridge formations, for
they are directly overlain by the sandridge deposits.

The oceurrence at Lake Kanunka is particularly significant, for
fossil vertebrate materials taken from the Katipiri Sands at Lake
Kannnka appear to represent an assemblage somewhat older than that
from the type section. This is called the Kanunka fauna which
apparently did not imelude Diprotodon although other smaller dipro-
todontids were present.

At Lake Kanunka these floodplain and stream channel deposits lic
disconformably on the Tirari Formation. They vary from less than
10 to nearly 20 feet in thickness in the deeper channels where they
have ent through the Tirari Formation to the top of the Ktadanna
Formation. In gross lithology they are identical with the type
Katipiri Sands (see Appendix A).

At Lake Palankarinna up to 20 feet of floodplain and stream
channel deposits rest disconformably on the Tirari Formation and
in places cut through if to the top of the Ktadunna Formation, In
eross lithology these deposits are much like the type Katipiri Sands
except for a somewhat greater prevalence of gray arenaceous clay
lenses (see Appendix A). A lower jaw and part of the upper dentition

42 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of Diprotodon has been taken from these deposits suggesting that they
may be abont the same age as the Katipiri Sands at the type locality.

The sudden appearance of the Katipiri sandsheets in the Lake
Eyre Basin may be the result of important uplifts in source areas
probably within the margins of the basin in latest Cenozoic time.
Larger clasts in the stream channel deposits were all derived from
durierusted Mesozoic and early Tertiary rocks or from the Etadunna
and later formations,

Paleontology.—tThe oldest vertebrate fauna so far collected from
the Katipiri Sands is known from a single locality at Lake Kanunka
(U.C.M.P, locality V 5772). This may have been the locality discovered
by Debney. Here the Katipiri stream channel has cut through the
Tirari Formation to the top of the Etadunna Formation. The base
of this deep (16ft.) channel has yielded generally fragmentary, but
well preserved, bones and teeth and a few more complete jaws and
limb-bones of vertebrates, This assemblage will be known as the
Kanunka fauna.

KANUNKA FAUNA (?TEARLY PLEISTOCENE)

AnTHROPODA
Crusracea; Drcaropa: The fossils of crayfish are much more numerous
at this locality than in the late Pleistocene Malkuni materials. There
are 22 gastrolith nodules, 10 terminal parts of pinchers, and some
associated elements of an exoskeleton,

OsTERICHTHYES
Drenot:

Ceratopontipan: The lungfishes of the genus Epiceratodus are
represented by 17 teeth. Superficially they look much like the ones
from the Malkuni fauna deseribed by White (1925),

Tetnoster: Teleost bones are as plentiful and apparently represent
a fish fauna as diversified as that of the Malkuni,

Repriia

Cnuetonta: Parts of carpaces of a large chelonian and limb hones of
a small form are indicative of at least two kinds in this fauna.

SquaMAaTA:

Varanmaz: One tooth somewhat ovate in cross-section and with
serrate edges like those in the giant megalanid seems clearly referable
to this family,

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 43

Crocopmia; Seventy-two teeth, 5 vertebrae, a dermal seute, and
parts of two mandibles have been collected. The teeth range in size
from very large to very small, At least we can say that crocodilians
were as abundant in the Kanunka fauna as in the Malkuni.

AVES

It is estimated that a total of eight species will be recognized
among the 48 specimens now at hand from this fauna when adequate
Recent skeletons are available for comparison. Those tentatively
identified are:

CASUARIIFORMES :

DromorntrHipan; There are four parts of bones from a large
dromornithous bird that appear to belong to the genus Genyornis but
are smaller than the late Pleistocene G. newtont.

PLECANIFORMES:

PHALACROCORACIDAE: There are two species of the genus Phalacro-
corax (cormorants), These bones are small and medium-sized and as
such are the counterparts o! two of the species in the modern fauna,
but they may prove to be specifically distinct. About one-sixth of the
bird bones in the Kanunka fauna belong to cormorants,

ANSERIFORMES!

Awaripan: One bone of the genus Anas (duck) is comparable in
size to the American shoveler, Four other specimens belong to
Cygnus (swan), It will require more detailed comparisons than those
possible to make now to evaluate the specific affinities of these fossils.

MaM™Matia
Ropenti ;
Mvuripan: One upper incisor in this collection represents the oldest
rodent thus far known from the Australasian Region.

Marsurraia:

Dasvurmar: There are parts of two individuals of a dasyurid
that is larger than Dasyurops but smaller than Thylacinus or
Sarcophilus. One specimen is a right maxilla showing alveoli of M?
and M', and the paraconal-parastylar crest of M*. The other is also
part of a right maxilla displaying inner roots broken off and parts of
the alveoli of the outer roots of M? and M®, as well as parts of the
alveoli for the roots of M’?, The paraconid-parastylid alveolar shear
of M* (the only part of any of the teeth preserved) is narrow and

44 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

shaped like that in Dasyurops and Dasyuwrus; it is not as thick as in
Thylacinus or Sarcophilus nor is it shaped hike them, The animal
appears also to have been smaller than Glaucodon ballwratensis Stirton
(1957b). It seems then to have been a large dasyurid most closely
related to Dasyurus and Dasyurops.

THYLACOLEONIDan: The oldest known fossil referable to this family
is a M' in the Kanunka fauna. It probably belongs to the genus
Thylacoleo, but a generic identification must await the discovery of
more complete materials,

Vompatipan; Two upper molars represent this family. One is
apparently referable to the gigantic extinct genus Phascolonus, The
other is much smaller and probably belongs to one of the Recent
genera,

Macropopipar}

Pororotnar: ‘The rat-kangaroos are represented by part of a
right maxilla with M* in place and by a nearly complete right
mandible with the incisor broken off. hese are clearly referable to
the genus Bettongia,

?Subfamily: An upper P* and a M® appear to indicate a new
genus, The M* is low crowned bunt not bimodont as in Propleopus nor
like that in the Potoroinac. The pattern of the molar and the very
much compressed anterior cingular shelf is much like that in Setonia,
but tle Fossil belongs to an animal much larger than the quokka. Its
size seems to be comparable to that of the larger wallabies. It appears
to be closely related to part of a mandible in the Malkuni fanna, and
possibly it falls in the same subfamily as a mandible in the
Palankarinna fauna.

Macroropryan: Part of a right mandible with Mie in place and
an My erupting, and also an isolated upper molar are possibly referable
to the genus Lagorechestes. The teeth are somewhat larger than in L.
conspicillatus, but the pattern of the teeth is much like that of the
Recent species.

Another genus and species is known from an excellent left
mandible and several isolated cheek teeth. This animal was as large
as Protemnodon, There are several outstanding diagnostic features
in this material. It appears to be related to ‘‘Sthenurus’’ minor Owen
(1877) and to *7Talmaturus”’ vinceus De Vis (1895), but the Kanunka
form is larger and differs in certain details in the teeth.

STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 45

There is part of a left mandible in which P2, DPs, and Ms have
the crowns broken off, Ma is well preserved, and Ms is erupting. This
is a wallabylike macropodid but the molars are wider in relation to
their length than in Wallabia. It is comparable in size to the larger
species of that genus. We have not been able to determine its relation-
shitps from this specimen.

Part of a lower jaw, four lower molars, oue upper molar, a P*,
a lower incisor, and a IV metatarsal with composite phalanges, all
may or may not belong to another species in this fauna. he animals
appear to have been smaller than Prionvtemnus palankarinnicns and
certainly larger than the largest known Wallabia, The proportions of
the molars are intermediate between Prionolemnus and Wallabia, The
P* ig more like that in Prionotemnus than Wallabia but the lingual
longitudinal basin is larger and the intermediate ribs ure not as
prominent, and apparently there are two instead of three ribs as in
Prionotemmus. On the other hand the construction of the proximal
end of metatarsal TV resembles that in Wallabia, Perhaps more and
better preserved specimens will clarify this problem,

An excellent left mandible and several isolated teeth are clearly
referable to the genus Protemnodon, These specimens display several
characters that distinguish them from the six types and referred
specimens of the species from the Davling Downs and Wellington
Caves proposed by Owen, Another Protemnodon lower molar in the
Kauunka assemblage is much larger than those, from the same locality,
mentioned ahove,

Two isolated upper molars with high lophs are in many ways
suggestive of Megaleia rufa, but the Kanunka animal was considerably
larger than the red kangaroo.

Sraunvrinan: Part of a right maxilla with a well preserved M?,
the alveolus for M', and the posterior half of the alveolus for P*
(which appears to have been wider than M? or M®) evidently is related
to Sthenurus. The posterolabial corner of a very young left P* and
the unworn hypholophid of a right molar (possibly M*) are also
referred to this form,

Family Incertae sedis: There is one molar (M*) that cannot be
allocated to a family. It bears a marked resemblance to those in the
small diprotodontids in the Ngapakaldi fauna although if is larger.
The tooth differs from Palarehestes and agrees with the Ngapakaldi
form in a minimum development of the midlink, The relationships of
this form cannot be determined until more complete specimens are
found,

46 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

Dirnoropontipar: Conspicuous by its absence in this fauna is any
specimen the size of Dipretodon, There is, however, an unworn left
M‘ that displays characters like those in Euowenia. Two other molar
fragments, a heavily worn I', three median phalanges and a distal
phalanx, may also be referable to this form,

Fossil vertebrate remaing were collected im situ in the Katipiri
Sands at the type locality and farther down Cooper Creek, but the
bulk of the collection was obtained on sandbars within the main channel
of Cooper Creek where the [ossil material had been transported during
infrequent floods. As neither the subjacent Tirari Formation or super-
jJacent Auviatile deposits are fossiliferous, it seems most likely that
these redeposited specimens were washed out, of the basal part of the
Katipiri Sands which are exposed at or near the bed of the Cooper
Creek channel in this area,

Fossil vertebrate remains from the bars of Cooper Creek were
known to the Dieri, an aboriginal tribe inhabiting the area, who had
legends to explain their origin (Gregory, 1906, pp. 3-4). One of the
first collections from this area to reach scientific circles was made by
Henry Yorke Lyell Brown as Government Geologist for South Aus-
tralia during the later part of the last century. Some of Brown’s
original materials are now housed in the South Australian Museum,
Adelaide, These discoveries were followed up in 1901-2 ly
J. W, Gregory who made an extensive collection from several localities
along the lower course of Cooper Creek from the Malkuni waterhole
westward for some 10 miles. Only the lungfish (White, 1925) and
birds (De Vis, 1906) from this collection have been deseribed. The
mammalian remains were not described and their whereabouts are
presently unknown,

All the material from lower Cooper Creek of undoubted or highly
probable provenance in the Katipiri Sands ig considered as the
Malkumi® fauna. For the most part the material is fragmentary,
consisting of broken limh-hones, isolated teeth and parts of jaws, but
some more complete material is known, Such fossil reniains have been
secured by our party from the Unkumilka waterhole, 10 miles north-
west of Lake Palankarinna, downstream to within 16 miles of Lake
Eyre North, The best collections, however, came from near or below
the Malkuni, Katipiri and Buljutu waterholes. The Malkuni fauna
includes the following vertebrates:

4) Brom a prominent waterhole on Caoper Creek 1 mile enst of Eatipiri waterhole, Valuable
vertebrate material was obtained mostly aa float but cecasionally im situ from
exposures of the Kutipiri Bands in the bed and walls of the main channel of Cooper
Jraek immediately downstreain from this wuterhole, J. W. Gregory also collected at
this locality (1906, pp. 80-81).

STIRTON AND OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY ai

MALEKUNI FAUNA (LATE PLEISTOCENE)

ARTHROPODA
CrustTaceta:

Decaropa: Part of a pinchers and three discoidal calcareous
nodules sometimes called ‘‘gastroliths’’ or ‘“‘crab’s eyes’’ that are
formed in the cardiac part of the stomach of crayfish have been found
in this fauna,

OstTEICHTHYES
Dienor:

Cpraropontipar: In 1925 KMrrol I. White described two species of
lungfish of this fauna. The specimens were collected during the
expedition of Professor John Walter Gregory for the University of
Melbourne. These species, Epiceratodus eyrensis and #, gregory, are
based on palatine teeth. The types are in the University of Glasgow
collections, and paratypes are in the British Museum (Natural
History). We have 11 additional specimens from Cooper Creek.

Tubrosrer: The isolated bones of teleosts are abundant. Evidently
they represent numerous genera and species.

Reprimia

CHxtonra; There are pieces of the carapaces, plastrons, and some
limb bones,

Crocopmuta: Numerous teeth, dermal scutes, and some skull parts
demonstrate the presence of numerous crocodilians in these deposits.
Some of these creatures were of enormous size.

Lacerta: Parts of vertebra and a large claw are comparable in
size to the remains that have been described from the Pleistocene of
Australia as Varanus (Megalania) priseus, Charles Anderson (1930,
p. 315) estimated this largest known lizard to be 15 to 17 feet long.

AVES

Bird bones are abundant in the Malkuni fauna. We have nearly
100 specimens, It is estimated that when the identification of herons,
shorebirds and the remains of miscellaneous other groups have been
completed, a bird fauna of at least 20 species will be recognized. Many
species probably will be slightly or not at all distinguishable from the
modern species but may reflect changes in distribution or ecologic con-
ditions. Most of De Vis’ (1906) three new genera and 17 new species
described from the materials collected by the J. W. Gregory expedition
of 1901 along Cooper Creek and the Warburton River will probably

48 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

prove to be synonymous with modern species. Classification of these
birds will require a careful statistical analysis utilizing series of the
living species.
CASUARIIFORMES:

Dromorniroian: Ten bones of a large bird of the size of
Genyornis have been recovered,

PELECANIFORMES :

PHaLacrocoracipAn: The genus Phalacrocoraaz (cormorants) is
represented by birds of three sizes comparable to three modern species
of South Australia. There are 19 bones of the large form, 26 bones
of medium size, and four are small. The large cormorant has not been
recognized in the Kanunka fauna and consequently may have appeared
in this area since the early Pleistocene. These materials should afford
an opportunity to derive information on alterations in the distribution
of the five living species of Australasian cormorants and they may
contribute to our knowledge of the ecology, fresh water versus marine,
of these birds.

CIcONUFORMES:

THRESKIORNITHIDAR: A distal end of a tibiotarsus represents a
spoonhill of the genus Platalea, At present we cannot indicate whether
it is closest to Platalea regia or Platalea (Platibis) flavipes among the
modern species because of lack of modern comparative material.

ANSERIFORMES:

Awatmar: Two species of large ducks (Anas) are known from
two or three bones each. Another very small duck (Anas) may be a
teal. Other specimens may belong to a goose, the genus of which has
not yet been determined.

F'an.conirorMEs :
Accreirrmar: <A tarsometatarsus of an eagle of the genus
Uroaétus has been identified.

GRUIFORMES:

Gruipan: A carpometacarpus of a crane of the genus Grus is not
surely identical with the modern Grus yubicundus. It may represent
a smaller species.

SvrRIGIFORMES :

Srricmar: An excellently preserved tarsometatarsus should throw
some light on the history of the Australasian endemics of this small
family that comprises the barn owls.

STIRTON anv OTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 49

MamMatia
Ropew tia:

Moripar: There are 4 maxillaries, 4 lower jaws, and one upper
incisor of Rattws and one mandible, one maxillary, and one upper
incisor apparently of Notomys from the Cannatalkaninna locality, all
of which are fragmentary, None of the larger mammals so common
in the Malkuni fauna farther down Cooper Creek was found in this
locality. Consequently the fossils from this locality may be a some-
what later assemblage, although these murid genera have been found
with the large extinct marsupials elsewhere; they have not yet been
discovered in the Malkuni assemblages,

MaRSuPIALtA ;

Dasyurmarn: Several genera must have been present in this area
at the time the Malkuni fauna was extant, but the only fossils recorded
are a premaxillary fragment without teeth and a lower jaw both
representing Sarcophilus sp. The latter is part of the Henry Yorke
Lyell Brown collection in the South Australian Museum,

Peatanatimpan: Of this large family only a right lower jaw of a
bushy-tailed opossum, Jrichosurus, is represented in the Malkuni
fauna.

Vomeatipan: There are 4 cheek teeth and a metapodial of the
eiant wombat Phascolonus,

Macropopipan: As in the Kanunka fauna, specimens of kangaroos
are by far the most abundant fossils in the Malkumi collection, The
numerous limb hones, foot bones and vertebra cannot as yet be
accirately identified to genus. There are, however, some jaws, teeth,
and limb and foot bones from which genera ean be recognized.

Porororman: One left mandible with well worn teeth apparently is
referable to Bettongia lesueurt, Other limb and foot bones may also
belong to this species.

Subfamily: This group of macropodids is represented by part of
the right mandible of a medium-sized macropodid, with the protolophid
of Ma, Ms complete and part of the hypolophid of Mz. The teeth are
low erowned but not bunodont nor are they like those in the
Hypsiprynmodontinae or Potoroinae. The pattern of the molars and
the much reduced anterior cingulum shelf is like that in Setonia. Tt
is possible that this specimen belongs to the Kanunka fanna arid was
reworked from the older Katipiri channel deposits directly into
Cooper Creek (see Kannnka faunal list). Of course it could have lived
until late Pleistocene time,

50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Macrorovinan: Several specimens representing different parts of
the mandibles, teeth, and five or more fourth metatarsals are referable
to Protemnadon. The best specimen, a left mandible, is in the size
range of Protemnodon og Owen, and otherwise agrees with the late
Pleistocene specimens from the Darling Downs and elsewhere. Five
or more metatarsals also helong to Protemnodon.

A small specics of ¢Wallabia is represented by parts of two
mandibles, One is a young specimen and the other is from an old
animal with heavily worn teeth. One large lower molar belongs to
Macrapus ef. ferragus.

Sragnurinan; The genus Sthenurus is represented by five
fragmentary mandibles and onmerous limb bones, Two species seem
to be present both of which are undeseribed. They both appear to be
more closely related to the long-jawed S. atlas than to the short-faced
group represented by 8, occidentalis, One is about the size of S. atlas
but differs signifleantly in height of crown and morphology of the
lower molars, The second spécies is a larger, loung-jawed form with
higher-crowned teeth, It is considerably larger than S. atlas, but
otherwise it is similar in dental morphology. The lack of associated
material makes if impossible to assigu the linh hones to any of the
species represented by dentitions.

Procoplodon is kuown from part of a maxilla with the teeth broken
off, The species represented is apparently closely related to P, goliah.
Several broken limb and foot bones also belong to this genus.

Drrroroponipak: Numerous teeth, part of one mandible, and limb
and foot bones seem to be clearly referable to the genus Diprotodon,
Both large and small animals are represented, although some of the
smallest bones possibly belong to Nototheriuwm or Enowenia, but this is
not demonstrable with the comparative materials we have at hand.

Quaternary—Recent

Away from the present channel of Gooper Creek the Katipiri
Sands are directly overlain by aeolian sands of the Tirari Desert
sandridge systeni, King (1960) has recently attempted to show that
these aeolian deposits are for the most part wind rift dunes, aeolian
sandeapped erosional remnants flanking linear wind scoured channels
ent into the latest Cenozoic fluviatile sandsheets. His suggestion,
althoneh limited to ground observations at the south end of Lake
Kyre North, seems to be corroborated in the area under study because
the local saltpans are clearly of deflation origin eut deeply into the

STIRTON AND oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY §1

Cenozoic deposits. The present topography, as King believes, is
probably of latest Quaternary or Recent age.

Post-Katipiri fluviatile deposits are found only along the present
channel of Cooper Creek. At the Katipiri waterhole 17 feet of large
seale cross-hedded gray to gray-brown argillaceous sands diseonform-
ably overly the Katipiri Sands in places, cutting through the latter
to the top of the Tirari Formation (see Appendix A), These fluviatile
deposits are also found at the Malkuni waterhole and they continue
downstream beyond the Katipiri waterhole where they are consistently
disconformably above the Katipiri Sands. ‘They are unfossiliferous
and were not studied in snfficient detail to warrant introduction of a
stratigraphic name at this time. These deposits clearly predate the
formation of the wind rift dunes for they are capped by the sand-
ridge accumulations (see Katipiri waterhole section, Appendix A).

APPENDIX A
DESCRIPTIONS OF MEASURED STRATIGRAPHIC SECTIONS
A. Lake Palankarinna. In ascending order:
Winton Formation
Gray argdlaceous sandstone—Poorly sorted, fine grained, sub-
angular quartz sand in mottled purple-gray, buff and white argillaccous

matrix, Abundant ptpey and botryoidal limonite cemented and silica
cemented sandstone concretions .. ,, .. .. .. 2... 2. .. 13ft.

ItvapUNNa Furmarion (Type locality)

1. Green argillaceous sandstone.—Poorly sorted, fine grained, sub-
angular quartz sand in light green argillaceous matrix, darker in
colour toward top and bottom. Lentiewlar horizons of limonite stained
sandstone, Local concentrations of siliceous nodules cemented with
limonite at base, but no persistent basal conglomerate . .. .. .. 8ft.

2. Calcarcous mudstone and dolomitiv limestone—

(a) Caleareous mudstone.—Buif to white calcareous mudstone
with scattered fine-grained, subangular quartz sand. Branching
vesicular structures toward top, Limonite and toaingenneh stain on
joint surfaces and walls of vesicles .. .. .. ey me. ee cet

(b) Gray arenaceous claystone—Gray-green oliystoné with
scattered fine-grained, subangular quartz sand. Base an intra-
formational breecia of subangular pebble-sized fragments of under-
lying caleareous mudstone .. .. 1. ek ee ee ee ee ee ce we we VEE.

52 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(c) Caleareous mudstone—White calcareous mudstone resting
sharply on the underlying clay, Containing scattered fine-grained
quartz sand 2.4) cs 90 cs 4d Ge ve “3 Ae 9 the 9 wwite, ok be

(d) Gray arenaceous claystone. Fase intrafornintional breecia
composed of pebble-sized subangular fragments of BEADS IOE cal-
careoug mudstone 2... 2. kk ec ee ee ee ee te ee ee ee TEE

(e) Caleareous mudstone and dolormitic limestone.—Limonite
stained yellow to white caleareous mudstone with limestone nodules at
base passing into massive limestone with chert nodules. Uppermoat
five feet allernating calcareous mudstone and thin dense limestone
beds, Scattered fine-grained quartz throughout. Dendritic patch
manganons stain and dissendmated granules throughout. Caleareaus
mudstone at base and top with gastropods, ostracods and Chara ,, 24ft.

3. Green claystone.—Pale green clay with scattered fine-grained
quartz sand. Tntraformational breccia at base composed of subangular
to subrounded fragments of underlying calcareons mudstone in green
clay matrix. Small branching vesicular structures abundant. Walls
of vesi¢les couled with manganous granules and limonite, Passes
transitionally at top into member 4 with increase in arenaceous
component, Fossiliferous (U.C.M.P, locality V 5764) .. .. .. 2-5ft.

4, Green sandstone—Pale green, well sorted, fine-grained quartz
sand with lenses of green argillaceous saridatone, Fossiliferous
(U,C.M.P, locality V 5762) 2. 6. ee ce ce ee ee ee ee Debt,

5. Green arenaceous claystone.—Rests with marked contrast on
member 4, Pale green claystone rich in fine-grained quartz sand.
Branching vesicular structures as in member 3 with manganous
eranules lining cavities 2. 20 ce ee ee ee ee ee ee BAPE

6. Green argillaceous Saristhne — Pala green, well sorted, fine-
grained quartz sand, Tndividual grains subangular to snbrounded,
Green argillaceous lenses throughout, passing transitionally to member
7 with increase in dark gray argillaceons lenses at top. Fossiliferous
(U.C.M,P. localities V 5875, V 5763, and V 5765) .. .. .. 2... Oft

7, Green claystone—Dark gray at base, gray-green at top with
scattered fine grained quartz sand throughout, Fossiliferons (U.C.M.P.
locality V S770) 2. 6. ee ee niet DEAS of TP os ap nue ots MBE

8. Calcareous mudstone—

(a) Calcareons mudstone.—White caleareous mudstone with
seattered fine grained quartz sand. Small branching vesicles through-
out. Manganous stain on vesicle walls and joint planes .. .. .. 2-3ft.

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 33

(b) Green arenaceous claystone—Pale green claystone rich in
subangular to subrounded, medium to fine-grained quartz sand .. Ift,

(c) Caleareous sandstone-—White, well sorted, fme grained, sub-
angular to subrounded quartz sand with 20-30% spherical or rod-
shaped fine- praise Piegeucanty of limestone, Fossiliferous (v. C.MLP,
locality V 5771) . 1 ovttnes! tat ce wht ‘eid eS jefe ole Lote! olf bee bee [ala SLE

(d) Green elaystone.—Pale green silty claystone with tiny beanie
ing vesicles. Walls of vesicles carry manganous stain ,, .. ,. O-1ft,

(ec) Caleareous mudstone.—White calcareous silty mudstone with
manganous dendrites, patch stain, and scattered small manganous
Modules 2 6 3 Se i Be we et Se eae i aS,

9. Green arenaceous claystone—Base with gray-green clayatone
with seattered fine-grained quartz sand, passing into more arenaceous
gray claystone with lenses of the fine-grained quartz sand. Upper 2ft.
brighter gray-green highly arenaccous clay. Uppermost 6in, black
arenaceous clay. Limonite stain and nodules, manganous stain and
granules throu ehout. Mossiliferous at base NE U.C.M, Pp. localities V 5755
and V 5778) . Be wie i ot WR

Unconformity
Mamrcworpu Sanps (Type locality)

Channel sands —Basal 1-6ft, white, cross-bedded, well-sorted,
medium-vrained, subangular to subronnded quartz sand with scattered
pebbles (duricrust, hmestone and milky quartz), green and black elay-
balls and thin gray and green clay lenses, Upper part of unit more
argillaceous, gray sandy shale with fine quartz sand lenses. Limonite
stain thronghout. Gypsum concretions occur in the satds and selenite
along the joints and bedding planes. Fossiliferous aft base (U.C.MLP.
localities V 5867 and V 5769) .2 .. wee ee a ee ee we ee ee O-16FE,

Disconformity (probable angular unconformity)
Trart Formation (Type locality)

Red argillaceous sandstone—Basal few feet of mottled green and
red or buff and red, eross-bedded, poorly sorted, mediam to fine-
grained quartz sand with seattered coarse quartz grains and pebbles
of milky quartz, duricrust pebbles, and lenses of red or green
arenaceous elaystone, Quartz grains subangular to subrounded with
larger grains appearing frosted, Loeally 1ft, bed white to buff, eross-
bedded, better sorted fine-grained, subangular to subrounded quartz
sand 3-4ft. above base of formation, Six to 13ft. above base formation

54 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

becomes more argillaceous; red arenaceous elaystone with sandy
lenses. Gypsum occurs throughout along bedding planes and fractures,
Uppermost 5-10ft, intergrown with selenite ‘ais NOPEG planes,
forming a massive caprock .. 2. 6. 6. ke ee ee ee . 0-38ft.

Disconformity (angular unconformity on Etadumna formation)
Katretrr Sanps

Base locally with 3-4 inch selenite sheet along contact with under-
lying rocks. Lower part of unit consists of lenses of yellow, cross-
bedded; subangnlar to subrounded, coarse-grained, quartz sand with
seattered gray clayballs; and durier nist pebbles interbedded with lenses
of arenaceous gray clay, Several feet above base formation consists
of eross-bedded, well sorted, medium-grained, quartz sand with gray
clay lenses on cross-laminae. Increasing argillaceous component with

gray arenaceous claystone at top. Upper few feet highly infiltrated
with gypsum forming caprock.

Limonite stain common; gypsum abundant throughout; gypsum
rosettes and sandstone concretions in lower part of formation. Most
fossils near the base (U.C.M.P. locality V 5854) .. .. ., .. 0-20ft.

Diseonformity
Wind rift dunes.
B, Lake Kanunka. In ascending order:

Hranunya Formation (base not exposed)

1. Green claystone—Pale green claystone with seattered fine-
grained quartz sand and silt; shows branching vesicular structures;
darker green at top. Fossiliferous (U.C.M.P. locality V 5855) .. + 5ft.

2. Caleareous mudstore—White dolomitic ealearcous mndstone
with pale green elaystone fragments at base. Locally 1-2ft. thick silty
horizon ft. above base otherwise arenaceous material scattered
through argillacconus matrix. Manganous dendrites, granules and
patch stain throughont .. 2. 2. 6. 2. ek et ee ee ee ee ew. BEE

3. Green to qray arenaceous claystone.—At base intraformational
breccia of subangular white caleareous mudstone fragments in dark
gray argillaceous matrix. Calcareous fragments smaller and better
rounded above passing to uniformly gray claystone rich in fine grained
quartz sand and silt 2ft. from base. Three feet from base gray-green
arenaceons claystone with waterworn fish and reptile remains. Member
becomes yellow green at top with limonite stain... .. .. .. .. 6-16ft,

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 34

Disconformity
Timart Formation

Red arenaceous claystone—Red claystone with abundant poorly
sorted, subangular to subrounded, fine to medium-grained quartz sand
interbedded with lenses of purer red eclaystone, Unpprinaet 4ft.
mottled red and green sandy claystone .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. O-12ft.
Disconformity
Katiretar Saxnvs

Channel and floodplain sands—Lower portion of formation
limonite stained, cross-bedded, course and medium-grained quartz sand
with pebbles of duricrust und limestone; abundant green and red clay
balls, clay plates showing remnant polygonal outline, argillaceous
lenses, coprolites, and abraded remains of fish, reptiles, birds and
mammals. Four to five feet above base the quartz sands are white,
better sorted, medium to fine-grained and with red argillaceons lenses
and occasional vertebrate remains. Gypsum cemented spheroidal and
pipey sandstone concretions oceur throughout. Base of channel above

contact with Ktadunna Formation locally cemented with selenite.
Fossiliferous (U.C.M.P. localities V 5772 and V 5773) .. .. .. 6-16ft.

Disconformity
Wind rift dunes.

©. Lake Pitikanta, In ascending order:

Hrapunna Formation (base not exposed)

1. Caleareous mudstone—White dolomitic calcareous mudstone
with scattered fine-grained quartz sand and silt, manganous stain and
PTOTIMION’ ss. n6 pe ee oe th ee! ah ge eee fa te . + 6ft.

2. Green claystone. ~tabratoin ational breecia at bene, pares
pebbles of underlying ealeareous mudstone in green claystone matrix.
Lighter green in colour above with scattered fine-grained qnartz sand
and silt, and branching vesicular structures. Manganous stain and
granule line cavities. Fossil vertebrates from top of this unit;
articulated skeletal remains may project into the base of the overlying
caleareous mndstone (U.C.M.P. localities V 5774, V 5856 and
WH BOT) oe nce fa et te eee ore eb ew . he rnp ade. ARE

3. Calcareous mudstone.-White “dolomitic “athaneete: mudstone,
nodular at base, lenses and clayballs of green claystone above.
Scattered fine-grained quartz sand and silt and manganous stain and
granules throughout .. .. 2. 2. 6. 6. ee ce ee ee ee ee ee BBE.

56 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

4, Arenaceous claystone—Base an intraformational breccia,
angular to subangular fragments of white calcareous mudstone in black
arenaceous claystone passing to scattered subrounded calcareous mud-
stone pebbles in black arenaceous claystone matrix 21t. above base.
Above 2ft. gray-green arenaceous mudstone with locally abundant
abraded fish and reptile remains. Mottled red and green at top due
to infiltration of fractures by red Tirari sands... ,........ .. 3-5ft.

Disconformity
Tirant Formation

Red arenaceous claystone.—Base locally with 1-2in. poorly sorted,
medium to coarse-grained quartz sand with coarse grains of duricrust
and ironstone. Arenaceous component finer grained toward top.
Formation dominantly a red claystone, but occasionally mottled green,
with seattered manganous stain throughout .......... .. .. 5-14ft.

Disconformity
Karrerrt Sanps

Floodplain and channel sands—At base eross-hedded, poorly-
sorted, subangular to subrounded, fine to medinm-grained quartz sand
with clayballs, argillaceous lenses, and pipey gypsum cemented sand-
stone concretions, Toward top sands are finer grained and better
sorted, with green and red claystone lenses. Limonite stain
ChPONROUG- se as ag ele Pace Hh he Pe ot coo) ews Te 93 Bett,

Disconformity
Wind rift dunes.

D. Lake Ngapakaldi. In ascending order:
Erapunna Formation (hase not exposed)

1. Green claystune—Gray-green to green claystone with scattered
fine-grained quartz sand and silt. Branching vesicles throughout.
Walls of vesicles encrusted with limonite and tiny manganous granules,
Fossil mammal remains at top (U.C.M.P. loeality V 5858) _. .. + 3ft.

2. Calcareous mudstone—White dolomitie caleareous mudstone
with scattered fine-grained quartz sand and silt; manganous stain on
joint surface. Occasional fossil mammal remains at base . .. .. 2ft.

3. Green claystone—At base intraformational breccia, fragments
of gray caleareous mudstone in green clay matrix. Limonite stained
green claystone above .. 6... 6. ee ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee Hf OFF.

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 57

4. Arenaceous claystone—At base of exposure green arenaceous
claystone with red claystone lenses passing to more aeminanly red
arenaceous claystone 1- ‘2ft. above base... .. .. -. -- - _ + 5.5ft,
| Covered interval]

5. White sandstone —White sei cha aie sand with green
and red claystone lenses .. -. Jo 4s en bd APE

6. Green claystone—Green sldyetons with ‘ghandant limonite stain,

inereasing in ferruginization toward top, One to two inch calcareous
shale stratum Bft. Prom idseen of se sa.+e eae ae ee bs 2g oe ABE

Disconformity
Trrarr Formation

Red siltstone—Red siltstone with considerable fine to medium-
grained quartz sand .. 6. 6. ve we ee we ee ee ee ee ee ee BFE

Disconformity
Karretrar SANDS

Floodplain sands—Buff, cross-bedded, fine- ne patie sand.
Gypsum cemented at base and upper 6ft. hy PQ te . + Tit.

Disconformity
Wind rift dunes.

fh). Katipiri waterhole, Cooper Creek. In ascending order:
Trrart Formation (base not exposed)

Arenaceous claystone-——Red and green mottled arenaceous clay-
stone becoming dominantly green at top. Lenticular 3in. band of
nodular calcareous claystone 1-3in. from top, Limonite and manganous
stain thronehout ¢: .: 4-3 cs pe ee ee ee ee te ee ee ee ee LEE

Disconformity
Katirrer Sanps (Type locality)

Channel sands.—Cross-bedded quartz sands. At base white, yellow
or orange (limonite stained) poorly sorted, subangular to subrounded,
fine to medium-grained quartz sand with coarser sand and pebbles of
duricrust, black chert and silicified limestone. Clayballs, ferruginous
sandstone concretions, ferruginous sandstone casts of logs and abraded
fossil fish, reptile, bird and mammal remains at base (U.C.M.P.
locality V 5861). Toward top sands better sorted, white to buff, fine-
grained, subangular to subrounded quartz sand. Gray arenaceous clay
lenses and platy, spheroidal and pipey gypsum cemented sandstone
concretions throughout .. 6. 2. 6. 2. ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee O-17FE.

58 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Disconformity
Unnamed unit.

Channel sands—Large seale cross-bedded, gray to gray-brown,
argillaceous sands, frequently at base a white, poorly sorted, fine to
medium-grained, subangular to subrounded quartz sand and gray more
argillaceous lenses, Above dominantly gray or gray-brown fine bedded
shale lenses with fine quartz sand on the shaly partings. Cuts to top
of Tirari formation at western end of Katipiri waterhole where
maximum thickness measured .. .. .. .. 0... ee ee we ee ee OTE.

Disconformity

Wisp Rirr Dune Deposits

1. Orange consolidated dune sands—Poorly sorted, medium to fine-
grained, subangular to subrounded quartz sands. Massive in appearance

with scattered small calcareous sandstone nodules .. .. .. .. + 10ft.

2. Buff dune sands.—Sands forming the existing sandridge system

and making up the crest of Katipiri Hill... .. .. 2... 4, .. = 20ft,
SUMMARY

The pancity of the fossil record of Anstralasian mammals
prompted the initiation of a series of explorations of the continental
Cenozoie deposits of the Lake Eyre Basin by the South Australian
Museum and the Museum of Paleontology of the University of
California. This paper presents the stratigraphic results and
preliminary identifications o! the fannas obtained from the middle and
later Cenozoic deposits of the Tirari Desert east of Lake Eyre North.

The Cenozoie section in this area begins with the Etadunna Forma-
tion (Stirton, 1955), nearly 100 feet of green lacustrine claystone, sand-
stone, calcareous mudstone and dolomitic limestone, resting uneon-
formably on duricrusted non-marine late Cretaceous rocks referred to
the Winton Formation. ‘The Etadunna Formation contains an
assemblage of gastropods, ostracodes, fish, reptiles, birds and
marsupials known as the Nyapakaldi fauna (new name). This fauna
may be Oligocene in age.

In one local area at Lake Palankarinna the Etadunna Formation
is overlain unconformably by thin stream channel deposits termed the
Mampuwordu Sands (new name). The base of the Mampuwordu
channels have yielded the Palankarinna fauna partially described by

STIRTON anp oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 59

Stirton (1955). This fauna is questionably assigned to the early
Pliocene,

Overlying the Mampuwordn Sands discontormably, or resting
directly on the Etadunna Formation with local angular unconformity,
are the unfossiliferous red-beds of the Tirari Formation (new name).
Locally the Tirari Formation may include nearly 40 feet of flat-lying
brick red argillaceous sandstone and arenaceous claystone, but usually
it is much thinner due to deep erosion prior to the deposition of the
overlying fluviatile deposits. The Tirari Formation is questionably
assigned a Pliocene age on the basis of its stratigraphic position.

Outting deeply into the 'Tirari Formation is a complex of fluviatile
deposits of varying thickness termed the Katipiri Sands (new name).
These deposits contain two faunas of probable Pleistocene age. The
fearly Pleistocene Kanunka fauna (new name) is represented by
remains of crustaceans, fish, reptiles, birds, marsupials and rodents as
is the later Pleistocene Malkwni fauna (new name).

These fossiliferous channel and flood plain sands are overlain
lovally by later fluviatile deposits or by the sandridge system of the
Tirari Desert.

LITERATURE CITED

Anderson, €., 1930: Metolania planiceps Owen and Varanus (Mega-
lania) priseus (Owen), Paleontological Notes No. I.
Records Aust. Mus., vol. 27, pp. 309-316, 5 pls.

1937: Fossil marsupials from New Guinea. Paleontological
Notes No. IV. Records Aust. Mus., vol. 20, pp. 73-76,
1 pl.

Debney, G. L., 1881; Notes on the physical and geological features
ahout Lake Hyre. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., vol. 4,
pp. 145-146,
1881; Sections of strata traversed in boring for water in the
country between Cooper Creek and Warburton River.
Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., vol. 4, pp. 147-148.

De Vis, ('. W., 1895: A review of the fossil jaws of the Macropodidae
in the Queensland Museum. Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S8.W.,
vol. 10, pp. 75-133. 5 pls.

1906; A contribution to the knowledge of the extinct avifauna
of Australia. Ann, Queensland Mus., No. 6, pp. 3-25,
9 pls.

60 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gill, E. D., 1957: The stratigraphical oceurrence and paleoecology of
some Australian Tertiary marsupials. Mem. Nat. Mus.
Vict., No. 21, pp. 185-203, 4 pls.

Glaessner, M. F., MeGowran, B., and Wade, M., 1960: Discovery of a
kangaroo bone in the middle Miocene of Victoria. Aust.
Jour. Sci., vol. 22, No, 12, pp. 484-485.

Gregory, J. W., 1906: The dead heart of Australia, John Murray,
London, p. VII-XVI, 384 pp., 30 illust., 4 maps.

King, D., 1956: The Quaternary stratigraphic record at Lake Eyre
North and the evolution of existing topographic forms.
Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., vol. 79, pp. 93-103, 4 figs. 5 pls.

1960: The sandridge deserts of South Australia and related
acolian land forms of the Quaternary arid cycles. Trans.
Roy, Soe. 8. Aust., vol. 83, pp. 99-108, 2 figs. 1 pl.

Madigan, C. T., 1945: The Simpson Desert expedition, 1939 scientific
reports; introduction, narrative, physiography and
meteorology. Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust., vol. 69, pp. 118-
159, 5 pls, 1 map.

1946: The Simpson Desert expedition, 1939. Scientific
reports: No. 6, geology—the sand formations. Trans.
Roy. Soc, S. Aust., vol. 70, pp. 45-63, 4 figs. 4 pls.

Owen, R., 1877: On a new species of Sthenurus, with remarks on the
relation of the genus to Dorcopsis, Miiller, Proe. Zool.
Soc. Lond., pp. 352-360, 1 fig. 2 pls.

Savage, D, E., 1955: Nonmarine lower Pliocene sediments in
California. A geochronologic-stratigraphic classification.
Univ. Calif, Publ, Geol. Sei., vol. 31, 26 p., 13 figs.

Spencer, B., 1900; A deseription of Wynyardia bassiana, a fossil
marsupial from the Tertiary beds of Table Cape,
Tasmania, Proc, Zool. Soe. Lond., pp. 776-794, 4 figs.
2 pls.

Sprige, R. C., 1958: The Great Artesian Basin in South Australia.
Chapter VII, The Geology of South Australia. Jour.
Geol. Soc. Aust., vol. 5, pp. 88-101, 3 figs.

Stirton, R, A,, 1936: Succession of North American continental
Pliocene mammalian faunas. Amer. Jour. Sci., vol. 32,
pp. 161-206.

STIRTON aNnD oTHERS—CENOZOIC STRATIGRAPHY 61

1940: The Nevada Miocene and Pliocene mammalian faunas
as faunal units. Proce. Sixth Pacific Sci. Congress, Pacific
Sci. Assoc., vol. 2, pp. 627-640.

1954: Digging Down Under. Pacific Discovery, vol. 7, No.
2, pp. 3-13, 28 figs.

1955: Late Tertiary marsupials from South Australia. Ree.
S, Aust. Mus., vol. 11, No. 3, pp. 247-268, 11 figs.

1957a: A new koala from the Pliocene Palankarinna fauna
of South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., vol. 13, No. 1,
pp. 73-81, 2 figs.
Tate, R., 1885: Post-Miocene climate in South Australia. Trans. Roy.
Soe. S. Aust., vol. 8, pp. 49-59.
White, E. 1., 1925: Two new fossil species of Epiceratodus from South
Australia. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., vol. 16, pp. 139-146,
2 pls.
Woods, J. T., 1956: The skull of Thylacoleo carnifex. Mem. Queens-
land Mus., vol. 13, pp. 125-140, 6 figs.
1958: The extinct marsupial genus Palorchestes. Mem.
Queensland Mus., vol, 13, pp. 177-193, 5 figs.
Wood Jones, F., 1930: A re-examination of the skeletal characters of
Wynyardia bassiana, an extinct Tasmanian marsupial.
Papers and Proc. Roy. Soc. Tasmania, pp. 96-115.

RE-EXAMINATION OF THE SPECIES OF PROTURA
DESCRIBED BY H. WOMERSLEY

By S. L. TUXEN, ZOOLOGICAL MUSEUM, COPENHAGEN, DENMARK

Summary

Within the framework of my re-examination of the species of Protura described prior to
1945 (and a few others), I have long felt the need to examine the species described by H.
Womersley. This author in 1924 first reported the finding of Protura in England with
specimens then determined as the well known species Acerentomon dodero1 Sily. Later
(1927-28) he described this material as a new species (A. bagnalli), together with six
other new species from the British Isles. Late in 1929 Womersley was appointed to the
Australian Council for Scientific and Industrial Research to work in Western Australia on
the Lucerne Flea and Red Earth Mite problem. On his way to Australia he spent some
weeks in the Cape Town region of South Africa on this problem and there collected a
species of Protura which he later described (1931). Since that time he has described eight
species and one subspecies from Australia and two species from the United States of
America.

RE-EXAMINATION OF THE SPECIES OF PROTURA DESCRIBED
BY H. WOMERSLEY

By 8. L. TUXEN, Zoontocican Museum, Copennacen, Denmark
Fig. 1-98

Within the framework of my re-examination of the species of
Protura described prior to 1945 (and a few others), I have long felt
the need to examine the species described by H. Womersley. This
author in 1924 first reported the finding of Protura in England with
specimens then determined as the well known species Acerentomon
doderoi Silv. Later (1927-28) he described this material as a new
species (A. bagnalli), together with six other new species from the
British Isles. Late in 1929 Womersley was appointed to the Australian
Council for Scientific and Industrial Research to work in Western
Australia on the Lucerne Flea and Red Marth Mite problem. On his
way to Australia he spent some weeks in the Cape Town region of
South Africa on this problem and there collected a species of Protura
which he later described (1931). Since that time he has described
eight species and one subspecies from Australia and two species from
the United States of America,

Through the kindness of Mr. Womersley and the Board and
Director of the South Australian Museum, Adelaide, I have been
privileged to borrow the whole of his collection of Protura, now in
the South Australian Museum, <A few species not present in this
eolleetion have been most kindly lent to me by Dr. A. J. Hesse of the
South African Museum, and Dr. Theresa Clay of the British Museum
(Nat. Hist.), London. To all these scientists and institutions I extend
my warmest thanks for their comprehending co-operation. The 18
species and one subspecies described by Womersley, including one
species renamed by Bonet, are the following:

, Bosentomon westraliense Wom. 1932,

. Eosentomon swani Worm, 1982.

. Hosentomon millsi Wom. 1938 from U.S.A.

. Eosentomon millsi Wom. 1939 from Australia = EF, womersleys
Bonet 1942.

5. Eosentomon millsi var. australica Wom. 1939.

m i hoe

64 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

6. Paraentomon clevedonense Wom, 1927.

7. Protyurentomon iowaense Wom. 1938.

8 Acerentomon bagnalli Wom. 1927.

9, Acerentomon nemorale Wom. 1927.

10. Acerentomon oblongum Wom. 1927,
11, Acerentomon metarhinus Wom. 1928.
12. deerentomon agrorum Wom, 1928.
13, Acerentomon pinus Wom, 1928,

14, Acerentulus capensis Wom. 1931.

15. Acerentulus westraliensis Wom, 1932.
16, Acerentulus australiensis Wom, 1932.
17, Acerentulus tillyarda Wom. 1932.

18. Acerentulus occidentalis Wom. 1932,
19. Acerentulus sexspinatus Wom, 1936.

These species will be dealt with in the above order and in
accordance with my earlier type of re-examination, i,e., with special
reference to the setae and sensillae on the foretarsus, the filamento di
sostegno and abdominal combs in the Acerentomidae, the female
squama venitalis and the third tarsus in the Hosentomidae, as well as
the chaetotaxy, although other characters will be considered where
necessary, ‘The numbering of the setae and sensillae follows my plan
from earlier papers (Tuxen 1956-60, Bonet and Tuxen 1960). All
figures are original.

Womersley marked several of his slides as ‘‘Type’’ but not, how-
ever, for all species and in several cases slides of the different stages
of a species were also similarly marked.

T have, therefore, disregarded this as a regular designation of a
holotype—in his papers no holotypes are designated—but have selected
a lectotype for each species preferably from amongst the slides marked
‘‘Type’’, Only in cases where the description is based on a single
individual has this been regarded as a holotype.

1, Eosentomon westraliense Womersley
Eosentomon westraliensis Womersley 1932 p. 73, fig. 4-6, 17-18,
Eosentomon westraliense Womersley 1939 p. 287, fig. 79 F-I,
Fig. 1-9.
This is the first Eosentomon described by Womersley and the
description was based on statements of length in » and on the

chaetotaxy. In 1939 the description was repeated almost word for
word, but the drawings were new. In his collection one slide of a male

TUXEN—PROTURA 65

from ‘(King’s Park, Perth, Western Australia, 21st April 1931”’ is
marked as ‘‘Type’’. I take this as a lectotype. ‘Cwo other slides are
marked ‘‘Paratype’’. One of these, a larva 2 from ‘‘Crawley, W.A.
10th October, 1931, D. C. Swan’? may be a paratype though it is not
mentioned in the first deseription; the other one, however, a female
from Glen Osmond, South Australia, 9th July 1933, cannot be a
paratype, being found after the publication of the original deseription,
I may, however, select it as a neo-allotype, because the shape of the
female genitalia is so important for the understanding of the species
of the genus Hosentomon.

The foretarsus, fig, 1-2, shows the following characteristics: t1
is slightly pointed, elongate oval, and set much nearer to «3 than to
a3’. The distal part from tl (termed d) is almost exactly equal to
the proximal part from tl (ealled p), so that dsp = 1.00", a is very
short, a’ long and exceeding the tip of tl, d is longer than t2,

Especially remarkable is the position of ¢’ quite near to b’l and
b’2; the tip of s is shortly club-shaped; the empodium is long in relation
to the claw, ratio e:u (empodium to unguis) = 0.9; TR (ratio claw to
tarsus) is stated by Womersley to be 6,0 but I am unable to make it
more than 5.0,

The shape of the head is given in fig, 3 drawn from the neo-
allotype. The psendoculi are very large, 1:6 of the head length, but
broader than shown in the figure, where they are seen in fore-
shortened view, The mouth parts (fig. 4) are very much like those of
E. wheeleri Silv. (Bonet and Tuxen 1960), The mandibles are striated
in the outermost part, and their tips are not smoothly rounded but
with three very small ‘‘teeth’’. There is a structure (hyp) which may
be the hypopharynx seen by Prell in 1913, but not by me in
Acerentomon (Tuxen 1959).

Tarsus III (fig. 5) with a very stout spine. The chaetotaxy
(fig. 6-7) is as follows, the pleural setae being included in the number
of tergal setae:

t $m wv VI va vm Ix x xI RII

4 10 10 8) 4) 8 6 + 2(4)
t g 7) 16 i6 i6 7 4 a 3 3.

4 6 6 6 6 8(")
6 4 ri 0 10 i0 7 ¢ 4 8 ry

(4) The importance of this ratio was stated by Bonct and Tuxen (1960 p. 27) for B. wheelari
Silv. Unfortunately by a slip the ratio was given as 8:7 = 1:15, It should read
7:8 — 0.88.

(2) 43? is missing; (8) /'1-37' are missing; (4) very small, almost points; (5) 6 long
and 2 small setae,

Bee

—-
Oolnm
OOtmm

Fig. 1-4, Zosentomon westraliense Wom. 1, exterior side foretarsus of lectotype g ; 2, interior
side of same; 3, contour of head of neo-allotype 9; 4, mouth-parts of lectotype ¢ —
ga, galea; hyp, thypopharynx; le 1 and 2, lacinia; mdb, mandible; pmx, maxillary
palpus,

) a0fman

0.05 mm

Fig. 5-8. Eosentomon westraliense Wom,.; Lectotype g. 5, right tarsus III; 6, abdominal
tergal chaetotaxy; 7, abdominal sternal chaetotaxy; 8, chaetotaxy of sixth abdominal
tergum with numbering of setae.

68 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The chaetotaxy does not entirely agree with the figures given by
Womersley 1932 and 1939, which also do not agree. It is, however,
identical in the type specimen (male) and the neo-allotype except for
an individual variation in the former; the posterior row on tergite III
shows 8 setae on the right side (shown in fig. 7 where the supernumary
seta is marked ‘‘X’’), Fig. 8 is part of the sixth tergite showing the
length and enumeration of the setae; the thin accessory setae ‘‘1la’’
and ‘‘2a’’ are as long or longer than the principal ones on all tergites
except ‘‘la’’ on tergite VII.

The squama genitalis of the female neo-allotype is shown in
fig. 9, The actual shape of the processus sternales (p.st.) is rather
difficult to see and is different from that of all other species known
to me.

Lectotype: a male from ‘‘King’s Park, Perth, W.A., 21/4/31".

Neo-allotype: a female from ‘‘Glen Osmond, 8.A., 9/7/33”.

Both in the South Australian Museum collection.

Fig, 9. Hosentomon westraliense Wom.;
Neo-allotype 9. Squama genitalis from
dorsal side—p.st., processus sternales.

TUXEN—PROTURA 69

2. Eosentomon swani Womersley

Hosentomon swani Womersley 1932 p, 75, fig. 7-8, 19-20; 1989 p, 287,
fig. 79 A-K.

Fig, 10-16.

The deseription gave only the measurements in » of parts of the
body and the statement ‘‘chaetotaxy as figured’’. In 1939 it is repeated
almost word for word, but the figures of the chaetotaxy of t VIT-IX
differ slightly. In a key on p. 289 (1939), there is an important new
statement ‘‘tarsus LIT without a strong subapical dorsal spine’’. This,
however, is incorrect. In the collection are two slides both marked
**Type’’; one, a female, I take as a lectotype; other slides are marked
as paratypes. The following new description is of the lectotype.

The foretarsus (fig. 10-11) is much broader in relation to length
than in westraliense, or in faet in most Hosentomon species known to
me; tl is relatively large and placed on a level with «38; thus being
much nearer to the distal than to the proximal end of the tarsus,
d:p = 1.86; t2 is short and slender, t3 relatively long, a is rather
short, b thicker than the other sensillae, a’ very long and reaching to
the tip of tl. Very enrious is the long and sinuate ¢’, 5 is long with
pointed elub, TR = 4.5, e:n = 0.85.

The shape of the head is shown in fig. 12; the psendoenli are
rather small, about 41 of the head. The mouth parts are shown in
fig. 13; the mandibles are striated as in #. westraliense, and also like
E. vermiforme Ewing (see Bonet and Tuxen 1960 p. 273).

Tarsus IIT (fig, 14) has a very distinct subapical spine.

The chaetotaxy is as follows:

I Wim iwvyl via var “Ix x XI xIt

4 a() B(*) (7) 6 + 2(8)
r 8 i6 i6 i6 a, = 8 q 3 3

4 6 6 6 2 8
* ri rs 10 10 4 * * 4 4

The chaetotaxy of t VI is given in fig, 15; ‘‘la’’ is abnormally
missing on the left side,

The squama genitalis of the female (fig. 16) shows two distinct
V-shaped proximal selerites, probably the processus sternales, but
appearing as if free of the distal sclerites of the acrogyne.

(8) °°3?? is missing in t II-TV, although found on the leff side of t IT; (7) ‘41'', §437', and
‘'57? are missing; (8) almost points; (*) a small seta quite near the glandular opening,
absent in westraliense,

70 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ootan

Fig. 10-13. Eosentomon swani Wom.; Lectotype 9. 10, foretarsus, exterior side ; 11, interior
side of same; 12, contour of head; 13, mouth-parts, compare with fig. 4.

TUXEN—PROTURA 71

Lectotype: A female from ‘‘in moss, Crawley, Western Australia,
27/7/1931, D.C. Swan’’ in the South Australian Museum.

Fig. 14-16. Eosentomon swani Wom,; Lectotype 9. 14, left tarsus IIT; 15, tergal chaetotaxy
of sixth abdominal segment; 16, squama genitalis from ventral side.

3. Eosentomon millsi Womersley

Eosentomon millsi Womersley 1938 p. 221, pl. XII fig. D-G.

?Eosentomon armatum, Mills 1932 p. 130; nee EH. mills: Womersley

1939 (= E. womersleyi Bonet 1942), vide p. 16.

This species was described by Womersley in 1938 from specimens
sent to him by Dr, Harlow B. Mills from Iowa, United States of
America, and probably the same as Mills referred to in 1932 as
E. armatum Stach. In 1940 Ewing, without giving any reason,

72 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM

synonymised the species with FZ. wheelert Silv. This synonymy has
since proved to be correct, In 1939 Womersley recorded the species
from Australia bnt Bonet in 1942 considered the Australian material
as another species which he named womersleyi nommoyv. (see the
following species),

In Womersley’s collection are several slides of this species from
the U.8.A.; one, a female without fore-legs, marked as the type; I have
examined the characters of the fore and hind tarsi, the squama genitalis
of the female and the chactotaxy, and find complete agreement with
E, wheeleri Silv. as redescribed by Bonet and Tuxen in 1960, and also
in respect to the very long accessory setae in the posterior rows of
the tergites, It is therefore unnecessary to give any figures. The
synonymy given by Ewing, although he did not have an exact
knowledge of wheeleri nor of the type material of millsi, is therefore
justified.

Lectotype; A female from ‘‘Columbus Jnt., Iowa, U,S.A., 26/9/38""
(probably an error for ‘1939 H. B. M(ills)’’) in the South Australian
Museum,

4, Eosentomon womersleyi Bonet

Eosentomon millsi Womersley 1939 p. 287, fig. 79 J-M; nee E. millsi
Womersley 1938 p, 221.

Eosentamon womersleyi nom.noy. Bonet 1942 p. 16.
Fig. 17-23.

In his work on the Australian Apterygota 1939 Womersley
recorded his Hosentomon millsi from Australia, He gaye a deseription
which is word for word identical with that of millsi 1938 except that a
line (line 3, p. 289) had fallen out, the result being that the spine
appears to be present on tarsus TI. The figures, however, were new
and different from those of 1938—it should be noted, however, that
the figures of the chaetotaxy of millsi in 1938 were incorrect. From
the difference in these figures Bonet concludes quite laconieally : ‘pero
basta comparar las respectivas figuras . . . para conveneerse de
que se trata de formas distintas’’; he gives no further description
but, without having seen the type, gives it the name womersleys
nom.nov,

As the figured chaetotaxy might have been wrong—as it is in both
cases—the procedure of Bonet was rather audacious. Unfortunately
only one specimen of millsi from Australia is present in Womersley’s

OCs mm

Hig. 17-23. Eosentomon womersleyt Bonet; Holotype ¢, 17, foretarsus, exterior side; 18,
interior side of same; 19, left tarsus III; 20, tergal chaetotaxy of abdominal segments
VILXII; 21, sternal chaetotaxy of same; 22, tergal chaetotaxy of second segment
with numbering of setae; 23, same of sixth abdominal segment.

74 RECORDS OF THE 3.A. MUSEUM

collection and Womersley himself has added to the label ‘‘womersleyi
Bonet 1942 nee millsi Wom. 1938”? and the word ‘'Type’’. This slide
may he taken as the holotype, The specimen is a male and is described
as follows, though of course without reference to the female genitalia,

The foretarsus (fig. 17-18) is first and foremost characterised by
a redoubling of tl on the interior surface, a feature not seen by me
in any other Vosentomon. This occurs on both legs but may, of
course, be an individual character, The sensillae and setae are mostly
as generally found, a seems rather shortly club-shaped but the club is
seen fore-shortened in the figure; tl is placed far advanced, even distal
to a3’ and on a level with sensillae cl and ¢2, d:p therefore — 0.65,
even shorter than in wheeleri, TR = 5,3, en —1.8, 65 is missing,
Tarsus IIT (fig. 19) with a distinet spine.

The shape of the head cannot be given as it is broken. The mouth-
parts are as in westraliense and swani, the mandibles with striae.

The chaetotaxy (fig. 20-21) also shows several characteristics and
schematically is as follows:

I a ul IvoVvVI vu ym IX x xl ox
4 1 8) Bf) Bl) 4g

t 64 if id 16 i) Tay 9 , 8 9
4 i) ty 6 6 i 2

* 4 i t i = ©§©60 T ‘ A F 8

There are many curious features in this chaetotaxy; ‘3’ is missing
in the anterior row of t ITT-VI (in t VII 1" and ‘'2” are also
missing), thus abdomen IT and IIS are different.

The accessory setae ‘‘la’’ are longer than the principal ones on
abd, II-IV, as are ‘‘2a’’ on all segments, but they are shorter on
abd, V-VIT; in all other species of Hosentomon known to me this only
holds good for abd, VII, It is worthy of notice that the accessory
setae ‘‘la’’ are placed inside the border of the sclerite when they are
short, but immediately ontside when they are long (see fig. 22-23),
This oceurs in all species of Hosentomon known to me.

The two lateral setae on sternite IX are short and the two median
long; on sternite X, however, all four are short.

The chaetotaxsy and the foretarsus appear to me therefore to
justify the regarding of this specimen as a separate species.

Holotype: A male from ‘Brown Hill Creek, Adelaide, 8.A,, 5th
June 1932 D, C. Swan’ in the South Australian Museum,

(10) (*a'? missing; (11) ‘‘la’! is very short; (12) ‘(1-87? are missing,

TUXEN—PROTURA 75

5, Eosentomon womersleyi Bonet var. australica Womersley
Eosentomon millsi var, australica Womersley 1939 p. 289, fig. 79 N-Q.

In 1939 Womersley further described a variety of his H. millst.
Although from the deseription there should be several slides from
various parts of South Australia, no slide with this name is present
in the collection, In the text Womersley gives the following differences
from the typical form: sternite VIII with no anterior row of setae, and
on sternite IX (sic, ‘‘tergite’? in error) the lateral setae are much
smaller than the median, His fig. 79 Q also shows this, but as stated
above, his figure of (he typical form is wrong in respect to sternite LX,
the difference in size of the lateral and median setae being present also
in this form. In the key on 7). 289 he further says that the accessory
seta ‘2a’? in the posterior row of tergite VIT in var. qustralica is
absent; this is very improbable,

There remains, therefore, only one character separating the two
forms, viz., the absence of the anterior row of setae on sternite VIL,
If then, a form of B. womersleyi Bonet with s VITT = ¢ be found
and proved not to be an individual variation, then the var. australica
Wom, is a reality; till then we cannot say more of its existence, No
holotype or leetotype.

6. Paraentomon clevedonense Womersley
Paraentomon clevedonense Womersley 1927a p. 145, fig, 4-7.

Proturentomon minimum Bagnall 1986 p. 212; Tuxen 1956a p. 241,
fig, XTIL-XV.
Fig. 24-27.

Of this British species which was described from three specimens
‘¢taken with others under deeply-embedded stones above Norton Wood,
Clevedon, Som., 21,1X.1926. Found also in a similar habitat on
Backwell Hills, Som., 16.X.1926"’, I have had two ‘‘type slides’’ before
me, one from the South Australian Museum marked ‘‘Co-type,
Clevedon, Oct. 1926, H. Womersley’’ and the other from the British
Museum (Nat. Hist.) coll. Bagnall, marked ‘‘Paratype, West Town,
Som,, 10/10/26 H. Womersley’’ (both are determined as Paraentomon
clevedoniensis, with the female adjectival ending). Neither of these
belong to the series from Norton Wood, Somerset, England; but as
both belong to the type material, T select the South Australian Museum
specimen as the lectotype, because although smashed, it shows the
characters, including the mouth-parts, very well.

76 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Already in his deseription 1927 Womersley had stressed the
resemblance to slcerentulus minimus Berlese, but Berlese had not
observed that the second abdominal leg resembled the first but not
the third and consequently Womersley had to replace his species in a
new genus and even a new subfamily, Later Bagnall (1936) for quite
theoretical reasons synonymised the two species, to which Womersley
himself agreed in 1938, and which I myself in 1956 confirmed after
having seen the type of A, minimus Berl.

Tn 1956 T gave a detailed description of the species, based on
specimens from Rothamsted, Wngland and sent to me by Dr, F. Raw
under the name of Protwrentomon minimum Berl. he type of
Berlese’s species was not fit for description although suitable for the
checking of important characters. T have now checked the above type
specimens of clevedomense (one on each slide) with my 1956 description
and with the specimens from Rothamsted and find the closest
resemblance so that it is unnecessary to draw or describe the lectotype
of P. clevedonense, only some corrections and additions to my descrip-
tion of 1956 need he given.

The monthparts (fig. 24) are very clear on the lectotype owing to
its smashed state, wherefore T have thought fit to figure them. The
shape of the mandible is important, shorter and stouter than in
Acerentulus and with a long and distinct slit; in the maxillae the galea
could not be seen, The psendoeulus is very peculiar, the ‘lever’?
being long triangular and nearly as broad as the “‘lid?’,

The last abdominal segments (fig. 25) show rows of very small
teeth on the hind border of the ninth, tenth and eleventh tergite, and
a small ‘‘hinula’’ of teeth on the middle of tergite XII.

The chactotaxy, In 1956 (p, 244) I gave t VIII & ands X 2.
Both these statements were due to having chosen an aberrant specimen
for drawing. In this specimen (fig. XV 1) there were 7 setae in the
anterior row on t VIL, but au examination of all the Rothamsted
specimens as well as the present leetotype shows that there was a seta
too many in the figured specimen and not one too few, The ventral
view (fig. XV 2) was drawn from another aberrant specimen with only
2 setae on & X and 8 on sg XIT; the correct numbers are four and six,
The examination of the present lectotype has further shown that my
stating 4 for s I, which was given with a question mark, is correct.

In an exanination of the 19 adult specimens of this species T have
found two specimens with only two setae on s XI, This is a feature
of the maturus junior of Acerentulys (at least danicus Condé); only

. 26

et
Q0/ mm
soimm ‘

“alent

Fig. 24, 25 and 27. Paraentomon clevedonense Wom.; Lectotype 9. 24, mouth-parts—fil,
filamento di sostegno; lac. laciniae; lb, labium; mdb, mandible; pmx, maxillary palpus;
ps, pseudoculus; 25, chaetotaxy of tergites VIII-XII; 27, squama genitalis,

Fig. 26. Proturentomon minimum Berl. ex Rothamsted, leg. Raw. genital squama of male?

Fig. 28-30. Proturentomon iowaense Wom.; Lectotype 9. 28, left foretarsus from above;
29, filamento di sostegno and pseudoculus; 30, squama genitalis.

78 RECORDS OF ‘THE S.A. MUSEUM

in one of these specimens, however, I could see the genitalia, and these
seemed to differ [rom those of all other specimens (fig. 26), In fig. 27,
1 have drawn the genitalia of the lectotype of clevedonense which on
comparison with Berlese’s figure (Tav, LX, fig. 105) I would assume
to be a female squama. All the specimens except the abovementioned
have this squama and [ have not seen one which I could, without
doubt, consider a male, Whether the above specimens with s XI 2
are males or immature specimens, I do not yenture to decide.

Lectotype: female from ‘‘Clevedon, Oct, 1926, H. Womersley”’, in
the South Austrahan Museum, Adelaide.

From the aboye the long supposed synonymy of Paraentomon
clevedonense Wom. with Proturentomon minimum Berl. and Paraen-
tomon Wom. with Proturentomon Silv, will be evident, (The Paraen-
tomon species of Toneseu belong to another genus, loneseuellum Tuxen
1960, )

7. Proturentomon iowaense Womersley
Proturentomon towaense Womersley 1938 p, 221, pl, XII, fig, a-c.
Fig. 28-30,

This species was deseribed without the designation of a holotype,
ora statement of the number of specimens available, The description
was reprinted by Ewing 1940 (p. 531) but nothing new was added,
It was said to differ from P. clevedonense only in the absence of the
two small anterior setae on tergites VY and VI, and in the length
(585 as against 9004). This latter, however, is incorrect, the length
being about 800z.

T have before me four slides of one specimen each; one marked
‘ype’, the others ‘‘Paratype’’. T have selected that marked **Type’’
as a lectotype becatise it is best preserved. The species is extremely
like the preceding.

The foretarsus (fig. 28) is shown as seen from above (both tarsi).
The many sensillae, all equally long and stout, ean be seen and may
be counted together with the setae as I did for P. minimum Berl.
in 1956, ue., in accordance with the numbering of the sensillae and
setae in Acerentulus-Acerentomon, In this species all the sensillae
could be identified with the sole exception of t1; in the present species
also tl is found and this gives a clear difference between the two
species, but also more distinctly shows a near relationship to the
Acerentominae, Womersley described these sensillae in clevedonense

TUXEN—PROTURA 79

as having a single median rib, which is clearly seen in the present
species but probably is nothing more than an optical phenomenon, The
ratio TR is given by Womersley (1938) as a difference between the two
species, 3.2 in towdaense and 3.0 in clevedonense; but in 1927 he gave
2.8 for clevedonense and I would measure 2.9 in this species and 3.1
in iowaense; these differences, however, are too small and inexact to
Warraul species differentiation. The pseudocnlus and filamento di
sostegno (fig. 29) are as in mumimwm Berl, The comb of abd, VIII
with many small teeth.

The squama genitalis of female (fig. 30) is diffienlt to see and
understand clearly, I have drawn it as it appears to me in the lecto-
type; perhaps the differences from fig. 27 are of a specific nature.

The chaetotaxy is in all respects like that in the preceding species
except that on tergites V-VI the two small anterior setae are missing
as pointed out by Womersley (yet they are on t V in the lectotype),
Also the small teeth on the hind margin of t [X-XI and on the surface
of t XIII are clearly seen. One of the specimens is a maturus junior
without genitalia and with only two setae on s XI,

Lectotype: A female from the United States of America,
“‘Columbns Jnt. Towa, 26/9/32, H. B. Mills,’’ in the South Australian
Museuin, Adelaide.

The species is very close to P. minimum Berl. differing only in the
presence of tl, perhaps the shape of the filamento and squama genitalis,
and the absence of the two small anterior setae not only on tergite VII
but also on t VI and often on t V.

8. Acerentomon bagnalli Womersley
Acerentomon bagnalli Womersley 1927a p, 141 fig. 1.
Fig. 31-87.

This British species was deseribed by Womersley ‘‘from a male
specimen, one of many taken under old bark . . . Blaise Castle Woods,
Bristol, Glos. 27,X11,1926’’, He mentioned that it is the species he
recorded in 1924 as doderoi Silv. but does not indicate how it differs
from this species. He introduces here two characters not previously
used in Proturan taxonomy, via, the relation between the lengths of
the claw and tarsus of the foretarsus (TR) and the relation of the
length of the labrum to that of the head (LR). Both characters have
since been abundantly used. He also gives points to the chaetotaxy,

OF mm

Fig. 31-37, Acerentomon bagnalli Wom.; Lectotype ¢, 31, foretarsus exterior side; 32,
interior side of same; 33, contour of head, arrow points to base of labrum; 34, filamento
di sostegno and pseudoculus; 35, comb of abd, segment VIII; 36, pectine of pleurite
VIII; 37, pectines of pleurites VI and VII, sternum to right,

TUXEN—PROTURA 3h

a characteristic the significance of which was Jater elaborated by
Tonesen,

In Womersley’s collection twelve slides of this species are present,
most of them containing young stages (as to the supposed stage with
eleven abdominal segments in this species see my drawings in an
earlier paper (Tuxen 1949 p. 47, fig. 72-75)), only two with adult
specimens: ‘‘Mature female, type’’ and ‘‘submature male, cotype’’.
All slides are from the locality and date mentioned in the deseription.

There seems every reason therefore, to believe that ‘‘male’’ in the
description is a printer’s error for ‘‘female’’, the more so as the
“submature male cotype’’ is not a good specimen from whieh to
describe the species. I have thus selected the female as a leetotype
and marked it accordingly. It will be described as follows:

The foretarsus (fie, 31-32) with the setae and sensillae arranged
as commonly found in Acerentomon, tl is claviform, {2 long and
slender, t8 long laneet-like, b much thicker than the other sensillae, e
situated about in the middle between d and f, f longer than g. Seta
sis very long and straight, On the inner side b’ and ¢’ are very long
with the small 8 5 between them, a’ is missing, f 1 is short, § 4 very
long; TR = 3.0 (Womersley gives 3.4 through a printer’s error as
his measurements (35 to 105”) show; e:u (empodium ; unguis) = 1:7,

The head (fig. 33) with LR = 4.5; somewhat flattened in the slide.
The filamento di sogstegno (fig. 34) with short proximal part and
heart-shaped dilation, The shape of the pseudoculus may be seen in
the same figure.

The comb on the eighth abdominal tergite (fig. 35) does not reach
as far backwards as to doderet and has shorter and fewer (12) teeth;
on tergile, pleyrite and sternite are found rows of short spines, fewer
and much shorter than in doderoi. The hind border of the plenrite
carries 5 short teeth (fig. 86). In all the above characters the species
is clearly distinguished from doderot Silv, (see Tuxen 1960a),

Womersley (loc. cit.) mentioned a pectine on the eighth plenrite
and fifth tergite. The first one must be a row of teeth on the hind
horder of pl, VIII mentioned above, the second must refer to a eomb
found on the anterior part of the sixth pleurite. In my paper on the
Protura of Tonesen (1961) T have deseribed these pleural ‘‘combs’’ in
the genus Acerentomon as specified in the species Ac, quercinum lon.
In the present species the pectine on abd, VI carries some three long
teeth and a small number of smaller teeth, that on plenrite VIT earries
two strong and two slender teeth (fig. 37). In this character also this
species differs from doderoai Silv-

$2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The chaetotaxy is as follows (the pleural setae are included in the
tergal count):

I u it oIv-ViI vi var Ix x XI XI
a wow w w w 8 6
t i 16 16 i6 16 is 14 10 4
3 6 7 7 5 4
, re B 5 3 3 2 + + $ $

The ‘‘co-type male’? has s VII = $. The hind border of s XII is
very faintly serrate.

In many characters this species resembles A. doderoi Silv. but
distinet differences are to be found in the characters of the abdominal
pectines as well as in the chaetotaxy, t VII having % in doderoi, an
extra seta being found between seta ‘'4’’ in the anterior and posterior
rows (and one more, ‘‘3a’’ in the posterior row), t XI has only four
setae, the median pair being missing.

Lectotype: ‘‘Mature female under rotten bark, Blaise Castle,

Bristol, 27/12/26, H, Womersley’’ in the collection of the South
Australian Museum, Adelaide.

9. Acerentomon nemorale Womersley
Acerentomon nemorale Womersley 1927a p, 142, fig. 2.
Fig. 38-44.

This species, which with its 2 mm. length is among the largest
Proturans known, was deseribed from ‘‘one of two specimens taken in
the rotten sapwood of an old stump in Brockley Combe, Somerset,
17.1V.1926"’. There is only one slide present in the collection, most
probably a female though some impurities prevent a clear decision,
with the date and locality as in the deseription. It is marked ‘‘Type’’
and may he regarded as the holotype, though Womersley expressly
states, ‘‘genital organs well developed’’.

The foretarsus (fig. 38-89) of which only one leg is present has
been examined and drawn from both the exterior and interior sides.
Unfortunately some of the setae have been more or less broken off, a
transverse line in the drawings indicates where they are broken; t1 is
only represented by the socket so that it cannot be stated whether it
is claviform, although it is most probably so, t2 is slender and eurved
and t3 is long lancet-like. The most characteristic feature is the short
and slender sensilla b, shorter and not broader than ce. The other

Fig. 38-44, Acerentomon nemorale Wom,; Holotype @. 38, foretarsus, exterior side; 39,
interior side of same; 40, contour of head; 41, pseudoculus and filamento di sostegno;
42, comb of abd, VIII; 43, pleurite VIII and part of sternite; 44, pleural pectines on
abd. VI and VII, sternum to left.

84 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

sensillae are long, a stouter than the others, e in the middle between
d and f; a’ is missing, b’ near to ce’ with 6§ 5 between them, s long
and straight. TR = 3.0, em = 7:45,

The head as shown in fig. 40, a little crushed. LR = 4.2
(Womersley has 2.8), The filamento di sostegno (fig. 41) with longer
proximal part than in bagnalli. The comb on abd. VIII (fig. 42) is
very characteristic with 9-10 strong and long teeth set apart, the most
lateral one recurved against the others, the next two the longest, and
numbers 6 and 8-10 equally long but diverging from the small number
7. A row of small blunt teeth is found near the striated line on the
anterior part of the segment, and also ventrally. The eighth pleurite
has 6-7 small blunt tecth along the hind margin (fig. 43),

The pectine on pleurite VI with about 15 long teeth and one or
two more near the ‘‘rotary-wheel’’, Pleurite VII with a few sharp
and slender teeth lateral to this wheel and two groups of stouter ones
on (he median side (fig, 44),

The chaetotaxy is as follows:

T ULL Iv V.VI Vil vill IX xX XI xi
6 ith) 1) att] 10 8
* 4 6 Te Té 18 13 i W 6 °
8 f§ 68 Ff 6&6 4 -
A 4 7 8 8 9 2 4 4

The number of 6 setae in the anterior row of s IV is certainly an
abnormality, although they are arranged symmetrically.

In t VII seta ‘1’? is missing in the anterior row but a seta is
present between number ‘‘4’? in the anterior and posterior rows; in
both characters it is distinguishable from the preceding segments.

The short and slender sensilla b of the foretarsus and the shape
of the abdominal combs make this species clearly distinguishable.
Unfortunately fig. 2 of Womersley is not correct in details of the
pectines, The species has since been recorded by Condé (1944 p. 44)
from Franee, and by Nosek (1957) and Paclt (1958) from
Czechoslovakia, The last two authors, however, do not agree as to
which species should be called nemorale; some specimens lent to me
by Dr, J. Nosek, Bratislava, show that at least his species is another
species which he is going to describe. Condé has seen that Womersley’s
pectine on abd. V in faet belongs to abd, VI and he also notes that the
chaetotaxy of sternites I-IV ‘‘sont sujets A variations’’,

TUXEN—PROTURA 85

Tlololype: Wemale(?) ‘‘under bark, Brockley Combe, Som. 17/4/26,
H, Womersley’’ in the collection of the South Australian Museum,
Adelaide,

10, Acerentomon oblongum Womersley
Acerentomon oblongum Womersley 1927a p. 143, fig. 3.
Fig. 45-52,

Womersley deseribed this species from two specimens ‘‘received
from Mr, Bagnall, labelled Sta, Banks, Whitby, and Feneehonses’’.
This species is nut present in Womersley’s collection in Adelaide, but
a slide containing a specimen determined as this species anid marked
“Type”? has recently come to the British Museum (Nat. Hist.), London,
with the collection of R. 8, Bagnall. It is furthermore labelled
‘Whithy, Sta. Bks’* and must therefore be one of the two specimens
mentioned by Womersley; I therefore select it as a lectotype anid
describe it as follows:

The lforetarsus (fig, 45-46) is characterised by a long and
extremely slender claw. Unfortunately many of the setae are broken,
and in the fignres, where it is not possible to complete from the other
foretarsus this is indicated by a transverse line. Sensilla b is a little
broader than the others which are all rather long and almost eqnally
so, @ 1s situated mneh nearer to d than to f, tl is rather long and
claviform, t2 lancet-like and not extremely long. The interior side is
characterised by an extremely long 6 4, TR = 2.5 (Womersley gives
1.6, but his figures ‘‘front tarsus 101p, claw 45a” give 2.2), e:u = 10:67.

The head (fig. 47), upon whieh the specific name is based is of
quite different shape to that of other species of Acerentomon, It is
broken in the mid-line as shown in the figure, but its long and narrow
shape is obvious. The rostrum is long, execeding the maxillary palpi,
but LR amounts to only 4.7. The shape of the psendoculus is shown
more enlarged; it shows a small but distinet sort of ‘‘handle’’ or
‘lever’? The flarmento di sostegno could not be seen.

The comb of abd. VIII (fig. 48) consists of 14 teeth, the four
median ones being shorter and more dispersed than the laterals. The
anterior part of this segment carries only a few very small dispersed
teeth. The pleurite has 4-5 small blunt teeth on the hind border
(fig. 49), Pleurite VIT with two stout and two fine teeth, pl. VI with
a row of about 7 rather long and acnte teeth (fig, 50).

The chaetotaxy is not easy to follow, as the anterior part of the
body is twisted and the four posterior segments so much withdrawn

Hig. 45-52. Acerentomon oblongum Wom.; Lectotype 9. 45, foretarsus exterior side; 46,
interior side of same; 47, contour of head, to the side a pseudoculus; 48, comb of
abd, VIII; 49, pleurite and half of sternite of abd, VIII; 50, pectines of pleurites of
abd. VI and VII, sternum to right; 51, genital squama from venter and in situ;
2, same, more enlarged.

TUXEN—PROTURA 87

into abd. VIII that their setae are hardly distinguishable. It may be
given as follows:

1 ul i Ivevi vu Vill Ix x XI «s-XIT
t ! ’ 10? 10 10 8 \4 12? t a
16 16 16 is
2 t ? 7 7 5 4 4 4 ’ 6
5 a 0 2

The most curious feature of the whole animal, however, is the
genital squama, if I identify it correctly, The specimen unfortunately
is not cleared as much as could be wished, and the characters of the
last segments are obscured by their contraction, Fig. 51 gives a sketch
of the genital squama im sifm, and fig. 52 of the squama itself more
magnified, It looks as if two selerotised rods connect the basis of
tergite VII with the pectinal parts of tergite VIII but proximally these
rods seem to be fused in the middle, and ihe whole structure may also
be interpreted as an ‘‘endosternnm’’, a view which seems to he
supported by its finer structure. Distally a structure of loose contour
appears to connect the ‘frods’’ and from this extends what I presume
to be the real squama genitalis, corresponding to the distal part of the
common squama, Tt consists of an aerogynium(?) and two acrostyliy,
ending in a seta or cannula. Between these acrostyli two more styli
are found, but their connections to the other parts I am unable to
follow, nor can I see the true opening of the vagina—if it is at all a
female squama, The acrostyli are covered dorsally by two weakly
chitinised ‘‘wings’’ and the whole squama is situated in a ‘eave’?
opening in the usual way. I have only seen the type specimen and as
the species has not been recorded since the original description I am
unable to investigate it further. I hope, however, that the species may
be rediscovered, and that then, some one from the above indications,
may get enongh material to solve the problem.

Lectotype: Female(?) marked ‘‘Whitby Sta, Bks., R. S. Bagnall’?
in the British Museum (Nat, Hist.), London.

11. Acerentomon metarhinus Womersley
Acerentamon metarhinus Womersley 1928a p. 113.
Fig. 53-57.
This species was described from a single specimen ‘‘from amongst
tangled bracken roots under a stone in Cranham Woods, Glos.,

13/9/26’". Womersley reported the specimen to be of the eleven-
segmented instar: in earlier papers (1949, 1956a) I have shown that

88 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

the instar does not exist, and the specimen in question rightly appeared
fo be a maturus junior (see fig. 57). Because of this the chaetotaxy
is not to be relied upon; on the other hand Womersley is right in
stating that the characters LR and TR are constant throughout the
larval lile, and this holds good also for the further characters of the
foretarsus (see Tnuxen 1949 where it is also shown that all these
characters are different in the prelarva, not known to Womersley).
I give a description of the characters seen on the specimen, which
unfortunately is crushed and difficult to examine.

The foretarsns (fig, 53-54) (only the left one is present) is rather
short and broad, It is characterised by sensilla b being slender, and e
placed much nearer to d than to f, tl is slenderly claviform, t3 short
but slender. TR = 2.7 (Womersley gives 3.0), e:n = 6:52,

The head is very squashed; fig. 55 gives its rough outline but the
hind border is difficult to ascertain. LR is given as 6.4, to me it seems
more like 6.0, The pseudoculi are as figured, the filamento di sostegno
could not be seen,

The comb on ahd, VIIT (fig. 56) carries about 14 slender but rather
short teeth of which the middle ones are the longest, decreasing slowly
in length to both sides. The hind border of the pleurite carries four
very short and fine teeth, but there are only a few short and dispersed
teeth on the anterior part of the segment, The pectines on pleurites
VI and VII, if any, could not be seen,

The chaetotaxy (fig. 56) conld not be seen on the first four
abdominal segments; on abd. V-XII it is as follows:

V-VIt VIiTT (Xx x XI XIT

10 8
t 16 B 12 8 4 9

2 4
5 3 4 4 2 6

but it must be remembered that the specimen is a maturus junior,
which is further shown by the presence of only two setae on the
sternum XT (see Tuxen 1949 p, 28).

It will be seen that there are only very few really characteristic
features present, among them being the slender sensilla b, and the
position of e on the foretarsus, and especially the shape of the comb
on VIII, Nevertheless both Ionescu (1932) and Condé (1944) mention
this species from Roumania and France, respectively. I do not know

—_—_—
0.0F mm

Fig. 53-57. Acerentomon metarhinus Wom.; Holotype, a maturus junior, 53, foretarsus
exterior side; 54, interior side of same tarsus; 55, eontour of head and right pseudo-
culus; 56, chaetotaxy of abd. VIII-XII; 57, comb of abd, VIII.

90 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

on what characters these determinations are founded; both authors
only give the length in » of some parts of the body, appendages or
setae, but these measurements are often not the same as given hy
Womersley and even not the same between the two authors, For
instance: TR = 26 (Condé), 2.75 and 2.55 (Ionesen), 3,0
(Womersley)—and 2,7 for my measurement of the holotype; or length
of rostrum 25» (Condé, Ionescu, in adult individuals), 27” (Womersley
in the maturus junior), Itis therefore, not quite certain that the reports
of this species from France and Roumania are correct; the species was
not present in that portion of Ionesen’s collection which I have had
before me (Tuxen 1961), Condé mentions a line of tecth on both
tergite V and VI, but T lave not been able to see these pectines on
the holotype; maybe they are not present in the maturus junior.

Holotype; A maturus junior from ‘‘Cranham, Glos., 13/9/26,
H. Womersley’’ in the collection of the South Australian Museum,
Adelaide,

12. Acerentomon agrorum Womersley
Acerentomon agrorum Womersley 1928a p. 114.

This species was deseribed from a ‘‘single specimen from under
stone along with Acerentulus confinis Berlese, Brockley Combe,
Somerset, October, 1926". In Womersley’s collection, specimens of
4. confinis from the above locality are present, but on none of the
slides could any Acerentomon be found and no slide of agrorum is
present; nor in the collection of Bagnall is there any specimen bearing
the name 4. agrorum. It must, therefore, be concluded that the single
specimen, the holotype, has been lost.

From the description alone, the species cannot be identified.
Apart from some measurements only three characters are given by
Womersley: LR = 4.1, TR = 2... (but his figures give 2.5), and
spines on the eighth tergal pectine of equal length. These characters,
however, are too insignificant to make a characterisation of the species
possible, and nobody has found specimens since then; and further-
more the description was made on an immature specimen (called the
eleven-segmented instar, which means maturus junior), It seems
therefore advisable to abandon this species altogether from future
catalogues,

TUXEN—PROTURA 91

13. Acerentomon pinus Womersley
Acerentomon pinus Womersley 1928a p. 114.
Fig. 58-62.

This species too, was described from a maturus junior (Womersley
says a specimen of the ‘‘eleven segmented instar’’ but the limit between
the eleventh segment and the end segment is very distinct) ‘‘under
bark of an old pine stump, Brockenhurst, New Forest, 24/5/26’’; and
only this specimen is so far known. It is not very well mounted, not
all the characters being distinguishable. It will be described as
follows:

The foretarsus (fig. 58-59) is characterised by a very long sensilla
a which is somewhat thicker than the other sensillae, b is relatively
short and slender, e long and placed nearer to d than to f, tl is
relatively long with a slender club, t3 short but slender. All the setae
are very long, especially conspicuous being the y setae. TR = 2.7
(Womersley gives 2.6), e:u = 6:53,

The shape of the head is shown in fig. 60, LR = 3.3. The
filamento di sostegno cannot be seen.

The comb on abd. VITI (fig. 61) has 12 relatively short but slender
teeth, A row of very dispersed and very small teeth on the anterior
part of the segment. The hind border of pleurite VIII (fig. 62) with
three short teeth. Pectines on pleurite VI and VIL not visible, either
missing or too hyaline to be seen,

The chaetotaxy on the first three abdominal segments cannot be
seen as the specimen is coiled in the slide. For the rest it is as follows:

IV-VI Vil Vill IX x XI Xit
10 10 8
t 16 ati 3 12 8 6 9
(is
8 2 3° 4 4 2 6

The number of 2 setae on s XI shows the specimen to be a maturus
junior (see above).

Holotype: A maturus junior from ‘Brockenhurst, 24/5/26.
H. Womersley’’ in the collection of the South Anstralian Museum,
Adelaide.

(13) Abnormal, one of the setae being placed in the middle line.

92 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hig. 58-62. Acerentomon pinus Wom.; Holotype, a maturus junior. 58, foretarsus exterior
side; 59, interior side of same tarsus; 60, contour of head and a pseudoculus; 61, comb
of abd, VIII; 62, pleurite and half of sternite VIII.

TUXEN—PROTURA 93

14, Acerentulus capensis Womersley
Acerentulus capensis Womersley 1931 p. 89, fig. 1-2.
Fig. 63-69.

This is the first species of Acerentulus to be deseribed by
Womersley, based on two specimens collected at Cape Town, 8. Africa,
on his way to Australia. The two specimens in the South African
Museum have been kindly lent to me by Dr, A. J. Hesse. One specimen
is a female but unfortunately all six legs are missing, the other is a
maturus junior. As the characters of the foretarsus are of such para-
mount importance in Acerentulus and alike in all stages except the
prelarva, | am foreed to make the maturus junior the lectotype
describing it as follows; the chaetotaxy, however, will be given from
the female. Both specimens are labelled ‘‘Orangezicht, Cape Town,
6/9/30. H.W.?’.

The foretarsus (fig. 63-64) is first and foremost characterised by
the large bottle-shaped sensilla a’ which I have not seen in any other
species of Acerentulus, t1 is elub-shaped, t2 long and slender, 13 small
and not lancet-like but long-oval without pointed apex (also a
distinguishing character from other Acerentulus species), a-d and f
are all equally long and slender, e and g shorter, e is placed nearer to
f than to d, b is a little stouter than the other ones. On the inner side
b’ is missing, e’ long and slender, TR = 3.3, eu = 1:7.

The filamento di sostegno (fig. 65) is rather short, not reaching
the tip of the inner arm of the fulerum. The comb of abd. VIII (fig.
66) consists of six short teeth.

The chaetotaxy of the female (fig. 67-69) is as follows with the
pleural setae included in the tergal counts.

I Wilt weve VI VII vu Ix x XI XI
t 6 8 8 10 6(M) 6 i4 12 6 a
iz ia 14 14 16 14
3 3 3 3 3
4 ry B R 3 R 4 4 4 6 6

L have figured the whole tergal chaetotaxy of the abdomen to show
a curious feature. In the anterior row ‘'3’’ is placed further back
than the other setae, In abd. VI this is even more pronounced and in
VII the seta has retreated right back into the posterior row. This
retreating of ‘*3'’ of the anterior row is met with, more or less
pronounced, in many Protura. The striated band which occurs in all

(14) ‘*]?? is missing.

94 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

—,
A0fmem

Fig. 63-69. Acerentulus capensis Wom, 63, 64 and 66 from lectotype, a maturus junior,
65, 67, 69 from a 9. 63, foretarsus exterior side; 64, interior side of same; 65,
filamento di sostegno; 66, comb of abd, VIII; 67, tergal chaetotaxy of abd. I-VII;
68, same of abd. VIII-XIT; 69, sternal chaetotaxy of abd. VIII-XII.

TUXEN—PROTURA 95

Acerentominae on the anterior part of the eighth abdominal segment
has a curious appearance in this species. The striae are almost
entirely invisible; instead the anterior border consists of a row of
very fine teeth, shorter or longer, and the posterior border of two
exactly parallel lines (fig. 68-69), I have unfortunately only observed
it in this one specimen but may be the clue to what this striated band
really is lies hidden in this species.

The species is easily distinguished on the shape of a’ in the
foretarsus.

Lectotype: A maturus junior from ‘‘Orangezicht, Cape Town,
6/9/30. H. Womersley’’ in the South African Museum, Cape Town.

15. Acerentulus westraliensis Womersley

Acerentulus westraliensis Womersley 1932 p. 71, fig. 9-12; 1939 p. 286,

fig. 78 E-H.

Fig. 70-75.

The description and drawings of this species were repeated
unchanged in the 1939 publication. Several slides are present in the
collection and I have chosen a male from Crawley, Western Australia,
as a lectotype which is described as follows:

The foretarsus (fig. 70-71) has very long and slender sensillae a-g,
a is a little stouter than the others, e is placed quite near f, and b, ¢,
and d are not in a line, t1 is slender and club-shaped, t2 long and
slender, t3 short-oval and not lancet-like. On the inner side a’ is long
and thick, b’ and ¢’ long and slender, TR = 3.5, em = 1:8.

The filamento di sostegno (fig. 72) is rather long and most
unusually the posterior end seems to be shortly three-lobed.

The comb on abd, VIII (fig. 73) consists of five slender dispersed
teeth,

The chaetotaxy (fig. 74-75) is as follows:

I iat um #oiwv vivir vm « x XI xm
+ 8 B05) 8 8 10 8") «6 :

12 i4 14 id 14 16 iF 14 2 6 3
» 3 2") 8 3 3 3 a

ri 5 5 8 8 8 4(") 4 4 6 6

Lectotype: A male from ‘‘Crawley W.A., 8/5/31, D. C. Swan’’,
in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

(15) §* 57? is missing; (16) but normally 3; (17) ‘3’? in anterior row, retreated to posterior
row; (18) normally in a row.

96 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hig. 70-75, Acerentulus westraliensis Wom,; Lectotype g. 70, foretarsus exterior side; 71,
interior side of same; 72, filamento di sostegno and pseudoculus; 73, comb of abd.
VIII; 74, tergal chaetotaxy abd, VITI-XII; 75, sternal chaetotaxy abd. VIII-XII.

TUXEN—PROTURA 97

16, Acerentulus australiensis Womersley

Acerentulus australiensis Womersley 1932 p. 72, fig, 3, 11-12; 1989 p.
284, fig. 78 I-L.
Fig, 76-80.

This species is said to have been found ‘fon only one occasion’’
which seems to imply only one specimen as only one slide with a
male, from ‘‘Crawley, W.A. 30/10/30. D, C. 8.’’ is present im the
collection exactly as stated in the deseription, repeated unchanged in
1939, Both foretarsi (fig. 76) are seen directly from above, but only
one is drawn. It is seen to be very close to that of westraliensis in the
length and position of the sensillae. TR = 3.9, em = 1:6.

The filamento di sostegno (fig. 77) is three-lobed at the proximal
end and does not exceed the proximal arm of the fulerum,

The comb of abd. VIIL (fig. 78) with 8 very small teeth.

The chaetotaxy (fig. 79-80) is as follows:

T ILO lv-V VI Vil Vill IX xX XI xa
i} 8 8 10 8 6

J 16 To 10 10 16 4 Id le 6 *
3 3 3 3 C

a 4 6 8 a 3 3 4 4 6 6

The difference which Womersley notes is that sternite VIII has
only three setae. This is quite unusual and may be due to individual
variation but another difference is that ‘‘la’’ and ‘‘4a’’ are missing in
all posterior rows of tergites LVI (fig. 79).

The species was founded on only a single specimen from the same
locality (University Grounds, Crawley, Western Australia) as the 6
specimens of westraliensis on which the description of the latter species
was based. Only the speeimen of awstraliensis was collected on October
30th, 1930, the other specimens on November 2nd, 1930, and Apru-J uly,
1931, all by Mr. D. C, Swan, I would be tempted to synonymise the
two species as all characters except the chaetotaxy are alike, and I
would not hesitate to regard the chaetotaxy of sternite VITT as an
abnormality, but I have not known earlier examples of the missing of the
aceessory hairs in the posterior tergal rows being due to individual
variation. It might be a pre-imago ¢ (in A. danieus Condé, ‘‘la’’ is
missing in the posterior tergal rows in this stage), but the genital
squama is distinct and fully developed. Also the comb of abd. VIII
is different from that of westraliensis.

Holotype: A male from ‘Crawley, W.A., 30/10/30, D. C.
Swan’’ in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Fig. 76-80. dcerentulus australiensis Wom.; Holotype @. 76, foretarsus from above; 77,
filamento di sostegno; 78, comb of abd. VIII; 79, tergal chaetotaxy of abd, I-VI;
80, sternal chaetotaxy of abd. VIII-XII.

Fig. 81-83. <dcerentulus tillyardi Wom.; Lectotype 9. 81, foretarsus, exterior side; 82,
interior side of same; 83, comb of abd. VIII.

TUXEN—PROTURA 99

17. Acerentulus tillyardi Womersley

Acerentulus tillyardi Womersley 1932 p. 73, fig. 1, 2, 13, 14; 1939 p, 284,
fig. 77 A-F’.

Fig. 81-83.

Womersley writes that this is the only species found in the Eastern
Australian States. It was first found by Dr. R. J. Tillyard at
Blundells’, F.C.T,, 18th February, 1981, but only one specimen which
now appears to be lost, Several other specimens were found the same
year at Belgrave, Victoria, on the 19th April, Of these, two slides are
present in Womersley’s collection, one a pre-larva, the other a female;
I select the latter as a lectotype. Several other slides are also present,
found after the publication of the original description, and some of
these are referred to in 1939,

Womersley says that the species is very similar to A, westraliensis
but differs distinetly in the value of TR which he gives as 3,5 in
westraliensis and 3,0 in tillyardi, This, however, is the only difference
he gives.

{ have examined and drawn the lectotype though its state of
preservation does not permit me to see the characters of the foretarsus
and the pseudoculi as clearly as in other species, nor can the filamento
di sostegno be seen at all. I give the drawings of the foretarsns
(fig. 81-82) with the sensillae as clearly as possible but my conclusion
is that the small differences [rom the two preceding species are due
only to my difficulty in examination, TR = 3.0, e:u = 1:6,

The comb of the eighth abdominal tergite (fig. 83) has six
dispersed teeth as in westraliensis, but they are extremely short as in
australiensis,

The chaetotaxy is exactly as in australiensis, except that
s VIN —4,

Lectotype: A female from ‘‘Belgrave (Victoria) 19/4/31, coll,
BP, H,. Drummond’ in the South Australian Museum.

The preceding three species of Acerentulus seem to me to be very
close to one another—if they are really different, The foretarsi are
very much alike as to size and disposition of the sensillae. The ratio
TR, however, varies in the three type specimens. The filamento di
sostegno is three-lobed proximally in two of them and possibly also in
tillyardi (could not be seen). The abd, comb VIII consists of 6 longer

100 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

teeth in westraliensis, 8 short ones in australiensis and 6 short ones
in fillyardi, and in all three species dispersely set, The chaetotaxy
differs in so far as ‘‘la’’ in the posterior row of the abdominal
segments is missing in australiensis and tillyardi (s VOI = 3 in
australiensis may be regarded as abnormal). I have examined the
other specimens found after the publication of the original description
and find that one is a true westraliensis, the others are like
westraliensis but with the chaetotaxy as in tillyardt.

18. Acerentulus occidentalis Womersley

Acerentulus occidentalis Womersley 1982 p. 78, fig, 15-16; 1939 p, 285,
fiz. 78 A-P,
Fig. 84-90.

This species was described in 1932 (repeated unchanged in 1939)
from seven specimens, two from the ‘‘University Grounds, Crawley,
W.A. 28/4/31 and 29/6/31’’, and five specimens from ‘‘Fairbridge
Farm, Pinjarra, W.A. 20/9/31, under stones’’, all collected by Mr.
D. C. Swan, Two slides are present in the collection of which I select
a female as the lectotype deseribed as follows:

The foretarsus (fig. 84-85) is very much like that of the preceding
species, t1 slenderly club-shaped, t3 not lancet-like, b shorter than e,
e placed very near to f, a’ is thicker than all the other sensillae.
TR — 4.0, en = 1:8.

The filamento di sostegno (fig. 86) is longer than the arm of the
fulerum, and weakly three-lobed at the proximal end, The shape of
the head is seen in fig, 87; there is a distinct labrum. Abdominal comb
VIII (fig. 88) hag 15 very closely set and rather long teeth.

The chaetotaxy is as follows (fig, 89):

' (01 V-V VI Vu Vill IX x XIX
t 6 & md 10 8 a l4 12 6 9
12 14 ia i4 16 id
‘“ 3 3 3 8 3 2 4 \ 6 6
4 5 8 8 8 2

This is exactly as in westraliensis except that the two median
setae on sternite VIII are placed in an anterior row. The tergal
apodemes are slightly branched.

Lectotype: A female from ‘‘Crawley, W.A. 21/4/31, coll.
D. C. Swan’’, in the South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

This species is distinctly different from the three preceding species
but the great resemblance in the foretarsus is very curious. The

TUXEN—PROTURA 10)

"aoTmn*

aol mm

Cor mm

Fig. 84-90. Acerentulus occidentalis Wom,; Lectotype 9. 84, foretarsus, exterior side;
85, interior side of same; 86, filamento di sostegno; 87, contour of head; 88, comb of
abd. VIII; 89, sternal chaetotaxy of abd, VIII-XII; 90, anterior part of pleurite VIT,
sternum to left.

102 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

abd. comb VIII, however, distinguishes it clearly as -also does the
disposition of the sternal setae on abd, VIII. The presence of a
labrum is quite unexpeeted. With uncertainty as to the real difference
between Acerentulus and Acerentomon I should not like to transfer the
species to the latter genus: firstly because of the great similarity of
the foretarsus and the filamento di sostegno to the Acerentulus species,
and secondly because it shows no pleural row of teeth on abd. VIII as
species of Acerentomon generally do, nor is there a pectine on pleurite
VI or VII. The only feature reminiscent of this is the ‘‘rotary-wheel’’
which is present on pleurite VII (fig. 90) and which I have not
observed in the preceding Acerentulus species.

19, Acerentulus sexspinatus Womersley
Acerentulus seaspinatus Womersley 1936 p. 65, fig. 1-2; 1939 p. 286.
Fig. 91-98.

This species was described in 1936 from a number of specimens
eolleeted by Mr. D, C. Swan from under stones ‘‘on banks of the River
Onkaparinga, near Noarlunga, South Australia, April 25th, 1932°’.
Later, Womersley collected two adult and five immature specimens
from wider stones on the banks of the stream in the Bolganup Ravine,
South Western Australia, 30/9-1/10/32. Slides of these specimens are
not present in Womersley’s collection. ‘he description was repeated
in 1939,

As justified in the introduction I select one of the original
collection, marked ag ‘‘type’’ as a lectotype and describe it as follows:

The foretarsus (fig. 91-92) is provided with very long and slender
sensillae, only a’ being stout but long, tl is slenderly elub-shaped, t3
long and lancet-like. TR — 6.0, em — 1:7.

The filamento di sostegno (fig, 98) is as long as the proximal arm
of the fulernm; its proximal end two-lohed, heart-shaped. Fig. 94
shows the shape of the head and the exceptionally broad pseudoculi.

The comb of Abd. VOI (fig. 95) with about 10 closely set teeth.

The chaetotaxy (fie. 96-98) is as follows:

I Wm wv Vi vir var. 1x x XE XU
6 R R g 8 6

+ v * cay ms a ape 12 12 6
i 12(") 12 id 18 16 ’
3 4 3 3 3 4
3 3a 3 3 a 4 4 6

. 4 F3 8 8 8 3 ‘ id

(19) *"la’’ is missing,

TUXEN—PROTURA 103

GBGi mm

‘Tone

Fig. 91-98. Acerentulus sexspinatus Wom.; Lectotype @. 91, foretarsus from above; 92,
same of paratype, exterior side to show disposition of sensillae; 93, filamento di
sostegno; 94, contour of head; 95, comb of abd. VIII; 96, tergal chaetotaxy of abd.
V-VII; 97, sternal chaetotaxy of abd. V-VII; 98, sternal chaetotaxy of abd. VIII-XII.

104 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

It is important how many accessory setae have been added to the
posterior row on tergite VII. Also the number of setae on sternite
VIII is different from that in the other Australian species of
Acerentylus.

Lectotype: A female from ‘‘Onkaparinga Riv., Noarlunga, S.A.,
25/4/32, D. C. Swan’? in the South Australian Museum.

This species is readily distinguished from the other Australian
species by the very small claw of the foretarsus, the long t3, the
filamento di sostegno and the comb and chaetotaxy of abd. VIII.

REFERENCES

Bagnall, R, 8., 1936: Notes on Protura I. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10),
17, pp. 210-213.

Bonet, F., 1942: Sobre algunos Proturos de México (nota preliminar).
Ciencia, 3 pp. 14-17.

Bonet, F. and Tuxen, 8, L., 1960: Re-examination of species of
Protura deseribed by H. FE. Hwing. Proce. U.S. Nat. Mus.
112, pp. 265-305.

Condé, B., 1944: Sur la faune des Protoures de France. Rev. Fr. d’ent.
11, pp. 36-47.

Ewing, H. ., 1940: The Protura of North America. Ann. Ent. Soe.
America 33, pp. 495-551.

Toneseu, M. A., 1932: Nonvelles contributions & la connaissanee de la
faune des Protoures en Roumanie. Publ. Soc. Nat.
Romania, No. 11, 11 pp,

Mills, Harlow B., 1932: Catalogue of the Protura. Bull. Brooklyn
Ent. Soe. 27, pp. 125-1380.

Nosek, J., 1957: Prispevek k fauné hmyzenek (Protura). CSR
Zoologické Listy, Brno, 6, pp. 31-38.

Paclt, Jiri, 1958: Sur la faune Tchécoslovaqne des Protoures. Acta
Faunistica Ent. 3, pp. 3-6.

Prell, H., 1913: Das Chitinskelett von Hosentomon. Zoologica 25,
54 pp.

Tnxen, S. L., 1949: Uber den Lebenszyklns und die postembryonale

Entwicklung zweier dinischer Proturengattungen. Kel.
da. Vid. Selsk. Biol. Skr. 6, 3, 49 pp.

1955: The first record of Canadian Protura, with systematic
notes on Acerentulus. Ent. Medd. 27, pp. 113-128.

TUXEN—PROTURA 105

1956a; Neues tiber die von Berlese beschriebenen Proturen,
Redia 41, pp. 227-258,

1956b: Neues tiber die von Silvestri beschriebenen Proturen.
Boll. Lab. Zool, Gen, e Agr., Portici 33, pp, 718-729.

1958: Neues iiber Hosentomon armatum. Stach, Acta Zool.
Cracoviensia IT 27, pp. 621-636.

1959: The phylogenetic significance of entognathy in
entognathous apterygotes, Smiths. Mise. Coll. 137, pp.
379-416,

1960a; Ergiinzendes tiber die von Silvestri und Berlese
beschriebenen Proturen. Ent. Medd. 29, pp. 294-303.

1960b: Neues iiber die von Rimsky-Korsakow, Prell, Stach,
Denis, Ionescu, Strenzke und Gisin beschrieben Arten
von Hosertomon (Protura). Vid. Medd, Nat. For. 123,
pp. 1-19.

1960e: Hine neue Gattung von Proturen: Ionescuellum.
Vid. Medd. Nat. For, 123, pp. 21-82.

1960: On Ewing’s Protura, vide Bonet and Tuxen.

1961; Neues iiber die von Ionescu beschriebenen Proturen.
In press.

Womersley, H., 1924: The Apterygota of the South-West of England.
Part II. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soe. (4) 6, pp. 166-172.
1927a: Notes on the British species of Protura, with descrip-
tions of new genera and species. Hint. Mo. Mag, 63, pp.
140-148.

1927b: A study of the larval forms of certain species of
Protura. Ent. Mo. Mag. 63, pp. 149-153.

1927¢: Notes on the mounting of Protura. Ent. Mo. Mag.
63, pp. 153-154.

1928a: Further notes on the British Species of Protura.
Ent. Mo. Mag. 64, pp. 113-115.

1928b: Additional notes on the Protura. Ent. Mo, Mag. 64,
pp. 230-233.

1929: Further British records of Protura. Ent. Mo. Mag.
65, p. 39,

1931: A South African species of Protura. Ann. South
African Mus. 30, pp, 89-91.

106

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1932: A preliminary account of the Protura of Australia.
Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S.W. 57, pp. 69-76.

1936: A new species of Protura from Australia. Ent. Mo.
Mag. 72, pp. 65-66.

1938: On two new species of Protura from Iowa, U.S.A.
Bull. Brooklyn Ent. Soc. 33, pp. 219-223.

1939: Primitive insects of South Australia. Adelaide,
322 pp. (Protura, pp. 279-289.)

STUDIES OF THE ACARINA FAUNA OF LEAF-LITTER
AND MOSS FROM AUSTRALIA

No. 1—A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF PHAULODINYCHIDAE,
CORBIDINYCHUS CORBICULARIS, FROM QUEENSLAND
(ACARINA, UROPODINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, HONORARY ACAROLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A new genus and species of Phaulodinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis, is described
from specimens from leaf-litter from Queensland. Females, males and tritonymphs are
known.

The basket-like hyaline fringe of long marginal setae is remarkable and resembles
superficially that of a somewhat similar genus and species Clausadinychus cristatus
described by Sellnick from Martinique. Comparison of the two species is discussed and
they are shown to belong to two different familes of Uropodina.

STUDIES OF THE ACARINA FAUNA OF LEAF-LITTER AND
MOSS FROM AUSTRALIA

No. 1.—A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF PHAULODINYCHIDAE,
CORBIDINYCHUS CORBICULARIS, FROM QUEENSLAND
(ACARINA, UROPODINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, Honorary Acarotogist, SoutH AvstRALIAN
Museum

Fig, 1-2

SYNOPSIS

A new genus and species of Phaulodinychidae, Corbidinychus
corbicularis, is described from specimens from leaf-litter from Queens-
land, Females, males and tritonymphs are known.

The basket-like hyaline fringe of long marginal setae is remarkable
and resembles superficially that of a somewhat similar genus and
species Clausadinychus cristatus described by Sellnick from Martinique.
Comparison of the two species is discussed and they are shown to
belong to two different families of Uropodina.

Genus Corbidinychus nov.

According to the key to the families of the Uropodina given by
Baker and Wharton, 1952, based on the studies of Tragardh and
Max Sellnick, this new genus, except for the exposure of the
tritosternum between coxae I and the position of the stigma more
directly opposite coxae III rather than between coxae IT and ITT, falls
into the family Phaulodinychidae Berlese 1917,

The body is dorso-yentrally compressed with the gnathosoma
completely hidden under the dorsum. The dorsal shield is entire and
occupies most of the dorsum, except for the marginal shields which
anteriorly are coalesced with the dorsal and posteriorly are reduced
to a pair of short narrower shields, and then a pair of narrow posterior
marginal shields. The dorsal shield is punctate and furnished with
fine slender tapering setae and a number of pores. The edge of the

108 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

marginal shield carries a double series of long nude curved setae which
extend all round the body except for the posterior one-fifth, The
more dorsal of the two series of setae are longer and about one-fifth
of the body width; all are furnished with broad irregular hyaline
laminae and together they form a hyaline wall braced by the setae,
like the sides of a basket. On the posterior filth of the margin the
hyaline membrane is continued but here the setae are in one row and
much longer, straight and not so tapering, Ventrally the leg
depressions are distinct. Leg | is furnished with a long ecarunele and
paired claws. The tritosternum has only two laciniae and is clearly
exposed between coxae T, The stigma is small, situated directly
opposite ecoxae IIT and the thin peritreme makes a right angled hend
before running to the margin in a double curve midway between coxae
TI and IM. The temale genital shield is elongated, with posterior
(runeate just in front of posterior margin of coxae IV; if reaches
anteriorly to middle of coxae IT. The metasternal shields are coalesced
with the sterno-genital shield. The anus is in the middle of the large
ventri-anal shield. In the male the genital orifice is situated between
coxae TV, and the anterior cover or operculum is hinged anteriorly and
carries a pair of long genital setae,

Corbidinychus corbicularis sp. nov,
Fig. 1, A-F, 2, A-H

Locality: Seven temales, four males and three tritonymphs
obtained by the Berlese funnel method from leaf-litter from the corner
of Tiaven Road and Upper Brookfield Road, Brookfield, Queensland,
22nd July, 1960 (coll. BE. YW. Derrick),

Types: Holotype female, allotype male, morphotype tritonymph,
and all paratypes in the collection of the South Australian Museum,

Description,
A rather small brownish, dorso-ventrally depressed species with

the gnathosoma completely hidden by the dorsum; with a double series
of long curved marginal setae forming in life the wall of a basket.

Female holotype. Almost circular in form; length 760p, width 702n,
Dorsum: Dorsal shield covering the whole of the dorsum except

for the marginal shields, finely punctate with 44 long, 72n, fine flexible
tapering setae of which the middle members of the second and third
transverse rows are not paired, almost every seta is accompanied by

WOMERSLEY—A PHAULODINYCHID FROM QUEENSLAND 109

Fig. 1, Corbidinychus corbicularis g. et sp.nov. A, ventral view of female; B, dorsum of

female; ©, gnathosoma, from below; D, sternal and genital shields of female, much

enlarged; H, sternal and genital shields us ante, much enlarged; F, tarsus of leg I of
emale.

110 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. Corbidinychus corbicularis g. et spmov. A, two of the long marginal setae
showing hyaline laminae; B, peritreme of female; C, tritosternum of female; D, chelicerae
of female; KH, tectum of female; F’, anus of female; G, genital shields of male, much
enlarged; H, genu, tibia and tarsus of leg II of male; I, ventral view of tritonymph
(marginal setae omitted).

WOMERSLEY—A PHAULODINYCHID FROM QUEENSLAND iu

a conspicuous rouud pore; the shield is 714» long by 608» wide, the
sides converge inwards slightly from just behind the middle, and
posteriorly there is a short incision, The marginal shields are 77
wide, coalesced anteriorly with the dorsal and reduced posteriorly
where they break up into a narrower shield and then into two posterior
marginal shields which are only about 20 in depth and 1684 wide,
the marginal shields carry a double series of approximately 27 on
each side of long curved tapering setae, the upper series anteriorly
extend to 164», and medially to 2344 before they curve backwards
reaching a total length of ca, 480, the shorter setae extend to 117»:
posteriorly about 6 setae on each side in a single series are straighter,
less tapering and to 351» long, all these setae are furnished with wide
irregular hyaline laminae and together they form a sort of basket
arrangement the sides of which stand up in life to a height of
about 234,

Venter: Gnathosoma, tritosternum and coxae I get in a distinct
camerostome, Tritosternum with elongate basal portion and a single
pair of ciliated laciniae. Sterna) shield as figured, 210» wide anteriorly,
coalesced with the endopodal and metasternal shields, with 6 pairs of
very minute setae, each accompanied by a pore, im addition a lyriform
pore just posterior of sternal setae T wlich are close to the anterior
margin, sterna] setae [I are just anterior of but elose to the apex of
the perigenital ring, then follows four other pairs of setae, the first of
which may be sternal setae LL, the last the metasternal setae, and the
two intermediate supersternal setae, all these are on the perigenilal
rim. The genital shield is 168 long by 96» wide and slightly overlaps
the perigenital ring apically, it is furnished with punctae. The
ventri-anal shield ig also punctate and carries 6 pairs of largely
pre-anal setae of 96 and 48» in length,

Gnathosoma: As figured, with four pairs of hypostomal setae
which he in a longitudinal line, the rostral pair are the longest and
tapering, the first post-rostral pair of medinm length and tapering,
the capituwlar anid second post-rostral pairs ave shorter and blunt
tipped; labial cornicles short and blunt pointed. Chelicerae as figured,
fixed digit the longer with two indistinct subapical teeth, Teetum a
long slender spike, slightly swollen medially with five pairs of spine-
lets. Palpi with five free segments, tarsi with two loug setae and
tined seta stout and two-pronged; genu with a single stout inner spine.

Legs: Generally slender, [ 5604 long, Il 515 long, TIT 55a,
IV 560», tarsi I slightly swollen in distal half with long carunele and

112, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

paired claws, and with a terminal slender seta longer than the segment,
tarsi II-[V with much shorter caruncle and paired claws.

Male allotype. Of the same general facies and dimensions as in the
female,

Dorsum: Dorsal and marginal shields as in female, dorsal 690p
long by 526. wide, marginal 82 wide; dorsal and marginal setae as
in the female.

Venter: Genital orifice between coxae IV, operculum hinged above
and furnished with a pair of setae 28» long, orifice 722 wide by 62
long; venter otherwise as in female, and as figured.

Legs: Of the same general structure and length as in the female
except that the genu, tibia and tarsus of leg I are furnished with much
longer and stouter setae as figured.

Tritonymph morphotype. General facies as in the female. Length
6554, width 4387p.

Dorsum: Marginal shields not manifest; dorsal shield oecupying
all the dorsum, with punetae and setae as in the female.

Venter: Sternal shield 172» wide anteriorly and 192» wide
posteriorly, 322» long, the posterior margin lightly concave and only
separated from the anterior margin of ventri-anal shield by a narrow
strip, with apparently only five pairs ol minute pores, of which the
anterior pair are lyriform, Ventri-anal shield roughly transversely
oval, 120” lony by 2602 wide, with five pairs of setae besides the
anal setae,

Legs: Depressions for the legs present but on the outside of the
depressions with two reticulate shields, one opposite coxae IV an
elongate rough oval, and another smaller opposite coxae II and IIT
earrying the peritreme. Otherwise as in the female, all legs about
equal, 3874» long.

Remarks, The peculiar and striking development of the marginal
setae of this mite is strongly reminiscent of the equally curious form
Clausadinychus cristatus Sellnick 1930 described from Martinique.
Both forms haye long setae forming a fringe on the margins of the
marginal shields. Clausadinychus, however, on the structure of the
dorsal shields belongs to the fanuly Prodinychidae whereas Corbi-
dinychus belongs to the Phanlodinychidae.

WOMERSLEY—A PHAULODINYCHID FROM QUEENSLAND 113

In the new genus and species the body is dorso-ventrally depressed
while in Clausadinychus it is elevated from front to rear, and the
marginal shields form a raised rim which is not so in Corbidinychus.
The long marginal setae in the Martinique species are finely ciliated,
in Corbidinychus nude and laminated. The setation of the dorsal
shield is different in the two forms. Leg I of Clausadinychus lacks
any ambulacral apparatus and in the male the genital orifice is longer
than wide and situated between coxae II.

REFERENCES

Baker E. W. and Wharton G, W., 1952: An introduction to Acarology.

Berlese, A., 1917: Intorno agli Uropodidae, in ‘‘Redia’’, 13 (1): 7-16.

Sellnick, M., 1930: Eine neue Milbe von Martinique (Acar. Uropod.).
Zool, Anz., 91 (5-8): 168-180.

Tragardh, I., 1942: Further contributions towards the Comparative
Morphology of the Mesostigmata—Where are the meta-
sternal shields of the Uropodina? Arkiv. f. Zool. 34A
(3) : 3-10.

——— 1944: Zur Systematik der Uropodiden. Entom. Tidsk, 65:
173-186.

1946: Contributions towards the comparative Morphology
of the Mesostigmata (Acarina) VII. The praesternal
hairs and the male genital aperture. Entom. Tidsk. 64
(3): 88-108.

STUDIES OF THE ACARINA FAUNA OF LEAF-LITTER
AND MOSS FROM AUSTRALIA

No. 2.-A NEW TRACHYTID MITE, POLYASPINUS
TUBERCULATUS, FROM QUEENSLAND
(ACARINA, TRACHYTINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, HONORARY ACAROLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A third species of the genus Polyaspinus Berlese, 1917, P. tuberculatus sp.nov., is
described from specimens collected from leaf-litter from Brookfield, Queensland. Adults
of both sexes as well as the larva, protonymph and tritonymph are known.

In his 1953 paper “A Revision of the Cohort Trachytina Tragardh 1938, etc.”, Dr. J. H.
Camin has shown on p. 365 that the family Polyaspinidae erected by Trigardh in 1941
for Polyaspinus cylindricus Berlese 1917 is not justified, and that the genus should be
placed in the Trachytidae. It was considered that the characters used by Triigardh to
separate the two families, Trachytidae and Polyaspinidae, were no more significant than
those used to separate the four genera included in the other family of Trachytina, the
Polyaspidae.

STUDIES OF THE ACARINA FAUNA OF LEAF-LITTER AND
MOSS FROM AUSTRALIA

No. 2.—A NEW TRACHYTID MITE, POLYASPINUS TUBERCU-
LATUS, FROM QUEENSLAND (ACARINA, TRACHYTINA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, Honorary Acarotocist, Sours AvsTRALIAN
Museum

Fig. 1-2

SYNOPSIS

A third species of the genus Polyaspinus Berlese, 1917, P. tuber-
culatus sp.nov., is deseribed from specimens collected from leaf-litter
from Brookfield, Queensland. Adults of both sexes as well as the
larva, protonymph and tritonymph are known.

Tn his 1953 paper ‘‘A Revision of the Cohort Trachytina Trigardh
1938, ete.’’, Dr, J. H, Camin has shown on p. 365 that the family
Polyaspinidae erected by Triigardh in 1941 for Polyaspinus cylindricus
Berlese 1917 is not justified, and that the genus should be placed in
the Trachytidae. It was considered that the characters used by
Traigardh to separate the two families, Trachytidae and Polyaspinidae,
were no more significant than those used to separate the four genera
ineluded in the other family of Trachytina, the Polyaspidae.

In his key (loc. cit. p. 867) to the families and genera of the
Trachytina, Camin separates the Trachytidae and Polyaspidae mainly
on the presence or absence of small claws on tarsi I. The first of these
families, in which claws are present on tarsi I, contains only the genera
Trachytes Michael 1894, and Polyaspinus Berlese 1917 which he
separates as follows :—

‘‘Body pyriform; metasternal shields narrow, elongate,
flanking genital apperture; epigynial shield trapezoidal;
dorsal marginal shields entire; dorsum covered by nymphal
skins.

Genus Trachytes,

116 RECORDS OF THE 5,A, MUSEUM

Body oval, pointed anteriorly; metasternal shields usually
reduced, rounded, at posterior corners of genital apperture;
epigynial shield ovoid, truncate posteriorly; dorsal marginal
setae on individual platelets; dorsum with fragments of
nymphal skins on shields only.

Genus Polyaspinus.’’

Until 1954 only the genotype of Polyaspinus, P. cylindricus Berl.
1917 was known but in that year Camin described a second species,
P. higginsi, {rom a solitary female specimen collected by Mr. Harold
Higgins in Idaho, U.S.A.

More recently, however, the present writer obtained a number of
specimens of a Polyaspid mite from a collection of leaf-litter from the
corner of Haven Road and Upper Brookfield Road, Brookfield,
Queensland, made by Dr. EB. H. Derrick, These mites have proved to
be a third species of Polyaspimus, and are here described and figured
as a new species, Polyaspinus tuberculatus sp.nov. The larval, proto-
nymphal and tritonymphal stages as well as both sexes were present.

Polyaspinus tuberculatus sp. nov,
Fig. 1, A-H; 2, A-H

Locality: In leaf-litter {rom the corner of Haven Road and Upper
Brookfield Road, Brookfield, Queensland, 20th July, 1960 (coll.
EB. H. Derrick),

Types: Holotype female, allotype male and morphotypes of larva,
protonymph and tritonymph, as well as six paratype males, and one
paratype tritonymph in the collection of the South Australian Museum,

Description.

Female holotype: Fig. 1, A-J, 2, A. A strongly sclerotised, deep
brownish species with fragments of nymphal skins adhering. Body
boat-shaped with vertex a rounded point terminating in a small bifid
tuberele, sides curved and posterior truncate with a pair of large
broadly conical processes, flattened dorsally with a slightly concave
smouth median strip, slightly convex ventrally, shields strongly
areolated, Length of idiosoma 1,088», width 678.

Dorsum: Vig. 1, B. With a large oval median shield, 749» long
by 433» wide, strongly sclerotised and areolate laterally but with a
clear smooth median strip, on the margins of this strip are 7 pairs
of small 24. setae each of which is accompanied by 2-3 small round

WOMERSLEY—A TRACHYTID FROM QUEENSLAND 17

Vy “
Nuss ‘
Aaa A

Nr,

Fig. 1, A-K—Polyaspinus tuberculatus sp.nov. A-J—Female, A, venter; B, dorsum;
C, gnathosoma ventral; D, mandible: HE, tectum; F, tined seta of palpal tarsus; G, short
stumpy sternal seta; H, dorsal marginal seta; I, tarsus 1; J, tarsus IL; KX, male, venter.

118 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pores, anteriorly on the lateral margins of the shield are four pairs of
strong setae, the anterior pair 24~ long and fine, the others to 48 lung,
continuing posteriorly ure 4 pairs of pores or ? setal bases; there are
two series of marginal setae, the inner is 8 in number on eaeh side,
generally situated singly on individual platelets although where two
platelets are coalesced two setae may be present, the anterior platelets
on each side are elongate and coalesced anteriorly of the dorsal shield
they carry the verticle setae of 43, length and one pair of short setae
24» long, the setae on the other platelets ave 1.2.1.1.1.1. to 96» long;
the onter series of marginal setae are 7 in number to 624 long and on
very small platelets, the anterior one on each side lacks a seta; between
the posterior end of the large anterior marginal platelet and the dorsal
shield is another small platelet on each side with seta 62» long, and at
the posterior end of the dorsal shield and in front of the anterolateral
angles ol the posterior shield is another pair of platelets with a
atronger seta to 110. long; the posterior shield is rectangular, strongly
areolated, 257» wide by 187» long, without setae except for 4 pair at
eaeli posterior eorner 72u long, the onter setae being on raised
tubercles; the rrr cei ends in two large conieal characteristic
prominences, G7. lony hy 72» wide, each furnished with a short curved
43» lone seta.

Venter: Fig. J, A. ritosternnin with broad rectangular basal
part exposed between coxac 1 and with paired laciniae; sternal shield
coalesced with the endopodals, parapodals and metapodals and
snrrounding the perigenital rim, posteriorly of coxae TV the combined
shield extends to a point midway on each side of the round ventri-anal
shield, the shield is strongly areolated exeent for a wide slightly raised
median strip extending from the posterior of the perigenital rim to the
anterior margin of the yentri-anal shield and a narrow strip which
runs from the posterior margin to coxae TV (fie. 2, A), sternal setae I
are close to the anterior margin and accompanied by a lyriform pore,
setae II are about midway between I and the apex of the genital rim,
IIE are in line with the angles hetween coxae ITT and IV, two super-
aternal sete lie close 10 the perigenital rim opposite coxae TIT, all
(hese setae are short and stumpy (fig. 1, G) and TL-IIT are diccomnpanied
by amall round pores; the median strip expands posteriorly and earries

5 pairs of setae, the anterior pair being short and stumpy and sub-
median in position, the second and third pairs are longer and gpine-
like and lateral on the margins of the strip, the fourth pair are short
and stnmpy and placed on strong tnbereles, the filth pair are at the
extreme end of the postero-lateral expansions of the median strip and

WOMERSLEY—A TRACHYTID FROM QUEENSLAND 119
H

Lary rse

Fig. 2. A-H—Polyaspinus tuberculaius sp.nov, A, genital area of female, enlarged;
B, same of male; C, tritonymph ventral; D, same dorsal; EH, protonymph ventral; F, same
dorsal; G, larva ventral; H, same dorsal.

120 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

also on strong tubercles and with a strong 96» spine-like seta, the
inner areolated portions of the shield carry two 40” setae on each side
and the outer areolated portions a stronger posterior tubercle with
seta 96. long; the ventri-anal shield is round, strongly areolate, 288»
long by 3074 wide, with the anus posterior of the mid-line and with
only the two pairs of anal setae; the metasternal shields are reduced,
rounded, and situated in the posterotateral corners of the perigenital
rim, they carry a strong seta 72» long and a small round pore.

The genital shield is oval with an excavate anterior and a truncate
hinged posterior margin, it overlaps the similarly shaped perigenital
rim anteriorly, and is without setae, it is 1924 Jong by 182« wide.
The stigmata are situated opposite coxae TIT with short peritreme
reaching to coxae IT.

Gnathosama: As figured; fig. 1, ©, With four pairs of hypostomal
setae in a longitudinal row, the posterior post-rostral and the rostral
setae about twice as long as the eapitular and anterior post-rostral
setae; the labial cornicles are short and broad.

The chelicerae, fig. 1, D as figured, the moveable digit is edentate
and shorter than the fixed digit, the apex of which is dentate. The
palpi, fig. 1, C are 5-segmented, the first free segment with two short
stout spines and the femora with an outer anterior spine, tarsus with
2-tined basal seta and long subterminal setae. The tectum is of
peculiar form (fig. 1, E) with eylindvical basal part topped by two
outwardly directed conival pieces,

Legs; Generally fairly slender and shorter (fig, 1, T), than the
body, I 702» long, tarsi T with a pair of small sessile claws and a long
192» terminal seta, IT 760» long, TIT 6438p, IV 819,; tarsi T1-IV (fig. Y, J),
with ambulaera of short carnnele, pointed pulvillus and strong paired
claws,

Male allotype. General facies as in the female. Length of idiosoma
1,110», width 642,,
Dorsum: Shields and chaetotaxy as in the female,

Venter: Fig. 1, K. Shields eoaleseed and areolated as in the
female. Genital shield (fig. 2, B) transversely oval, 96m wide by 82,
long, situated between coxae TIT and IV; sternal setae I and IT and
supersternal setae short and stumpy situated as in fig, 2, B; IIT in
line with the anterior margin of genital orifice and long with
accompanying pore, ouly one pair of supersternal stumpy setae
present; metasternal setae long and tapering, in line with posterior
of genital orifice, setae posterior of genital orifice as in the female but

WOMERSLEY—A TRACHYTID FROM QUEENSLAND 121

the first two pairs longer and pointed; otherwise as in the female in
all respects.
Gnathosoma: Palpi, chelicerae, and tectum as in the female.

Legs; Somewhat shorter than in the female, I 667» long, TT 702»
long, ITT 648», TV 760p.

Larva morphotype: Fig. 2, GH. Of oval shape. Length of
idiosoma 585p, width 3828,

Dorsum: Fig. 2, H with a large spear-head shaped median shield
331 by 250, wide, not reaching nearly to the anterior of dorsum,
ornamented with areolations as shown, furnished with 9 pairs of small
setae including the verticles, of these the three marginal pairs are
stumpy, the others pointed; on each side slightly posterior of the
vertex is a small irregular platelet without setae, posterior of the
lateral corners is another small platelet with a seta, in the posterior
angles of the spear-head are a few areolae, in a transverse row in
line with the posterior tip of the shield are four simple setae to 57
long; posterior shield transversely oval with flattened anterior and
posterior margins, 1444 wide by 48 long and areolate only on the
posterior hall, withont setae; posterior of this shield is a pair of sub-
marginal platelets bearing a short seta while laterad of these on each
side is a cluster of 5 slender tapering setae to 57» long,

Venter: As figured (fig. 2, G), with only a posterior ventri-anal
shield, podal and sternal shields absent, the sternal and metasternal
shields only represented by four pairs of minute setae; ventri-anal
shield reticulate, 144, wide by 72» long, with a straight anterior
margin, and with only the anal setae, anterior of this shield is a
procurved line of four short setae,

Legs: I 292» long, If 3474, IM 347, all rapidly tapering.

Protonymph morphotype: Fig. 2, E-F, Of oval shape, length of
idiosoma 585p, width 328,

Dorsum: Fig. 2, F. With a large median shield, smaller posterior
and a pair of elongate warginal shields, the median shield i is 3807p long
by 1784 wide, longitudinally rectangular except for the anterior third
which tapers to a rounded yertex, it is areolate on the lateral thirds
and smooth and slightly depressed medially, on the median strip it
earries 7 pairs of short stumpy setae including the verticles, and on the
lateral margins five pairs of setae; the anterior lateral marginal shields
are 216» long by 48» wide, without sctae, areolated and they carry the
stigmata and peritreme; the posterior shield is pentagonal, 120” long

122 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

hy 144, wide, areolate with a lateral marginal pair of spathulate setae
to 48” long; on the cuticle, between the median and lateral shields and
posterior thereof are 19 pairs of strong setae which probably represent
fhe marginal setae of the adults, of these 6-7 pairs lie between the
marginal shields and the median, the remainder to ca 38 long arise
from small tubercles and generally are enrved, tapering, with a short
lateral branch,

Venter: Wig, 2, 1%, Sternal shield elongate, widest anteriorly to
120, then contracting to 294 between eoxae I1, expanding to 62u
hetween coxae TIT and then tapering to a point at about midway of
coxae IV, length 192, the anterior corners are united with the
endopodal shields of coxae TL to forn short lobes, the shield is
furnished with one pair of sinall setae and two pairs of pores ? or
minute setae, the posterior tip is areolate; ventri-anal longer than
wide, 144» by 106p, elongate-ovoid but slightly constrieted in posterior
hall, aveolate except for the anal region, with one pair of minute setae
and the anal setae; metapodal shields free, large, triangular and
reticulate, 724 wide hy 120« long; on the euticle between coxae IV and
between the metapodal shields with 5 pairs of minute setae of which
the third and fourth pairs are in a transverse row, laterad of the
ventri-anal shicld on each side are four stronger curved setae on
tuhbereles,

Legs; 1 292» long, IT 3164, TIT 292n, IV 351,

Tritanymph morphotype: Wig. 2, C-D. Ovoid in shape, with conical
vertex, sides convex, posterior margin truncate with a pair of short
conical processes on each side of the inner ones as in the adults.
Length of idiosoma 950., width 526p.

Dorsum: Fig, 2, D. With a large inmedian shield as figured, with
conical vertex, convex sides and sinnate convex posterior margin,
sefation and areolation as in fhe adults; marginal setae in two series
of about 12 on cach side on the individual platelets of varying size
and accompanied hy 1-3 pores, setae to 57 long, outer series of 8
setae on each side to 48 Joug of whieh the first 5 are situated on the
elongate anterior marginal shields; posterior shield wider than long,
240 hy 1200, with eoneave anterior margin and conyex posterior
margin, areolate, withoul setae; a pair of setae 57 long, on small
platelets in front of the anterior corners of the posterior shield.

Venter: Wig. 2, C. Sternal shield of the same shape as in the
protonymph, with more extensive areolation, 192” wide anteriorly con-
(racting to 824 between eoxae TT and then expanding to 106» before

WOMERSLEY—A TRACHYTID FROM QUEENSLAND 123

tapering to a point midway of coxae LV, with 3 pairs of simple setae;
endopodal shields well developed and areolate ; metapodal shields large,
triangular, 312» long by 178 wide, areolate; ventri-anal shield shaped
like a conical flask with neck about one third of its height, areolate,
with two pairs of setae anterior of the anal region, which is slightly
posterior of the mid-length of the shield; between the sternal shield
and coxae Ill and IV are two pairs of setae; just anterior of the tip
of the ventri-anul shield is a transverse row of 4 setae of which the
outer members are on small platelets; laterad of the posterior half of
the ventri-anal shield are three pairs of strong setae, each on small
platelets and posterior of the shield is another similar pair.

Legs: 1 560» long, TT 5624, TIT 585, TV 595.

Remarks. While it is doubtful whether the form described here as
the tritonymph is really that stage or the deutonymph, the development
of the marginal shields suggests the tritonymph. No other stage has
been seen,

From the other known species of the genus, fuberculatus can be
readily distinguished by the posterior tubercular processes im both
the adult stages. It is also a somewhat larger species than either
cylindrieus or higginsi.

To Dr. BE. H. Derrick of the Queensland Institute for Medical
Researeli the writer expresses his sincere thanks for the collection of
many leaf-litter samples from which much interesting material such
as the above is being obtained.

REFERENCES
Berlese, A,, 1917: Centuria seconda di acari nnovi, Redia, 12; 181,
Camin, J. IL, 1953: A revision of the cohort Trachytina Tragardh,
1938 with the description of Dyscritaspis whartoni, a new
genus and species of Polyaspid mite from Tree Holes.
Bull. Chicago Aead. Sci. 9 (17): 362-367.
1954: A New Species of Uropodine Mite, Polyaspinus
higginsit (Mesostigmata; Trachytoidea; Trachytidae),
Bull, Chicago Acad. Sci. 10 (2): 15-41.
Trigirdh, I., 1941: Further contributions towards the comparative

morphology of the Mesostigmata, IIT On the Polyaspidae
Berl. Zool. Bidrag Frau Uppsala, 20: 345-357.

A NEW RECORD OF THE LITTLE KNOWN CALOTRACHYTES
SCLEROPHYLLUS (MICHAEL, 1908) FROM NEW ZEALAND
(ACARINA, POLYASPIDAE), WITH DESCRIPTION OF
THE MALE AND NYMPH

By H. WOMERSLEY, HONORARY ACAROLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The Trachytid mite Calotrachytes sclerophyllus (Michael) from New Zealand hitherto
only known from the unique female in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) is redescribed and
figured from two further females in the collection of the South Australian Museum. The
unknown male and nymph are also described from single specimens in the same
collection.

The genus Calotrachytes was erected 1n 1917 by Berlese as a sub-genus of Polyaspis for
the unique female specimen described by Michael 1908 from New Zealand as
Trachynotus sclerophyllus. Apart from the solitary female in the British Museum (Nat.
Hist.) no further records of the species appear to have been published nor has it been
refigured. However, in 1953 Dr. J. H. Camin in his paper “A Revision of the Cohort
Trachytinae Tragardh, 1938, etc.”, gave a detailed generic diagnosis of Calotrachytes
based on a study of the type made for him by Dr. G. O. Evans of the British Museum.

A NEW RECORD OF THE LITTLE KNOWN CALOTRACHYTES
SCLEROPHYLLUS (MICHAEL, 1908) FROM NEW ZEALAND
(ACARINA, POLYASPIDAE), WITH DESCRIPTION OF THE
MALE AND NYMPH

By H. WOMERSLEY, Honorary Acarotocist, SourH AUSTRALIAN
Museum

Fig. 1

SYNOPSIS
The Trachytid mite Calotrachytes sclerophyllus (Michael) from
New Zealand hitherto only known from the unique female in the
British Museum (Nat. Hist.) is redeseribed and figured from two
further females in the collection of the South Australian Museum.
The unknown male and nymph are also described from single
specimens in the same collection.

The genus Calotrachytes was erected in 1917 by Berlese as a sub-
genus of Polyaspis for the unique female specimen described by
Michael 1908 from New Zealand as Trachynotus sclerophyllus. Apart
from the solitary female in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) no further
records of the species appear to have been published nor has it been
refigured. However, in 1953 Dr. J. H. Camin in his paper ‘*A Revision
of the Cohort Trachytinae Traigardh, 1938, ete.’’, gave a detailed
generic diagnosis of Calotrachytes based on a study of the type made
for him by Dr. G. O. Evans of the British Museum.

Camin’s diagnosis is as follows: ‘‘Metasternal setae on small
metasternal shields behind posterolateral margins of epigynial shield,
within perigenital rim. Epigynial shield rectangular with rounded
corners, slightly longer than broad, extending from behind anterior
margin of coxae IV almost to middle of coxae I; apparently
articulated within perigential rim, anterior to metasternals. Genital
apperture completely surrounded by narrow perigenital rim, which
bears sternal setae II and III and the pseudosternals. Sternal setae I
on sclerotized anterior margin of sternal shield. Metapodal and anal

126 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

shields fused, forming a single shield covering ventral opisthosoma,
with transverse row of four very large ventral setae anterior to anus.
Tritosternal lacina with several short branches, without long setules.
Peritremes extending from stigmata opposite coKHe Ill to middle of
coxae TI, then direeted outward to margins of body. Dorsal median
shield coyering most of the dorsum, posterior dorsal shield small,
little more than one-tenth the length of the median dorsal shield,
without setae. Marginal setae very large, leaf-like, free or on
independent platelets. Corniculi moderately long, blade-like reaching
slightly beyond distal margins of palpal femora. Chelicerae as in
Dipolyaspis; fixed digit slightly longer than moveable digit and with
hooked tip. Palpal tibiae and tarsi insensibly fused. Male and
immature stages unknown.

Type Trachynolus sclerophyllus Michael, 1908’.

Recently in the collection of the South Australian Museum the
writer has located four specimens labelled tentatively as ‘‘ Polyaspidae,
gen et sp.nov.”? sent to hirn some years ago by Mr. EB. D. Pritchard of
Manurewa, New Zealand, These were collected from moss or leaf
debris by means of the Berlese funnel,

Although the preparations are not now in the best of condition,
inainly through loss of some of the setae, the specimens ean definitely
be identified as Michael’s speeies, The female agrees fully’ with
Camin’s generic diagnosis and with the figures, especially the excellent
dorsal view, given by Michael. Hitherto the male and immature stages
were unknown but besides two females one preparation is that of a
male and one » ?deutonymph, The male also agrees well with Camin’s
diagnosis execpt lor the genital shields and also agrees dorsally with
Michael’s figure of the female dorsum, The specimen is deseribed
herewith, as is also the nymph. The generic diagnosis of Camin is
modified to inelude the male,

Genus Calotrachytes Berlese

Berlese, A., 1917: Centuria prima di acari imovi, Redia 12: 28 (as a
subgenus of Polyaspis),

Type Trachynolus sclerophyllus, Michael 1908.

Camin, J. 1T,, 1958: A Revision of the Cohort Trachytina Trigardh

1938, with the Description of Dyscritaspis whartoni, a new Genus

and Species of Polyaspid mite from Tree Holes. Bull. Chicago
Aead, Sei., 9 (17): 335-385,

WOMERSLEY—CALOTRACHYTES FROM NEW ZEALAND 127

Calotrachytes sclerophyllus (Michael)

Trachynotus sclerophyllus Michael 1908: Unrecorded Acari from New
Zealand. J. Linn. Soc. London—Zool. 30; 145-147, pl. 17, fig. 4,
pl. 21, fig. 25,

Calotrachyles sclerophyllus Berlese 197, Redia 12: 28.

Calolrachyles sclerophyllus Camin 1958. Bull, Chicago Aead. Sei.
9 (17) + 3835-385,

Text fig. A-T.

Loeality: Two females and allotype male from moss, Waimamaka,
New Zealand, 21st. October, 1938 (coll, E. D, Pritchard); paratype
male and morphotype nymph from Ohau Lavin, New Zealand, 25th
November, 1936 (coll, H, D. P.).

Types; All specimens in the South Australian Musenm.

Description.

Female, The two specimens studied are somewhat longer than the
type; the lengths are 1,198" and 1,112” and the widths 936. and 877»
(Michael gives 930p and 580a"). Otherwise they fit well the generic
diagnosis of Camin and the detailed description of Michael. The
dorsal shield measures 877» long by 596 wide (second specimen 760.
by 585 and the posterior dorsal shield 257p wide by 117 long (257
by 98)). The marginal dorsal setae are damaged but much as in
Michael’s fig. 4, pl. 17. The sternal shield is 351. wide anteriorly
(304), 560u long (468), and 898 wide posteriorly (3874) in a line
between posterior margins of coxae TV; it is furnished with 4 pairs
of strong setae of which sternal setae IT are ?» long, straight, blunt
(332) and 105 apart situated near anterior margin; sternal setae TI
and [1] and a pair of supersternal setae are situated on the perigenital
rim, I] about level with the tip of the orifice, IIT just posterior thereof
and the supersternal about three times as far back, these setae are
lone and curved, II and III 38» long and supersternal 624. The
metasternal shields are close to the posterior of the perigenital rim
and their seta is strong and curved to 72» long. The genital orifice
is 2924 long by 210» wide (246. by 187~), The large ventri-anal
shield is 936% wide by 491» long (880 by 468); the two pairs of
setae are about level with the middle of the anus and not slightly
anterior thereof as stated by Michacl and Camin, they are about
144u long by 48» wide. The gnathosoma is as figured with four pairs

(1) AN the measurements given here are on the mouuted specimens,

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

128

* One,
O05 OF
paae!

6
ope

i=;
<=
e

2S.

ro ay:
aes
“2

2
ga"
Bom
ez
3-3
eg:i
cig
2
42.
2
oe
has
ake
Oo wap
Bon
[6
aey
435
ag
~ a
ol
an
a

LE, gnathosoma ventral
, male, sternal and gen

Fig. 1. Calotrachytes sclerophylius (Michael).

ae
Sa
2)
aa
a
cb
ae
ans)
ne
5
oh
a)

WOMERSLEY—CALOTRACHYTES FROM NEW ZEALAND 129

of hypostomal setae of which the capitular pair are short and thick
and branched, the posterior post-rostral pair fine and slender, the
anterior post-rosiral pair stout, and the rostral pair long and slender
almost reaching the tip of palpal genu; the palpal femur is furnished
with two stout setae, the tibia and tarsus are not insensibly fused
as stated by Camin but quite differentiated, The chelicerae, tectum
and tritosternum are as described and here figured. ‘The legs are as
has been described, and the lengths, from the second and smaller
specimen only are I 772 long, II 842», TIT 702”, LV 9236p,

Male allotype. Of the same general facies as in the female; length
1170p, width 901,

Dorswn: As in the female. Anterior dorsal shield 959» long
by 630p wide, posterior dorsal shield 292» wide by 117 long. Marginal
dorsal setae as in female.

Venter: Sternal shield 351» wide anteriorly, 550 long and 362 wide
posteriorly, with 5 pairs of setae including the supersternals and meta-
sternals but these setae are smaller than in the female. The genital
orifice is wider than long 91 by 77 and is situated between coxae III.
The ventri-anal shield is as in the female, 7954 wide by 445» loug-
The tritosternum, gnathosoma, ete, as in the female, The legs are
also much as in the female but I and III are relatively longer, the
lengths being T 1,100p, If 1,048», TIT 994p, TV 9386p.

Nymph, ? Deutonymph. General facies as in the female; length
9122, width 749;.

Dorswn: Median dorsal shield somewhat arrow-head shaped, 468,
long, sides diverging to a width of 421 at about on a level with coxae
HII and then curving inwards to a rounded apex, with large irregular
pitting as figured, antero-lateral of the dorsal shield with an elongate
pair of shields and postero-laterally with another pair 269» long by
117» wide, posterior of the median shield with a small shield 220 wide
by 101p long, posterior of this shield with four short blunt setae,
marginal dorsal setae as figured,

Venter: With a small elongate tongue-shaped sternal shield,
reaching to posterior of coxae IIT and constricted between coxae IL,
144. wide anteriorly and 237» long with three pairs of minute setae
on shield. Metapodal shields triangular 2014 long by 86 wide. Anal
shield as figured, as long as 240» wide,

Legs: Much as in female, I 7, II 919» long, ITT 702n, IV ?

A NEW SPECIES OF CHLENIAS (LEPIDOPTERA, BOARMIIDAE)
ON ACACIA ANEURA, WITH SOME CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN
NATIVE BELIEFS ABOUT IT

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, ACTING DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Chlenias inkata, a new Boarmiid moth with an apterous female, apparently adapted for
existence in an arid environment, is described and figured from Haast Bluff, Central
Australia. Its life history on common mulga (Acacia aneura) is outlined, and some
aboriginal Australian beliefs abut its larvae are given..

During field work with the University of Adelaide Anthropological Expedition to Haast
Bluff Station, in the Western MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, August, 1957, many
Boarmiid larvae were noticed feeding on the needle-like phyllodes of mulga, Acacia
aneura.

A NEW SPECIES OF CHLENIAS (LEPIDOPTERA, BOARMIIDAE)
ON ACACIA ANEURA, WITH SOME CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN
NATIVE BELIEFS ABOUT IT

By NORMAN B,. TINDALE, Actine Dirzoror, SoutH AvstTRALIAN
Museum

Fig. 1-9

SUMMARY

Chlenias inkata, a new Boarmiid moth with an apterous female,
apparently adapted for existence in an arid environment, is described
and figured from Haast Bluff, Central Australia. Its life history on
common mulga (Acacia anewra) is outlined, and some aboriginal
Australian beliefs about its larvae are given.

INTRODUCTION

During field work with the University of Adelaide Anthropological
Ixpedition to Haast Bluff Station, in the Western MacDonnell Ranges,
Central Australia, August, 1957, many Boarmiid larvae were noticed
feeding on the needle-like phyllodes of mulga, Acacia aneura,

When disturbed either by such sounds as the clapping of hands,
by shouting, or by throwing a stick into the trees, many hundreds of
the larvae would drop down suddenly from the branches on long
silken threads so that the tree instantly seemed to develop a silken
aura. The effect was spectacular when many larvae were present.
These larvae would remain suspended perhaps three to six feet from
their previous perches. After an interval as long as 10 or 15 minutes
they would hau! themselves up again to their feeding positions.

Observations were made, specimens of the larvae placed in KAAD
solution, and, prior to returning to Adelaide, some 25 live larvae were
collected on 5th September, 1957. By this date they were far fewer
in numbers. Those taken alive all appeared to be in the last larval
instar and were from 20 to 25 mm. in length, with head diameters
approaching or slightly exceeding 3 mm. In Adelaide these larvae
were fed on phylodes of mulga which had been kept fresh in a humid
atmosphere until required.

132 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

Most of the larvae continued to feed until early October. All but
two of them then rested in what appeared to be a pre-pupal phase for
about three days, and had pupated by 5th October. The remaining
two were still feeding on that day and later proved to be ones which
were parasitised, They were active for several more days. From
them appeared Tachinid fly larvae which pupated outside their hosts’
bodies.

Pupation of the Chlenias larvae took place in shallow loose sand
in the breeding box without indication either of a cocoon or of the
spinning of silk,

The pupae had a tough cuticle, were pale creamy white, and
darkened quickly to a deep chestnut brown. They were kept at normal
indoor temperatures ut Blackwood, near Adelaide, through the
following months.

At the end of a year (August 1958) a Tachinid fly emerged; the
other fly pupa died. At some time between August 1958 and January
1960, when T returned from a long visit to the United States, a Braconid
wasp parasite wus found to have emerged from one of the pupae, Of
the remainder, at that date, some still lay dormant, others were
apparently dead. They were tested by placing them against the tip
of the tongue; seven of those which seemed distinctly cold to the touch
of this member were alive.

Tn August 1960, after two years and ten months, two male moths
emerged ag adults and were discovered alive, but moribund, in the
breeding box on 14th August. One was fully winged, the other was
crippled and three of its wings were not fully expanded, Some time
afterwards a wingless female emerged and freed itself from its pupal
integument before suceumbing. It was not noticed until after it had
died. A second female was then found dead in a fully developed
condition within its broken pupal shell, and further dead male examples
were dissected from their pupal skins.

When this paper was being prepared for press in January 1961
two of the original pupae were still alive after three years and three
montlis.

Brief reference was made to the larvae of this moth, as attacking
Acacia aneura, in a paper on the vegetation of Haast Bluff, by Cleland
and Tindale (1959, p. 184). In that paper they were tentatively
identified as Geometrids, related to Amelora, Rearing of the adult
moths now makes possible a more detailed account of the species and
warrants giving details of its life history.

TINDALE—CHLENIAS FROM CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 133

Chlenias inkata sp. nov.

4 Antennae strongly bipectinate, pectinations long, slender,
delicately haired, those near middle of length of antenna are about
eight times as long as the diameter of shalt; long pectinations continue
nearly to the apex, Head, patagia, and tegulae clothed in pale fawn
hairs; head with face truncate, dark brown, tips of palpi just visible
from ahove; abdomen pale brownish-fawn with long spine-like hairs of
two sizes overlying more normal seales, the spine-like hairs heeome less
obvious towards tip of abdomen, Forewings broad, well rounded, apex
rounded, lightly sealed, pale brownish-fawn with isolated flecks and
scattered groups of darker brown scales; these are conccutrated into
slightly more obvious groups on a subterminal part of each of the veins
from near the anal angle to (iim at about #sth—these darker scales
continue in diminishing numbers on each vein to apex, with traces of
other lesser groups extending towards costa at “sths; fringes con-
edlorous, arial margin clothed with longer pale silky hairs, Hindwings
paler, sub-hyaline, delicately scaled, with fine hairs along the veins;
fringes also delicately sealed, coneolorous, Wing length 14 mm.
Kixpanse 30 mm.

° Antennae filamentous, vot pectinate, uot markedly tapering
exeept near apex. Head with front rounded, smooth, dark brown,
palpi not visible from ahove. Wings absent or with ouly small traces
of wing buds, Patagia and tegulae with Joug dark brown hairs, legs
normal, smooth, clothed with firmly adpressed greyish-lawn seales,
Abdomen stout, with smooth integument, clothed in long, straight,
spine-like brown hairs each posteriorly directed; normal scales
virtually absent; each abdominal segment somewhat laterally prodneed
(in the dried ont condition); these apparent processes become larger
on the 6th and 7th segments; the last named process is semicirenlar
and seemingly strongly chitinised, These may be post-mortem effects,
Total length 11 mm.; greatest wulth of abdomen 4 mm,

Loc.: Ceutral Australia; Tlaast Bhiff Station, at 2,000ft., collected
by N. B. Tindale, as larvae, in September 1957 and reared out in 1960,

Material; Type male (pupated October 1957, emerged Angust
1960) and allotype female (pupated October 1957, taken dead from
remains of pupal skin): a paratype male with crippled wings (pupated
October 1957, emerged Angust 1960) and other specimens dissected
from dead pupae, inclnding a paratype female which died just after
emergenee, Some larvae and pupae are preserved in aleobo] and there
are six slides of parts of bodies and genitalia preparations. All are
registered as No, 1.19110 in the South Australian Museum,

134 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 1-5. Chlenias inkata Tindale. Fig. 1, male, Haast Bluff, Central Australia, 2,000ft.;

Hig. 2, female, same details; Fig. 3, larva of last instar, September, 1957; Fig. 4,

anterior view of head; Fig. 5, pupa of a male (where a seale is shown alongside a drawing
it is to be read in millimetres).

TINDALE—CHLENIAS FROM CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 135

The drawing of the male (fig, 1) is based principally on the holo-
type, but as the antennae of this specimen were damaged before the
drawing was inked in, details were completed with the aid of other
males, principally an example marked B, which has been prepared as
a slide mount. The illustration of the female (fig. 2) is based on the
allotype.

The adult male moth is a dismal looking and obscure member of
its genus, In general appearance it seems to be nearest to Chlenias
cyclosticha Lower (1915, p. 477), which was deseribed from a single
male taken at Broken Hill, New South Wales, in June, at a light; the
type and only known specimen is in the South Australian Museum
where its revistration numbers are L.4389 and 1.18216.

C. inkata differs from C. cyclosticha in its smaller size, shorter,
less markedly pectinate antennae, shorter palpi and in its general
appearance. The male genitalia differ in some essential points which
are detailed below; sufficient basic resemblances remain to suggest that
they fall into the same section of the genus Chlenias.

‘The two male genitalia drawings of Chlenias inkata (fig. 6-7) are
based on a paratype specimen marked B, dissected from its pupal shell,
The drawing was checked against a second example (specimen A),
which also had been dissected from its pupal integument.

Fig. 6-9. Fig. 6) CAlenias intata Tindale, dorsal view of male genitalia; Fig, 7, ditto,

oblique view to show form of wnens; Fig, 8, Chlentas cyclostioha Lower, oblique view of

unvus of mile genitalia; Fig, 9, ditto, dorsal view of mule genitalia (the seale to be
read in millimetres).

Viewed from the dorsal surface the male genitalia of C. inkata
differ rom those of C. cyclosticha in the broader uncus, tapering to an
acute point instead of a more rounded one. The harpes of C. inkata
are simple, less expanded and with less evidence of flanges. The penis

136 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

appears more slender. In oblique view the uneus also appears more
slender in C, mkata than in C. cyclosticha and rounded at the tip
instead of sharp-pointed, thus reversing the appearance as viewed from
above. In the two oblique views given, unens and its connections are
drawn prineipally to show the form of the apex.

The hairs in C. cyclotricha appear stouter than in C. inkata but
this character must be used with caution since the mode of preparation
disturbs the orderliness of such hairs.

The genitalia slide preparations were cleared in caustic potash,
imbedded in P. V. A, in standard hollow cells, and ringed with a
polyvinyl glue preparation.

In general the genitalia of C. inkata seem more compressed or
widened when viewed from above while the corresponding parts of
C, cyclosticha are more slender when viewed from this direction.

Possibly C. eyclosticha and ©. inkata represent ancestral races
whieh through long isolation from each other have become sufficiently
different to be regarded as species. If this opinion is not correct and
the differences have been unduly magnified they may at the least be
regarded either as valid races or ends of a eline of a desert species
living on both the northern and the southern sides of the helt of
maximum aridity in the Australian sub-tropies, From the appearance
of genitalia it can be deduced that these two species are relatively
more closely related to each other than either are to the members of
the section of the genus which contains Chlenias pint Tindale
(1928, p. 43).

To searching for the life history of C. cyclosticha larvae should be
sought on several species of Acacia related to A. anewra which occur
at Broken Hill. Many Haast Bluff larvae were in the penultimate and
early last instar phases of their life when first taken in August, It
is possible, therefore, that, as in so many other species of Chlenias,
the adults of C, imkata laid their eggs daring an early month of winter,
either June or early July, Lower’s specimen of C. eyclosticha was
taken at ight in June; this is the same month in which the moths of
southern species such as (. banksiaria Le G., C. melanoxysta Meyrick,
and C, pini Tindale make their principal appearances in temperate
Australia.

Tn view of the general relationship evident between the males of
the two species, the female of C’. cyclosticha may also prove to be an
apterous formn.

TINDALE—CHLENIAS FROM CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 137

IMMATURE STAGES OF C. INKATA

The larva drawn (fig. 3) was in the last instar, and measured
23 mm. in length with a head diameter of just over 38 mm, If was
fixed in KAAD solution and preserved in aleohol. Larvae, apparently
in the previous instar appear similar but tend to lack a rather con-
spieuous median dorsal pracess which is present on the posterior part
of the abdomen of the adult larva.

The adult, actively feeding larva is smooth skinned and naked
except for the inconspicuous basic hairs. The general colour is a
dull green, an effeet resulting from a serics of ronghly longitudinal
lines of dark olivaceous green overlying a ereamy yellow background.
On the dorsum the longitudinal lines are more widely spaced and on
the ventral surface the larva is pale all over. On the sides the dark
lines tend to be broken up and to become an intricate pattern of
marblings. The patterns are seemingly nof alike on any two
individuals; soine tend to look maze-like and others show intricate
designs. The anterior part of the head has a vertically placed, dark
brown, almost black band, on cach side; the posterior part of the head
is pale creamy-yellow; the ocelli and the principal hairs on the head
tend to he ringed with patehes of the darker colours. The pro-legs are
pale ereamy yellow with the segmental margins and the parts facing
forwards touched with dark brown. The abdominal process meutioned
above, when viewed from the side, usually appears dark brown, or
almost black; the anal claspers are pale creamy yellow but usually are
blotched with a pattern in brown pigment.

The tully fed larva becomes shortened, rather stout and swollen,
and loses ifs bright colours. It remains almost immobile for several
days in a prepupal status before pupation takes place.

The pupa as drawn (fig. 5) is that of a male. 1t has a length of
11 mm, and a ¢reatest diameter close to 4.5 mm, The pupa is chestnut
brown in colour, ig strongly cuticled, and has a shining or polished
appearance. When drawn it was dead and had dried out; pupae whieh
were atill alive alter 34 years could only be distinguished from it by
the tongue test. The wing cases show obscure pittings between the
veins: in addition the thoracic segments and middle portions of each
abdominal segment are pitted with large and deep, cirenlar
impressions,

A female pupa is similar to that of the male and also is 11 mm.
in length, but appears larger owing to the slightly greater diameter
of the abdomen (4.8 mm.). Normal wing cases are present, 00

138 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

apparent reduction of wing is registered in the pupal integument. The
antennal sheath is more slender than in the male and indieates lack of
pectinations by a lesa compley patterning of the surface,

Since the moth itself is known only by these bred examples,
nothing can be recorded of the habits of the free living prepupal larva,
the type of shelter sought for pupation, or the time and circumstances
in which the adult stage is passed. The pupal skin itself is stout and
may be ant-proof. The female is strongly cluthed in firmly adpressed
spine-like hairs and in this respect seems to depart rather markedly
from kindred species of Chlenias with normally winged females. The
presence of these features may suggest that the moth is equipped for
close association with honey ants, which throng (he same trees.
Aboriginal Australian beliefs regarding the larva of this moth, which
are detailed below suggest they have observed a close association
between ants and the larvae, even though their biological observations
and dednetions, in other respects, are rather wide of the mark,

The conditions in which the pupae were kept at Blackwood, 850ft.
above sca level in latitude 35° S, were artificial, and in no elose way
resembled the climate of their home near Haast Bluff, at 2,000ft.
elevation in latitude 23° 30° 8. It would therefore be unwise to draw
any firin eanelusions from their long endurance as pupae and from the
emergence of some of the survivors aller nearly three years in a
dormant condition, ‘Their persistence, however, does hint at one of
the possible mechanisms of survival in the relatively arid surroundings
of the MacDonnell Ranges.

Most members of the Chlenias group are so characteristic of the
cool moist temperate areas of Anstralia that it was a distinct surprise
to find this species in Central Australia and to find it so curiously
adapted to its desert mountain environment.

It will he interesting to learn whether the species is confined to
the mulga plains at higher altitudes within the MacDonnell Ranges,
where rainfall, although very unreliable, is much higher than on the
open desert plains to the south, or whether it has been able to extend
its domain over the whole extent of the mulga covered lake plains of
the desert interior of Australia. he presence at Broken Hill, on the
south side of the belt of maximum aridity of what appears to be a
separate species, C, cyclosticha, may suggest that C. inkata is not now
able to live over the whole area of mulga desert but may be a relict
form confined to areas of less confirmed aridity within Central
Australia,

TINDALE—CHLENIAS FROM CENTRAL AUSTRALIA 139

NATIVE BELIEFS ABOUT CHLENIAS INKATA

In Aranda mythology there is an association between the larvae
of this moth, the mulga tree, the jeramba [’jeramba], honey ant
(Melophorus bagoti Lubbock) and the lataruba [‘lataruba] or spur-
winged plover (Lobibyx novaehollandiae) leading to a strange acniix
ture of observed fact, wrong association and false deduction,

The Chlenias larva is called kapadada ['kapada:da] or ngarda
[’Mardal] and it is regarded as the inkata [‘iykata] or totemie ‘leader
(colloquially translated as ‘‘the boss’’) of the jeramba or honey ant.
In their belict kapadada appears and causes little globules of honey
dew to develop near the bases of the young plryllodes of Acacia aneura
shrubs and trees. When one looks at the fresh growth, in August,
against the sunlight, these little globules of sap, which natives call
otandja [‘lutandja] glisten in the light,

They are a natural secretion from a gland near the base of the
young phyllode. In Aranda, belief, these globules, under the compelling
force of the inkata, become larger, form along the stems and become
lac seales (Austrotachardia acaciae Maskell), which yield sugar, These
also are called Intandja. Jeramba honey ants gather the sap from the
mulga phyllodes and the sugar of the lerp seales. They take it all
below ground under the ‘direction’’ of the inkata, to feed their passive
companions which become the living containers for the honey which
they store, The natives do not associate inkata with any adult
moth. They recognize that the larva goes into the ground near the
ant nests and becomes a hard-shelled pupa, This they falsely associate
with a stage of honey ant life,

Following the season of simmer rains there is an appearance of
sap in these mulga trees; at the same time the early stages of the life
eyeles of a whole suite of associated insects appear together, It is not
altogether surprising that the aborigines with a less than complete
interest in these inseet life histories should incorrectly observe, and
falsely entwine them into their beliefs.

There is said to be an Aranda song series which describes the part
taken by kapadada, in a human form, in the development of the story
of the jeramba or honey ant totem, The spur-winged plover man also
plays an active part in the same story.

The Kukatja have similar beliefs about the Chlenias larva and call
it [‘pun:u ‘parutji:ta] where [’pun su] is a word meaning stick or tree.
Tn the previously mentioned brief account of the botany of the Haast
Bluff area (Cleland and Tindale 1959, p, 134) this Kukatja name was
unfortunately given in error as [’pun:a ‘parufji:ta].

140 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES CITED

Cleland, J. B. and Tindale N. B., 1959: Native names and uses of
plants at Haast Bluff, Central Australia. Trans. Roy.
Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 82, pp. 123-140.

Lower, O. B., 1915: Descriptions of new Australian Lepidoptera.
Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S. Wales, Sydney, 40, p. 477.

Tindale, N. B., 1928: Species of Chlenias attacking pines (Lepidoptera,
Family Boarmiidae). Records of S. Austr. Mus.
Adelaide, 4, pp. 43-48.

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

PART IV —- THE DISTRIBUTION AND STATUS OF CENTRAL
AUSTRALIAN SPECIES

By H. H. FINLAYSON, HONORARY CURATOR OF MAMMALS,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The recent appointment by the Commonwealth Government of a full-time biological
officer based on Alice Springs, with a major commitment in field work on mammals in
Central Australia, draws attention again to the paucity of published information on the
above heads upon which such work may be based. Under modern conditions the
opportunities of making further contributions in this field are now much less favourable
than formerly, owing to the growing rarity of most species and to the decline and changed
interests of the aboriginal population, formerly one of the most prolific sources of such
information. To augment the published data may well help to reduce this disability, and
(departing from the planned sequence of this series of papers) the present contribution
has been compiled with that end in view.

ON CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

PART IV—THE DISTRIBUTION AND STATUS OF CENTRAL
AUSTRALIAN SPECIES

By H. H. FINLAYSON, Honorary Curator or Mammats, SoutH
AvustTraALiIan Museum

Fig. 1
CONTENTS

Page.
¥, Introduction 2 2.8 40) 4. bt ee fs AAT
2. The sources of the information summarized . .. 142
3. The subdivision of the area... .. .. .... .. .. 144
4. Factors influencing the present status of species 149
5. Systematic presentation of the data .. .. .. .. 152
(a) Ornithodelphia .. .. .. .. .. .. «. .. 152
(Sy, Didelanig. 4.7 o- ge aE ie ts oie LBS
(c) Monodelphia .. .. .. .. .. «. «. +s +s 170
G2-SOriMAT i. 5 al sien We A pp eats 44 + CBD
Ti. LaSteok POTCFONCES: nv. ka wear Si ote aah ee she He EBD

Appendix 1. Alphabetical list of aboriginal names
udert in- dent Se Je oe ee ee oe ay ae ge ae TBE

Appendix 2, List of English vernacular names for
the species discussed .. .. .. .. «se. ee wee 19

INTRODUCTION

The recent appointment by the Commonwealth Government of a
full-time biological officer based on Alice Springs, with a major commit-
ment in field work on mammals in Central Australia, draws attention
again to the paucity of published information on the above heads
upon which such work may be based, Under modern conditions the
opportunities of making further contributions in this field are now
much less favourable than formerly, owing to the growing rarity of

142 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

most species and to the decline and changed interests of the aboriginal
population, formerly one of the most prolific sources of such informa-
tion, ‘To augment the published data may well help to reduce this
disability, and (departing from the planned sequence of this series of
papers) the present contribution has been compiled with that end
in view.

Its primary object is to give in summary form the relevant results
of field work carried out by the present writer in a series of journeys
in Central Australia in two widely separated periods, namely 1931-1935
and 1950-1956, during which a total of 27 months were spent in the
country, The work of the earlier period was based chiefly in the
south-western sector, in the great confluent Aboriginal Reserves of
South, West and Central Australia and at a time when conditions
there were still virgin and very favourable for the purpose, both the
mammal fauna and the aboriginal population, being virtually
undisturbed, In the later period the work was extended to districts
further north and east, mostly in areas of pastoral occupation where
aborigines, though still present, were detribalized in varying degree,

THE SOURCES OF THE INFORMATION SUMMARIZED

The information on each species is arranged in the following
sequence :—

Aboriginal names;

General distribution;

Present status;

Material personally examined;

Other remarks;
and it embodies four categories of data, as follows :—
1. Ten Resuvrs or Persona Onservation anp CoLumorme.
2. Tae Resuurs or INterroaation or ABURIGINES.

In recent years there has been in some quarters overseas a
tendency to depreciate the value of the testimony of native peoples in
such matters. Undoubtedly if is easy to be misled by casual methods
of enquiry and possible to be misled even when the most careful
methods are employed. But the systematic interrogation of aborigines
in this country has yielded so much of value in the past, that no-one
with a knowledge of the special conditions which obtain in Central
Anstralia—where hunting was formerly the sole means of subsistence
of the aboriginal population and followed with a marvellously

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 143

cultivated techniqne—wonld suggest that this source of mlormation
could be neglected or even relegated to a subordinate position. Indeed
had its value been recognized earlier and the much greater oppor-
tunities of 50 years ago seized and vigorously exploited, we would not
have to deplore the great and probably permanent hiatnses which exist
in our knowledge today, The information here presented has been
obtained, whenever possible, by placing authentic specimens of the
various known mammals in the hands of natives of both sexes and
allowing them to freely examine and consider them, and the results so
obtained have in many cases been cross checked by interrogation of
widely separated groups.

In quoting native names of mammals, the intention has been to
place a practical tool into the hands of others, rather than to make
any formal contribution to aboriginal vocabularies, and for this
purpose there are some advantages in partially anglicized forms rather
than in those involving special phonetic symbols, which are little used
or understood beyond anthropological circles. his applies to the
names ol native @roups also, where I have for the most part used the
name or names actually given me at the time. These do not always
agree with the standard form adopted by Tindale (1940) bnt are
isnally close to one or more of the anglicized variants or alternatives
listed by him. The approximate tribal boundaries as given by Tindale
are no doubt also an approximate guide to the former currency of
names of fauna, but under modern conditions where considerable
infiltration, merging of minorities, or even complete replacement of
aboriginal populations by neighbouring groups, has taken place, T have
found that words may occasionally be heard in normal use far beyond
these boundaries. Many of the vocabnlaries used by natives for fayna
when these observations were made, had a dual basis owing to this
merging or replacement of adjacent tribes and it has usually not been
expedient, and sometimes not possible to make a complete separation of
the original elements, This applies for instance to the Wonkanooroo
and Dieri of the Lake Wyre Basin, Yankunjarra and Pitjanjarra of
the Everard and Mnsgrayvye Range area, Arunta and Ilyowra of the
Eastern Macdonnells, Tehingilli and Mudburra of Daly Waters,
Walpari and Warramunga of the Davenport Range, and others.

The names recorded are those actually met with in the areas
personally worked over and 1 make no attempt to compile lists by
drawing on other sources such as Stirling and Spencer, Spencer and
Gillen, Strehlow sur., Helms, Black, ete., partly because these vocabn-
laries are readily available and partly because the identity of the

144 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

species in question is sometimes in doubt. In a few cases where a
name of special interest is qnoted from another work, the source is
indicated with it,

3. Locaniry Recorps or Marertan PersonanLy EXAMINED AND
IDENTIFIED,

This is undoubtedly the most satisfactory type of evidence on
which to base conclusions on distribution but unfortunately when
materia] is scanty and the areas involved yery great, it can give only a
very inadequate version of the real state of affairs, and it is for this
reason largely, that supplementary evidence from aboriginal sources
has been considered on a comparatively lavish scale,

In the few cases where material has been available in large series
only the peripheral or other signifieant records are quoted. The
distribution of most species will be discussed in greater detail and
mapped in a series of comprehensive papers now in preparation. For
reasons indicated in the third paper of this series (1958) the treatment
is for the present mostly at species level only.

4, Previousty Pusiisarp Recorps,

These are incorporated in the general statements on distribution,
usually without specifying the source, except where the species has
not been seen personally. In such cases, the essential data from the
original publication is reproduced for the sake of completeness of
account.

THE SUBDIVISION OF THE AREA

The term Central Australia has been used somewhat elastically to
include not only the area within the political boundaries of the Federal
Territory formerly so named, but also arid traets of similar character
adjoining it in the States of South Australia, Western Australia and
Queensland, and there are necessary references also to the transition
belt which separates the arid Centre from the well watered Torresian
traets to the north.

In the discussion of so large an area some subdivision is a
conveniénce or even necessity. The excellent work of the Land
Research Division of the C.8.1.R.0, will ultimately make this possible
in terms of homogenous natural subregions but for the present purpose
eight larger units are indicated, which though less uniform in character
than these are wont to be and defined by more or less arbitrary
boundaries, nevertheless show appreciable overall distinctness with
some marginal overlapping.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 145

sae

“se

y
wat Wove Hill
a

NORTH

7 winneck® ee

QNVISN323NnG

«Weterlen Well

“Mt. Farewell
Mi Horde

CENTRAL AUSTRALIA
Brae oe 4 iHorks fia,

t
4
“
”
“a
o

4 ean Ra

Ehrenberg Ra. 4,°
TROPIC OF S CAPRICORN

POnneh, AVICESS Res
: 2 “a Seren cc
> | \ ,
rs \* “sheng aN wy
=z
4

{ LrAmadaue a Idraces
Bowe
foe

ALU-S-TRA-L LA = =m

ARUNTA

DESERT
sunnah
ete ae
An,

Wgrove

| Rinses
’ SOUTH
MILES Wottane Killelpenian
50 200 260 300 : "hg Ede |
1308

“Sector Boundaries <= ————
State ” —— a | PP
Stuart's Line ieadeteanl

Fig. 1. Map of Central Australia and adjoining areas showing subdivision into eight
sectors employed in text,

A useful primary division of the country may be had by reference
to Stuart’s Line, which lying on a general north-south axis undulates
between the meridians of 133°-134° E. long. It marks the advance of
J. MeDouall Stuart to the north coast in his journeys of 1860-62 and is
followed approximately by the Overland Telegraph and the Alice
Springs-Port Darwin Highway. Especially in its northern portion the
line divides the country into more or less distinct east and west
moieties, the former being free from large sandridge areas, having
generally firmer soils and more numerous and distinct drainage

channels. ‘This results in differences of vegetation, the most notable
x

146 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

of which is a partial replacement of Triodia (spinifex), which is almost
ubiquitous in the lower lands of the western division, by grass com-
munities such as Flinders and Mitchell grass, in the east, As a
consequence, pastoral occupation and its aftermath, is more extensive
and of longer standing, in the latter,

The eight sectors (fig, 1) may be briefly indicated in general terms
as follows :—

1, Tae Sovuru-Hastern Sector.

This includes (a) the eastern and northern portions of the Lake
Eyre Basin in Sonth Australia and the adjoining areas in south-west
Queensland comprised in the drainage of the lower courses of the
Barcoo River (Cooper Creek), and the Diamantina and Mulligan
(Georgina) Rivers, and (b) the Arunta Desert.

It contains the lowest portion of the area mapped, some of it lying
below sea level and its eremian features are more extreme than else-
where. The rainfall is low and erratic, varying froin 2 to 12in. per
anuom, but the eastern portion is periodically flooded by the overflow of
rivers fed by remote catchments to the north-east. Large areas are
oceupied by sandridge and gibber deserts, where the vegetation is
normally sparse and arboreal species largely suppressed.

This sector is markedly distinct from others, and some of ita
mammals are subspecifically differentiated, a pallid colouration being
especially frequent.

Pastoral occupation is limited to the areas east of Lake Eyre and
the Mulligan,

2. Tan Soutu-Wesrern on AmapzEus Suoror.

The Amadeus Basin with the highlands to west and south of it
across the three State boundaries and ineluding the Rawlinson,
Petermann, Tomkinson, Mann, Musgrave and Everard Ranges and
those on the 26° parallel of S. lat. in Western Anstralia, as an
extension, This sector is a complex of granite, gneiss and quartzite
hills with intervening mulga parks and thickets and some minor sand-
hill areas abont the salt lake, and near its southern limit. Except for
the Musgraves which rise to nearly 5,000ff. the hill systems are minor
features and the ereek channels which emerge from them are generally
short lived, The long series of rangelets which extend deep into
Western Australian territory on the 26th parallel are important from
the point of view of distribution as they provide feasible lines of east-
west diffusion for several species,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 147

Pastoral oceupation, chiefly with sheep, is limited to a small area
in the north-east quarter and is not of long duration. The rest of the
sector was originally part of the Aboriginal Reserve and is virgin
country.

3, Tur Lararmvtsa Suorror.

This is a South Central area lying between numbers 1 and 2 and
including the lower drainage of the Finke and of the South Australian
erecks which flow towards the west shore of Lake Eyre. It consists
in large part of undulating gravelly plains, with areas of dense mulga
thickets and frequent groups of residual tent-topped hills and eroded
tablelands capped with desert sandstone. Jn the south the ereek
channels are lined with gidgee and myall (dcacta spp.) rather than
with euealypts. The whole area is pastorally held,

4, Tazm Macponwent Sector.

The ranges and enclosed plains from ca, 25° 8. lat. (excluding
those of sector 2) to 28° 8S, lat., including the Macdonnell Range
system, the James, George Gill, Stuart Bluff, Reynolds, Jervois, and
Tarlton, ete, A high, comparatively well watered and well vegetated
tract, with peaks rising above 4,000ft. in the central portion, The
arborescent, plains vegetation is still largely acacia spp, but with an
increasing element of eucalypt to the north. The lower, western
portion merges with the Amadeus sector and the mulga (Acacia
aneura) is the chief arborescent species there, but the eastern third is
increasingly dominated by the very distinct gidyee (a complex of
closely related species allied to A. cambagei) which forms characteristic
uniform forests over hundreds of square miles towards the Queensland
border.

Pastoral oceupation involves the whole sector except for a small
area near the western margin and in the central portion is of 80
years’ duration,

5. Tre Lanper Sector,

From the northern boundary of seetor 4, to the former boundary
of Central Australia and Northern Anstralha at 20° §S, lat.; east to
Stuart’s line and west to the margins of the Great Sandridge Desert.

This is an area of general low relief with isolated hills and out-
crops but no eonsiderable ranges and with the single major drainage
line of the Lander Creek as a central feature. Undulating plains of
sandy loam are heavily scrubbed with mulga in the south-west, but

148 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

elsewhere are lateritic, with lower shrubs and a considerable stunted
eucalypt element alternating with triodia communities.

There are some minor isolated sandridee areas. Only a small
portion of the sector is pastorally oeceupied and stocking of most of
this is light and recent,

6. Tur Trans-sanpover SEctor,

The area east of Stuart’s Line in the same latitude as 5. The
north-western quarter is occupied by a characteristic series of quartzite
and sandstone ranges (the Murchison and Davenport) with a great
development of spinifex covered serees and plains and some thickets
of the loeal ‘turpentine’? (Acacia lysiphloia), A characteristic relict
plant in the hills is the desert paperbark (Melaleuca lasiandra)"?.
Klsewhere are spinifex plains with mixed eucalypt-acacia parks
merging in the north-east corner with Mitchell grass plains of the
Barkly type.

The eastern portions of this sector contain the only areas east of
Stuart’s Line (apart from the Arunta desert) which have not been
occupied for pastoral purposes,

7. Tax Norra-Wesr Secror.

This is the western part of the lower transition zone between the
Central and Northern Australian environments and extending from
latitude 20° to 18° south; eastward to Stuart’s Line and 100m,
westward of the Western Australian border. The rainfall is higher
(15-20in.) and there is an approach to a monsoonal climate, with
increased summer humidity, The north-west angle includes some grass
plain on Sturt Creek and the head of the Victoria River and along its
eastern edge a belt of quartzite and sandstone rangelets and serees
similar to the Murchison-Davenport area to the south,

The remainder is similar to the serubby plains of the Lander
sector but with a considerable increase in the eucalypts. The true
mulga (Acacia anewra), the most characteristic of the Central Aus-
tralian arborescent acacias, is now rare, its northern limit lying a little
north of the 20th parallel of S. lat. in sectors 7 and 8, Pastoral
occupation is eoufined to a relatively small area on the eastern
bonndary and in the north-west angle.

(1) 1 am indebted to Mr, G, Chippendale of the Commonwealth Administration, Alice Springs,
for the identification of these two plants,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 149

8. 'l'am Norre-lasr on Barxiy Sacror.

The eastern half of the transition zone from Stuart’s Line to 50m.
east of the Queensland border. This consists largely of the so-called
Barkly Tableland, characterised by treeless plains of black or ash
grey soils with pure communities of Mitchell and Flinders grass,
interspersed with islands of red soils carrying eucalypts and
terminalias of northern facies, with triodia and under shrubs. The
whole seetor is oceupied pastorally and portions of it have been stocked
for 80 years,

FACTORS INFLUENCING THE PRESENT STATUS
OF SPECIES

What I have recently written (1957) of the mammals of Upper
South Australia is equally true of the Centre; namely that the question
of what is extinct and what is barely extant is offen impossible to
answer with conviction, and where material records are seanty or
lacking one must necessarily fall back on general inference and the
testimony of the natives, where it is forthcoming.

In order to avoid the wearisome repetition of the same facts and
inferences, species by species, it may be well to summarize very briefly
the chief’ factors which have operated and are operating, to bring about
the marked decline in numbers and territory, which with one or two
exceptions only, has been the fate of all the Central Australian
mammals,

1. Lonc Term Curmatic Caances Invouvinc Increasen ARIITY AND
ApvErst) VEGETATIVE CHANGES,

In many eases this has prevented the development of large
uniformly distributed populations and substituted a discontinuous type
of oeeupation in widely scattered groups or colonies, Provided that
sufficient mobility is retained or developed and that numbers do not
fall so low as to prevent adequate gene flow between groups, this is
probably a valuable adaptive mechanism tending towards perpetuation
of the species. But there is ample evidence that several species known
to science and probably still others known only to aborigines, did not
develop this mobility or in other ways lagged in adaptation to the
changing post pluvial conditions, and these were drifting towards
extinction long before any of the human agencies next considered, were
operative,

150 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Such species were Phascogale calura, Ph. penicillata, Bettongia
penicllata and perhaps T'richosurus vulpecula, Leporillus apicalis, and
Macroderma gigas,

2. Asonicrvat Huwtine.

Aboriginal influence on the decline of the mammal fauna as a
whole is probably a minor one and perhaps quite negligible, but it is
not to be altogether discounted in the case of particular species. A
good deal has been written and more implied about the possible
effectiveness of some native food taboos, in conserving fauna, What-
ever be the truth of that, it is clear that it only applies to the chief
‘““game'’ species, and it seems probable that an active hunting popula-
tion, even though in very small numbers, may have hurried along the
exterminating process, in those cases where the range occupied by the
animal was very restricted and its population thin.

Some of the hunting methods of the blacks, especially the ‘fire-
trap’? technique, in which large areas of vegetation are burnt out,
must fitve borne very hard on non-burrowing species, like Bettongia
penicillata.

3. Ennoraan Ocevratron ann Pasroran Exprorration or tan Counrry.

This is no doubt a major cause of decline and perhaps the chief
one. Although the total numbers of ungulate stock seem relatively
small when compared with the area ocenpied, the constant movement
to and from watering places causes a multiplication of a disturbing
factor with which many native species, especially the surface nesting
forms, cannot cope, It has constantly been observed on stocking
virgin country, that many native species disappear long before any
question arises of competition for food. In many cases no competition
for food is involved at all and in the ease of M. rufus, which from its
grazing habit might @ priori he expected to furnish an exception, one
finds the greatest toleranve—kangaroos in large numbers coexisting
with domestic slock about the same waters.

The red kangaroo (and to a lesser extent the hill kangaroo, M.
robustus) is of special interest in this connection as furnishing the only
example of a native species which may have been favourably influenced
by pastoral operations (infra) and which in some districts has shown
marked increase in nutubergs in spite of restrictive measures.

Pastoral occupation is of greater extent and longer duration east
of Stnart’s Line than west of it and this fact has to be borne in mind
when considering present-day distribution—several species such as

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 151

Isoodon auratus, Perameles eremiana, Betiongia lesueurt, and Lagor-
chestes hirsulus, which are much better represented in the western
division, may originally have been more uniformly distributed and
may perhaps even have passed east of the Queensland border, where
today they appear to fall short of it,

Active persecution by the white community is limited to two
species—the red kangaroo and the dingo—and in neither case has
survival, or even general numerical status, been seriously threatened
as yet.

4. [yrropucep Prats,

Here and there introduced ungulates have escaped and built up
considerable feral populations in virgin territory which have bad a
deleterious effect on native fauna over small areas. Far more
important, however, are the three major scourges, the rabbit, the fox,
and the feral house cat, which together have had an effect in certain
districts only to be described ag catastrophic; the first by competition
for food plants and the two latter by direct predation.

At present the fox and rabbit are chiefly concentrated in the
southern sectors where a vain hope was entertained that the latter
might buffer the effeel of the fox on the native mammals, But in the
last 25 years, the region comprised by the Nverard, Musgrave, Mann
and Tomkinson Ranges—one of the most beautiful hill tracts in arid
Australia, largely unoceupied by white man and with many of the
attributes of a natural sateluary—has been stripped of most of its
smaller species by the increase of the fox there. The work of the fox
is often done with remarkable speed and it seems probable that the
colonial type of distribution of so many marsupials, is particularly
vulnerable to its attack—small groups being systematically hunted out
of existence, before they have time to develop a protective mechanism.

The extent to whieh the fox sueceeds in ocenpying the sectors
further north is of vital concern in the future of Northern Territory
mammals. Experience in Western Australia suggests that if left to
itself it may eventually work right through to the north coast.

The feral domestic eat which is widely spread in Central Australia
igs also no donbt a destructive force of some magnitude here as else-
where; but aa it preceded the white man in the Centre by several
decades at least, and the rabbit and the fox by a still greater interval,
without producing comparable effect to the latter, it is presumably of
less virulence,

152 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

5. Hpmemic Disrases; Poisoninc TarovcH Naruran AGENCIES; AND
Hear Apropiexy,

These have all been observed to cause death in the larger
macropods, but do not appear to act as major causes of loss in Central
Australia.

SYSTEMATIC PRESENTATION OF THE DATA ON NAMES,
DISTRIBUTION AND STATUS OF SPECIES

ORNITHODELPHIA
Tachyglossus aculeatus Shaw 1792

Wonkanooroo (s. lato.), Inappa, Inniwallinga; Pitjanjarra
(s, lato.), Tchilkamutta, Tchirilya; Arunta, Inarlinga (widely used);
llyowra, Funaba (widely used); Warramunga, Wajingurri (Wajinga) ;
Worgaia, Nilliyilloo; Tchingilli, Keelyilli, Ngingulda; Mudburra,
Fenodin; Alowa, Oolbulla.

Ubiquitous and sometimes quite plentiful, especially in rocky hills;
has one of the highest survival rates amongst Central mammals even
in fox infested country.

Material examined is from the Musgrave Range in sector 2 and
from the George Gill Range, Napperby Hills and Frazer River in
sector 4.

On the former occurrence of Ornithorhynchus in Central Aus-
tralia, the possibility of which has been canyassed from time to time,
I have obtained no evidence in support.

DIDELPHIA
DASYURIDAH
Dasyurus geoffroyi Gould 1841

Wonkanooroo (s. lato,), Yikowra; Pitjanjarra, Pulchida (Part-
jada); Yankunjarra, Keenika; Kukatja, T'ajadi (widely used) ; Arunta,
Llyowra, Achilpa (widely used); Warramunga, Winnijungoo.

Further north the following names are used primarily for D.
hallucatus (infra): Tchingilli, Jobodo; Alowa, Wanumbeera; Mara,
Woonyaboonya; Larrakia, Luals.

Formerly widely distributed and plentiful over a large part, or
possibly over the whole of the central area, but now a rare and

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 153

apparently vanishing form, I haye recent accounts of it surviving in
sectors 4, 6, and 7, but it seems to have completely gone from the
Everard-Musgrave Range area which yielded the only material
examined. This indicates a small phase of D. geoffroyi with some
modifications tending superficially towards D. hallucatus so that
separation fron that species by interrogation is uncertain, and it is
possible that D. hallucatus infiltrates the transition zone of sectors 7
and 8 It is significant however that Glauert (1933) records D.
geoffroyi in the Sandridge Desert about 50m. from the western
boundary of sector 7.

Material examined is from Chundrinna and Walthajalkanna to the
north of the Everard Range, Spencer had material from Alice Springs
and Crown Point,

Phascogale calura Gould 1844

The inelusion of this species in the Central fauna still rests on the
original record of Spencer of specimens taken by Gillen at Alice
Springs in the Macdonnell Range in 1896. I have been unable to obtain
any further satisfactory information upon its status, and it would
appear to be a relict form confined to the range or at least with a very
restricted distribution. If it still exists it must be excessively rare.
One of the original specimens has heen examined, as well as one from
the Mount Lofty Range of lower South Australia.

The related species P. penicillata Shaw has a northern race pirata
Thomas, originally based upon the South Alligator River in Arnhem
Land, in a high rainfall area. Glauert, however (1933) records it
from the Sandridge Desert of Western Australia at about lat. 21° 50S.
This corresponds to the south boundary ol! the Lander sector about
200m, east, and it may therefore extend into Central Australian
territory.

Phascogale (Pseudantechinus) macdonnellensis Spencer 1896

Since the original series was taken at Alice Springs in the
Maedonnell ranges, I have had it from the Basedow Range area in
the Amadeus seetor of the South-West in 1937 and again in 1939, and
it was recorded also from the Granites south of Tanami in the Lander
sector, in 1952. It is certainly not a common form at the present day
but its trne status is obscure.

154 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Material examined comprises part of the original collection, the
Basedow Range specimens and a long series from localities unfor-
tunately not further specified than as from ‘‘Central Australia’.

The related form Ph. (Pseudantechinus) mimulus Thomas 1906 is
apparently still represented solely by the type specimen from
Alexandria in sector 8.

Phascogale (Planigale) ingrami Thomas 1906

The original record of 5 specimens from Alexandria in sector 8,
is apparently still the only one for this species, in the area here
considered.

Dasycercus cristicauda Krefft 1867

Wonkanooroo, Mudagoora; Pitjanjarra, Muritcha; <Arunta,
Ilyowra, Ampurta; Walpari, Narloodi, Tajinna.

A widely distributed and formerly very plentiful species, with
records in all the sectors except 8, but especially characteristic of the
south Central areas. The northern limit is at about 19° S. lat. but in
the adjoining tracts of Western Australia, Glauert (1933) records it
from 18° S. lat.

It tends to concentrate wpon sandridge areas and in 1931-32
after a period of scarcity was in large numbers about the lower
Diamantina and Barcoo in the eastern part of the Lake Eyre Basin,
and from 1932-35 was found to be one of the most plentiful small
mammals in the Amadeus sector. At the present time it is almost
unknown in the latter sector and is everywhere much reduced but has
been obtained during the last five years from points as far apart as
Yuendumu and the Tarlton Range.

Material examined is from the eastern part of the Lake Eyre
Basin, where the very distinct pallid phase known as D. c. hillieri
Thomas occurs; from sand areas adjoining the Everard, Musgrave,
Mann, Tomkinson and Basedow Ranges in sector 2; from Yuendumu
near the boundary of sectors 4 and 5; from the Tarlton Range in the
far east of sector 4; from Tennant Creek in sector 7; and from the
Canning Stock Route in the Sandridge Desert of Western Australia.

(1) Much early material examined by me is labelled baldly as from ‘Central Australia’ ‘
which at the time seems to have been regarded as a sort of torrid Ultima Thule, neither
capable of, nor needing, more detailed localization, This leads to an exasperating loss
of many valuable records,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 155

Dasyuroides byrnei Spencer 1896

Wonkanooroo, Kowarit.

The locus of the type series was Charlotte Waters in sector 3 and
of the later subspecies D. b. pallidior Thomas 1906, Killalpaninna in
sector 1. Formerly it had a considerable range in the eastern part of
the Lake Eyre Basin and was well known to the blacks and many
settlers by the above name, but I have been unable to trace it in other
parts of the Centre, several reports of it being due to confusion with
Dasycerous.

At the present time it is one of the rarest of the Dasyuridae, but
retains a very tenuous hold on the eastern part of the Lake [Byre
Basin, and has been taken recently at Birdsville,

Four specimens only have been examined and these are imperfectly
localized, as from ‘‘Central Australia’’.

Sminthopsis crassicaudata Gould 1844

Wonkanooroo, Nilee.

This species periodically undergoes great increase in the eastern
part of the Lake Eyre Basin in sector 1, whence most of the material
here examined has come. It represents the long legged, long tailed,
pale coloured local phase, 8. ¢. centralis Thomas 1902 which Tate
(1947) proposes to separate from crassicaudata and treat as a sub-
species of S. macroura now raised to specific rank. I have discussed
in detail (1933) the evidence for regarding crassicaudata and centralis
as subspecifically related, based on the examination of a large series
from intermediate localities.

Hlsewhere in the Centre it is less well known and is apparently
not subject to great fluctuations in numbers.

Records are available from the Lake Eyre Basin in sector 1;
Arckaringa in sector 3; Mentibee in sector 2; Macdonnell Ranges and
the Bundey River drainage in the north-east of sector 4; Yuendumu
in the north-west of sector 4; and Willowra in sector 5.

Material from all these points has been examined.

Sminthopsis hirtipes Thomas 1898

The type was from Charlotte Waters in sector 3 and it has since
been obtained in the Lake Mackay area in the far west of sector 4, and
Glanert (1933) has recorded it from near the Warburton Range in the

156 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

western extension of sector 2 and at Well 29 on the Canning Stock
Route of the Sandridge Desert. The latter specimens have been
examined,

Nothing is known of its status.

Sminthopsis larapinta Spencer 1896

Wonkanooroo, Melatjhani.

The type locality is at Charlotte Waters in sector 3, and it has
been taken also in the eastern portion of the Lake Byre Basin in
sector 1 both in South Australia and Queensland; in the Macdonnell
Ranges and between the Bundey and Frazer rivers in sector 4, and at
Tanami in sector 5—the last record by Glauert (1983). It has latterly
been considered that S. stalkeri of Alroy and Alexandria is a subspecies
of larapimta and if this be so, it is likely that the distribution of
larapinta covers most of Central Australia.

Like S. crassicaudata centralis, S. larapinta is periodically very
plentiful in the eastern part of the Lake Myre Basin, but is very sparse
elsewhere,

Tate (1947, p. 123) states that I have questioned the distinctness
of these two species. This however is very far from being the case,
aud in 1933 I listed the obvious points of distinction both external and
cranial, which separate them.

Material examined is from the first four localities quoted.

Sminthopsis murina constricta Spencer 1896

This somewhat cryptic form still rests I believe, on Spencer’s
original specimens from Oodnadatta in seetor 3 and Alice Springs in
sector 4.

Sminthopsis psammophila Spencer 1895

The type which is still unique so far as published records go, is
from the vieinity of Lake Amadeus in the south-west sector.

I append a number of aboriginal names for Sminthopsis like
animals which are insufficiently characterized to be assigned to any of
the above species with confidence: Yankunjarra, Walbunba; Arunta,
Munyoolba; Uyowra, Bunyilba, Annuljalu; Walpari, Kunnakulumbi,
Tchungunba; Tchingilli, Yarrukaddi; Mara, Maloweea.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS V7

Antechinomys spenceri Thomas 1906

Yankunjarra, Pitchi pitchi; Arunta, Ilyowra, Arrajanuta.

Records are available from Oodnadatta and Charlotte Waters in
sector 3; from the Eyerard, Mann and Musgrave Ranges and Wollara,
in sector 2; from the Macdonnell Ranges, upper Sandover River,
Bundey and Ooratipra Creeks, and the Tarlton Range in sector 4; and
from Tennant Creek in sector 7.

Wood Jones (1923) wrote of its excessive rarity and this may be
true of the Lake Eyre Basin and of the western district of South
Australia, where he sought it, but from 1932-35 in the Everard and
Musgrave Ranges and from 1953-56 in the eastern part of sector 4,
I found it fairly plentiful—mueh more so than any of the Sminthopsis
species, and in the latter period it was frequently being brought into
homesteads at might by cats.

Material has been examined from all the above localities and a
specimen also from the Murchison district of Western Australia, taken
in 1928, 50 miles north of Meekatharra. This appears to be the most
westerly record and is nearly 600 miles north-west of Rawlinna whence
it is also claimed.

Myrmecobius fasciatus Waterhouse 1836

Yankunjarra, Wulpoorti (Wailburdi).

Locality records are from the south and west of the Everard
Range; south of the Cavanagh Range and north and west of the
Rawlinson Range, all in sector 2 or its western extension.

In these localities it was formerly quite plentiful, but I know of
no material having been taken since 1933 and as the fox has greatly
increased in this sector since that time, its chances of survival are
not good,

Material examined is all from the Everard Range district. The
local form is M. f. rufus Wood Jones 1923.

PERAMELIDAE
Thalacomys lagotis Reid 1837

Wonkanooroo, Thulka; Dieri, Kapita; Pitjanjarra (s. lato.), Talgoo
(Djalku) (widely used), Ngynoo; Arunta, Tlyowra, Anunga, Ayoorta;
Walpari, Yarninga; Warramunga, Wombaia, Warrigiddi; Tchingilli,
Yalbo urru.

158 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tormerly one of the most plentiful and universally distributed of
Central Australian mammals, with a heavy concentration of population
in the south-west sector and central portions of sector 4, Locality
records cover all sectors except 8 where the Barkly Tableland was
apparently never occupied. The species formerly extended much
further north than is generally realized and there is good evidence of
it 80 years ago at Lulwa about 50 miles north of Newcastle Waters.

At the present time it is rapidly beine reduced to the status of a
rare form and has been completely eliminated !roin much of the south-
west sector in the last 25 years, by the fox. It still oceurs in small
numbers in the ranges of the 26th parallel in Western Australian
territory; in the Western Maecdonnells; in the Lake Myre Basin; and
at one or {wo points in seetors 6 and 7.

The greater part of the material examined is from the south-west
sector, but material from peripheral localities includes (1) Pundi in
the sandhill belt south of the Musgrave Range; (2) Blackstone and
Warburton Ranges on the 26th parallel in Western Australia; (3)
Sturt Creek in the north-west; (4) Tennant Creek in the north centre;
(5) Frazer River in the east of sector 4; (6) Cooneheri and Birdsville
in the south-east of sector 1.

Thalacomys minor Spencer 1897

Wonkanooroo, Fallara; Urabunna, Urpila (fide Stirling and
Spencer),

The species is known from two districts only, the original form as
described by Spencer coming from near Charlotte Waters in sector 3,
and a subspecies 7’, m. miselius described in 1932, from Cooncheri,
Mungeranie and Kopperamanna on the lower Diamantina and Bareoo
in sector 1,

From the type locality in sector 3 the species seems to have com-
pletely disappeared and I know of no records of it since 1904, The
subspecies miselins probably still persists in the Lake Eyre Basin in
vanishingly small numbers.

The material examined comes from all four of the above localities,
but much more plentifully from sector 1,

Tt has been debated whether the eastern form T. m. miselius may
not be identical with the earlier deseribed form T. leucura Thomas
1887 which is known only by a single immature and unlocalized
specimen. ‘T'ate (1948) who alone has examined the types of both

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 159

leucura and miselius dissents from this, so that there are no grounds
at present for claiming the former as a Central Australian species,
though it may well have been so.

Isoodon auratus Ramsay 1887

Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Wmtarro, Nyurloo,

These two names are well differentiated from Perameles eremiana
by natives who knew both animals as living sympatric species, Those
which follow may apply to either :—

Nadadjara, Makoora; Kukatja, Poodoojooroo; Uyowra, Yiwurra,
Taich; Avunta, Yiwurra, Arkoora; Walpari, Warramunga, Bukqureo;
Mudburra, Bukywroo, Myarin; Tehingilli, Butgoola, Kulwarri.

There is no doubt that I. awratus was formerly a very widely
distributed form in Central Australia, wherever sandy spinifex tracts
ocenrred in considerable expaise, as is particularly so west of Stuart’s
Line. Where material is not available, however, it is often impossible
to be sure from the accounts of natives whether this species, or
Perameles eremiana or both are being indicated. In distriets such as
the south-west sector in the period 1932-35 where the two occurred
sympatrically there was no confusion in nomenclature, but in the
pastoral districts east of the line, where bandicoots of either kind had
not been seen for thirty years or more, names were used less precisely,
All that can now be said is that one or other of these two species,
and frequently both, probably occurred in suitable habitats over the
whole of Central Australia.

I. auratus survives in considerable numbers in the western part
of sector 4; the adjoining part of sector 2 and in sectors 5, 6 and 7.
In the more southerly districts it is rare or absent. Its reduction in
the southern part of the south-west sector has been very steep in the
last. 25 years,

The material examined comes from the lower Bareoo River in
sector 1; from Pundi and Koonapandi south of the Musgrave Range
and from the Everard Range in sector 2; from Lake Mackay in sector
4; from the Granites south-east of Tanami in sector 6; from several
points on the Canning Stock Route in the latitude of sectors 4, 5 and
7 but further west in the Sandridge Desert; and from Tennant Creek
in sector 7,

The ‘‘Perameles obesula’’ recorded by B. Spencer (1896) from
the Burt Plain and Tennant Creek is no doubt to be referred here—
I. obesulus and I, auratus are closely, perhaps subspecifically, related,

160 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Perameles eremiana Spencer 1897
Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Wallilya, Nginana (et vide supra).

Spencer's original material upon which the species was founded
came from north-east of Charlotte Waters in sector 3 and from the
Burt Plain in sector 4. Other records are available from south of the
Musgrave and Mann Ranges, and north of the Rawlinson Range in
sector 2; from the Warburton Range area, west of this (Glanert 1933) ;
and from near the Granites below Tanami in sector 5. Althongh no
definite records are available east of Stuart’s Line, some material
collected by Winnecke, which has been examined, should probably be
so placed, and it is almost certain that some of the native names of
mixed application, which are listed above with /, auratus, relates to
P. eremiana, Possibly a former sympatric occurrence of the two species
over the greater part of Central Australia, would be a justifiable
inference.

In 1932-35 it was a well known and fairly plentiful species m the
south-west sector, though less numerous than J. auratus, but is now
absent or rare in this fox infested quarter. It still persists in sectors
5 and 7.

Material examined comes from sonth of the Musgrave and Mann
Ranges and from unspecified localities in ‘Central Australia’’,

Sanger (1882) records ‘‘Perameles fasciatus’’, from the lower
Bareoo River in sector 1, but the interpretation of this is doubtful.
T have not been able to gather any good evidence of the presence of
any of the banded bandicoots in the areas here dealt with.

Choeropus ecaudatus Ogilby 1838
Pitjanjarra (s, lato), Kwnjilba,

Locality records exist for the lower Barcoo in sector 1; from south
of the Musgrave Ranges in sector 2; from Charlotte Waters in sector
3; from Ryan Well in sector 4; and from Barrow Creek in sector 5.

If the animal still exists it must now be excessively rare. It is
possible that some references to it are entangled in the incompletely
specified names given under J. auratus and P. eremiana, as its habits
are quite similay to those of the latter, but the only clear eut account
of it which I have had in personal interviews was from elderly
Pitjanjarra men in the Musgraves, They distinguished it satisfactorily

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 161

from Wallilya by the longer ear and the peculiarities of its manus and
pes, They liad not seen it since about 1926 and spoke of it in general
terms as a southern form.

Of the four specimens examined only two are definitely localized
in Central Australia and these are from Ryan Well and the lower
Barcoo respectively.

Notoryctes typhlops Stirling 1889

Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Hecharricharri ([tjaritjura) ; South Arunta,
Urabunna, Oorquamata (Stirling); Walpari, Mundawauljwulsi.

The species is recorded from the Basedow range area, from east
of Mount Conner, and south of the Mann, Musgrave and Everard
ranges in sector 2; from Charlotte Waters, Idracowra and Crown
Point in sector 3; from south of the George Gill Range, Hermannsburg
and Arltunga in sector 4; from the Wauchope area south-west of
Tennant Creek in sector 5; and from the Sturt Creek in sector 7.

The centre of distribution in the latitudes here considered seems
definitely to be in the south-central and south-western districts of
sectors 2 and 3; the bulk of the material and most of the records,
originating (here. Elsewhere, over large areas, especially east of
Stuart’s Line there seems to be no aboriginal knowledge of it at all
In 1931 1 found that keen Wonkanooroo hunters who had spent 40
years between the lower Diamantina and Bareoo and the sonthern
portion of the Arunta Desert knew nothing of it, nor did their women,
but Johnston (1943) gives some credence to a report that an animal
called Kakoma (by the ? Wonkadjura) in south-west Queensland may
be this species. The Arltunga record is based on statements of
R. T. Maurice (1903) who knew the animal well in the south-west
sector and in lower South Australia and the Wauchope report I
obtained from a group of Walpari in 1954 who recognized and named
the animal from a skin,

At the present time it persists in some numbers in seetors 2 and
3, but elsewhere, if present, must be a very rare form.

Much of the material examined is only vaguely localized as from
‘Central Australia’’, though there is contributory evidence that this
meant sectors 2 or 3. Of the records quoted above all are supported
by material, except that from Arltunga and Wauchope.

162 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

PHALANGERIDAE
Trichosurus yulpecula Kerr 1792

Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Wyoota (very widely used), Mungawyurao;
Arunta, Andunya; Ilyowra, Undinna; Walpari, Tchungba; Warra-
munga, Marrabun; (%?)Worgaia, Wamburra; Wombaia, Gowngar;
Maudburra, Junganar; Tehingilli, Takooladji; Mara, Kudjani.

This ubiquitous animal is notable in the Central Australian fauna,
as being the solitary representative of a family, elsewhere often rich
in species, The locality records involve all sectors, but there are large
areas in the Barkly Tableland, Lander basin, and the north-west sector,
which it may never have colonized,

Formerly it was an extremely abundant animal over wide areas,
and as late as 80 years ago, one of the chief food species of the natives
in some districts, but now suffering a decline which in most parts has
reduced it to the status of a rare form. In the field work of 1932-35
it was found to be very plentiful and easily obtained in the south-west
sector, where a portion of its population wag living a semi-terrestrial
life and sheltering in tehungoo and rabbit warrens, This innovation
has probably been terminated hy the increase of the fox, but it still
persists in widely separated ‘‘pockets’’. I liave recent reports of it
in the Blackstone Range in the western extension of seetor 2, and in
the Central Macdonnell Ranges, and Arthur and Plenty Creeks in
sector 4.

The collapse of its population, especially in sector 4 where there
is a great development of eucalypt avenue woods along the streams
and the fox is uot a serions menace, is difficult to account for. In
spite of its apparent success in occupying large areas of country, it
may be that a long term climatic factor has been slowly telling
against, it,

The material examined is from the lower Barcoo in sector 1;
from numerons points north and sonth of the Musgrave Ranges, south
of the Mann Range, Everard Range area, and Wollara in seetor 2
and west of that in the Warburton Range; trom the Lake Mackay
area of! sector 4, and from west of seetor 5 at Well 43 in the Sandridge
Desert,

PHASCOLOMYIDAE™

There appears to be no worthwhile evidence, aboriginal or other-
wise, of the occurrence of any member of this family as a recent

(1) Post Soriptum:

In preparing the above note, 1 had overlooked the fact that in correspondence with the
late Dr, Macgilliveay, of Broken Hill, he had informed me that wombats still survived in
small numbers in the Paroo River and Tibooburra districta of New South Wales, as Inte
ua 1923,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 163

species, within the area here treated of, but a passing reference to it
is called for by reason of the local reports which have been made from
time to time, of wombat burrows abvut the main ranges of seetor 4,
These are probably based on old tehungoo warrens, with the holes
enlarged by weathering and coalescence,

The most northerly extension of the family is given hy Lasiorhinus
latifrons which, as a recent species in South Australia, reaches only to
ca, 31° 8. lat. and about 600 miles south of Alice Springs. In
Queensland, however, the relict population which has been named JL.
latifrons barnardi Longman occurs in about the same latitude as the
Maedonnell Range, at a point some 900 miles east of the same town.

MACROPODIDAE
Macropus rufus Desmarest 1822

Dieri, Tehukooroo; Wonkanooroo, Koongarra; Pitjanjarra, Marloo
(Merloo) (very widely used); Arunta, Okirra (Stirling); Tyowra
(south) O uwrra; Llyowra (north) and ? Worgaia, Alarra; Walpari,
Warramuoga, Tchingilli and Wombaia, Yow wirri (very widely used) ;
Mudburra, Wangurra.

Locality records for the red kangaroo cover all eight sectors and
it extends far beyond the boundaries of the area here considered, to
the south, west and east, and considerably beyond the northern
boundary,

In the lust two decades the density of its population has undergone
an enormous increase in the central parts of sector 4, which is some-
times attributed to the artificial proliferation of surface waters,
through pastoral agency, Whatever its cause it should be noted that
the increase has merely accentuated a natural distribution pattern,
shared by several other species, which are not influenced by this factor.
Within a south-central area of about 20,000 square miles which lies to
the north of the main mass of the Macdonnell Ranges, it is safe to
assume that several millions have been killed since 1945,

Its numbers fall away very steeply to the cast, west and north of
this area, and somewhat less so to the south. Normally it is absent
from the major sandridge areas and from the larger expanses of
spinifex flats, hut its phenomenal mobility enables it to exploit all types
of country when favourable changes in the vegetation occur.

The material examined is copious, the peripheral localities
represented being: to the west, the Warburton Range; to the south-
east, Tcherrikooninyee, west of Sturt’s Stony Desert between the

164 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Diamantina and Bareoo Rivers; to the east, Pituri Creek on the
Queensland border of sector 4; north, Banka Banka in sector 7; and
north-east, Alexandria on the Barkly Tableland.

Macropus robustus Gould 1842 vars.

Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Kunula (Kunala) (very widely used);
Arunta, Ilyowra (south), Arrwnga; Ilyowra (north) and ? Worgaia,
Areenin; Warramungu, Maradjee; Tchingilli, Watabunmurra; Mud-
burra, Joodama; Mara, Kirimbu.

Phases of this species are almost as widely spread in Central
Australia as M. rufus, and its extension beyond its borders even
greater, reaching almost to the coast in the north and east. It oecurs
wherever the elected habitats of rocky ranges—often of very insignifi-
cant dimensions—are to be found, but has probably always been absent
from séetor 1, and at the present time is virtually so from sector 3.

In the last 60 years the euro has undergone marked recessions in
some parts of the country, particularly in the eastern third of sector
4 and in the southern tablelands of seetor 8, but in all the major hill
systems it maintains large populations, some of which, in the
Maedonnell Ranges, have shown an inerease parallel with that of
M. rufus, though on a less spectacular seale,

Much material has been examined, the marginal collections coming
from the Everard Range in the south; Cockatoo Creek in the north-
west; Banka Banka and Neweastle Waters in the north and the Tarlton
Range in the east.

During the course of this work, some skulls of the very distinct
species M. antilopinus Gould have been examined, which are attributed
to Banka Banka in sector 7, which is about 200 miles south of its
normal range and in anomalous conditions. The same collection has
skulls of M. rufus labelled as from the Adelaide River, which is an
equally anomalons record in the opposite direction, As I have been
wnable to confirm either of these apparent extensions of range by my
own field work, I am assuming, pending further evidence, that the
localities of these skulls have been transposed.

Petrogale lateralis Gould 1842

Pitjanjarra (s. lato), Warroo (very widely used); Arunta,
Arrawa; Uyowra (south), Arrawa, Kulara; Tlyowra (north) and
? Worgaia, Rance; Walpari, Warramunga, Wagularri.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 165

The major distribution of this rock wallaby is in Western Aus-
tralia, whence it overlaps the Centre to about the Queensland border in
sector 4, The north limit is at about 20° 8, lat, just below Tennant
Creek in seetor 7, and in the south it extends to the limit of the belt
of granite peaks south of the Musgrave Range at about 27° 30’ S. lat.

The distribution pattern is somewhat similar to that of M.
robustus, but is less extensive and more discontinuons—many ranges
and rangelets either having no colonies at all or being occupied only
intermittently with long periods of vacancy between. Its chief popula-
tions are in sectors 2 and 4; it is absent from sector 1 and there are
no records for the greater part of sectors 7 and 8.

Its numerical status at the present time is mueh reduced from
what formerly obtained, but whether it is precarious or not is difficult
to determine, owing in part to its normally migratory and incomplete
ocenpation of the country. In 1932-35 it was one of the commonest
mammals of the south-west sector with swarming populations In many
of the rocky outliers of the main ranges. Today, although it still
persists at scattered points there, it is a comparatively rare form.
In sectors 4 and 6 it is currently reported in small numbers from
several widely separated localities in the Maedonnell Range, the
Davenport Range, and the drainage of the Sandover and Bundey
Rivers. Oddly enough it persists in some numbers on Chewings Ridge
on the outskirts of the town of Alice Springs, where it now has to
contend with the tourist and pea rifle,

A long series of specimens has been examined, and the outlying
localities represented are; Barrow Range and Everard Range in
sector 2: Cockatoo Creek on the boundary of sectors 4 and 5, and
between the Sandover and Frazer Rivers in sector 4, east of Stuart's
Laine.

There is at present io satisfactory evidence of any other species
of Petrogale in Central Australia, Tate (1952) records a form of
P. inornata from the Mount Isa district of west Queensland and it is
possible that this diffuses across the horder into the eastern areas of
sectors 4 and 6, from which very little material has been examined.

The nearest colonies of P,. xanthopus in South Australia and
Queensland lie far to the south and east, with no overlap with the
central lateralis.

166 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Onychogale lunata Gould 1841

Pitjanjarra (s. Jato), Towala (Towalpa), Unkulda; Arunta,
Vinutta,

Another predominantly Western Australian species with an over-
lap in Central Australia, but less extensive than that of P. lateralis.
The locality records listed involve sectors 1, 2, 3 and 4 only, with a
northerly limit at about 28° 8. lat.; sector 1, Lower Barcoo Creek;
sector 2, Everard Range, Officer Creek, south of Musgrave, Mann,
Tomkinson and Basedow Ranges; west extension of sector 2 in the
Cavenagh and other ranges on the 26° parallel; Macumba Creek area
of sector 8; and in sector 4, north of Ehrenburg Range, Red Bank,
Bond Springs, Alice Springs, Iuckitta and west of Tarlton Range;
the two last, east of Stuart’s Line.

At the present tine this is one of the rarest of Central Australian
macropods, but is still extant in sectors 2 and 4 at Jeast and one was
killed between the Tarlton and Jervois Range as late as 1956. In
1932-35 it was still heing reported and occasionally obtained by natives
in the south-west sector, but I have personal knowledge of only two
specimens taken in that period.

Material examined is scanty, and comes from the Everard Range;
between the Everard and Musgrave Ranges; the Cavenagh Range and
Bond Springs,

Onychogale unguifera Gould 1841

Mudburra, Tehingilli, Warramnnga, Tchuwwma (very widely
known); (Wakunja, Wagunyamenzis deseriptive nicknames of the
same peoples).

A north Australian species extending east from the coast of the
Kimberley Division in Western Australia to the Paeific coast of Cape
York Peninsula in Queensland, and diffusing south to about 20° 8S. lat,
in the area here considered. There are records in sector 7 from Banka
Banka, and the lower course of Sturt Creek,

It is not in large numbers on this southern fringe of its distribu-
tion, but is well known in several distriets there.

Material examined is from north of Banka Banka and beyond.

Lagorchestes conspicillatus Gould 1842
Knkatja, Oqualpi; Arunta, TIlyowra, Qualba; Warramunga,
Nadama; Tehingilli, Kalama; Mudburra, Wambanna.,
This also is essentially a North Australian species with an east-
west range similar to that of O, wnguifera but it extends further south,

FPINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 167

viz., to approx, 24° 8. lat, and probably formerly occupied all the area
to the north of that parallel. T have no records for sector 5 but as it
occurs to north and south of that block, this is probably not significant.
In sector 8 the the only records are at the western end and it may have
been absent from the Barkly Tableland as so many other species were.

The loeality records are; sector 4, many points in and about the
western Macdonnells, including the Mareeni Plain; south of Mount
Sonder; the Oqualpi Plain near Mount Razorback (a famous haunt in
earlier years); west of Mount Heughlin; Tlaasts Bluff; and further
north, west of the Napperby Hills and the Warburton Creek, To the
east of Stuart's Line, between the Bundey and Frazer Rivers, Luey
Creek, Huckitta and west of the Tarlton Range; sector 6, Argadargada
on the Sandoyer River, the Elkedra River area and east of the
Davenport Range; and in sector 7, Banka Banka.

Thongh in very small numbers, this beautiful hare wallaby is well
known to the natives as a living species over wide areas and today it
has a much stronger hold on the country than L. hirsutus, and its long
persistenee in the cattle country of sector 4 augurs well for its future
in the Centre. There are recent sight records ol! if from several of
the above localities.

Ceiutral Australian material examined comes from the Mareen
Plain and hetween the Frazer and Bundey Rivers.

The local form conforms in a general way to L. c. leichardti Gould,

Lagorchestes hirsutus Gould 1844

Pitjanjarra, Marla (Maala) (very widely used); Ilyowra,
Advungwa; Walpari, Deelanda,

The headquarters of this species are in the great spinifex deserts
to the west of the area here considered and the Central Australian
population may be considered as an overlap from that region. The
records involye sectors 2 and 4 at masry points, but there are no satis-
factory records from 1 and 3 and few trom the northern areas in 5, 6,
7and 8 A former sparse oecurrence in 5, 6 and 7 is probable, though
aboriginal knowledge of it is mueh less developed there than in the
south-west. It is not known with certainty whether if reached the
Queensland border, and its southern limit in South Australian territory
was never determined and is now indeterminable.

The loeality records are as follows:—Sector 2; south of the
Cavenagh Range; south-west of the Barrow Range; Koonapandi and

168 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Pundi, south of the Musgrave Range; between the Byerard and
Musgrave Ranges; north of Sladden Waters between the Rawlinson
Range and the Robert Range; Docker Creek and Mount Jenkins, north
and south respectively of the Petermann Range; north of Lake
Amadeus; between Mount Conner and Murrachurra. Sector 4;
Wytookarri (N.W. of Lake Amadeus); Dare’s Plain in the George Gill
Range area; near Lake Mackay; MeMwin Hill; Mount Doreen; west
of Warburton Creek and north of the Sandover River about 40 miles
upstream from the Bundey junction, Sector 5: between the Lander
and Davenport Ranges, Sector 6: west of Banka.

The species has been encountered on the Canning Stock Route
further west, between wells 28 and 43, in the latitudes of sectors 2, 4,
5 and 7 of the present area.

The mode of oceurrence of this hare wallaby is fluctuating and
discontinuous and with isolated colonies widely sundered—circum-
atanees which always add to the difficulties of estimating status. But
(here seems no doubt that a major collapse in its numbers in the south-
west lins occurred in the last 25 years,

In 1956 the testimony of natives who still hunt yearly in the sand
tracts south of the Musgrave, Mann and Tomkinson Ranges (where it
fas one of their chief food supplies in 1952-85), was that it was
‘‘finished’’, It is certainly a comparatively rare animal in any part
of Central Australia today, and in the districts where it lives
sympatrically with L, conspicillatus, is much searcer than that species,
Material has been examined from most of the localities quoted
above, and the marginal specimens are Irom the Canning Stock Route
in the Sand Ridge Desert of Western Australia; Barrow Range; Lake
Mackay and Pundi, 50 miles sonth-west of Koonapandi in the
Musgrave Range,

Lagorchestes asomatus Finlayson 1943

Knowledge of this species is still confined to the holotype skull,
which eame from the Lake Mackay area of sector 4.

Bettongia penicillata Gray 1837
Pitjanjarra, Karpitchi; Iyowra, Indwarritcha; Worgaia, Windi-
jarra; Warramunga, Walpari, Yelkamin.

There are records in sector 2, from Pundi, 50 miles south of the
Musgrave Range; Mount Harriett between Pundi and the Range; at

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 169

Waldana Spring, 100 miles south of Pundi; Unyaba Hill, between the
Everard and Musgrave Range; and near Mount Conner. In sector 4
at Huckitta and in the Lake Mackay area; on the Rankin Creek and
east of Davenport Hills in sector 6 and near the Buchanan Creek in
sector 8.

This bettong, formerly considered absent from Central Australia,
was still extant in very small numbers on both sides of the South
Anstralian-Central Australian border in sector 2 in 1932-35, where
specimens were obtained by the blacks, and in the Lake Mackay area
of sector 4, Elsewhere its presence as an excessively rare or recently
extinct species rests on aboriginal testimony. It has now almost
certainly been eliminated from sector 2, but may survive as a very
atlennated remnant in some of the more northerly localities quoted.

Material examined is limited to two specimens, one from Waldana
south of sector 2 and one from the Lake Mackay area of sector 4; the
latter has been recognized provisionally on cranial characters alone as
a new race, B, p. anhydra 1958, but may prove to be a full species when
more completely known.

Bettongia lesueuri Quoy and Gaimard 1824

Wonkanooroo, Dieri, Kanunka; Pitjaujarra (s. lato), Tchungoo
(very widely used), Meetika; Arunta, Tnunka; Ilyowra, Alutla (very
widely used).

A species widely distributed over south-western Anstralia
generally, the area oceupied being prebably greatest in Western Aus-
tralia, bul covering almost the whole of the State of South Australia
and with a south-eastern extension in New South Wales and Victoria
(1958, op cit fic. 1). The central oyerlap is wide, with a northern
limit at about 20° S. lat. It is uncertain whether it enters Queensland
territory, but certainly reaches to within 50 miles of it,

The locality records involve sectors 1 to 6 inclusive, but if was
rare or absent in most of sector 1 and its heaviest concentrations were
in sectors 2 and 4.

This burrowing bettong, unique in the Macropodidae for its
fossorial habit, and often proclaiming its presence by the great warrens
it excavates, was formerly execedingly plentiful, and (subject to much
local fluctuation) almost universally distributed in sectors 2 and 4, where
it was one of the most important of aboriginal accessory food sources.
Tt has now been almost eliminated from the south-western sector and

170 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

persists only as a rare form in scattered localities in the drainage of
the Sandover and Plenty Rivers and in the north-west of sector 6.

The material examined has come entirely from the south-west
sector, the chief localities represented being: Chundrinna and Waltha-
jalkanna about 12 and 5 miles north of the Everard Range respectively ;
several points south of the Musgrave Range in about the same latitude;
Allarinna on the north front of the same range; 20 miles east of Mount
Conner; 12 miles south-west of King’s Creek on the south side of the
George Gill Range, and 5 miles north of Desolation Glen in the
Rawlinson Range.

Caloprymnus campestris Gould 1843

Dieri, Wirtiree; Yowrorka, Koorjee; Yalliyanda, Wonkanooroo,
Oolacunta.

The known distribution of this animal as a recent species is in a
portion of the eastern part of the Lake Hyre Basin in sector 1, between
Coorabulka in Queensland and Mulka in South Australia and east to
Innamincka.

Within this area it occurs in very small numbers but is subject
to occasional increase as in 1931. I know of no reliable records since
1935.

Material examined comes from Ooroowillani, Mulka and Cooncheri.

MONODELPHIA
MURIDAE

Except in the case of species of strongly marked characters, the
data on individual murids, especially from aboriginal sources is
generally less than that for marsupials, and where material also has
been scanty, I have not felt justified in speculating on status and
distribution, but simply record the localities represented.

Rattus villosissimus Waite 1897
Wonkanooroo, Miaroo; Anmatchera, Artoka”); Warramunga,
Walpari, Gootanga (very widely used) ; East Arunta, Ilyowra, Yimala.
Locality records are from east of Banka, and from Alroy and
Alexandria in sector 8; Lake Nash, Wycliffe Well, Elkedra in sector 6;

(1) The same, or a very similar word may be used for a frog which also burrows into
creek banks.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 171

Bundey River area, Tarlton Range, Pituri Creek, Napperby Creek im
sector 4; Appamunna, Cooncheri, Puttaburra, and Mulka in sector 1,

This is an eastern form with headquarters as a breeding species,
in Western Queensland, At intervals of from five to seven years its
populations undergo a eyelic increase and it swarms into the adjoining
parts of eastern Central Australia occasionally reaching Stuart’s Line
or slightly beyond. These migratory populations vanish again, usually
quite quickly but sometimes persist for as much as 18 months. In the
eastern part of the Lake Eyre Basin in sector 1, it is a resident species
though normally present in very small numbers, and there is a
possibility that the Napperby Creek population south of Stuart’s Bluff
Range, and perhaps others in the Maedonnells are of the same kind,
though it is more likely that they are rather persistent remnants of
migration waves.

The material personally examined comes from all four of the
sector 1 localities and from all three of those in sector 4, and from
unspecified localities in ‘Central Australia’’.

Rattus tunneyi Thomas 1904

The subspecies R, t. dispar Brazenor 1936 is known from the Alice
Springs district in sector 4 and from Tennant Creek on Stuart’s Line
between sector 7 and 8 and evidently once had a considerable north-
south range.

No new material nor data on the atatus of this species has been
ohtained during the course of this work.

Material personally examined comes from both the abovenamed
places and specimens labelled ‘‘Central Australia’? have also been seen,

The above two species which are numerically insignificant in
‘‘normal’’ times are apparently the only representatives of the genus
in the area,

Psendomys (Pseudomys) minnie Troughton 1932

Wonkanooroo, Pallyoora.

Recorded from Appamunna, Cooncheri, Mulka, Ooroowillani,
TInnamincka, Cordillo and other points in the eastern portion of the
Lake Eyre Basin in sector 1; at Stuart Creek just south of this sector
and at Arckaringa in sector 3.

Known to settlers as the River Rat, from its oecasional prevalence
alone the course of the Diamantina and Barcoo channels, it is normally

172 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in small numbers but subject to local increase which, however, does not
seem to carry it into the more northerly or westerly sectors. A south-
easterly form not characteristic of the Centre as a whole.

Material examined from all the above localities and from Ooldea,
south of sector 3.

Pseudomys (?Pseudomys) fieldi Waite 1896

This very obscure species is, I] believe, still known only by the
original specimen obtained by the Horn Expedition at or near Alice
Springs in sector 4, Jt has been variously ascribed by different
authors to Laggadina, and Thetomys as well as Pseudomys ss.

Pseudomys (Thetomys) nanus Gould 1858
Pitjanjarra, Pntroota.

The loeality records are Koonapandi and Mount Crombie, south of
the Musgrave Range in sector 2; near Alice Springs in sector 4;
Barrow Creek and Wveliffe Creek on Stuart’s Line between sectors

5 and 6.

Material from all these localities has been examined as well as
some labelled ‘‘Central Australia’’ only.

This rat has been variously relegated to ‘‘Mastacomys sp.’’, to
“Mus? nanus Gould, and to Gyomys desertor Troughton. I have
redeserihed it fully (1941) and shown that inelusion in Gyomys is
contra indicated by its eranial characters. Tate (1951) after
re-examining the type of Mus nanus Gould, dissents from the above
identification, but IT adhere to it until the matter can be tested by direct
comparison, Tate finds the interval of 1,000 miles separating the type
locality of Mus nanus Gould from that of the above material, good
reason for not merging them. It must be recalled, therefore, that a
greater distance separates the type locality of Gyomys desertor at
Wycliffe Creek from that of Victorian specimens taken on the Murray.

Pseudomys (Leggadina) forresti Thomas 1906

The type locality is at Alexandria in sector 8, and a single
specimen from Mulka in sector 1 has also been referred to it. Nothing
is known as to its status except that it is certainly not plentiful.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS {73

Pseudomys (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis Waite 1896

Pitjanjarra, Menkz.

Locality records are, in sector 2; Wollara, near the Basedow
Range; Ayer’s Rock; Alpera at the north-west spur of the Musgrave
Ranges; [Mrliwunyawunya, Owellinna, and Ernabella on the south side
of the same; Chundrinna on the north side and Karmeena on the south
side of the Everard Range; sector 3; Charlotte Waters: sector 4;
Hermannsburg; ‘*Macdonnell Ranges’’; and Teatree Well: sector 5;
Barrow Creek and the Granites: sector 7-8; Tennant Creek on Stuart’s
Line; and in sector 8 at Alexandria.

Although formerly having a wide distribution outside the central
areas and said to have oceurred as late as 1857 at the junction of the
Murray and Darling Rivers in Victoria, in western New South Wales,
south-western Queensland, western and south-western South Australia
and south-eastern West Anstralia, this species is today a characteris-
tically Central Australian form, and provides a curious inversion of
the usual regional status of such widely spread mammals. In central
latitudes its chief concentration is in the south-west and thongh it has
been recorded from Alexandria in the opposite sector, I could find
little aboriginal knowledge of it in many of the intermediate districts
in 1950-56.

In 1932-35 it was probably the most plentiful and wide spread
mammal in sectors 3 and 2 and in the western half of sector 4, where it
still persists, but T could get no evidence of ifs presence in sector 1
and if it exists today east of Stuart’s Line, it is rare.

Material examined has come from all! the above localities except
the last four,

Pseudomys (Leggadina) waitei Troughton 1932

Pitjanjarra, Anoola.

Locality records exist for Mulka in seetor 1; Wollara near the
Basedow Range in sector 2; ‘‘Macdonnell Ranges’’, Frazer River, and
Hart Range, in sector 4.

Little is known about the distribution and status of this species.
Most of the ahove records are based on material taken prior to 1940,
A small non saltatory murid which may be this form is still known to
natives in the eastern sectors, but no speeimens are available in
support. The names Idjibudoo, Witchiburrt of the Warramunga;
Eeyimma of the eastern Arunta, and U mbwinyilpa of the Ilyowra may
be relevant here.

174 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In 1932 it was considered a rare form at Wollara, where it was
outnumbered ten to one by P. (L.) hermannsburgensis and was not
known in the Musgrave Range districts.

The material personally examined comes from Wollara,
‘‘Macdonnell Range’’ and Frazer River,

Laomys pedunculatus Waite 1896

The original localities from which the Horn Expedition material
came were Alice Springs (s, lato?) and [amurta in the James Range.
I have acceptable records of it since at Hugh Creek in the Macdonnell
Ranges; from the Napperby Hills south of Stuart’s Bluff Range, also
in sector 4; and in the Davenport Range in sector 6.

This species seems now to be rare and no material of it could be
obtained during the field work of 1931-35, It is still extant, however,
and the three additional records provided are based on specimens
taken, though not examined by me—the Hugh Creek in 1935; Napperby
Hills in 1950 and Davenport Range in 1953. The latter represents a
considerable extension of range—200m, north of Alice Springs.

Material examined is from Alice Springs (?s. lato) and from
Tilamurta, and ineludes the dubious variety ‘‘brachyotis’’,

There are as yet, I believe, no records of the related species
Laomys woodwardi Thomas (based on Wyndham in the Kimberley
Division of Western Australia) within the area here considered, nor
of Zyzomys argurus Thomas, though the latter has been taken by Tate
(1951, p. 265) in the Mount Isa district of western Queensland, about
100 miles from the Central Australian border in sector 6. There are
native accounts of a large brush-tailed rat living a subarboreal life on
the lightly timbered plains in the north-west of seetor 4 and adjoining
portions of sector 5, The Anmatchera of these parts speak of it as
of something belonging to a recent past, and their accounts suggest a
Conilurus sp. ef, hemileucurus.

Leporillus apicalis Gould 1853
Pitjanjarra, Tchujalpi; Arunta, Turulpa; Pintubi, Tweealpi.
Loeality records are from the country south of the hills between
Ayers Range and the Cavenagh on the 26th parallel; and west of Mount

Crombie, in seetor 2; and west of Mount Peculiar and at ‘Alice
Springs’’ in sector 4.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 175

This species, which is believed to have had a wide range over
south-eastern Australia, was first noted in Central Australia by Ernest
Giles in 1872, It seems always to have had a rather frail hold there
and by 1940 had become a rare form even in the virgin districts of the
Aboriginal Reserves, and was quite unknown in the pastoral country
of the mid Macdonnells where the Horn Expedition obtained it, If
it survives today it is probably in the north-west of sector 4, and must
be in very small numbers.

‘Two specimens have been examined, obtained near Mount Crombie
in 1933, by Messrs. Hackett and Tindale, and one of the Torn
Expedition, from ‘‘Alice Springs’’.

Leporillus conditor Gould 1849

Wonkanooroo, Wopilkara.

Although definite locality reeords are lacking, this species was
accorded by general repute, a wide distribution at the beginning of
pastoral ocenpation, in the southern part of seetor 1, exelusive of the
Arunta desert, and as far west as the Arckaringa tablelands in sector
3. An imterval of nearly 400 miles separates the most northerly
specimens of couditor examined, from the most southerly of the central
population of apicalis, But this may not be significant and whether
the two species ever overlapped in these latitudes as they seem to have
done further to the south-east, is now a matter of speculation.

By 1931 it had become very rare in the Lake Eyre districts, and
it is doubtful if it still survives there, though it does so far to the
south-west near the southern margin of the Nullarbor Plain.

Material examined was taken in 1907 near the western shore of
Lake Eyre North, near the boundary of sectors 1 and 3.

Notomys alexis Thomas 1922

Yankunjarra, Dargawdrra; Pitjanjarra, Wilchimba, Other names
in use for Notomys spp. close to alexis but not specifically identified
are: Pitjanjarra, Ilpalya; Kukatja, Anpa, Illyakirri; Kast Arunta,
llyowra, Allabaiya, Kurwnja; Tehingilli, Munyininni.

The speeies of Notomys appear, vanish and reappear at such
unexpected places and times that it would be highly unsafe to
dogmatize as to the local status or distributional headquarters of any
of them, The recorded limits of alexis, however, exceed those of all
other inland species and there can be little doubt that it is the dominant

176 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

form today over the whole of Central Australia, with the exception of
the districts about Lake Eyre in the south-east. The locality records
involve all 8 sectors, and are numerous, especially in the south-west,

In 1952-35 if was exceedingly plentiful in seetors 2 and 3 and in
one or two restricted localities such as Wollara in the Basedow Range
area and Chundrinna and Walthajalkanna near the Hverard Range, it
constituted a minor plague, It is still present in these sectors, but it
is many years since it has been seen in large numbers. Elsewhere it
persists but has not been reported in large numbers in any of the areas
personally visited.

Long series have been examined, the peripheral localities being:
Warburton Range and Canning Stock Route in the west; Alexandria
and Alroy in the north; Haddon Downs in the south-east and Oolarinna
below the Everard Range in the south.

Notomys amplus Brazenor 1936

Knowledge of this large species still depends upon Brazenor’s
original deseription of two females from Charlotte Waters in sector 3,
taken by the Horn Expedition in 1896.

The Pitjanjarra of the Musgrave Range have a name Arryja, for
a species of Notomys much larger than the Dargawarra, but it seems
to be almost legendary at the present day.

Notomys cervinus Gould 1853

Wonkanooroo, Oorurrie.

In the past this species has been much confused with N. alexis
and N. fuscus eyreius, which has tended to give it a fictitionsly wide
range. Following a re-examination of the type by Morrison-Seott and
Tate (1951 op, eft., p. 262) the writer (1960) gave a summary redeserip-
tion of the species and the loeality records now quoted conform to this
conception of its charactors.

The main distribution belt appears to be to the east and south and
only sectors 1 and 3 are involved in the records. These are: Roseberth,
25m. north of Birdsville; Birdsville; Appamunna; Pandi Pandi;
Cooncheri; Cowarie; and Mulka, all in the southern part of sector 1
on both the Queensland and South Australian sides of the border and
Charlotte Waters in sector 3.

Normally its occurrence is very sparse but it is subject to periodic
inerease in the Lake Eyre Basin as in 1930-31.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 177

Material has been examined from all the above localities except
the first.

Notomys fuscus Wood Jones 1925

Wonkanooroo, Wilkintie.

The type locality of this species is at Ooldea, south of the area
here considered, but a local form of it distinguished hy the trinomial
eyreius (1960 op. cit.) occurs sympatrically with N. cervius mn sectors
1 and 2. The localities are: Putta Burra; Mtadinna; Mulka; Cordillo
and Innamincka in sector 1; and at Charlotte Waters in sector 3.

This species has been plentiful in the Lake Eyre Basin recently
(1957) but is normally in small numbers.

Material personally identified is from all the above localities.

The specimen assigned under this uame to the Basedow Range by
Tate (1951, op. cit., p. 268) is an intermediate of N. alexis ales and
N. alexis everardensis.

Notomys longicaudatus Gould 1844

Arunta, Ulubaiya (of Spencer).

Locality records are: Mount Burrell, and the Burt Plain north
ot Alice Springs, in sector 4; Barrow Creek in sector 5.

This large species was first obtained in Central Australia by the
Horn Expedition of 1896, and again taken by Spencer at Barrow Creek
in 1901. I have been able to obtain no more recent material and
reports of larger species than N. alexis though current, are vague as
to survival. The word Allabaiya, listed above for indeterminate
species of Notomys, is obviously the same as Spencer’s quoted here.
It was heard on the Sandover and at Pituri Creek on the Queensland
border of sector 4 but was not applied to a particularly large species.

One specimen examined (date unknown) from Mount Burrell.

Notomys mitchelli Ogilby 1839

Localities from which this species has been recorded are Dickaree,
40m, north of Birdsville, and Birdsville in sector 1; ‘‘ Alice Springs’?
in sector 4; and ‘‘Central Australia’’.

The occurrence in the Lake Hyre Basin was recorded by Tate
(1951) and has recently been confirmed (1959) but the others are based
on old specimens of somewhat doubtful history,

178 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

N. mitchelli appears to be numerically of minor importance as a
Central Australian species, but its general status there is obscure,

Material personally examined comes from the Lake Eyre Basin
in sector 1 and from ‘Alice Springs’’ and ‘‘Central Australia’’.

Hydromys chrysogaster Geoffroy 1804

Wonkanooroo, Tina appa.

Loeality records are from the Bareoo and Diamantina Rivers and
outlying lagoons of sector 1, south-east of the Arunta Desert.

The water rat is not in large numbers in this district but is
persistent and has adapted itself suecessfully to the violent fluctuations
of its domain, which may change almost overnight from a small pool
isolated by hot wastes of sand drifts and stony deserts, to an inland
sea, In view ol its known hardihood and resource it 1s somewhat
remarkable that it has never colonised the Finke valley where some of
the western tributaries provide permanent water; but persistent
enquiry there has revealed no trace of it as a living species, nor
aboriginal knowledge.

It may be present in the streams of the north-west of sector 7
and north-east of sector 8, but much of their drainage is in Torresian
lands.

Material examined is from the Barcoo River near Innamineka, and
conforms in a general way to H. c. fulvolavatus Gould 1853.

Canis familiaris dingo Blumenbach 1780

Dieri, Kinturra; Wonkanooroo, Mudla; Pitjanjarra (s. lato),
Tchitoodja, Papa (Papa imurra); Arunta, Adnerra; ITlyowra,
Ay yun ga, Walpari, Malik; Warramunga, Kunaba; Tchingilli,
Iminji; Mudburra, Winjiwannoo.

The dingo is ubiquitous in Central Australia and the present day
security of its status is one of the major grievances of the pastoral
community, Although steadily persecuted by poison bait, trap and
native hunter, it succeeds in maintaining itseli—often in surprising
numbers—wherever watering facilities and suitable breeding grounds
are to be found.

Material examined comes from many localities chiefly in sectors
2 and 4,

(1) This word has heen distorted in spelling, in an attempt to contrast it with the Tlyowra word
for the euro—drrunga—trom which, in rapid speech, it is almost indistinguishable
by Europeans,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 179

CHIROPTERA

Comparatively little is known about the bat fama of Central
Australia, It hag sometimes been assumed that aridity and a quanta-
tive reduction of insect life as a whole, are concommitants which must
necessarily lead to a parallel poverty of microchiroptera, both in
species and individuals. How true this may be, can only be tested by
systematic collecting. A study of the known distribution of Australian
bats, indicates that in a considerable number of cases where the species
has not yet been taken in Central Australia, the records straddle that
area, either from north to south or more often from east to west, and
if seems likely that more field work will show that some of them are
actually exploiting the region, as a seasonal activity, at least,

The writer did not collect systematically in this group and such
results as were obtained were more or less incidental to other work.
On several oceasions native children brought in quile large series of
the smaller kinds, which in general they seemed to have no difficulty
in locating. The species represented by this material and the localities
involved are listed below together with previously published records—
some of the latter are of long standing and may need review and the
identifications should be regarded as provisional.

The following names are used for bats in general:—Wonkanooroo,
Pinchipinchinarra; Pitjanjarra, Pindinarra, Oolpoolparrie; Tlyowra,
Arunta, Walpari, Anjibeera; Tehingilli, Mudburra, Nullaminminni,

Pteropus cf. scapulatus Peters 1862

Warramunga (?and Kaitish), Petong, Bitango, Wilwanunga;
Worgaia, Wundoogarri; Tehingilli, Piljeena; Mudburra, Wolpaooreo;
Mara, Alowa, Matchoo; Yanula, Murrainjinya; Larrakia, Lwmuleena.

Loeality records: Arthur Creek, Pituri Creek and Sandover River
in sector 4; Frew River in sector 6; Bank Banka in sector 7; Buchanan
and Playford Creeks in seetor 8.

After a descent by easy stages from the green, well watered
country of the northern tribes who use the above names, into the mach
less well favoured territory of the Warramunga, it was surprising to
find the latter well acquainted with this fruit bat as a frequent visitor,
The furnace like gorges and spinifex clad quartzite serees of the
Murchison-Davenport Range area seem very ineonernous habitats for
such a creature, but it appears that after rains it exploits for a season
the wealth of eucalypt blossom which follows along the ereeks and is
relished as a food item by the blacks,

180 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

The visitations are regular in sector 8, frequent in sectors 7 and
6 and occasional in sector 4. In the latter they are often reported
drowned in open tanks.

No material has been examined and it is possible that 2 Pteropus
spp. are involved—but specimens of P. scapulatus were immediately
recognized as the more frequent.

Macroderma gigas Dobson 1880

Arunta, Elkintera (Spencer and Gillen).

Locality records are: ‘‘Alice Springs’’, Mount Conway, Frazer
River, Ellery Creek Gorge, Field River at ca. 23° 30’ 8. lat. in sector
4, and ‘‘Central Australia’’.

Although its general status is that of a relict species, the Ghost
Bat is less rare than formerly thought and is quite widely spread in
Central Australia and adjoining tracts, The recession has been from
the south, Old men of the Pitjanjarra knew it 40 years ago in the
Musgrave, Mann and Tomkinson Ranges, whence it has now long gone,

Material has been examined from most of the above localities.

Nyctophilus geoffroyi Leach 1822

Pandi Pandi, Putta Burra on the Diamantina River and ‘Lake
Eyre’’ in sector 1 (material); Tempe Downs on the Palmer Creek
(mat.) and Horne Expedition, in sector 4; Tennant Creek (mat.)
sector 7; Alexandria in sector 8,

N. g. pallescens Thomas 1913 is based on Alexandria.

Eptesicus pumilus Gray 1841
Officer Creek (mat.) sector 2; Temple Bar (mat.) and Brook's
Soak (mat.) in sector 4.
E. p. caurinus Thomas 1914 has been recorded from Monnt Isa
ca. 100 miles east of the Central Australian border.

Chalinolobus gouldi Gray 1841

Barcoo River (mat.) sector 1; Erliwunyawunya (mat.) and
Ernabella (mat.) in the Musgrave Range of sector 2; Tempe Downs
on Palmer Creek (mat.) in sector 4; Tennant Creek (mat.) in sector
7; Alexandria, sector 8.

C. g. venatoris Thomas 1908 has Alexandria as its type locality.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 181

Chalinolobus cf. morio Gray 1841

‘Lake Eyre district’’ (mat.) in sector 1; Officer Creek (mat.),
Ernabella (mat.) and Wollara (mat.) north of Basedow Range in
sector 2.

Scoteinus greyi Gould 1858

Lower Barcoo River (mat.) in sector 1; Tennant Creek (mat.) and
Sturt Creek in sector 7; Alexandria in sector 8,

Scoteinus balstoni Thomas 1906

This has been identified in collections from the Canning Stock
Route in the Great Sandridge Desert, Wells 43-46, by Glauert
(? unpublished record). The localities are in the latitudes of sectors
5 and 6,

Taphozous australis Gould 1854
Tennant Creek (mat.) in sector 7.

This bat has previously been recorded from Cloncurry, ca. 150
miles east of the Northern Territory border.

Taphozous flayiventris Peters 1867

Junction of Warburton and Tower Creeks (mat.) in sector 4.
This species is stated by natives to frequently appear in the above
area for a short time in late summer,

Nyctinomys australis Gray 1839

Birdsville in sector 1; ‘‘Central Australia’’ (mat.) = sector 4.

The Birdsville record (Tate 1952, op. cit.) is attributed to N. a.
atratus Thomas 1924 the type of which is from Ooldea, south of sector
2 (Wood Jones 1925).

Chaerephon plicatus Buchanan-Hamilton 1800

Alexandria in sector 8.

This yielded the type of C. p. colonicus Thomas 1906. The species
has been recorded from Cloncurry, 150m. east of the Northern
Territory border and I have examined material also from Boulia, just
east of sector 1,

182 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SOME INTRODUCED MAMMALS

Feral populations of horses, donkeys, goats and camels are of
local oecurrenee and though not without inflnence on the native fauna,
call for no special treatment here. It may be noted in passing that
the feral water buffalo of the north coast (Bos bubalis anct,) drifts
sporadically over the northern borders of the area here considered
and has been observed at the following localities: Sturt Creek im
sector 7 (1925); 40m. east of Alexandria H.S8. in sector 8 (1953) and
between Tlanami and the Granites, seetor 5 (1927).

In a different category from these ungulates however, are the
house mouse, rabbit, fox and cat which owe their introduction much
more remotely to human influence and which are, or may become in
fulure, all pervading. The distribution and status of these pests will
nv doubt be the subject of properly organized surveys—in the mean-
time I take the opportunity of recording a few facts which have been
ascertained incidentally during this work.

Mas musculus Linne 1758

Wonkanooroo, Punta punla; Iyowra, Undeluquil,

So far as personal observation goes I have records of this animal
as a bush living species only in the southern sectors 1, 2, 3 and 4,
That populations of it exist in the vieinity of European settlements in
the uther sectors is certain, and that it will ultimately be universally
distributed, is very probable,

LT have already (1939) discussed it at length in the Lake Eyre
Basin of sector 1, and have drawn attention to the fact that its popula-
tions there are of long standing, considerably differentiated from urban
types, and may actually represent a derivation from Asia, long
predating European occupation of this country. In this sector it is
subject to periodic inerease to plagne proportions, but elsewhere seems
to be as yet, a very minor influence in the faunal economy. In 1932-35
it was in considerable numbers in various parts of sector 2—as at
Wollara for example, where W. H. Liddle’s settlement at Angas Downs
had given it a start—but it was largely masked by the very large
popnlations of Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis and Notomys
alexis, In the intervening’ years there have been some sharp local
inereases in its numbers, but its status as a whole does not seem to
have changed much.

Rattus norvegicus Erxleben and R. rattus Linne, vars., which
latter has free living rural populations in many parts of Australia,

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 183

do not seem to be able to colonize the Centre. The environment is
apparently definitely adverse to the genus, and the two indigenous
species which have been recorded have only a very slight hold outside
the Lake Myre Basin.

Oryctolagus cuniculus Linne 1758

‘“‘Rabbila’’ very generally used by natives.

Locality records cover all sectors, but as a pest if is chiefly of
importance in 1, 2 and 3, and north of seetor 4 (ca, 22° §, lat.) its
numbers are never great. The following progressively northern
records were obtained during the work of 1950-56. Kurundi, Lake
Nash, between Phillip Creek and Bank Banka, Alexandria, Herbert
Vale, near Camooweal, Helen Springs, 15 miles south of Newcastle
Waters, und Neweastle Waters. At Daly Waters, Katherime and
Darwin there are older sight records, thonght to be due to escape of
individuals held for experimental purposes, but Ratcliffe and Calaby
(1958) record a thriving eolony at Normanton on the Gulf of
Carpentaria. Some of the reports of large warrens in the north-west
of seetor 5 ave probably due to confusion with Bettongia lesueuri.

The arrival of the rabbit in the Centre was via the Lake Eyre
Basin in sector 1 in 1889 or 1890, In 1901 Maurice and Murray
recorded if as already plentiful in the Musgrave Range area and in
1902, en route to the Cambridge Gulf, they found it as far north as
Take Amadeus. Murray as early as 1905 saw its tracks at Kurandi,
in the Davenport Range of sector 6, which is near the present northern
limit of uniform occupation,

The enormous reproductive potential of the species is chiefly
responsible for its being almost chronically out of equilibrium with its
Central Australian environment and its history in most districts is
one of plague nnmbers being built up after usually good rains,
followed by large scale mortality, and then a period—often of several
years—of seareity or near extinction, So far as the local numerical
thunge is concerned, this is more or less characteristic of many
mammals of the area, but in the case of the rabbit the amplitude of
its population Aux is far greater than in any of the native species and
if does not appear capable of dispersing protectively as they do.

It should be noted however that good eye witnesses have stated
that at times of large seale mortality a proportion of the rabbits have
shown symptoms outwardly quite similar to those of modern myxoma-
tosis. Some of these observations predate the deliberate introduction
of that virus by 40 years or more,

(84 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Vulpes vulpes Linne 1758

Pitjanjarra, Torka (said to be an attempt to reproduce the English
sound ‘‘fox’? which is very diffiewlt for them).

Locality records involve sectors 1 to 6 but north of sector 4 it is
still something of a curiosity. The most northerly report obtained
(1956) was between Elkedra and Hatches Creek in seetor 6, but there
are much more northerly observations to east and west of the Centre,
vix.: at Inverleigh, 45m. south-west of Normanton on the Gulf of
Carpentaria in Queensland and at Wyndham in the Kimberley Division
of Western Australia at ea. 15° 32 S, lat,

Foxes were noted at Anna Creek in sector 3 in 1910 and for two
decades subsequently made only slow progress in their northern
advanee, In the field work of 1932 they were found to be well known
to natives and white doggers in the Rverard and Musgrave Ranges of
sector 2, though still in quite small nnmbers, They reached the
Basedow Range in 1933 and Tarper Springs in 1937; the latter is just
east of Stnart’s Line and near the northern border of sector 4 which
is now completely oceupied from east to west,

At the present time the densest fox population is eentred in
sectors 2 and 3 and it is in the virgin, pastorally unoceupied areas of
the former that the most spectacular damage to the native fauna has
aecrued, The bounty on fox scalps which was paid in South Australia
in earlier years has unfortynately long been discontinued so that it is
not possible to get numerical estimates of its status, as with the dingo,
But at Frnabella in the Musgrave Range, where large numbers of
dingo sealps are traded in every year, native hunters interrogated in
1956, stated that in the area immediately to the south of the Musgrave,
Mann, and Tomkinson Ranges (which yields most of their dog sealps),
the fox now outnumbers the dingo. The annual take of dingo scalps
in this area for the eight years prior to 1956 is stated to have fluctuated
from 500 to 3,000, with an average of ea, 1,300, and the maximum
in 1956.

Felis cattus domesticus Linne 1758

Pitjanjarra («, lato), Naaiya (— meeow), Muleoo.

Although no systematic work has been done on the distribution of
the feral cat, it is probable that at the present time it is ubiquitous in
Central Australia. Wells’ record of one seen during the Elder
Expedition in 1891, 100 miles south-west of Mount Sqnires in the
northern portion of the Victoria Desert and 400 miles from any

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS 185

European settlement, is remarkable evidence of the extent of its
penetration and the duration of its tenure.

In sector 1 it sometimes increases markedly during rodent plagues,
but elsewhere its numbers are moderate, and as the natives hold it in
high esteem gastronomically, it may possibly be checked somewhat,
wherever there are active hunting populations.

SUMMARY

The results of two periods of field work on Central Australian
mammals in 1931-35 and 1950-56, are combined with existing data in
a summary statement on the distribution of the known species.

The area dealt with is subdivided into 8 sectors which are indicated
on a map and briefly defined.

Factors having a potent influence on the status of mammals in
Central Australia, are briefly discussed.

Some native names, obtained during the field work, are recorded.

LIST OF REFERENCES

Brazenor, (. W., 1936; Memoirs Nat. Mus., Melbourne, 9, 7.
Finlayson, H. H., 1933: Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Anust., LVIT, 197-200.
1939: ibid. 63, 1, 115.

1941: ibid. 65, 2, 224,

1958: Handbook for South Australia, A.N.Z.A.A.S., 122-125,

1958: Ree. 8. Aust. Museum, XIII, 2, 235-302.
——— 1960: Trans. Roy. Soe. 5. Aust., 83, 79.
Glauert, L., 1933: Jour. Roy. Soc. W. Austr., XTX, 17-32.
Johnston, T. H., 1943: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67, 2, 249-270.
Marlow, B. J., 1958: C.S.1.R.0., Wild Life Research, 3, 2, 71-114.

Ratcliffe, F. N., and Calaby, J. H., 1958: art. ‘‘Rabbit’’, Aust.
Encyclopedia, Sydney.

Sanger, EH. B., 1882: American Naturalist, XVIII, 9-14.
Shortridge, G. C., 1910: Proce. Zool, Soe. London (1909), 803-848.
Spencer, B., 1896: Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., N.S., EX, 5.

1896: in ‘‘Reports of the work of the Horn Scientific
Expedition to Central Australia’’.

186 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Stirling, H., 1896: «bid.
Tate, G. H. H., 1947: Bull. Am. Mus. Nat. Hist., 88, 3, 123.
1948: ibid. 92, 6, 343.
1951: ibid. 97, 4, 247.
1952: ibid. 98, 7, 593.
Tindale, N. B., 1940: Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Aust., 64, 1, 140-231, map.

Wood Jones, F., 1925: ‘The Mammals of South Australia’’, Adelaide,
3, 393.

Alphabetical list of aboriginal names used in the text.

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

APPENDIX

187

Name | People Species
Achilpa .......... Arunta; Ilyowra ........0+.sseee Dasyurus geoffroyt
Adnerra .......... Abtinti oc. sce cee g a at Se oe Canis familiaris dingo
Adnungwa ....--.+ | Thydwre .. eee tad t ewe n as Lagorchestes hirsutws
Alatra .epseeeeeee Slyowra: ? Worgaia .....-....-.. Macropus rufus
Allabaiya ...--..5+ ' Arunta: Tlyowra ......---.++-++5 Notomys sp.

MBB ea cece TIYOWrA occa p eee rete teens Bettongia leaneurt
Ampurta ........- Arunta: Tlyowra ..-.-.....2-50+5 Dasycercus cristicauda
Andunya...+.-.605 AHHH cee eee ee ete tee Trichosurus vulpecula
Anoola ...... 2.505 Pitjanjarra .. 2.2... eee ee eee Pa, (Leggadina) waiter
Anpa ...., eyes Kukatja .....cees cece rte ce rereen Notomys sp.
Anjibeera ........5 Ilyowra: Arunta: Walpari ....., Bats (in general)
Anuljalu .,....... Tyowrts. .. . 5.5 os eens Bee eee a of. Sminihopsis ap.
Areenin ...,.-.4+- Tlyowra: ? Worgaia ..,....-----+ Macropus robustus
Arrajanuta .,....- Arunta: Ilyowra...... 6.6.00. 605 Antechinomys spenceri
Arrawa 20s eee ee Arunta: Ilyowra ..-.,+---+++--55 Petrogale lateralis
Armuja ...,.-. 466 Pitjamparra coy ec e eects enero te Notomys sp. (large)
Arrungfa ......6.6- Arunta: Ilyowra ............5055 | Macropus robustus
Artoka .........5- Anmatchera 21.0.2 -4¢s 60 eee eas Rattus villosissimus
Ayoorta .....,.+-- Arunta: Ilyowra ..........-- .... | Thalacomys lagotia
Ay yunga .....-+, DEPOTS siete Sets feeiaretete pie iene + Canis familiaris dingo
Bitango .......-55 | Warramunga: ? Kaitish ......... Pteropus sp. cf, scapulatus
Bukquroo ........ Warramunga: Mudburra ......,-. Isvadon or Perameles sp.
Bunyilba..,,..--45 YOWIG cee eee eee eter een ttl cf. Sminthopasia sp.
Bntgoola ....... oi, | TOMI RTNE a, oes ee ete 0G alte as lsoodon or Perameles sp.
Dargawarra ....... Pitjanjarra ..... sc cece eees Notomys alexis
Declanda ......... Walpari ...2.0.cec sceneries Lagorchestes hirsutus
Djalku..,..---4.-- Pitjanjarra . 6-6... eee ete Thalacomys lagotis
Eecharricharri Pitjanjarra ... 2. cea ree ett eee Notoryctes typhlops
Eeyimma .......-- APUMGR tet eee Cpe tet etki bee of. Leggadina sp.
Elkintera ......... Arunta 2. cca abet creas si ines Macroderma gigas
Entroota ........- Pitjanjarra. . 2... v ee ee tte aes Ps. (Thetomys) nanus
Gootanga .. 6.6.06. Warramunga: Walpari .......... Rattus villosissimus
Gowngar .-.-....5 Wontbaia oo. . ce seer eet eee gee Trichosurus vulpecula
Idjibudoo .,.-.... Warramunga ...... 66 cee eee eens ef, Leggadina sp.
Ilyakirri ...---4,. Kukatija oc... ccc cece ese reeee . | Notomys sp.

Tipalya ...... evans | Pitjamparra coc ete eee eens Nolomys sp.

Tininji .........0055 Tehingilli 65.665. see e cece eee eens Oanis familiaris dingo
Inappa ..........- Wonkanooroo ..2. 0.00... 0e ee een Tachyglossus aculeatus
Inarlinga,...-. +... APUNEO oo. eee eee eet b bade Tachyglossus aculeatus
Indwarritja ..,..-. | Tlyowra 2.0.0.6... cece cee ene Beltongia penicillata
Inniwallinga ...... Wonkanooroo ......... 600-2050 Tuchyglossus aculeatua
Ttjaritjara ........ Pitjanjarra 22.4 +s ey cere eee ee Notoryctes typhlops
Jobodo .,...,..... Tohingili . . no eee eed terete ss Dasyurus sp.
Joodama ..,....,. Mudburra ......... 0c eee e eee Macropus robustus
Jungunar ..,...... Mudburra ...... 0. ccc eee ence eee Trichosurus vulpecula

188 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
APPENDIX 1—continued

Name People Species
Kalama .,.....+-- Pohingilli oi. eee bb tae weed Lagorchestes conspicillatus
Kanunka ......... Wonkanooroo: Dieri ............ Bettongia leaueuri
Kapita ........... Oy eee ee 4 ee ea Thalacomys lagotis
Karpitchi ........- | Pitjanjarra ......... 0... cece ee Bettongia penicillata
Keelyilli .......... Tehingilli ...... thay peed tgs rpinsane Tachyglossus aculeatus
Keenika Vankunjarra ...... 0. c secre eee Dasyurus geoffroyi
Kinturra ......... DIE. tte s 44s bo eles et ea pel uems Canis familiaris dingo
Kirimbu .......,.. Math» joann ees ee eae eeu meee Macropus robustus
Koongarra -..--.-- | Wonkanooroo ............. 0.2008 Macropus rufus
Koorjee .......... Yowrorka ...... rrewetese te . | Caleprymnus campestris
Kowari .. 2.0 00.206 Wonkanooroo ..,...... tit beer Dasyuroides byrnet
Kudjani ........4. Mita, ty b Set ea catas 4 vpsssae | DPrichosurua vulpecula
Kulara ...... 05.55 & Tyowra.. 2.2... ccc e cence en Peitrogale lateralis
Kulwarri ..-.... a+ | Tohingilli wo... 0... cece eee eae Jsoodon or Perameles ap.
Kunaba........... Warramunga .......- ieasenveseen Canis famtliarts dinga
Kunala ........... Pitjanjarra ois... ...aue hbo F453 Macropus robustus
Kunjilba ........, Pitjanjarra oi eee ete eee ees Choeropus ecaudatus
Kunnakulumbi .... | Walpari ..., 00.0... cece eee ees . | of, Smunthopsis sp.
Kunula ........44 Pitjanjarra . 0... eee ee eee Macropus robuatus
Kurunja +-+-4, | Llyowra: Arunta ........... 0.005 Notomys sp.
Luali .. 2.2.4.0... Larrakig oe. si seen aes neces | Dasyurus hallucatus
Lumuleena ....... Larrakia ........, Passa cirs feeye | Pteropus cf. acapulatus
Manla ._...,,..:- } Pitjanjatra ......0....4.....0.06 | Lagorchestes hirsutus
Makoora ......... 2 Nadadjera ...... ale LAPPR ser Isoodon or Perameles sp.
Mahik ............ AMIDE soy wea pine e555 ace teh en pd Canis familiaris dingo
Malowena ,..-...., [Mare pisces ees tiueis canoes sees | of. Sminthopasia sp.
Marloo ....5....5. Pitjanjarra, ...,......-..--..008- Macropus rufus
Maradjee.,...,.... | Warramunga ............ 6.00000. Macropus robustus
Marrabun ........ Warramunga ., 2.2.0... . eee cree Trickosurus vulpecula
Matchoo .......... Mara: Alowa@ .i.eee eee e net erens Pleropus cf. scapulatus
Meetika .......... Pitjanjarry.soa3 ea dete ess lass Bettongia lesueurt
Melatjhani ......., Wonkanoorto .. 06.0... cee eee Sminthopsis larapinta
Menki .....0...4545 Pibjanjarra ....... 0c. eee eee eee Ps. (Leggadina) hermannsburgensis
Miaroo...... 26.005 Wonkanooroo .,-.. 50-6 csr e ee Rattus villosissimus
Mudagoora ....... Wonkanoorao ... 2c cece eee eee Dasycercus cristicauda
Mudla ........5..- Wonkanooroo .. 0.5.0.6. v eee Canis familiaris dingo
Muleoo ....... 04 oe | Pitjamjarra oo... 25. cece cee Felis cattus domesticus
Mundawuljiwulji Walpatiy sac. tens secs dee dae eee Notoryctes typhlops
Mungawyuroo ..... Pitjanjarra 2... eee ee eta ee Trichosurus vulpecula
Manyininni,..... .. | Tohingilli ........., pals se sts Gels Notomys sp.
Munyoolha ....... ATU Hits po oe a vce eee ef. Sminthopsis ap.
Muritja .......0.. Pitjamjarva. .. 0... - eee eee Dusycercus cristicauda,
Mutrainjinya ..,... NL ee Pteropus ct. scapulatus
Myarin ..-........ Mndburra ...... 0.2.0... bined Isoodon or Perameles sp.
Nadama .......... Warramunga oe. ec eee Lagorchestes conspicillatus
Narloodi ..... vege | Walpari cece cca d eee a entaaee Dasycercus cristicauda
Nilce 2... Fesstwens Wonkanooroo ...6.... 0.0.00 0008 . Sminthopsis crassicaudata
Nilliyilloo ......4. Worgaia ..-.........000. petegtne Tachyglassus aculeatus
Ngaiya ........ +» | Pitjanjarra ........., ee SSR AAS ERS Felis cattua domesticus
Nginana .......6.. Pitjanjarra .....,.-. 02. eee ee Perameles eremiana
Ngingulda ........ Teobingilli . 2... eee ee Tachyglossus aculeatus
Ngynoo .......... Pitjanjarra ........,. eames Buss xd Thalacomys lagotis
Nullaminminni .... | Tchingilli: Mudburra ,........., . | Bats (in general)

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

APPENDIX 1—continued

189

Okirra ...........

Oolbulla ...-....-.
Oolpoolparri ......
Oorarri ...--.20.5.
Oqualpi ......----
Ouwrra ........ eee

Piljeena ..........
Pinchi pinchi narra.
Pindinarra .......-
Pitchi pitchi ......
Poodoojowrag .....
Pulthida .........
Punta punta ..,,.-

Tajadi .,.........
Tajinma .......,.-
Takooladji ........
Talgoo ....,-+--5 ‘
Techilkamutta .....
Tchirilya .
Tehitoodja ........
Tehujalpi .........
Tebukooroo .....)<
Tebungba
Tchungoo ,........
Tchungunba ......
Tehunma .........
Vhulka .,...-- itt $2

Tnunka .......005

Turulpa...........
Tweealpi .........

Unbwinyilpa ,.....
Undeluquil
Undinna ....,.-.-.

Wagunyamenzi ....
Wailburdi
Wajingurri
Wakunja..........

| Tyowra

| Warramunga .....- 5; 4s. 0s. eee eee
Mudborra: Tchingilli :

People

Pitjanjarra .....-...-- puvicgeseete

Arunta ,

Yalliyanda :
POW Lorde Beg oe plese) chinese eo ace
Pitjanjarra .......-.. 26 eeee eee
Wonkanooroo ......- +++ reer f
Makatje sca cictey ce ttaeees einen

Wonkanooroo 2.00... e ee eee ee
Pitjanjarra
Pitjanjarra
Warramunga: ?
Tohingilli .... 0.00... 2556-22 res
Wonkanooroo ..........0 00 eee ee
Pitjanjarra eg yg ease pees ole
Vankunjarra .. 2... ,--2555--5 or
Kukatija 2.0.0.2... 6000 tbat pe Slectae
Pitjanjarra .... 6.05... 6 eta e eee
Wonkanooroo 2... 0. ee eee

Arunta: Ilyowra ......-....+-5 at

n. Ikyowra: ? Worgaia .-..---..,

? Worgaia,

TVOWIS wwe res avr nsed bree ee eens
Katktatja 0c eter meee nate
Walpard) ceived aaetes a icpt eweneety |
Tehingilli .......--...---5 (teat
Pitjanjarra 20.6... ee eee eee
Pitjanjarra ..,,-....,-- sanejsispuet
Pitjanjarva .. 6.6... cee ee er
Pitjanjarra so. .05 6.6 tee e es
Pitjanjarra
I wa a
Wulpari ......-.- MATTE eee eee
Pitjamjatra oo... eee erecta ree
Walpari sicvcescesitiiocevees (
Mudburra: Tchingilli : Warramunga |
| Wonkanooroo ......--.. 0.20 ees

Wonkanooroo ..... 2... 06. e eee ee (
AVOMER fps tee recs etree geese
Pitjavjorra. ..+.-442eee ese cen eee
Pitjanjarra
ADUNEE cos cir ett ede te deals
Pintubi

TyOWY a ev pele cla fh seaweed becten'
Thyowra oo... cece eee eee ees ran

Tohingilli . 0.22002. e eee cee
Vankunjarra 2... 2.0.26. cee ceca

Warramunga. |

Species

Tsoodon dauratits

Macropus rufus
Caloprymnus campestria
Tachyglossus aculeatus
Bats (in general)
Notomys cervinus
Lagorchestes conspicillatus
Macropus rufus

Pseudomys minnie
Canis familiaris dingo
Dasyurus geoffroyi
Pieropua cf. scapulatus
Pleropus cf. scapulatus
Bats (in general)

Bats (in general)
Antlechinomys spencert
Perameles or Isoadon sp.
Dasyurus geoffrayi
Mus musculus

Lagorchestes conapicillatus
Petrogale lateralis

Tsoodon or Perameles sp.
Dasyurus geoffroyt
Dasycercus cristicuuda
Trichosurus vulpecula
Thalacomys lagotis
Tachyglassus aculeatus
Tachyglossus aculeatis
Canis familiaris dingo
Leporillus apicalia
Macropus rufus

| Trichosurus vulpecula

Bettongia lesueuri

of. Sminthopsis sp,
Onychogale unguifera

| Thalacomys lagotia
Hydromys chrysogaster

| Bettongia lesueuri

Vulpes vulpes

Onychogale lunata
Leporillus apicalis
Leporillus apicalis

cf, Leggadina sp.
Mus musculus
Trichosurus vulpecula

Onychogale unguifera
Myrmecobius fasciatus
Tachyglossus aculeatus
Onychogale unguifera

190

Wangurra

Wannumbeera ....
Warrigiddi .....,

Warroo

Watabunmurra ....
Wilchimba ......
Wilkinti ........
Willwanunga ......

Windijarra

Winjiwanoo .....
Wintarro.......,
Winnijungoo ....
Wirtiree ........
Witchiburrt .....

Woonyaboonya

Wopilkara .. aie

Wulpoorti
Wundoogarri
Wyoota

Yalbo wiru

Yallara .........
Yarninga .......

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

APPENDIX 1—continued

Mudburra
Mudburra

Mudburra

Techingilli

Mudburra

Worgaia ..

Pitjanjarra
Wonkanooroo
Warramungs : ? Kaitish
Worgaia ..

Pitjanjarra
Warramunga ...... 2.0. eee eee
Dieri .....

Wonkanooroo
Yankunjarra .... 2.0.06. cece eee
Worgaia ..
Pitjanjarra

People

Yankunjarra ...... ccc eee e eee

ee ee ee ed

Warramunga: Wombaia .........
Pitjanjarra

ee ee ee a ee ee

era)

ee ee ee ey

ee ee ee:

dub Ree 5 tree rterre terest

toe ette red ther tier eure

ee ee ee

| Wonkanooroo ............. 00 eee
Ilyowra: ¢, Arunta ............4.
Arunta ...
Arunta: Ilyowra ...........2..-.
Walpari: Warramunga : Tohingilli

ef, Sminthopsis

Species

sp.

Pleropus cf, seapulatus
Lagorchestes conspicillatus
Trichosurus vulpecula.

Macropus rufus

Dasyurus hallucatus
Thalacomys lagotis
Petrogale lateralis
Macropus robustus

Notomys alexis
Notomys fuscus

eyreius

Pteropus of, scapulatus
Bettongia penicillata
Canis familiaris dingo

Isoodon auratus
Dasyurus sp.

Caloprymnus campestris
ef. Leggadina sp.
Dasyurus hallucatus
Leporillus conditor
Myrmecobius fasciatus
Pteropus cf. scapulatus
Trichosurus vulpecula

Thalacomys lagotis
Thalacomys minor
Thalacomys lagotis

of. Sminthopsis sp,
Bettongia penicillata
Tachyglossus aculeatus
Dasyurus geoffroyt
Rattus villosissimus
Onychogale lunata
Isoodon or Perameles sp.

Macropus rufus

FINLAYSON—CENTRAL AUSTRALIAN MAMMALS

APPENDIX 2

List of Mnglish vernacular names for the species discussed (in
the order of the text). _

191

Tanhyglossus aculea-
tus
Dasywrus geoffroyt
Phascogale calura
Phascogale pentoillala
Phascogale macdon-
nellenaie's
Phascogale ingrami .
Dasycercus cvisticauda
Dasyuroides byrici .
Sminthopsis crasst-
caudate
Sminthopsis hirtipes .
Sminthopsis larapinta
Sminthopsis nurina .
Sminthopsis psanvno-
phila
Antechinomys spencert
Myrmecobius fasciatus
Thalacomys lagotis ..
Thalacomys minor ..
Isoodon auratus...
Perameles eremiana ,
Chocropus ecoudatus .

Notoryctes typhlops .
Trichosurus vulpecula

Macropus rufus ., ..

Maeropus robustus . .
Petregale lateralis ..

Onychogale lunata ..

Onychogale unguifera

Lagorchestes conspicil-
latus

Lagorchestes hirsutus

Lagorchestes asomatus

Bettongia penicillata .

Echidna: Native
porcupine

Black tailed Native
Cat

Lesser Brush Tailed
Pouched Rat

Brush tailed
Pouched Rat

Fat tailed Pouched
Rat

Ingram’s Poueched
Rat

Crest tailed Pouched
Rat

Byrne's Pouched

Rat
Fat tailed Pouched
Mouse
Hairy footed
Pouched Mouse
Finke River Pouched
Mouse
Slender tailed
Pouched Mouse
Sandhill Pouchad
Mouse
Western Hopping
Pouched Monae
Banded Anteater
Rabbit Bandisoot
Lesser Rabbit
Bandicoot
Golden Bandicoot
Desert Bandicoot
Pig footed
Bandicoot
Marsupial Mole
Brush tailed
Opossnm
Red or Plains
Kangaroo
Hill Kangaroo
Black flanked Roek
Wallaby
Crescent marked
Nail tailed
Wallaby
Northern Nail
tailed Wallsby
Spectacled Hare
Wallaby
Rufous Hare
Wallaby
Central Hare
Wallaby
Brush tailed Rat
Kangaroo

Beltongia lesueuri ..

Caloprymnus campes-
tris

Rattus villosissimus .

Rattus tunneyt ..

Pseudomyx minnie ..

Pseucdomys fieldi . ..

Ps. (Thetamys) nanus

Ps. (Lepgadina)
waiter

Luomys pedunculatus

Leporillus apiealis ..

Loportilus conditor ..
Notomys alexis ..

Notomys amplus . ..
Notomys cervinus
Natomys fuscus

Notonys longicauda-
tus
Notomya meitchelli ..

TTydromys chryso-
gasler

Canis familiarts dingo

Plerapus scapulatus .

Marroderma gigaa ..

Nyctophilus geoffrayt

Hyptesicus pumila .,
Chalinolobua gowldi .

Chalinolobus moria .,
Scoteimus grey ..
Scoteinun balstont

Laphozous australia .
Taphacous flaviventris
Nywtinomys australis
Chaerephon plicatus .

Bos bubalis .. oa
Mus musculus 2... .
Rattus norvegicus
Rattus rattus . 2. ..
Orjetolagus cunieulus
Fulpes vulpes . .. .-
Felis cathus domes-
ticus

Burrowing Rat
Kangaroo
Plains Rat
Kangaroo
Long Haired Rot
Tunney’s Rat
Reese's Rat
Field's Rat
Little Rat
Waite’s Mouse

Thick tailed Kat
White tipped Tonse
building but
House building Rat
Brown WUopping
Mouse
Brazenar’s Hop-
ping Mouse
Fawn Hopping
Mouse
Wood Jones’ Hop-
ping Mouse
Long tailed Hop-
fing Mouse
Mitchell’s Hopping
Mouse
Water Rat

Dingo: Wild Dog

Collared Fruit Bat

Ghost Bat

Geoffroy's Long-
eared Bat

Little Bat

Gould's Wattled
Bat

Chocolute Wattled
Bat

Grey’s Broad nosed

Bat.
Balstou’s Broad
nosed Bat
Sharp nosed Bat
Yellow bellied Bat
Free tailed Bat
Wrinkled lipped
Bat
Water Buffalo
House Mouse
Brown Rat
Ship Rat
Rabbit
English Fox
Domestic Cat

ARCHAEOLOGICAL EXCAVATION OF NOOLA ROCK
SHELTER: A PRELIMINARY REPORT

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND
ACTING DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

On 2™ January 1961 Mr. Norman Blunden discovered Noola Rock Shelter on a south-
facing wooded slope below a high cliff, on his grazing property near Rylstone, New
South Wales. The site is near the eastern end of Portion 34 in the Parish of Tayar, County
of Roxborough.

Acting partly on advice from the Chicago Museum of Natural History, Mr. Blunden
wrote to the South Australian Museum for assistance in the study of the shelter, and, after
some preliminary soundings of the floor had been made at our request, he offered us the
privilege of the excavation of the site.

During preliminary tests he examined surface material to a maximum depth of 181n. over
a part of the floor east of the centre. His first workings may be known as Excavation No.
1. At the lowest level reached there was a large rectangular slab of roof rock 6ft. in
diameter, which effectively sealed off most of the deeper part of this portion of the
shelter.

ARCHAEOLOGICAL EXCAVATION OF NOOLA ROCK
SHELTER: A PRELIMINARY REPORT

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curarok or ANTHROPOLOGY AND
Actine Director, Sovrn Austratian Museum,

On 2nd January 1961 Mr. Norman Blunden discovered Noola
Rock Shelter on a south-facing wooded slope below a high cliff, on
his grazing property near Rylstone, New South Wales. The site is
near the eastern end of Portion 34 in the Parish of Tayar, County of
Roxborough.

Acting partly on advice from the Chieago Museum of Natural
History, Mr. Blunden wrote to the South Australian Museum for
assistance in the study of the shelter, and, after some preliminary
soundings of the floor had been made at our request, he offered us
the privilege of the excavation of the site,

During preliminary tests he examined surface material to a
maximum depth of 18in. over a part of the floor east of the centre.
His first workings may be known as Excavation No. 1. At the lowest
lovel reached there was a large rectangular slab of roof rock 6ft, in
diameter, which effectively sealed off most of the deeper part of this
portion of the shelter.

In late April after arrangements for the main dig had been
planned he duy a second, narrower trench (No, 2) at the approximate
centre line of the shelter. This was carried down to a depth of 44in,;
he took a photograph of the section for us. At some time during this
second excavation Mr. John Bland was a visitor and took away a few
duplicate specimens for his own collection.

On 221d May 1961 the site was surveyed and Excavation No. 3
was begun by N. Blunden and the present writer, with the assistance
of a team of eight voluntary helpers, Roy Braddock, Reginald
Everson, Gilbert and Jone Grimshaw, Albert Mills, Barry Trounsen
and Arthur and Margaret Williams. They worked in relays during
the dig. The new hole extended outward from a datum point estab-
lished on the back wall, 11ft. from the eastern extremity of the cave.

The cave itself is situated about 800ft. above the flood plain of
Bogee Nile Creek, just west of a small side valley with a trickle of
water running down from the base of the cliff, The long axis has a

26 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

by complex geologic structure, Therefore it is only exceptional when
mammalian fossils are sufficiently represented m a continuous
succession o! chronostratigraphic units to permit the delineation of
Stages and Zones (Savage, 1955). One fauna may be distributed
throughout a considerable thickness of rocks because of relatively
rapid deposition of sediments. On the other hand dne to a slow
accumulation of detritus, or alterations in the distribution of animals,
two or more distinet faunas may oceur very close to one another in a
vertical section. Locally or within an area of 50 miles, marshland,
wooilland and grassland environments may affect the composition of
synelironous faunas. Some auimals with wide environmental tolerances
will frequently reveal the contemporaneity of such faunas. These
synchronous assemblages of different composition (faunal facies) when
disenvered as fossils may be recorded by distinct faunal names.

We have recognized four faunas in the area here referred to as
the Tirari Desert, A type locality has been designated for each of
these faunas as is standard practice in introducing new formation
names. 'T'o avoid confusion these have heen given local geographic
names that differ from the names of the formations. The reason for
{his is apparent because we have recoznized two faunas, the Malkuni
and the Kanmka, as coming from the Katipiri Formation. The
Malkiini fauna is represented from numerous localities along Cooper
Creek and at Lake Palaukarinna, On the other hand we have found
the Kanuuka fauna in remarkably similar channel sands only at Lake
Kanunka. Byentually one of our faunas may be discovered elsewhere
in Australia ina different formation. The Palankarinna fauna is thus
far restricted to two localities at Lake Palankarinna in the Mampu-
worda Sands. Remains representing the Ngapakaldi fauna are more
widely distriiuted. There are numerous loealities at Lake
Palankarinna, one at Lake Kanunka, and several at both Lake
Pitikanta and at Lake Neapakaldi.,

STRATIGRAPHY AND VERTEBRATE PALEONTOLOGY

The term Tirari Desert was firs! used without explicit definition
by John Walter Gregory (1906) for the sandridge country between
the Warburton River and Cooper Creek oeeupied by the Tirari
aboriginal tribe. As used in this report the Tirari Desert actually
represents a southern extension of the Arunta (or Simpson) Desert
east of Lake Kyre, bounded to the east by a north trending anticlinal
axis involving Mesozoic and early Tertiary rocks. The southern
boundary is the divide between the Lake Myre and Lake Frome basins

194 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

bearing of 300°, with its opening to the south, It protects a lenticular
area 60ft, long and 14ft. wide at the centre line. It has an arched
root 10!t, high with a floor surface which slopes rather evenly down
from the west to the east with a drop of about one foot in ten.
Several large rocks eumber the Hoor and a Jarger masg over 60ft.
long and 30ft, high lies below the shelter, It holds np a small plateau
outside the cave entrance.

The excavation was made by remoying 12in. squares of debris,
each to a depth of Gin, The hole extended down to 96in. in a trench
4ft. wide and 8ft. long. ‘The greater part of this area had been sealed
off by the rock fall, A sieve of 0.2in, mesh was used.

Photographs, scale drawings and sections were prepared, Samples
were obtained from each of 215 rectangles; these, plus all implements,
jieces of bone and carbon samples, constitute the record, A running
joornal was made using a tape recorder, The exeavations are ta be
continued,

This is a preliminary report on a few of the more interesting
results achieved up to present time, The western half of the cave
has heen left inviolate for future study,

Specimens in the top layer, down to 18in,, comprise a rich suite
of microlith stone implements, including points of bondi and woakwine
styles, geometric microliths, discoidal microlith adze stones, also bone
points of two types, one sharp-pointed and the other of a slightly
spatalate form, Edge-ground axes were obtained, one was just under
the surface, and another battered and worn specimen, seemingly much
mistreated during attempts to rejuvenate it by reducing its thickness,
uppeared just above the level of 18in.

Nine or more species of mammals seem to be represented among
bones and teeth recovered in the first 18in. The remains of the flora
ahove this level, in general seem to be those of the adjoining present-
day bushland. Food remains inelnde much burrawang (Macrozamia)
hnsk, Evidently the nuts were an important article of diet. An
abundance of emu egg shell suggests occupation at least during some
winter months, for this is the stated gencral breeding season of these
birds in the nearest area where they occut.

The ocenpational layers immediately below the rock seal were
more compact and less productive. Stratification was very well defined,
Microliths disappeared very soon. Bones were less common and
genorally absent al depths below about 4ft., except for a few teeth
und some indeterminate fragments, Hach occupational layer was
denoted by a charcoal band,

TINDALE—NOOLA ROCK SHELTER 195

A few large simple flakes, struck off from cores with a striking
platform angle of about 120°, appeared helow 40i1, At 74in. there
was the top surface of a large fire hearth, with masses of wood
chareoal and ash which went down to 80in., where it rested on a
prepared floor composed of many rounded stones, In the ashes of this
fire, at 80in,, was a characteristic, well-worked, large, high-backed flake
implement, of a nosed graver type. Other less worked large flakes
were recovered in adjoining layers.

Tentative assessment of the site suewests that an earlier oceupa-
tion was by a people possessing an implement eulture of the same type
as in the carhbon-dated sites at Tartanga in South Australia, at Cape
Martin, and at Lake Menindee (Tindale 1955, 1957). The new find
extends the range eastward beyond the limits of the Murray River
Basin m this part of Australia, Noola Rock Shelter is near and east
of the crest of the continental divide. It is situated at an elevation of
about 2,000ft. above sea level. In Tartangan times it probably was not
a place of very permanent residence, but rather one where brief visits
were followed by long absences, when erosion products from the roof
above supplied the bulk of the debris which accumulated on the floor.
The early, well-used hearth between 74 and 80in., provides the chief
exeeption to this generalization. As one approaches the present
surface {here is a particularly sterile white band some 12in. thick,
indicating virtual absence of visits, followed very suddenly by dense
acenmulations vf oecupational debris of the succeeding microlith-using
people. This oceupation was more consistent and continued upward
until the deposits merged with the vencer of present-day dust and
debris on the surface of the eave,

Post-Enuropean disturbance was confined to droppings of sheep
and eattle. Im one place a rabbit burrow was cut across. This
fortunately did not penetrate the compact lower levels, which were
so hard as to require the use of a erowhar before they could be loosened
for digging.

The upper ocerpational horizon has the general facies, and
contents, of the Mndukian enltnre of the type locality at Devon Downs,
(Male and Timdale 1930), and of similar layers at Fromm Landing
(Mulvaney 1960), However, consonant with the absence nearhy of
any rivers or deep streams which might have yielded fish, no muduk
hone fishing toggles were present, A relatively great abundance of
points, of types thought to have heen nsed as needles in sewing skins
together, may suggest that the altitude and sonthern exposure of the
site was condneive to the vse of skin cloaks and rugs, A homoclime

196 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

of this place would be the Lower South-East of South Australia, where
implements like these are abundant in Mudukian levels, as at
Kongorong, and at Policeman Point on the Coorong,

The presence of axes, of a fype remaining in use until modern
times, is of interest. There is a similar, but hafted one in the South
Australian Museum, from New South Wales, which shows use-polish
on the handle. It is lashed with the red ‘‘turkey’’ twill cloth commonly
traded to aborigines by the first settlers, hence must date to the very
first days of contact, before metal axes were given to them,

The present writer’s interpretation of the evidence found on
several open air surface sites in South Australia, backed by C.14 dates,
has heen questioned by a few of those who feel that stratigraphy
cannot readily be detected and evaluated, save in rock shelter and
cave exeavations. The discovery of this shelter is therefore of
particular interest since is provides the kind of evidence considered
most desirable, although it is clear to the present writer that, evaluated
by one with training in stratigraphy, open air sites can yield data as
equally useful as that likely to he afforded by intermittently inhabited
eaves,

The study of the site seems likely to go far to reinforce the claim
for the existence of a Tartangan culture, earlier than the Mudukian.
It may make more difficult rival interpretations which lately have
arisen as a result of the increasing interest in the subject of
archaeology in Australia. These matters will be more fully disenssed
when the Carbon 14 dates are available and the definitive account is
prepared.

We are indebted to Mr. Norman Blunden for his interest in the
excavation, for his assistanee with equipment, his companionship and
participation in the field work and for the gift of the specimens he
collected in the earlier soundings, Whatever success has resulted is
due to the efforts of the members of the team who worked together on
the project.

REFERENCES CITED
Hale, H. M, and Tindale, N. B., 1930: Ree. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4,
pp. 145-218,
Mulvaney, D. J., 1960: Proc. Roy. Soe. Vietoria, Melbourne, 72,
pp. 53-85,
Tindale, N. B., 1955: Ree, S, Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 11, pp. 269-298.
1957: Ree, S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 13, pp. 1-49.
1957: Trans. Roy Soe, S. Australia, Adelaide, 80, pp. 109-123,

my oe ea eS UL” ee 2 ee a a ee a ee — @ooe
7” i. = * -

1962

amie

RECORDS

OF THE .

— SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM |

3
a Published by the Board and edited by the Museum Director “
oe Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide.

Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE (KOGIA BREVICEPS)
ON SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTS, PART III”

By HERBERT M. HALE, HON. ASSOCIATE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Herein are described examples of Kogia not previously recorded from South Australia,
with additional information concerning previous records. Following, under “Discussion”
a comparative study of South Australian specimens is made from available data,
including measurements, etc., concerning the exterior and the skulls.

The information so far recorded, herein and elsewhere, supports the view that only one
species of Kogia exists. Further, while there are differences — sometimes considerable
differences — between the skeletons of individual specimens, these as yet cannot be
aggregated to provide satisfactory evidence that separate populations or schools occur.
Nevertheless, examination of the features of a large number of specimens, when present
at the time in given localities, could be illuminating.

THE PIGMY SPERM WHALE (KOGIA BREVICEPS) ON
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN COASTS, PART III”

By HERBERT M. HALE, Hon. Assoctatz, SourH AusTRaLIaAn
Museum

Plates 1-4 and text fig, 1-12

SUMMARY

Herein are described examples of Kogia not previously recorded
from South Australia, with additional information concerning previous
records. Following, under ‘‘Discussion’’ a comparative study of
South Anstralian specimens is made from available data, including
measurements, ete,, concerning the exterior and the skulls,

The information so far recorded, herein and elsewhere, supports
the view that only one species of Kogia exists. Further, while there
are differences—sometimes considerable differences—between the
skeletons of individual specimens, these as yet cannot be aggregated
to provide satisfactory evidence that separate populations or schools
occur, Nevertheless, examination of the features of a large number
of specimens, when present at the same time in given localities, could
be illuminating.

INTRODUCTLON

Below are listed the known strandings of Kogia on South
Australian coasts, with record of the material recovered and placed
in the South Australian Museum.

Pregnant adult female, April 25, 1937 (Reg. No. M.5009); and
female suckling calf (M.5010); Port Victoria in Spencer Gulf. Half
cast and complete skeleton of both. Male foetus, in formalin‘?
(M.5011).

Unsexed example, August, 1944 (M.5197); Sleaford Bay, near
Port Lincoln in Spencer Gulf. Skull, sternum and a few other bones.

(1) See Hale (1947 and 1959) for parts I and I.
(2) Hale, 1947, pp. 534-536,
a

198 RECORDS OF THE §,A, MUSEUM

Adult female, August 7, 1957 (not recovered except for some teeth)
with unsexed calf (M.6156); Sleaford Bay, near Port Lincoln in
Spencer Gulf, Skull and portion of right ramus of lower jaw of calf.

Unsexed juvenile (not recovered’) and young male (M.6186) ;
July 11, 1958, Largs Bay, in St. Vineent Gulf, Complete skeleton
of M6186,

Adult female and female suckling calf, June 28, 1959 (M.6256 and
M.6257); Eneonnter Bay. Complete skeleton of both.

Adult male, September 29, 1959 (M.6266); Glenelg, in St. Vincent
Gulf, Complete skeleton,

A mandible said to have come from Encounter Bay and noted by
Wood Jones, is not included as an authentic South Australian record
(Hale, 1947, p. 544).

My sincere thanks are due to Mr. A. Rau, who has enthusiastieally
assisted in the collecting of a number of small whales, and with his
various assistants has prepared the skeletons of all examined by me.

To Miss M, Boyce I am indebted for the outline drawings and
photographs of the skulls, sterna and tongue bones,

DESCRIPTION OF ADDITIONAL MATERIAL

FEMALE AND CALF (REG, NO. M.6156) SLEAFORD BAY,
AUGUST 7, 1957. BODY LENGTH 1,700 mm.

The skull of the calf and portion of the right ramus of its
mandible, as well as some of the teeth of both female and ealf are
available.

The stranding of these two examples was reported by Miss
N, M, Follett, who, thirteen years before, and during the same month,
August in mid-winter, reported the stranding of a Kogia, but here
again the diffeult terrain made it impossible to secure more than the
skull and a few odd bones (Hale, 1947, p. 531).

For recovery of this second skull from Sleaford Bay I am grateful
to the late Mr, W. C. Johnston, then of Port Lincoln, who, on request,
visited the locality a few days later, took a few external measurements,
and moved the bodies of both female and calf above high tide mark,
Some time afterwards he was able again to make his way to Sleaford
Bay but found both specimens partly eaten and badly damaged,
apparently by foxes; he did, however, recover the skull of the ealf

(8) Hale, 1959, p. 334, pl. XD.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 199

and kindly brought it to the Museum. For some external measure-
ments see p, 217 herein,

Skull

Aceording to the flesh measurements supplied by Mr. Johnston
the skull of this ealf is distinctly less than seven times in the body
length, measured correctly in a straight line from the notch m the
tail to the tip of the snout.

The rostrum, from tip to anterior wall of left nostril, is not much
less than half the total length of the skull.

The supraoccipital, when yiewed from the side, is slightly convex
but in general faintly sinuous; medianly it has a shallow gutter, which
becomes evanescent as it approaches the foramen magnum; measured
across its narrowest part, the supraoccipital is more than one and
two-thirds times its length from the upper edge of the foramen
magnum to the triangular apex, and the condyles are prominent,
sepirated dorsally by a distance equal to one-half the length of the
condyles, The foramen magnum is ovate (pl. 1, D) and is higher
than wide.

The lateral surfaces of the maxillae are much as in most of the
other skulls examined, the greatest depths being 43 mm. (left) and
32 mm.; the total length of the skull is 265 mm, The maxillo-malar
sutures are indistinct on both sides, the malar and maxilla heing fused;
both sutures are sinuate, not descending steeply at about anterior
third to form a decided V, but rather a shallow U, The length of the
left suture is 77 mom., that of the right somewhat shorter. The
maxillary crest is not elevated above the level of the npper edge of
the supraoecipital and the suture between the occipital complex and
the maxillae is quite open, as also ave those between the maxillae and
right premaxilla, which does not reach quite to the summit of the
dorsal crest. The maxillary fossae are shallow dorsally but the
borders begin to slope more abruptly to deepening fossae, at a point
midway between the right nostril and the vertex. The prefroutal is
narrow ijn front, not widely {riumeate as in eal! M.6186, nor is it
elevated above the right premaxilla on the opposite side of the right
nostril. The anterior ends of both premaxillae appear on the palatal
surface, The maxillary alveolar grooves extend back from the anterior
end of the broad rostrum for a distance of 45-52 mm., that is almost
to, or a little heyond, the middle of the length of the rostrnm, from
tip to the anterior margins of the palatines.

200 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

Teeth of female and calf, When Mr. Johnston first examined
the mother and her calf M.6156, shortly after they were stranded at
Sleaford Bay, he removed from both young and adult all the teeth he
could discover, In the mandible of the female he found only fourteen,
in that of the calf thirteen, As it is reasonable to suspect more to be
present Mr. Johnston agreed to search further but, as aforementioned,
the specimens had sustained considerable damage before his second
visit.

The teeth from the female are stout, each approximately 30 mm,
in length and most of them are very much more curved than those of
an adult previously cast ashore at Sleaford Bay (Hale, 1947, fig. 11).

The longest of the teeth of the calf is 14 mm, in length. Two of
the teeth are conjoined for five-sevenths of their length, the tips being
free and separated.

Yor additional details see Diseussion,

YOUNG MALE, LARGS BAY, JULY 11, 1958 (REG, NO, M6186).
BODY LENGTI 1,930 mm.

External Features

These are dealt with in part in a previous note (Hale, 1959,
pp. 334-336, fig. 1-2). In deseribing the exterior of this example I
recorded the faet that, although the hody proportions approach those
of suckling calf M.5010, ‘The snout is considerably shorter and has a
more abrupt downward dorsal curvature, its tip being on a level with
the eye’’. Also, the high dorsal fin was situated slightly in advance
of the middle of the length of the animal.

As mentioned elsewhere herein, the snout anterior to the mouth
is unusually short, being only 2.07 per cent of the total length of the
animal, whereas in two other young specimens from South Australia
the snout measured thus is 5.2 and 6.3 of the body length.

Skeleton

When the skull was subsequently removed and cleaned it was at
once obvious that if, was relatively much smaller than in other examples
examined by me. In the last-named, the skull is at most barely more
than seven times in the hody length, usually less, whereas in M.6186
it approaches eight times in this length, The relatively short snout
and small skull are associated with the more forward position of the
dorsal fin in relation to the body length.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 201

The rostrum of the skull of M.6186, from tip to anterior wall of
left nostril, is decidedly less than half of the total length of the skull,
thus being relatively short, as in female calf M5010, from Port
Victoria, The supraoceipital has a shallow and rather wide median
gutter. Its upper margin medianly is only slightly produced and
rounded, while the lateral margins eurve gently downwards, so that
the skull, as seen from the rear, presents a very different appearance
to that of other skulls examined (pl. 2, C); the bone is more than one
and one-half times wider than long. ‘The occipital condyles are
prominent, widely separated dorsally, the gap being equal to one and
one-third times the height of the condyles. The foramen magnum is
slizhtly obovate, almost circular (pl. 2, C), and is as wide as high.
The sqnamosal and frontal are distinctly marked off from the occipital
complex,

The lateral surfaces of the maxillae are unusually low, that of
the right side, as measured from the posterior end of the maxillo-malar
suture, is only 18 mm, and is decidedly lower than that of the left
(26 mm.), The total length of the skull is 243 mm,

The maxillo-malar suture is very distinct and is S-shaped, the
anterior part forming a deep V, tnost pronounced on the left side,
where the length of the suture is 50 mm. as against 56 mm. on the
right side, Both malars have the apex subacute and the greatest
length of the left is more than one and one-third times the length,
{lie right only one and one-half times the length,

The dorsal crest ig not strongly elevated posteriorly and mdeed
reaches only to the level of the supraoceipital; anterior to this, how-
ever, it corves upwards to form a well elevated crest.

The maxillary fossae are deeper than in other South Anstralian
ealves, sloping steeply from the bordering wall, The prefrontal,
truncate in front, forms a high thio crest between the nares, and is
elevated above the level of the right premaxilla alongside the right
nostril,

On the palatal surface the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear
on both sides, the exposed portions being 9 mm. in length in both.
On each side the maxillary alveolar groove extends back from the
anterior end of the rostrum for a distance of 70 mm., approximately
seven-tenths of the length from the apex of the short rostrum to the
anterior margin of the palatines; as previonsly noted (Hale, 1959,
p. 335), there are two small teeth near the anterior end of the rostrum.
The width between the postorbital processes is greater than elsewhere
in the skull,

202 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The lower jaw has thirteen teeth in the right ramus, twelve in
the left.

In the tongue boues (pl. 3, A) the basiliyal is hexagonal, the
anterior margin with a well marked U-shaped median ineision, on
each side of which is a short rounded cartilage, The eeratohyals are
cartilaginous and the ossified portion of the stylohyals is longer than
the thyrohyals. The latter are well separated from ithe basihyal by
cartilage; each thyrolryal is much longer than wide and the bone is
subeordate,

The sternum is nol composed of three entire sections, but of four.
The manubrinm, apart from the earlilaginous portions, is not greatly
expanded anteriorly, where its greatest width is only twice that of the
posterior margin; there is no trace of a median suture and the whole
bone is considerably wider than its length. The anterior margin has
a rounded incision, as shown in pl. 4, A, The seeond segment is little
less in length than the manubrium, as taken from the anterior notch
of the last named, and has the anterior margin convex and the
pesterior obliquely inclined to the left of the animal; the above-
mentioned plate shows the cartilage separating this and other ossified
components. The third ossified segment is irregularly quadrangular
in shape, the anterior margin inclined towards the lelt side of the
animal, The fourth segment is stall, wider than long and separated
from the third by cartilage equal to its own length,

The cervicals, as in most examples of Kogia, form one solid mass,
the height of which (87 10m.) is not much less than the greatest width
(94 mm,); the spimous process is, in general, much as in Yamada’s
No, 5 example (1954, p. 48, fig. 8); similarly the dorsal process of the
vertebrae is also relatively shorter,

The first of the fourteen thoracic vertebrae has the neural arch
complete, the canal little wider than deep, and the dorsal spine less
than one-fourth of the depth of the vertebra, In the last thoracic the
dorsal process, measured from the upper margin of the newral arch,
is slightly shorter than the distance between the vyeuter of the centrum
and the dorsal limit of the neural canal. In all of the ten Iumbar
vertebrae the dorsal process is decidedly shorter than the last-
mentioned measurement, There are twenty-six caudals; there is no
trace of paired metapophyses after the third caudal. The neural
canal becomes an open groove on the fourteenth and is barely evident
on the seventeenth,

There are fifteen chevrons; the members of the last pair are not
united, those of the rest completely fused,

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 203

For additional measurements of skull see Discussion.
The ribs number thirteen on the right side, fourteen on the left.
The anterior nine pairs have a double articulation.

Length of ribs, taken in a straight line from
head to free end of bony portions,

Rib Right. Left.
No. fim. mm.
1 160 160
2 245 245
3 290 295
4 810 308
5 310 305
6 313 310
7 300 290
8 298 296
9 276 270
10 202 254
11 233 235
3 215 214
13 167 180
14 0 72

Thus the first twelve pairs are practically symmetrical, but the
right rib of the thirteenth pair is decidedly shorter than the left, and
abruptly shorter than the twelfth ribs. The last rib on the left side
is rudimentary and was free of the vertebral column.

Remarks. As will be noted from the above description this young
male is unusual in some respects, and is the only Kogia examined by
me in which, notwithstanding careful search, any traces of the pelvis
were found (Hale, 1959, p, 336).

FEMALE (REG. NO. M.6256) AND MALE CALF (M.6257), ENCOUNTER
BAY, JUNE 28, 1959. BODY LENGTHS 2,980 mm. AND 1,892 mm.

On the abovementioned date it was reported that a young whale
had ‘‘beached himself beside the body of his fatally injured mother’’.
This instance evoked a graphic account of the urge of a suckling calf
to remain with its mother under all cireumstances (see also Hale,
1947, p. 531).

The female in this case became injured on a reef where, according
to one observer, she ‘‘had been cut on rocks when seraping barnacles
from her body. She made for the beach, grounded and was stuck’’.

Another of the witnesses of the strandings, Mr, G. H. Rumbelow,
of Encounter Bay, stated: ‘‘We did our best to save the calf by
driving him ont to sea. Some of the onlookers dragged the mother
whale on to the beach, but the calf wouldn’t leave. It went out to the
reef but came in again and ran itself on to the shore.”’

204 RECORDS OP THE S.A. MUSEUM

Karly next day Mr. A. Ran, with two other members of the
Museum staff recovered both specimens, which, as suspected from
deseriptions given, proved to be Kogia, and brought them to the
Musewm; thus they were examined about eighteen hours alter death,
with the colouration presumably uot greatly affected by recent strand-
ing. The specimens had not been subjected to sunlight but had been
cut about by visitors during the night. However, with exception of
the dorsal fin of the calf, all parts were recovered; the dorsal fin of
the female had been ent off, and also some of the adjoining flesh of
the back, so that, while the fin itself was in perfect condition, it was
not possible to ascertain with certainty its position in regard to the
total body length.

The admittedly meagre evidence available seems to indicate that
when the sluggish Pigmy Sperm Whale becomes injured, or even
touches bottom, in shallow waters, it immediately makes its way to
the adjoining beach. This may apply to other whales, partieularly the
smaller species, Mesoplodon, Berardius (Hale, 1939, p. 5), ete.

External Features of Female

The colour of the female was light blne-grey above and white
below; the dorsal colour was, in fact, much paler than in any other
of the examples seen by me. The white of the lower portions extended
upwards to about three inches below the eye and included the lower
half of the depth of the snout. Tn the caudal area the white was
restricted to the underside, the sides and dorsum being pale hlue-grey,

The body was fully four and one-fourth times its greatest depth,
‘he head was deep, with the snout blunt and rounded (fiz. 8); the
blowhole was large, 85 mm, in width, crescentie and oblique, the left
end of the opening 250 mm., im vertical level, from the tip off the
snout, the right end 275 mm.

The faleate dorsal fin (fig. 12) was long and low, its length
(400 mm.) four and three-fourths times the height, and 13.3 per cent
of the total length of the animal. The pectoral limbs (fig. 3) were
rather slender, two and two-third times as long as deep. The dorsal
keel of the tail terminated 45 mm. in advanee of the narrow caudal
notch, and the width of the flukes was relatively less than in the adult
male No, M.6266 (see figs, 1 and 5 herein),

For additional measurements of exterior and skull see under
Discussion.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 205

SN
‘ ne
~~ Oo
~\
Sy
\
a
{
}

y,
/
a \ sS.
X, we
ra \ a
| NC
f Sane? ge et AS
/ \,
/ J -
———— Set
~ es ee “y ce a ~~
a = ~
S 7
3 ? 4
ped
_ aot So 3

Fig. 1-4. Aged female and her male calf, Encounter Bay; 1-2, caudal fins: 3-4, pectoral
fins (1% nat, size).

Skeleton of Female

The skull is very slightly less than one-seventh of the total length
of the animal. The rostrum, from its tip to the anterior wall of the
left nostril, is relatively distinctly longer than in the young calf
accompanying M.6256, being more than half the total length of the
skull, viz., 1.7 in length of skull. The supraoccipital, as seen from
the side, is concave, and has a well defined groove on the upper three-
fourths of its length; its dorsal margin is broadly triangular medianly,
where it is 9 mm, below the top of the maxillary part of the crest,
the premaxillary part being a trifle more elevated; from the median
angle the lateral margins curve outwards and only slightly downwards;
the narrowest width of the bone is a little less than one and three-
fourths the height, measured as in other examples recorded herein
from the upper margin of the foramen magnum to the triangular
dorsal apex.

The prominent occipital condyles are separated widely dorsally,
the height of the condyles being little more than one and one-half

206 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

times the width of the gap; ventrally the condyles are separated by
a distance equal to only one-third of the dorsal gap. The foramen
maguum is obovate, very little higher than wide (pl. 2, A). The
lateral [aces of the maxillue, above the maxillo-malar suture, are
deep, 80 mm. o1 left side, 54 mm. on the right. The distinet maxillo-
malar suture is irregularly triangular, curved downwards posteriorly
for only a very short distance,

The dorsal crest is strongly elevated posteriorly with, as already
noted, the premaxillary element slightly elevated above the maxillary
part, The maxillary fossae ave deep, sloping steeply from the narrow
horders,

The prefrontal is nearly half the length of the rostrum as
measured from tip to anterior wall of left naris and is elevated as a
erest above the level of the premaxilla alongside the right nostril,

‘he anterior ends of the premaxillae appear on the palatal surface
for a length of 87 mm., which is equal to one-half of the distance
hetween the tip of the rostrum and the anterior margin of the
palatines; the maxillary grooves are 115 mm, in length on both sides,
about half the length of rostrnm measured as above. No upper teeth
were present.

The rami of the mandible are firmly fused anteriorly for a distance
of 87 mm, hut the tips are narrowly separated to a length of 10 mm.;
the distance between the condyles is about six-sevenths of the mid-
line length of the jaw. There are fourteen teeth in the left ramus,
thirteen in the right; they are only slightly curved and the anterior
nine or ten have the tips worn and blunted in varying degree.

Tn the tongue bones (pl. 3, B) the basihyal is hexagonal, distinctly
wide than long, and with the anterior margin bisinnate, and capped
with a short, irregular cartilage, while the posterior margin is coneaye.
The cartilaginous ceratohyals are much shorter than the ossified
portions of the stylehyals. The thyrohyals are much shorter than the
atylohyals, and are suboval in shape; the bony plates are fused to
the basihyal, leaving a jagged gutter for the greater part of the length
on both surfaces, the gutters being filled with cartilage.

Tn the scapula the acromion is curved to an unusual degree and
in both left and right almost touches the coracoid; the ealf of this
female has the acromion and coracoid well separated distally, the
first-named showing only slight curvature,

The sternum (pl. 4, B, ventral view) consists of three segments,
all entire, while the sternum as a whole has a distinct curvature
towards the left. side of tlhe animal. The manubrium is fully one-fourth

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 207

us wide again as long and its anterior edge has a deep notch, nearly
one-third of the length of the bone; above the notch the anterior
margin is rounded, then sweeps steeply down to the lateral ends of
the wing-like expansions of the distal half; the second segment has
markedly concave sides and is as long as the distance between the
posterior margin of the manubrium and the terminal end of its median
anterior notch; the third is short and very irregularly quadrate.

The cervicals form a solid mass, with the dorsal process high;
the cervicals closely resemble those of Yamada’s No, 6 specimen
(1954, p. 48, fig. 8),

In the first and second of the thirteen thoracic vertebrae the neural
areh ig broken. The dorsal process of the last thoracic, measured, as
always herein, from the upper limit of the neural canal, is one and
one-third times the distance between the ventral keel of the centrum
and the apex of the narrowly triangular canal, while it is nearly
three-fifths of the total depth of the vertebra.

The eighth of the nine lumbar vertebrae has the dorsal process
even shorter than in Yamada’s photograph of this vertebra in his
No. 5 (fig. 9, right), and the dorsal spines of all lumbars are relatively
short as compared to Yamada’s example No. 6.

In the twenty-three caudal vertebrae the neural canal becomes a
completely open groove on the twelfth, whereas it is entirely roofed
over on the eleventh, Metapophyses are not apparent after the fourth
candal, There are thirteen chevrons, the components of all united.

There ave thirteen ribs on the right side, twelve on the left; the
rreatest lengths of the bony portions, where not damaged, are given

below,
Length of ribs, taken in a straight line fron
head to free end of bony portions.

Rib Right. Left.
No, mm. nim,
1 282 290
2 415 420
3 483 483
4 500 505
6 490 500
6 485 485
7 Broken 480
8 452 452
9 420 420
10 Broken 390
WJ Broken 359
12 255 255
13 101 0

External Features of Male Calf
The colouration was exactly as in the mother; the white of the
underside reached to within two inches below the eye.

208 RECORDS OF THE $A. MUSEUM

The snout was, relatively, longer than that of the female, and
tapered to a blunt point (fig. 9); this difference in the shape of the
snout in mother and calf was apparent also in a previous record (Hale,
1947, pl. XTV). The distance between the tip of the snout and the
axilla was a little greater, proportionately, than in the female,

As in the mother the blowhole was wide (65 mm.), erescentic
and oblique; in vertical level the lef{ end of the opening was 183 mm.
from the tip of the snout, the right end 205 mm. The pectoral limbs
were fully two and two-third times as long as greatest width (fig. 4),

The dorsal keel of the tail terminated 30 mm. in advance of the
narrow median notch; the flukea were relatively not as wide as in the
mother and swept backwards to a greater degree (fig, 2).

Skeleton of Male Calf

The skull is a little less than six and one-half times in the total
length of the animal. The rostrum, measnred from the tip te anterior
wall of left nostril, is little less than half the length of the skull, The
occipital complex (supracecipital) has a shallow median depression
for about three-fourths of its length, expanding downwards from the
apex and with an irregular median tuberosity towards its ventral
termination; the upper margin is medianly triangular, the apex of
the triangle 10 mm. below the top of the maxillary part of the dorsal
erest; from the median portion the lateral margins curve outwards
almost. horizontally, much as in the male calf from Largs Bay
(M.6186), but this example differs in the decided median triangular
dorsal elevation (ef. pl, 2, B and C); the bone, measnred from the
upper margin of the forame1) magnum to the triangular dorsal apex,
is slightly more than one and three-fourths wider than long, with the
breadth measured across the narrowest part, The rather prominent
occipital condyles, as in the mother (M.6256) ave widely separated
dorsally, the height of the condyles being little more than one and
two-third times the width of the gap; ventrally the condyles are
separated by slightly more than one-fourth of the dorsal gap. The
foramen magnum is obovate, angular dorsally and is one and one-
fourth times higher than wide (pl. 2, B). The lateral surfaces of the
maxillae, above the maxillary-malar suture, are deep (50 mm.) on the
left side, but distinctly lower, 35 mm., on the right. The mazxillo-
malar suture is distiuct, irregularly triangular and curved downwards
posteriorly for only a very short distance.

The dorsal crest is strongly elevated posteriorly, the pre-maxillary
portion a little lower than the maxillary elevations. As in the mother

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 209

the maxillary fossae slope deeply inwards from the narrowly rounded
bordering walls,

The prefrontal is, as usual, truncate and slightly excavate
anteriorly when the cartilage is removed; if is much shorter than in
the mother, with the crest between the nares not elevated above the
level of the premaxilla alongside the right nostril,

On the palatal surface the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear
for a length of 30 mm,, one-fourth of the distance between the tip of
the rostrum and anterior margin of palatines, The maxillary grooves
are 65 mm. (left) and 70 mm, in length, much less than half the
length of the rostrum, meastired as above. There are no upper teeth,
but in the Jower jaw there are fourteen in the mght ramus, thirteen
in the left; the teeth are as in a female ealf previonsly illustrated
(Hate, 1947, fig. 10), slightly curved and with the tips feebly hooked;
the longest is 15 mm. in length, the shortest almost 14 mun,

The distance between the condyles of the rami, which are not fused
anteriorly, ig not much less than the midline length of the mandible.

The bony parts only of the tongue bones are before me, the
cartilaginous portions having disappeared durmg maceration, The
basibyal is broadly hexagonal, wider than long and with the anterior
margin narrow and slightly oblique, with no suggestion of a median
incision; the stylohyals are one-third longer than the oval thyrohyals,

The last of the presuinably three stenebrae is missing but
obviously was present. The cartilaginous parts of the sternnm are not
available, even in part, but in the bony portion of the manubrium the
greatest length is equal to the greatest width and not much less than
twice the width of the posterior margin; the anterior median notch
is wide, angular at posterior end, and is nof quite one-twellth of the
greatest length of the manubrium; from the anterior notch the Jateral
borders curve downwards and inwards on each side to form semi-
cirenlar wing-like projections; the two components are completely
fnsed, but with some trace of a median suture, and the transverse
posterior margin is equal to a little more than half of the length as
measured from the end of the anterior notch, The second stenebra
consists of one bore, with the lateral margins concave and the anterior
margin inclined to the right; it is widest anteriorly, where it is seven-
tenths of its greatest length, the latter being five-sevenths of the
greatest length of the manubrium,

The cervicals are not fused into one solid mass, the centrum of
the seventh being quite separated from that of the sixth cervical;

210 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the epiphyis of the posterior end of the centrum of the sixth cervical
and both the anterior and posterior epiphyses of the seventh are
completely free; the dorsal process of the cervical vertebrae is
relatively long, as in Yamada’s No. 6 example (1954, p. 48, fig. 8)
and tapers to an acute dorsal point.

The first of the fourteen thoracic vertebrae has the neural arch
complete, the canal wider than deep, and the acute dorsal spine more
than one-fourth of the depth of the vertebra. The dorsal process of
the last thoracic, measured from the upper margin of the neural canal,
is almost one and three-tenths times the distance between the ventral
keel of the centrum and the dorsal end of the triangular canal, and
is distinctly more than half the total depth of the vertebra.

In the nine lumbar vertebrae the eighth (to compare with
Yamada’s photographs of this vertebra: fig. 9, right) has a dorsal
process much longer than in Yamada’s No. 6 example.

The dorsal processes of the twenty-four caudal vertebrae are
progressively shorter than those of the Jumbars. On the thirteenth
caudal the neural canal becomes an open groove, with the merest
indication of the neural arch. No trace of paired metapophyses are
obvious after the fourth caudal.

There are thirteen chevrons; the small components of the last pair
are free, those of the rest united.

For additional details of external features and skeleton see
Discussion.

There are thirteen ribs on the right side, fourteen on the left;
the twelfth to fourteenth ribs on the left side are short and were
separated from the vertebral column by cartilage equal to their own
length.

Length of ribs, taken in a straight line from
head to free end of bony portions.

Rib Right. Left.
No. min, nim,
1 162 164
2 240 242
3 280 250
4 280 285
5 284 288
6 285 284
7 871 269
8 255 Broken
9 242 245
10 225 225
11 215 211
12 194 163
13 Broken 81
14 73 0

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 211

ADULT MALE, GLENELG, SEPTEMBER 29, 1959 (REG. NO. M.6266).
BODY LENGTH 2,730 mm.

This example was stranded at Glenelg early on the morning of
the abovementioned date and, thanks to the assistance of the Glenelg
Corporation, was loaded on to the Museum truck and reached the
Museum a couple of hours later. It was thus the only South
Australian example to be examined so soon after death—in fact it
was still warm when received.

External Features

The disposition of the colours seemed to be much as in the
photographs of a calf previously published (Hale, 1959, p. 334, pl. XL).
It differed, however, in that the back was dark grey, much darker than
in the female and calf from Encounter Bay, taken three months before.
The white of the underside extended to about one inch below the eye;
there was no sharp demarcation of the two colours. From the level
of the anus to the end of the tail the colour was dark grey, both

/ |

a ae

Fig. 5-7, Adult male, Glenelg; 5, caudal fin; 6-7, left and right pectoral limbs
(4% nat. size).

212 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

above and below, except for a white median patch on the underside of
the tail. The pectoral limbs were white below, merging at edges into
the dark grey of the outer Laces.

The body was more than four times its greatest depth. The
head was deep and blunt (fig. 10); the snout, anterior to the gape, was
shorter than in the adult female M. 6256, the last-named heing of
approximately the same body length; the blowhole (42 mm, in width)
was erescentic and markedly oblique, the left end of the opening
515 tim,, in vertical level, from the anterior end of the snout, the right
end 837 mm,

The relatively large faleate dorsal fin (fig. 11) originated only
slightly behind the middle of the body length and was more than three
times as long as high, he pectoral limbs were nearly three times
longer than wide (fig. 6-7). The dorsal keel of the tail terminated at
the median eandal ‘*noteh’’; posterior to the dorsal keel, however, the
flukes overlapped for a length of 60 mm. and, at greatest width, for
17 mm, (fig. 5), a condition not oecurring in other examples examined.

For additional notes on the exterior and of the skull see under
Diseussion.

The Skeleton

The skull, 420 mm, in length, is six and one-half times in the body
length. The rostrum, from tip to anterior wall of left nostril, is
decidedly more than half the total length of the skull, The supra-
oecipital has no median gutter and seen from the side is markedly
concave; it is relatively very wide, its narrowest breadth nearly twice
the height from the wpper margin of the foramen magnum to the
apex; medianly its dorsal edge is broadly subtriangular and does not
reach the level of the posterior end of the dorsal crest. The occipital
condyles are prominent, widely separated dorsally by a distance equal
to half their height; ventrally the condyles meet. The foramen
magnum is oval in shape, its height nearly one-third greater than its
width (pl. 2, D).

The distinct maxillo-malar suture is sinuate, its anterior portion
straight and running subparallel to the lower edge of the malar for
a distanee equal to more than half the length of the latter; thence it
rises in the form of a wide U, which soon recurves to meet the frontal.

The dorsal crest posteriorly is elevated and broad, The maxillary
fossae are deeply excavate, sloping steeply from the rounded edges of
the bordering wall. The prefrontal is long, due to the fact that
anteriorly the ossification of the cartilage has proceeded considerably

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 213

further than in the skulls of the calves described herein; it is truncate
at the anterior end, from which it rises steeply, the posterior portion
forming a thin crest rising between the nares to above the level of the
right border of the left nostril,

The anterior ends of the premaxillae appear on both sides of the
palatal surface for a distance of 60 mm. The maxillary alveolar
grooves are 130-135 mm. in length, a little more than three-fourths of
the distance between the anterior end of the broad rostrum and the
front margin of the palatines,

The width between the condyles of the rami of the lower jaw,
whieh are firmly fused at the symphysis for a distance of 50 mm., is
little less than the mid-line length of the mandible. There are no
teeth in the upper jaw but in the lower there are fourteen teeth on the
left side and fifteen ou the right; the curvature of the teeth is as in
an adult female previously figured (Hale, 1947, fig. 11), and they are
subequal in size, 28-32 nun. in length,

The basihyal of the tongue bones (pl. 3, C) is slightly notehed
anteriorly, a little wider than long and with the posterior margin
irregularly serrate; on each side of the anterior noich of the basihyal
is a small rounded cartilage; the cartilaginous ceratohyal is relatively
much shorter than as showu in Beuham’s figure (1902, pl. iii), possibly
due to the fact that the ossification of the styloliyal is more advanced
and that his ceratohyal represents, in the distal part, the proximal
end of the stylohyal; in M.6266 the ossified parts of the stylohyals
are one-fourth longer than the bony portions of the thyrolryals; the
latter are trregularly semicircular in outline, with the outer edges
canvex and smooth, the rest of the bony margin irregularly serrate,
while, as shown in pl. 3, C, they are well separated from the basihyal
by cartilage,

The sternum (ventral view, see pl. 4, C) is composed of three
stenebrae, but only the anterior two are entire, the left side of the
last, unfortunately lost before the photograph was secnred, was wholly
eartilaginous, but of the same shape and size as its opposite ossified
member. The manubrinm is greatly expanded anteriorly, where its
greatest breadth is three times that of the posterior margin and more
than its length; there is a tiny anterior incision at the middle of the
anterior margin, but uo median suture, although tiny foramina oceur
ou the mid-line. The second segment is less than the length of the
manubrium from posterior margin to anterior notch, while the ossified
portion of the third is barely more than one-third the length of the
second and is irregularly subquadrate,

214 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The rest of the skeleton was examined in situ after partial
dissection of the animal, The cervicals are fused into a solid mass;
the dorsal process is short as in Yamada’s No. 5 example (1954, p. 48,
fig. 8, upper) but as seen from the side its shape is very different, the
dorsal end forming a broad obtuse angle, with little backward inclina-
tion; the fused epiphysis of the seventh is coneave and fits firmly
against the attached ephiphysis of the first thoracic. These epiphyses
are both eroded in the centre as if an abscess had been present.

The first of the twelve thoracic vertebrae has a complete neural
arch, with its canal one and three-fifths times wider than deep; the
acute dorsal spine, as measured from the upper margin of the neural
arch, is short, less than one-fifth the height of the vertebra. The
dorsal process of the last thoracie is nearly one and one-quarter times
the distance between the ventral keel of the centrum and the dorsal
end of the narrowly triangular neural canal, and is a little more than
half of the total depth of the vertebra. The eighth of the nine
lumbar vertebrae has the dorsal process (measured from dorsal end
of neural canal) one-half of the total depth of the vertebra.

As usual, the dorsal processes of the twenty-five caudal vertebrae
become progressively shorter, the neural canal becoming an almost
open groove on the twelfth, the two sides of the neural arch nearly
meeting on this vertebra. Metapophyses disappear on the sixth
caudal, There are only eleven chevrons; the members of all are united.
It. should be mentioned that maceration was carried out very carefully,
evidenced by the fact that even the tiniest candals are preserved.

For further comparative details see nnder Discussion.

There are twelve ribs on each side; excepting the last, the
greatest length of the bone in each pair is almost uniform, as shown
in the following table,

Length of ribs, taken in a. straight line from
head to trea end of bony portions.

Rib Riiht. Left.
Na, Im, mm,
1 256 256
2 a3 390
3 434 437
4 445 454
5 450 458
6 462 465
7 455 455
8 480 430
9 400 400
0 364 S65
1i 340 340
12 20 312

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 215

Food

The thick-walled and internally strongly convoluted first compart-
ment of the stomach contained beaks of a Cephalopod, identified by
the Curator of Molluses, Mr. B. C. Cotton, as belonging to a squid
(Sepioteuthis australis); in addition there were portions of the
exoskeleton of long-tailed Decapod crustaceans, including parts of a
Peneid prawn, and ligaments from a kangaroo. For identification of
these last I am indebted to Mr. I. Thomas, Department of Zoology
at the University of Adelaide; they probably represent the remains of
bait used by cray-fishers or big-game fishermen, The rest of the
stomach contained a large volume of thick soupy matter, stained almost
black with sepia from the ink sacs of the squids, while the contents of
the intestine throughont were similarly coloured, According to Mr.
Cotton Sepioteuthis may oceur in schools, in which case this Kogia
had encountered, shortly before its death on a sandy shore, such a
swarm, as around the mouth there were many shallow, freshly made
short cuts, in addition to other healed sears. The diet of Kogia is
obviously varied (see also Hale, 1947, p. 544 and Scheffer and Slipp,
1948, p. 308).

Parasites

There were numerous barnacle scars on the body, behind the
pectoral fins and extending as far back as the anus.

Amongst the food remains in the first compartment of the stomach
Was a mass of nematode worms. As usual in specimens examined by
me in the flesh tapeworm cysts were imbedded in the flesh.

Edible Qualities

Seven people requested beef from the carcass of this male, They
reported that it constituted an excellent hot meal and provided some
of the most tender steak they had eaten. This notwithstanding the
fact that the specimen had not been bled and had been dead for 24
hours or so when fleshing was commenced. It was noted further that
the steaks when cold were not so palatable and in fact then had httle
appeal as food, Hubbs (1951, p. 409) reports that ‘‘the staff of
Scripps Institution and friends ate a large part of the deep-red flesh
of the pygmy sperm whale’’ eaptured on a beach in California, and
notes their reactions. In Japan the species is utilized as food when-
ever it is taken.

Paty) RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

Season of Strandings

Glover Allen (1941, p. 23) writes ‘‘what significance may be
attached to the fact that most of the North Atlantic records are for
the cooler months of the year is uncertain’’.

In Japan, Yamada (1954, p. 53) notes that ‘‘The appearance of
kogiids off Taiji is confined to the trying summer season probably
due to their migrating habit’’, Gunther, Hubbs and Beal (1955,
p. 268), suggest that there may be a northward movement, in the
northern hemisphere, between autum and spring. They write, ‘‘It
is quite possible that the pygmy sperm whale, like some of the larger
cetaceans, moves rather far towards the poles, in the summer, to feed
on the rich pelagic food supply of those regions, returning to warmer
waters to breed.’’ Tubbs (1951, p, 409) earlier discussed the
distribution of Kogia,

The examples which have been beached on South Australian coasts
have come ashore during the colder half of the year. The dates of
strandings indicate that Kogia is present in South Australian waters
at least between late April and late September; also that during this
period calves as well as adults of both sexes occur. For example in
July, 1958, two young specimens (Hale, 1959, p. 333) were noticed in
St. Vincent Gulf, and soon came ashore at Largs Bay. From early
in June, 1959 (winter) until September (spring) of the same year
fishermen and others reported that small whales with blunt heads were
seen travelling slowly to and fro along the coasts of Encounter Bay
and St. Vincent Gulf, During this period a female and her ealf were
stranded at Hncounter Bay, while three months later an adult male
(M.6266) came ashore in St, Vincent Gulf (see also Hale, 1947,
p. 532), Most of the Sonth Australian strandings oceurred during
calm weather,

According to published records Kogia has been cast ashore in
New Sonth Wales (south of lat, 30 8) during August and September.
On the other hand the similarly few dates of New Zealand strandings
extend well into the summer season, August to late January (Oliver,
Proe, Zool. Soc., London, 1922, p, 567),

External Characters
Boschma (1951, p. 12) has called attention to the fact that more
exact knowledge of the external features of Kogia is desirable.
Unfortunately, in relatively few strandings is it possible for the
worker to bring the whale to his institution before post-mortem

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 217

changes have resulted in change of colour, or, as is so often the case,
before a stranded or captured Kogia is mutilated, Naturally, strand-
ings of whales, large or small, are most often reported from populated
areas, and hefore an animal is recovered, even after a lapse of only
a few hours, vandals have time to mutilate it. However, I have been
fortunate in being able to examine at the Museum a few whole
specimens. Some external measurements of these follow, together
with meagre data provided from another source.

External measurements of young male (M.6186(4)) and adult male (M,6266) from
Largs Bay and Glenelg, St. Vincent Gulf.

Measurements. M.6186. M6266,
mm, per cent. mm. percent,
Total length to notch of tail same 100 2,730 100
Greatest depth of body . .. 22.7 630 23.0
Tip of snout to vertical level of
anterior eorner of eye .. -» 180 9.3 372 13.6
Tip of mandible to vertical ‘level of
anterior corner of eye .. .. . 140 72 275 10.0
Tip of snout to vertical level of
anterior end of base of dorsal fin 930 48.1 1,430 52.
Tip of mandible to axilla .. .. .. 386 20.0 680 24.9
Width of flukes .. .. 0. 4. ee ee ATE 24.6 763 27.9
Height of dorsal fin .. .. «s «. 155 8.0 152 5.5
Length of base of dorszl fn .. -. 220 114 510 18.6
Greatest. length of pectoral fin . -. 300 15.5 350 12.8
Greatest width of pectoral fin . .. 105 5,4 165 6.0
Length of gape to powigtion: fold .. 119 6.1 152 5.5
Length of eye . .. .. . w|(B4 1,2 30 11
Depth of eye . .. .. ee we we e668 0.6 15 0.5

External measurements of two adult females and their calves. M.6156, calf (sex 3) of
Sleaford Bay female; M,.6256 and 6257, female and male calf from Hncounter Bay(5),

(Measurements of Sleaford ay examples as supplied by Mr. W. L, Johnston.)
9 Not

recovered. M.6156. M.6256. M.6257,
Measurements. per per per per
mm. cent mm, cent. Tm. cent. mm. vent.
Total length to noteh of tail
flukes .. .. oe 64 2,925 ©6100 1,720 100 2,980 100 1,892 100

Greatest depth of body . «+ 665 22.7 450 26.1 665 22.3 475 25,1
Tip of snout to vertical level

of anterior corner of eye — — _ = 400 13.4 270 14.2
Tip of mandible to vertical
oe of anterior corner of
i ~. 238 8.1 = — 235 7.8 150 7.9
Tip. of mandible to axilla ooo lc = 658 22.0 450 23.7
Width of flukes . .. .. .. 660 22.5 415 24.1 750 25.1 378 19.9
Height of dorsal fin. -. .. 115 3.9 _ _— 110 3.7 —_ —
Greatest length of pectoral fin 355 12.1 —_ _ 405 13.6 260 13.7
Greatest width of pectoral fin 140 4.7 _ = 150 5.0 95 5.0
Length of gape to a aba
fold . 1s. s+ 4 _— — — _ 190 6.3 123 6.5
Length of eye velasar ay — — _ 30 1,0 25 1.3
Depth of eye .. ee ee ee OO _ —_ = 10 0.3 12 0.6

(4) See also Hale, 1959, pp, 334-335,
(5) See also Hale, 1947, p. 535, for measurements of another cow and her calf.

218 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
Length of Snout. The length of the snout, anterior to the tip of

the lower jaw, is very variable in length. In the South Australian
specimens measured in the flesh the snout of juveniles, 1,710 mm. to

Fig. 8-9. Heads of aged female and her male ealf, Encounter Bay (¥ nat. size).

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 219

1,930 mm. in body length, varies from 2.0 to 6.3 per cent of the body
length; the first named, 2.0 per cent, is extreme, as mentioned else-
where herein. In adults of both sexes from southern Australia,
2,730 mm. to 2,980 mm. in body length, the proportion ranges from
3.5 to 5.5, and this ratio has no relation to sex. The snout length in
relation to skull length also has no bearing on size or sex.

Fig. 10. Head of adult male, Glenelg (1% nat, size).

Yamada (1954, p. 41) provides measurements of some Japanese
examples. These also show differences in the snout length, this vary-
ing in two females, of approximately the same size, from 3.3 to 4.0
per cent of the body length.

Thus the length and shape of the snout provide no clear indication
either of age, sex or locality. The variation may be due at least in
part to the degree of development of the mass of the spermaceti organ,
which Glover Allen (1941, p. 26) suggests ‘‘possibly acts as a bumper
or shock absorber in head-on contacts . . .’’

Dorsal Fin, From available data the dorsal fin originates slightly
posterior to the middle of the total body length of the animal, or a
little in advance of the middle of the body length. Care is necessary
to ascertain as closely as possible the most anterior point of the base

220 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

of the fin; it seems likely that its more forward position occurs in
examples with an unusually short snout.

The fin itself is variable in size and shape. In South Australian
examples examined in the flesh the following variation occurs:

rete
:

Fig. 11-12, Dorsal fins of adult male, Glenelg (11) and (12) of aged
female, Encounter Bay (1% nat. size).

Length of fin Height of fin

Specimen and per cent per cent Height per cent

body length. body length, body length. length of fin.
M.5009. 9 2,897 mm, .. .. 11.1 3.1 28.2
M.5010, 9 1,710 mm... .. 10.8 3.7 34.0
M.6186. $1,930 mm... .. 11.4 8.0 74.0
M.6256. 9 2,980 mm... .. 13.3 3.6 27.5
M.6266, ¢ 2,730 mm. ., .. 18.6 5.5 29.8

For comparison the proportions of examples from widely
separated North Atlantic localities are given below, viz., Virginia and
Massachusetts, U.S.A. (Glover Allen, 1941) and Japan (Yamada,
1954). These are taken from the measurements published by the
aforementioned authors and indicate that the dorsal fin is surprisingly
small in the Massachusetts adult male, whereas it is unusually high in
a South Australian young male (M.6186).

Length of fin Height of fin
Specimen and per cent per cent Height per cent
body length. body length. body length. length of fin.
Virginia; 9,2,210 mm. .. 11.7 6.5 55.7
Mass. ; é,3,200 mm. .. 4.3 2.3 54.2
Japan; 9,2,180 mm, ., 13.7 6.6 48.3
Japan; 9,2,220 mm. .. 15.3 5.8 38.2

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 221

Glover Allen (1941, p. 29), comparing some external characters of
the one adult male and one breeding female, from the abovementioned
separate localities off the Atlantie coast of the United States, remarks
that ‘‘Apart from the generally greater dimensions of the adult male
as compared with the adult fernale, the only striking difference is in
the very much smaller dorsal fin, which in tle male is low and narrow,
while in the female if is of nearly twice the size (fig. 2)... Whether
or not this is a normal sexual differenee, or merely individual
variation, future observations may show’’,

In the South Australian adult male (M,6266), 2,730 mm, in body
length, the dorsal fin is of practically the same shape and proportions
as that of the aged female (M.6256), 2,980 mm. in length; the male,
however, has u relatively larger and higher fin (see fig. 11-12 herein),

Gunther, Hubbs and Beal (1955, pp. 263 and 266) writing of
Kogia on the Atlantic coast of America, and recording an example
from Texas, state that m the case of a specimen recorded from New
Jersey by Enders (1942, fig, 2) ‘*The length of the dorsal fin and its
vertieal height ave much the smallest in the New Jersey specimen,’’
Tn the opinion of these authors ‘‘The most unexpected and significant.
differences seem to he the measurements of snout to eye, snout to
blowhole, and snout to dorsal fin. The last measurement is checked
hy the measurement from the fluke notch to the posterior insertion of
the dorsal. These measnrements and a comparison of the photo-
graphs indicate, with little doubt, that the dorsal fin of the Texas
specimen was placed considerably further back than on the other
two’? (California and New Jersey).

Tt seems afypareit that in so far as either sex or locality are
concerned, the proportions of the dorsal fin have no significance,
Yamada, however, writes ‘I liked to know what was known at sea,
especially if they [examples of Kagia| belonged to the same schoo]
or were separated.’* Yamada was given some information by a whaler
hunting in Japanese waters; this individual testified “that No. 5 was
with No. 4 in a school of six or seven whales, and No. 6 in another
of to or three, This may somewhat favour on one hand the opinion
te recognize K, simus and seems on the other to be a new knowledge
of the habits of kogiids’’, (Yamada, 1954, pp. 51-52; see also note
by Palmer, Journ, Mamm., 29, 1948, p. 421.)

As already stated if is recognized that far too few accurate
illustrations of the exterior of Kogia are available. Nevertheless,
Glover Allen’s adult female (1941, pp. 28-29, fig. 2) and a young male

222 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

recorded by me (Hale, 1959, p. 335, fig. 1) have the dorsal fin high,
with its origin in advance of the middle of the body length,

W. Elliot’s drawings of a female from India (stmus of Owen,
1869, pl. 10-11) are of doubtful accuracy hut show a similar dorsal
fin, as also does the illustration of Fraser and Parker (1949, p. 18,
fig. 15) which may be a modifieation by the artist, Col, Simon, of the
figures published by Owen,

While, as mentioned by some other authors, examinations of the
variable skeletal characters gives one no reason to recognize more
than one species of the genus (see for example Hirasaka, 1987, pp, 120,
135, 139, and Allen, 1941, p. 17), one may venture to support Yamada’s
indication that the animal occurs in semi-isolated migrating small
herds, Further, to suggest that individuals of such schools may he
separable from those of other herds by superficial external characters
(including colouration), allhough much evidence is required to sub-
stantiate {his theory. Comparison of cows and theit calves could be
useful. For example, in both the cow and female ealf from Port
Victoria (M.5009-5010) the dorsal fin is relatively small, and
originates just behind the middle of the length of the body (ef, Glover
Allen, 1941, and Hale, 1959, illustrating individnals with higher fing).
The photographs of a male from California (Tubbs, 1951, pl, ii and
iii) show a small dorsal fin, very like that of the Port Victoria cow
and calf.

Colouration. rom examination of the few Pigmy Sperm Whales
stranded on South Australian coasts it is obvious that the extent of
the darker portions, in relation to the white of the underside, shows
considerable variation. The pigmented areas vary in colour also from
blue, blue on the sides merging into brownish grey dorsally, dark
grey and light bluish-grey.

Yamada (1954, p. 40, fig. 5) illustrates a bracket-like marking
which occurs behind the eye in some specimens and, following Hubbs
(1951, p. 408, pl. 11), suggests that this could be a generic character
of Kogia. Tubbs’ published photographs of a specimen taken near
Imperial Beach, California, show the bracket very clearly. Gunther,
Hubbs and Beal (1955, p, 267) comment on the presence or absence
and variability of the marking. (See also note hy D. K. Caldwell,
Journ. Mamm., 41, 1960, p. 187.) Tlus bracket was especially looked
for in examples stranded on onr coast during 1958 and 1959 but was
not present, although there is possibly a faint indication of it in an
unrecovered calf (Hale, 1959, p. 334, pl. XL) known only from

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 223

photographs in colour. In the upper figure of the abovementioned
plate there appears, very obscurely, an extension of the white ventral
colour into the darker area behind the eye.

The colouration given for a female and calf from Port Victoria
(Hale, 1947, p. 532), namely ‘‘jet black above and on the sides, fading
into the white of the underside from back of the mouth to a little
posterior to the anus’? must now be ignored as being due to post-
mortem change in the darker areas (Hale, 1959, p. 337),

It is certain that post-mortem changes in colouration ean and do
occur very rapidly in stranded examples, particularly when they are
subject to heat or sunlight. Thus, from available evidence, specimens
cast ashore do not necessarily provide a true indication of the life
colouration, even thongh they may have died on the beach shortly
before examination. Towever, reasonably fresh examples do show
the colour pattern, viz., the distribution of the dark areas in relation
to the white,

Skeleton

Skull. Attempts have been made to separate Koygia into species
by utilizing skeletal characters.

Below are given some measurements of seven skulls of examples
taken on South Australian coasts. Three of calves, 1,700 mm, to
1,892 mm, in body length, which were accompanying their mothers;
one pe a young male 1,930 mm, in length; three from adults 2,730 mm.
to 2,980 mm, in length. These include for comparison the skull
measurements of a female and her suckling calf previously recorded
(Hale, 1947, p. 536).

The measurements, amplifying data supplied by other workers,
show that marked variation occurs,

Skull measurements of adults, 2,730-2,980 mm. in length.

Mensurements, 9, M,5009, 2, M.6256, 2, M.6266.
mm, percent, mm. per eunt, mm. per cent,
Total (condylobasal) Danek ‘Pe eg ty F419. 600 412 100 420 100
Height to vertex , , 2. QH5 59.7 266 64.5 245 58.3
Width betwoon postorbital pronesses . woe 860 87.8 360 87.3 355 84.5
Hinder adge of occipital condyles to
posterior wall of left naris . +... +. 160 a6.5 154 87.3 150 85.7
Height of supraoceipital from upper
margin of foramen magnum .. .. .. 115 28.0 133 32,2 122 29.0

(6) During September, 1961, while the present paper was in press, a young female came ashore
in St. Vineent Gulf, S. Aust. This had a well defined bracket, comparable to that
illustrated by Hubbs and which still could be traced 48 hours after the death of the
animal,

ied
t
os

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Skull measurements of adults, 2,730-2,980 mm, in length—continued,
Measurements. 2, M.5009, 9, M.6256. 4, M.6266.
mm. per cent. mm, per cent. Tum, per cent.
Width of supraoccipital at narrowest. part
between posterior margins of temporal

fossae .. .. +o. 214 52.2 2o4 54.3 230 54,7
Length of rostrum from ‘tip ‘to anterior
wall of Ieft naris .. .. 227 55.3 239 58.0 225 53,5
Tip of rostrum to anterior “margin of
palutines .. .. 170 414 174 42.2 170 40,4
Width of rostrum between nntorbital
processes .. >} sim rtos “OBO 53,6 218 52.9 194 46.2
Greatest length of pterygoids evore ue 188 45.8 208 50.4 180 42.8
Length of left maris . 2. 6. 6. ee. 7 11.4 AG 111 48 114
Width of left maris .. 4. 1. 1. us 83 8.0 35 8.5 a4 8,0
Height of foramen magnum ,. ,, .. 42 10.2 38 9.2 40 9.5
Width of foramen magnum)... .. .. 41 10.0 36 3,7 32 7.6
Height of occipital condylea ., ., .. G4 15.6 64 15.6 68 16,2
Width of occipital condyles .. .. 90 21.9 88 21,3 81 19.3
Length of mandible (mid-line between tip
and level of back of condyles) . 360 87.8 375 91.0 350 83.3
Length of left ramus of mandible ( ¢on-
dyle to anterior end) . ve aie 80 92.6 405 98,3 382 90.9
Depth of left ramus at coronoid 2... 100 24.3 90 21.8 90 21.4
Length of symphysis . .. .. .. .. .. 80 19.5 110 26.7 95 22,6
Length of alveolar portion .. .. .. .. 140 a4. 190 46.1 170 40.4

Skull measurements of calves, 1,700-1,892 mm, in length (Port Victoria, Sleaford Bay
and Eneounter Bay).

Measurements. @, M,5010, Sex? M.6156. &, M.6257.
nim. per cent. tam. per cent. mm. per cent,

Total (eondylobasal) Tongth tote ee ve 850 =100.0 265 100.0 295 = 100,0

Height to vertex .. .. - i 15@ 60.0 180 67.9 186 63.0

Width between postorbital pr ocesses sae 210 B40 240 90.5 262 88.8
Hinder edge of oecipital condyles to

posterior wall of left narigs .. .. .. 124 49.6 134 50.5 130 44.0
Height of supraoecipital from upper

margin of foramen magnum . .. . 80 32.0 94 35,4 98 31.5

Width of supraoecipital at narrowest
part between posterior margins of

temporal fossae .. .. 155 2.0 170 64.1 106 56,2
Length of rostrum from tip to auterior

wall of left naris . .. 93 37.2 124 46.7 144 48.8
Tip of rostrum to ahterior | margin of

palatines .. .. 76 30.4 93 35.0 119 40.3
Width of rostrum between “ antorbital

processes .. wie dep peice eee 50.8 130 49.0 159 53,9
Greatest Iength of pterygoids dt _va jee OF 38,8 115 43.4 139 47.1
Length of left naris.... thedelewe 1B 13.2 30 11.3 35 11.8
Width of left naris . 1... 1. ee we ee) 28 9.2 26 9.8 29 9.8
Height of foramen magnum false tryoe, 42 16.8 38 14.3 38 12.8
Width of foramen magnum ........ 34 13.6 31 11.7 27 91
Height of occipital condyles ., .. .. .. 58 23.2 60 22.6 57 19.3
Width of occipital condyles .. .. 64 25.6 67 25.2 70 23.7
Length of mandible (mid-line between

tip and level of back of condyles) . — — —I — 230 17.9
Length of left ramus of mandible ( con:

dyle to anterior end) . eee _— — _— 260 88.1
Depth of left ramus at coronoid ies oo — = — 70 23.7
Length of symphysis .. .. .. 6... 2. 48 19.2 — — 50 16.9
Length of alveolar portion .. .. .. .. 83 33.2 _—_ — 100 33.9

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 225

Skull measurements of young male (M.6186), 1,030 im, in length, from Largs Bay,

Measurements, tim, per cent.
Total (eondylobasal) length oo ov. ce ee ee ee ae ee ee ee ee ee ey re oy B48 100.0
Height to Vortex oy 0.2 ue ee we we ee we ue he de be we oe oe ae LG 67.0
Width between postorbital proceasea .. 2. 2. 6. ee ee we ee ee et ee om BBE 918
Hinder edge of occipital condyles to posterior wall of laff aqels .. .. -. 2. TG 472
Height of supraoceipital from upper margin of foramen magnum»... ., 38 39.0

Width of supravceipital al farrowest part between posterior margins of

tumyporal fOREQG v4) 6s ee oe oe oe oe ee ee ee te we , od ae $168 66.6
Length of rostrum from tip to anterior wall of left marin .. .. )0 ye 4. 38 40.3
Tip of rost®an to anterior margin of pululines 4) ++ e+ te ee ee we ee ee 17 $1.6
Width of rostrum between aftorbital processes -. .. 2. 22 2. cs ae ce ee 128 60,2
Greatest. length of pterygoids .. 6. 6. 64 ue ue re re er pe ee eee 140 57.6
Length of left maris .. 5. 6. aa ue bh et we ve et oe ee ee et ee ee ne | OF 13,1
Width of loft madris ,. ue un pe fe ae wk we we ak be ne oe eth ee ee) YD 7.3
Height of foramen magnum .. 6. e. ye ye pe re ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 88 11.6
Width of foramen magnutt ». ve ee ee ve we ce ee ee ee ee et ee ee 88 11.5
Height of vecipital condyles ,, .. .- -. -. 4 b's): el wel Diet o's) ble oe Bal 21.8

Width of oecipital condyles . cc ve we ne ne we ae ee ee we we ee ee
Length of mandible (mid-line hetween tip and level of back of condyles) -. 187 76.9
Length of left ramus of mandible (condyle to anterior end) «. 4. ys 4» 200 82,3

Depth of loft ramus at coronoid 2. 6. 62 ck ee eh te ae ee ee ee ee 68 25.9
Length of symphysis 2. 6. 26 ee ee ry ee ee we we we ee ee ee te ee TB 5.7
Length of alveolar portion ., +1 oy <1 <6 se be ee te ey ue te ee we TR 29,6

The above measurements indicate that with age the rostrum
increases iu length in relation to the length of the skull; further, in
the four smaller examples (1,710-1,930 mm, in body length) it is wider
than lone, whereas in the three adults (2,730-2,980 mm, in body length)
it ig longer than wide.

It is now possible to compare the skulls of two breeding females
with those of their suckling calves (pl. 1-2, A and B); these are from
Port Victoria, Spencer Gulf (M.5009-5010, April, 1957) and Encounter
Bay on the south coast (M.6256-6257, June, 1959), The skulls of the
calves show no detail of import linking them with those of their
mothers, It may be noted, however, that in both cow and calf from
Encounter Bay the height to vertex is lower, and the pterygoids
shorter, than in the female and young from Port Victoria. The
occipital condyles in both calves resemble those of their respective
mothers, but are similar also to those of some other individuals; in
the evalf of female M,6256 the foramen magnum is more ovate than in
the parent,

Posterior views of the eight skulls available from South Australia
are shown on pl. 1 and 2 herein; these comprise four adults and four
juveniles, and serve to illustrate in part the descriptions of the skulls,
ineluding the occipital condyles and foramen magnum. The photo-
graphs are all to the same seale and, with exception of female
M.5009 (in which the lower jaw bones are wired to the skull) are

226 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

shown with the lower edge of the pterygoids and the tip of the rostrum
resting in the same plane,

Vertebrae, From the deseriptions of skeletons of Kogia I fail
to find anything to correlate convincingly the varying lengths of the
dorsal spines and other characters of the vertebrae with skull
differences. he fusion of the epiphyses, however, is of interest.

Glover Allen (1941, p. 24) describing a female 2,210 mm. in body
length (pregnant and taken with suckling calf), states that it ‘was
fully adult, as indicated by the well-ossified mesethmoid and complete
union of all epiphyses’’. The degree of fusion of the epiphyses of
the vertebrae certainly seems to furnish some indication of age, as
demonstrated in six of the examples stranded in South Australias it
would appear from this and other skeletal characters (ie., in the
tongne bones, the thyrohyals and basilyal are fused) that the female
from Encounter Bay (M,6256) is the oldest of the specimens, Details
of the fusion of the vertebral epiphyses are given below, It will be
noted that these fusions follow no completely uniform sequence
(cf. M.6266 and M,5009),

M.5010, female calf of M.5009, 1,710 mm. in body length.

Cervical, 7; thoracic, 13; lumbar, 10; candal, 23. Epiphyses of
the centra are completely free on the following, Cervical: no. 7
only, posterior, All thoraeics, anterior and posterior. All lumbars,
anterior and posterior, Caudal: 1 to 19, anterior and posterior;
becanse of their tiny size and extreme fragility it is impossible, after
maceration, to ascertain whether or not free epiphyses were present
in the last four candals,

M.6257, male calf of M,6256, 1,892 mm. in body length.

Cervical, 7; thoracic, 14; lumbar, 9; caudal, 24. HWpiphyses of the
centra are completely free on the following. Cervical; posterior of
centrum 6; both anterior and posterior of eentrum 7. All thoracies,
both anterior and posterior. All lumbars, both anterior and posterior.
All caudals with exception of 7, which has the epiphysis attached to,
but not completely fused with, the anterior face of the centrum.

M.6186, calf from Largs Bay, 1,930 mm. in body length.

Cervical, 7; thoracic, 14; lumbar, 10; caudal, 26. Epiphyses of
posterior of cervical 7, and all remaining vertebrae both front and
back, completely free.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 227

M.6266, adult male from Glenelg, 2,730 mm, in body length.

Cervical, 7; thoracic, 12; lumbar, 9; caudal, 25, Hpiphyses of
the centra are completely free on the following. Thoracie: 2 and 3,
anterior only; 4 to 12 both anterior and posterior. Lumbar: 1 to 3
both amerior and posterior; 4, 10 and 11 posterior only. Caudal;
5, 6, 8 and 13, both anterior and posterior; 12 anterior only. Epiphyses
fused on all other faces of centra,

M.5009, female from Port Victoria, 2,897 mm, in body length; pregnant
and with suckling calf.

Cervieal, 7; thoracic, 13; lumbar, 9; eandal, 26. Epiphyses of the
centra are completely free on the following. Thoracic: 3 to 13, both
anterior and posterior, All lnmbars, anterior and posterior. Candal:
1, anterior and posterior; 2, anterior only; 3, posterior only.

In the first and second thoracics the epiphyses are almost com-
pletely fused with the centrum; from the sixth caudal back the edges
of the epiplryses are barely or not at all distinguishable from the
centrum.

M.6256, adult female (with suckling calf) from Encounter Bay,
2,980 mm, in body length.

Cervical, 7; thoracic, 13; lumbar, 9; caudal, 23. All epiphyses are
completely fused with the centra,

Sternum, As in examples of Kogia from other localities the
sternum of specimens taken in South Australia exhibit considerable
differences (pl. 4), In one case, that of the young male from Largs
Bay (pl. 4, A), it is composed of four segments, instead of the usual
three, and these are all entire; as noted herein the skull of this calf
is also unusual.

The degree of development of the anterior median notch of the
manubrium has no sigiificance, nor has the degree of fusion of the
two components of each section, In this last respect the sternum of
the Jarge male from Glenelg (pl, 4, C) is interesting in that while the
last, or third, stenebra consisted of two separate elements, that on the
right side is completely ossified, the other cartilaginous but denser
than, and readily distinguishable from, the surrounding cartilage.

Glover Allen (1941, p. 32) considers that ‘‘Very likely, as

commonly in cetaceans, this wide variation in form of the sternum
ig a mark of degeneration in the structure’.

228 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES CITED

Allen, Glover M. (1941): ‘*Pygmy Sperm Whale in the Atlantie’’,
Zool, Series, Field Mus. Nat. Hist., Chicago, XXVII,
pp. 17-86, fig. 1-4,

Benham, W. P. (1902); ‘‘Notes on the Osteology of the Short-nosed
Sperm Whale’’, Proe. Zool. Soc., London (1), pp. 54-62,
pl. ii-iv.

Boschma, H. (1951); Bull, L’Inst. Océanographique, Leiden, No. 991.

Enders, R. K. (1942): ‘Notes on a stranded pigmy sperm whale
(Kogia breviceps)’’. Not. Nat. Acad. Nat. Sei.,
Philadelphia, 111, pp. 1-6, fig, 1-4.

Fraser, F, C. and Parker, H. W. (1949): Stranded Whales, Dolphins,
Porpoises and Turtles on the British Coasts. British
Museum (Nat. Hist.), p. 18.

Gunther, G., Hubbs, Carl L., and Beal, M. Allan (1955): ‘‘Records of
Kogia breviceps from Texas, with remarks on movements
and distribution’’. Journal of Mammalogy, 36, pp. 263-
270, pl. 1-2.

Male, Herbert M. (1947): ‘*The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia
breviceps, Blainville) on South Australian Coasts’’. Ree.
South Aust. Mus., VITI, pp. 531-546, pl. xiv-xviii and
text fig, 1-17.

———- (1959): ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale on South Australian
Coasts (Continued)’’, Ree. South Aust. Mus., XIII,
pp. 333-338, pl. xl and text fig. 1-2.

Hubbs, Carl L. (1951): ‘‘Eastern Pacific Records and General
Distribution of the Pygmy Sperm Whale’. Journal of
Mammalogy, 32, pp. 403-410, pl. i-iii.

Hirasaka, K. (1937): ‘‘On the Pigmy Sperm Whale, Kogia breviceps
(Blainville)’’. Mem. Fac. Sci. Taihoku Imp, Univ., XIV,
pp. 117-142, pl. i-y and Map 1,

Owen, R, (1866): ‘On Some Indian Cetacea Collected by Walter
Elliot.”’ Trans. Zool. Soc., London, VI, pp. 17-47, pl. 3-14.

Scheffer, V. B., and Slipp, J. W. (1948): ‘‘The Whales and Dolphins
of Washington State’. American Midland Naturalist,
39, No. 2, pp. 307-309, fig. 41-42.

Yamada, M. (1954): ‘‘Some Remarks on the Pygmy Sperm Whale,
Kogia’’. Sci. Rept. Whales Research Inst., Tokyo, J apan,
No. 9, pp. 37-58, fig. 1-13 and plate.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALE IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA 229

EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES

PLATE 1. POSTERIOR VIEWS OF SKULLS.

A and B, adult female, M.5009, body length 2,897 mm., and her female calf, M.5010,
body length 1,710 mm.; C, sex unknown, M.5197, body length unknown; D, calf, sex unknown,
M.6156, body length unknown. (All to same seale.)

PLATE 2. POSTERIOR VIEWS OF SKULLS.

A and B, aged female, M.6256, body length 2,980 mm.,, and her female calf, M.6257,
body length 1,892 mm.; C, young male, M.6186, body length 1,930 mm.; D, adult male,
M.6266, body length 2,730 mm, (All to same scale.)

PLATE 3, TONGUE BONES,

A, young male, M.6186, body length 1,930 mm.; B, aged female, M.6256, body length
2,980 mm.; C, adult male, M.6266, body length 2,720 mm, (Not to same scale.)

PLATE 4, VENTRAL VIEWS OF STERNA.

A, young male, M.6186, body length 1,930 mm.; B, aged female, M.6256, body length
2,980 mm.; C, adult male, M.6266, body length 2,730 mm. (Not to same scale.)

Rhine, S.A. MoseeM Vou. 14, PLare J

Po feu yates Ban |

Ree, SwAL Museum

Vou. 14, Puare 2

Rec. S.A. Musevn Von, 14, Puare 3

Ree, S.A, Mosrom Vou, 14, Puare 4

OCCURRENCE OF THE WHALE BERARDIUS ARNUXI
IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

By HERBERT M. HALE, HON. ASSOCIATE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

An adult female of the Beaked Whale Berardius arnuxi Duvernoy, stranded on a South
Australian coast, is described herein. The relationship of the second species of the genus,
B. bairdi Stejneger, is discussed.

Genus Berardius Duvernoy, 1851
Berardius arnuxi Duvernoy, 1851

Loc: Port Lorne in St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia (skull and part skeleton in South
Australian Museum; Reg. No. M.5012).

OCCURRENCE OF THE WHALE BERARDIUS ARNUXI IN
SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA

By HERBERT M. HALH, How. Associate, Sour AusTRALIAN
Museum

Plates 5-6, and text fig. 1

SUMMARY

An adult female of the Beaked Whale Berardius arnuxi Duvernoy,
stranded on a South Australian coast, is described herein. The
relationship of the second species of the genus, B. bairdi Stejneger, is
discussed,

Genus Berardius Duvernoy, 1851
Berardius arnuxi Duvernoy, 1851

Loc.: Port Lorne in St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia (skull and
part skeleton in South Australian Museum; Reg. No. M.5012).

INTRODUCTION

A brief note recording the occurrence of Berardius arnuxi in
South Australian waters was published previously (Hale, 1939,
pp. 5-6, fig.).

The specimen, a pregnant female, was stranded in December,
1935, on an extensive tidal flat, south of Port Lorne, near the northern
end of St. Vincent Gulf. The presence of the whale was not reported
to me until early in January, 1936, and, in company with Messrs.
J. and A. Rau and an assistant, the carcass was examined on J anuary
6, when some flesh measurements and skeletal details were secured.
The whale then had been carried by the tide to one mile north of
Port Lorne, and was resting on the flat nearer to high tide level than
when first seen by others. On the same day fleshing was partly carried
out but as darkness fell work was interrupted by the invasion of the
incoming tide which, as usual in this locality, raced across the flat
with surprising speed and force, on this occasion coinciding with a
sudden thunderstorm. The partly fleshed carcass was then anchored,
securely as we thought, to strong stakes, but on visiting the site early

232 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

next day we found that during a further storm in the night tidal
action had gouged out a crater where the whale had been lying and
that sections of the body were scattered about the flat. With the aid
of a local fisherman all but the major part of the caudal vertebral
section, comprising caudals four to nineteen, were recovered. Despite
extensive search by the Museum party, and later, following offer of
a substantial reward, by residents adjacent to Port Lorne, this
portion, regrettably, was never recovered.

External Characters

Mr. J. J. Waters, of Yatala, South Australia, observed, from a
small boat, the whale when it was first stranded on December 27, 1935.
He supplied, in litt,, the following information. ‘‘At the time when
I saw it first it was at low water; the whale was then about half a
mile from low water mark . . . When the tide rose sufficiently for
us to go in we went to within twenty yards of it and were going to
anchor it. After a time we discovered that it was alive. The only
noise that it made was when it expelled air, a lond ‘whish’; it was
also moving its head from side to side. The colour on close inspection
was black. Where it was when I saw it was due west from a big
sand bank about two miles south of Port Lorne’’.

My best thanks are due to the abovementioned for their personal
observations and I am indebted to Mr. C. P. Mountford for photo-
graphing the bones herein illustrated.

Table 1. Eody proportions,

Per cent

Measurements, mm, of length,
Tota] length to median projection of tail flukes .. 2. 1. 0. 1s ee ae oe 8,845 100.0
Tip of snout to anterior ends of throat grooves . .. -. 2+ s+ «+ +s +. S81 48
Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior commer of eye .. 1. we ee we ee | OLE 10.8
Tip of snout to blow hole .. .. vn ee sroe he uee mee 11.7
Tip of mandible to vertien! level of anterior eorner of eye tee ee ne GS o.7
Projection of lower jaw beyond tip of snout .. : §1 0.6
Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior end of base of dorsal fin .. 5,871 66.8
Tip of snout to axilla .. 1. 2 ce ee ee ce ce te ee we oe te oe ee 1,082 ee
VIO MEME ee a ns Wk ee Mek teri e sr f= Fe ce ge een, ERO 25.8
Hag Pih ie Gree tig scene) im as ta Me Geko Wile we laadina » OR 17
Length of base of dorsal fin ., ee eee eee ee ee | 6.0
Langih of pectoral fin, axilla to tip on. is ae oe ce ee te pe ts oe oe) 6 FBT 5.9
Greatest width of pectoral My nee Sa Sr) Ca ees tae las ee eee SRE 4.8
Length of eye .. .. «+ ee ee er er re a8 0.4
MOE YR fy ae ee te FRE oF ee oa one, atl gm sas) eens 16 O.1

Skeleton

Skull (pl. 5, fig. A-B). This is a little less than one-seventh of
the body length. It is of the same size as the type skull of Duvernoy

HALE—BERARDIUS IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 233

and in general differs in no very significant detail from the descriptions
of other authors. The mesethmoid, however, rises above the level of
the premaxillae (cf. Flower, 1874, p, 218, pl. 28, fig. 8) while its rugose
ossification extends to approximately 320 mm. in front of the base of
the rostrum, as measured between the posterior limits of the antorbital
notches, a feature due 1o the greater age of the Australian female.

Measurements of the skull, mandibles and teeth are given in
tables 2 and 3.

Table 2. Skull measurements,

Per cent
Measurements. mm, of length,
Total (condylobasal) length 1. ec. cs ve pe ee ue we we be we oe ea 1,260 100,0
Height from vertex tu Interior border of pterygoid: .. 4. +. -- -- -. 648 514
Breadth across postorbital processes , ¢, ee ee ne ey ee ee ae ee ee 700 55,5
Length of rostriim .. ce ee ee ee ee ee ek ee be ae we ce ee oe ee | 788 60.7
Breadth of rostrum at base .. .. (eee ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ABE 84,5
Breadth of rostram at middle .. 6. 26 ee ee ee ee ee te ge wm we ee | 168 13.3
Length of promaxilla 2... 66 ck ee be he ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 1,085 86,1
Breadth of premaxillae at middle of longth .. 1. -. .- 2. ce ve ee oe | 122 9.6
Greatest breadth of premaxillac in front of mares ,- .- -- ,- +. +s. -. 2818 17.3
Greatest. breadth of premaxillae bohkind nares .. 6. 6. ee ce ee ee we BOD 15.8
Distanes trom anterior end of premaxillac to level of posterior borders of
pherygoids 66 ce pe ek a ee ee tm ee ee be wk oe ae ek ee ee 105 78,9
Length of nares (greatest modian) 2. 6. 62 ee ee ee ry ee ee we ee ee 120 9.5
Breadth of nares (greatest) .. ce. es ee ce be pe ee we ke ee ees 98 7.7
Breadth across occipital condyles 2... 2. 64 ve ne te ee ee ee ae B20 17.4
Breadth of right condyla 6. ve 60 ue pe pe we we ee ee ee we 95 7.6
Height of right condyle ., 6... ee ve be we ue ge be we - Bb 12.2
Length of mandible (right) 2.06. ci ce ee ne ee ne ee ee ee ee ey 1155 91.6
Length of symphysis .. +. 2 pe ee ee te ee we ae te we ee ee ve BOD 23.0
Height at woronoid 6. ve ee ce ck ee ee ek ee wy et me we ee 280 18.2
Distance from tip of jaw to cantra of Ist tooth ©. -1 ey we ve ne ae 50 3.9
Distance from tip of jaw to centre of 2nd tooth ». ve 4. ve ve ee oe 180 11.9
Height of Ist tooth: right .. cc uy ue ee ee ee ee ee be ee ee e104 8,2
Vabt det a tcie de ot ote ewer, er ee rats sp yn 208 8.3
Greatest length of Ist tooth: right . .. ee ue we we we ek ee nm ne G5 5.1
CS. rr ee ce re on ee 70 5.5

Hyoids, The basihyal has the median anterior incision much
deeper, and the adjoining prominences more elevated, than in the
younger specimen described by Flower (1874, p. 223, pl. 28, fig. 9;
body leneth about the same as that of the Australian female); this
bone is two and one-quarter times as wide as its median length, and
is more massive than as deseribed by Flower, its breadth being 180 mm.
The thyrohyals are not fused to the basihyal and like the stylohyals
are also more massive, not much longer, but relatively distinctly wider.

Vertebrae (pl. 6, fig. B-H). Cervical, 7; thoracic, 11; lumbar, 12;
caudal, 19.

The vertebrae were counted in the partly fleshed animal but, as
already mentioned, most of the candals were lost during a storm.

234 RECORDS OF THE §&.A. MUSEUM

There are in hand, however, all cervieals, thoracics and lumbars
together with the first to third caudals and three pairs of chevrons,
each of the Jatter with the components fused. The field notes also
show that there are ten ribs on the Jeft side and eleven on the right.

The epiphyses are all coalesced with the free ends of the centra,
so completely incorporated that they have become an integral part
of all of the latter.

In the first three fused cervieals the maximum height of the
combined dorsal processes of the first and seeond is two-sevenths of
the greatest depth of the mass, with the opper surface rising, not
steeply, to the rear, where there is an irregular median incision
between a pai of apieal bosses. The atlas is decidedly wider than
high. The neural arch of the third cervical is free on both sides for
a short distance, above the third large lateral foramen, but is complete,
although the dorsal apical portion is fused with, but below the level of,
the dorsal part of the arch of the second vertebra, The fourth to
seventh cervicals also have complete neural arches. In the fonrth and
fifth there is no dorsal process, the upper sides of the arch being
almost uniform in anterior-posterior widtl, but sloping slightly
upwards dorsally; the fourth is not livher than its greatest width,
The sixth lias a low, obtasely ronnded dorsum and the seventh a short,
triangular dorsal proceas, leas than one-seventh of the total height
of the vertehra, which thus is wider than high. The eentrum of the
seventh has a median gutter on the ventral surface. where in the
preceding cervyicals is a low protuberance.

The dorsal spines of all eleven thoracie vertebrae slope back-
wards and in general resemble those described and figured by Flower
in 1874, although his example had only ten thoracies. The first is
wider than high, because of the low dorsal process. The eighth has a
pronounced lateral rib-attachment facet on each metapophysis and
another articnlar facet on each side of the posterior end of the centrum.
The ninth thoracic has the dorsal process fairly well developed and is
nearly twice as high as ils greatest width. Hach of the prominent
lateral processes first appearing on the tenth has a large and rugose
articnlar face on the distal end,

The twelve lumbars differ in no essential feature from those
deseribed by Flower, The distal parts of the dorsal processes, how-
ever, are inclined towards the left in the first two, towards the right
in the third to fifth, again to the left in the sixth and seventh, slightly
to the right in the eighth to tenth and to the left in the eleventh.
The first lumbar is wider than high and the dorsal process, as in the

HALE—BERARDIUS IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 235

thoracics, is rather slender, the greatest width at the distal end being
one-fourth of the length, the last measured from the upper limit of
the neural arch to the apex. The dorsal process of the remaining
lumbars is wider, but the increase in breadth is not successively
regular until the ninth; in the eleventh the width of the distal end is
not much less than half the length of the process and in the twelfth
slightly more than half the length. The sixth lumbar has become much
higher than wide,

The first to third candal vertebrae have the distal end of the
dorsal processes, as in the posterior lumbars, expanded and truncate,
their apical width being more than half the length. The height of the
first candal is more than one-third as long again as its width.

Sternum (pl. 5, fig. C). The components of each of the five
segments are solidly fused. The massive first segment has the whole
anterior margin shallowly concave and the lateral articular processes
more prominent than as shown in the illustrations of this structure
in arnuai (cf. Flower, 1874, pl. 27, fig. 3 and Morelli, 1920, pl. 4,
fig. 4). The posterior processes of the last segment are shorter than
depicted in the abovementioned illustrations.

Scapula (pl. 6, fig. 1). Resembles very closely the photographs
of this bone by Morelli (1920, pl. 4, fig. 3, and pl. 5, fig. 2; adult female
of arnuxi from La Plata).

Ribs. As already noted, there are ten ribs on the left side and
eleven on the right. The eleventh has no trace of a fellow on the left
and is much shorter than either of the tenth ribs. The tubercle is
rudimentary in the ninth ribs, disappearing on the tenth pair and the
single eleventh rib. The differences in the lengths of ribs of a pair,
given below, are not significant, depending mainly on the projection of
the distal rugosity.

Length of ribs, taken in a straight line from
head to free end of bony portions.

Rib Right. Left.

No. mm. mm,
1 450 450
2 730 710
4 R90 895
4 990 970
5 1.015 1,015
6 1,055 1,050
7 1,045 1,040
8 1,040 1,035
9 970 Broken tip

10 825

11 435 Absent

236 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

The two species of Berardius recognized in literature oceupy, as
far as is known al present, widely separated oceanic areas, The
genotype, B. arnuxi Duvernoy, has heen tuken from the Antarctic
Ocean to South America, New Zealand atid southern Australia, while
B, bairdi Stejneger oceurs in the North Pacific, from the Bering Sea
to California and Japan,

External Characters

Omura, Fujino and Kimura (1955, p. 99) furnish body proportions
of four females ot hairdi from Japan in percentages of total body
length; the South Australian female is compared below with these and
other specimens,

The snout was relatively longer, and the Jower jaw projected for
a lesser distance from the tip of the snout than in the Japanese
females. Measurements of a young female, of the same total length
as the South Australian specimen, are given by Pike (1953, p, 101);
these show the projection of the lower jaw heyond the snont to be
still less than in the Australian female,

The throat grooves were approximately 5385 mm. in length, and
as usual did not meet in front; posteriorly they were separated by a
distance of 880mm. As shown in Table 1 the eye was well in advance
of the blowhale,

The dorsal fin, although approximately equal in length to those
of the Japanese females, was cousiderably lower. This fin is high in
some other females referred to bairdi; for instance see True, 1910,
p. 67 and Pike, 1953, p. 101. True, vide Mector, indieates that the
dorsal fin of the Wellington, New Zealand, male arnuxi is relatively
still higher.

The pectoral fins were fully as long and wide as those of the
Japanese females,

The caudal fin showed no trace of a median notch; on the contrary
the rear edges of hoth flukes were coneave, a little sinuate and met
medianly to form a slight but distinet projection (fig. 1), the tip of
which was only 77 mm, posterior to the last, and tiny, caudal vertebra.
The flukes were not symmetrical, the left, méaanred from tip to the
median projection, being 1,069 mm, in width, the right 1,169 mm.
The total width of the caudal fin corresponds with the proportion to
body length of a large adult female of bairdi from Alaska, as given
by True (1910, p. 67) and while less than that of the abovementioned
Japanese females, is greater than stated in the few available body
measurements of arnwxt.

HALE—BERARDIUS IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 237

Fig. 1. Dorgal view of caudal fin of Berardius arnuxi from South Australia
(Wg nat. size),

It is possible that the posterior margins of the tail flukes of the
South Australian Berardius had been damaged, and healed, during
life, but it is difficult to imagine that in such case the width of the
caudal fin could be increased, but if anything the reverse. Mutilation
of the fins of living whales is by no means unusual (see for example
R. M. Gilmore, Journ, Mamm., 42, 1961, pp. 419-420).

The distortion of the dorsal processes of the lumbar vertebrae
suggest that the whale suffered a mishap at some period of its
existence.

Skeleton

In Table 3 the skull measurements, per cent of breadth, of the
South Australian female are compared with those of two females
referred to bairdi. One, not fully adult and taken off the coast of
Vancouver Island, British Columbia (Pike, 1953, p. 103) is equal in
size to the South Australian example. The second, from the opposite
side of the North Pacific, is a larger adult female (Omura, Fujino and
Kimura, 1955, p. 109). The last column refers to a ‘‘physically adult”’
Berardius, thought to be a female, and not specifically identified, from
near Ocean City, Washington (Slipp and Wilke, 1953, p. 108).

238 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

Table 3.
4. Aust, VancouverIs. Japan. Washington.
Measurements. 20ft. 2oft. S6ft, 34ft. Sin,
adult, immature, adult, adult,
Total (condylobasal) length .. 2. 2. 180.0 203.8 196.8 181.8
Height from vertex to inferior border
of ptervygoids . .. . = 92.5 79.7 79.1 73.6
Breadth across postorbital ‘Processus “1 100.0 100.0 100,0 1000
Length of rostrum .... ene es 109,2 132.0 127.6 116.7
Breadti of rostrum at hase reek -aa 65.0 60.2 60.5 56,3
Breadth of roatrum ot middle .. .. 24.0 20.4 27.8 26.0
Length of premaxilla ,. .. ts 155,0 180.9 191,1 162.6
Breadth of pedinge at middle of
length ». oo. Parra een 17.4 20,9 15,7 15,7
Greatest brendth of jremaxillne it
front of nates .. os 31,1 36,3 S18 311
Greatest width of premanillae “behind
TIBOR hee pea u% 28,5 BOR 26.6 27.2
Nistanee from anterior end oF ire.
maxilla to level of posterior lorder
of plerygoids ,, .. vous 142.1 181.8 162.0 141,8
Length of nares (greatest ‘niedian) ts (7.1 16,7 19.5 17.1
Breadth of nares (greatest) .. oe. 6s 14.0 19.0 15,9 16.6
Breadth aeross occipital condyles . .. a1 32.8 83.0 27.9
Breadth of right eondyle .. .. ve ve 18.5 15.2 15,1 13.9
Hright of right eondyle od 32 0 22 22.0 26.3 22.6 21.6
Length of mandible (rigiit) ta ae ore 165.0 180.6 180.1 os
Height at ecoronoid .. 4. . i, beac eds 32,8 R22 a2.4 28.2

The South Australian skull has the rostrum shorter and wider at
the base than in the three North Pacific examples but otherwise
exhibits no measurements of significance. The proportions of the
rostrum, moreover, can hardly be regarded as important, for according
to True’s cited measurements of arnuxi in the New Zealand examples
it is longer, and narrower basally, than in the Anstralian specimen,
and falls within the range of bairdi. Remington Kellogg (in Slipp
and Wilke, 1953, p. 109) writes ‘‘So far as ean be judged from the
five bairdii skulls in this Museum [U.S, National Museum], the breadth
of the rostrum at the base . . . seems to vary considerably’’.

In short, the measurements of these and other skulls of Berardius
support True’s statement (1910, p. 69) concerning the skulls of the
few specimens discussed by him ‘‘there appears to be nothing which
can be fixed upon in this small series to distinguish the two species
by dimensions alone’’,

As far as can be ascertained with the bones im situ the tympanics
and perioties resemble those figured by True (1919, pl. 35. 87, fig. 7)
for bairdi rather than Flower’s illustrations of these bones in arnuxi
from Canterbury, New Zealand.

The mandibles (pl. 6, fig. A) are relatively deeper than in the
adult female from Japan referred to bairdi, and 36 feet in length

HALE—BERARDIUS TN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 239

(Omura, Fujino and Kimura, pl. 9); also than in the female (7) of
Slipp and Wilke (1953, p. 108), 34 feet in length, in whieh the depth at
{he coronoid ig 222-923 mm., this measurement in the South Australian
example being almost 5 per cent greater, notwithstanding the smaller
size of the last named specimen, In Flower’s description (1874,
p. 221) of arnuai from New Zealand, about 30 feet in length and yet
“far from adult’? the depth at the coronoid is given as only 8.3 inches,
or about, 205 mm,

When the carcass was first seen by me at Port Lorne the postertor
o! the two pairs of teeth were in place, slightly moveable in their
sockets and with the tips projecting slightly above the gum. Accord-
ing to eyewitnesses the large anterior teeth also were loose in their
sockets and approximately an inch of the apical portion of each was
exposed and obvious, thus tempting a visitor forcibly to remove them.
Fortunately, thanks to the prompt action of the district police officer,
Constable Mahony, these teeth were recovered during the first day of
our operations,

As indieated by the measurements, the anterior-posterior length
of the front tooth of the right mandible is less than that of the left;
the right tooth had heen extracted with very little damage to the
alveolus hut the distal part of the left mandible is broken on the outer
face although its tip is intact (pl, 6, fig, A). The large teeth, when
fitted into their respective sockets, are forwardly inclined in the jaw,
althoneh less so than in the second pair; both anterior teeth have the
root completely closed, thick and rugose,

In the inumature a'nawei desevibed by Flower (1874, p, 222) the
pulp cavity in the first pair of teeth is completely closed helow, while
the tips, as in the Sonth Australian female, show little or no sign of
abrasion, These teeth in larger females (baird:) from Japan, and
35-35 feet in length, show definite apical erosion (Omura, Fujino and
Kimura, 1955, pl. 6, fig. 1-2) but those of an immature Japanese female
of about the same length as the South Australian female, are much as
in the latter,

Table 4 provides measurements, per cent of condylobasal length
of skull, of some vertebrae and the seapula of two adult females of
Berardius. Right column, bairdi from Japan, 36 feet in body length;
skull 1,421 mm, in length (Omura, Fujino and Kimura, 1955, p. 111).
Left column, ernuxi from South Australia, 29 feet in body length;
skull 1,260 mm. in length. The incorporated epiphyses are included
in the length of the centra of the vertebrae in the Australian

240 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

specimen, as presumably they must have been in the adult Japanese
female.

Table 4.
Per cent length
Measurements, of skull.

Atlas:

BrGa this cete al gi dete, ae ee ge ee AS oy, 6a THE 22.9

SIGN oer ey te wt op ee seh ep barab ek oe S6LE 21.4
Fourth cervical:

Greatest Meret. oy ge he a tee ete oe nem DE 16.3

Greatest width Jey aes gis Me eh RE ee we 3h 187 14.0

Length of centrum .. 2. we ae ck ee ee ee ee ee ee BB 2.6
Seventh cervical:

Greatest height 2. 6. 6. ek we ce ee ee ee ee ee ee 178 16.8

Greatest--W1Gth oe dese a wae be ae dence ae Us 13.2

Length: -of centrum «se cate a ire o's Hee ea oe Sees an BT 2.9
First thoracic;

Greatest height 2. 6.02. 6) ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee AD 23.2

Greatest width .. 1. 22 26 ee ae ee ce te ee oe ow 203 19.9

Length of centrum .. 6. 1. ce ee ee ee ee ee ee ee AG $4
Ninth thoracie:

Greatest height 2.06. cece ee eh ek aa te ee we ee BBS 32.5

Greatest width ©. 4. 24 ac 2. as ee ee ee ee ee ew 144 18.4

Length of centrum .. 1. 6. 2. ee ee ee ee ee ee ee) «120 11.8
First lumbar:

Greatest height .. 1100. ee as ce oe te ne oe ee oe) BE 38.4

Grantest—width: 05: jie tel ee ew wee ae ae ae BBD 38.4

Length of centrum .4 6. 6c ce ce ce ke ce ee ee ee 1K 14.4
Sixth lumbar:

Greatest height .. cu ck ae be ek ak ee ee we we ee 40 46.5

Greatest width 1... 44 ey pe ee oe ee we ee oe es) BG 38.4

Length of centrum .. 1.06. 1. ee ee ee te ee ee oe 17,8 17.0
First caudal;

Greatest. height .. .. 0.6 ce ae na oe te ee we ee oe 472 51.1

Greatest width 1. veer es un se ae ah te ee ba es BAD 46.2

Length of centrum .. .. 2. 6. ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 202 20.9
Length of seapula 2. 2k ck ee ck ee ce ee ee ee ee oe $8 44.8
Height-ofsscapula .ec1s ee can ok ae ee eel ce th ae te BIT 34.2

In the Australian female the skull is proportionally longer than in
the larger Japanese female, 14.2 as against 12.9 per cent of body length.
If the Australian skull were relatively as short as that of the Japanese
female the ratios given for the vertebrae would be about one-tenth
greater and thus in some approximately or quite equal to those for
the Japanese specimen. Minor differences in the vertebrae probably
represent only individual variation. It is known that the ratio of
skull length to body length is variable in Berardius. True (1910,
p. 67), relying on limited data, considered that arnuai has a relatively
larger skull than bairdi. On the other hand Omura, Fujino and
Kimura (1955, p. 119) note that in arnuai the posterior caudals are
smaller than in bairdi (also True, 1910, p. 72). The abbreviation of

HALE—BERARDIUS JN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 241

the candal region may be a constant character in aruai but here again
examination of further southern examples is desirable.

From descriptions and figures it is evident that the sternum of
Berardiug is subject to considerable variation, particularly anteriorly
and posteriorly. That of the South Australian specimen is composed
of five thick bones, in the first of which the anterior border, as noted
above is widely eoneave (pl. 5, fig. C).

The seapula of the Australian specimen is much more like that of
Hyperoodon planifrons (see Hale, Ree. 8. Aust. Mus., IV, 1931, fig. 18),
and of the Berardius arnuaxi iUlnustrated by Morelli in 1920, than as
shown in True’s figure (1910, pl. 33, fig. 2) of this bone in Berardius
bairdi,

CONCLUSION

With information recorded to date one cannot but accept with
some reservation the premise that the caudal fin is constantly relatively
wider, and the pectoral fin larger, in bairdi than in arnuxi, This was
suggested by True (1910, p. 67) and supported by Pike (1953, pp. 100-
102) as well as Omura, Fujino and Kimura (1945, pp. 106 and 119),
If these constitute the only differences, the validity of bairdi as a
true species would he questionable; the features of the South
Australian female alone tends to raise a doubt (see Table 1 herein),
although it would seem that Berardius, possibly because of a longer
caudal region, attains a greater adult length in the North Pacifie
than it does in southern seas. Bearmg in mind the great distanee
between the known distribution areas of arnuxi and baindi it is
reasonable to regard them as separate forms; future records of
Berardins may throw further light on the status of the two living
representatives of the genus,

REFRRENCES
Berardius arnuxi Duvernoy

Duvernoy, M, (1851); ‘*De Cetacés Vivants on Fossiles’’. Ann. des
Sci. Nat., Zool., (8), 15, pp. 52-54, pL 1.

Flower, W. H, (1874): ‘‘On the recent Ziphvid Whales, with a
description of the skeleton of Berardius arnounxi’’, Trans,
Zool. Soe., London, 8, pp. 212-234, pl. 27-29.

Haast, J. (1870); ‘‘Preliminary Notice of a Ziphid Whale, probably
Berardius arnuxvw’’. Trans. New Zeal. Inst., 2, pp. 190-
192; (also in Ann, Mag. Nat, Hist., (4), 6, pp. 348-351),

242 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Hale, Herbert M. (1939): ‘‘Rare Whales in South Australia’. 8.
Aust. Naturalist, pp. 5-6, text fig. of throat grooves,

Hamilton, J. EH. (1952): ‘‘Cetacea of the Falkland Islands’’, Comuni-
caciones Zool, del Mus. de Hist. Nat. de Montevideo, 4,
no, 66, pp. 1-6,

Hector, J, (1871): ‘‘Observations on the Ziphidae’’; (part). Trans,
New Zeal. Inst., 3, pp. 128-129, pl. 16-17.

(1878): ‘‘Notes on the Whales of the New Zealand Seas’’.

Trans. New Zeal. Inst., 10, pp. 338-339, pl. 16.

Knox, F. J. (1871): ‘‘Observations on the Ziphidae’’, Trans. New
Zeal, Inst., 3, pp. 125-128.

Marelli, C. A. (1920): ‘‘Revision osteolégica de Berardius arnouxit
Duy.’’? Anales del Mus. Hist. Nat. Buenos Aires, 30,
pp. 411-444, pl. 1-5.

Omura, H., Fujino, K., and Kimura, 8. (1955): Sci. Rep. Whales Res.
Inst., Tokyo, no. 10, pp. 100, 104-106, 112 and 119.

Pike, G. C, (1953): Journ. Mammalogy, 34, pp. 100 and 102.

Shpp, J. W., and Wilke, F. (1953): Journ. Mammalogy, 34, pp. 106
and 109.

True, F. W. (1910): Bull, 73, U.S. Nat. Mus., pp. 60 and 66-75.

Berardius bairdi Stejneger

Omura, H., Fujino, K., and Kimura, S. (1955): ‘‘Beaked Whale,
Berardius bairdi of Japan, with notes on Ziphius
cavirostris’’. Rep. Whales Res. Inst., Tokyo, No. 10,
pp. 89-122, pl. 1-9, and text fig. 1-28. (Literature cited.)

Pike, G. C. (1953): ‘*Two Records of Berardius bairdi from the coast
of British Columbia’’. Journ, Mammalogy, 34, pp. 98-104,
pl. 1. (Literature cited.)

Scheffer, V. B. and Slipp, J. W. (1948): ‘(The Whales and Dolphins
of Washington State’’, American Midland Naturalist,
39, no, 2, pp. 226-227.

Scheffer, V. B. (1949): ‘*‘Notes on three Beaked Whales from the
Aleutian Islands’’. Pacifie Science, 3, p. 353, fig. 1.

Shipp, J. W. and Wilke, F. (1953): ‘‘The Beaked Whale Berardius on

the Washington Coast’’. Journ. Mammalogy, 34, p. 105,
pl. 1-2. (Literature cited.)

HALE—BERARDIUS IN SOUTHERN AUSTRALIA 243

Stejneger, L. (1883): ‘‘Notes on the Natural History of the
Commander Islands, including descriptions of new
Cetaceans’’. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 6, p. 75.

Taylor, R. J. F. (1957): ‘‘An unusual record of three species of whale
being restricted to pools in Antarctic Sea-ice’’. Proce.
Zool. Soc., London, 129, pp. 325-331, pl. 3.

True, F. W. (1910): ‘‘An Account of the Beaked Whales of the family
Ziphiidae in the Collection of the United States National
Museum, with remarks on some specimens in other
American Museums’’, Bull. 73, U.S. Nat. Mus., pp. 60-75,
pl. 26-31.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 5 AND 6

PLATE 5,

Berardius arnuzi from South Australia. A and B, lateral and upper views of skull
(Yo nat. size). C, sternum (14 nat. size).

PLATE 6.

Berardius arnuci from South Australia. A, mandibles. B to H, vertebrae; B, cervicals;
C to F, first, eight, ninth and tenth thoracics; G, first lumbar; H, first caudal. I, scapula
(all 1% nat, size).

Rec. S.A. Muszum Vou. 14, Puare 5

No face quue 2444

Ree, S.A, Mesrcn Vou. 14, Puare 6

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT KOONAWARA,
WESTERN NEW SOUTH WALES

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records a number of rock engravings at Koonawara, north of Broken Hill in
Western New South Wales. Many of these are forms which have not been previously
described.

This record is due, in the first place to Mr. T. A. Brown, who, with others, has specialized
in photographing, in colour, some of the outstanding rock engravings on sites adjacent to
Broken Hill. Although most of these sites have already been recorded by Dow (1938, pp.
101-120), and Black (1943) in “Aboriginal Art Galleries of Western New South Wales”
none of them have been studied in any detail.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AT KOONAWARA, WESTERN
NEW SOUTH WALES

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Associate In
Erunouoey, Soura AustRALIAN Museum

Fig. 1

SUMMARY

This paper records a number of rock engravings at Koonawara,
north of Broken Hill in Western New South Wales. Many of these
are forms which have not been previously described.

This record is due, in the first place to Mr, T. A. Brown, who,
with others, has specialized in photographing, in colour, some of the
outstanding rock engravings on sites adjacent to Broken Hill.
Although most of these sites have already been recorded by Dow
(1938, pp. 101-120), and Black (1943) in ‘‘ Aboriginal Art Galleries of
Western New South Wales’? none of them have been studied in any
detail.

INTRODUCTION

Dow (1938, pp. 101-120) published a survey of the rock art of the
aborigines who had lived in the somewhat arid country of western
New South Wales. During 1943, Black published a well-illustrated
booklet ‘‘Aboriginal Art Galleries of Western New South Wales’’ in
which he lists, describes and illustrates engravings and cave paintings
from nineteen localities known in western New South Wales at the time.

Recently, as mentioned earlier, Mr. 'T. A. Brown and others have
specialized in photographing examples of rock engravings from those
sites already recorded.

TECHNIQUES OF REPRODUCTION

The methods used for producing the illustrations on fig. 1 from
Mr. Brown’s colour photographs are:—The transparencies were placed
in an enlarger and the designs, which were easily distinguished because
of the excellence of the photographs, traced with pencil on a sheet
of card.

246 RECORDS OF THE §.A, MUSEUM

The transparencies were then examined with a magnifying glass
against a strong light, and corrections made on the pencil sketch until
it was aceurate. This sketeh was then inked in and mounted. By
this method, particularly if the transparencies are of a ligh quality,
the final drawing would be ag accurate as that obtained by any other
method.

Description of Figure 1; A is a group of three designs, a large,
well-executed dancing human figure with arms outstretched; a much
smaller figure under the left arm, and a loop- like design which extends
across the legs of the larger figure, B is a human figure, with legs
turned inwards, who is wearing (probably) some ceremonial head-
dress, C is a boman figure with arms and legs ontstretehed, There
is a circle with a dot in the centre between the outstretelied legs.
The human figure at D is wearing what appears to he a tall, and
particularly elaborate head-dress. Black (1943, p, 100) and Dow
(1938, fig. 15) both illustrate rock engravings at Huriowie which
depict Iman figures wearing tall head-dresses, T is a complex,
particularly welLexecuted maze-like design which bears more than a
passing resemblance to eave paintings al Gundabooka (Black, 1943,
p. 123), and at Wiltagoona (Black, 1943, pls. 130, 131, 184, 135). There
is a line of bird tracks to the right of this design. IF is a simple, but
fully intagliated engraving ol the tracks ol an nnidentified marsupial.
The star-like desigu at G, bears some resemblance to a simple rock
engraving at Ewaninga (Mountford, 1960, fig. 6). On the left of
is a single barred circle aud to the right a line of bird tracks. The
single barred circle, although normally rare in rock engravings,
dominate a group in Mount Chambers Gorge in South Australia
reported hy Mountford (1928, pp. 247-849), J, P, and T are varying
forms of the multiple-barred circle, designs which are also present in
Panaramitee North (Mountford, 1929, p. 847-849). KK is a pair of
well-engraved human fvotprints; M, those of an enim seated on the
ground, and N, those of an emu walking, lL is a complex, but
indecipherable design. O is a representation of an emu seated on a
nest of eggs. The small black dises symbolize the eges, while the
footmurks of the seated emn are shown on either side of the nest.
A portion of the rock (shaded portion) me split off the left-hand
desivn, Spencer and Gillen (1899, No. 12, fig. 124) record a cave
painting at Ayers Rock, which eatratés an cmu sitting on a nest
of eggs which resembles the engraving at O, ( and § are roek
engravings of human figures wearing head-dresses,

Fig. 1. Rock Engravings, Koonawara, Western New South Wales.

248 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

Dow (1938, p. 119), points out that the rock engravings of the
Western Darling area depict a much wider range of designs and use
a slightly higher degree of skill than those recorded from South
Australia, which consist, in the main, of irregular circular figures, and
scattered tracks of animals and birds.

This statement is undoubtedly true and somewhat puzzling,
considering that. distances separating the two localities is less than
200 miles, and the country and climate almost identical. Yet, except
for three outstanding examples of engravings of marine creatures no
longer living in the Panaramitee area, i.e. the head of a sea-going
crocodile, at Panaramitee North (Mountford, 1927, pp. 245-248, pl. 10,
figs, 1-4); a marine turtle at Yunta (Mountford, 1928, fig. 87, p. 361),
a recent unpublished find of a salt-water fish, I have not seen, among
the many hundreds, probably thousands, of rock engravings I haye
examined in South and Central Australia, an engraving of an animal
or of a human being.

At the present moment, there is no evidence to explain the reason
for the wide difference in the designs, only future research will reveal
the reason,

ACKNOWLEDGMENT

I am indebted to Mr. T. A. Brown for lending his colour
transparencies from which J made the drawings on fig. 1.

REFERENCES
Black, Lindsay, 1943: Aboriginal Art Galleries of Western New South

Wales.

Dow, Edmund B., 1938: Aboriginal Carvings: West Darling District
of New South Wales. Mankind, 2 (5).

Mountford, C. P., 1928: Aboriginal Rock Carvings in South Australia.
Austr. Ass. Adv. Sci. Hobart.

1929: A Unique example of Aboriginal Carving at

Panaramitee North. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.
Adelaide, 51.

SOME TINGIDAE (HEMIPTERA)
IN THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

By CARLJ. DRAKE AND FLORENCE A. RUHOFF”

Summary

Through the kindness of Mr. G. F. Gross, Curator of Insects, South Australian Museum,
Adelaide, we have received a small collection of undetermined Tingidae. This collection
comprises 20 species, three of which are described as new to science. The types (holotype
and allotype) and other specimens are deposited in the above Museum. The work was
supported in part by the National Science Foundation Grant No. 18721.

Subfamily CANTACADERINAE Stal

Phatnoma uichancoi Drake, Northeast Papua, elevation 1,300-1,500 feet, Gonycentrum
tindalei Hacker, South Australia (Myponga, in moss and lichens; Coorong, 25 February
1959, in moss; Waterfall Gully, February 1959, from Berlese funnel). G. socium Drake
and Ruhoff (p1. 7, fig. 1), South Australia (Naracoorte Bog, February 1959).

SOME TINGIDAE (HEMIPTERA) IN THE SOUTH
AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

By CARL J. DRAKE ann FLORENCE A. RUHOFF

Through the kindness of Mr. G. F. Gross, Curator of Insects, South
Australian Museum, Adelaide, we have received a small collection of
undetermined Tingidae. This collection comprises 20 species, three
of which are described as new to science. The types (holotype and
allotype) and other specimens are deposited in the above Museum.
The work was supported in part by the National Science Foundation
Grant No. 18721.

Subfamily CANTACADERINAE Stal

Phatnoma wichancoi Drake, Northeast Papua, elevation 1,300-
1,500 feet. Gonycentrum tindalei Hacker, South Australia (Myponga,
in moss and lichens; Coorong, 25 February 1959, in moss; Waterfall
Gully, February 1959, from Berlese funnel). G, sociwm Drake and
Ruhoff (pl. 7, fig. 1), South Australia (Naracoorte Bog, February
1959).

Allocader nesiotes, sp, nov.
Plate 7, fig. 2

Brachypterous form. Very large, broadly obovate, reddish-brown
with costal areas, paranota, and collar mostly testaceous, head grayish-
testaceous; body beneath flavous-brown. Legs brown with tibiae
testaceous-brown. Length 9.00 mm,; width (base of pronotum)
1.10 mm., (widest part of elytra) 5.20 mm.

Head very long, greatly extended in front of eyes, surpassing apex
of second antennal segment, armed with one pair of short, thick, blunt
tubercles a little in front of vertex, deeply transversely furcated
behind eyes; bueculae very long, areolate, surpassing apex of clypeus;
antenniferous tubercles deeply excavated within, with apices slightly
curved inward. Antenna with first two segments short, not attaining
apex of clypens, last two segments absent. Rostrum extremely long,

(1) Both of Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.

250 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

reaching middle of fifth abdominal sternite. Eyes small, rounded,
slightly tuberculate, the stalk very short and rounded.

Pronotum depressed, areolate, triearinate; carinae ridgelike,
pereurrent, the lateral pair interrupted at calli; calli deep, each with
large deep pit; collar very long, two-fifths as long as pronotum;
pronotum much wider than collar, with hind margin slowly rounded,
not covering small scutellum; paranotum rather narrow, areolate not
plainly visible, reflexed wpright opposite humeral angles, resting
against surface of collar, Laminae of rostral suleus areolate, open
behind, Legs long, femora somewhat ganulate,

Klytra extremely large, very broad, cordate, widest a little in
fronf of middie, meeting in a straight commissure behind seutellum,
about width of costal area longer than abdomen; stenocostal area
narrow, uuiscriate, slightly reflexed; costal area very wide, composed
of six irregular rows of sareolae; subcostal, discoidal, claval, and
sutural areas fused, not clearly distinguishable from one another.
Metathoracie wings obsolete.

Holotype (male), Lord Howe Island, South Pacifie Ocean, east
of New South Wales, Llustrated,

Separated from 4, cordata (Hacker) and A. leai (Hacker) by the
slightly more petiolate compowmd eyes and especially by the much
narrower and more reflexed paranota, The cephalic spines (two pairs
in frout of eyes) are long in A. leat whereas they are short, tubereulate
in the other species,

Subfamily TINGINAE Laporte

Tingis drakei Hacker, Lord Howe Island; Euaulana tasmaniae
Drake, Mount Compass, South Australia, on Banksia sp.; Malandiola
semota Drake, Everard Range, South Australia; Paracopinm aus-
tralicum (Stal), Townsville, Queensland; Compseuta lefroyt Distant,
Rockhampton, Queensland; Oncophysa vesiculata wigra Hacker, Mount
Arthur, Tasmania; Iypstpyryias telamonides Kirkaldy, Woodford,
Queenslaud; Parada taeniophora (Horvath), Dorrigo, New South
Wales; Nethersia maculosa Horvath, Central District, Western Aus-
tralia; Diplocysta trilobala Drake, Nuriootpa, South Australia;
Pritingis trivirguta (Horvath), Cairns District, and Kuranda, Queens-
land; , koebeli (Drake), Myponga, South Australia; FM. aporema
Drake and Ruhoff, Myponga, Flinders Island, and Loxton, South
Australia; Stephanitis pyrioides (Seott), Lane Cove, New South
Wales, Apr, 28, 1946, on Azalea leaves.

DRAKE anp RUHOFF—TINGID BUGS 251

Cysteochila aletheia, sp, nov.

Small, oblong, testaceous with head, disc, apex of triangular
process of pronotum, most veinlets of paranota, and transverse band
near middle of elytra (including most of discoidal areas) dark to
reddish brown, Body beneath brownish with mesosternum blackish,
Antenna testaceous with first two and fourth segments dark brown,
Levys testaceous, tips of tarsi dark. Rostrum brownish-testaceous,
Hind wings clouded with fuscous, Length 2.50 mm., width (elytra)
0.92 mm.

Head very short, little produced in front of eyes, armed with two
pairs of stout, moderately long spines, hind pair appressed, front pair
porrect; eyes moderately large, reddish. Antennae fairly long, slender,
smooth, measurements: segment I, 0.10 mm.; IJ, 0,08 mm.; IT,
0.90 mm; TV, 0.54 mm. Rostrum extending to middle of mesosternum ;
laminae of suleus uniseriate, with a wide V-shaped opening at base.
Bueeulae areolate, closed in front.

Pronotum moderately convex, punctate, tricarinate; median carina
moderately raised, composed of one row of small areolae; lateral
carimae Jess raised, without distinet areolae, divergent posteriorly,
barely covered on pronotal dise by reflexed paranota; hood small,
inflated, highest near middle of erest, produced slightly forwards in
frout and extending backwards between ealli to hase of pronotal dise;
paranotum very large, reflexed so that outer margin rests on lateral
carina, Ostiole and ostiolar canal present on each metapleuron. Legs
smooth, femora slightly swollen,

Elytra with areolae neatly arranged in rows, sutural areas over-
lapping each other at rest; costal areca moderately wide, biseriate,
areolae subquadrate and hyaline; subcostal area narrower than costal
area, nearly vertical, biseriate; diseoidal areca large, about four-
sevenths as long as elyira, acutely angulate at base and apex, widest
near middle, there six aveolae deep; sutural area with areolae slightly
larger than in discoidal area,

Tlolotyne (male), Bisiatabu, Port Morseby, Papua Territory, New
Guinea, W. N, Loek; allotype (female), Monnt Lamington, northeast
Papua, New Guinea, elevation 1,300-1,500 feet, C. T. McNamara.
Paratype, 1 specimen, same label as allotype, All macropterous,

Hypsipyrgias euphues, sp, nov.

Macropterous form: Moderately large, oblong, reddish brown
with pronotal disc and head (not spines) black. Body beneath black,

252 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

slightly shiny. Antenna brown with segment IV black. Legs brown
with tips of tarsi dark, Length 3.00 mm., width (elytra) 0.68 mm.

Head very short, little produced in front of eyes, armed with five
long brownish spines, hind pair of spines appressed, frontal three
porrect. Antenna rather slender, measurements: segment I, 0.12 mm.;
HU, 0,08 mm.; IIT, 0.88 mm.; [V, 0.28 mm. Labium reaching base of
mesosternum, brown; sternal laminae of suleus brownish, low,
uniseriate, open behind. Metathoracic scent glands with ostiole and
vertical channel on each metapleuron.,

Pronotum moderately convex, punctate, tricarinate; hood large,
pyriform extending backwards slightly beyond middle of pronotal dise,
not covering lateral carinae, not produced anteriorly over base of
head, much longer than wide or high; median carina terminating
anteriorly at base of hood, uniseriate on pronotal disc, less raised and
without areolae on hind projection; lateral carina entirely exposed,
strongly constricted at base of pronotal dise, terminating in front at
calli, composed of one row of areolae on pronotal dise, without cells
on backward projection of pronotum; paranotum moderately wide,
long, reflexed almost against pronotum, triseriate, the outer row of
cells resting flatly on pronotal surface; triangular process areolate,
with a small tumid area at apex.

Hlytra constricted behind middle, sutural areas overlapping each
other in repose; costal area narrow, composed of one rew of small
areolae; subcostal area nearly vertical, composed of two rows of
quadrate areolae; discoidal area large, extending beyond middle of
elytron, acutely angulate at base, obtusely angulate at apex, widest
behind middle, there six areolae deep. Typocostal lamina uniseriate.
Exterior margins of elytra and basal margin of paranota finely serrate,

Holotype (male) and allotype (female), Lord Howe Island,
A. M, Lea, Paratypes: 2 specimens, same labels as type.

Differs from I, telamonides Kirkaldy, of Australia, by its mneh
smaller hood (not concealing lateral earinae from dorsal view) and
smaller tumid area of backward projection of pronotum.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE 7

Fig. 1. Gonyoentrum socium Drake and Rubhoff, Fig, 2, Allocader nesiotes sp. nov.

fHo, SAL Mesken Vou. 14, Puare 7

Yn saee page ate}

NEW HYLID FROG FROM THE CENTRAL HIGHLANDS
OF NEW GUINEA

By MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

In a check list of the amphibians of New Guinea Loveridge (1948) recognized thirty-five
species of the genus Hyla. Of these, H. becki, H. darlingtoni and H. angularis had been
described by the same author (1945) from specimens collected in the Central Highlands
of the Australian Trusteeship Territory. The herpetofauna of this region is very
imperfectly known, and the only other Hyla species recorded from the area are H.
angiana Boulenger and H. arfakiana Peters and Doria (Forcart, 1953).

Included in a collection from the Central Highlands, made by the writer in 1960, is a
species of Hyla considered to represent an undescribed form.

Hyla iris sp. nov.

Holotype: British Museum No. 1961.1206. A male collected at Bamna, near Nondugl
(Lat. 5° 49°S.; Long. 144° 44’ E.) at 6,500 feet, 16 April, 1960.

NEW HYLID FROG FROM THE CENTRAL HIGHLANDS OF
NEW GUINEA

By MICHAEL J. TYLER
Fig. 1

INTRODUCTION

In a check list of the amphibians of New Guinea Loveridge (1948)
recognized thirty-five species of the genus Hyla. Of these, H. becki,
I. darlingtoni and H. angularis had been described by the same author
(1945) from specimens collected in the Central Highlands of the
Australian Trusteeship Territory. The herpetofauna of this region
is very imperfectly known, and the only other Hyla species recorded
from the area are H. angiana Boulenger and HH. arfakiana Peters and
Doria (Foreart, 1953).

Included in a collection from the Central Highlands, made by the
writer in 1960, is a species of Hyla considered to represent an
undescribed form.

Hyla iris sp, nov.

Holotype: British Museum No, 1961.1206. A male collected at
Bamna, near Nondug] (Lat. 5° 49’ 8.; Long, 144° 44’ HE.) at 6,500 feet,
16 April, 1960.

A pygmy species mature at approximately 27 mm. body length,
most closely related to H. pygmaea (Meyer), but clearly distinct from
that species. The specific name of iris is derived from iris (L.):
‘‘rainbow,’? and refers to its multicoloured appearance in life,

Holotype: Vomerine teeth poorly developed, in two slightly
raised, short, oblique series, separated from each other and from the
small rounded choanae by a distance slightly greater than the length
of one of them; tongue less than half as wide as mouth opening,
almost oval, its posterior border not emarginate; snout elongated,
sharply pointed when viewed from above, concave in profile; nostrils
more lateral than superior, prominent, their distance from end of
snout about three-quarters that from eye, separated from each other
by an interval equal to about one and one-half their distance from eye,
Canthus rostralis ronnded and depressed; loreal region concave and

254 RECORDS OF THE $,A. MUSEUM

oblique. Eye large, its diameter almost one and one-half times its
distance from nostril; interorbital distance one and one-half times
the width of upper eyelid. Tympanum very distinet, about two-fifths
the diameter of eye, separated from eye by a distance half its own
diameter.

First finger webbed at base, second, third and fourth by loose fold
to dise, consisting of broad fringe beyond sub-artienlar tubercle of
third; dise of third covers tympanic area; second, third and fifth toes
webbed to dises, the web on first and fourth toes reaching subarticular
tubercles at base of penultimate phalanges, continuing to dise ag lringe
covering abort one third the tympanic area; a distinct oval immer but
no outer metatarsal tubercle; 10 tarsal ridge; no dermal appendage
on heel. Body clongate, in post-axillary region two-thirds the greatest
width of head; when hind limh is adpressed, heel reaches nostril; when
limbs are laid along the vides, knee and elbow do not overlap; when
hind limbs are beni at right angles to body, heels overlap slightly,
Skin of upper parts deeply etched, skin of throat and thorax slightly
granular, abdomen and posterior surface of thighs coarsely pustulose,
Skin of head not eo-ossified with skull, roof of skull not exostosed,
Vocal sac apparently internal with paired openmgs in floor of month
at base of tongue; nuptial pad on first finger,

Dimensions: Snouwt-vent length 28.4 mm.; head length 9,0 mm,;
head width 8.6 mm,; femur 14.4 mm.; tibia 15.4 mm.; foot 11.5 mm.:
hand 8.3 mm.

Colour in aluahal: Dorsal surface of head, body and limbs dark
slate blue; tip of urostvle cream; side of head similar to dorsal surface
with short cream stripe extending from angle of jaw to helow
tympanum; elbows cream; lateral surface of body with large, oval
white patehes; axilla black, groin dull violet, Throat and thorax white,
colour ef abdomen determined by viseeva seen in transpareney;
posterior surfaee of thighs violet inferiorly, cream on blue-black
superiorly, Palmar and plantar surfaces cream; first and second
fingers cream above, third and fourth toes lightly pigmented blue-black.

Colow" in life: Dorsal surface of head, body and forelimbs pale
green lightly stippled with black; tip of urostyle cream; side of head
pale green with pale yellow stripe from angle of jaw to below
tympanum; elbows pale yellow; Jateral surface of hody deep violet
with oval white patches; axilla black; groin violet, variegated with
pale sky blne, Throat, thorax and lower snrfaeu of limbs pure white;
ahdomen pale cream; posterior surface of thighs green variegated with

TYLER—HYLID FROG FROM NEW GUINEA 255

vivid orange, Palmar and plantar surfaces pale yellow; first and
second fingers white, third, fourth and toes green barred with yellow.

Variation: Paratypes: 212 ¢ 42 21 juvenile—Australian Museum
Nos. R.16832-16836; British Museum Nos, 1961.1207-1226,

All but one of the paratypes were collected at the type locality
during the interval between 16th and 24th April 1960, The exception
(B.M, 19611226) was collected at 9,500ft, on the Wahgi-Sepik Divide
north of Banz (approximately eight miles west of the type locality),
on 20th May, 1960.

Body length: 27.5-80.7 mm,@ 6; 344-88.0 mm.? 9%; 154 mm.
juvenile,

As is indicated by the body lengths, the paratypes form two
sexually homogeneous groups. The hind limbs of the females are
relatively shorter than those of the males, reaching the eye, or between
the eye and the nostril, as opposed to reaching the nostrils in males.
This is demonstrated by the tibia length/snout-vent length ratios:

Females .. .. ., Range: .526-.587 Mean: ,d52
Males . ,, ., .. Range: .503-.551 Mean: .526
Juvenile ., .. .. 442

Vomerine teeth are poorly developed in the entire series, and
absent in the juvenile, The degree of webbing of the fingers and toes
of the paratypes is similar to that of the holotype. Vocal sacs and
nuptial pads are present in all male paratypes. The latter are rugose
and pigmetted in sixteen specimens, hut raised yet unpigmented in
four, A typical example (B.M. 19611215) of a nuptial pad is
Ulustrated in fig. 1,

The variation of colour of adults in life was restricted to the
dorsal surface of the head and body, where the pale green was
frequently blotched with black. In alcohol this has resulted in a
restriction of the slate coloured markings to occasional patches.

The eolour in life of the juvenile was, dorsally a uniform dark
preen; side of head similar with bright cream pateh behind eye.
Lateral and ventral surfaces of body bright cream. Limbs orange
above and at sides, except humerus which was bright yellow.

Comparison with other species: The small size of H. iris is shared
by relatively few of the New Guinea representatives of this genus.
Hyla wolterstorfi Werner was described from a specimen with a body
length of 23 mm., but this species has unwebbed fingers, and bears no
resemblance to H. iris. H. becki was found in the same region as
H. iris, and is quite distinct from it.

256 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

When specimens of H. iris are checked against the key to New
Guinea Hyla prepared by van Kampen (1923), they run down to
H, fallax Boulenger (listed as a synonym of H. pygmaea (Meyer) by
Loveridge (1948)). A direct comparison with specimens in the British
Museum collection (B.M. 1913.11.1.152-153) has been made, and
affinities with this species appear closer than with any other.

Fig. 1. Nuptial pad of Hyla tris
paratype (B.M. 1961.1215).

Hyla pygmaea, as represented by the British Museum specimens,
may be clearly distinguished from H. iris by a comparison of the
vomerine teeth and choanae. The latter are rounded in H. iris and
oval in H. pygmaea. The vomerine teeth of iris are poorly developed
and separated from each other and from the choanae by a distance
greater than the length of one series, as opposed to well developed,
and one-third of their length and twice their length respectively. Hyla

TYLER—HYLID FROG FROM NEW GUINEA 257

pygmaea has a relatively larger head, and the dorsal surface of the
head and body is usually pale brown with large white markings upon
it, as opposed to green with black stippling or patches.

LIST OF REFERENCES

Foreart, L., 1953: Verh. Naturf. Ges. Basel, 64 (1): 58-68.

Kampen, P. N., 1923: Amphibians of the Indo-Australian Archipelago,
K. J. Brill Ltd., Leiden, pp. 304.

Loveridge, A., 1945: Proc. biol. Soc. Washington, 58: 53-58.
1948: Bull. Mus. comp. Zool., Harvard, 101 (2): 305-430.

GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE KAIADILT PEOPLE
OF BENTINCK ISLAND, QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND
ACTING DIRECTOR, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper gives an account of the native geography of Bentinck Island and vicinity, the
home of the Kaiadilt, an isolated Australian aboriginal tribe of eight hordes. There is a
map showing the place names and general configuration of their country.

The Kaiadilt remained aloof from direct European associations until the period between
1945 and 1948 when an extraordinary series of natural events, including drought and a
tidal wave combined with quarrels and many accidental drownings caused a major
decline in population. The people were taken to Mornington Island where they now live
in a small endogamous community among people of the Lardiil tribe.

GEOGRAPHICAL KNOWLEDGE OF THE KAIADILT PEOPLE
OF BENTINCK ISLAND, QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or ANTHROPOLOGY AND
Actinec Director, Soura AvustraLIAn Museum

Plates 8-9, text fig. 1 and Map A

CONTENTS
Page
Sati. spe pgs tee eo de nl wl te 4 AL BOG
Introduction .. .. .. malate veyed, “BOO
Discovery of Bentinck idiand . isalgen eal gl AGEL,
Contacts with Bentinck Talandees dh ng 4 265
Official and non-official names applied in the
Bentinck Island group .. .. . . 271
Aboriginal Nomenclature of Bentinck Island
find “vicinity ase. eed ete be ear sea BFR
Native traditions of contacts .. .. ...... .. 278
Olimateé +5. 4 wea. 4 . eden yp 22t8
Descriptions of areas visited, or aptieed « .. 280
The tidal wave of February, 1948 ., .. .. .. 292
Acknowledgments .. .. .. 5... +) ee ee ee 294
References cited... .. . nd te © -298
Description of Plates and Map he eve He "296
SUMMARY

This paper gives an account of the native geography of Bentinck
Island and vicinity, the home of the Kaiadilt, an isolated Australian
aboriginal tribe of eight hordes. There is a map showing the place
names and general configuration of their country.

260 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

population, The people were taken to Mornington Island where they
now live in a small endogamous community among people of the
Lardiil tribe,

These people otherwise are of interest because of their special
physical characters and because they have retained until now
knowledge of the manufacture and use of simple stone tools of a
predominantly biface palaeolithie tradition which did not survive
elsewhere info modern times except among the Lardiil people of
Mornington Island, althongh found along the coast of N.W, Australia
us archaeological relics,

There is a summary of the history of early contacts and a general
description of the geography of parts of the island visited by the
author during May 1960 in company with D. L, Belcher, P. Aitken,
Cully Peters and some twenty Kaiadilt helpers.

INTRODUCTION

This paper gives a brief outline of the geographical knowledge
of the very isolated people of Bentinck Island, Queensland, and some
account of the history of vontaets between them and members of the
Western world up to the time of their removal to Mornington Island
im 1947-48, There is a summarized account of the physical surronnd-
ings of the island. Some details are given of the native nomenclature
of their various camping places and of those geographical features
in their country which they regard as important.

The island is of particular interest to anthropologists because of
the isolation of these people and {o historians because it was one of
the first parts of the Gulf of Carpentaria examined in detail by
Matthew Flinders in 1802; he met North Australian aborigines face to
Yace in this vieinity for the first time. Following his brief encounter
these aborigines, who today eall themselves Kaiadilt [‘Kaiadil,
‘Kaijardil, “Kaiadilt], remained isolated and away from Western
contacts for another 145 years, fo become the very last tribal group of
coastal Australian aborigines to meet the civilized world,

To anthropologists they are physically of special interest because
they are unique in Australia in possessing a high incidence of B blood,
anil culturally for their continued use of some very simple forms of
Palaeolithic stone tools, of types which haye long fallen out of use in
the rest of the world. Details of their anthropology, blood genetics
and population statisties are the subjects of separate papers in
preparation and in press (Tindale 1962; Simmons, Tindale and
Birdsell in press).

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 261

Transcriptions of geographical names within the text of this paper
conform to the conventions of spelling called ‘‘Geographie IL’, the
ofticially aceepted method, Where greater accuracy of transeription
of some Kaiadilt words is desirable, a version within square brackets
has been given in the xcript of the International Phonetic Alphabet,
as adapted for Australian languages, and conveniently set out in the
Transactions of the Royal Society of South Australia, 64, 1940, at
p. 147. For publishing economy black letter and italic type are used
for the differentiation of some vowel sounds and consonants, In the
accompanying map, letters with a vertical stroke beneath them corres-
pond to those shown in black letters herein; those with a dot beneath
them are indicated in the body of this paper by italics. Tt will be
noticed that in the 1940 list the symbols @ and 3 were accidentally
transposed in the table, @ is of course the unvoiced, and 6 the
voieed th sound, The symbols have been correctly used in all published
texts given in the seript.

In the Kaiadilt language @ vecurs only rarely, as in the word
(‘ra:té] which means south, A very strongly rolled 1 is present
but not universally used; when it appears iu a word the terminal
vowel usually disappears.

DISCOVERY OF BENTINCK ISLAND

Supposedly earliest observations made in the vicinity of Bentinck
Island were by Jan Carstensz, commander of the ship Pera in 1623,
who sailed along the Cape York coast of the Gull! of Carpentaria as
far south as Staaten River. As quoted by Flinders (1814 p, xi) ‘‘in
this discovery were found, everywhere, shallow water and barren
coasts: islands altogether thinly peopled by divers ernel, poor and
brutal nations’, The Gulf of Carpentaria itself was named after
Picter de Carpentier, Governor-General of the Dutch East Indies from
1622-1628, The name of the Gulf was not used in instructions
given to Abel Tasman for lis second voyage in Iti44, He is thought
to have followed the coast of the Gulf and to have furnished data for
Thevenot’s chart of 1663, but his journals seemingly have not snrvived.

Malayan fishermen probably ventured as far as these islands long
before Flinders’ visit and the presence of planted tamarind trees,
first noticed in the 1880's suggests they had camped on Fowler Island
during visits to fish for trepang and other marine products.

Flinders (1814 p, 147) reported traces of what he interpreted as
the presence of strangers on Sweers Island in the form of seven human

£.

262 RECORDS OF THE &.A, MUSEUM

skulls, He saw many hones lying together near three extinguished
fires and elsewhere a squared piece of timber, seven feet long, which
was of teak wood and considered to have heen a quarter-deck carling
of a ship. The last named was thrown up on the western beach. On
Bentinck Island he saw stumps of at least twenty trees which had been
felled with an axe, or some sharp instrument of iron, and not far
from the same place were scattered ihe remains of an earthen jar.
He inferred that a ship from the East Indies had been wrecked within
the previous two or three years, part of the erew had been killed and
others might have gone elsewhere upon rafts constructed after the
manner of the natives.

Sweers Island, the eastern-most of the Bentinck Island group was
the first high ground in the Gulf of Carpentaria seen by Flinders.
He describes his first anchorage at the southern end of the island but
makes no reference to a low roundéd island known to present day
Kaiadilt aborigines as Dingkari [‘Dinkari], This islet lies due south
of Bardatur [’Bardatur], Dingkari is stated to be a uesting place for
gannets and on our visit they were seen flying there. Between it and
Sweers Island is a reef called Karandjalt [‘Karandjalt].

ilinders anchored off Bardatur and on 17 November 1802 landed
on the beach called Tjilki [/Tji:Iki] making his way to Inspection Hill,
a limestone elevation 104 feet high, from which he had his first
extensive view of the island group. This hill is the Durakara
[‘Du:rakar, Dus:rakara] of fhe Kaiadilt; the name is applied
specifically to the supposedly never-failing spring which oozes from
rocks at the eastern base of the hill and trickles into the sea at low
tide from small rock pools. This water is quite fresh.

Flinders found safe anchorage off the western point of Sweers
Island, known to present day natives as Milt [’Milt], and after
exploring to the west spent several weeks repairing his ship.

He deseribed his one close encounter with the aborigines, near
Allen Island on the 20th November 1802, in the following passages.
‘tT. went eastward to a smaller island, two miles off, where several
Indians were perceived, The water was too shallow for the boat to
get near them; but we landed at a little distance, and walked after
three men who were dragging six small rafts toward the extreme
northern rocks, where three other natives were sitting.

“These men not choosing to abandon their rafts, an interview
was unavoidable, and they came on shore with their spears to await
our approach, One of us advaneed towards them, unarmed; and signa
heing made to lay down their spears, which was understood to mean

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 263

that they should sit down, they complied; and by degrees a friendly
intercourse was established . , . The rafts consisted of several
straight branches of mangrove, very much dried, and lashed together
in two places with the largest ends one way, so as to form a broad
part, and the smaller ends closing to a point. Near the broad end was
a buneh of grass, where the man sits to paddle, but the raft, with his
weight above, must swim very deep; and also I should scarcely have
supposed it could float a man at all, Upon one of the rafts was a
short net, which from the size of the meshes was probably intended
to catch turtle; upon another was a young shark; and these, with their
paddles and spears seemed to constitute the whole of their earthly
riches . . ..

‘“‘Atter being five minutes with them, the old men proposed to go
fo our boat; and this being: agreed to, we proceeded together, hand in
hand. But they stopped half way, and retreating a little, the oldest.
made a short harangue Which concluded with the word jahree!
pronounced with emphasis; they then returned to the rafts, and
drageed them towards their three companions, who were sitting on
the furthest rocks. These I judged to be women, and that the proposal
of the men to go to ow boat was a feint to get us further from them;
it did not seem, however, that the women were so much afraid of us,
as the men uppeared to be on their account; for although we walked
back, past the rafts much nearer than before, they remained very
quietly picking oysters, It was not my desire to annoy these poor
people; and therefore leaving them to their own way we took an
opposite direetion to examine the island.’’

The rafts, shell water vessels, fish nets, and fillets deserihed by
Flinders are still in use.

In addition to the six natives on Horse-shoe Islaud, natives were
repeatedly seen both on Sweers and Bentinck Islands and one of his
officers found a small hole containing a little muddy water with a shell
lying near it. his was dug out to become the well near Milt which
las remained in use up tu the present time.

The natives were elusive, Fireplaces were found under trees
and one instance a large hole was found to contain two “apartments”’
in each of which a man might lie down, Flinders considered these
‘Seaves'’ to be their foul-weather residenees and the fireplaces under
the shade of the trees, with dried grass spread around, their fine-
weather caimps. The earth of dry swamps was found to be so dug
up with pointed sticks that it resembled the work of a herd of swine.
He interred that they obtained a ‘‘lfern or similar root’? from the mud.

264 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The next available account of Bentinck Island commences on
8 July 1841. Captain J. L. Stokes, while sailing into Investigator
Road, observed a party of twelve natives under ‘‘Mount Inspection’’
at the south-eastern extremity of Sweers Island. ‘They gazed at his
vessel without demonstration as it passed. Preswnably they were
congregated near the spring called Durakara at the eastern base of
the hill. Aborigines were subsequently heard, uttering a ery like
‘‘eooey’’, but they did not show themselves again. He found the well
dug by Flinders half a mile east of Milt, to which he gave the name
Point Inscription, adding the name of his ship, the Beagle, to a tree
inscribed by Flinders, and sent his officers to examine the coast of
Bentinck Island, WKarnkai [/Karu’ka:i], the eastern extremity, he
named as Raft Point, from having noticed native eraft there. On
Sweers Island he found exposed a native skull with forearm, left tibia
and part of a maxilla, Modern Kaiadilt custom is to bury those who die
natural deaths, leaving exposed bodies of any killed in combat and
those remaining nyuavenged, Stokes gave the name of Fowler Island
to Baltae [‘Baltae, ‘Ba :tae], noting its reefs and a mangrove fringe on
the south side, now a dense forest of black mangroves. In his deserip-
tion he states that this islet forms the ‘‘immediate eastern side of the
Road’’; evidently this is a slip of the pen for ‘‘western gide’’.

A Mr. Forsyth was sent to explore the islands of the Wellesley
Group, He reported that after leaving Allen Island he had seen
some natives on the iroustone eliff at the south-eastern extremity, that
which is ealled Modomodor [*Modomodor] by the present day Kaiadilt;
the name appearing on modern official maps is Point Creffild, Other
data recorded about the Group was the taking of 151 quail, 3 plover,
20 pigeons, 3 ‘*pheasants’’, 8 white and 2 black cockatoos and 5
spurwing plover, all recognizable as species of birds seen in 1960. He
noted clouds of ‘‘locusts’? forming a complete curtain over Sweers
Island, They diminished in numbers after a few days, Two species
of large grasshoppers were abundant, bat not in plague numbers,
during our visit in 1960; one of them is used as food by the aborigines,

From his observations it may be assumed that three separate
groups of aborigines were present on Bentinck, Sweers and Allen
Islands, in July 1841.

These were the same three areas in which aborigines were noted
hy Mlinders in 1802.

On 381 December 1861 a naval vessel, H.M.C.S, Vietoria visited
Sweers Island and James Frost, a gunner, who had been accidentally

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK [ISLAND 265

killed by the discharge of a gun, was buried there in a grave still
marked by a headstone.

In 1865, shortly after the founding of Burketown, an epidemic of
sickness caused a general evacuation to a temporary settlement on
Sweers Island. The Gulf country was gradually abandoned again in
the following three years, but some residents remained, Nothing is
known about the relationships between these settlers and the
aborigines; it is probable that there was no contact.

On 4 February 1874 Donald McLennan, who died at the age of
46 years, was buried beside the grave of James Frost. The nature
of his association with Sweers Island is unknown,

Tn 1880 Captain Pennefather furnished a report to the Queensland
Government on exploration in the Gull of Carpentaria. He landed
on Sweers Island on 15th September 1880 and found it to be oceupied,
and overstocked, with 1,200 head of cattle, sheep and goats. There
were two coconut trees, guavas, dates and tamarinds. There were
only ruins remaining of William Landsborough’s ‘‘once thriving town
of Carnarvon’’, Of the adjoiming island he says, ‘‘ Visited Bentinck
Island, which is fairly grassed, and timbered with stunted bloodwood,
Moreton Bay Ash, fig trees, ate, Saw a large mob of natives, who did
not allow us to approach them. On the south side of the island there
is a freshwater lake. Bentinck is about ten miles long by five or six
miles wide, On Fowler Island (a small island between Bentinck and
Sweers) tamarinds, supposed to have heen planted by the early Dutch
navigators, are growing and bearing Inuxuriantly”’

The reference to the freshwater lake indicates he visited Njinjilki,
and the elusiveness of the aborigines is in keeping with their earlier
and their later behaviour. From his account it seems likely that up
to the end of the 19th century no very close contacts, other than the
initial brief one by Flinders, had been tnade with Bentinck Islanders.

CONTACTS WITH BENTINCK ISLANDERS.

First 20th century contact was in June, 1901, when Dr. Walter
Roth, Protector of Aborigines for North Queensland, with a party
of native police, accompanied by John Frederick Bailey, then Director
of the Botanic Gardens, Brishane (later of Adelaide), and Charles
Yedley, Zoologist of the Australian Museum, Sydney, landed on the
island.

266 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The visit is not well documented, Search has failed to trace
reports; there are entries in official letter books but the letters them-
selves have disappeared, Diaries appear not to have survived, either
in Australia or in British Guiana, where Dr. Roth died.

Roth (1906, Bulletin 6, p. 28 and 8, p. 6) speaks briefly of three
visits to Bentinck Island, saying that on only one visit was he able
to come into ‘direet touch’? with the aborigines owing to their
timidity. He ‘met’? a group of young girls, six or more, under
guard of a very old man but was not able to learn anything for lack
of acommon tongue, Among the party, on what presimably was this
occasion, was Ned Seott, who gave MacIntyre (1921, unpublished
manuseript in Mitchell Library, Sydney) an eyeavitness account :—

“Dr. Roth... tried to corner a lot of them on Bentinck
but after being pushed up to one end of the island by a drive
they took to the reefs right out at sea, and he [Scott] was sent
in the boat around them to lmut them ashore, he did so but in
the landing charge Roth and party only canght one or two old
gins and could not do much with them, they were livid with
fear and howled like a dog."

Bailey took a series of photographs of which newatives, labelled
Bentinck Island 1901’, have survived. There also are a few
speciinens in the Brishane Herbarium eollected by J. F. Bailey and
labelled ‘*Bentinek Island, June, 1901’,

Plate 8, fig. 1 and 2 show some excited aborigines who were seen
on this oeeasion, The encounter appears to have taken place near
Kaurukai (Raft Point) the south-eastern extremity of the island and
the untives describe how their parents attempted to conveal themselves
under debris, standing up to their neeks in water on the outermost
edges of the reef,

The aborigines themselves have traditions of a later hostile attack
with guns by a white party, prohably about 1918, bnt of this no official
documentary record exists.

The name of a white man, MacKenzie, whose first name is believed
to hiave been John, appears in association with Bentinck and Sweers
Islands during the seeond decade of this century when he was the
builder of a lime kiln on Sweers Island. Mrs, R. H. Wilson, wife of
the early missionary at Mornington Island has recollections of a
pliysically big man, an elderly rugged individual, whom she first met
about 1923, Tle was then about 60 years of age. MacKenzie became
skipper of the auxiliary ketch Mayra trading between Burketown and

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 267

Boroloola. According to Mission reeords Maura first visited
Mornington Island on 6 August 1922,

It is possible that MacKenzie accompanied Dr. Roth on the 1901
visit 10 Bentinck Island for he is thought to be the one who gave
Mrs. Wilson a print from one of the Bailey photographs; if is
endorsed ‘*Bentinek Isd., June 1901", helping to confirm the date of
Roth’s visit.

About 1914 MaeKenzie had attempted to settle on the south coast
of Bentinek Tsland and built a hut near Kombali ["Kombali]. He
could inake no Iriendly contaets with the aborigines, and well before
1917 Lad abandoned the hut, transferring his activities to Sweers
Island where he also built a house, kept goats and horses, and
eoustrueted the lime kiln by mining a chimney hole into the western
side of Inspection Till. His unauthorized attempt to settle on Bentinck
is referred to as a past event in official reports written in 1917. He
continned to barn and sell lime in Gulf ports until 1922. No friendly
contacts were made with Bentinek Islanders. He employed two Lardiil
aborivines from Mornington Island for a short time. One of them,
“Old William", has described his unhappy experience of lime handling
on a diet of goats’ heads and Tivers, and told of their return to
Mornington Island in August, 1920 after escaping to the northern end
of Sweers (sland and signalling to the passing Mission vessel, the,
Morning Stur, At that time MacKenzie had as helpers one white man,
a Normanton blackfellow, a half-caste named Roger Thompson, and
three Malay/Aboriginal half-easte brothers whose family name was
Samardin. A white man named Nelson was his partner for some time.

After MacKenzie abandoned Sweers Island the Bentinck Islanders
made returu visits to it, One youth, Tarurukingati [/Tarurukiyati]
was given the totemic name of Tungalngomoro [’Tuyalyo’moro] said
to be a name they bad applied to a ‘tblaeck goat'' abandoned by
MueKenzie, Stories are told also of efforts to hunt down and spear
the last of MacKenzio’s abandoned horses, Horses teeth said to be those
of this animal were picked up and given to us in 1960, Much debris
of European occupation was left on Sweers Island both by the earlier
abortive settlements commencing in the 1860’s and by MaeKenzie, but
the aborigines seem never to have made use of any of the material,
unless several well-worn nether millstones, of dark basaltic rock,
present at Minakuri, originated from ballast dropped from some ship.

Systematic efforts by Mornington Island Mission officers to come
into contact with Bentinck Islanders first began in October 1925 when

268 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

gifts for Bentinek Islanders were left on the beach while on a voyage
to the mainland. According to present day Islanders these gifts were
not appreciated; the tobaceo being particularly repugnant; it and the
food were buried; a matter now of much amusement to them, In
September 1926 Mornington Islanders began working off-shore reefs
around Bentinek Island for beche-de-mer, then an important article
of trade with China, and a sonree of Mornington Island Mission
revenue, Gully Peters, a leading Mornington Islander, then a young
man, sheceeded ti coming elose to an old woman on a reef and
attempted a couversation. Baltae (Fowler Island) beeame a base
camp for trepang curing operations, On several oceasions during the
first season aborigiues were seen in the distance on the main island,
opposite this camp. Tn sore published Mission reports the name of
Sweers Island is used as name for this base, an error of identification.
All such activities were in fact centred on Fowler Island, as con-
firmed in a recent letter from Cora, half-caste wife of Gully Peters.

Prior to 1927 the Lardiil had not met any Kaiadilt people at close
quarters, Late in that year, a message indicating that a friendly
contact had heen achieved, was sent by Gully to the Mission
Superintendent, Mr, R, H. Wilson, who made a visit and saw several
mien ‘together with some very young women”, They were ‘execeed-
ingly timid’, Photograplis of this or (he next occasion are available.
For copies of these | am indebted to lis son the Rey, Andrew R.
Wilson, of Brishane, Plate 9, fig. 1, of which the original is rather
faded, depicts thirteen natives hurrying away from the camera. The
print is one that had been slightly retonehed to disgnise the nudity
of the people.

A second contact was made in late 1927; meetings with 48 persons
(12 men, 16 women and 20 children) are mentioned in reports dated
5 February, 1928. Mrs, Wilson was present on the second visit and
was taken into the bush on the main island where she saw and was
photographed with women and children (plate 9 fig. 2), Shortly
afterwards relationships with Bentinck Islanders deteriorated, They
began to steal and to prevent hostilities, heche-de-mer operations were
suspended, They were never resumed becatise a drastic fall in the
market price for that product destroyed the industry.

The late Mr. J. Bleakley, Chief Proteetor of Aboriginals in
Queensland, in a hook jnst published, states that he made several
official visits to Bentinck Island. On the first, in 1915, he saw light
flares carried by people fishing by night on reels, but made no cuntact-
On a second official visit, made apparently as a result of Rev, Wilson’s

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 269

first encounter m 1927, he briefly inet some natives face to face. The
photograph on plate 9, fig. 2, probably was taken on this occasion,
The people were very timid.

In 1987 Bleakley made a fnrther landing with a party of Govern-
ment Ministers and was met by the same short-statnred old man whom
le had seen ou his earlier visit. In his book (Bleakley, 1961), he
refers to reports ‘that skeletons had been found with what appeared
to be bullet holes in them’. THe leaves conjectnre open as to the
perpetrators of any out ‘age.

In late 1940 while on a jonrney to Burketown in a Mission dinghy,
Mornington Islanders landed on the northern end of Allen Island, and
one of them, ‘*Cripple Jack’', was killed by members principally of
the west-most horde or dolnoro, the X dolnoro of the map, These
Bentinek Islanders had gone to Allen Island by ralt to escape friction
on Bentinck Island; some had been drowned while making the journey.
Police seized the offenders and after trial, members of this temporary
Allen Island community, numbering eleven in all, were taken to
Auruknn Mission on the eastern coast of the Gulf where they remained
until 1953. This was the first direct alteration imposed on the Bentinck
Island population,

Tu October 1943, a Royal Australian Air Force party in a launch
were anchored off Milt (Inseription Point), Sweers Island, dining a
gale, They were attacked by a party of Islanders who threw spears;
in warding them off one native (named Kongarangati dawart) was
killed. After some months, when a visit of enquiry was made the
hody of this native was found as left, and buried. Several wary
Bentinck Island men were seen and spoken to at a distance.

In early June 1945 Gully Peters who had been for so long a
leader in attempting to make contact with the Kaiadilt and had been
present on the launch during the attaek at Milt, took the Mission
launch Albinia to the western end of Bentinck Island. He had a
friendly meeting with the Bentinek Islanders and on 6th June returned
to Mornington Island with 29 persons aboard. These people were of
more than one western dolnoro, including six men, four hoys,
thirteen woinen and six children, A month later, after seeing life on
a Mission Station, these people were taken back to Bentinck (sland,

In September and October 1946 drought conditions prevailed in
(he area. Brief contacts were made with Bentinck Islanders while
searches were being made for the Albinia which had disappeared in

270 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

a storm, with all hands. At first it was thought the Islanders had
been responsible for her losa.

On 10 June 1947 a young Bentinck Island male, two women and a
hoy and girl were found in distress on Allen Island, remnants of a
party which had fled from Bentinck Island after a fight. They were
suffering from a shortage of water and were removed to the Mission.

Qn 28 Angust, 1947, Mission Superintendent J. B. MeCarthy
found 42 men, women and children on Sweets Island and took them
1o the Mission. They were in poor condition becanse of the drought.
Dr. J, A, Spalding examined these people in December 1947 and also
visited Bentinek Lsloid, himself suffering shipwreck during the return
voyage, THe noted the presence of some edible herries, fruits, roots
and grasses on the banks of the Markaruki river, Ten of seventeen
children examimed Inv him showed some degree of malnutrition. TTe
noted that smears were negative but that symptoms of ‘chronic lung
infections ? tuberculosis’? were present, mainly among women, Hook-
worm was absent. He concluded that the Bentinek Islanders were
rapidly dying out and aseribed their decline to ‘‘(1) tribal warfare,
(2) disease, mainly tuberculosis (?) and dysentery and (3) malnutri-
tion amoung the young.’

The aborigines still remaining on Bentinck Island in February
1948 suffered the effects of un extraordinary high tide or tidal wave,
described elsewhere in this paper. This appeared to be a cuhninating
event in the deterioration of the homeland of the Kaiadilt,

Dronght conditions continued in the Gwf of Carpentaria during
1948 and heeanse of the tidal wave the main coastal waterholes on
Mornington Island were salty, Alarm was expressed at the possible
fate of the remaining population of Bentinck Tslanders and smoke
signals seen were iiterpreted as being distress calls, A police party
in the lannch Marlin therefore went to the island on 16th October
1948, According to a report by Missioner McCarthy they found pot
holes dug along the beach, all of them dry; the usual camps were
deserted; one hole at the eastern end of Dalwai [/Dalwai:] (Albinia
Island) still contained water. Tracks were found on the south eoast at
*MaeKenzie Creek’. The whole of the area around the waterhole
had heen burned off and looked as if it had been ploughed, ‘‘probably
by the women, digging with sticks for roots’. he aboriginal
explanation, given in 1960 was that water-bearing frogs had been
sought in the swampy soil. Sixteen persons were found and taken
to Mornington Island; three people still remained on the island. The

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 271

latter were picked up during a second visit on 21st October 1948, thus
bringing to a close the occupation of the island.

McCarthy's notes, written at the time, state that ‘‘Bentinck [sland
is in an appalling condition. There is no drinkable water im the
north of the island and this has foreed [the] remaining population to
come together, probably for their betterment, as they had evidently
hunted together and this would have assisted them very much. The
physical condition of the men and women is not as bad as that of the
people brought over in 1947 but the children are in yery bad shape,
T think my figures are correct when I estimate that there have been
ten deaths among women and children and only two births since my
visit in December 1947,"’

Sinee 1948 the Kaiadilt have lived in a small closed community
near the Mission on Mornington Island. Here they have built their
own fish traps and have learned to speak a little English. They have
not married out of their community. During the visit of the author in
1960 they were studied and genealogical and other information
obtained about them; the basis of several planned papers. Some of
{he information so gathered is the subject of a separate study on the
population dynamies of Bentinek Islanders which follows this paper
in these Records.

OFFICIAL AND NON-OFFICIAL NAMES APPLIED IN THE
BENTINCK ISLAND GROUP

Very few official names lave been proposed for features in this
obseure group of islands, Nomenclators principally were Flinders,
and Stokes, whose few proposals are noted on the map and in this
text, together with their aboriginal equivalents. Some unofficial
Kuropean names have been applied to features around Bentinck
Island by crews of local vessels, by Mornington Island mission officials
and by Lardiil aborigines; none of these local names appear on
available official maps. The Bentinck Islanders own names are given
first in the following list:—

Neataiwind [ata’izwind|—Donglas Island, named after a
member of the family of the early missionary, the Rey, R. H.
Wilson.

Kandingarnpai [Kandi‘njarv’pai;|—Bessie Island, after a daughter
of R. AH. Wilson,

Nm
Nm

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dorati [‘Dorati]—Margaret Island, after another daughter. In
later reports this beeame McCarthy Island, but Rev, Andrew
R. Wilson in a letter dated January, 1961, calls this a
‘*ying-in’?,

Dalwai [’Dalwai:|—Albinia Island, after one of several small
vessels of this name successively used by Mornington Island
Mission.

Minakuri [’Minakuri|—Raft Point, also given as Raff Point in
one report by J. B. MeCarthy; not to be confused with the
Raft Point of Stokes (1846) which is at the opposite or eastern
end of the island.

Walpukoanki ["Walpu’koanki]—Kirk Point, also written as Kirke
Point; so named by Mornington Island natives after a white
employee of the Mission who walked to the Point from
Minakuri while on a journey between Burketown and
Mornington Island.

Baltae [’Baltae, ‘Ba:tai:, ‘Batae]—Hall Island; named after
R. Hall, pioneer of Mornington Island Mission who once
landed there prior to his murder near the Mission by Lardiil
natives on 19 October 1917. Baltae is the Fowler Island of
Stokes.

Dawalt [’Dawalt]|—Wilson Bay; the bay between Baltae Island
and Njinjilki where Rev. R. H. Wilson made his first brief
contact with Bentinek Islanders, late in 1927.

Kombali [“Kombali]—MacKenzie Creek; the bay outside is called
MacKenzie Bay by Mornington Island officers; so named
after the man who built a hut there about 1914, but abandoned
it shortly afterwards without making friendly contact with
the aborigines,

ABORIGINAL NOMENCLATURE OF BENTINCK ISLAND

AND VICINITY

Bentinck Islanders have their own names for their country. They

divide the islands into two categories ;—

Dangkawaridulk [Dankawaridulk] or ‘‘Men absent lands’’ and
Dulkawalnged [’Dulkawalne:d] the ‘Land of all’’; the last
named is also their proper name for Bentinck Island.

The three chief Dangkawaridulk are :—

Mundamurnu [’Mundamuru]—Sweers Island.

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 273

Negakenap [Na:kemap], or Ngalkinabat [Nalkinabai]—Allen
Island,

Didjer [’Didje :r]|—Horseshoe Island,

These ‘‘men-less’? islands were visited from time to time when
weather conditions were favourable for voyages on rafts; they could
uot reside permanently on them because of recurring shortages of
water. Ngakenap (Ngalkinabai) was nearest the mainland coast and
mainlanders were said occasionally to have eome there, Ancient fights
with them were remembered in tradition, but no friendly contacts.
Minakuringati kulkitj, principal in the killing of a Mornington [slander
on Allen Island in 1940, who had fled fvom Bentinck Island with
‘«stolen’’ wives just prior to this attack, was probably yot anderstating
the case wheu he said that ““Ngalkinabai was not a good place’, In
the late history of the islands it served as refuge on two occasions for
those fleeing from quarrels on the home island. Nevertheless it should
be remembered that both it and Sweers Island were in use in 1802,
and again in 1846, on the two occasions in that half eentury when
explorers made reports.

Bentinck Island itsel! is divided into a series of doliara, for
which the term dulmar'a was obtained as a supposed Mornington Island
(Lardiil tribe) equivalent, A dolnero ean be deseribed loosely as a
hordal territory, claimed by descendants of a common ancestor in the
male line.

No fixed name is available for any dolmoro, Usually it ts known
by the name of the dolwerodangka ['dolnorodanka] who is the eldest
living male of the dolnoro. Tis -ngati [-nati] or birthplace name is
fashioned from the place name, using it as a differentiating prefix,
e.g. Minakuringati dolnoro, the one born at Minakuri. Minakuringals
had another name which is totemie, Kulkitji (shark). Tu a second way
of talking of dolnoro, this totemi¢ tiame or tjataneda |’tjata:meda|
may be employed without the -wyati name, eg., Toato dolnavo or
Rainbow's dolvoro, This man’s birthplace name was Walkareingati,
These names are not universally applied sinee, depending on the
context, one or another or both of the names of anyone of the living
or recently dead members ol the dolnora, may on oecasion serve to
indicate the intended dolnore. This can be confusing,

For purposes of general description on the accompanying map
the location of the boundaries of the eight dolnoro are indicated, and
each dolnoro is designated by a capital letter between S to Z These
symbols were allotted in arbitrary order, commencing at the northern

274 RECORDS OF THE $A, MUSEUM

end of the island and proceeding in a clockwise direction around it as
a temporary expedient while sorting data, and have proved to be
useful, The boundaries are well established. In defining their separate
territories Lo me, while sailing along the coast, in sight of them, each
informant indicated in turn the place nanes of his own dolnoro:
another person automatically began to speak up at the next boundary.
An interested audience listened intently and assented to each identified
place name. Only at the boundary between the countries of the two
dolnorodangka named Minakuringati kulkitji and Walkareingati toato
were rival claims made, This brought out the point that a strip of
about half a mile of coast-line, shown as ‘‘Disputed territory’? on the
map, had long heen a bone of contention, a matter left unsettled when
Minakyringati ancl his associates fed to Allen Island in 1940.

Four compass points play their part in the orientation of the
Kaiadilt, and in couyersation each place name on the island can he
related quickly to one or other of the quadrants. These terms appear
to denote the same general poimts as our chief cardinal ones as
follows ;—

Tjirkar |"[jirkar] North, Rarth [’Ra:ré] South, Rii [’Ri:] Hast,

Bad [’Bad] West.

The first r sound in Tjirkar is strongly rolled as is indicated in
the phonetic version of the spelling by a black letter and on the map
hy a stroke beneath the letter, Some people roll both r sounds in
this word. The th in Rarth is an alyeolar (almost palatal) @ sound
which has not yet otherwise been noted in my vocabulary of the
language,

Por directions between these four main ones the term agaruwar
tends to be used, é.y., Barth naruwar vii, which would denote south-east,
but this degree of precision is not often required, Place names from
Wairil and Kadotara in ihe west part of the south coast, to
Dangkarnpuru, are Bad (western); from Waraburi to Kondongkuru
and Dolkalatji are Rarth (south); from Mededingki to Bangari are
Rii (east) and from Kongara to Ritjuro (the northmost point) and
to Toltajardaruki in the west are usually defined as being Tjirkar
(north), It will be noticed {hat the breaks in elassification tend to
oveur at boundaries betwee) dolmore. Place names in the dolnaro
areas marked on the map as W, X and Y are said to be Bad (west),
dolnora V area is Rarth, but only one-half of dolmora area T from
Bangari southward and the whole of U are Rit (east), while dolnaro
Z, 5S and the rest of T are defined as Tyirykay (north),

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 275

Inspection of the imposing array of native place names on the
accompanying sketeh map reveals the concentration of places of
interest to the Kaiadilt in the vicinity of reefs, mangrove flats, and
to a lesser extent in the estuaries of the several tidal ereeks, including
those with rather impressive mouths and sterile clay pan hinterlands
which are to be found on all sides of the island. Areas generally less
attractive are the wide, more densely clothed savannah woodlands
such as form the eastern ‘spine’? of the island and the inland portions
of dolnoro T aud U and portions of territories V and Y. The greater
abundance of names along the coastal strip from Ritjuro to Minakari
is a true expression of the greater richness of this side of the island
as an area for living.

The map of Bentinck Island and environs on which place names
ure marked, is based on uncontrolled tracings from official aerial
survey photographs taken on 27 September 1951 and from several
oblique photographs taken on two flights over the island in 1960. The
general vegetational and photographie features were checked on the
ground and again during cireumnavigations of hoth Bentinck and
Sweers Islands, often at distances of only a few hundred yards from
the shore, Landings were made near the three extremities of the
island and at three places on Sweers Island. Portions of Bentinck
Island were traversed at the south-western and south-castern
extremities where we made camps, and walks of several wiles were
taken from Lokoti (Rokoti) to the vicinity of Berumoi near the
northern tip of the island. Portion of one day was spent on the
southern end of Sweers Island in an archaeological reconnaissance near
Tjilki, and an afternoon at the remains of the early attempted settle-
ment of the 1860’s and the graves ol the several white visitors which
are to be seen near Inscription Point. Basic purposes of the sketch
map are:

(1) To give an indication of the relatively large sterile areas
of claypan and mangrove swamp which reduce the areas
generally considered more useful by a substantial amount
of about fifty per cent,

(2) To indieate the subdivision ol the island among eight
native dolnoro (hordes) each formerly embracing some
ten to thirty people,

(3) ''o show the inultiplicity of native place names and their
disposition.

As in other places where Australian hunting peoples live, the
nomenclature of their country is very detailed, with place names

276 RECORDS OF THE S,A, MUSEUM

denoting every utilized piece of country. he Kaiadilt people provide
us with a most useful, hecatise up to date, view of the native geography
of a whole island.

Along the shores of Bentinck Island open sandy beaches alternate
with muddy stretches sheltered by mangroves, The transition from
one to the other is generally given a place name, as are the constantly
recurring clumps of Casuarina (sheoak) trees which denote the
potential presence of small seeps of fresh water coming out of the
sand near tide margin, The semi-shade of several of these sheoals
forms the normal eamp area of a Kaiadilt family.

Some 300 names are given and these are by no means all
whieh are used. A few met with as birthplaces in genealogies or
mentioned in texts were not encountered when on the island. ft
would not be surprising to be able to list 350 names in all.

More than a htndred place names were gathered in the course of
genealogical enquiries before Bentinck Island was visited. These were
checked and many others were gathered on the spol. Many were
noticed as we sailed along the coast within sight of the specific sheouk
trees, clumps of mangroves, thickets of taller trees, inlets, and beaches
and particularly the many beach soaks of brackish and fresh water,
both temporary and permanent, wpon which they rely for their
supplies.

The place names are principally found along the coast; this is not
especially due to the method of collecting since the several exeursions
made into parts away from the shore produced relatively few terms.

Where we can be reasonably certain of the place denoted by the
place name a specific location mark is given; absence of sueh is an
indication that only the general position is known; a few are marked
as of doubtful position (pd.); these are recorded on the map so that
they may be the subject of further enquiry, if other opportunities
should oceur,

The place nates have meanings buat the explanation offered was
often involyed and in the present state of knowledge of the language
if is time consuming to get details. Study of them has not yet
advanced very far; some are said to be ‘‘jnst names’’, hitting that
they may be of some age, Others have yielded nseful leads to the
mythology, ete.

A few names appear more than once. Allen Tsland is called
Ngakenap as well as Ngalkinabai and there is also a Ngarkeinapa
[Narkeinapa] near the north point of Bentinck Tsland. There is a

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 277

sonth coast place called Burnpuri and another similarly named in
the great mangrove and claypan area dominating the central portion
of the island. The latter is marked as of doubtful position on the map,
There is a Kalturi at the 8,E. corner of Bentinck Island and another
on the western side of Allen Island. The Katjuruku of the northern
end of Sweerg Island is a name similar to that of the wooded plateau.
top called Kadjuruka, inland from the prominent North Eastern point
of Bentinck Island; it is also the name of a Being referred to in a
later paragraph,

Many names show variations in pronunciations from the lips of
different persons; in speaking the women tend to roll their r more
than the men do, A few seem to be unable to ennnciate any final r
sounds, replacing it by a lengthening of the preceding vowel, which
usually ig an a sound. A good example is the name written in
Geographic IJ as Karnkai, the name for the eastmost point on Bentinck
Island, This is on the map as [Karu’ka:i] but is also prouounced
as [‘Karn’kari] and as [‘Karn’kar|. In the last named version the
{r] is very strongly rolled. Where differences in pronunciation are
extreme a second version is given on the map, in a bracket after the
more usual rendering. The accepted version was that of the
dolnorodangka of the place.

Numerous reefs and sand banks are visited on rafts during
periods of extra low tides and camped on during neap tides. To the
Kaiadilt they seem to be places much like those on more permanent
soil and equally worthy of names, The low and unsubstantial nature
of the islands also lag led to physiographic changes and some places
now only reefs are reniembered in tradition ag once land, hinting that
occupation of the island has continued uninterruptedly for generations,

The map embraces the whole of the territory visited by the
EKaiadilt people of Bentinck Island and until the time of the arrest of
the Allen Island people in 1941 and the first visit to Mornington Island
Mission by the 1945 party no person of the tribe had, within living
memory been elsewhere und returned to relate his story. Although
they were familiar with smoke fires of places below the horizon in
most directions from their island, two places outside their area were
most readily visible to them, one the long line of low mainland shore
visible on the southern horizon, and the ontline of Sydney Island
visible to the north, but only from the tops of high sandhills at
Berumoi, This, the only part of the Mornington Island area visible
is called Olkadil [O;|kadil]. When we stood on the crest of Berumoi,
Olkadil was a hazy smudge on the horizon. It is to be noticed that

278 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

this name, as Olkadiil [’Olkadi:l, ‘Olkadi:It] is applied also to a
camping place on the south coast of Bentinck Island.

Mornington Islanders, who likewise can see only one place on
Bentinck Island, the Berumoi sandhills, call the island Maldanunda.
Formerly they knew of the existence of other places only from the
rising smokes of fires which periodically appeared over the horizon,
They had interpretations of the activities of Bentinck Islanders on
various outer islands based on ‘‘readings’’ of these smokes.

NATIVE TRADITIONS OF CONTACTS

One aged Lardiil woman said that there was an olden time story
which said that Allen Island people came from the vicinity of
Burketown at a time when men were shooting natives along the
Leichhardt River, She claimed that the language of Burketown was
a little like that of the Kaiadilt. This story could not be confirmed
except in the reference to the coming of mainland people to Allen
Island where they fought with the Kaiadilt in ‘‘ancient time’’.

Bentinck Islanders are also said to have once or twice come to
Mornington Island, but the Kaiadilt themselves have no tradition of
such a contact.

In view of the unusual set of the South East trade winds at the
time of turtle hunting and egg gathering, in the later half of the
S.E. Trade period, when Bentinck Island men become ventnresome in
visiting the outer reels and sand banks, it might appear that Bentinck
Islanders have on occasion been driven on their rafts to Mornington
Island, but they may not have lived to reach home again. The
genealogies mention several nien who disappeared on raft voyages
and never returned,

The impression is gained that the Kaiadilt haye remained an
isoluted people for many years and this is confirmed by the absence
of any sign of the 4 and 8 class systems of social organization of
adjoining peoples and the relative isolation of their language, which,
save for Janggal, the tongue of the Forsyth Islanders, to the north-
west, appears not to be very closely related to any neighbouring
language.

CLIMATE
In the absence of direct records of rainfall and temperature it is

diffeult to provide exact criteria to indieate the climate of Bentinck
Island, For the purposes of this paper the likely general rainfall was

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 279

estimated hy taking available readings between 1910 and 1956 from
the several nearest recording stations of Normanton, Augustus Downs,
Karumba, Mornington and Burketown, all within a radins of 100 miles
of Bentinck Island, so far as they were available, and canputing an
annual figure, which over the years between 1910 and 1956 yielded an
average of 33 inches. Tnelusion of the Augustus Downs reeords may
have lowered the average unduly, but the results suggest raimfall in
the general vicinity of 33 inches. This agrees with the trends of the
isoliyets shown on the Annual Average Isolryetal Map of Queensland,
published by the Bureau of Meteorology in 1940,

Rain generally falls in the summer, Aboriginals tell us that in
oeeasional years when heavy rain falls in winter or when there is much
fog and drizzle at that season of the year they suffer from exposure.
These are the “‘bad years’? when people die of cold and sickness. At
such times sea fogs may trap them at night on the outer reels where
they may be in danger of drowning because of loss of their bearings.
Summer or winter the prevalence of low tides at night compels them
to find mnech of their food in the dark of night or by the available
fight of the moon. Winters of dry weather without fog are ‘‘good
years’? and are cousidered more usual than wet ones. This is
supported by the available records of meteorological stations in the
vicinity. Bentinck [sland is a little further south than Mornington
Island and the ehmate probably is less maritime in character as well
as being drier by ten inches or more, although basie similarities in
vegetation indicate the differences in climate may be uot very great.

In the climatic classification of Thornthwaite (1933) the Bentinck
Island gronp would fall into the type CA w, i.e., subhumid tropical
with deficient rainfall in winter. In the system of Koéppen (1931,
1936) the area lies near the junction between V Shw and Awi, ie.,
between a ‘‘semi arid climate with annual average temperature over
18°C., with winter dronght, with at least ten times as much rain in
the wettest summer mouth as in the driest winter month’’, and
tropical summer climate with distinetly dry season in low sun period
or winter, and range of temperature between warmest and coldest
months of less than 5°C.’? The last-named classification suggests
that Bentinck Island ocenpies an intermediate position. Tt has a
marine cliniate but it is situated nearer the dry mainland and is not
so greatly influenced by its setting as is Mornington Island, which
lies deeper in the Gulf and has an added 10 inches of annna) rainfall.
Bentinck Island lacks gallery forest trees save for a few relict strips
in seattered places, where the ground water is near the surface, where

230 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

it is augmented by small streams, or where the soil is a little more
fertile,

As is characteristic of savannah lands, there is a complete reversal
of normal wind direction between the wet N.W. summer and the dry
§.E, winter season which lasts from about May to November. Being
situated near the drier boundary for savannah, tall grass predominates
over patches of sparse deciduous woodland, While aborigines were
Present these open areas with Themeda grass, etc., which grew to
heights of four to six feet after rain, were fired each year. In the
12 years since their departure this burning had only happened onee,
about May, 1959, when a party of Bentinck Islanders taken across on
4 brief holiday visit set fire to a large area on the south-eastern coast,
thus in one area restoring a semblanee to the conditions they had
maintained for many centuries.

DESCRIPTIONS OF AREAS VISITED OR NOTICED

In the following section general descriptions will be given of the
areas of Bentinck Island visited by our party in May 1960, or noticed
in passing, More detailed notes on the vegetation will be possible
when the botanical collections made are identified.

Western End of Bentinck Island

The first camp was made by our party on 23rd May 1960 at
Minakuri [’Minakuri], the west-most point of Bentinck Island, our
launch being anchored in 24 fathoms off the point. There is a shelving
sandy beach backed by a higher belt of sand. This is the north-most
and pliysiographically youngest of a series of similar shore line ridges
which have developed in the shelter of the mangrove fronted shore
which here runs in an east-and-westerly direction. Inland from this
youngest shore are the successively older parallel strandlines, the
whole forming a series of low ridges and swales in a belt half a mile
wide. All the swales are below ten feet above present high water of
sea level but the ridges are higher, The series has been truncated at
the western end by seas sweeping through the channel between Dalwai
(Albinia Island) and Minakuri, The north-most of these sand dune
ridges and swales ig entirely of loose sand bnt ones further south
become progressively more indurated near the surface, probably by
percolation of rain water and transfer of lime. At Miant [’Miant]
the upper part of the developing sand rock has become truly consoli-
dated, Where the less hardened layers under it have been undermined

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 281

by the sea, these upper layers collapse into large slabs of soft lime-
stone rock. At Miant itself there is a spring which flows into the
sea at low tide from seepings at tide margin. The water forms a
small pool frequented by various species of birds, whose seratchings
seem to keep the water supply open and the paddlings of their feet
help in forming a slight pool. This water seems to be escaping from
the dome of fresh water held between the parallel dunes and ewales
of this dune series. It is considered by aborigines to be a never
failing supply. It was however affected by salt water during the tidal
wave of February 1948, which according to native eyewitnesses,
covered all but the tops of the higher dune ridges with sea water,
working inland for at least a mile along the swales and killing all
trees except those on high sand ridges and on some land-locked marshy
land with Pandanus palms, situated about half a mile inland.

Just south of Miant the beach rock is being extensively eroded
by the sea and undermined in great flat slabs, Aborigines pointed
to what are now rather indeterminate marks in the indurated sand
erust, same fifty yards south of Miant, and claimed they were actual
footprints of former aborigines, not artifacts or rock carvings, but
their actual tracks. The old man who showed them to us was rather
disappointed when we conld not see the marks very clearly and he
blamed the sea which had, since he was. a young man, partly destroyed
the supposed tracks of his ancestors. Continuing sonth the beach
ridges suddenly cease, the most southern lying on a broad sheet of
clay forming a clay pan which further inland extends in a belt up
to half a mile wide for a distance of several miles in an easterly
direction. Following the coast line south the eroded ontcrop of this
elay pan, trimmed by the sea to low tide level, is marked at
Ngolorngolor [Tolor’nolor] by a fringing growth of mangroves,
These extend with small breaks along the whole strip of claypan
lined shore south to Tjodjongatjore [/Tjodjona’tjo:ro], a distance of
one-and-a-third miles, The mangrove trees here are of a varicty
useful in poisoning fish, by using scrapings of the wood. There is a
small, nearly cireular area of seemingly older and slightly elevated
deep soil-covered land some 200 yards across, with trees, at Monoko
[‘Monoko]. This is interpreted as a small remnant of land older than
the parallel sand dunes perched on the clay pan, which itself seems to
have been a sea Aoor of the Recent past. At Maltaruki (‘Maltarn‘ki:]
there is a small mangrove-filled estuary where rain water from the
claypan escapes to the sea. Walking inland at Monoko and following
the margin of the dune system eastward it is evident that what is

282 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

now the inland side of the dunes has suffered some deflation and
partial destruction from streams of rain water such as flow off in the
wet season, These have worked back into the range system cutting
channels down to the level of the claypan, At fayourable points
where the clay is depressed, possibly by compression utider former
weight of sand, there are marshes, some of freshwater plants, others
of salt meadow type, Thus Kirkamangkatanapa (napa = ngapa,
means water), is rather brackish and mnpleasant to taste, though
used; Orandji [’Orandji] has good water, slightly sweet to the taste,
it was a local maiustay for water; Mankange [’/Mankan’ge] also bas
water, quite fresh, the marshy soil here is so free of galt that a
liliaceons plant related to Xerotes, the fibre of which is used for
string-making, grows very luxuriously.

The surface of the elaypan sets bard when dry but carries
impressions an ich or more deep. Today these are prineipally of the
tracks of Native Companions, the only large walking inhabitants, other
than jabiru and Varanid lizards, which today trequent the island. The
claypans were native ‘‘roads'’ which aborigines followed when
travelling quickly from one place to another. Near older Jand surtaces
the erosion of lateritie soils has provided a layer of black-stained
ivonstone nodules which covers the surface of the hardpan; on the
divide between claypan water flowing west to the sea and that flowing
north-east to the river channel at Tungalakar [/Tunalakar], there is
ain acenmulation of wind blown dust and silt caught by vegetation in
the marshy ground. Near Orandji this forms some grassland, and a
mixed marshy meadow is growing on the veneer of soil over the clay.

Inland from the claypan and forming a central ridge running in
an are roughly from the south-west from ihe coast at Walkareri
[’Walkare:ri], veering eastward and extending for several miles, is
a platean of higher and older Jand, breached in several places by
cross-cut channels, revealing claypan bottoms, Viewed from the sea
to the north this platean rises in a whaleback to Mambungi
[’Matobuyjgi}, and forms the highest land area to be seen in the south-
western portion of the island.

On the ground Mambungi is seen to be the siirviving remnant of
a peneplaned older land surface levelled off by the sea at heights up
to 33 feet above high tide mark and forming a plateau remnant so
locally flat on top that the surface of the laterite soil is marshy and
waterlogged and carries a thick growth of Melaleuca and broad-leafed
Rucalyptus. The south-western face of the cliff-like edge of the
laterite plateau of Mambungi is dry and is clothed in poreupine grass

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 283

(Triodia) giving an impression of atid dryness such as would not
be amiss through much of inland arid Australia, even though just a
few yards away on thie laterite plateau above the seemingly water-
logged laterite soil supports Melaleuca. The margins of this platean
have been notched by the sea and cut back so relatively recently that
rills of water which run off the surface of the plateau have not yet
had time to ent more than incipient gorge-like channels here and
there into the margins of the plateau area, In large measure this
remains intact in the shape its clifflike margins were fashioned by
seas cutting at its foot, The fect of the cliffs now are situated by
measurement some ten feet above high tide mark. The marshy surface
of the plateau is held up by a heavy duricrust of lateritic ironstone
overlying a considerable thickness of clay of guinbo-like consistency
vontaining ironstone nodules.

A rough dumpy-level survey line was run from Mambungi to the
sea at Kapilauru [’Kapilau:rul, a distance of two-thirds of a mile
in an S.E. to N.W. direction. The result is shown in the top half of
fig. 1. The survey was achieved under difficulties and cannot be
relied on to be more accurate than to the nearest foot but it may give
a useful indication of some aspects of the physiography of this part
of the island,

The drawn section indicates the presence at its N.W, extremity
of a mangrove-fringe at Kapilanru, This extends out to sea from
high tide mark on a mud flat for more than one lomdred yards. The
point selected as datum was at the margin between that part of the
beach which carried vegetation and that kept free of growth by the
rise of water at high tide behind the shelter of the dense belt of
mangroves. This is considered to be normal high tide mark, The clay
of this mangrove flat, af a point a little further west, was observed
to overlie a reef of hard ironstone laterite with some shelly limestone.
At Minakuri, to the west, during our stay, we found that in the channel
the tide dropped at least ten feet during the night, since the launch
which drew three feet and was anchored in well over 2 fathoms,
touched bottom at lowest. ebb,

Following the section inland from Kapilaurn there is a dune of
sand, here high enough to carry an open savannah of broad-leafed
trees of types cominonly found elsewhere in impoverished coastal and
riverine jungle. Where the section was run the dune rose to nearly
20 feet, with a swale in which the soil appeared to he richer and
earried a dense growth of vines, including a native passion fruit and
several species of native yam vine. These have not yet been identified

284 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

‘Mambungi. Plateau

Swamp Solt BENTINCK ISLAND

“ CS taterite Ouricrust

“Kapltauiry

une Sand
Sand beach
Bhally
with grains of Sand

Current=bedded cand rock laterite gravel

tart pa Me with hard laterite oP shes my
Disconformity 44 gravel crust 4 A oe ee. oe Mangrove lined
oy 5 . flat

High Tide

SE-NW Section (approximately¥amite) with vertical scale exaggerated

MORNINGTON {SLAND

‘ Windblown sand
Momington Istand Misston won duricrust Appet Channel

Gardan flat inundated by Partly consolidated

grtrscarvinary (fda Cte CAN fae ON MLE Extra-ordinary tide of February 1949

;
\
re
-
bd .

= ie

Fig. 1. Coastal elevations at Kapilauru, Bentinck Island (upper section) and at
Mission Jetty, Appel Channel, Mornington Island (lower section).

because, at this season of the year, they were not in flower. They
yielded tubers in abundance for the aborigines in our party. The
seaward face of this dune had been eut and notched by storm seas
of the N.W. season. On the inland side there was a beach-like ledge
and also evidences of an older terrace notch at from 12 to 15 feet
above present high tide mark. This showed a shelly sand which had
been wave-sorted. The dune belt was about four hundred yards wide,
the inland side dropping down to a claypan margined with a low
sand beach at 6 to 8 feet above sea level. The sand of this beach
contained an abundance of laterite sand and gravel. It appeared to
be a beach formed when the claypan itself was inundated. The surface

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 285

of the claypan stands at six feet above present high tide mark, and
at this season its surface locally was flat, dry, and strewn with
laterite gravel, Evidence of recent wet season flooding by rain water
to a maximum depth of two feet was apparent. This water had been
lapping against an outcrop of current-bedded sand rock with a hard
laterite gravel crust which formed a low cliff at the south-eastern
shore of the elaypan at this point, It was apparent that this hard
outcrop was overlain disconformably by the consolidated sand,
tenacious clay and laterite duricrust forming the Mambungi plateau.
This plateau, as indicated above, gave evidence that it had been
attacked laterally by the sea at some former time, Its relatively
steep walls were breached bere and there by short trenches or valleys
which ran back into its mass for distances of up to fifty yards usually
ending in a lip of duricrust over whieh, in the wet season, water had
flowed, The platean itself, at the locally highest point, was 33 feet
above our high tide mark. The uppermost foot was of waterlogged
soil in which there was water even at the end of May in the 8,1. Trade
season; it carried a dense growth of undershrubs, broad-leafed
Buealypts and Melaleuca.

This section is deseribed in detail because the data it provides is
of considerable help in the interpretation of the strnetnure of other
parts of Bentinck [sland which we saw, and assists in au appreciation
of the effects of a flooding of the island by the sea in 1948, aa
deseribed in later paragraphs,

Northern Extremity of Bentinek Island

The dolnoro area denoted as S on the accompanying map, was
visited in company with its dolnoredangka. After sailing along the
weaterncoast on the crest of the igh early morning tide at a short
distance from the shore, the Markaruki [’Markaruki] estuary with
its broad areas of mangrove forests covering half a square mile of
mud was clearly visible from the north; a quarter-mile wide belt of
normally dry elaypan and sand lies behind the mangrove fringe.
InJand is a wooded plateau seen by us only from a distance but
estimated to be rather similar in elevation and general appearance
to the Mambungi area examined in the south-west, A smaller estnary
at Naltalk [‘Naltalk] lies within a mile of the northern point of the
island, cutting through a northern extension of the plateau and
joining the sea on the western shore. The north-western end of this
plateau, where examined near Molatjikara [‘Molatjikara], in part had
been planed off at sea level to form reefs exposed at low tide. Boulder

286 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

detritus from this reef as also other hard rock on the eastern side of
the point had been built into fish trap walls, most of those on the
western side lad been damaged by wave action, The north-most
point of the island itself is a low flat area chiefly covered in Themeda
grasses, Pandanus palms with a few sheoak trees (Casuarina) on the
beach, There is a soakage well near tide mark, beside some Casuarina
trees responsible for the native name of Lokoti ["Lokoti, ‘Rokoti].
The point continues porth ont to sea as a sand spit. Twenty yards
inland from the northeru beach line is a shallow depression, Ritjuro
[‘Ritjure|] where fresh water was obtained by digging at a shallow
depth, The grass here is prineipally Imperata. On the eastern side
of the point is a high, well grassed saud dune system of which the
highest parts are probably of abont 100 feet elevation. These relatively
fixed dunes extend south-south-eastward in a belt a quarter-mile wide
for two or More miles, but diminish in height towards the south. The
dunes collectively are known as Berumoi [*Berumo:i] which is also
tlie specific name of a point close to where the imland estuary of
Naltalk impinges on the dunes. The dune system appears to he of
long standing and scattered groves of Macrozamia or burrawang palm
are present amid Themeda grass, together with broad-leafed shrubs
like Tika, and vines, with patches of Pandanus and of Imperata grass
in the hollows. The north-eastern part of the point is formed, at
Bandaro [/Bandaro:], by a hard roek reef extending out into the sea
and joined to the Berumoi sandhills by a boulder beach, and by many
large blocks of stone af Mariwupanda [’Mariwn’panda]; this name
literally means ‘“marven voeks'’, it is the place where indurated
siliceous tock is obtained for their stone oyster picks, knife flakes and
palaeolithic type hiface choppers (mariwu), This roeky onterop is
a particularly important native possession because of the presence of
this rare island resouree. Between Bandaro and the place ealled
Modorokolaijarnp are several large stone-walled fish traps, still in
tolerable order, fashtoned from the freely available boulders. All the
walls are heavily enernsted with oysters. Several large fish, called
burantant ['burantant] and karwark [’karwark], were speared while
we were there, having been trapped at half tide within the walls of
the enclosures. Fresh water is obtained by digging among the boulders
and into a yellow elay at tide mark, under Berumoi, The clay is said
to be the dung of a Beg named Katjurnku, which some now say,
since seeing dogs at Mornington Island, was a Dog Being, although
they have no word for this animal in their own language and have to
call it simply doga [‘doga].

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 287

Deseriptions by others of the Being, who is associated also with
Sweers Island and with a supposed cave on the Markaruki River,
suggest that Katjurnku may bave been a person or persons from a
visiting ship, THis ship may have sailed along the coast and entered
estuaries at Markaruki and Waduri before journeying to the northern
point of Sweers Island.

South-Eastern Point of Bentinck Tsland

Our second camp was at Njinjilki [/Njinjilli] three-quarters of
aiile west, of the south-eastern point of Bentinek Island, he launch
eould be anchored here in four fathoms close to shore in a position
sheltered from most winds becanse of the shorf fetch from Sweers
and Fowler Islands, Sandstone outerops on the heach and has been
notched by the sea, Fresh water oozes from the rock as tiny springs,
encouraging a line of Casuarina trees which mark the native camping
place. A. hundred yards inland is a lake of fresh water, about
one-quarter of a mile long and of variable width, margined by
larve Melaleuca trees and carrying a relatively dense but narrow
vrowth of fringe-jungle along its shores; this is the most. fertile
looking strip seen on the island, Tt presumably is the fresh water
lake meitioned by Flinders. On the high bank separating the lake
from the sonth coast are growing the largest Hucalyptus trees seen
on the island together with Pandanus, and tall Themeda grass,
Imperata grass appears in hollows, and in the lake itself magnificent
erowths of waterlilics (Nymphaea), indicate the relative permanence
of the water, Immediately west of Njinjilki is a shallow bay margined
by a cliff whose plateau top is within a foot or so of 30 feet above high
water mark and densely clothed in low heathy vegetation growing on
lateritic ironstone. Inland and west of here is a broad area of clay-
pan representing the innermost parts of a large drainage basin
breaking throngh an old dune system, now heavily vegetated, on to a
broader clay pan and estuary, filled with a dense growth of mangroves
aud opening on to the eastern coast at Rutarntaro [’Rutarntaro],
his ‘yiver’ is called Birpakari [‘Birpa‘kari] by the former
inhahitants. The easternmost point of the island, Karukat [‘Karn’kasi,
‘Karukar] is the Raft Pomt of Stokes, and the reefs off the point are
the supposed place where Roth's party, in 1901 seeured photographs
of their contact with the Kaiadilt, for example pl. 8, fig. 1 and 2.
Pandanus palms grow nearly to the tip of the peninsula,

The cliffs west of Njinjilki previously referred to, show a thirty
foot section to sea level. The top layer is composed of fifteen feet

288 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

or ironstone laterite, below which there is a soil horizon of about one
foot resting on yellow sand, rather firmly consolidated and of variable
thickness (9 to 11 feet) itself lying directly on a red and gray mottled
sand rock which extends to below tide mark; in front of the cliff this
rock has been planed off by the sea to form a broad shelf lying below
high tide level, The cliff had heen attacked previously by the sea at
a height not much different to its present level of attack, As evidence
of this, at the eastern end of the bay a series of cross-bedded sands,
apparently wind-laid, and now consolidated had been lodged against a
fossil portion of the cliff, These consolidated sands are now being
attacked by the sea along with the laterite cliff face.

Viewed from the sea it seems evident that the high ground at
Njinjilki at some time has been planed off by the sea at the same
general level of about 30 to 35 feet as has Mambungi plateau at the
western end of the island.

Across a mile wide strait from Njinjilki is Baltae, the small
island named Fowler Island by Stokes. It is known to Mornington
Islanders as Hall Island, after their pioneer missionary who was
killed on Mornington Island in October 1917; Tall once sheltered off
it on a voyage to Mornington Island,

Sometimes the native name is heard as [’Batae] and again as
[‘Ba:tai] but the oldest woman now living, whose birth place it was,
prefers [‘Baltae], Baltae is applied to the whole island, but there is
also a specific place of this name inside the forest of black mangroves
at the southern end of the island.

In tradition the island is associated with a Being, Ngalkadarurnu
(‘Nalkadaru:ru] who had the power to cause strong south-easterly
winds to blow, This creature, was perhaps the same Being as one
vaguely remembered to have dug a well in the centre of the island
and obtained water there. ‘‘He broke the water out of the high
ground,’ This well is said to be there still, but details of the story
were not obtainable and time did not permit a visit to the site,

Interior of Bentinck Island

The central part of the island was not visited and the data
observed near the three extremities of the island has had to be eked
out by inspection of aerial photographs. Thus the results of onr
observations on the geography of the interior of the island as a whole
are to some degree tentative and remain so until opportunities occur
for further study,

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 289

Sweers Island

This island lies south-east of the main Bentinck Island mass.
At its south-eastern end is the high point, Inspection Hill. On the
eastern cliff slope of this hill, at Durakara, a section was studied, It
shows mottled red and white clayey sand rock with shells extending
from below sea level to 5 feet above high tide mark overlain by partly
consolidated laterite soils to thirty feet above sea level, over which is
some 70 or more feet of marine coralline limestone, much eroded,
and weathered into rough masses almost impossible to climb over.
The area of land over 30 feet above sea level on Sweers Island runs
north and south for not more than one mile by one-third of a mile
and has an abrupt cliff facing the east. There is a further platean
area of about half a square mile, 30 to 50 feet high, with a cliff on
the west estimated to be from 25 to 40 feet high near Dalkuruki
[‘Dalkuruki] on the northern third of the island. This is covered with
a vather dense stand of a white-barked species of Eucalypt. The native
name of the forested area is Ngankudalaijarup [/Nankudalaijarup]).
The northern extremity, with cliffs on the eastern side, is a plateau
no more than abont 30 feet high. All the rest of the island is low,
covered in small open scrub of Zucalyptus and Acacia with tall grasses.
The northern and southern extremities of the island were once almost
divided from cach other save for a slender tombola-like strip which
became widened by aceretion of lines of parallel sand dunes; these
rum NNE-SSW along the eastern coast. There are some fifteen dunes
and vegetated swales in a belt a third of a mile wide, The full
complement is present near the sheltered southern end of the series
near Ordodurui [‘Ordodu’rui]. North of Kidiralangi [/Kidiralangi]
subsequent erosion has eut very obliquely through those nearest the
eoast and only some ten dunes remain. <A similar series, of about ten
dunes, run east and west from Milt (Point Inseription) to Dangalo
[(‘Dana‘lo:| also in a belt about 500 yards wide. These evidences of
the late history of the island are in line with those on Bentinck Island
itself, It is suggested they are all the results of events of Post-L0ft,
Terrace time.

The Western Islets

Northwestmost of the several small islands off Bentinck Island
is Ngataiwind [Natai:wind] or Douglas Island. It is only a few feet
above sea level and covered with low shrubs ineluding a species of
native currant bush, Tracks of a recent visit, assumed to be by
Bentinck Islanders, were seen on the island by Mornington Island

290 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Mission men who landed there on 10th August, 1946. It is said to
have been visited very seldom by them,

Kandingarupai, the Bessie Island of Mission records, was visited
more often by natives on rafts. It has no reliable water supplies;
shell dishes of water had to be taken there, It was an attractive place
for turtles and their eggs, hence was a tempting, if dangerous place
to visit.

South hy east of it is Dorati (the Margaret or MeCarthy Island
of different Mission records), This also is low, divided into two at
highest tides, and waterless, except immediately after rain. It was
always necessary to carry shell dishes full of water on the rafts when
attempting visits there. The journey was considered hazardous and
only to be attempted in very calm weather but the lure of turtle meat
and egys was important enough for risks to be taken, Formerly it
was larger and according to Kaiadilt tradition, included an area now
ent down to below sea Jevel as a sand bank, named Neindalki
[(Yindalki], ‘This bank extends south by east towards the main island.

These outer islands and reefs were not specifically within the
territory of any one dolnoro although the people who were said most
often to venture there were those of the group denoted herein as
dolnoro X.

Nearer to and north of Dalwai (the Albinia Island of Mission
records), is a large reef exposed at lowest tides. This was an
important food gathering area called Meranmarai [’Meranma‘rai].
Dalwai itself was often used as a camping area by members of several
western dolnoro, nore particularly wheu they were at enmity with
eastern dolnorodangka, Seyeral of the brief missionary contacts with
Bentinck Islanders in 1945 were at Dalwai; at such times eastern men
stayed at Minakuri until they could be assured of the intentions of
the white men. Several very dramatically described encounters by
McCarthy with Bentinck Island people, recorded in his diaries
and Mission reports, took place at camps near Morokonobai
[‘Morokono’bai ].

Allen Island was known as Ngarkenap [’Na:kemap] and also as
Dalendiyru [’Dalen’duru], but ihe last named may really be the Janggal
tribe term for it. It was visited by the people of the south-western
dolnora of Bentinck Islanders but until the last generation of occupa-
tion of the area no people ever were known to have received. -ngati
names, from haying been born there. Jt was a kind of no-mans-land
where occasionally people of the Janggal tribe from the adjoining

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 29)

mainland and from Forsyth Island paid visits, and according to
tradition, occasionally fought with the Kaiadilt. Within living memory
they had not had any friendly contacts. At the north-west end of the
island is Ngandamuro |Nandamuro]} the long reef and sandbank which
in 1802 prevented Flinders from circumnavigating the island, The
north-western tip is Taliwinduru [‘Taliwinduru], Two girl children
born in 1940 bear this as their -nguli name. ‘There is water in springs
emerging among the mangroves. It was here that the Minakuri
people in late 1940 mardered ‘‘Cripple Jack’? of Mornington Island,
The north coast is maugrove-lined on the northern half, The first
break is Munuku [’Munyuku], Just south of this is the mouth of a
small ereek linked to an inland system of swamps. One of these is a
waterlily lagoon named Ngarkinabai [Tarkinabai] the only lagoon on
the island. The island generally is a low plateau, well wooded, with
trees of a type ealled korokari by the aborigines (not identified),
‘“millewood’? trees and white gum trees. The south-eastern tip is
Modomodor [‘Modomodor] where there is a native spring, called a
koungoko [‘koanoko], on the beach, accessible only at low tide, On the
south-eastern coast, in the second bay from the sonthern point is
Ngandamurur [Tjandamurur] where another spring of water emerges
on the beach, Still further north in the third bay a spring, Wandaruki
[’'Wandarnki] flows across the beach, and a fourth spring is to be
found at Kalturi [’Kalturi:] about a mile from the north-west point.
All these sources of water fail in dry years, rendering the island
untenable as a perinaient home,

To the north-east of Allen Island is Didjer [Didje wx] or Horseshoe
Island, a half cirele of mangroves embraced by a sandy bank and a reef
where Flinders encountered his aborigines. From the old man’s
vehement specch during the meeting Flinders recorded a single word,
jahree,

Im the present day Kaiadilt [’jari] is a verb in the imperative
meaning ‘Go!’ A native story associated with a Being called
Barindindi [’Barindindi] has its setting on Allen Island or vicinity. In
this story Koreann [’Koreanu] was holding a fish he had caught with
his hands in the mangroves, He went down to the waters edge as
Barindindi came to the shore. ‘Why do you come up here?’’? Koreanu
held the stranger with spears, and told him to ‘go away’? [‘dalitj].
The verb used is a stronger one than [‘jari].

It is possible to regard this as a local counterpart to the record
of the same encounter made by Flinders in is journal,

292 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A version of if appears on a tape record by a middle-aged woman
named Morokonobaingati walawa; it was made during discussions on
another strange Being, Katjuruku, referred to in an earlier paragraph.

In the preceding seetions of this paper an attempt has been made
to introduce the geographical setting in which the Bentinck Island
people lived nntil 1948.

Asa result of a series of disasters they suffered a severe reduction
in numbers after 1945 and by 1948 were compelled to abandon their
island. The final blow which rendered useless the country which had
sustained them for centuries, was the tidal wave of February 1948,
data on which forms the final section of this paper.

THE TIDAL WAVE OF FEBRUARY 1948

One of the geographical objectives of the visit to Bentinck
Island was an attempt to assess the effects of the phenomenal tide
which occurred in the Gulf of Carpentaria during Febrnary 1948.
This was one of the stated causes of the ultimate stress which led to
the death of many Bentinck Islanders and indirectly resulted in the
abandonment of their island home by the Kaiadilt,

The aborigines themselves describe the flood tide as having
covered all but the highest parts of Bentinck Island. It deeply
drowned most of the places where they were accustomed. to live, and
where they obtained their supplies of water. It eansed wells and
springs to go salty, They were not prepared for the flood and suffered
thirst even while the tide was at its extraordinary height. Their many
subsequent efforts to find sufficient water by digging out wells and
pot holes along the beaches and, later in the season, water-bearing
frogs from out of the dried np bottoms of swamps, have heen described
to me and were noticed by McCarthy in his report deseribing conditions
in October 1948, when he went to resene the last of the islanders from
the south coast,

The principal data on this extraordinary tide is recorded in an
official report made by Gloe and Weller (1949) to the Queensland
Irrigation and Water Supply Commission, This Department had been
asked to advise on the rehabilitation of the garden area at Mornington
Island Mission which had been destroyed by this tide. The tide was
stated to be without recent parallel. The actual date and time of the
flood tide unfortunately is not anywhere cited. Gloe and his companion
prepared a map of the Mornington Island Mission area on which they
placed approximately the line of encroachment by this tide but made no

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 293

mention of the height of the rise. During our visit it was possible, on
14 May 1960, to survey a line from high water mark in the vicinity
of Mornington Island jetty to the garden flat (see fig. 1 bottom half)
and from pliysical effects still visible, to ascertain that the rise was
to twelve feet above the highest normal tide mark, The last named
is indicated by the growth of vegetation at the foot of the half-
consolidated sand dune on whieh the Mission headquarters is placed-

At Mornington Island the flood caused large Bucalypts to die and
had caused a change in areas flooded by the salt water from its former
savannah and tree growth to a salt loving vegetation; only Melaleuca
and Pandanus growing uear to the edge of the flooded area had
survived, and there was evidence that much of the coastal vegetation
other than mangroves and Jfelaleuca, in the parts inundated, had been
killed. New growth had developed only after the salt impregnations
had been leached away,

With this data in hand and the types of injary to vegetation it
had caused at Mornington Island before us, it was possible to assess
that the sea had risen at least to the same extent of about 12 feet. above
normal tide on Bentinck Island. It flooded all but the higher parts of
the island; the indications confirm aboriginal statements that it
divided the main island into two by inundation of the clay pans which
extend from the north-west coast at Markaruki to the south coast at
Kombali. As much as 50 per cent of the land area of Bentinck Island
temporarily must have been covered by sea water, including the parts
most intensively used by the people. The effect would have been
temporarily to restore conditions as they might have been during the
Ten foot Terrave sea level of Mid-Recent time. There is evidence
around the island and on Mornington Island in the form of wave cut
terraces at about this height above sea level to indicate the former
presence of this eustatic sea level.

The vegetation other than mangroves and some swamp plants,
was in large measure killed and even today such areas still principally
are covered either with grasses, and salt marsh vegetation, or remain
bare, At points which stand ne more than a few feet above the twelve
foot mark the trees survived, and these are the prineipal places which
today remain clothed in savannah woodland.

Tt ig probably correct to assume that 50 per cent, or possibly
at most 60 per cent of the island was affeeted by the tidal wave in such
a way as to be nuproductive of its usual share of the islanders’
terrestrial food, and water, wnuring the balance of the time the

294 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

aborigines remained on the island. There had been already a decline
in population in 1947, from killings, drownings and the supposed effects
of drought, The removal by MeCarthy of the large party from Sweers
Island, late in 1947 must have reduced the pressure on the remainder,
but even so the final stresses were great.

Information on the population crash which terminated their stay
on Bentinck Island, based on genealogical and other information, is
the subject of a separate paper following this ove. It assesses the
various factors which contributed to this calamity, one which happened
to a simple hunting people living their own life, apart from the modern
world, and may serve as an example of a type of recurrent happening
which must have played a part in the development of man.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author is indebted to the Wenner-Gren Foundation for
Anthropological Research for a grant in aid for a study of the
Bentinck Islanders, The Board of the South Australian Museum
supported the field work, It is a pleasure to acknowledve the ready
co-operation received from the Rey. J. R. Sweet and the Presbyterian
Chureh Committee, Brisbane, and to recall the direct help received
from the Superintendent of the Mornington Island Mission, the Rev,
D. L. Belcher, Tle, Mrs. Belcher and all members of the staff at
Mornington could not have been more kind, Mr, Peter Aitken,
Assistant Entomologist at the Sonth Australian Museum was
companion on the visit and provided unstinting aid.

For permission to use some photographs, and mueh other help I
am indebted to Rey, Andrew R, Wilson who obtained historical data
from others, including Rev, W. F, MacKenzie, Mrs. M. Burnett, Rev.
C. D. Sydney and also from his mother, Mrs, R, HI, Wilson, to all of
whom I owe thanks,

Mr, C. Claxton of the Land Administration Commission, Brishane
kindly provided data about early leases on Sweers Island. Dr.
J. A, Spalding furnished a copy of his Medical Report of 1947. Mr,
BR, C. Sharman, Queensland Government Archivist, supplied references,
I am indebted also to the Mitchell Library, Sydney for access to
several original documents. Mr. Vineent Roth, Curator of the
British Guiana Museum kindly searched through his father’s surviving
papers but was unable to find anything relevant to the present
research, Messrs. R. HE. Davies and P. McK. Kitchen, who photo-
graphed some Bentinck Islanders in 1945 at Mornington Island, while

TINDALE—GEOGRAPHY OF BENTINCK ISLAND 295

engaged as Air Force Officers on duty, kindly made their negatives
and personal photographs available for study.

Gully Peters, the Mornington Islander, who with his wife Cora,
has devoted the greater part. of his adult life to trying to make contact
with the Bentinck Islanders, and after twenty years of work, succeeded
in bringing them into touch with the modern world, was our constant
helper; without his aid the work would not have been possible.

The Kaiadilt patiently bore our incessant questionings and pryings
into their former life, and twenty of them were happy to accompany
our party back on a visit to their island, so providing the needed first
hand data about its human geography.

Mr, H. Burrows kindly drew the accompanying map from a rough
draft and Miss V. Richardson prepared the finished drawings of the
Sections.

REFERENCES CITED

Bleakley, J. W., 1961: Aborigines of Australia, Brisbane. 367 pages.

Flinders, M., 1814: Voyage to Terra Australis. London 2 v. and atlas,

Gloe, C. and Weller, N. H. E., 1949: Water resources of Mornington
Island. Queensland Irrigation and Water Supply Com-
mission, Brishane (roneo report; copy No, 3 seen).

Képpen, W., 1931: Grundriss der Klimakunde. Berlin.

1936: Das Geographischen System der Klimate,

MaeIntyre, J. N., 1921: Capabilities of the Gulf Country, North Aus-
tralia, (Unpublished manuscript in Mitchell Library,
Sydney),

Queensland, 1880: Papers and Reports official and otherwise descrip-
tive of the country on the watershed of the rivers running
into the Gulf of Carpentaria. Brisbane. Government
Printer, 71 pages.

Roth, W. H., 1906: North Queensland Ethnography Bulletins 6, 7
and &.

Simmons, R. 'l., Tindale, N. B., and Birdsell, J. B, (in press): Blood
eroup genetical survey in Anstralian aborigines of
Bentinck, Mornington and Forsyth Islands, Gulf of
Carpentaria,

Stokes, J. L., 1846: Discoveries in Australia, London, 2 v.

Thornthwaite, C. W., 1933: Geog. Rev. 23, pp. 433-440.

296 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tindale, N. B., 1940: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 64, p. 147.

1961: Some population changes among the Kaiadilt of
Bentinck Island, Queensland. Tenth Pacific Science
Congress, Honolulu. Abstracts: pp. 87-88.

1962: Some population changes among the Kaiadilt people
of Bentinck Island, Queensland. Records of S. Austr.
Museum, Adelaide, 14, pp. 297-336.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES

PLATE 8

Fig. 1. Two of Roth’s party on edge of reef. The Kaiadilt man on the right is
Kalturingati walta, as identified by his son. As an old man he was speared just before
Minakuringati kulkitj fled to Allen Island in 1940, Mrs, R, H. Wilson’s copy of this
picture is labelled ‘‘Bentinck Island, June 1901’’. Photo: J. F. Bailey; original
negative in South Australian Museum,

Fig. 2. Kaiadilt men on the edge of the reef; in the background one is holding up a mass
of debris, Central figure is Tarukingati warungalta, as identified by his son, Photo:
J. F. Bailey, June 1901.

PLATE 9

Fig. 1. R. H, Wilson and timid group of thirteen Bentinck Islanders at Baltae in late 1927,
during their first voluntary contact with a white man,

Fig. 2. Mrs. R. H. Wilson and four Lardiil helpers standing behind a group of six women
and ten Kaiadilt children during the seeond contact, late in 1927.

DESCRIPTION OF MAP A

Dulkawalnged or Bentinck Island showing dolnoro (hordes) and native place names of
the Kaiadilt tribe.

Ree, S.A. Museum Vow. 14, Pharr §

To foen page 290.)

T d+ Sartell
Ree, S.A. Museen Vou. 14, Puarr 9

Seal

SOME POPULATION CHANGES AMONG THE KAIADILT
PEOPLE OF BENTINCK ISLAND, QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND
ACTING DIRECTOR , SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records the rise, and decline of a small isolated population of Australian
aborigines on Bentinck Island, Queensland. After two or more generations of steady and
slow increase to a peak of 123 persons in 1942, five years of decline brought about by
less favourable conditions reduced the population to 58. Some removed from outlying
islands by official intervention were eventually restored to the community after it was
transferred to Mornington Island following white contact in 1948. Thereafter from a
minimal population of 71 in 1951 they have increased again to 80 persons in 1960. Data
given enables observation of the course of this population change in a simple hunting or
foraging community, not in contact with other peoples. Their experiences illustrate some
of the forces moulding tribal populations of people at the Stone Age level of culture.

SOME POPULATION CHANGES AMONG THE KAIADILT
PEOPLE OF BENTINCK ISLAND, QUEENSLAND

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or AnTHROPOLOGY AND
Actinc Director, Sourn Avusrratian Musnum

Plates 10-11 and text fig, 1-2

CONTENTS

Page
SUMMA To tee BL eR ty Sy. ek A BOF
Introduction .. .. .. 2. 1. 2. ee ee ee ee ee) «6298
Population controls... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 3801
Population density . .. .. .. ».. B02
Population statistics for Bentinck Taland .. 3804
Data regarding causes of death . ..... . 308

Growth and decline of the Bentinck Island
population .. .. . ihe og hs: eae
Factors involved in pobalaten ‘ditenives dette BL5

Introduction to list of the inhabitants of
Bentinck Island, given as Appendix A .. 316

Appendix A. List of the known inhabitants
of the Kaiadilt tribe, of Bentinck Island,
Queensland, to June 1960 .. .. .. 319

SUMMARY

298 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Data given enables observation of the course of this population change
in a simple bunting or foraging community, not in contact with other
peoples, Their experiences illustrate some of the forces moulding
tribal populations of people at the Stone Age level of culture,

The researches were supported by a grant from the Wenner Gren
Foundation for Anthropological Research, Full acknowledgment is
given to those who assisted the project at page 294 of this volume of
the Museum Records.

A +wo-paged summary of the contents of this paper was published
in the ‘*Abstracta’’ of papers for the Tenth Pacifie Science Congress
held in Honolulu, August, 1961 (Tindale 1961).

INTRODUCTION

Bentinck Island is the centre of a small series of islands with an
area olf some 53 square miles situated in the southern curve of the
Gulf of Carpentaria. It probably became an island group only when
the Post-Glacial rise of sea-level flooded the Gulf, It had previously
been a part of the Great Australian plain which extended across to
New Guinea during the last cold phases of the Pleistocene and also
during earlier cold phases of the Ice Age. Bentinck Island has varied
in size, During the highest sea levels of Mid-Recent time (5000 B.P.)
its total land area must have been reduced to close on one-half, as
indicated by a shore line of eustatic type at approximately 10 fect
ahovye present sea level.

The Kaiadilt, a small tribe of dark Australian aboriginals, have
occupied Bentinck Island for centuries. They were first known to
exist, when the explorer, Matthew Flinders, met six of them ou an
off-shore islet in 1802. Despite this early encounter the people avoided
further close contacts with Westerners until] 1948, although largely
ineffective earlier efforts were made to meet them by Government
officials, missionaries, aud by would-be osurpers of their island.
Between 1940 and 1948 there occurred a series of events which had
drastic effects on the wellbeing of this people, The happenings
included inter-hordal conflicts, accidental drownings by loss of small
rafts during inter-island crossings, a long continued drought of serious
effect, and finally an abnormal tide or tidal wave, in Febrnary 1948.
This tide inundated the island for the greater part of a day, rising to
abont 12 feet above the highest normal tide mark. The water in effect
reoeeupied what is estimated to have heen the maximum Post-Glacial
shoreline, often in Australia called the ‘‘Ten Foot’’ Terrace.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 299

Fairbridge (1958, 1960) suggests that this terrace may have been the
result of two relative still stands of the seas, an earlier and longer
phase which he calls the Older Peronian, and a shorter, the Newer
Peronian Terrace, He dates the end of the second phase to about
3500 B.P. (1540 B.C.) and the earlier phase to near 5000 B.P.
(3040 B.C.).

A previous paper in these Records, Tindale (1962), supplies
details of the geographical and modern historical backgrounds for
this study, and provides a map on which are shown the boundaries of
the several divisions of the Kaiadilt tribe,

Genealogical studies detailed herein suggest that in 1940 there
was a population of 119 persons, divided among eight dolnoro or
territorially defined hordes. ‘This population slowly increased from
103 persons present in 1910 to 123 persons in 1942,

Early in 1940 members, substantially of one dolnoro (horde-like
unit), engaged in a quarrel and after fights with others, escaped to
the outlying Allen Island, within their territory, but an area not
permanently inhabited, because of the unreliable nature of its water
supplies. They journeyed on rafts, losing three persons by drowning
daring the crossing of some eight miles of water which imtervenes.

A native from Mornington Island Mission who landed on Allen
Island from a dinghy, while on a mail-carrying journey to Burketown,
was killed, Police rounded up and removed the survivors of the
Bentinck Tslaud horde to Aurnkun, a Mission Station on the eastern
side of the Gulf,

The remainder of the Bentinck Island population, now reduced to
some 107, who were ignorant of the fate of their kinsfolk, remained
out of contact with other peoples until 1945, excepting for an attack
they made on personnel of a Royal Australian Air Force launch,
anchored off Sweers Island during a gale, in 1943, when one Kaiadilt
man was shot,

Rainfall records available from adjoining areas imply that there
were years of reduced rainfall hetween 1942 and 1945, Water supplies
normally are obtained from soaks and seepages at sea level, These
derive from domes of fresh water trapped within the sands of the
island following the heavy rains of the North-West Monsoon
(December to March). Water itself is not remembered as presenting
any special problem, but vegetable foods were stated to have been
searee and fishing was poor in 1945 and 1946.

300 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Available rain records from surrounding areas suggest the
summer rains generally were near to normal in 1946 and 1947 but on
Bentinck Island there was severe famine.

Mm 1946 the culmination of several years of less than average rain
brought stresses to a bead, Inter-hordal friction was renewed; of 96
persous on the island at the beginning of 1946 only some 87 survived
a year later.

In late 1946 or early 1947 fourteen of nineteen persons, predom-
inantly of a second dolnoro, were drowned while going to Allen Island
by raft. Those who escaped say they had hoped to obtain better food
supplies; water then was not critically short. These five surviving
persons were discovered by the missionaries at Mornington, to be
on Allen Tsland, and were removed to Mornington Island. When
found, they were in distress from shortages of water and probably
would have died if they lad not been reseued.

Of 58 persons who remained alive on Bentinek Island following
the departure of these nnsuceessful voyagers, a further sixteen died
between early 1947 and mid-1948, after which, through the intervention
of the Mission authorities on Mornington Island, all survivors were
evacuated, the last leaving Bentinck Island in October.

Most of the deaths in the last year are attributed to effects of a
culminating blow which strnek this island population. This coup de
grace was a seemingly unprecedented high tide during February 1948,
The coastal dunes were inundated and the sands flooded with sea
water, rendering useless their normal water supplies. Frantic searches
for water-bearing frogs, which pass the dry season buried in the dricd
muds of rainy season pools and ponds, marked the last days of the
residence of the remaining Kaiadilt people on the island.

When brought together on Mornington Island there were only 838
persons representing the original 119 of the Kaiadilt population of
1940, including all those born in the intervening time and those held
at Aurokun.,

Several of those rescned from the stresses on Bentinck Island died
from the effects of their experiences, The rest, who by 1951 numbered
only 71, received careful medical treatment and their numbers then
began to increase, They now live in a small endogamous community,
an enclave within the territory of the Lardiil tribe, on Mornington
Island, under the care of the Presbyterian Mission; those at Aurnkun
eventually were brought back into the group. Between 1951 and 1960,
after the initia] losses of weakened persons between 1948 and 1950,

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 301

there has been a steady population increase from 71 to 80. When
some further genealogical enquiries have been completed it will
probably be possible to establish some ideas on the capacity for
increase of the Kaiadilt people.

This paper thus records stages in a natural calamity which had
the sudden effect of reducing a population to about 60 per cent of its
former size. In fact this population presents us with the possibility
of examining a small breeding group, maintained in isolation, subjected
to abnormal climatic and other forces, of kinds which we may infer
have occurred from time to time in the past. The happenings took
place while living on Bentinck Island under natural conditions, withont
any buffering or direct intervention by Westerners during critical
phases of their period of stress.

No detailed account of any similar sequence of events has been
obtaimed. The facts therefore may be of some assistance in enabling
researchers to visualize some of the kinds of events which have played
a part in moulding the fate of early human populations,

There is a time limit on the situation, a maximum of 7,000 years
since the islands were formed (Tindale 1962). There is the probability
that, during the Climatic Optimum (Ten Foot Terrace) of Mid-Recent
times (about 5000 B.P,), the island gronp was reduced effectively to
no more than half its present size, probably with more than corres-
ponding reduction in its carrying capacity. Its present area may not
have been re-established permanently until some 3,500 years ago. The
situation is likely to be most useful for several kinds of studies in
microevolution, In this regard the blood grouping evidence reported
by Simmons, Tindale, and Birdsell (1962, in press) is likely also to
provide ample seope for theoretical diseussion and thought,

POPULATION CONTROLS

Harl (1846, p. 251) was one of the first to give thought to popola-
tion controls among Australians, A principle he enunciated for
northern Australia was that ‘‘the amount of the population upon a
certain tract of country, is great or small in proportion to the quantity
of vegetable food if produces’’,

This principle may be sound for other than shore dwellers but
where seafoods are available, as among the Kaiadilt it is not likely to
be correct.

These ‘‘strand dwellers’? so predominantly use the products of
the sea in their diet, that it can be said that they are properly

302 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

inhabitants of the littoral zone and only relatively casnal visitors to
real land. Among the Kaiadilt, women’s work is tied closely to the
actic zone (in its sense of the strip of half-land between high and low
water marks), At low tide they gather tjilangind (small rock oysters),
kulpanda (Arca mud cockles), and the denizens of mud boles and rock
pools, retreating only at high tide to their camps under the sheoak
trees just above tide mark (pl. 10, fig. 1) or to inland areas of land
to dig for roots and stems of ‘‘edible” trees and vines, to catch grass-
hoppers for food and to glean the few varieties of seeds and fruits
which the sandy dune and galt-marsl environments yield to them.
Wood for fires, armsful of dry grass for camps, and plant fibres for
ropes and string are the chief produets of the land essential to their
well-being,

Males explore the wider littoral, either walking up to their waists
or cheat in water or drifting over deeper reefs on their rafts of logs
lashed together; at half tide either spearing fish trapped behind the
walls of their stone fish traps or standing motionless for hours on the
age of outer ree! channels waiting, in the hope of spearing a dugong,
a turtle, or a shark, It is woman's work to repair fish trap walls and
take the small fry among the fish trapped when the traps are almost
dry, It is man’s privilege to spear the larger fish cornered while the
water is still deep,

The long list of totem names in the genealogies attached to this
paper give a fair indication of the foods on which their main attention
is Toenssed, incidentally drawing attention also to the sun, moon, rain,
south-east wind, and waterspouts which control their lives, the rafts
which carry them, the sheoalk trees of the beach under whose half-
shade their camps are placed, the erude palaeolithie fist axes,
tiilanganda or mariwu, with which they open their oysters and ‘‘break"’
{the wood for the poles of their rafts, paddles, and fighting clubs, and
the baler shells for knives, with which they ent and scrape their spears
and spearthrowers and the flesh of the marine animals that they dll,

POPULATION DENSITY

A map of the island appears in an earlier paper in this Journal
(Tindale 1962), where the boundaries of the several hordes are shown.

The areas occupied by the eight dolwora or hordes of the Kaiadilt
people are also shown in the following table, which gives, in square
miles, figures for the varions types of country available to them. The
areas were caleulated indirectly, by eutting up a photographie copy of
the map and weighing the several portions on a sensitive balance.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 303

AREA OF THE BENTINCK ISLAND GROUP (in square miles)

|
Total | Total | Land Area}
Area Area | excluding | Area of | Area of | Reef
with | without) Reefs and| Reefs | Interior} and
Reefs | Reefs | Interior Claypans| Claypan
Claypans
DolnoroS ........--.---- 4-5 Bia) 15 | 1-0 2-0 3:0
1 re Sr eens moe Ce 9-8 9-0 73 Os 1-2 2-0
A ea ee PCr 9-6 73 6-5 2:3 0-8 31
Wg ao Osho, ssn. 11:3 9-4 5-2 1-9 4-2 61
includes Baltae Island
Wee's e le phabeele ales SO | 30 1-5 | 20 15 3:5
Mtns Fee, ahs ls 38 2-0 1:2 1:8 0-8 2-6
includes Dalwaii Island |
AT ths dad op backe 58 53 43 05 |) 10 1:5
A teeettigete lit 7-0 5-0 1:2 2-0 38 58
(a |
Totals Bentinck Island.. | 56-8 44-5 29-2 12-3 15:3 27-6
Sweers Island ........... 58 42 | 39 1-6 0:3 19
Allen Island ............- 4-8 2:8 2-6 2-0 0-2 2-2
Horseshoe Island .......- Os 02 0-2 0-6 — 0-6
All others ............0.. 18 | O09 0-9 0-9 — 0-9
Totals other Islands .... 13-2 8-1 7-6 Bel 0-5 5-6
Totals all Islands ...... 70-0 52-6 | 36:8 17-4 15:8 33-2
|

From these calculations it is apparent that the total area of the
islands, inelnding their littoral, is about 70 square miles of which some
53 square miles are land. There are large areas of interior claypan
covering 30 per cent of this land surface. Areas of littoral comprise
approximately 25 per cent of the island area. As indicated elsewhere
in this paper this was the most important part of their territory,

At first sight there seems to be little direct relationship between
total-areas of-land or land-plus-reef, and population. If we compare
the figures for 1940 when the area was being used at about greatest
pressure, just as the intensified interhordal fighting broke out, fore-
shadowing the collapse of their regime, we see many difficulties in
interpreting land use among them directly in terms of persons per
square mile.

304 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A Baiadilt man gave us one clas. Dolnoro 8, U, and X people
have reef areas which they can work throughout both the N.W. and
S.E, trade wind seasons, their N.W. season fish traps, ete., being built
on the lee side, and so proteeted, and the rest protected during the
opposite season, Some other hordes-people can only be sure of fish
supplies for about one-half of the year becanse fishing is often difficult
ou a windward shore in boisterous weather. Such folk have to depend
to a larger extent on estuaries and the foods in mangrove swamps.
The people of dolnoro S have hard rock reefs and can build very
substantial fish traps denied to some others who have only fragile
coral to work with. If these fucts are accepted as providing adjust-
ments to the erude figures of area of littoral, the most marked
relationship between population and area is between reef and man;
the least exact relationship heing hetween uplands and population,
It must be stressed that the nplands are only relatively so, because
nowhere are they much higher than about 35 feet, except on some
sandhills near the northern end of the island. The density of popula-
tion for the whole of Bentinck Island area in 1940 (the last year when
all were present) was 1.7 persons per square mile of total land and reef
surface, or Over 6.8 persons for each square mile of reef. Since part
of the total area is inaccessible, and only used at some risk (as
indicated by two tragie episodes accompanying efforts to reach Allen
Island in 1940 and 1947) only about 14 square miles of reef were in
constant use, i.¢., aver 8 persons obtained their food on each square
mile of reef,

These figures are remarkably high for a ‘‘stone age’’ people. In
the southern parts of Australia, even in areas of high rainfall the
fignres for the most dense populations seemingly went no higher than
about one person per two square miles,

This may point up a fact that strand-dwelling populations could
have been dominant ones during some parts of the Old Stone Age.
Tf this be so the constartly changing sea levels of Glacial and Inter-
glacial times may have wiped out much of the record of man’s early
culture history, either by sweeping the relies of his oceupation into
littoral marine deposits or otherwise destroying them.

POPULATION STATISTICS FOR BENTINCK ISLAND

The population figures between 1948 and 1960 are controlled hy
the official records and by birth and death registers preserved on
Mornington Island. For the period between 1910 and 1948 the data
is that remembered by Kaiadilt people and passed to the present

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK [SLAND 305

writer in the form of genealogical information. Providers of data
included some who were already from 10 to 15 years of age in 1910
and hence are probably reasonably reliable witnesses, as far back as
about that year. They and most of the other persons belonging to
the island furnished their individual genealogical data, When this
had been cross-checked and linked together with the similar state-
ments from other sources, so much of the data fell together that 4
relatively complete record was obtained,

The statisties for the earliest years of the century, 1900-1910, are
prebably less reliable and are minimal, since they lack data on some
infants who died while yormg and on some old people. Loss of
knowledge of older people extended to such details as the names of
their totems, less often the birth place name; seldom were birth place
name and totem both forgotten for any one person,

Approximations to ages were worked ont on all available informa-
tion. Various marker dates were available, Halleys Comet, the loss
of the ship Douglas Mawson which sent touch flotsam ashore, known
major cyclones, the passage of different types of ships trading to
Boroloola and other Gulf ports were usefnl. The landings of Dr,
W. Roth, the Protector of Aborigines for North Queensland, in 1901,
the beginning of trepang fishing near the island by Mornington
Islanders, and the several known attempts of missioners to contact
the islanders at intervals of several years have furnished time marker
information. The succession of births was established for very many
people, The raw information, when examined for internal consistency,
proved to give a realistic picture of the interrelations and vital
statistics of these people. Principal difficulties encountered were in
establishing generation level of a few of those whose -ngati or birth-
place names and totemic ones were the same in two suceessive
generations. A typical example of this was the man who is recorded
in the List of people as W2 whose -ngati name was not obtained
because of his partial misidentification with his son W3. The identifi-
cation was made the more difficult becanse, at his father’s death, Wa
took one of his father’s wives as his own, so that at first it was
thought there was only one man involved.

The killings of people by a white raid about 1918 resulted in the
stated deaths of eleven people. It is interesting to note how quickly
this gap in the ranks was filled by new births. Statistically the injury
eaused merely a ripple in the population curve.

Tn the last deeade, wnder the Presbyterian Mission regime 10
infant deaths have occurred, when the population level lay between

306 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

72 and 80 persons. In the previous decade 8 children in all were
remembered as having died, several of them about the time of stress
between 1944 and 1949, Allowing for the greater population and the
greater stress the loss was proportionately the same and could be
carried in rough statistics as an annual loss of one child. For the
1920-1929 and 1930-1939 periods only 4 children in each of the periods

126

100

TOTAL POPULATION
of the
KAIADILT TRIBE OF BENTINCK ISLAND

20 (adjusted figures)
1900 — 1960
YEARS

PERSONS

1900 i910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960

Fig. 1. Adjusted figures for the total population of the Kaiadilt tribe of Bentinck
Island, 1900-1960, The data includes the people removed from Allen Island and held at
Aurukun between 1941 and 1953.

are remembered as having died in infancy. This may suggest that
the statistics are warped by lack of records of up to 6 children per
decade. In the 1920-1940 period this suspected loss possibly was of
minor significance and may be carried as a deficiency in record of one
child per year for the period 1920-1929 and none for the other decade.
For the two periods 1900-1909, 1910-1919 at least one additional person

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 307

per annum should perhaps be added to make an adjusted population
figure, Itis more difficult to check the data prior to 1920 for adults who
may have lived but who are not remembered by name, Inspection of the
genealogies enable rough estimates of corrections for this deficiency
to be suggested, The addition of an arbitrary figure of 5 persons for
the 1900-1909 and 2 for the period 1910-1919 has been allowed to
prevent any undue warping of the data through existence of adult
persons who were present but whose data has not been recovered.
The parentage of persons born prior to the 1900 period is frequently
listed as unknown, The mother has been carried in statistics until
at least two years after the birth of the last child and the male parent
until the year of the child’s birth, as a minimum,

With the corrections listed above, the statistics on the Bentinck
Islanders, as shown in the attached graph (fig. 1), can be accepted as
fully covering the population from 1900-1920 and without any correct-
ing: figures should be valid for the perind from 1920-1960 within the
limits of + 1 person in any one year.

The loose data available for age determination may have intro-
daced an error whose magnitnde is difficult to estimate, It seems
possible that the data can be accepted as reasonably correct since the
known dates of birth of children in the 1950-60 decade has enabled
the ealenlation of a birth rate which suggests that earlier statisties
are coneordant even though developed from the less reliable gourees,
For the purpose of the present relatively ernde analysis they are
accepted as correet,

It must be noted that the breakdown by dolnoro of birth, in the
second diagram (fig, 2), does not indieate directly the size of each
breeding dolnoro group. A married woman usnally lives with the
dolnorodangka listed as father of her children; the assembly of the
data to show the actual breakdown, at any given time, of the dolnoro
into breeding nnits, is a separate task which may require the acqnisi-
tion of further data on such facts as the mean period of widaw-hood
between marriages (probably not great, although in a few known
instances extended for years after the death of the husband) and the
periods over which women visit the dolnoro of their male parent after
marriage (said at times to be considerable). The differences between
the two methods of listing dolnoro populations may not lead to very
great differences in statistical detail because inter-dolnoro marriages
are probably all on a one for one exchange basis, except where the
women have been taken and held as the result of killings, Because of

308 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the existence of a system of vendetta, such stealings are likely to
balance out since a male of one dolnoro is likely to be killed in revenge
for the death of a man of the other, In the larger dolnoro a propor-
tion of the women are kept in marriage within the dolnoro of their
male parent. This type of endogamous marriage has sanction, as
being the best one, by men of dolnoro S, T and U and X, although men
of the other dolnoro, whose numbers are fewer, consider other
marriage ways are better. In 122 listed marriages 26 or 21 per cent
were endogamous, i.¢., were within the dolnoro. The percentages for
different dolnoro ranged from 0 per cent to 36 per cent as follows:

5 36 per cent, 'T 18 per cent, U 17 per cent, X 14 per cent, but V,
W, Y and Z men’s marriages were all with women of other dolnoro,

DATA REGARDING CAUSES OF DEATH

From the statements of aborigines and Mission registers an
attempt has been made to classify the causes of death for the period
1910-1960 and to record them as percentages of all deaths :—

Per cent.
Natural causes... ., ., ..u. 0... .. 58
Killings by Kaiadilt persons . ... 18
DrOWnieet pr be fhe tw eas a 19
Cause of death unknown... ..., ., 8
Killings by Europeans .. .. .. -. .. 7 (3 occasions)
99

There was one case of suspected suicide of a woman after the
drowning of her child, one case of snake bite and another of jelly-fish
stinging. Among the stated ‘‘natural’’ causes of death was one
“dying of cold and rain in the South-Hast Trade wind season
(winter)’’; the drownings ineluded those lost at night by the rising of
the tide during fogs, when direction is obsenred. The last named is
® special hazard determined by the fact that low tides fall always at
night in this part of the Gulf of Carpentaria, necessitating much
gathering of food by night. A complementary type of death hazard
was that indicated by the relatively numerous instanees of killings of
men, assailed by night as they came ashore, carrying the food they
had taken.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 309

DEATHS
No. of deaths Approximate
Period. over 5-year Mean annual rate
period. population. per 1,000,
1910-1914... ..... 6 105 11
TOTGSGIO tii ae LF 107 al
1920-1924... ,... 6 110 10
1935-1929 -. nays cs 23 112 41
19380-1934 ........ Ul 111 20
1935-1939 . 1. 1... 12 115 21
1940-1944 . 0 0. 22 120 35
1945-1949. ., .. .. O51 100 100
1950-1954. 2... .. 24 74 65
1955-1959 . .. 1... 3 88 7

In the period of greatest stress, 1947-48, the death rate was near
to 260 per 1,000. The high rate in the 1915-1919 period can be
attributed to a raid by white men about the year 1918, when 11 persons
were killed.

The rather higher death rate in the 1925-1929 period is put down
to natural causes since the period was relatively free of interhordal
conflicts (20 deaths by natural causes to only one killing). The similar
interval 1940-1944, was the reverse, there being 12 killings to 9 deaths
by natural causes. At the beginning of this period the population was
building up to its highest point (123 in 1942). In the 1945-1949 period
there were 23 deaths by natural causes and 11 by killings. Another
important death factor was that of drowning,

In 1947 factional fights intensified and Dongkororeingati Kulkitj,
abandoning most of his wives, but taking four and many of his
children, fled from Bentinck Island with the intention of reaching Allen
Island, The rafts were caught in a storm and Dongkororeingati lost
his life together with thirteen others. The greatest previous recorded
number in a single year was in 1940 when the same attempted journey
to Allen Island was made by Minakuringati and 14 companions while
escaping from a fight. This resulted in the drowning of three persons.

The first of these drownings constitutes the greatest single
disaster recalled by living Kaiadilt people, paralleled only by the raid
by an unidentified white man with helpers who rode a horse across
Bentinck Island, accompanied by dogs, shooting down all he could see.

310 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

This happened about the year 1918; 11 persons are stated to have been
either killed or died later from the effects of the attack.

Allen Island is seen to be an escape valve for over-population;
but, the escape door leads escapees towards probable elimination.
First hazard for an escaping group was the chance of drowning. The
two recorded major movements of people to Allen Island from
Bentinck in 1940 and 1947 had survival ratios as follows:—

No. No. Percentage

departing. drowned, survival.
194yt WW t. 38 be be 8, TUS 3 80
GOST og ag as oe etx g-y ee al 14 26

The Allen Island group of 1940 probably went there a little prior
to the 11th May, 1940, since Aurukun records indicate a child,
subsequently given the white name of Ann, was born on or about that
date, Other records show she was born at the northernmost point of
Allen Island.

The 1940 party did have children who were born there in 1940-
1941, but it is a fact that no person listed as a Kaiadilt who was
remembered as having been born between 1900 and 1940 had Allen
Island given as place of birth, This may indicate the relative rarity
of return to Bentinck Island from that island. A statement from an
old Lardiil woman suggests that people who went to Allen Island were
subject to attack from roving mainland natives, When there were
people on Allen Island the fact was known to all because of their
campfire smokes.

The geographical classification used by Kaiadilt recognizes two
categories of island, The smaller islands were ealled Dangkawaridulk,
‘(men absent lands’? while Bentinck Island was ‘‘land of all’’, or
Dulkawalnged, ‘his governed the allotment of dolnoro territories—
the offshore islands were regarded only as appendages to, and not
integral parts of dolnoro,

Return to Bentinck Island evidently was possible as is suggested
by the probability that people of dolnoro X are descendants of one
of the six persons seen by Flinders in 1802. One of the women of this
dolnoro possesses a story which seems to match the one Flinders gives
of his encounter in 1802; survival of the story itself implies that
return trips to Bentinck Island were made, as is indeed maintained as
true by all Kaiadilt persons,

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 311
GROWTH AND DECLINE OF THE BENTINCK ISLAND
POPULATION

Between 1915 and 1935 the population of Bentinck Island, with
111 persons, seemed almost to be at its asymptotic maximum yalue,
Its Joss of people by a white raid was made good after an eight-year
period of oscillation of the population graph. It rose slowly, however,
to 123 by 1942; this was its maximum near the onset of a period of
continuous decline.

Tf the adjusted figure of 105 for the population in 1910 is taken
as a starting point, it would seem that there was a relatively slow
and steady rise of one person in each second year or about 5 per cent
per deeade from 1910 to 1940,

Under the Mission regime, which began in 1948, there was a
decline but after the effects of the more than five years of strain had
been overcome by 1962 the population began again td increase, and
at a rate higher than when the people were on Bentinck Island,
approaching 10 per cent per decade in the new environment. Intro-
duction of other blood, now just beginning, because they are im contact
with others, may interfere with the lnrther progress of what has been
an interesting little biological experiment from which much ean be
learned by study of its earlier history.

When the population is broken down into its constituent dolnoro
or horde-like groups, figures for both the growth and decline of
population are seen to be unevenly distributed between the dolnoro,

Kach dolnoro seems to have had its own period of onset of
expansion in the carlier part of this centnry and to have heen
differently affeeted by the period of stress. The after-results of the
period of stress differ also for each dolnoro, For example, increase in
numbers since this time has been largely concentrated in the 8 doluoro,
Populations of all the other dolnoro have remained practically statie,
while 8 dolnoro population has increased from 21 to 29 persons (i.e,
by nearly 40 per cent). The leading man of this dolnoro is a dominant
individual who has 5 wives and 7 children, It is of some interest that
his dolnoro has had the largest percentage of marriages within the
horde (36 per cent) and it has been numerically the strongest dolnoro
in each year for which records are available. Two of this man’s
wives are from his own dalnoro and these have borne four of his
ehildren,

A closer look at the history of this and other dolnoro may be of
interest, for while the Kaiadilt were an expanding group in the earlier

312 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

o
no0°0 1910 {920

1949

1330
KAIADILT TRIBE OF BENTINCK ISLAND

POPULATION ( by dolnoro 5

Fig. 2. Population of the Kaiadilt (ribo of Bentinck Island, showing numbers
composing the cight dolnoro, ‘Tha top line shows the uncorrected figure for the whole
population, 1900-1960,

years of the century the rates of growth of individual dolnoro were
very different,

In the dolnoro 8 which already seems to have had the largest
population in 1900, the growth was rather slow, increasing from 20
to 25 in the first decade and rising to 27 in 1918; two men were killed
by whites about that year and there were 24 present in 1920; a decade
later they numbered 25, rising to 29 in 1940 and to 32, their peak
population, in the same year as the top population of 123 for the
Kaiadilt as a whole. Until the last year of the subsequent period of
stress this population of 32 remained, with a 25 per cent drop to 24
m the last few months, principally from drownings.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 313

On arrival on Mornington Island they showed relatively few
after-effects of the period of stress and their numbers increased
steadily until in 1960 they were only two short of their highest known
earlier population,

The dolnoro T population originally was small. It expanded
slowly and steadily throughout the period under consideration from
1900 until 1942, Their territory is on the unsheltered eastern side and
several drownings on reefs exposed to rough seas in the sonth-east
trade winds season helped to keep their numbers in check. Several
also died by drowning during the period of stress after 1940. Those
rescued in 1947 and 1948 were weak and some of them diced after
reaching Mornington Island. Infants who were stillborn and ones
who died shortly after birth were relatively numerous in this dolnoro,
Tt has not increased its numbers.

The population of dolnoro U commenced to expand about 1906,
Tt suffered loss of three persons during the raid by white men about
1918, This gave a slight check to population numbers but there was
recovery by 1926, With minor oscillations this population increased,
showing no marked signs of stress, despite five killings about 1942;
they only commenced a decline from 25 to 20 in 1944. Drownings and
the side effects of their experiences before August 1947 drastically
reduced their number to 14 in 1948. Some died after they were rescued
from their island. Women capable of child hearing were few; young
males predominated among those who survived. Only one child (a
girl of Kaiadilt descent only on her father’s side) has heen born to
a member of the dolnoro since then. Young men of the dolnoro who
are now in their twenties, have not yet begun to produce children,
although some of them are married,

Dolnoro V whose territory was on the south coast, with a shore
line much exposed to the south-eastern trade winds was a small group
of four, at the beginning of the century, Its period of expansion was
between 1906 and 1918 to 11 persons. Tt suffered several losses during
the raid by white men in that year, and, except for a temporary
expansion in mid-tweuties, its numbers have dropped rather steadily
and slowly since then. During the period of stress in the 1940's total
numbers fell by one only, although three persons were killed in
quarrels, In 1960 there were only four surviving persons, the same
number as were remembered as being alive near the turn of the
century.

In 1900 dolnoro W population was smaller than for V, with only
four known persons, but increased steadily to a maximum of 12 in

314 RECORDS OF THE 8,A. MUSEUM

1942. Those who escaped drowning when voyaging to Allen Island
in 1940, temporarily disappeared from the Kaiadilt population after
being apprehended for the murder on that island in 1941, Taken to
Aurukun Mission they were not again united with their kinsfolk on
Mornington Island until September, 1953. Of those who remained on
Bentinek Island, in 1940, three men were drowned during raft accidents
in the 1940's,

Dolnore X was the third largest with 19 persons at its period of
greates! expansion in 1920, but although it has held third place in rank
most of the time until now, it was smaller, with only 9 persons in 1900.
This number is the same as if possesses in 1960, Females predominate
in the dalnoro. In 1925-1927 there was a spate of deaths, mostly of
middle-aged to old women. Only one adult male of the dolnoro
remained in 1940. When attacked and deprived of some of his wives,
this man with other men and children fled to Allen Island, whence
he was taken fo Aurnkun, One of the women of the dolnoro who
remained on Beutinek Island was killed in a quarrel during the period
of stress in the 1940’s and one old lady died.

A predominance of young and young adult females, some without.
children, enabled the people of X dolnora who remained on Bentinek
to pass through the diffienlt years with relatively undepleted numbers.

Dolnoro Y. In 1900 there were 5 persons in this dolnoro, in 1960
there were only 4. In only one decade (1935 to 1944) was it much
larger, with a maximum population of 10 in 1940. The period of
stress reduced the group to 5 by 1948 there being three killings and
one accidental drowning. Two who were weak when they were rescued
in 1948, died shortly after being rescued, leaving only 3 in 1952,

Dolnoro Z was small with only 5 persons in 1900, of whom four
were males, Population began to increase in 1920 and was maintained
between 10 and 11 from 1927 until 1943. By 1940 the sex ratio was
equal; then there were deaths by killing of two young girls in quarrels
over wives. Deaths of two young men followed and a male killing,
prior to June, 1947. This cansed extinction of the male line. Two
women in their thirties survived the period of stress and are now in
their forties, Their later born children are reckoned, of course, in
other dolnoro,

Commencing with one part-Kaiadilt child born at Aurukwn in 1943
and later ones born on Mornington Island, a small group of mixed
Kaiadilt/other tribe hybrids, is bnilding up; there were, in 1960, five
such persons. Properly to be counted as part of the Kaiadilt popula-
tion there are also five persons of three tribes, from elsewhere, who

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 315

have had clandestine associations with or have married into, and
produced children for the Kaiadilt community since they have made
contact with the outside world.

FACTORS INVOLVED IN POPULATION CHANGES

Decline:

Study of the Bentinck Island population suggests that four
primary factors may have led to the period of stress and catastrophic
decline in the population after 1940:—

(a) Growth of population to beyond the limit of capacity of
the area in which they lived,

(b) Conflict between the hordes,

(d) Catastrophes (e.g., tidal wave, mass drownings).

The climatic vagary may have been instrumental in triggering
off the interhordal conflicts which marked the first stage in the
catastrophic decline of the 1940’s,

It would appear that in a period of stress following one of
expansion population diminishes by losses caused in a variety of ways.
These can be listed roughly in the order of their importance and
impact on the Bentinck Islanders :—

1. Deaths of infants born during the difficult time.

2. Relative lack of births during the period of stress,

3. Inter-hordal killings of adult males and females.

4. Deaths by weakening, especially of older females, and particu-

larly after giving birth.

5. Drownings through ‘‘foreed’? movements as well as through
attempts at exploitation of the more dangerous parts of their
littoral (perhaps aggrayated by weakness due to starvation,
combined with a possible lowering of judgment on the part of
those participating, under stress of necessity, causing the
taking of undue risks).

These deaths added to those which would have oceurred under normal
conditions had a marked effect on population numbers,

Recovery:
Young adult males and young females tended to survive in greater
numbers than others. After recovery from the stress (in this case

316 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

with a changed environment due to Mission contact and medical
attention) births of children were numerous and, after some losses due
to a high infantile mortality, some possibly owing to exposure to new
diseases in the changed environment, population numbers advanced
steadily within the next 10 years. A factor delaying the rise in
population after the period of stress was the early deaths of numbers
of children who were born to mothers who had been weakened by their
experiences in 1947 and 1948. The medical records of the Mission are
not very complete but they indicate that many persons were treated
for ‘‘anaemia’’ during the period 1949-1952.

INTRODUCTION TO LIST OF THE INHABITANTS OF
BENTINCK ISLAND, GIVEN AS APPENDIX A

This list contains, in compressed form, the whole of the
genealogical data available in June, 1960, for the Kaiadilt peaple.
From it ean be reconstructed the genealogies and basic population
data used for the observations made in this report,

Males and females are listed separately, according to their
patrilocal and patrilineal horde-like units, called dolnore. These
dolnoro arbitrarily have been assigned letter symbols trom 8 to Z,
because they do not have fixed names of their own.

The -ngati or birth-place name of each person is first listed, when
available, in capitals and lower case for males, in full eapitals for
females, Then follows a totemie name, usually that of some food,
oecasionally that of a natural force or a feature of the landscape. The
totemie name is itself followed by the European name, where one has
been given to the person after white contact. The numbers with an f
following the symbol representing the dolnoro, are females, those
without are males, So far as possible the persons of each dolnoro
are arranged according to succession of birth and the children also
are so listed within the parental entries; a few casual anomalies of
arrangement occur, usually heeause of the late arrival of correcting
data, A few persons who cannot be assigned to dolnoro are listed
under the symbol O following the main list, and there is an appendix
detailing five persons not of the Kaiadilt tribe who have had marital
associations with Bentinck Islanders since they emerged from their
long period of isolation on the Southern Wellesley Islands.

Since the -ngati name of the individnal incorporates the name of
the place of birth it is not generally repeated except when there are
anomalies or there is a seeming conflict between place of birth and

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND u17

assignation of dolnoro, Informants usually were careful te draw
attention to such discrepancies, Offered explanations were ones such
ag ‘his mother had him when she was away from lis country’’ or
‘*she was born in her new father’s country’’, where the new born
child had a stepfather.

Married women live with the members of the husband’s dolnoro,
and her children are dolnorodangka (dolnoro folk) of her husband’s
horde.

On the death of a husband the wife passes either to her husband’s
eldest son, or to her husband’s brother, whichever is the older, or
may be passed on into another dolnore. Her children by the new
husband fall into his dolnoroe. Children born just after the death
of a prior husband usually are considered to fall in the dolnoro
of the deceased man. In a few cases, usually of recent date the dolnoro
assignation remained in doubt until resolved after discussion. The
probability is that the ‘‘value’’ of the dolnoro as a territorial unit
has declined in the twelve years since the people have abandoned
their home,

All births and deaths after 1947 were recorded in the Mornington
Island Mission Register. Some late entries, based on estimated dates
of year of birth were made. Usually these can be recognized as
estimates by the arbitrary giving of 1 July as the birth date, Marliest
Mission assigned dates of this type may go back to 1941, and in some
instances may be no more reliable than ages estimated in this study
by other means. All the Mission data appears to have heen re-written
into the present Register in 1953, some records being from lists on
loose sheets of paper. Copies have been made of all available registers
and lists, up to June 1960, and are on file in the South Australian
Mnsewm collection,

Blood genetics data is given after the other personal and family
information, In case of later enquiry if may be noted that the
temporary field numbers assigned to blood tests are uot recorded
herein. They were not the same as the listed anthropometric numbers.
The blood data for each person is set out in the followmeg sequence —
ABO, MNSs, Rh, P, Le’, Fy’, K, Webb, Jk*. ‘Webb’ is a rare blood
group being described by R. T. Simmons and J. A, Albrey in the
Medical Journal of Anstralia 1962 (im press), The tests were done
in the Commonwealth Seram Laboratories, Melbourne, by R,. T,
Simmons, and the results are being discugsed in a paper by Simmons,
R. T,, Tindale, N, B., and Birdsell, J, B. (im press 1962).

318 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES CITED

Harl, G. W., 1846: Journ. Geogr. Soc. London 16: 239-251.
Fairbridge, R. W., 1958: Trans. New York Acad. Sci., II, 20: 471-482.
——— 1960: Scientific American, New York 202, (5): 70-78.

Simmons, R, T., Tindale, N. B. and Birdsell, J. B., 1962 (in press):
Amer. Journ, Physical Anthrop.

Tindale, N. B., 1961: Tenth Pacific Science Congress, Honolulu.
Abstracts: pp. 87-88,

Tindale, N. B., 1962: Records of 8. Austr. Museum, Adelaide 14:
pp. 259-296, plates 8-9 and map A.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 10-11

PLATE 10.

Fig. 1. A deserted Bentinck Island cold season camp showing shell water vessels and break-
wind, with pile of native yams in foreground. Photograph taken about 1927, before
direct white contact. (Photo. attributed to the late R. H. Wilson.)

Fig. 2. Kaiadilt people moving from a temporary camp during their first voluntary encounter
with a European, at Baltae, in late 1927, (Photo. attributed to the late R. H. Wilson.)

PLATE 11.

Fig. 1. Group of timorous Bentinck Islanders as seen by W. Roth in June, 1901. The central
figure was identified by present day islanders as holding a tjilanganda or mariwu
(crude biface stone implement) in his hand. (Photo, by J, F. Bailey.)

Fig. 2. Several Kaiadilt men and a woman dancing before Lardiil men 25 June, 1945, on
the occasion of their first brief visit to Mornington Island; the woman in the back-
ground is now the oldest living Kaiadilt person, KENAKENABAJANGATI (Sf. 8 of
the accompanying list). (Photo. by R. E. Davies.)

Rue, S.A. Museen Vou, 14, Phare 10

Ta fure page VAS.)

Ree, S.A. Museum Von. 14, Phare 11

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 319

APPENDIX A

LIST OF THE KNOWN INHABITANTS OF BENTINCK ISLAND, QUEENSLAND,
TO JUNE 1960

Males of Dolnoro 8

8.1, Dongkororeingati (birth place name) kulkitji (shark) (totem); born ciraa 1865 at
otpkororei, died c 1918 at Lokoti (places on Beutinek Island seo map); mode of
death, shot by white man; aged 5% years; father ; mother ; married

WEI; 3 children, 5.3, B64, 8.5.

5.2, Tondologah bidjarupa (dugong); b, e, 1865, d. o. 1930; speared while in the sea at
Kungari by one of the brothers of Zf.4, aged ¢. 65 yeara; f, 5 om. a |
wives Sf3, Xf.1, XL3; 9 children, Sf.11, 8£12 (by 'S£.3), St 8, 5.10, B£10 ¢by
KP.1), 8.8, 8.15, 8.17, BtA7 (by NX£.3)-

8.3. Kongurnngati kanatu (oil fish); b. o, 1895, d, & 1915; killed st Kongara in a fight, by
prospective wite’s brother; aged co 20 years; was. to have married 8£.8; f 8,1;
m, Wf.l, The personalities of 8.3 and T.2 seem to have become confused in some
informanta’ winds and the tecord as given may be inaccurate. They evidently were
step brothers who were born some years apart,

8.4, Rerumoingati kanatu (ofl lish) and/or airpuput (small mnckerel) ; b,c. 1885, d, ¢, 1939;
sprared at Wanaratji, died’at Dangkankuru, aged ¢. 44 years, death ascribed to Y.2;
t.———_; ti, + Warried BI) (widow of U.22(1)), 8£2 (probably widow of
U.22), UF9; 7 child S£13 (by 8.2), no children by either 8£22 of ULY,

Note: This man’s number is ont of logival sequence because of a lute revision.

8.5. Dongkororeingati kulkitji (shark) (also named Odeitepetepe), white namo Terry, this
name firsh given during a brief visit to Mornington Islund Missiou in 1945; the
first. external contuct With whites; b. ¢ 1895, d. 1947; drowned on raft voyage from
Bentinck to Allao Island with many othera, aged a. 53 years; £. 8.1; m. WL1; marriod
18 wives; he took only four of them when be aud a party fled to Allon Island after a
fight in 19475 threw ol these wives and 7 uf his children wero among those drowned
with him. Wis wives were, 8£.8, 87.9 (widow of 'T4), Sf.10 (widow of T.% and 3.6),
8f.13, BE14, 8.21, Th (a widow), T£.6 (widow of ? T.3), UEL8 (widow of U1
and U.6), Uf, 4, Ufl4, UF18, X45, in addition he had relations with the untoarried
Hirl UL16. 16 children, 8.14, 546, St.20 (by S£.8), 8.20 (by S£.9), S£.16, AL18, 8.26
(by Sf.13), S£.228 and V£.3 (by Sf.14, but Y dolnoro attribution of second child
not explained), Sf.15, 8.18, St.23 (by Uf who was said to have been the first or
eldeat wite), $£,19 (by X#.5), 8.22, 8.25, 842 (mother’s name not recorded), Also
he inherited 10 step-children and his widows had 4 by subsequent husbands; 5f.30
(mother Ut,16, unmarried) ta attributed to him; this child was adopted and treated
by Vf40 and 8.17,

8.6. Berumoingati ngorongkolt ( ); b. a. 1895, d, o. 1941 at Wanaratji of apear
wourld inflicted by Wt who esenped to Allen Teland (where in 1941 he shared the
killing of n Mornington Islander), aged e. 47 years; f. 7 ms 7 married
8f,10 (widow of 1.4), 4 step-children, T.10, T.11, T.14, TY,13, his widow married 8.5.

8,7, Wartadangati kulkitji (share) also kalbara (white crane) and tjilangind (small rock
oyster); b. ©. 1895, d. ¢. 1944 at Rokotl of a. throat infection, with blood, condition
known as dorongk, aged ¢. 49 yeara; fy ; mH, ; married Sf.7, UF.6, W£.7,
Vii7. Six childven, V.5, Vf.8 (by Bf.7), V.6, UL17 (hy £6), VE10, V.7 (by VE.7),
Note: The dolnoro associations are vot understood and need checking in the field;
it seems possible that he echauged from V dolnoro to 8 but his children remained in
W; offer instances of such a change wero cited)

8.8, Markarukingati toato (rainbow), white name King Alfred, also called Dingkararangati;
bh. & 1897, il. 1947 (before Sune), killed at Lokotai by 8,16, aged c, 50 years; waa
killor of 2.8; £. 8.2; m, X#.8; married 6 wives, Sf.16, Sf.18, Uf.7, UF.A5, U£17, Zf.2;
4 children, 8.21 (by 5£.16), 8£.27, 8f.29 (by Sf.18), Bf.28 (by Zf.2), Note: Ut.20
was his atepehild (by Z£.2) whose real parent has not beon recorded; three of his
widows passed to his younger brother 8,17,

320 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

5.9, Tondoingati bidjarupa (dugong), b, c. 1895, d. c, 1945, killed at Maran by Z.7 and Z.&,
when he returned trom fishing at night time, aged ¢. 50 years; £. 5 mM, ;
married Uf.10; 2 children, Sf21, St.25,

8,10. Tondoingati bolfoko (quail) also called Bilinapangati, while name Kelly, b. ¢. 1900,
d, Ovtober 1950 of sickness while in transit. by airplane from Mornington Island to
Cloneurry Hospital, aged ¢. 50 years; f. 8.2; m. Xf.1; married 4 wives, Uf.7 (widow
of $8.1], 8.7, 8.8), Uf17 (widow of 8.4), T49 (widew of 0,13, 1,10); 4 children,
8.24 (by Uf.7), 8.23, 8£.33 (by 0.17), 8.30 (hy T£.9); he received Uf3 (widow
of U.6) but passed her to Vi,

B.11. Tondoingati bidjarupa (dugong) also orobari (bonefish), b. 6. 1920, d. 1945, after
Jone, at Kongara, killad when he returned from fishing, by two men; f-
ml. j married unrecorded woman and Uf.7; 2 childven, Sf.24, Sf.26 (by UY,7)

8.12, —————. [non of BALTAENGATI]; b. c. 1904, d. ¢. 1918 at Burumnangi, killed by
white man, aged ¢, 14 years; f- ; om. TE2,

8.13. Berumoingati airuput (small mackerel); b, c, 1905, d. ¢ 1925 of stomach sickness, agud
ec, 20 years, not married; f. 8.4; m. 8f,2,

8.14. Tartirukingati (Tadukingati) keullitji (shark), white name Buddy; b, c. 1916, d, 1947
before August; killed at Markaruki by 8.8, just prior to S.8’s own death also by
killing; aged c. 31 years; newly married; £. 8.5; m, S£,8; married Uf.14, no children.

§.15. Kongorangati dawart ( ), be eo. 1917, d. October 1943, shot by R.A.A.F.
personel during an unprovoked attack with speara at Milt, « 26 years, unmarried.
, 8.2) m, Xf.3,

8,16, Bokanaijarupaugati kambo (rock cod) also debedebe (rock cod), white names Alec,
Alex, Alec Allen (also called Ngarangati, corrupted ag Naranatjil); b, o. 1920,
removed from Allen Island to Mornington Island 10 June or 2 July 1947, a survivor
of the raft disaster in whieh his father and others perished, living June 1960, age
co 40 years; f. 8.5; m. Sf£.8; married Sf£.13 (widow of 8.5, his father), Sf.24;
4 children, 8£.34, 9.35, 8,86, 5.39 (by Sf,24),

6.17. Korerungati worobari (bone fish), also lokoti (sheoak tree); white name Perey
Loogatha; b, c. 1922, arrived Mornington Tsland 4 Angust 1947, living June 1960,
age o, 38 yours; measured as G1. no, 1, f, 8.2; m, Xf.3; married 8f,16, Sf,18,
Vi.10, 2.2, Zf4; 7 children, 8f.32 (by Sf.16), 8.28, 8£.36, 8.40 (by B£.18), 8.32,
8,37, S038 (by Vf,10); no childven by other wives; the child S£30 reared by
VFO was adopted from Uf.16, its supposed father wns 8.5, Blood types:—B, Mss,
Ry Ry, Py—, Leta—), Fyt(ato, K— Webb—,

§.18. Kaharatjingati boltoko (quail); white name Pat; b, ©. 1922, arrived Mornington Island
18 October 1948, living June 1960, age c, 88 years; fieasured as BI. no. 4; 2. 8.55
m, UF4; married (4 wives), 8f.17, ULls (whom he gave te T.13), W4, OF1;
8 children, Sf£.31, 8.29, 8.51, 87.35, 8.38, Sf£.57 (by 8f.17), 8.27 (by Ufa), 8.44
(by WE4), oo children by OF1. Blood types:—B, Mss, Ry Ry, Py, Leli—),
Fy(o+), K—, Webh—.

3.19. Tarurukingati morukudi ( ) also tungalngomoro ( di white name
Gilbert; b. ¢. 1922, armved Mornington Island 18 October 1948; d. 24 Septomber
1955 by drowning in & canoe accident off Andrew Island, aged ve: 83 years; f. 9.5;
m. Uf.2; married TE.7 (widow of 4.3, 2.2, U.10, 4.9), X£.8 (widow of 8.10), Xf417;
no children,

8.20, Kongarangati; b. ¢, 1995, d. o& 1985, aged c. 1 year; £. 8.5; m. B£,9; [see 5.41, ont
of place, should go here}.

8.21. Berumoingati bidjarnpa (dugong); b. c. 1984, d. c. 1946 of snake bite, aged a. 12
years; f, S85 m, Sfl16.

8.22. Rarukungati; b. ¢ 1938, d, 1947; drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck Island to
Allen Island, aged «. 9 years; f, S.6; m; +

8.23. Kongarangati taporora (sword shark), also lokoti (sheoak tree); white name Petor
Lugatia; b. ¢, 1989, arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960,
age c. 21 years; f. 8,10; m, UF17,

’
.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 321

S24. Dolkalatjingati boltoko (quail) ; white name Rogec; b, 1941, arrived Mornington Island
4 August 1947; living Jone 1960, age 19 years; f. 8.10; m, Uf.7-

8.25. Rokotangati; b. ¢, 1941; d. 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen
Island; aged «. 6 years; f. 8.5; m, ‘

8.26. Bokanaijarupangati (Bokamungati); b, o. 1942; d. 1947, drowned on raft, voyage from
Bentinck to Allen Island; aged c. 5 yeara; £, 8,5; m. Sf.138.

8.27, ——————. white name Horace; b, 1947-8 after arrival of mother at Mornington
Island; d. 28 December 1948 at Mornington Island; aged under 1 year; f, §.18;
m, Uf.13.

8.24, ——————- white name Robert; b, 9 January 1949 on Mornington Tsland; d. 9 January
1949; aged 1 day; f, 8.17; m. Sf.18.

8.29, ————— white nnme Maleoli; b, 16 January 1950 on Mornington Island; d. 22
January 1950; aged 6 days; f. 5.18; m. 8f.17.

§.30. Njinjilkingati (so named for a place given this name on Mornington Taland by Kaiadilt ;
not Bentinck Island), bidjarup (dugong); white name Duncan; b. 15 February 1950
on Mornington Island; living June 1960; aged 10 years 3 months; f, 8.10; 1m, TH£O9.

§.31, —_—_—— _banga (turtle); white name Glenn; b. 1951 on Mornington Tsland; died
before 1959; aged about 6-8 years; f. 8.18; m, §£,17.

8.42, —————. tjoanda (white porpoise); white name Geoffrey; b. 7 February 1952 on
Mornington Island; living June 1960; aged § years 4 months; f. 5.17; m. Vf.10.

8.24. —————— kamara (tone fish); white name Maloolin; b, 15 Apri] 1952 on Mornington

Island; liviag June 1960; aged 8 years 1 month; f. unknown; m, U£17 (widow of
8.10 for 1 year 6 moaths before birth of 8.33),

$.34 —_————- barnkaltji (malive companion); white nume Benjamin; b. 31 July 1953 on
Mornington Island; living June 1960; aged 6 yeara 1 months; f. 8.38; m. Wed.
3.45, ——_————_ wllite name Maxwell; b. 7 September 1953 on Mornington Island; d, 1962

of pneumonia; aged unter 8 months; f. 8.16; m. B24.

$36, —————— white name Rodney; b. 11 November 1954 on Mornington Island; living
Jime 1960; age 5 years 6 months; f, 5.16; m. BF2d

§.37. dangurt (mud crab) + white name Neil; b. 12 June 1955 on Morniagtou
Island; living June 1960; age 5 years 0 months; £8.17; m. V£.10.

$.38. ————— warunt (goana); White tame Harry; b. § September 1956 on Mornington
island; living June 1960; age 3 years months; f, 5.18; m, 8f.17-

$.39, ——_———-. white name Robin; b, 13 July 1957 on Mornington Island; living June
1940; age & yeurs 10 months; £5.16; mi, St.24,

8.40, ————— bidjarup (dugong) ; white name Gerald Baldagu; b. 39 Angust 1958 on

Mornington Island; living June 1960; uge 1 year 9 montha; fF, 8.17; m, S£18,
841. Berumoingati kanatu (oil fish); b. c. 1027; d 1947, drowned on rnft voyage from
Bentinck Island to Allen Island; aged c. 20 yours, The data on this man ia not.
firm. {, 3 Mk .
8.42, Tjodjongati; b. ¢, 1940; d. ¢, 1947, drowned on rift voyage from Bentinck to Allen
Islund; aged «. 7 years; 7. 5.9; my

Females of Dolnoro S

8f.1, DONGKOREINGA'TT banga (turtle); b, ¢ 1875; d. co 1925 of sickness at
Koogaranguri; uged ¢, 50 years; f,———, &. } Married U.22, 84 an
unrecorded T, man; children U7, UL5 (by U.22), T.6 (by 7), St13 (by 8.4)-

8f.2. TONDOINGATT; b. «, 1875; d. o. 1938 of sickness at Mardanukiz aged c. 58 years;
f. ; Th ; married U,22, 8.4; no children.

Sf, RENDJALKAURUNGATT tjudabari (fish hawk); b. ¢, 1883; d. after 1907 of sickness
at Medediaghki; aged over 24 years; f. ¢; om, ; married 8.2; previously
had had children by V.1; 4 children, V.4, V£.7 (by V,1), Bf11, 8f,12 (by 8,2),

Sf4. BANDARANGATI; b. ¢, 1890; d. c. 1910; aged c. 20 years; not murried; f. 8.1;
mM. .

322 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sf5, BEALURUNGATEY kulkitji (shark); b, o, 1892; A, ¢, 1925 of sickness al Baltae;
aged ¢, 33 years; F, 5 me i tparried Ud; 1 child, 0.12.

866, BERUMOINGATT; bh, ©, 1898; d, after 1915; £. ; mL ; marricl UAz
1 child, 1.18,

88.7. WINDTARUKAURUNGATTL karwark (queen fish); b. ¢ 1895; d. 0. 1928 of sickness
at Wedei; aged ¢. 38 years; f£. $m. ; harried 8.7; 2 children, V.5, V#£.8.

Si.8, KENAKENABAJANGATI bidjarup (dugong); white name VENUS; b, «, 1865,
arrived at Mornington Island 2 July 1947 from Alen Island; living June 19603
age ¢, 65 yeura; measured os BL2l; f, 8.2; m. NEL} married 8.6 (had been
promised to 8.3 but he was killed); 3 children, 8.14, 8.16, S£.20, Blood types:—
G, Mss, Ry fy, Py—, Le(u-), Fy(at+), K-,

Bf.9. DONGKALATJTNGATI (DOLKALATJINGATI) tjuriru (stingray); b, c. 1898; a
carly 1947, speared at night by S17 at Dangkankuru in mistuke for 8.8 during
general serimmage; aged c. 49 years; f ; Mm. ; married T4 and later
8.5; 3 children, T9, T.1 (by M4), 8.20 (by 8.5). The Kaiadilt woman first
mcauntered by Mornington Islander, Gully, on a teef, abot 1927,

Sf. TONDOINGATI (TONDURINGATI) bidjarupa (dugong); white name ROONGA;
b, o. 1907, urrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1900; age e.
53 years; measured as B20; f. 8.2; m, Sf; married 1.2, 8,6 and U.14;
children, T.10, T.11, T.14, Tt18 (by 'T.3 or S.6), U.21, ULe2 (by 0.14). Blood
fypes;—O, Mus, Ro, Py—, Le(a—), Py(a+), K-—, Webb—.

SfJi, DODJONAPANGATT tallwindi (frampet shell); b. c. 1907; d. co 1925 of aielnuss
at Njinjilki; not married; f, 8.2; m, S£.5, Note; Was born in % dolnora territory.

Sfi2. DANGGANGURUNGATI fiengunguru (queen fish) > b, ¢ 1910; do, 1928 of stomach
troublu; aged o, 18 years; f, 8.2; m, 82.4; newly married to 1.10 at time of death;
no ehiliren,

Sf.1s, WINDJAKUKAURUNGATI SEND TALS OBES STL barantan (tune fish)s
white name SARAT No, 1; b, ©. 1900; arrived on Mornington Island from Allen
Island 2 July 1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 60 years (could be 28 years older) ;
mrasured a8 BL, no, 1h (because of her Linck hair without greyness ele waa at first
considered much younger); f. By; m. S£.1; married 8.5 and 8.16; 3 children, Sta,
SP.18, 8.26 (by 8.5), Blood types: —B, MNss, Ry Ry, Py+, La(a—), Py(at+), K—

Sfl4. KARIKARIWANGATI mandatji (large eat fish); b. e. 1912; d, 1947, drowned on
raft voyage from Bentinele to Allen Island; aged ec. 85 yoarsy f, S43 m. S£.2;
married §.5 (also probable associations with Y.2); 2 children, Sf. 28 (by 8.5),
YL. (probably by Y.2).,

SE15, KONGARANGATT tjaparta (sole); b. o. 1916; d, ¢, 1918, by drowning, after people
had been chased out on to reefs by White innn, with dogs; aged «. 2 years; £..8,5;
ii, UF,4,

St.10. RENDJALKAURUNGATI tjolora (atone fish); white namo DONNA, also written ss
DONA and very incorreotly as NORMA; b. ¢ 1915, nreived on Mornington Island
4 August 1947; d, 23 December 1950 wt Mornington Island; f 8&5; m. St. 12;
married 8.8 and 817; children, 8.21 (by 8.8), 8F.52 (by B17).

Sf£17. MEDEDINGRINGATI tjoands (white porpoise); white name SALLY; h. ¢. 1924,
arrived on Mornington [sland 18 Oevtober 1948; living June 1960; age ¢, 37 yeara:
measured us BI. no. 80; f S25 m, R03; married 6.18; 6 childyen, 82.31, 8.29,
3.41, 5f.35, 8.38, S£.37, Thia is the woman spoken ta by MeCarthy when investt-
gating the shooting of the native on Sweers Tsland in 1948. Blood types:—B, Mas,
BR, Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Py(at+), K—. J

S£18, TONDOTNGATL kulkitji (shark); white name RHEBA, name also written as REA;
b. ¢, 1925, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; ogo
6. 45 years; measured a3 BI, no. 31; f. 8.5; m. 8£,13; married 8.8, 5.175 &
olildren, 8£,27, SE29 (by 8.8), 8.28, S£.96, 8.40 (by BT). Blood types:—B, Nes,
Ry Ry, Py+, Le(a—), Ny(at+), K—,

8f£.19, KONGARANGATT; b. c. 1926; d. « 1928 at Kombali, in the mangroves of exposure
and cold during 8.E, trade wind weather and at same time as mother; aged e, +
years; f, 8.6; m, Sf.5.

B£.20.

sre.

57.23.

St.24,

Sf.2h,

SP26,

Bf.27,

Bi.2o.

B£.30,

Bf.

BL3g,

Sf.a3,
1.34.

B£.35,

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 323

WANARATJINGATI? b, o, 1927; d. 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck to
Allen Island; aged c. 20 years; f. 8.5; m. S#.8; not married, no children.

BKORAWURUNGATLI bidjaripa (dugoug); white name MATILDA; b. ¢, 1929, arrived
on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 5 June 1980, after giving birth to still-born
miale child on 22 May 1950; aged ce. 21 yours; #. 8.9; m. Uf.10; married 8.6 but
no children; as widow had short mavital assoeations with T12 and V,3, but neither
were considered to be proper marriages; 2 ohildren, T£.15, T.17 (considered to have
been fathered by 1,12),

. BIRARUKINGATT komi (a fish); b, 0, 1982; d, «, 1937, Killed by V.3 whose elder

brother should hava liad her as wife; aged c. 5 years; f. 8.5; m. Sf.14..

KONGARANGATY, also called KUNTURUNGATI mengungurn (queen fish); white
ninie MARTHA; b. ¢. 1933; d, 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Beutinek to
Allen Island; aged ©, 14 years; oot married, but, had been promised to Z.9; £. 8.5;
zm rey ae married, Reputed to have boen a light-skinned person, known as &

andokando,

WERUNGATJINGAT! tadaoka bya ae fish) white name DAWN; b. 1935,
arrived on Moriungton Island 2 July 1947 from Allen Island; living June 1960; age
25 years; measured ne BI, no, 17; #. 8.11; an, UE7; married 8.16; 4 children, Sf.34,
§.35, 8.86, 8.39. Blood lypess—O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Leda), Fy(at+), K—,
Webb—, Jka—.

TONDOINGATI bokadji (black hawk); white mame MAY; b, e 1986, arrived
Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; living June 1960; age ¢c, 23 years; teasured ag
BI, no. 29; f. 8.9; m. Ut.10; married U.17; no ehildren. Blood types:—O, MNss,
Ry Ry, Py, Lea—), Py(at+), K—, Webb—, Jha+,

EORAREINGATT karwark (queen fish); white name PAULA; b, 1 July 1988 (age
given im mission records, not verifiable); arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947;
lying June 1960; age 21 years 1] months; f, 8.11; m, Ut,7; not married, promised
to T.15,

BERUMOINGATE mali (swamp turtle) ; white name NETTA; b. 1 July 1942 (miesion
record age, not verifiable’); arrived on Morningtou Tsland 4 August 1947; living
Jane 1960; age 17 years 11 months; measured ae BI. on. 86; 2, 8.8; mw, Sf.18;
not married, not promised. Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ito, P7—, Lefa—), Fy(a+),
K—, Webb—, Jkat.

. WARTADANGATI bidjarupa. (dugong); white name ETITEL, earlier records give

MILDRED (%); b. 30 July or September 1946 (eonilieting mission renards} j
arrived Morniogtou Island 4 August 1947; living June 190; age 14 years 9 months
or 13 yeara 8 months; mensured as BI. no. 40; £. 5.8; m. 2f.2; not married, not
promised, Blood types:—B, MNsa, Ry Ry Py—, La(ot), Fytas), K—

TONDOINGATI banga (turtle); white mame DOLLY; b. Mareh 1946, arrived
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 14 years 3 months;
meusured as BI, no. 38; f, 8.8; m, Sf18, Blood types:—B, MNss, Ry Ky, Py—,
Le(a—), Byi+y, K—.

WEREKEWERERENGATI kambo (rock cod); white name MARGARET; b. May
1946 on Sweers Island; arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 14 April 1950
on Mornington Taland, eause not stated; m. UL,16 unmarried; child aseribed to BS:
was adopted by 817 and Vf10,

————— white name TRENE; b. July 1948, arrived Mornington Tsland 18 October
1948; d, 10 January 1949; aged ( months; f. 8.18; m, Sf.17.

white name OLIVE, also known as OLOM; b, 11 October 148 at
Mornington Island; d. 20 February 1950; aged 1 year 4 months, The first ehiid
born on Moroington atter the evacuation of Bentinck Island; f, 8,17; m. Sf.16,

white name NANCY; Bb, 4 December 1949 at Mornington Island; d. 19505
aged under L year; £. 8.10; m. Wf.7,

white name DOROTHY; b, 27 May 1950 at Mornington Island; d, 88
August 1951 at Cloncurry Hospital; aged 1 year 3 months; f. 8.16; m. Sf.24,

white name MADGE; b. 29 May 1953 ot Mornington Island; living June
1960; age 7 years 0 months; f 8.18; m, Sf,17, :

324 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

8£.36, ——————. white name OLIVE kuluwanda (a small bird); b, 17 July 1955 at
Mornington Island; living June 1960; age 6 years 10 months; ft. 8.17; m, 8,18,

8t. 37-————- white name DOROTHY; b. 19 May 1959 at Mornington Island; living
June 1960; age 1 year 0 months; f. B15; m. 8£.17.

S8f£.448. —————— white name JOY; b. 3 September 1959 at Mornington Taland; living
June 1960; age 9 montha; £, S175 m. VF10,

Males of Dolnoro T

V1, Ngolotalicurunpaijarupangati kambo (rock vod); b, e, 1880; d. ¢, 1918; shot by a
white man at Minakuri; aged ¢. 38 years; f- } me } younger sisters were
Tf£2 and TL.3; family if any, not recorded,

T.2, Kongarangati waruku (sun); b, ¢, 1845; d, ¢, 1919, killed li «, fight; aged c. 34 years;
f, or step f. 8.1; m, Wf.l; married W.2 and VE.2; S children, T.4, Tf.7 (hy
Wiz), THB (by VEZ).

T.38. Modomodongati bidjarupa (dugong); pb, ©, 1885; J, «& 1940; drowned at night at
Kodakurn; aged ¢, 55 years; f. T.2; m. ; married S£.2 and S£,10; 5 children,
5 (by SL.2); Tao, Tat, Vad, TEI (by $1.10),

T.4, Bitangati, also called Kongarungsti, tjilanganda — moariwu (biface palavolithie stone
tool); b. ¢, 1890; d. probably before 1983, drowned at night while tishing from a
raft, ngimi (translated as ‘‘outside’’) Baltae Tsland; aged ¢, 43 years; f. T.2;
m. Wf.2; married 8£.9; 2 children, Tf.9, T.13,

7.5. Wuandurnngati (also ealled Kongarangati) kulkitji (shark); white name Sam; b, eo.
1898, arrived Mornington Island 28 October 1948; d. 1 January 1949 at Mornington
Tslund; aged ¢. 51 years; blind in one eye since childhood; fF. T.3; m, Xf.25 married
Wid; 1 child, Tf14,

T.6. Kongarangati karwark (queen fish) ; white name Shorty; b. c 1905 arrived Mornington
Taland on 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age o, 55 years; measured as BI, no,
24; £, unrecorded T, mun; m, Sf.1; married WH.3 and Uf.3 (widow of V.5);
ull X#,20 (by Wf.3), Blood types: —B, MNgs, By Ry, Py—, Leta—), Fyin+)

T.7.. Wojopongati (Waijupungati) koako (eurlew); b, ¢. 1915; d. ec. 1944, collapsed and
tied of sickness while out lonting at Windjarukauras aged « 29 yoare; womarrieds
#. (ar more likely step-father) S45 m. Uf.d,

T.8. Wojvpongati (Waijupungati) walda (moon); b. 6 1918; d. ¢, 1934, speared and Icilled
at Dangkokinaijarup; aged «. IM yenra; not married; f. (or step-father) Z.3;
m, TYf.4,

TO. Wanggalkoangati nyorongkolt ( ); white name Paul; b, ¢, 1920, arrived
on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age c. 40 years; measured
og Bl. no. 8; f. (or more likely afepefather) 8.4; m, Uf9; married Tf12 (widow
of U,10); no children, Blood types:—B, MNags, Ry Ry, Pye, Lolo), Fy(at), K—,

7.10. Wauaratjingati; b. c. 1927; d. c. 1929 ab co. 2 years; f. TS (or 8.6); m. 8£.10.
T.11, Wanaratjingati; b. o. 1930; d. o. 1984 ut o. 4 years; f, T.8 (or 5.6); m. Sf.10,

T.12, Kongarangati wanikar (pelican (%)); white name Dugal (Dougal) Goongarra
(corruption of ngati name); b, «. 1930, arrived on Mornington Island 9 December
1947 atter medical inspection trip of Dr, Spalding; living June 1960; age o. 30
years; méasured as BI. no. 2; f. (or etep-father) 8.5; im. Tf; married Zid;
4 children, Tf.16, Tf.17, T.20, T£.19; also two stillborn, T.16 and T.18 (unsexed)
prior to T£,16; also suapected father af T.17 and TE15 (by Sf21), Note: Real
father of T.12 may have been 'T.3, Blood types:—O, MNws, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—),
fy(a+), K—, Webb—, Jka+,

113, Pindjarindjingati kalbara (white crane) ; white name Frederick; b. ¢. 1933, arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age o. 27 years; measured as
BI. no. 11; £. T.4; m, Sf,9; married TA18 and Xf17; 2 children, TH18, T.21 and
1 stillborn unsexad, T.19. Blood types:—Q, Mass, Ry Ry, P)—-. Le(a—), Fyta+),
K—, Webb—, Jka+,

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 325

T14. Mapuru bandeingati; b, v. 19384; d, ¢, 19385 at o. 1 year; f, 'T.3 (or S.6); m, Sf10,

T.16, Koogarangati karumoko (long tom fish); white name Arthur; hb, 1938, arrived on
Mornington Taland 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 22 years; f. U.11; m.
Uf12; not married, but promised to St.26,

T.16, Stillborn. unsexed, b. ¢ 1949; f£. T.12; m, Zf4,

T.17, Stillborn male, b, 22 May 1950; reputed f, T.12; sm, S£2L (see nole under 8£2)).
T.18. Stillborn (%); uot sexed; b, prior to 1951; f, T.12; mm. Zea

T19, Btillborn; not sexed; b. January 1951; f¢. T.13; m, Uf,1g,

T.20, ————— wlite mame Bernard; b, 14 February 1955; living June 1960; age 5 years
3 months; is very blond-haired; £, T,12; m, Zl.4,

'P.21. ——————. kalbura (white Grane); white name Westie Frederick; b, 9 January 1960;
living June 1960; age 5 months; f. 7,13; m, X£,17,

Females of Dolnoro T

TL.1. MAPURABANDETJARUNGATT Karwark (queen fish) and/or tantamant ( 4
b, & 1870; dc, 198%; aged e. 64 yours, of mulatji, a poison from the sca; f, }
Mm. ; married U,1; @ children, U.6, Uf, U.10,

TLe. BALTAENGATT tjaparta (sole); b, « 18835 d. ¢, 1918; aged c. 36 years. Shot by
white man, inland, at Burumangi, child shot from her body in advanced pregnancy ;
fy ; Tm. ; brother was T.1; sister wae TH3; widow of unknown man;
tuarried 5; 1 ehild, 8.12 (by unrecorded earlier husband).

Tr, KONGARANGATI debedebe (rock cod); b. ec. 1885; d. c. 1925; died of old wind
during storm while fishing in the water of a creek; aged ec. 40 years; f. ;
my ; elder brother was T.l and elder sister Tf£.2; married W.2; 1 child, W.6.

Tid, MARDANGEHINGATTL bilti (tern); b, c. 1898; d, 6, 1943 at Lokoti (Rokoti) ; f. .
m. ; married Z.3, 2.2 and Z.5; 5 children, T.8 (by 7), 2.6, Z,.7, 23, Zf4

(by 4,3).

TP.5. MAPURABANDELTARUNGATI wondo (rain); b, e. 1900; d. «, 1945 of sickness at
KSongarai; aged ¢. 45 years; f. } my j Married 1.6; 2 childven, Uf,13,
Uta,

TL, KONGARANGATE bidjarupa (dugong); white name POLLY; b, ¢. 1906, arrived on
Mornington Island probably in 1947 group; d, shortly after 1948 but no mission
data exists recording her death; f- > mk ; married T.8 (not sure); 9,5}
3 childran, TF10, TL11, 1.12 (all probably by 7.3),

Tt,7, KOBATITNGATYI raerupudi (queen fish) and/or wonda = karuwi (rain); while mame
HDITH; b. ¢. 1909, arrived on Mornington Island 18 Oetoher 1948; living Jina
1960; age «, 51 years; measured as GJ. no, 33; f, 1.2; m, W.2; murried five
times, 4.3, Z.2, U.10, 2.9, 8.19; 8 children, Uf.18, U.17, U.18 (all by U.10), Blood
typies:—B, Ness, By, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—,

Tf.8. BELURUNGATI mandatji (cat fish); white name PANSY; b. ¢. 1917, arrived on
Mornington Taland 4 August 1947; d, 18 Muay 1958, missing, believed drowned;
after death of son; this considered as s suivide by aborigines; aged e, 41 yenrs;
f, T.2; m. Vi2; married 5,6, 0,10 and Ui4; 1 child, 1.19 (by O10),

TI, MAMBUNGGINGATTI debedebe (rock cod); white name ROMA; b. oc, 1917, arrived
on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ce. 48 yoars; measured
as BI. no. 16; f. T4; m, 82.9; married 0,18, U0 and §.10; 3 children, U£,21
(by U.18), U.20 (by U.10), and 8.80 (by $10), Blood types:—O, MNes, Ry By,
Py—, Le(a—), Py(a+), K—, Webh—.,

TF.10, NGTLTALNGATI; b, ¢, 1925; d, 1947; drowned on raft voyage from Bentinek to
Allen Tsland; aged ¢, 22 years; unmarried; f. (or stepfather) 8.5; m, TE6, Note:
Qeal father may have been T.3,

Till. TARUKUNGATI; b, ©, 1928; d, 1947, drowned on raft voyage from Bentinek to
Allen Island; aged c. 19 years; unmarried; f. (or stepfather), 8.5; m. T£.6. Note:
Real father may have been T.3,

326 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ti.12. WEREKEWEREKENGATI (TIONGROMANGATT); bh, 6, 1985 on Swoers Island;
d. 1947, drowned on raft yoyage trom Beutinck to Allen Island; aged «. 12 yeura;
Parentage not reeurded.

Tf.13. TURURUNGATT kanatu (oil fish); white name ALISON, (ALLISON); bh, « 1936
at Tururu, arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living Juno 1960; age
c. 24 years; measred as BI. no, 23; f. T.3 (or 8.6); m, S£.10; married Y¥.5;
1 child, Y1.6, Blood types:—B, MNga, Ry Ry, Pi—, Lete—), Fy(a+), K—,

TE14, KAKONGATI talkurnki (giant kingfisher) ; white name ISABELLE; b. 1 July 1943,
birth estimate in Mornington Island Register, arrived Mornington Island 1% October
1948; living June 1960; age 16 years 11 months; measvred as BI. no. 85; not yet
married; f, T.5; m, Wf4. Blood types:—B, Mss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(u—), Fy(o+),
E-,

T£.15.

white name MILDRED; b, November 1944 on Mornington Island: d. 23
May 1949; aged G months; f, (suspected) 7.12; m. (unmarried) Sf.21 (see note
under Sf,21),

T£.16, ————— white name AGNES; b, 18 April 1952 on Mornington Island} living tune
1960; aged 8 years 1 month; f. T.12; m. Zf4,

Tf.17, ————— white name AMY; b. 1953-54; d, 1953-54; f 1.125 m. Zl.
T£,18, ————— kalbara (white crane); white name DAPHNE; b, 4 Mareh 1955 on
Mornington Island; living June 1960; aged 4 yenrs 9 months; B. T.1a; m, Xf,17,

T#19, ————— white name GAY; b. 1 July 1959; d, 14 July 1959; aged 14 days;
#. 1.12; m, Zid.

Males of Dolnoro U

U4, Banbanngati; b. c. 1865 at Banhanharukeinds d, «, 1917; aged ce 52 years; {———;
m. ; married Tf and Uf.3 (no issue); 3 children, U.6, Uf4, 1.10 (by 'T#.1)-

TZ, Njinjilkingati bidjarupa (dugong); b, ¢, 1870; d. ¢ 1918, drowned at Rondjalkauru
after being shot at by « white man; aged o, 48 yoars; f, ;om™m ; Imurried
U1; 2 children, UL,8, 0.9.

0.8. ‘Tjiluangati karwark (queen fish); b. c. 1875; d. «. 1910, speared and killed in a fight;

uged ¢, 85 years; £. 7m. -; married Vf.1; 2 children, UAT, Uf.11.
U.4. Modomodongati airuput (small mackarel); b, ¢. 1885; d. after 1915+ f, 4
Ily ; married §8f,5, Sti; 2 children, U.12, 0.13,

U5. Markurukandjingati burantant (bone fish); 6, 6 1895; d, o. 1939 at Minakuri of a
awelling sickness of the sfoniaeh called mukoitj whiel: ia belisved to come. after
brenking a food eating rule; f. + Mm. ; married Vi4 (widow of W.3),
Xf,9 (widow of W.3). Noter 1 stepchild Wf.6 from Vf.4, by W.3).

U.6. (ascribed also to W.) Modomodongati ngorolko, also toato (rainbow) and/or birint
)5 b. e 1895; d. e, 1040, drowned at Wunki from a raft (broke a
tule by killing a flying fox in the day time and beeame lost in heavy fog while
fishing with bark flares at night), a tall thin man; aged c. 45 years} f, Wi1; m, Tf;
married T.5, UL& (young widow of his father, U1); 4 ehildren, Uf13, Ut.14
(by T£5), UF15, U16 (uy UL3),

U7. (but could belong to 8.) Kabaratjingati karwark (queen fish); b. o 1896; da. ¢. 1920
of stomach sickness at Kongara; not married; nged e, 24 yeara; f. U.22; m, Sf,1.

0.8, Njinjillingati kudabalt (curlew) and Wardondi (inangrove dwelling rat); b. o. 1897;
d, ¢, 1928, death attributed to a shot by a white man at Kongarai while alowe;
aged ¢, 31 years; fy ; my ; married Uf10; 1 child, Uf16,

U.9. Korowaraingati bidjarupa (dugong); b, & 1898; d, «, 1918, killed by white man in
bush on Bentinek Island; aged ¢, 20 years; unmarried; f, U.2; m. Uf,

U1. Rotjorotjongati tadaoka (pumpkishend fish); white name Willy; b. ¢. 1900; d. July/
August 1945, killed by 8.16 at Minakuri; aged c. 45 yaurs; his grave seen; his widows
still had unhealed mourning slashes on 17 August 1945; #. 1,1; m. Tf.1; married six
wives, T?.7, TL£.9, UT.3 (his father’s widow), Tf.8, M£.9, BE12; 4 childron, Uf,18,
U7 and U.18 (by Tt.7), U9 (by TES),

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 327

ULL, Kalturingati walda (moun); b, 6 1905; d, ¢, 1944; «a tall man; aged ¢. 39 years;
speared and killed at Mededingki by 8.8 who sneaked on him while he was spearing
fish; ff ; m- 7 married Uf12; 3 children, 0.14, 0.15, T.15 (check reason
for dilfurence in doluoro),

0,12, Dodjonapangati tjoanda (white porpoise); b. c. 1912; d. o. 1945; tall yonng man;
unmarried; speared by a man from Minakuri; 1. U4; m, 8f.5.

U.18, Bokanaijarupangati makulda (big headed turtle); b. ¢. 1915; dc 1944; aged a 29
years; speared at Tjarapand by Z.8, died of wounds at Kongara; f£, U.4; m. Sf.5;
married Tf.9; 1 child, Ur21,

U.14. Baltacngati debedebe (rock cod); white name Maurice; b, co, 1932, arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age ¢«. 28 years; measured
as BL. no, 5; f. U1; m, UPI; married SL.10 and TH; 2 children, U,21, UF.2
(by Sf.10). Blood types:—B, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a+), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—.

U.AS. Werungati mialt (flat fish); white name Colin; b. ¢, 1985; arrived on Mornington
Island 4 August 1947; d. 20 Mareh 1952; aged o. 17 A yeas unmarried; but reputed
father of Uf,23 (part Kuiadilt) by Lardiil woman TDA.

0.16, Borerunguti tjordaruki (erow) ; white name Desmond; b. 1986; arrived on Mornington
Teland 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 24 years; measired as BI. no. 6; not
married; 1, U.6; mn, Uf.3. Blood types: —O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py— Le(a—), FPy(a+),
K—, Webb, Jka+,

W.17, Djoragarangati burantant (bone fish); white name Darwin; b, 1 July 1939 (fide late
entry in Mission Register), arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living
June 1960; nge 21 yeara 0 months; measured as BI. no. 35 f£. U.10; m. TE£7;
married $1.25; uo children, Blood types:—B, Nsa, Ry, Py—, Lo(a—), Py(at+), K—,

W.18. Moraringati; while oame Donald; b. ¢, 1941 on Sweers Island; arrived on Mornington
gt 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age 19 yoars; not married; £. 0.10;
m, TE7,

U,19, Tarurukingati murkudi (groper fish); white name Tony; b, 1 July 1942 (fide late
entry In Mission Register) at Taaro; arrived on Mornington Tsland 4 August 1047;

d. 2¢ September 1955, drowned in u canoe sceident off Porsyth Island; aged 13
Fears 3 months; £. U.10; m. T.8.

U.20, Modomodongati, ulso valled Korownringati tjadark ( \; white name Roland;
bh. ec. 10452 arrived on Mormington Tslund 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age
e, 1) years; unmarriod; measured as BL uo, 37; f. 0410; m, TH9. Blood types:—
O, Ness, Hy By, Py—, La(o—), Fy(a+), K—, Webh—, Jkat+.

U.31, —————— male child; b, & 1947; arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d o
1948; aged e. 1 years; f. Ud; m. Sf10.
U.22. (out of sequence) no name (father of Kabarstji karwark); b- ; d, o, 19045

married S!,1 (alao perhaps Sf.2 but. no issue); 2 children, 0.7, UL5.

Females of Dolnora U

Uf,1. DANGALBADANGONGATT djingkawavangaloro (south-east wind); b, o, 1875; d, a
1918; aged c. 48 years; drowned at Pungkalwangki after being shot at by white men
f. ; Te ; married U.2; 2 children, Uf.3, U.9.

UL, JUMUTANGATI (YUMATERR of Mission Records); b, ¢, 1883; d, ¢ 1940; aged o
55 years; drowned during a 1940 raft voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; her
son X.5 wot there with some of the party; f, ; om, ; married X.2; 1
ehild, X65,

U£3. BALTAMNGATI hidjarupa (dugong); white name EVE; b, ¢, 1894; arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d. 1 September 1954; aged c. 64 yenrs; cause
of death given as ‘‘nge’’; f, 0.2; m. Uf.l; married U.1, U.6, U.10 (she waa his
father’s other wife), 5.6, then 8.10 who just before his death passed her to V.S
(in October 1950), T.6; 2 children, Uf15, U.16 (by U.6),

328 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Uf. DUBALKARURONGATI tadacka (pumpkinhead fish) ; white nama MARA; bh. o, 1897,
arrived on Mornington Island 4 Augnst 1947, was the woman who reported the
mass drowning on the voyage by rafts from Beutinck to Allen Island; d, 1948 (after
ane aged & SL years; f, Ul; m. Tl.1; warried §.5; 3 children, Sf,15, 8,18,

wee

UES, KABARATIINGATI raeruputa (a white fish); b, ¢, 1898; d, c, 1908 of sicknosa at
Rongara; aged o 1) years; f, 1,22; m. Sf.2,

ULG, TITLIWANGATL karwark (queen fish); b, e 1905 at Vjiliwa = 7 Tjiwiakura; d.
t, 19583 aged 28 years, ab Markaruki; weut out into water, on return her stomach

swelled up; f =m. j warried 8.7; 1 ehild, UL17. (Note that. the father's
4 other children by two other wives Sf.7 and V¥#.5 are of dolnoro V.)

UL, KALNJIRINGATL balibal (blaek spotted stingray) and Karwark );
white name HANNAH; b. c, 1905; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; a.
August 1947; aged o, 42 years; deserihed as having appoarance of an aged woman
ah death; £. 0.38; m, Vél; married $.11, S.7, 8.10; 3 children, St.24, Sf£.26 (by
B.11), 5.24 (by 8.10); 2 step-clildren, Sf.72 and Wels (of earlier marriage in her
Mushand’s menage, parentage not recorded).

UL8. TARDARUKINGATI (TADABUNRATEREINT) debudehe (rock cod); b, o 1905;

dc. 1985; aged o, 30 years; f, 3} 7. ; married V.8; 1 child, V£.9,
UL8. WERUNGATUNGAT! boroti (sole); b. 0, 1905; d, 1995 at Kongara of fish poisonin
from a species of sardine-like fishy aged c, 30 years; f- j me ; Marries

8.4; 2 children, T.7, T.9 (probably both children by au earlier husband).

Uf10, DANGRANKURUNGATE ngarunati (spoonbill); b, o 1907; d, e, 1944, killed at
Tarnuruki with a spear by 2.8; aged o, 37 years; £, ; my ; married 1,8,
8.9; 8 children, UfL1G (hy 1.8), BL.21, S£.25 (hy 8.9),

UfAL, TALMANGKINGATI bidjarupa (dugong); b. e 1910; d. &, 1945, ab Bokatuu, of
Karwar (sickness) after she had been clubbed by her husband (¥.1); aged o, 86
yeara; f. U.3; m, Vf15 married Y15 no children,

DEI2. DITLAWANGATI (TILWIAKARANGATI) balibah (black spotted stingray); white
name DINNY (sometimes JINNY); b, ¢, 1932; arrived on Mornington Island 4
August 1947; 7. 11 April 1958 of pneumonia; aged e. 46 years; f. ; me
marrivd U.ld, T.9: 8 childven, Udd, 1.15, TAG (parentage of T15 is ascribed to
firat lusband but T.15 is now elaimed as belonging to T.0’s dolnoro),

Uf13. DANGEANKURUNGATT tadaoka (pumpkinhoad fish); white name VERA; »b. e.
1920; arrived on Mornington Island 18 October 1948; A. 28 Maréh 1951+ aged e, 31
years; waa pregnant in December 1950, had stillborn ehild January, blood trana-
fusions at Normanton Hospital 28 January; unable to swallow water 27th Marel
1961; ft, Ci; m, TH; Murried 8.14, 8.18 who gave her to 1.13 in 1950; 1 ehild,
8.27 (by 8.18) and one stillborn child not sexed T.16 (by T.14),

ULit. MARALNGATI (DANGKANEURUNGA'TT) borsatant (hone fish); b, e. 1984;
4, 13947, drowned on rad’t voyage froni Bentinck to Allen Island; aged c, 23 years;
#, U6; m, V¥.5; married 8.5; no children,

Uf15, OMBOMARUTARUPANGATT (WOMBAMARUTARUPAINGATYI) tiapartw (sole) ;
b. «, 1927; doo. 1947 of sickness of the stomach; death attributed to magic, by
using her Taeees; aged ¢. 20 years; f UG; m, Uf.3; married 8.8; no children,

UfiG. BALTAENGATI bidjarupa (dugong); white name MARGARET BENTINCK; b,
¢. 1927; arrived on Mornington Island 4 Angust 1047; d, ‘shortly sdter 1950";
aged co, 24 yoara; f, U.S; m, UF10; not twarried, but taken by 8.5 until he was
forced to rolense her; had one child, Sf. 30, attributed to §.5; it was adopted and
reared by V#£.10 to whom it has sometimes been aseribed, in error,

Uf17. RATIARATARUPAINGATT (BATRAWATARUPAINGATT) tjilangand — (bifaee
chopping stone); White nome PHOEBE) b, e. 1927; arrived on Mornington Island
4 August 1947; living June 1960; age co. 33 years; measured as BI. no. 28; £, 8.73
m, Uf.6; married 8.8, 8.10; 2 children, 8.23, 8,33 (by 8.10); 1 child 8.33 after
being widow for 1 year 6 months, Blood types:—O, MNes, Ry, Py—, Le(a—y,
Fy (u-+), K—, Webb—,

‘

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 329

UL.18. KABARATJINGATI; b, ¢ 19415 d. 1947; drowned on raft voyage from Bentinck to
Allen Island; aged ¢. 16 years; #. U.10; m, TYf.7; newly married to 8.5 when she
Wied; no children,

UEI9. OMBOMAKUTARUPANGATI ngarawunt (blue parrot fish); b. 6, 1932; arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d. 1947, but no reeord available of her death;
uged o. 17 years; father, not recorded; stepmother Uf,3; not married.

Uf,20, RAIARATARUPAINGATI kapinta (water snake) and/or mingingur (woppa fish) ;
white name AMY; b, 1 Joly 1942 (acwording fo late entry in Missiun Register) ;
arrived Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 17 youn 11
months; measured as BI, no, 84; £. stopfathor 8.8 (real father not recorded); m.
“2.2; not married; no marriage arrangementa yet made, Blood types:—O, Mas,
Ry Ro Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb.

Tf.21, DANGRANKURUNGATI makulda (big-headed turtle); white name DAPHNE; b.
1942; arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; d, 23 December 1947 of stings
af jelly fish, received while swimming; uged 5 yours; £. U.13; m. TY.9.

U2.22. MILBULKAIKATARANGA'TT; b, 1945; d. 1946; aged ¢, 1 week; £. U4; m. 8f.10-

Uf.23. --—-———. white nama ALISTAIR; b. 9 July 1952 on Mornington Island; living
June 1960; age 7 years 11 months; f. said to be U.15; m. a Lardii] woman, TDA of
Mornington Island; a widow oot married to U.15 [ly some woh recognized ae
belonging to the Bentinck Island people, but regarded as a Lardiil person],

Males of Dolnoro V

Tarnrukingati warungalta (south-east wind); b, ¢. 1872; d. oc. 1918; aged o, 46 years;
shot by a white man ou horseback at Korombali (identified by his son aa in a
1901 photograph taken by J. EF, Bailey); f ; ™, + married Zf.1, algo
perhaps Bf.8 who passed to 8.2; 4 children, V.2, V#.2, V.38, V£.6 (by Zt), also
perhaps V.4, V£.7 (by S£.3),

V.2, Tadulkingati (Ngaiangaiangati) jukar (porpoise); b, ¢. 1893; 4, ©, 1915; aged o, 22

years; f. Vl; m, Sf.1; not married,

V.a, Tadulkingati matali (sea-eagle); white name Jack; b, 6, 1900; arrived on Mornington

Island 4 Angust 1947; hving June 1960; age oc. 60 years; measured as TT, no, 75
f, Vil; m, Zf.1; married Uf.8, Xf.9 (no children) and Wi.6; 1 child, Vf9 (by
Ut.8); 2 children, Vf11, V.8 (by Wf.6) who had Yf.4 by previous husband, Blood
typos:-—-O, Mss, Ry Ry, Py—, Lel(a—), Fy(a—), K—, Webb—, Jka—.

V4. Tarurukingati jalunta (seaweed); b. ¢, 1903; d, o. 1918; aged «, 15 years; shot at and

killed by white Man froin « small ship at Baltae (Fowler Tsland) at sama lime ag

his father; f, perhaps V.1 with 8.2 as stepfather; m, 81.3; not marriad.

V.5, Tarurukingati morukadi (groper fish); white name Pinto; b. « 1920; arrived on
Mornington Island 17 October 1948; living June 1960; age ¢ 40 yeors; measured
as BI, no, §; a photograph dated December 1947 with Dr. Spalding js available;
f, 8.7; m. Sf.7; married Uf.3, widow of U.6 who had first passed tu U.10 then to
8.10; no children by her; a widower since 1954. Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry, P\—,
Le(a—), Pyla+), K—, Webb—. :

VA. Wartadangati bulunduntu ( 3; b. m. 1925; d, «. 1982, at Minakuri; aged
e. 7 years, of kok, or sores all over his body; f, 8.7; m. UP.6.

VT. Wartadangati bilti (tern); b. m 1942; d, co 1946, speared by 8.17; aged «. 4 years;
f, 8.7; m, V2£.7,

v.82. —————— wingingur (woppa fish); white namo James; b. July 19474 arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August. 1947; d, 12 April 1950; aged 2 years 9 montha; f£.
V.3; m WEE.

V1.

—T

Females of Dolnoro V

Vf.1. PINDINGARUPAINGATI balumbant ( ); hb. e, 1888; d. c. 1933 of siek-
tess; aged o, 50 yrara; f, 7 m, ; Married 1.3; 2 children, Uf.7, Tl,

330 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

vfs. JUMUTANGATT jalunta (seaweed); b. c 1896; d, ¢, 1987 or after, at Medudingki of
sickness; aged o, 31 years; said to have been a short fat woman; f, Vids m. Zt1;
married T.2, 8.5; 2 ehildren, T¥.8 (hy T.2), 5.19 (by 8.5).

Vf.3. TALMANGKINGATI kaiwaruki (big black fish); b, ¢, 18975 d, « 1926, at Dongalakara
of sicknesa; face swelled wp; aged « 29 years; f ; ma. ; married W.1;
2 children, Wf.4, W1.5,

Vf4. DUNGALAKARANGATI banga (turtle); b, o. 1908; d, ¢, 1947 at Minalkuri of spear
wound inflicted by 8. 18; aged ec. 44 years; f. i tie ; married Y.2, W.3,
U.5; 4 children, ¥.3 (by ¥.2), W-7, W.8, Wf. (by W.3); no children by U5.

Vi.5, DODJONGAPANGATLI kambo (rock cod) and/or bidjarupa (dugong); b. ¢. 1905; d,
a. 1944; speared in an open fight at Marant by 8.18 and died at Kongara; aged
e, 89 years; Fy tn ; murried §.7; 2 children, Vf.10, V.7.

Vf.6. TIORDJORORONGATI; b. c. 1906; d. ¢. 1919, af Tondoi, eause not indicated; aged
e. 13 years; f, V1; m, 2f.1; not married,

V0.7, DODJONGAPANGATT ftsliwindi (trumpet shell); b. 0. 1905; d, 0, 1920, of sickness
at Njinjilki; aged o, 15 years; f, V1; m. 8.3; not married.

V£i.8. KONGARANGATI bilti (tern); b, o, 1923; d, o, 1937, of stomach trouble at
Barkowakar; aged ¢. 14 years; unmarried; f. 8.7; m, Sf.7,

Vf.9. DONGKOROREINGATL warongalta (south-east wind); b, ¢ 1925; d. «, 1931, at
Dongkororei; agod c. 6 years; f. V.3; m, Uf,

Vt10. DONGKOROREINGATL kardakadi (a Bea bird); white mame MONA; b, o. 1930 (or
earlier); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; aged 30
years (or older); f. 8.7; m. V£.5; married 8.17; 3 children, 8.32, 8.47, Sf£48
(Sf, 30 was an adopted child of Uf,16 (Ginmarried girl), reputedly by 8.5).

Vili, KALNJIRINGATI mandatji (cat fish); white nume RITA; b. 1 July 1942 (late
record in Mission Register); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living
Junie 1960; age 17 years 11 months; not married; f, V.0; m. Wf.6,

Males of Dolnoro W
W.l. Kakongati burantant (bone fish); b, c. 1885; d. o 1915 at Botenki of stomach aieknesa

and diarvhoca; aged 6,30 yeurs; £. ; i. ; married Vf.4; 2 children, Wf,4,
WE.5.

W.2. —————— -nguti toato (rainhow); b. before 1885; d. co. 1925; aged over 40 years;
f ; ™. ; married Tf,3, Xf, 8f.7; 3 children, W.3 (by X£.7), W.4 (by

S£.6), W.5 (by TE).

W.da, Markurukandjingati toato (rainbow); b. ¢. 1905; (Le. 1985; aged «. 30 years, of sick-
noss Hund lunger because he ¢ould not eat; f. W.25 m, Xe7; married 5 wives, Bf.6
(widow of W.2), X#.9, XV.10, Xf.11, Vf4; 5 children, W.7, W.8, WE.6 (by Vi4),
".7 (by Xt.9), no children by 24.6, W.6 (by X£.11), X10 is said to have
‘belonged’? to W.3 and she had had one child (Xf.14), but she was also atated to
have ramained ‘‘single’? all her life; it will he noted that her daughter ‘belongs’?
to her mother’s dolnore,

(There are still doubta about the data for this mau und his family. He inherited
his father’s wifo Xf.6, who already had a son of the same totem (tonto) as himself;

his widowed wives were later taken by U.5, a man of the same ngati namo.)

W.d. Walkareringati toato (rainbow); white name Rainbow; b. before 1910; removed from
Allen Island to Aurukun by poli¢e in April 1941; d. 5 May 1945, aged over 35 yeara,
of sickness during an influenza epidemic at Aurukun; deseribed aa ‘elderly’? at
death; f, W.2; m, Xf6; married Xf15, X16; 4 children, Wf.8, W110, Wt.9
(by X£.15), W,11 (by Xf.16).

W.6, Mala child of W.2; b,c. 1922; dio. 1025; aged o. 2 years, at antie time as its mother;
f, W,2; m, TH,3,

W.6. Knkongati kulpanda (Arce shell fish); b. e 1925; d. c. 1945; drowned at Taruruki on
south coast of Bentinck Island: aged ¢. 20 years; not married; f, W.3; m, N#,11.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 331

W.7. Dangkongarupaingati burantant (bone fish); b, e. 1927; d. 1947; drowned during raft
voyage from Bentinck to Allen Island; aged o, 20 years; \nmarried; f. W.a;
m, Vin

W.8. Dangkongarupaingati ngarawunt. (blne parrot figh); b. ¢. 1930; d. 6, 1942, aged o, 12
years at Dungkongurupai; cause of death not stated; f. Wd; m. VF4,

W.9, Walkureringali; b. «. 1936; d. 19475 deowned during raft voyage from Bentinck to
Allen Island; aged o, 11 years; £- } me .

W,10, Minakuringati jakuri (red snapper fish); white name Bobbie Kummari; b, 3 April
1937 (jide lato entry at Aurukun Mission); remoyed by police from Allen Island
to Aurnkun, April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June
1960; age 23 years; not married; measured as BI. no, 12; f. W.4; m. X£,15; was
ree away from his dolnoro, Blood types:—B, Ness, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy (a+),.
c-,

W.11, Dalendurungati; white name Barney Walpo; b, 11 April 1940 on Allen Island; removed.
to Aurukun by police April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953;
living June 1960; age 20 years 2 months; not married; f. W.4; m. X£.16.

Females of Dolnoro W

Wr.l. KAKONGATI walpukuteri (raft); b, c. 1864; d. o, 1924; aged o. 60 years, ** just
died’?; f, ; m- ; married 8.1 (probably was widow of a man of 'T,
dolnoro); ¢ children, TZ, Std, 9.3, 8.5.

W£.2. DANGKRONGARUPAINGATI burantant (bone fish); b, o 1870; d.c, 1920; killed in

a fight after being chased into the sea at Malunji; aged c, 50 years; f- r
ni. ; married T.2; 2 ehildren, 'T.4, 'TP,7.

We.3. KAKONGATE mali (fresh water turtle); white name LAURA; b, ¢. 1910; arrived
on Mornington Island 21 October 1948 on the launch Martin; last family to leave
Bentinck Island; d, 21 January 1949; aged c. 89 years; f- 7 me + marriad
T.6; 1 child, Xf,20.

W4, DAWARINGATI kulkitji (ahark); white name MAUDIE PAT; b, o, 1913 at
Duwarinap; took part in a short visit to Mornington Tsland July 1945; arrived
permanently Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age e. 47 years;
meusured as BI. no, 32; f W.l; m V8; married ¥.1, 7.5, X.3, 8.18; 5 children,
Y.5, Y.6 (by Y,1), Té14 (hy 7.5), XF.20 (by X.3), 8.34 (by 818), Blood types:—
B, MSE, Ry Ro, Pi-, Le(a—), Fy(at+), K—,

WHS. BOTENKINGATL burantant (bone fish); b, c. 1917; d. o, 1937; killed at Birarnki,
struck down by Y.1, her husband; aged ¢. 20 years; £. W,1; m. Vf.3; married Y,1;
nu children,

WH.6. BIRARUKINGATI dadowokara (brown fish); white name JENNY; b, ¢, 1922;
arrived on Mornington Tsland 4 August 1947; living Jims 1960; age o. 38 years;
moastired as BI, no, 19; f, W.3 (U5 is a atepfather); m. Vid; married Y.2, V.3;
8 ehildren, Yf.4 (by Y¥.2), Vf4 (considered as V. dolnoro bat probably belongs to
Y.3, V.8 (by V.3).° Blood types:—B, Nes, Ry Ro, Py—, Letw—), Fy (at), K—,

WET. DANGKONGARUPAINGATI javkati (jabiru); white name DULCIE; b, ¢, 1925;
romoved from Allen Island to Aurukun by police in April 1941 (age then estimated
ag 14-16 years); living at Aurukun Mission June 1960; not seen, but reported alive
by Rev. W. F. MacKenzie; aged c. 35 years; £. W,33 m. X£.95 married Edward
Munukka Koondoombin of Avrukun; 2 children, Of.1, Of.3.

Wwi.s8. WALKARERING ATI —————-; b. ¢. 19338; d. ¢, 1935 at Minakuri; aed c. 2 years;
t, W.4; m, Xf.15,

Wo. DALENDURUNGATE riningati (tiger shark); white name JUDY WALPO; b. 15
August 1940 on Allen Island (fide Aurnkun Mission Records); removed to Aurukun
by police in April 1941; arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June
1960; age 19 years 10 months; not married; f, Wt; m, Xf,16,

332 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Males of Dolnoro X

Xl. Minakuringati —————-; bh, ©, 1855; d. probably before 1900; f. > 2——;
married: ; 1 known child, Nf.J,

X.2, Minakuringati kulkitji (shark); b. ¢. 1880; a. ¢ 1925, of sickness of stomach at
Walkareri; £. } m. ; married 3 wives, Xf.4, Uf2, ¥f.1; 7 children, X4,
Xf.11, Xf.13 (hy Xf4), XE (by Ut’), XE,8, Xf.10, X.6, NES (by Y£.1).

%.3, Dalwaingati; b, 0, 1885; no record of death but perhaps between 1944 and 1946;
f, ; m, ; married Wf, 4 and anothor; 2 children, Xf.12 (by unrecorded
wife), X£,20 (by Wrf.4),

X4. Birarukingati kulkitji (shark); b. ¢, 1903; d. c. 1936; killed at Dalwa on Albinia
Island; aged ¢, 33 years; f. X.2; m, Xft; married X£.12 (widow of ¥.2)3 1 child,
XLT.

X.5, Minakuringati kulkitji (shark); white tame Shark Koolkitcha, given at Aurukun; b. 0,
1905; removed from Allen Island to Aurukun by polices in April 1941, after killing
of a Mornington Island Mission native tamed Cripple Jack; arrived on Mornington
Island from Aurukun September 1958; living Tune 1960; age co, 55 years; measured
as BI, no, 10; f. X.2; m. UL2; married Xf14; 2 children, X18, Xf.19, X.7-
Rev. MacKenzie considers this child ia by an unknown Aurukun man, principally on
the ground that X.5 is reputed to have ‘‘castrated’’ himself in 1941 while in’ jail
at Cloncurry on trial for the murder of Cripple Jack at Allon Island, In the eyes
of a Forsyth Islander this fumily was a model one; the marriage was ‘straight!’
and othera should have ‘‘gove this way’’. Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ro, Py—,
Le(n+), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—.

X.6. Unggultakarurnki [ugati] —————. (fish); b, ¢. 19155 d. ‘as baby’'; aged ¢. 1 year;
f. X.2; m. Yf.1, (The ngati name of thia child probably has becn incorrectly
recorded and it may be a totem name.)

X.7.'*Kooindoambin’’ (name in Aurukun records) kulkitji (shark); white name Royee;
b, 23 October 1950 at Aurukun; arrived on Mornington Tsland September 1953;
living June 1960; aga 9 years 8 months; f. ostensibly X,5 (but see note above) ;
m, X14.

Females of Dolnoro X

Xf... BARAKURUNGATI mariwu (oyster pick stone); b. c. 1875; d. after 1910 of poigon-
ing from food she had eaten; aged over 35 years; £, X.1; m, not indicated; marricd
8.2; 3 children, Sf.8, 8.10, S£.10,

Rf.2. MEANGATT leband (brown fish); b,c, 1880 at Mean = Miant; d. ¢. 1940, of sicknosa
at Bilmaru; 4. ; my ; Married T.3; 1 child 1.5 (may have been step-
child only of T,3),

Xf.3. MOROKONOBAINGATL karnda (bushfire) and tantamant (water spout); karnda was
the “‘proper one''; b. ¢, 1880; was shot at. by white man ¢. 1918 but eseaped; diced
1946 or 1947 at Baltae of sickness; aged ¢. 67 years; f, } Me 3 married
8.2; 4 children, 8.8, 8.15, 8.17, S£.17.

Xf4, WARANTJINGATY bidjarnpa (dugong); b. ¢, 1883; d. 1947, at Dangkongarupai of
sickness; aged c. G4 years; f£. } my 3 Married X.2; 3 children, X4,
Xf.11, Xf.13,

Xf,5, KUDAURUNGA'TT —————.; b. c. 1883; d. 0, 1928, in the mangroves at Kombali
of exposure and cold in south-east trade wind weather; described as having a large
growth on left side of her body which stretched down to her feet; this when it
grew big, sho supported under her arm; aged ¢, 45 veurs; ff + me :
married 8.5; 1 child, Sf,19,

Af.6. BADATJINGATT ——————, , oc. 1885, ontside her dolnoro arsa; d, o. 1920, at
Kuldangki of sickness; aged #, 35 years; f- ; mM. 5 Married W.2, then
her husband’s son, W.3; 1 child, W.4 (by W.2).

Ef.7. WARANTJINGATI tantamant (water spout); b, e. 1888; d. o. 1925 at Markaruki;
aged c, 37 years; f, } ma, 3 married W.2; 1 child, W.3,

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 333

X£8. MINAKURINGATI kulkilji (shark); white name SUSIE; b. ¢, 1905; arrived on
Mornington Island & August 1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 55 years; measured us
BL, ny, 82; £. X.2; i. YP.1; married 8.10, 8,19; now a widow; uo children. Blood
typesi—O, Nxs, Wy Ry, Py—, Lel(a—), Fyia+), K—, Webb—.

X19, KAWULNITRINGATT wardundi (mangrove-dwelling rat); b. ec 110; d. oe, 1930
at Tondot (Dundui); aged « 20 years; f. ae ; married V.3; no
children.

Nf.10, PAKATTIJLINGATI worobari (bone fish); white namnw SARAH No, 2; b, 6. 1907 at
Bakuendja — Pukaitji on Dalwai Island; removed from Allen Island to Aurukuo
by police in April 19415 arrived ou Mornington Island September 1953; living June
160 ; age «. 58 yenrs; measured as BI. no, 18; is a very (leaf woman; considered
as a widow now; said to have remained ‘‘single all her life’’ although she had had
a ohild and ‘helonged’’ to W.8; f. X.2; m, Yf.1; 1 child, Xf44 (father swnluown),
Blood typess—O, Nas, By Ry, Py—, Lew), Py(@+), K—, Webb—, Thka~,

Xf.11. MINAKURINGATE kulkitji (shark); b. ¢ 1907; d. ¢, 1928 of sioknoss; aged ¢. 21
years; f, X28; m, Xft; married W.8; 1 child, W,6.

Mf.12. MINAKURINGATIY bidjarupn (dugong); white same MOLLY BENTINCK given in
1045; bo & 1910; doe 1946 at Dangkankuru, by spearing; £. 3.3; m, ;
marvied Y.2, 4; 2 children, Vid (by Y¥.2), Xf.17 (hy Kt).

Kf.15. MINAKURINGATY kulkitji (shark); b. ¢ 1912; 4, ec. 1927; aged o. 15 years; not
married; f. X.25 m, Xt.

Xt14, MINAKTRINGATE walpu (raft), tjariru (flat-tailed slingray) and/or toato
(rainbow); white name JEAN TAWDU; b, ¢, 1918; removed from Allen Teland
to Aurukun by police April 1941; died 29 April 1953, from sickness and rib injury
received in a fight with another woman; aged o, 35 yeara; f. unknown; m. Xf.10;
married X.5; 8 children, Xf,18, X#.19, X.7 (see notes under X.5)..

XY.15, MOROKONOBAINGAT! walawa (a fish); while nume MOLLY WOLAT, WOOLA
or OOLA (as used at, Ancukun); b. 6, 1919 on Dalwai Island; removed from Allan
Island to Aurukun by police April 1941; arrived on Mornington Tsland September
1963; living Tune 1960; ago c. 41 years; measured as BI. no, 14; F, X23 m, Yt;
married Wit, (hen Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun on 20 February 1946; also had
a. child by Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River; 5 children, W£,8, W110, WE9
(by W.4), Of3 (by Robert), O.1 (by Nigel). Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry 2),
Py--, Leta), Fya@a+), K—, Wehb—, Jka—.

KL16, MEANGATT bidjarupa (dugong); white name |‘OOJTNJINT''; bh, ©, 19205 removed
from Allon Island 1941 by police and died at Mornington Island in 1941 from
weaknesa after giving birth; her child was taken to the father at Aurulun, 17
September 1941; f. > m ; moarried W,4; 1 child, W.11. :

Xf17. MINAKURINGATHI kulkit}i (shark); white name CARMEL; b. ¢. 1936; arrived on
Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living June 1960; age ¢, 24 years; measured as
BI. no, 26; £, X4; m, NF 12; married 8.19, 1.13; 1 child, T.21 (by T.15). Blood
typos:—O, Nas, Ra Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(et+), K—, Wabb—,

Xf.18. TALIWINDIWURUNGATTI iculkitji (shark); white name ANN OQOLOOKO gor)
OOLOBRA; b. lL May 1940 (fide Aurnkun records), on Allen Island; remover to
Aurikun April 1941; arrived on Mornington Tsland September 1953; living June
1960; age 20 years L month; not married; f. X.5; m. Xf.14.

Xxf.i9, +; white name EMILY; b, 17 Augnst 1943 at Auruknn; d. 7 May 1950 at
Aurulkun; aged G years 9 months; f, X.5; am. Xf.14.

Xt.20. MINAKTURINGATL banga (tortle); white name ELSTE; b, % July 1945, ostensibly
at. Minaluri but netually on Morningtou Island on day mother was taken back to
Bentinck Tslimd (after flvst short, visit); returned permanently to Mornington Island
18 October 1948; living June 1960; age 14 years 11 months; measured ag BI. no.
41; f, 3.3; m. Wf. Note: The father was also said to be 8.18, which may
sugvest X,3 died before her birth. Blood types:—O, Mss, Ry Ro, Py—, Leta—),
Fyis+), K—, Webb—, Jkat.

334 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Xf.21. MINAKURINGATI raerupuda (a fish); white name SYLVIA; b, & May 1947;
arrived on Mornington Tsland 21 October 1948 (last child to arrive); living June
1960; age 18 years 1 month; measured as BI_ wo, 42; f. 1.6; m. W£.3 (reason for
child being in dolnore X, not yet evident). Blood types:—O, Nes, Ry Ro, Py,
Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—, Jks+,

Males of Dolnoro Y

¥.1. Tawaringati kulkitji (shark); b. o. 1900; d, o, 1940; killed with spear at Munawurui
by 8.8; aged e« 40 years; ‘‘a tall man’’; £, 3 mM, 3; married Wf.4,
Wi.5, Uf11; 2 children, Y.5, YG (by WF.4),

Y.2. Birarukingati bidjarupa (dugong) and/or Walpu (raft); b, o& 1905; d. « 1945;
drowned from a raft in an aecident; syed a 40 yeara (widow claims he was a
*‘young’’ man; it is possible that there was also an older man with walpu totem
who is confused here); f. ; me ; married Vf4, WH6, Xf12; 3
children, Y,3 (by Vi.4), Yf4 (by WG), V4 (by X£12), also V£3 is probably
his daughter (by Sf.14),

Y¥.3, Tjodjongatjorongati burantant (bone fish); b. eo. 1988; d. co 1943; “just died’; not
married; was dumb from birth; f. Y.2; m, Vf.a.

¥.4, Tawaringati bininj (mullet); white aame Charlie Woollo; b, 2 October 1930 (date us
given in Aurukun revords, authority not evident); removed from Allen Tsland to
Aurokun by police in April 1941; arrived at Mornington Island 1950; 4. 1950 at
Burketown, of encephalitis; not married; aged ¢, 20 years; f. X.4; m. X£12 (reason
for dolnoro placing not established),

Y.5, Ngarangati banga (turtle) and/or tantamant (waterspout); white name Smilers db.
1935 at Ngara on south side of Bentinek Island; arrived on Mornington Island
from Allen Tsand 2 July 1947; d. 10 July 1952; aged c. 17 years; f, Y,1; m. Wf.4;
married Tf.13; 1 child, Y£5 (born 13 months after father’s death, but ascribed
to him).

¥.§. Birgrukingati tantamant (water spout); white name Billy; b. 1940; arrived on
Mornington Island 18 October 1948; living Juno 1960; age 20 years; moasured aa
BI, no, 14; not married; f. Y.1; m. Wf4, Blood types:—B, “Mss, Ry Rp, Py—,
Le(a—), Fylab), K—.

Females of Dolnoro V

Yt. BIRARUKINGAT! bidjarupa (dugong); b. «. 1885; d. a 1940 3 killed with a spear
at Tjiltjadji on south side of Bentinck Island when her daughter X£.15 and
daughter’s dangliter W£.8 were taken away to Allen Island hy Wt; £- 3

m. j murried X.2; 4 children, X48, XP10, Xt, X15 (by X.2),

Y¥f.2. BIRARURINGATT kulkitji (shark); b, e& I898; d. 1943; killed with spear at
Markaruki by 8.16, aided by 8,16; aged o, 45 years; f, > Mm, } Married
%4; 4 children, 20.2, 2.8, Bf.5, ZL.6 (by Za).

Y¥f.3. BIRARUKINGATI bidjarupa (dugong); white name ANNA; b. 1936; arrived on
Mornington Island 4 Angust 1947; living June 1960; age 24 yeurs; mot married;
no children; f. 8.5; m, S£,14, (Dolnaro positively identified;’ no explanation for
difference trom that of father.)

Y£4, DIODJONGATIORO rurupururupu (black fish hawk); white name VALMAE; hb, «,
1940 (was alive on 1 July 1941); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August 1947;
living June 1960; age ec, 20 -yenrs; not married; f. Y.2; m, WE; 1 child, Of5
(by Oolin Williams of Lardiil Tribe, Mornington Island),

¥£.5, ————— banga (turtle); white name SYBIL; b. 10 Angust 196% at Mornington
Island; living June 1960; age 6 years 10 months; f. supposedly Y.5 but child born
18 months after his death; m, TFf,13,

Males of Dolnoro Z

ZA. Ngiltalnguti; b, «. 1855; d. e, 1918; shot, by white tman who cama in a boat from
Sweera Island; ran away to top of sand hills at Berumoi and died; aged « 63
years; f. ; m. ; 2 known children, Zt, 2,2.

TINDALE—POPULATION OF BENTINCK ISLAND 335

Z.2. Dodjongapangati korpanggi (butterfiah); b. ¢, 1880; d, ¢. 1930; speared in the throat
during a fight on a saltpan at Tjapiluru by V.3; £, 2.1; m. ; Married Tf.4
(widow of 2.3); no children (by 4.2).

%.3. Markarukingati; b. ¢. 1890 or earlier; d. ¢, 1928; speared on a saltpan at Tjapiluru;
£, 7 My ; married Tf.4; 5 children, T.8 (perhaps his stepchild only), Z.5,
Z.7, Z£.3, Zf4 (by TY.4),

2.4, Ngolotalkurunaijarupangati riningati (tiger shark); is said to have left dolnoro 2. and
joined Y.; b, c 1892; d, o. 1928; killed at Tjapilurn by 8.7; aged o, 36 years;
t; ; m. ; married Y£2; 4 children, Zf.2, Z.8, Zf.5, Zf.6 (all by Yf.2).

2.5. Dodjonapangati; b. «. 1920; d. e, 1946, of sivkness of stomach; f, 3 mH, -
married Tt4, widow of Z.38 and Z.2; no children; also had beon promised 67,23,
who wags drowned during a raft voyage to Allen Island in 1947,

Z.6. Bokanaijarupangati; b, ¢, 1921; d, ¢. 1944; aged c, 23 years; not married; f. 2.3;
m. TF4,

“7, Ngiltalngati; b. ¢ 1923; d, ¢ 1945; aged ¢, 22 years; not married; with 2,8 was
killer of B.9; f. 2.8; m, Tf4,

%8. Danitjingath burantant ( y; be ce 1918; d, 1947 (beforo June); killed by
3.8: was killor of Uf10 and jointly with Z.7 killer of 8.9; unmarried; f. 2.45
m. Yt.2.

2.9, Dodjododjongati (Dodjongapangati); b. e 1927; d, 1948 of sickness of stomach; aged
ow. 20 years; just before his wife loft the island in October 1948; f. 7 1,——;
Wag newly married to T£.7 (widow of U0) when he died; no children,

Females of Dolnoro Z

Zf.1, BILINAPANGATI bidjarupa (dugong); b. c. 1875; d, o 1925 at Dolkalatji; aged
¢, 50 yoars; f, 41; mm, ; married V.1; 4 vhildren, V,2, Vf.2, V.3, Vi.6
(by V1).

4£.2. TONDOINGATT danuk (shark); white name THELMA; b. 1922; arrived on
Mornington Island 4 August 1947; living June 1960; age 38 years; moasured as
BL no, 27; f, Z4; m. Yf.2; married unknown, then 8.8, 8.17; 2 children, 02,20
(by 7), S£.28 (by 8.8). Blond types:—O, MNss, Ry Ro, Py-—, Le(a—), Fy(+),
K—, Webb—.

28.3. DODJONGAPANGATTI; b, c, 1925; d. ¢, 1942 at Dodjongapa; aged ¢. 16 yaara; not
married; f. 243; m Tra,

Zf.4. RALTURINGATL djolwaki ( ); white name DULCIE BOOTH; b. ¢. 1928
at Kalturi (in her stepfather’s dolnoro); arrived on Mornington Island 4 August
1947; living June 1960; age ¢, 32 years; measured as BI, no, 25; f, Z.d; m. TE4;
married S18, received by 8.17 but passed to T.12; 4 children, T£.16, Tf.17, T.20,
T?.19; also two stillborn unsexed ehildren, T.16 and T.18, prior to Tf£16, Note:
This won, in one place was listed as of dolnoro U, but no check was made.
Blood types:—O, MNsa, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Fy(a+), K—, Webb—.

21.5. TARUKUNGATI dentjorara (salmon); b. e. 1930; d. o, 1944 of spear wounds inflicted
at Parpkaringes cliypan apparently by 8.8; aged o, 14 years; unmarried; ¢, 4.4;
m, Y#2.

74.6. DANGKAUKENATIARUPANGATI (also called TIILIRUNGATI) walpu (raft);
b. 1987; d. o, 1943; killed with a spear at Markaruki by §.15, shortly before he
atrasked and was killed by the R.AA.F. man at Milt; aged o, 6 years; f, ZA;
m.. ¥f.2,

Male Whose Dolnoro is Unknown and Cannot be Assigned Because of Extra-Tribal
Male Parentage

0.1. —————-; white name Russell; b. 23 November 1953 at Mornington Island shortly
ufter mother’s urrival from Aurukun; living June 1960; age 6 years 6 months;
ft. Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River; m, Xf,16.

336 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Females Whose Dolnoro is Unknown or Cannot be Assigned Because of Extra-tribal
Origin of the Male Parent

Of.1. —————_NGATI; white name MOLLY; b., c. 1918; arrived on Mornington Island 18
October 1948; d. 13 February 1949, cause of death not given; aged ec, 31 years;
f, 3; m. } married 8.18; no children.

Of2. MUNUKKA ANJUMBIN (name at Aurukun); white name BEATRICE; b. 10
November 1944; still liying at Aurukun June 1960; age 15 years 6 months; not
married; f. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Aurukun; m. Wf.7.

O0£f.3. PAMPUTTA pulkududu (crocodile) ; white name ALMA; b, 20 July 1947 at Aurukun;
arrived on Mornington Island September 1953; living June 1960; age 14 years 10
months; measured as BI. no. 39; f. Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun; m. X#.15.
Blood types:—O, MNss, Ry Ry, Py—, Le(a—), Py(at+), K—, Webb—, Jka+.

Of.4. NDORNDORIN ANJUMBIN (name at Aurukun); white name DAWN, in some
records incorrectly given as LORNA; b. 6 May 1948 at Aurukun; still living at
Aurukun June 1960; age 12 years 1 month; f. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of
Aurukun; m, W4.7,

Of.5. —————— warung (goana); white name BETTY; b. 8 October 1958 at Mornington
Island; living June 1960; age 1 year 7 months; f. Colin Williams, fullblood of
Lardiil tribe, Mornington Island; m. Yf.4.

Persons who are not Kaiadilt, who have Married, or have had Marital Relationship
with them

Extratribal 1. Robert Kongnampa of Aurukun; b. 3 d. October 1948; married Xf.15
on 20 February 1946 at Aurukun; 1 child, Of.3 (by Xf.15).

Extratribal 2. Edward Munukka Koondoombin of Aurukun; b. ; living June 1960 at
Aurukun; f. ; In. ; married Wf.7; 2 children, Of.2 and Of4 (by WE.7).

Extratribal 3. Nigel Pootdemunka of Kendall River, Queensland; b. ; living June 1960
at Aurukun; 1 child, 0.1 (by Xf.5).

Eixtratribal 4. Colin Williams; Lardiil tribe of Mornington Island; b.
at Mornington Island; 1 child, Of.5 (by Yf.4).

Extratribal 5. IDA; Lardiil tribe of Mornington Island; b. ;_ living at Mornington
Island June 1960; f. } my, } 1 child, Uf.23 (by U.15),

; living June 1960

AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES OF THE GENUS CINCLOSOMA

By H. T. CONDON, CURATOR OF BIRDS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Quail-thrushes are a small Australian genus of Passerine birds (Family Timaltidae), of
problematical affinities. The different species occur in a variety of habitats on the
Australian continent, from the stony plains (gibber deserts) and semi-arid shrub
communities of the interior to the drier woodlands and sclerophyll forests of the eastern
coastal regions and Tasmania. Apparently in the early days of European settlement they
were extremely numerous in certain places, but during the last one hundred years many
forms have been extirpated from the more closely settled areas and wheat-growing
districts in several States; others are now threatened by expanding economic development
and habitat losses in all parts of the continent. Outside Australia the genus is represented
by a single species in New Guinea, where it is widespread in the lowland forests (fig. 1).

AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES OF THE GENUS CINCLOSOMA
By H. T. CONDON, Curator or Binns, Sourn Avustratian Musrum

Plates 12-13 and text fig. 1-4

CONTENTS

Page
Introduction and acknowledgments .. .. .. .. 337

The Genus Cinclosoma Vigors and Horsfield
TS2D cg ase to Re ot eee ae be be fe oy SRO
The number of Species .. .. .. .. 2. ss ss) O44
Sexual differences . .. 6... 6. ee ee ee ee ee B46
Key to the Species .. .. .. .. «2... we ee. = B49
Systematic treatment .. .. .. ........ .. 380
Literature cited .. .. 2. 6. 0. ee ee ee ee ee = 868

INTRODUCTION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Quail-thrushes are a small Australian genus of Passerine birds
(Family Timaliidae), of problematical affinities. The different species
occur in a variety of habitats on the Australian continent, from the
stony plains (gibber deserts) and semi-arid shrub communities of the
interior to the drier woodlands and sclerophyll forests of the eastern
coastal regions and Tasmania. Apparently in the early days of
European settlement they were extremely numerous in certain places,
but during the last one hundred years many forms have heen extirpated
from the more closely settled areas and wheat-growing districts in
several States; others are now threatened by expanding economic
development and habitat losses in all parts of the continent. Outside
Australia the genus is represented by a single species in New Guinea,
where it is widespread in the lowland forests (fig. 1).

The quail-thrushes frequently are referred to as ground-thrushes,
groundbirds, ‘‘rail babblers’’ (Gilliard, 1958) or ‘‘ground doves’’ (in
Tasmania).

The Australian forms have been the subject of a careful study by
A, J. and A. G. Campbell (1926). Unfortunately, no one museum

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The known limits, in Australia, Tasmania
and New Guinea, are shown in black, la is a South Australian isolate of! Spotted Quail-
Thrush (Cinclosoma punctatum). There are four described subspecies of the New Guinea
Quail-Thrush (Cinclosoma ajax), whieh is confined to lowland forests: a—ajaz;
b—muscalis; c—alaris; d—goldei (after Mayr, 1941).

Fig. 1. Distribution of the genus Cinclosoma.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUATL-THRUSHES 339

possesses a representative series of all the known forms, among which
are some of the rarest of birds. It is not surprising, therefore, that
opinions are divided and much bewilderment exists regarding the
taxonomy and nomenclature of the genus. Some consider that the
work of the Campbells was imdecisive (they refrained from using
trinomials) and certain contradictory proposals have been put forward
by G. M. Mathews and other writers. However, numerous specimens
of the different forms have been taken during the last twenty-five
years [rom new localities and a good deal more is now known, than
formerly, about distribution and the morphological differences between
the species.

The principal aim of this contribution ig to add to the series of
revisions of the genera of Australian birds, which have been com-
menced by Mayr, Serventy, Amadon, Keast, the author, and others
(see Keast, 1961). To this end the writer has re-examined nearly all
the specimens which were deseribed in great detail by the Campbells
(loc, cit.) and ean vouch for the accuracy of their work, Fresh
material hag been compared in the museums in Adelaide, Brishane,
Melbourne, Perth and Sydney. Dr, Ernst Mayr has kindly supplied
comments and measurements of specimens in the American Mnsenm of
Natural History and Dr, Allen Keast generously has made available
his notes on the same collection, together with some details of speci-
mens in the British Museum, Other information and comments have
been received from Dr, D. L. Serventy and Messrs. N. J. Favaloro,
W. B, Hitcheock, N. Jack, J. Jones, A. R. MeGill, A. R. McEvey and
G, Mack, to all of whom thanks are due. The eonelusions reached in
the text which follows are the writer’s own, <A, R. MeGill’s
comprehensive Index to the first fifty volumes of The Emu has proved
an invaluable aid to the work.

The Genus Cinclosoma Vigors and Horsfield 1827

Like many other Australian genera, Cunclosoma is of uncertain
origin and relationships; and its position in any scheme of classifica-
tion must be provisional, The genus is generally placed amongst the
“habbling thrushes’', or ‘‘babblers’’, family ‘Timaliidae. The
Australian Official Checklist (1926) follows Mathews (1921) and
recognizes a separate family Cinclosomatidae—a procedure which has
met with little acceptance,

Mayr and Amadon (1951), who have considered the question,
iterate Hartert's view that the thrush-flyeatcher group is a natural
one and all these birds, which inelude the timaliids, should be placed

340 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in the family Muscicapidae. This course has been followed in the
recommended sequence of Passerine families arrived at by an inter-
national committee (see Mayr and Greenway, 1956), Amadon (1957)
has found it expedient to restore family rank to both the Timaliinae
and the true throshes (Turdinae), Presumably he would retain
Cinclosoma in the Timaliidae, as favoured by Beecher (1955),

During a recent visit to Sydney, Mr, Keith Hindwood drew my
attention to a South African species, Chaélops frenatus, the Cape
Rock-Jumper, which hears a striking superficial resemblance to both
the Anstralian and New Guinea speeies of Cinelosoma. Gill (1945)
says ‘This remarkable bird and its two relatives are so difficult to
place in any scheme of classification . . , they are now generally
placed with the babblers, presumably on account of their long and
strong legs. Their general bearing and actions are those of a thrush
. . , The Cape species is found only on the mountains of the Sonth-
west Cape Province (excluding the Capo Peninsula) . . .7' The
coloured pictures in Gill and Roberts (1948) very strongly suggest a
quail-thrush, and there may be some distant connection between the
two genera (cf, Sharpe, 1903, p. 5),

Quail-thrushes are ground-trequenting birds, with skulking habits,
They are about the size of a European thrush (7'wrdus sp.) that is,
between 74 and 10 inches (18-25.4 em.) in length. Gould (1840), who
preferred to call the birds ‘‘groundthrushes’’, observed that ‘they
differ more in habits and economy from the True Throshes than their
outward appearance indicates’’, Dorsal coloration is rufous in the
desert forms and some shade of brown in all others. The broad
rectrices are dark with prominent white tips, exeept the central pair,
which are plain, frequently of the same colowr as the back and,
therefore, variable from one form to another. Plnmage is soft and
rather long, especially on the back, flanks and upper tail coverts.
Wings are short and rounded; the tail is longer than the body and
usually carried horizontally,

The tarsus is of medium length (i.¢., abont twice the length of
the bill), grey or nearly black in all the arid and semi-arid forms and
either pale brown or flesh-coloured in the eastern coastal mainland
and New Guinea species; it is seutellate in front and smooth and
undivided on the plantar surface. The legs and feet are no larger
or stronger than those of the average passerine.

The ratio of the lengths of the tarsus and wing ranges from 29 to
31 per cent in the Chestnut Quail-Thrush (all subspecies) and about
27 per cent in the Spotted Quail-'Thrush; the values are somewhat

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 341

higher in females. The bill, which in length exceeds its distance from
the eye, is slightly curved, opereulate and black in colour in both sexes
of all the species.

The sexes are different and can be easily distinguished in adults,
in the field and in the hand. For further discussion see below.

How far modern Cinclosoma has diverged from the remote
ancestral stock it is impossible to judge. Mayr (1944) places the
group to which the genus belongs in the second-oldest category of the
Australian avitanna.

Donbtless, some form of sexual dimorphism was the condition in
the immediate forebear of all the widely-dispersed, present day species,

The plumage pattern of young quail-thrushes is spotted and
squamate, which suggests Turdine affinities,

Campbell (1926) refers to a small white ‘‘splash’’ on the outer-
most (tenth) primary of all species. This marking is, perhaps, the
last remnant of an earlier and more ornate plumage patteru which
might have been similar to that of the maculose bower-birds
(Chlamydera), in which the tips of all the primaries, including the
tenth, have a whitish splash.

Tt is of interest to record that the only other Australian passerine
genus which has been found with a similar wing-marking is Drymodes
(serub-robin),

In the Southern Scrub-Robin (Drymodes brunneopygia), the wing
splash occurs irregularly in males only and, together with other
plumage markings on the head and wing coverts, seems to be in the
process of being lost, for the evolutionary trend in this species las
heen clearly towards a more sombre coloration,

In the rufous Northern Scrub-Robin (Drymodes superciliaris) the
same wing marking is found in both sexes, as in Cinclosoma.

The proper taxonomic relationship of Drymodes to Cineclosoma
remains undecided, albeit. the two genera are often placed close
together in association with a few other genera, such as the New
Guinea Vupetes, Young serub-robins are very similar to young quail-
thrushes. However, in adults, there are considerable size differences
between the sexes in Drymodes, males being larger than females.
Also, sexual dichromatism is not evident at any stage in the
development of the scrub-robins.

Beecher (1953) does not mention Drymodes, but says ‘'Cinclosoma
and Hupetes are slender-billed narrow-skulled terrestrial forms with
RK

342 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

free laerymal and, probably, forward vision; in them the pinnate
character of M7b (one of the mandibular adductor muscles—H,T.C,)
has virtually disappeared as it has in many honeyeaters and in the
true wrens’’,

Mathews (1921), speaking of Drymodes superciliaris says:
“Superficially this bird is closely related to Cineclosoma s, str., only
differing in the longer legs, so that it appears to be a bush-loving
form developed from a similar source’’.

Quail-thrushes are not songsters; they advertise their presence by
uttering either short, harsh warning notes, a drawn-out, peevish mono-
tone whistle, or ‘‘ltissing’’, The birds are ustially found in pairs or
small family parties; they feed on insects and seeds (Lea and Gray,
1935). Like quails, they flush with a loud whirr of the wings and, after
flying a. short distance, they may either drop suddenly to cover and
tan before an intruder or take refuge on the limb of a tall tree.

The eggs, which are unmistakable in form and eolour, are usually
two or three in number; they are extremely thin-shelled, rather large,
blunt, oval in shape, and mostly dull creamy-white, with dark
freeklings and spots, which vary in coloration according to the
locality and the species, The ‘‘carelessly constructed”? nest of bark
and grass is placed on the ground in the shelter of a low bush, tree
trunk or other object.

Cinclosama is a “natural’’ genus which may not be further sub-
divided as proposed by Mathews (1912) and Tredale (1956). Mathews
separated the desert forms, with cimnamomeum as type, under
*Samuela’’; later he reduced this group to a subgenus in his Working
List (1946), The minute differences, which Mathews quoted as
“eharacters’’ of Samuela, are overshadowed by the more conservative
features of plumage pattern and coloration which are common to all
species. [redale, whilst noting the similarity in plumage coloration
of the New Guinea C. ajax to Australian forms, has advocated the
adoption of the generic name Ajax Lesson on the grounds of
structural differences’? in the bill and legs and different habits. How-
ever, the New Guinea species seems not too different to be regarded
as a true qnail-thrush (Sharpe, 1908; Mayr, 1941),

So far as known, the genus does not oecur very far north of the
Tropic of Capricorn on the mainland and if is unrecorded from any
of the larger islands except Tasmania and New Guinea (fig. 1),

The distribution within Australia conforms to the prevailing
pattern amongst sedentary birds in that it is a radial one. Bach

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 345

species of quail-thrush is confined to a particular habitat which is
typified by the vegetation association; and, of course, the vegetation
associations follow the climatic zonation (rainfall), which is concentric,
with regularity. Diseontinuities of the major habitats are reflected
in the ranges of the birds, some of which are isolated simply by
indentations of the coastline (fig. 8), Present day distributions can
only be explained by changes in sea level and radial shifts of popula-
tions before increasing aridity (Condon, 1954; 18), Worldwide
climatic change is believed to have caused alterations to vegetation
patterns during aud since late Pleistocene times (Speeht, 1958), the
result of which could have been the expansion of the rages of the
arid zone forms and the elimination of other members of the genus
in the tropical north and other parts of the continent.

The Cinclosomatini have had, without doubt, a long evolutionary
history in the Australian region. Mayr (1944) thinks that the group
‘‘probably reached Australo-Papua during early or middle Tertiary’’
times, roughly 35 million years ago, accordmg to Holmes (1960). The
separation of the desert forms would have coincided with the initiation
of the climatic trends which led to the present zonation of vegetation,
perhaps during successive arid periods in the Pliocene (Waterhouse,
1940).

The Spotted Quail-Thrush (Cinclosoma punctatum) is the oldest.
member of the genus in Australia. The presence of isolated popula-
tions in South Australia and elsewhere (fig. 1) suggests that it may
have been widespread in former, more pluvial times. The remaining
species in Australia seem to be later derivatives from a different stock
more elosely related to the New Guinea species. Keast (1961) notes
that, New Guinea, at its closet point, is only about 100 miles from
Australia and that Torres Strait has been dry on several occasions
during the Tertiary and Pleistocene.

As alrendy indicated, allopatry is another feature of the genus,
although Cinclosoma cmnamamenm and Cinclosoma castanotum clarum
ovcur together in the same sector over a large portion of South
Australia (fig. 2, 3, 4), However, there sre differences in habitat
preferences between the two (cf. Keast, 1958, for a similar situation
in the genus Amylorms).

The species which has been recorded farthest north of the tropic
of Capricorn is, father surprisingly, the Cinnamon Quail-Thrush
(fig, 2, nos. 103, 103A). It is thought that only one species occupies
the great central desert region of Western Australia, from which

344 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

ornithological observations are lacking; this is Cinclosoma castanotum
clarum, the most distinct form of the Chestnut Quail-Thrush,

THE NUMBER OF SPECIES

On the basis of sexual dimorphism, other differences in plumage,
and geographical distribution, it is suggested that the number of
Species remains the same as that proposed by Campbell (1926).
These are :—

Cinclosoma aja», New Guinea Quail-Thrush (four subspecies apud
Mayr).

Cinclosoma punctatum, Spotted Quail-Thrush (with two sub-
species).

Cinclosoma castanotum, Chestnut Quail-Thrush (five subspecies),
Cinclosoma alisteri, Nullarbor Quail-Thrush (no subspecies).

Cinclosoma cinmnamomeum, Cinnamon Quail-Thrush (two sub-
species),

Cinclosoma castaneothorax, Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush (no
subspecies),

Cinclosoma marginatum, Western Quail-Thrush (two subspecies),

Several writers have proposed that the last four taxa listed above,
which are all rufous-coloured, allopatric desert forms, are conspecific
and that only three Australian species of Cinclosoma should be
recognized, A few workers have united C. alisteri with
C. marginatum, whilst others have preferred the arrangement in the
Australian Official Checklist (1926), in which the last-named is
combined with C. castaneothoraz, Although at first sight this might
appear to conform to modern ideas of taxonomie practice, it seems
that the similarity in plumage coloration should be ascribed to
convergence rather than to close relationship, for, as will be seen from
the distribution map (fig. 2), there is no direct connection between
C, marginatum and C, castaneothorax, which are on opposite sides of
the continent. Furthermore, no evidence of intergradation has been
observed between any of the rnfons, desert-dwelling forms and the
ranges of C, cimnamomeum and C, alisteri are contiguous in South
Australia, So far as known, C. marginatum is not in contact with
either C. cinnamomeum or C, alisteri (fig. 4).

“npsoyjoounyspe “9 ‘ysNAqT-TeNy paysvesq-ynuyseyO ‘egr-Tet {peu ~w ‘9 ‘OZT-TIT .
fwunjoursipu “wm “9 ‘ystayy-[eut Tiajseay “OLT-SOT *Menups ‘2 “9 SOLFOL funewownmua ‘a “Q ‘yenIGL-TTeNh Povpertnag:*) Veor
-99 faysyp ‘g ‘ysnayy-Teng ioqieynN ‘eg-08 +wepunp “9 “O ‘ei-89 ‘(1zeT ‘smosreq) ‘dsqnes wna 800 9 ‘L9 * UDO 0 '9
‘g9-7¢ {1unfuow ‘9 “9 ‘gc-gg fuinw ‘a "op ‘Te-gF fdsqns wnzounjsv9 ‘9 “OD ‘pp fangoumsps ‘a “9 ‘ysnIyy-[renh JuuyseyO “oF-6E
fwngojound -d ‘+9 ‘ysnayp-[rend peyodg ‘ge-L ‘SON yx} das some aoud 10g ‘“BYBISNy UL Dimosojour) snus | Su

(88) = enya sayayjoso) addy = SS pSal‘voipadxyz Ewisny waged

| | \

saisadsqns 9 saloads
VNOSOTONID snuab ayy

!
I
a |
aid

hen se ee

*
Pet ee ewerees s

oer @a iT

ens,

, av
zt U385j59D- beer deesstravevensy +eeneen nase

go!

rs rr
Bo
oem 0 en 6 ee fe es

346 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

For those who insist that C. alisteri and C. cinnamomeum are
conspecific, it may be pointed out that Hartert (1931) was quite
uncertain on this question and referred to C, alisteri as ‘‘a very
distinct form’, Campbell (1926) remarked that C. alisteri “is at
once distinguished from other ‘tawny’ species by the full black throat
and breast’? and listed the following ‘‘specific characters’? ;—' (a)
Small size and dark eoloration, (b) Upper surface entirely plain,
russet, (¢) Brown stripe not continuous before the eye; lores entirely
black, (d) White cheek stripe not reaching the gape. (e) Deep chest.
nut patch on each side of the breast’. The Campbells also referred
fo the Nullarbor Quail-Thrush as ‘an offshoot from castanotum?’.
Its young are certainly more like those of the latter species than
C. cimnamomeum, Figg coloration, often a doubtfal test, lends support
fo the view that C. alisteri is distinct. Two clutches in the South
Australian Museum, taken at Haig, Western Australia and 40 miles
south-west of Cook, South Australia, respectively, are heavily marked
with light chocolate brown on a buffy white ground, These eges show
no great resemblance to those of either C. cinnamomeum, in which the
frecklings are pale stone colour, or C!, castanotum, in which the eges
are nsnally freckled with black. Also the normal clutch of (. alistert
appears to be three instead of two, H, L. White (1922) has referred
to the ground colour in freshly taken eggs of C. alisteri as having ‘the
least possible trace of greenish tinge’’.

SEXUAL DIFFERENCES

Sexual dichromatism is a feature of the genus. Nothing appears
to be known regarding pair formation and display but doubtless the
marked sexual dimorphism not only assists the members of a pair to
find each other; it is also aposematic (Huxley, 1938). Howe, in
Mathews (1921; 192) describes the excited actions of parent birds
attempting to defend their young and the writer has observed a male
of the Chestnut Quail-Thrush, with head feathers erect, wings droop-
ing, and tail fanned, chase an intruder (sernb-robin), Plumage
differences, which are strongly developed in adults and usually readily
discernible in the young, follow a basic pattern in each sex, However,
in no two species are the sexes exactly alike and the minor variations
which are met with have obscured inter-specifie relationships.
Prominent white supereiliary and malar stripes distinguish males in
most cases and there is also much black on the face, ventral surfaces

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 347

and wing coverts in all species, a feature which, almost invariably,
is absent in females; these are much less boldly marked. Males have
the wing coverts prominently apotted with white (except C. ajax) ; in
females these spots are mostly buffy white.

At least one desert subspecies (clarum), of the widespread mallee
frequenting species of C. castanotum, presents a bright rufous colora-
tion dorsally in both sexes, which suggests that (his colour might have
been acquired independently on several oceasions within the genus.
This obvious adaptation to a desert environment, which involves a loss
of melanin in the visible portions of the feathers, has been discussed
by Meinertzhagen (1954, p, 9). Tt may afford some protection from
the sun’s rays by increasing the reflectivity of the plumage and
additional ‘screen’? protection from the sun is probably provided by
the dark pigmentation of the concealed portions of the feathers, which,
in Cinclosoma, as in many other unrelated desert forms, is considerably
darker than in species living in temperate zones. This is well shown
in the genus Drymodes, where the Northern tropical species, a rain-
forest dweller, has rufous plumage of the ‘desert type’, but the bases
of the back feathers are not dark as in the inland form, Drymodes
brunneopygia, which shows a slight amount of rnfoug on the romp.

There is a marked difference in the extent of rufous on the back
in the sexes of the Chestnut-breasted Qnail-Thrush (C. castancothorax)
of Queensland, In the male, the lower back and rump is rust-red, with
the upper tail coverts and central rectrices fuscous; in the female, the
scapulars and rump are rust-red with darker streaks and the upper
tail coverts and central rectrices are brown. The female of the
chestnut-breasted species is about the same size as the female of
C. castanalum (nominate race) and at first sight could be mistaken for
it, IT have seen a female of Cinclosoma castanotum clarwm, which is
‘éned’? on the back like C, marginatum, wrongly labelled as
‘“caslaneotharan’’,

The Nullarbor Quail-Thrush has the entire upper surface of the
male, from forehead to tail, a bright rust-red, whilst in the female this
colour is restricted to the scapulars, back and npper tail coverts, with
the head and mantle cinnamon-brown. In the Chestnut Qnail-Thrush,
the amount of rufous or chestnut on the back is variable; in two forms
it ig most prominent in males and either reduced or completely absent
in females. In another arid form of this species (morgani) it is
equally developed in both sexes. Dorsal coloration in C. cimnamomeum
ig similar in both sexes.

348 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Ventrally, there are important sexual differences in all species of
Cuclosoma, Males are invariably black-throated; in C. ajax, C.
castanotum and C, alisteri this coloration extends on to the upper
breast. The greatest amount of spotting (black) on the flanks is
found in males of C, punctatum (both sexes) and C. ajax; in other
species the spots are rednced to streaks, and in ©, castaneothorax the
cinnamon-brown of the flanks is margined with a black line, somewhat
as in marginatum. he flanks usually are not spotted in females.
Cinclosoma vinnumomeum has the narrow whitish band, which separ-
ates the black of the throat and breast in males, sometimes tinged with
rufous. This band disappears following wear and tear.

In the two rufous-breasted species, C. castaneothorax and C.
margmatum, the breast is separated from the white abdomen by a
narrow black line, which also borders the Hanks, but in the lastnamed
the flanks are of the same eolour as the breast (bright cinnamon)
whereas in C. castancothorar the flanks are more brownish.

With the exception of C, punctatum, which is similarly spotted on
the flanks in both sexes, no black appears on the flanks of females.
In C, punctatum the upper breast is grey in males and females. The
throat and breast are greyish in females of C. castanotum, C. alisteri
and C. cinnamomeum and more rufous in the two remaining species.
In females the centre of the abdomen and lower breast is white in
all species, although the extent of white in C. castaneothoraa is much
less than in either C, marginatum or C. cinnamomeum and more as
in C, castanotum.

The reduction of the superciliary stripe, which is buff in the male
of the Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush, and the incorporation of the
malar stripe in the light-coloured throat of the female in this species,
perhaps indicates a trend towards the condition found in New Guinea
birds (C. ajax), where the eyebrow is entirely absent in the male and
the throat and malar stripe (white) are merged in the female. As
already mentioned, there are distinct differences in the markings of
the head, face and throat in the different species (plates 12, 13) and
these may he used to separate them in the field and, more especially,
in the hand (see the key). Males have red irides; in females these
are brown except in C. punotatum, where the colour is grey.

It is probable that all the forms of Cinclosoma are vicarious, but
I have been unable to find any real reason why the more or less
ecologically similar desert-dwelling species should be lumped together
under one species.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES

KEY TO THE SPECIES

Males (all have black throat when fully adult).

. No superciliary stripe; wing coverts and alula
black, unspotted . :

Superciliary stripe present; wing “eoverts and
alula black with white spots . .

. Throat black, sharply defined from the fivehat>.
Throat and upper breast black . -

. Breast grey, a large white iialae patch . .
Breast rufous, a white malar stripe extending
from near the gape .

. A whitish band on the fotelieck: ‘which vontanelien
the black of the throat and wea h breast Ager
text) .

Foreneck black .

. Sides of breast grey, pte malar tripe ere Bt UH
Sides of breast chestnut, an enlarged white malar
BUTIPC eb orneligs Se thle aps, Sos

. Superciliary stripe white .. .. .. 2... .- 4.
Superciliary stripe buff .

Females (the throat is never black),

. Coloration of throat and malar region uniform
Malar region distinct from throat ..

. Throat and malar region white .. Wok os
Throat and malar region orange-buff .. .... ..

. Breast grey; a large orange-buff malar patch ..

Breast grey; a malar ating extending from near
the gape... ........ Je PERG Su

. Throat pale; malar sting orange- “buff: Hrenat
fawn grey . by) a ye

Throat same shade as s breast, ‘prey .

. A white malar stripe .. .. ~ wifi ats

An enlarged white malar stripe obn+

; Superciliary stripe buffy-white ; Lreast ‘deap
cinnamon .. ..

Superciliary stripe pale orange-buft breast pale
brown... .. ..

349

ajax

punctatum

cinnamomeum
5

castanotum
alisteri

marginatum
castaneothorax

ar why)

punctatum
4

cunmamomeum
5

castanotum.
alistert

mar ginatum

castaneothoraa

350 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

SYSTEMATIC TREATMENT

1. Cinclosoma punctatum (Shaw) 1795
(Spotted Quail-Thrush)

The Spotted Quail-Thrush is a denizen of the drier sclerophyll
forests of the highlands of eastern and southern Australia and
Tasmania (fig. 2). Tt is a declining species which has been wiped
out in many districts following the destruction of its natural habitat.
A set of two eggs in the South Australian Musemn (Malcolm Murray
collection), labelled ‘near Mt, Gambier, Dr. Morgan, November 11,
1898”, is the only evidence that the species may have once occurred in
that part of South Australia, In the sonthern Mount Lofty Ranges the
Spotted Quail-Thrush, unlike much of the indigenous faina, has found
a temporary haven in some of the government-owned pine forests, where
its future is uncertain, But wherever the native vegetation remains
undisturbed the birds occur in fair numbers and there is little doubt
that they were very numerous in the early days of settlement. on the
mainland as well as Tasmania, where they were often killed for food.

The species shares with ©. ajax, of New Guinea, the distinction
of having flesh-colonred or pale brown legs and feet.

Judging from the eggs, the nesting record of C. custaneothorax
from Gladstone, Queensland by Barnard (1900), should be referred
here. The Spotted Quail-Thrush is ‘‘still a well-known bird on the
Darling Downs’? (A, C, Cameron, in litt., January, 1962).

(a) Cinclosoma punctatum punctatum (Shaw) 1795
Turdus punctatum Shaw 1795. Zool. Nov, Holl., 3, pl. 9. New South

Wales,

Synonym; neglectum Mathews 1912. Frankston, Victoria.

Range: Southern Queensland from Gladstone (?), Bunya Moun-
tains and the Brisbane area south to coastal New South Wales (as
far inland as Grenfell) and Vietoria (north to beyond Bendigo) and
westwards towards the Glenelg River district in suitable localities;
extinef in many districts. In South Australia, confined to parts of the
Mount Lofty Ranges; probably extinet in the Mount Gambier district.
Not on Kangaroo Island.

Diagnosis: Grey breast band margined with black in male only.
General coloration and size variable and similar to the Tasmanian
form, Wing—Males, 111-112 (Queensland), 113-120 (New South
Wales), 103-115 (Victoria), 105, 114 (South Australia) ; females, 108-

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 351

111 (Queensland), 104-115 (New Sonth Wales), 106, 112 (Vietoria),
102-111 (South Australia). arsus—30, Bill—16-17 mm.

Bill black, iris grey, legs and feet pale brown (male); bill black,
iris grey with a tinge of lilac, inside mouth orange, legs and feet pale
brown (female),

Judging from variation in wing measurements, which is probably
elinal, the largest birds of both sexes come from New South Wales.
Tt hag not been established that the members of the relict Mount Lofty
population are smaller than those from Victoria, as suggested by
Campbell (1926), but it is thought that they may differ in having more
grey on the wings.

Mathews (1912) introduced the name neglectum for Victorian
birds, saying ‘differs from C. p. pumctatum in its darker coloration,
but paler than C. p, dovei’’, According to Hartert (1931), the type was
an adult female from Frankston, Vietoria, taken on March 13, 1909.
The name negleclum was dropped by its author from his Working
List (1946) and hag been rejected by most other workers,

Localilies: (see fig. 2, Nos. 1-38). 1. Sydney (type locality; 2.
Port Hacking and National Park area; 3. Colo River; 4. Lithgow;
5. Lake Wallis area; 6, Barrington Tops; 7. Cobbora; 8, Wellington
district; 9. Grenfell; 10, Upper reaches of Macleay River; 11.
Copmanhurst (North, 1904, p. 325); 12. Emu Vale and Warwick
(specimens, American Museum); 18. Brisbane (specimens, Queens-
land Museum); 14. Darling Downs (eggs, Wmu, p. 63); 15, Bunya
Mountains (specimens, American Museum); 16, Gladstone (Barnard,
1900); 17. Goulburn-Braidwood district; 18. Bega district; 19. Wonboyn
(Favaloro); 20, Buffalo Mountains; 21 Mallacoota (S. A, White); 22.
Marlo (Bryant); 23. Wilson Promontory; 24. Mornington Peninsula
(Frankston) (type locality, neglectum. Mathews); 25. Gippsland; 26,
Lang Lang; 27, Miteham-Ringwood area; 28. Anglesea (Purnell, Emu,
15: 41); 29. neat Geelong; 30, Ballarat (specimen); 31. Gisborne-
Macedon area; 32. Castlemaine; 33, North of Bendigo (Hitcheoek,
pers. comm,); 34, Pyrenees Mountains, near Ararat; 35. Grampians;
36. Hotapur; 37. Mount Gambier (eggs, South Australian Museum) ;
38. Mount Lofty Ranges,

Other localities not shown on map: New South Wales:—
Between Bermagui and Tathra (Edwards) ; Lockwood; Mount Irvine;
Wolgan (specimens). Victoria:—A. Gippsland and eastern Victoria;
north of Buchan (specimen); Deddich road, near Gelantipy (speci-
men); Drouin (Batey); Glenarona; Hazelwood (specimens); Monnt

352 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Cobbler, 4,500 feet (Cole); Mount ‘William, near Lancefield
(Batey); Merriman Creek (Ingle); Nyora; Reeves Riyer; Tambo
River (specimens); Tanjil River and Ranges (Mord); Sheep Station
Point, Gippsland lakes; Yinnar (specimens). B. West and north of
Melbourne :—Dog Rocks, near Geelong (Hill); Toolern Vale (30 miles
west of Melbourne) (Campbell); You Yangs (Bird Observers Club).

South Australia (Mount Lofty Ranges): near Adelaide; Amble-
side; Basket Range; Belair; Blackwood; Blakiston; Bridgewater;
Cape Jervis; Chain-of-Ponds; Hden Hills; Eneounter Bay; Kuitpo;
Lobethal; Meadows; Mitcham; Mount Lofty; Teatree Gully; Upper
Sturt; Uraidla (specimens and/or observations in each case),

(b) Cinclosoma punctatum dover Mathews 1912

Cinclosoma punctatum dovei Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p. 330.
Tasmania,
Range: Tasmania.

Diagnosis; The male differs from the mainland bird in being,
usually, more greyish on the head and back. There is a black margin
to the grey breast band in both sexes. The ahdomen, in females, is
pure white. Wing—‘‘Males, 107-111; females, 102, 109’’ (EK. Mayr).
Tarsus—31. Bill—16 mm.

Some of the differences to be found in Tasmanian birds were first
recognived by Campbell (1926) and they have been confirmed by
examination of material in the Mathews collection in New York by
Drs. Mayr and Keast. Ag pointed out by Hartert (1931), in size dower
falls within the range of the mainland form. Referring to Mathews’
description of the type (‘*smaller and darker’’), Hartert notes that it
has no original label and that a second specimen in Mathews’
collection is not ‘darker’? than mainland examples, Actually, plumage
coloration is variable, some birds being more greyish above than
others. Also the throat of the female may be either mottled greyish
or buff y-white.

Howe (1931) stated that the eggs of Tasmanian birds are ‘‘rather
larger’? than those from the mainland; also that the clutch “often”?
consists of three or four eggs, perhaps even five. Campbell (1900)
referred to reports of large elutch sizes; see also Littler (1910).
Sharland (1958), who gives the clutch size as two to three, considers
that the Spotted Quail-Thrush is ‘‘a diminishing species in southern
Tasmania and does vot appear to be common anywhere” for which he
blames the domestic cat, Littler (1910) says ‘*. , . in no locality is

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 353

it as plentiful as it was before the country was opened up. . . *?, when
it was ‘‘extremely plentiful’? and sold in the markets as a food
delicacy.

Localities: (not shown on map, fig. 2). Cullenswood; Freycinet

Peninsula; Hobart; Mount Wellington; Sandford; Wilmot; near
Koonya and Impression Bay.

92, Cinclosoma castanotum Gould 1840
(Chestnut Quail-Thrush)

The Chestnut Quail-Thrush, which is confined to the southern half
of Australia, is the most widely-distributed of all the species of
Cinclosoma (fig. 3) and shows the greatest geographical divergence.
Tt does not occur in localities with an annual rainfall of more than
30 inches. In the northern parts of its range the natural habitat is
arid scrub, with eucalypts in the minority, whilst in the south the
habitat is semi-arid or sclerophyll mallee, with Eucalyptus species
predominating.

Pam
pos Tae

Fig. 3. Distribution of Chestnut Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castanotwm. The subspecies
are: a-—castanotum; b—mayri; ¢c—morgani; d—dundast; e—clarwm. Stippled areas —
probable range, from which no specimens have been taken. Note that C, ¢, clarum over-
laps the geographical range of C. cinnamomeum (cf. fig. 4). x = subsp. (7) (Parsons,

21); y = subsp, (7) (Keast, pers. comm., 1959),

354 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Keast (pers. comm.) observed the Chestnut Quail-Thrush at
Nymagee (fig. 2, No, 47; fig. 3, y) near the northernmost extension
of the mallee in New South Wales, but failed to obtain a specimen.

Like the preceding species, Cinclosoma castanotum has been
driven from much of its former habitat in the wheat-growing districts
and its range and numbers must continue to diminish.

The following subspecies, some of which are isolates, may be
distinguished :
A, Dark chestnut rump in male (greatly reduced or absent in female) :
(a) Size small, general coloration olive brown castanotum
(b) Size larger, general coloration darker... mayri nov,

B. Chestnut rump brighter and more extensive:
(¢) Coloration of rump equally developed in
both sexes .. 2... wo ve ve we we ee es) morgani
(d) Coloration of rump reduced or absent in
females... 0. 6. eee ee ce we eee Cundasi
(¢) Back, seapwlars, rump and portion of upper
tail coverts light chestnut and eqnally
developed in both sexes... .. ,, .. .. olarum

(a) Cinclosoma castanotum castanotum Gould 1840

Cinclosoma castanotum Gould 1840. Birds Austr., part 1, Dee. 1.
Belts of the Murray, South Australia,

Range: Semi-arid Mallee districts of south-eastern South Aus-
tralia (as far north as Leigh Creek) and adjacent parts of New South
Wales (east to about Mossgiel) and north-western Victoria (south to
Tronbark Ranges) (Howe, 1909), and south of Ararat (Hill, 1907),

Diagnosis; Olive brown above (greyish) with a dark chestnut
band (40 mm, maximum width) restricted to the rump in males and
absent or greatly reduced in females and young birds. Flanks brown.
Kar coyerts olive brown,

Measurements: Wing—Males, 98-105; females, 95-103, ‘Tail—
Males, 94-99; females, 95-98, Tarsus—28. Bill—13-16 mm.

Gould’s cotypes, which are housed in the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, were obtained east of the Mount Lofty high-
lands in Mallee scrub near the River Murray in the direction of
Morgan, De Schauensee (1957) says ‘‘Gould’s plate shows a male and
a female, the male being a particularly richly coloured individual,

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 355

with which the type agrees’, He gives the following measurements:
‘Adult male, wing 105, tail 94; adult female, wing 98; culmen 16".

Campbells’ description (1926) of a male from Karoonda, South
Australia (B516), which they eall a ‘‘plesiotype’’, fits most individuals
of this race,

A specimen in the Australian Museum, Sydney (0.18077) bears
the label ‘‘ Adelaide, 1864°’, which is questionable.

Localities: (see fig, 2, Nos, 39-46). 39, Belts of the Murray
River (type locality); 40. Chauney’s Line; 41. Pinnaroo area; 42.
Mossgiel; 43. Ouyen; 44. near Ararat (Hmu, 44: 190) ; 45. Oodlawirra;
Leigh Creck (specimens).

Other localities, not shown on map:—Victoria—Antwerp (near
Jeparit; between Hattah and Kulkyne; lronbark Ranges (near
Stawell) (Emu, 8: 135); Kow Plains; Lake Boga; Nhill; Panitya;
Pine Plains; Red Cliffs; Turriff; Wyperfield.

South Australia—Alawoona; Bowhill (specimen); Copley;
Flinders Ranges near Lake Frome (8. Austr, Orn., 4: 73); Loxton;
between Murray Bridge and Karoonda (ibid., 10: 32); Mannum;
Paringa; Patsy Springs (Copley) (eggs); Renmark area ( thid., + 72);
Sutherlands; Taplan; between Truro and Blanchetown; Turner Well.

(b) Cinclosoma castanotum mayri subsp. nov.

Type locality; 20 miles south of Rankin Springs, New South
Wales. ‘ype: Australian Museum No. O 39745; adult male. Allo-
type: Australian Museum No, O 39688; adult female.

Diagnosis: Larger and darker than the nominate form, Adult
male :—Crown, ear coverts and dorsal surfaces olive brown, without a
greyish tinge; chestnut rump 47 mm. wide (against 40 mm, in
castanolum); white malar stripe 40 mm, long (against 30 mm. in
castanotum); extent of black from chin to lower breast 80 mm,
(in castanotum this does not exceed 52 mm.). Flanks reddish brown.
Wing, 107; tail, 112; tarsus, 31; bill, 17 mm. ‘Gonads developing;
no surplus fat; stomach contents seeds and insect remains”’ (collector's
label), Fresh plumage. Collector, J. A, Keast, September 15, 1957.
Adult female:—Large. Dorsal coloration similar to male, except for
rump, which is tinged with dark chestnut only; malar stripe well
developed. Wing, 100; tail, 99; tarsus, 30; bill, 16 mm. ‘‘Stomach.
contents, seeds.”? Fresh plumage. Collector, H. J. Frith, April 8,
1955, Locality, 27 miles north of Griffith, New South Wales.

356 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The presence of the Chestnut Quail-Thrush in some scattered belts
of Mallee serub in the Murrumbidgee Irrigation area of New South
Wales has long been known (Fimerson and Gannon, 1934; Chisholm,
1938), Rather surprisingly, specimens collected have proved to be
almost as large in body size as the Spotted Quail-Thrush; the
population is, of course, an isolate,

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 48-51), 48, Rankin Springs (type
locality) ; 49. Griffith; 50. Barellan (Zmu, 37: 307); Leeton (ibid. 22:
311). Also 36 miles north of Narrandera (Chisholm),

Cinclosoma castanotum morgani Condon 1951. 8. Austr. Orn., 20,
p. 42, 18m, north-west of Kimba, South Australia,

Fange: Kyre Peninsula, South Anstralia, Probably extinet in
many localities.

Diagnosis: Upper back (mantle) olive brown, Tower back, rump
and portion of the upper tail coverts bright chestnut and equally
developed in both sexes. Har coverts olive brown. Wing—Males,
102, 105; females, 92, 97. Bill, 18. Tarsus, 30 mm,

In size and coloration this geographical variant, which is
mentioned by Campbell (1926) and Morgan (1926), is intermediate
between clarum and nominate castanotum. Like clarum, it is
exceptional in having the male and female similarly coloured on the
upper surface, but the chestnut on the back is less extensive (47 mm,
wide). The type, a breeding male, is in the South Australian Museum
(No, B 5673).

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 52-53). 52. 18 m. north-west of
Kimba (type locality); Gawler Ranges area (specimens),

(d) Cinclosoma castanotum dundasi Mathews 1912

Cinclosoma castanotum dundasi Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p, 830.
Lake Dundas, Western Australia.

Range; South-western Australia (‘‘north to the mulga-eucalypt
line . . . but excluding the heavy forested area’? (Serventy and
Whittell, 1951). Probably extinct in a number of localities.

Diagnosis: The male resembles morgani, with the chestnut rump
about 47 mm. wide, but differs in having a shorter bill and longer
tarsus, Female is dull-coloured, the rump being either tinged with
chestnut (in the more easterly parts of the range) or plain. Ear

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 357

coverts olive brown. Wing—Males, 97-101; females, 95-99. Tarsus,
é4. Bill, 12-L5 mm,

The type, which is in the Mathews collection, was collected by
FE. L. Whitlock, at an altitude of 850 feet, on July 16, 1905; Mathews’
figure (1921, pl. 424) is hardly reeognizable. A topotypieal male, taken
by Dr. D. L. Serventy at a place 10 miles south of Widgiemooltha,
near Lake Dundas, on March 22, 1937, has been examined. Details
of specimen; ‘Iris, port-wine red; feet lead grey, Length, 250; head
47; wing 98; tail 105 mm.’’ (Serventy/Whittell collection, No. 746),

Most authors accept dundasi; some have suggested that clarum
(below) should be included with it. Further collecting in the western
part of its range may show clinal differences with the trend, in the
western parts of the range, towards a darker chestnut rump,

The habitat is mainly semi-arid scrub (Mallee), but it may include
areas of temperate woodland,

Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 68-79), 68. North of Southern Cross;
69. Lake Dundas (type locality); 70. near Norseman; 71, Widgie-
mooltha (specimens); 72. Coolvardie (Mmu, 27: 180); 73, 80 m. east of
Kalvoorlie (ibid., 10: 70); 74. near Nullarbor Plain; 75, Parker Range;
Dwaladine; Woyaline (Ibis, 3 (ser. 9): 683) (specimens); 76, Wongan
Hills; 77, Broome Hill; 7% Cranbrook; 79, Albany (specimens).
Specimens from other localities not shown on map:—Gracefield;
Woryantilla; Mongup (Salt River); 53 m. from Fremantle (on York
road) (Gould),

(e) Cinclesoma castanotum clarum Morgan 1926

Cinclosoma. castanotum clarum Morgan 1926, 8S, Austr, Orn, 8. p. 188.

Wipipippee rocks, near Lake Gairdner, South Australia.

Range: From the MacDonnell Ranges, Northern Territory west-
wards to Separation Well, Callion, and north of Kalgoorlie, Western
Australia; Mnsgrave and Everard Ranges south to about Lake
Gairdner, South Australia.

Diagnosis: The most brightly coloured of all the forms of
eastanotum, The back, scapulars, rump, and portion of the upper tail
eoverts are light chestnut (‘burnt sienna’’) in both sexes, The white
tips of the wing coverts are enlarged. Har coverts blackish in the
male. Examples from the northern parts of the range are more
tawny on the flanks. Wing—Males, 98-102; females, 97-102, Tarsus,
30. Bill, 19 mm,

358 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Specimens of clarwm have now been taken from such widely
separated localities as Lake Gairdner, Everard and Maedonnell
Ranges and north of Kalgoorlie, There is a specimen in the Australian
Museum which was collected by the Horn Expedition at Deering Creek,
Northern Territory and another, a female, from Callion, Western
Australia in the Queensland Mnseum (No, 06768). A further skin,
from near Ooldea is contained in the National Museum of Victoria
(No. R9574).

The type, a male, was collected by Dr, A, M. Morgan at a spot
about 5 miles east of the southern end of Lake Gairdner on August
17, 1905; it is housed in the South Aostralian Musenm, No. B77065.
An adult pair was taken by RB. Williams at a place between the
Musgrave and Everard Ranges, South Australia, in September, 1926,
Other records which ean he referred to clarwn are from Hdward Creek
(Simpson, 1983), Myrtle Springs, South Australia (Cain, 1935) and
near Separation Well, North-west Australia (eartland, in North,
1909), Whitlock (1910), knowing nothing of this rufous form of C@.
castanotum, which was not described until sixteen years later,
suggested that Keartland met with C. marginatum, not C, castanotum,
at Separation Well. However, althongh the latter’s specimens were
lost before he returned to civilization, there is no reason to doubt his
identification.

Females should not be confused with those of any other desert
species; the foreneck and throat, as in all forms of C. castanotum,
ig grey,

The habitat of clarwm differs from that of other subspecies of
C. castanolum, being an arid Mulga serub formation, rather than
Mallee. In northern Sonth Australia, the range of clarwm overlaps
that of the Cinnamon Quail-Thrush (see figs, 3, 4), but the latter
is restricted mainly to open stony (gibber) coutitry and in the strietest
sense should not be regarded as sympatric with clarwm, In Western
Anstralia the vanges of clarum and marginatum are probably con-
tiguous, and, depending on the nature of the terrain and vegetation,
the occurrence of the former may be limited to ‘‘pockets’’ of trees
and taller shrubs within the central desert areas of Western Australia
from which, as yet, no member of the genus has been collected or
reported,

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 54-67), South Australia, 54,
Wipipippes Roeks (type locality); 55, near Ceduna (S. Austr. Orn.,
9; 144) ; 55. Ooldea (specimen) ; 57. Myrtle Springs (S, Austr. Orn., 13:

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 359

10) ; 58. Hdward Creek (ibid., 12: 129); 59. Everard Ranges (ibid., 17:
6); 60. Officer Creek (eggs) (Mmu, 15: 35); 61. between Musgrave and
Mann Ranges (specimens); 62. Hermannsburg (Horn Expedition) ;
Deering Creek (specimen) (Horn Expedition). Western Australia.
64, Separation Well (Trans. Roy Soc. S. Austr., 22: 180); 65. near
Menzies (North, 1: 326); 66. north of Kalgoorlie (specimen).
Queensland. 67. Diamantina Gates (identity uncertain (Parsons,
S, Austr. Orn., 6: 20),

3. Cinclosoma alisteri Mathews 1910
(Nullarbor Quail-Thrush)
Cinclosoma alisteri Mathews 1910. Bull. Brit, Orn. Cl., 27, p. 160.
Waddilinia, Nullarbor Plain, Western Australia.
Synonym: nullarborensis Campbell 1922. Haig and Naretha, Western
Australia,
Range: Nullarbor Plain, Western and South Australia (fig. 4).

Fig. 4. Distribution of the arid species of Cinclosoma. 3, Nullarbor Quail-Thrush,

©, alisterit, which is confined to the shrub steppe region known as the Nullarbor Plain;

4, Cinnamon Quail-Thrush, 0. cianamomewm, in the areas of lowest rainfall, the environ-

ment being arid grasslands and stony (gibber) deserts; 5, Western Qail-Thrush,

C. marginatum, in a region isolated from the other forms; 6, Chestnut-breasted Quail-

Thrush, C, castaneothorar, which lives in open scrublands, Note that all, except the
last-named, are contained within the 10-inch annual isohyet.

360 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Diagnosis; The entire upper surfaces, including the central
rectrices, are rich rufous (‘tauburn’’ or ‘‘russet’’) in the adult male,
which has the ear coverts, throat, and breast black. The adult female
is duller rufous on the head and back, the superciliary and malar
stripes are whitish, and the ear coverts, throat, and breast are grey.
In both sexes the under tail coverts are buff, spotted with dark brown.
duvenals are dull rufous above and the feathers of the breast have
dusky or blackish edgings which become more intense with age,
in males,

Measurements: Wing—Male, 81-92; male juv., 78; female, 85, 86.
Tarsus—Male, 28; juv., 24; female, 25. Bill—16 (adult); 14 mm,
(male juv.).

The Nullarbor Quail-Thrush is a rarity in collections. There is a
small series, of about seven skins, in the H. L. White collection
(National Museum of Victoria), two skins in the Australian Museum,
Sydney, and three males in the Mathews collection (American Museum
of Natural History). There are no specimens in the South Australian
Museum. It is worth while emphasizing that C. alistert, which has no
subspecies, is a much deeper rufous bird than C. cimnamomeum, with
the markings of the throat and breast, in both sexes, more as in
Cc. castanotum.

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 80-85). 80. Waddilinia (type locality) ;
81, Haig (type of nullarborensis Campbell) ; 82. Loongana; 83. Forrest;
84, 40 miles S.W. of Cook (eggs); 85. Ooldea, Not shown on map:—
Naretlia.

4. Cinclosoma cinnamomeum Gould 1846
(Cinnamon Quail-Thrush)

‘he Cinnamon Quail-Thrush lives in the stony (gibber) deserts
and sandhill country of Central Australia, where the annual rainfall
is less than 10 inches (fig. 4), The geographical range extends
further north and south than shown in the map by Campbell (1926).
This is a variable species, both in size and coloration, and two
subspecies muy be recognized.

(a) Cinclosoma cinnamomeum cinnamomeum Gould 1846

Cinclosoma cinnamomeum Gould 1846. Proc. Zool. Soc., London, p. 68.
Sturt’s Depot, north-western New South Wales.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 361

Synonym: todmordeni Mathews, 1923. Todmorden, South Australia.

Range: Wastern desert regions of lower Northern Territory
(extending to just above the Tropic of Capricorn) far south-western
Queensland, far north-western corner of New South Wales, and
northern South Anstralia south to about Lake Torrens, Lake Frome
and the vicinity of Leigh Creek,

Diagnosis: Larger in body-size (not shown by wing and tail
measurements), Head more greyish than the back; ear coverts dark
greyish brown. Wing—Males, 85-90; females, 81-87. Tarsus, 28,
Bill, 16 mm.

Females are usually paler than males with the wing coverts
brownish black with prominent white tips. The [female figured by
Mathews (1921, pl. 426) is a apecimen from uear the Macumba River,
South Australia, Young birds have the feathers edged with black,
forming crescents, especially on the under surface. Abrasion causes
gome variation in the plumage pattern of males, Birds from near the
centre of the range, separated as fodmordeni ty Mathews, are often
palest (cansed by fading and wear), but light and dark individuals
have been examined from the same locality. Specimens from
Todmorden, Oodnadatta, Birdsville and Lake Frome are indistingush-
able in most. instances,

Of special interest is a specimen taken for the Northern Territory
Administration by Mr. W. B. Hitchcock, on May 9, 1955; the locality
was ‘19 miles east of Cockroach W-IL, Jervois 8. R.’*. The specimen,
an immature male, is temporarily housed in the National Museum of
Victoria, Details from the colleetor’s label are:—** Male, skull n-f.o.;
irig warm sepia; moult-legs; humeral (slight). On road and on
stony ground in Acacia georginae and Cassia sp. community’’. This
represents the northernmost record of the genus in Australia, although
previously (1949), the late L, J. Hillis took a set of two eggs of a
species he was unable to identify in rocky country in the Jervois
Ranee, Northern Territory, at a spot south-west of Cockroach W.H.

Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 86-104). 86. Sturt Depot (type
locality); 87. Monnt Arrowsmith; 88. Lake Baneannia; 89. west of
Wileannia; 90, west of Paroo River; 91. Naryileo Station; 92. Lake
Frome; 93. Leigh Creek; 94. north of Marree; 95. Murturee, Strzeleckt
Creek; 96. Mirramitta; 97, Blood’s Creek; 98. Todmorden (type
locality of fodmordent); 99. near Oodnadatta; 100. Horseshoe Beud;
101, Crown Point; 102, near Hermanusburg; 103, Jervois Range; 103A.
19 m. BH. of Cockroach W.H., Jervois S.R. (Hitchcock) ; 104, Ooldea
(specimen).

362 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

(b) Cinclosoma cinnamomeum samueli (Mathews) 1916

Samuela cinnamomea samueli Mathews 1916. Austral Av. Rec., 3,
p. 60. Gawler Ranges, South Australia.

Range: South-west of Lake Eyre, extending through Stuart Range
to Ooldea and the Gawler Ranges.

Diagnosis: Cinnamon coloration brighter and more intense; the
crown and ear coverts have a rufous wash and the amount of white
on the band separating the black breast and throat is somewhat
reduced. Wing—Males, 85-90; females, 80-85. Tarsus, 27. Bill, 15 mm.

It has not been possible to determine exactly the northern limits
of samuelt, Probably it does not extend beyond a line drawn from
Stuart Range to the northern shores of Lake Torrens. The type, a
male in the Mathews collection, came from Sandford’s paddock, a
holding in the Gawler Ranges; it was taken on September 3, 1912, by
S. A. White.

Hartert (1931) correctly points out that this form has nothing to
do with the North-western Australian form C. marginatwm, which
Mathews calls ‘‘nea’’ in his 1931 List. Samueli can be distinguished
by its small body size and greater amount of rufous coloration on
the crown and ear coverts; it can in no way be confused with
castaneothorax, from Queensland, with which Hartert was inclined to
unite it. Material examined suggests that females may have more
grey on the throat than those of the nominate form, but occasional
examples are met with the throat pale buffy white. The general
coloration, in both sexes, is more rufous, or of a deeper shade, than
in the northern race, not ‘‘paler’’ as stated by Mathews, whose type
was ‘‘very worn and in poor condition’’ (Hartert, loc. cit.).

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos. 105-107). 105. Mount Eba; 106.
Stuart Range; 107. Gawler Ranges (type locality of samuelt).

5. Cinclosoma marginatum Sharpe 1883
(Western Quail-Thrush)

The Western Quail-Thrush occupies the Mulga serubs of the huge
pastoral area of North-western Australia, its range, so far as known,
extending from just north of the Tropic of Capricorn southwards to
the agricultural areas and eastwards towards the sand dune desert
country where hummock-forming xeromorphic grasses (Triodia, etc.)
predominate (fig. 4, No. 5).

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 363

Much confusion has arisen regarding the correct name for this
form of Cinclosoma following Mathews’ decision (1927) to treat O.
marginatum and CG. cinnamomeum as conspecific, Previously the
former had been combined with GC. castaneothorar (see Australian
Oficial Checklist, 1926), Making an erroneous assumption, Mathews
suppressed the name marginatum Sharpe and substituted for it instead
one of his earlier names, vea. He argued, correctly, that, Mlsey, whom
Sharpe had named as the collector of the type of C. marginatum, had
never heen in Western Australia and then went on to propose ‘‘North-
west New South Wales’? as the type locality for C. marginatum. In
doing so, he ignored an entry in the British Museum register which
stated that Sharpe's type was ‘‘from an Australian Expedition,
probably Mr. Austin’s, W. Anstr.’’.

Robert Austin was a surveyor who arrived in Western Australia
in 1840, Four years later he made a trip via lakes Coweowimg and
Austin to the upper reaches of the Mnrehison and then proceeded to
Geraldton. The route of this expedition is shown ou early published
maps of Western Australia (¢.g., Philip's Handy General Atlas of the
World, 1882). Austin returned with a small collection of bird skins
for the British Museum. Among them were two skins of Cinclosoma,
eolleeted in the vicinity of Mount Kenneth, 70 miles south of Mount
Magnet (Whittell, 1954); the type locality of Sharpe’s C, margimatum
shonld be amended accordingly.

The inland form of C, marginatum is smaller and paler than the
bird deserihed by Sharpe, and Mathews’ name, wea, is available for it.

Unfortunately, Hartert (1981) treated nea as a form of C,
cinnanomeum and the true situation has been further obscured by
Whittell and Serventy (1948), who have rejected both marginatum and
nea, employing instead the naine castancothorax (type locality “Sonth
Qneensland’’?) as a subspecifie designation in combination with
Cinelosoma cinnamomeum for birds from North-western Anstralia.
This eourse hag reeently beeu followed by Lindgren (1961) whose
reference to the ‘(Cinnamon Qnail-Thrush’’ at Jigalong (Lat. 23 deg.
24 min. 8. Long, 120 deg. 46 nin. M1.) should, of course, be applied to
the Western Quail-Thrush,

As pointed out by Gentilli (1961) the habitat of C. marginatum
has suffered great changes owing to overgrazing by sheep and the plant
cover “‘in some places has beeu almost wiped out’. Thus it seems
that, like other members af the genus, C. marginatum will have little
opportunity to adapt itself to the new conditions imposed by man.

364 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(a) Cinclosoma marginatum marginatum Sharpe 1883

Cmclosoma marginatwm Sharpe 1883. Cat. Bds., Brit. Mus., 7, p. 336.
Type locality, amended herein, Mount Kenneth, Western
Australia.

Range: Coastal regions from about the Tropie of Capricorn,
extending to south-east of the Murchison River, within the 10-inch
rainfall belt, Western Australia.

Diagnosis: Males have a bright rufous (cinnamon) breast band,
dark brown ear coverts and a well-defined dark crown. The eyebrow
is white and the breast and flanks are bordered with black. The under
tail coverts are black edged with white. The back rump, central
rectrices and flanks are bright rufous in both sexes.

Females have a dark crown, brown ear coverts, the throat, super-
ciliary stripe and malar region deep buff, the back is streaked darker,
and there is very little white on the rufous abdomen, The under tail
coverts are reddish-brown tipped with white, with a narrow
subterminal black band.

Wing—Males, 91, 97; female, 97. Tail—Male, 95; female, 101.
Tarsus, 29-31. Bill, 14.

Locahties: (see fig. 2, Nos. 108-110). 108. Mount Kenneth (type
locality) ; 109. near Yalgoo; 110, Mount Ida.

(b) Cinclosoma marginatum nea Mathews 1912

Cinclosoma castaneothorax nea Mathews 1912. Nov. Zool., 18, p. 331.
Day Dawn, Western Australia.

Range: North-western Australia (inland).

Diagnosis: Smaller and paler than the preceding form. Ear
coverts rufous, lores brownish in the female. Wing—RMales, 91-92;
females, 81-91. Tarsus, 27. Bill, 15 mm.

There is little doubt that specimens from the lower rainfall
regions of North-western Australia can be separated from those nearer
the coast and this is borne out by descriptions published by Mathews,
Campbell and other writers. Day Dawn, the type locality of nea, is
about 50 miles north of Mount Magnet. Further material may indicate
that the variation in this species is clinal, in which case some authors
may prefer to drop nea altogether.

A small female, taken at Carnarvon, has the ear coverts brownish
instead of rufous and could be referred to either form.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 365

Localities; (see fig. 2, Nos. 111-120). 111. Carnarvon; 112, Day
Dawn (type locality); 113. Wiluna (Zmu, 9: 196); 114. Lake Darlot;
115-116. Canning Stock Route (specimens); 117, Brockman Creek
(Calvert Expedition); 118. Jigalong (W. Austr, Nat., 7: 114); 119
Wanery River; 120. Barlee Range.

6. Cinclosoma castaneothorax Gould 1849
(Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush)
Cinclosoma castaneathorae Gould 1849. Proc, Zool. Sac., London,

1848: 139, pl. 6, Near the Dawson River, Queensland.

Range: Interior of southern Queensland and adjacent areas in
New South Wales.

Diagnosis: Tn the male there is a glossy black throat; rich rust-red
breast band edged with black; eyebrow buff; the rump and back are
deep rust-red, The female has the throat and malar region orange-buff
and the eyebrow is of the same colour. The breast, which is pale
brown, merges into the dull cianamon-brown of the flanks, There is
no black on the under surface of the female, which has the back
olive-brown and the ramp reddish-brown, with indistinct darker
streaks.

Bowdler Sharpe (1881) pointed out that Gould's name for
this species, being a ‘‘vox hybrida’’, should be amended to
‘Cerythrothoran’’, but the altered spelling has never been used. In
Gould’s original deseription it was stated ‘‘Hab. Darling Downs, New
South Wales” and this has been quoted generally as the type locality.
However, it seems certain that the type, a male, was taken by Charles

oxen at a place north of the Darling Downs nof far from where
Gilbert, when collecting [or Gould, saw some birds in the Valley of
Ruined Castles, near the upper reaches of the Dawson River, Queens-
land (Chisholm, 1945) (see fig. 2, No. 121).

Only four specimens have been taken of this little known species,
viz. (a) Gould’s type, acquired by the British Museum, and, T am
informed, now missing; (b) an adult male, collected by F. lL. Berney,
at Barearolle, Thomson River, Queensland, September 4, 1925 and
now in the Queensland Museum (O 3501). This bird has been
deseribed by Campbell (1926) and described and figured by Mathews
(1928, pl. 44). (ce) An adult female (South Australian Museum, No.
B 21432), collected by Dr. W. MacGillivray, Adavale-Charleville road,
August 27, 1923. It has been figured by Mathews (1928, pl. 44).
(@) An adult male, taken in Thryptomene heath scrub country at
Eungonia (near Bourke), New South Wales, September, 1960 (National

366 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Mnseum of Victoria, No. B7383). Eggs were also taken near the same
place in 1959.

Measurements: Type male (adapted from Gould)—Total length,
212, Wing, 100. Tail, 106. Tarsus, 25. Bill, 25 (?). Male (Berney’s
specimen)—Wing, 99. ‘Tail, 105, Tarsus, 27. Bill, 14. Male
(Enngonia)—Wing, 99, Tail (worn), 102, Tarsus, 28. Bill, 14,
Adult female—Wing, 98. Tail, 96. Tarsus, 28. Bill, 15 mm, The
male preserved in the National Museum of Victoria had a black bill
and grey legs,

Gould’s type was figured with the original description (1849) and
a different illustration of the same bird was given in the “Supplement
to the Birds of Australia’? (1855, pl. 32). A farther illustration of
the type was supplied by Mathews (1936, pl. 70, left hand figure). It
would seem that the accompanying descriptions given by Mathews at
this time, wherein C, castaneothorax and C, marginatum are compared,
became transposed by the printer. The male in the Queensland
Museum, which is the same specimen as described by Camphell (1926),
now bears the date May 20, 1926 instead of the proper date
“September 4, 1925’. Cameron (1932, 1938) reported secing the
species at Quilpie and Moombidary Station (Hungerford), Queensland
and more recently near Bourke, New Sonth Wales.

The Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush was combined with C.
marginatum im the Australian Checklist (1926) heeanse there is a
superficial resemblance between the males of the two species. Of late,
especially among those who have not examined specimens, the tendency
has been to regard both C. marginatum and ©. castaneothoran as
forms of C. cinnamomeum. The male from Emgonia, in which the
plumage is fairly fresh, is darker on the back than the specimen taken
by Berney. The sternum has heen preserved.

A. R. McEvey has written, ‘Tn the TH. L, White collection is a set of
two eggs labelled C. custaneothorax—taken by IT. Lau, Darling Downs,
Queensland, Octoher, 1888 (see Emu, 8:63). These are distinet from
others labelled marginatum alisteri and castanotum. Though smaller
than those of punctatum, they are clearly of the punctatum type,
haying a white ground colour sparingly speckled with very small
umber, mauve and purple spots’’, The writer agrees that these eges
are probably punctautum,

Localities: (see fig. 2, Nos, 121-124). Near Upper Dawson River
(type locality). 122. Barearolle, Thomson River, 123, Adavale-
Charleville road. 124. Quilpie. 125, Enngonia,

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 367

7. Cinclosoma ajax (Temminck) 1835
(New Guinea Quail-Thrush)

Eupetes ajax Temminck 1835, Planch. Col. d’Ois., pl. 573. Lobo,
Triton Bay, South-west New Guinea,

Range: New Guinea (lowland forests).

Tredale (1956) does not regard this species as a true quail-thrush,
which it seems to be in every way. The male differs from all other
members of the gents in lacking a white eyebrow and in having no
white on the black wing coverts. The differences between the sexes
are more marked than in any Australian species. The adult female
has a white eyebrow, the throat and malar region are pure white
(merged), and the wing coverts are nearly black or brown, aceording
to the subspecies, with prominent white markings. In size Cinclosoma
ajax approaches C, punctatum of the Australian mainland, being
approximately 94 inches (242 mm.) in length,

The following is a synopsis of the subspecies listed by Mayr
(1941) :-—

(a) Cinclosoma ajax ajax (Temminck) 1835, Triton Bay, New
Gninea. Larger and darker brown above than the following, with the
lores and postocular stripes black. Wing—‘‘Male, 114; female, 109,
110”.

Range: Western coast of Geelvink Bay and Triton Bay.

(b) Ginclosoma ajax muscalis Rand 1940. Palmer Junction, upper
Fly River, south New Guinea. Resembles ajax above, with the flanks
and sides of the breast much paler and less vividly coloured. Wing—
‘*Male, 108, 110’.

Range: Upper Fly River, south New Guinea.

(c) Cinclosoma ajax alaris Mayr and Rand 1935. Wuroi, Oriomo
River, south New Guinea, Known only from the female, which is
larger and more deeply rnfous above than the female of goldei, with
the wing coyerts more brownish,

(d) Cinelosoma ajax goldei (Ramsay) 1879. Port Moresby, New
Guinea. Smaller and paler olive brown above than the nominate form.
Wine—‘ Male, 103, 104’’.. Two males, which are similar to that ficured
by Iredale (1956), are contained in the Australian Museum, Sydney.

Range: Milne Bay to Hall Sound, south-eastern New Guinea.

368 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LITERATURE CITED
Amadon, Dean, 1957: Proc. Zool. Soc., Calcutta; Mookerjie Mem. Vol.:
259-268.

Barnard, E. D., 1900: Emu, 1: 26.
Beecher, W, J., 1953: Auk, 70, 270-337,
Cain, W., 1935: 8. Austr. Orn., 13:10.
Cameron, A. C., 1932: Emu, 32: 104.

1938: Ibid., 37: 316,
Campbell, A. J., 1922: Ibid., 21: 161-2.

1926: Ibid., 25; 152.
Campbell, A. J. and A. G., 1926: Ibid., 26: 26-40,
Chisholm, A. H., 1938: Ibid., 44: 190.

1945: Ibid., 44: 190,
Condon, H. T., 1954: §. Austr, Orn., 21: 17-27.
Delacour, J., 1946: L’Oiseau, 16: 14-31.
Delacour, J. and C. Vanrie, 1957: Contrib. Sci., No. 16.
de Schauensee, R. M., 1957: Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 109: 199,
Emerson, R. and R. Gannon, 1934: Hmu, 33: 311.
Gentilli, J., 1961: W. Austr. Nat., 7: 180.

Gilliard, EK. T., 1958: Living Birds of the World. London. Hamish
Hamilton.

Gill, EH. L., 1945: First Guide to South African Birds. Cape Town.
Maskew Miller.

Gould, J., 1840: Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 5: 116.
1849: Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1948: 68, pl. 6.
1848: Suppl. Bds, Austr., pl. 32. London.
1865: Handbk. Bds. Austr., 1: 439. London.
Hartert, E., 1931: Nov. Zool., 37: 48.
Hill, G. F., 1907: Hmu, 6: 179.
Holmes, A., 1959: Trans. Edin. Geol. Soc., 17: 183-216.
Howe, F. E., Emu, 8: 135.
1931: Ibid., 20: 292.
Huxley, J. S., 1938: Proc. 8th. Int. Orn. Congr., 1934: 430.
Iredale, T., 1956: Birds of New Guinea. Melbourne. Georgian House.

CONDON—AUSTRALIAN QUAIL-THRUSHES 369

Keartland, G., in North, 1909: Ree, Austr. Mus., Sydney, 7, No. 4.
Keast, J. A., 1958: Austr. Journ, Zool., 6: 33-52.
1961: Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Harvard, 123: 305-495,
Lea, A. M. and J. T. Gray, 1935: Hmu, 35: 93.
Lindgren, E., 1961: W. Austr. Nat., 7: 174.
Mathews, G. M., 1912: Nov. Zool., 18: 330.
—— 1921: Bds., Austr., 9. London. Witherby.
1923: Austr. Av. Rec., 5: 35.
1927: Bds. Austr., 12: 427. London. Witherby.
1931: List Bds. Austr., 287-8. London. Taylor and Francis.
1936: Suppl. Addit., Bds. Austr., London. Witherby.

1946: Working List Bds. Austr., Sydney. Shepherd and
Newman.

Mayr, E., 1941: List Bds. New Guinea: 110, New York. Amer. Mus.
Nat. Hist.

1944: Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., 83: 123-194.
Mayr, E. and D. Amadon, 1951: Am. Mus. Novit., No. 1496,

Mayr, E. and J. ©. Greenway, 1956: Breviora (Mus. Comp. Zool.,
Harvard), 58: 1-11.

Meinertzhagen, R., 1954: Birds of Arabia. London. Oliver and Boyd.
North, A. J., 1897-8: Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 22: 180.
1901: Nests and eggs of birds found breeding in Australia

and Tasmania. Vol. 1: 326. Sydney. Australian
Museum,

Parsons, F. E., 1921: 8. Austr. Orn., 6: 20.

Royal Australasian Ornithologists Union, 1926: Official Checklist
Austr, Birds.

Roberts, Austin, 1948: Bds. South Africa. Witherby.

Serventy, D. L. and H. M. Whittell, 1951: Birds of Western Australia.
Perth. Paterson Press,

Sharland, M., 1958: Tasmanian Birds. Sydney. Angus and
Robertson.

Sharpe, R. B., 1881: bis: 605.
1883: Cat. Bds., 7: 331 et seq.
1903: Handlist Bds., 4: 2-5.

370 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Simpson, H., 1933: S. Austr. Orn., 12: 129.

Specht, R. L., 1958: Rep. Amer.-Austr. Sci. Exped. Arnhem Land, 3:
433-438.

Vigors, N. and T. Horsfield, 1827: Trans. Linn. Soc., London, 15: 219.

White, H. L., 1922: Emu, 21: 164.

Whitehouse, F. W., 1940: Univ. Queensld. Papers, 2, n.s., no. 1.

Whitlock, F. L., 1910: Emu, 9: 196.

Whittell, H. M., 1954: Bibliogr. Austr. Orn., p. 27. Perth. Paterson
Brokensha.

Whittell, H. M. and D. L. Serventy, 1948: Syst. List Bds. W. Austr.
Perth. Govt. Printer.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 12-13

Plate 12. Genus Cinclosoma. Heads of adult pairs, males on left, la, Spotted Quail-Thrush,
Cinclosoma punctatum punctatum; 2a, Chestnut Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castanotum
castanotum; 2b, Cinclosoma castanotwm mayri; 3, Nullarbor Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma
alistert.

Plate 13. Genus Cinclosoma. Heads of adult pairs, males on left. 4a, Cinnamon Quail-
Thrush, Cinclosoma cinnamomeum cinnamomeum; 5, Western Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma
marginatum marginatum ; 6, Chestnut-breasted Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma castaneothoraz ;
7, New Guinea Quail-Thrush, Cinclosoma ajax ajaz.

Ree, 8.A, Moseum Von, 14, Puate 12

H FCoNDON - 196/

To faves poye 370.)

Ree, §8.A, Musevy

ABERRANT AUSTRALIAN BRACHYPTEROUS MYODOCHINE
BUGS (LYGAEIDAE, RHYPAROCHROMINAE)

By GORDON F. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper deals with the systematics of a predominantly brachypterous group of rather
specialized Australian bugs of the Lygaeid tribe Myodochini. Three new genera are
erected and fourteen species of the Australian fauna discussed. Five of the species are
new and some synonymy of the others is proposed.

ABERRANT AUSTRALIAN BRACHYPTEROUS MYODOCHINE
BUGS (LYGAEIDAE, RHYPAROCHROMINAE)

By GORDON F. GROSS, Curator or Insucts, SourH AUSTRALIAN
Museum

Plates 14-16

SUMMARY

This paper deals with the systematics of a predominantly
brachypterous group of rather specialized Australian bugs of the
Lygaeid tribe Myodochini. Three new genera are erected and fourteen
species of the Australian fauna discussed. Five of the species are
new and some synonymy of the others is proposed.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This paper was made useful through the unstinting help of Mr.
G. G. EH, Scudder of the University of British Columbia, Vancouver
and of Dr. T. E. Woodward of the University of Queensland. The
latter, when in England, took the trouble to examine all available and
relevant type material. Mr. Seudder supplied much useful criticism
at the generic level. I am indebted to the Directors and Boards of
Trustees of the National Museum, Melbourne, the Australian Museum,
Sydney, the British Museum, the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet,
Stockholm, the Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide, and
the Division of Entomology C.S.I.R.O. Canberra, for loans of material,
freely made to Mr. Scudder, Dr. Woodward, and myself.

ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations are used in citing the location of
material, S.A.M—South Australian Museum, Adelaide; N.M.—
National Museum, Melbourne; A.M.—Australian Museum, Sydney;
C.8.1.R.0.—Division of Entomology, C.8.1.R.0., Canberra; W.A.R.I—
Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide; B.M.—British
Museum (Nat, Hist.), London; R.M.S,—Riksmuseet, Stockholm.

372 RECORDS OF THE §,A, MUSEUM

INTRODUCTION

Classification of the subfamily Rhyparochrominae on the tribal
and subtribal level has always presented considerable difficulties, and
several markedly different sehemes have been proposed. Stal (1872)
divided the subfamily into six divisions—Myodocharia, Rhyparochro-
maria, Beosaria, Gunianotaria, Lethoearia and Drymaria, then again
in 1874 placed the subfamily in five divisions—Cleradaria, Myodo-
charia, Rhyparochromaria, Beosaria and Lethoearia, Distant (1903)
recognized the first three of Stal’s 1874 divisions, but lumped the last
two into the group Aphanaria,

Gulde (1934) added iwo other tribes to these of Stal (1874),
Pterometini and Stygnoeorini, Seudder (1957) found the characters
used up to that time to be rather nnreliable and based a new classifica-
tion on the position of the trichobothria and spiracles, together with
the spermathecae. He divided the subfamily into four tribes,
Rhyparochromini, Lethaeini, Drymini, and Stygnoeorini, He further
subdivided the Rhyparoebromini into three subtribes Gonianotina,
Rhyparoehrornina, aud Plociomerina, Slater (1957) sugeested the
names for the Rhyparochrominae and Rhyparochromini should be
Megalonotinae and Megalonotini, but this has been shown to be
incorrect.

Slater and Sweet (1961) and Sweet and Slater (1961) raised the
number of tribes to eight, retaining Scudder’s (and others’) concept
of Lethaeini and Drymini but splitting his Stygnocorini into Cleradini
and Plinthisini, rearranging his Rhyparochromini into four tribes,
Myodochini, Rhyparochromim, Beosini, and QGonianotini, of which
only the first tribe is still substantially the same as in Sendder’s
concept.

In fact all of these classifications agree an placing in the one
section a group of genera which have the pronotum constricted near
the middle (and hence divided into two lobes) and in which the
lateral margins of the pronotum are not explanate or acate but obtuse
or rounded. Stal and Distant called it the division Myodocharia,
Scudder the subtribe Plociomerina, Slater and Sweet the Myodochini,
but all agree in placing in it genera of the general appearance of
Erlacda Signoret, Hucosmetus Bergrath, Myodocha Latreille, Pachy-
brachius Hahn, Paromius Wieber and Ptochiomera Say. Scudder’s
classification differs in one point. Whereas his Plociomerina (without
exception so far as I can judge from published figures) contains
genera of the general appearance of those just listed, not all genera

GROSS—-AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 373

of this appearance helong to the ‘Plociomerina’’; ¢.g., Beduma Stal
(= Austropamera Distant) belongs to the Stygnocorini.

It came as a considerahle surprise to both Seudder and myself
when working on our joint revision of Dieuches Dohrn to find the
anomalous Dieuches rafaeli Evans belonged to the Myodochini.
Subsequently I found D. rafaeli to be a synonym of Euander lacertosus
(Brichson) and that related to Huander in our collections were a series
of other genera including Udeocoris Bergroth, the Anstralian species
of *‘Lamprodema’’, and several new genera, all belonging likewise to
the Myodochini, Seudder working independently discovered that
‘‘Lamprodema’’ coleopteroides belongs to the Myodochim, but that
L, maura belongs to the Rhypar ochrérini (im litt. ).

These make up a group of genera and species related to Eyander,
and in general do not resemble closely the other Myodochines. An
incipient transverse constriction of the pronotum is present in several
of the genera (Zuander Stal and Porander gen, noy.) but in two
other genera (Udeocoris Bergroth, and Telocoris gen, nov.) this is
quite absent. All the species tend to he flattened and shiny and
brachypterous forms are common, aloug with normal, macropterous
ones in the same species, Several of the species are known only from
brachypterous forms.

Frequent development of brachyptery tends to link this group with
a group of genera which, although the pronotum is distmetly divided
into two lobes, are brachypterons. This second group includes
Fantejus Stal (= Albanyaria Distant) and two new genera
Cryptocoris gen. noy, and Zygocoris gen. nov., all from Australia, and
from other regions Aegyptocoris China, Carpilus Stal, Cnemedus H,
and 8., Erlacda Signoret. (sometimes), Ptochiomera Say (sometimes),
Prytanes Distant and Sisammes Distant, amongst others.

Tt is hard to avoid the conclusion that the first group makes up a
section of the brachypterous Mydochini diverging from the general
facies of the tribe. It is possibly a late development in the group
towards specialized small shining forms, and linked through E'uander,
Porander and the Fontejus, Ptochiomera group of genera with the
more typical fast-noving Myodochines of the litter and soil surface.
Euander and Porander definitely live on low shrubs in the forests of
hicher rainfall areas, [(/deocoris is a soil surface inhabitant of either
wet or arid areas, but the exact habitat of the others, whether heath-
like plants or the deep litter layers, remains wndetermined,

Although genera like Udeocoris and Telocoris are very distinet. in
appearance from the other Myodochini they are very close in structure

374

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

to forms like Huander and Porander, where the transverse construction
between the two lobes of the pronotum is fully developed. These in
turn grade into forms like Cryptocoris, Zygocoris and Fontejus where
the pronotal constriction is very well marked. This has necessitated
this paper including all the Australian genera of Myodochini in which
brachyptery oceurs.

The genera and species of the brachypterous section of Australian
Myodochini may be distinguished by the following key :—

Pronotum with an incipient transverse
constriction near or well behind the
middle .. .. ....

Pronotum without any trace ‘of: a trans:
verse constriction, although the hind
portion may be paler than the
AnteTIOr ce Be ze «4 +o eee.

Pronotum with transverse constriction
just behind middle... .. .. .. +t

Pronotum with transverse constriction
well behind middle .

Hemelytra always macropterous, hind
margin of pronotum coneave in
front of seutellum . .

Hemelytra macropterous or with very
reduced membrane, hind margin of
pronotum shallowly curved over
whole length ..

. Hind lobe of pronotum mostly pale,

likewise hemelytra, at least in brach-
terous form ..

Hind lobe of pronotum dark with two
prominent pale lateral patches,
hemelytra mostly dark... ..

Pronotum and head for the most part
smooth and shining .. ..

Pronotum, head and seutellurn coar rsely
and densely punctate ..

Fuander lacertosus
( Erichs.)

Euander torquatus
(Hrichs. )

Euander cicero sp. nov.

Porander scudderi gen.
noy. & sp. nov.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 375

6, Pronotum not markedly longer than
wide, fore femora incrassate or not
Pronotum conspicuously longer than
wide, fore femora inerassate .. .. 8

7. Fore femora not incrassate, corium
dark with a pale oblique marginal
fascia... .. .. 6. we we ee ee ee es )~©6Cryptocoris fasciata
gen. nov. & sp. nov.
Fore femora inecrassate and_ finely
spined beneath, corium ochraceous
with three lateral black spots .. .. Fontejus multicoloratus
( Dist.)

8, Hemelytra not surpassing middle of
abdomen .. .. -. .. .. .- +. +s +. Sygocoris tindaler gen.
nov. & sp. nov.
Hemelytra surpassing middle of abdo-
reat oie AES ste ott Bamnicegs wb! ite -8

9. Hemelytra dark, at least apically, with
conspicuous oblique pale marginal

fascia near apex .. .. . Fontejus sidnicus (Stal)
Hemelytra ochraceous or ohirabedus-
piceous, nearer black... ........ 10

10. Hemelytra evenly coloured pale
ochraceous, or ochraceous-piceous,
with only the vaguest suggestion of
two pale lateral lighter areas .. .. Fontejus collaris
(Walker)
Hemelytra castaneous with several
areas of yellowish-ochraceous on the
disc, and two Inteous patches on
margin near apex. Scutellum with
a paler patch near each basal angle Fontejus westraliensis
sp. nov.

11. Hind portion of pronotum lighter in
colour than anterior region... .... 12
Hind portion of pronotum for the most
part concolorous with anterior
region, and possibly humeral angles
BIE V-lehov eNews aie dhe A,

376 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

12. Hemelytra with small scattered

fuscous patches .. .. .......... Udeocoris rolandi
(Dist.) comb. nov.

Hemelytra with a large curved band of

fuscous in the posterior region of

corium running from behind middle

of outer margin to claval suture

running along claval suture to hind

margin of corium and along hind

margin to outer margin... .. .. .. Udeocoris scuddert
Sp. nov.
13. Corium and clavus mainly dark .. .. Udeocoris nigroaeneus
(Erichs. )
Corium and clavus mainly pale .. .. Telocoris vittata (Dist.)

gen, nov. & comb, nov.

Fontejus Stal 1862

Fontejus Stal, 1862, Stettin. ent. Ztg., 23: 314. 1865, Hemiptera
Africana 2: 153. 1874, K. svenska Vetensk Akad, Handl., 12 (1):
145 & 154.

Albanyaria Distant, 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9) 2: 258, new
synonymy.

Head triangular, somewhat longer than wide, eyes not touching
anterior margin of pronotum, Antennae moderately long, first
segment surpassing apex of head. Pronotum elongate, constricted
near base. Anterior margin almost straight, hind margin feebly
convex. Lateral margin feebly convex in front of constriction. No
obvious collar to pronotum,

Scutellum a little longer than wide. Hemelytra abbreviated, not
reaching apex of abdomen, membrane very reduced and dividing line
between clavus and corium obscure.

Fore femora very incrassate with a number of teeth in the apical
halves. Fore tibiae feebly curved with in the male a prominent spine
beyond the middle.

Head, pronotum, hemelytra and fore femora with long sparse hairs
in addition to the normal fine pilosity shown throughout this group
of genera.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 377

Type of genus: Fontejus sidnicus (Stal)

This genus is the most closely related of this whole group of
Australian brachypterous genera of Myodochini to the normal
Pachybrachius and Eucosmetus type. The constriction in the pronotum
is placed well posteriorad (except in F’. multicoloratus); the whole
facies is typically Myodochine and is not greatly different from that
of extra-Australian brachypterous Myodochine genera,

Fontejus sidnicus (Stal)
Plate 14, fig. B

Rhyparochromus sidnicus Stal, 1859: K. svenska Fregatten Engenies
Resa ete. 11 (1); 246.

Black or dark choeolate brown with brown and yellowish-white
markings. Head with eyes black or dark chocolate brown. First
three segments of antennae dark brown, second and third infuscated
at apex. Fourth black with a broad luteous band near base.

Pronoitum concolorous with head, except for two pale luteous
points, one on either side just behind constriction. One specimen has
two additional Iuteous patches along the hind margin. Hind margin
shallowly excavate, exterior margin with distinct wide collar, lateral
margins convex to constriction, behind that convex again,

Scutellum always black with extreme apex luteous, Sparsely
punctate,

Corium and ¢lavus difficult to distinguish and chocolate brown,
either becoming black apically, or all black. On the lateral margin
three luleous patehes, one at the extreme apex and the second at
about level of tip of scutellum small, the third on the margin at the
three-quarter spot, large, oblique, reaching almost to mid-line of each
hardened ‘‘elytron’’. Without membrane, and hemelytra reaching
back to about two-thirds length of abdomen.

Abdomen above always black, with two pale luteous patches, one
alongside the large luteous patch on hemelytra, the other just behind
apex of hemelytra,

Body beneath black or chocolate brown. Rostrum dark brown,
Pale spots above insertion of coxae and on lateral margins of abdomen
contiguous with those above.

Fore femora black, armed beneath with a single row of six stout
spines. Legs otherwise dark brown, femora paler basally.

378 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Head, pronotum, hemelytra and fore femora covered with sparse
long hairs.

Length: 6 mm.

Locality: South Australia: Stickney Island, N. B. Tindale;
Meningie, 12 September 1959, H. V. Mincham; Ardrossan, February
1879, collector not indicated; attracted to light, Ravine des Casoars,
Kangaroo Island, 18 October 1951, G. F. Gross (S.A.M.). New South
Wales: North Sydney, Taronga Park, 14 October 1913, A. Musgrave
(A.M.).

Fontejus collaris (Walker)
Plate 14, fig. D
Rhyparochromus collaris Walker, 1872, Cat. Heter., 5: 111. Distant,

1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (4) 8: 510.

Fontejus collaris Stal, 1874, K. svenska Vetensk, Akad. Handl., 12

(1); 154,

Walker and Stal’s descriptions appear to apply to the same insect
although in Stal’s account no reference is made to Walker’s deserip-
tion. Distant says Walker’s type is lost.

Black and chocolate brown, Tlead, anterior lobe of pronotum,
scutellum, fourth segment of antennae (except for pale luteous sub-
basal ring) and sometimes apices of first, second and third segments
and femora black,

Antennae, hind lobe of pronotum, hemelytra, upperside of abdomen
(except for a broad median longitudinal yellowish or pale brown
strips), tarsi and tibiae (latter apically infuseated) brown to chocolate
brown. Some small pale patches on hemelytra and hind lobe of
pronotum, tip of scutellum pale,

Beneath head and thorax black, exeept just above insertion of
coxae, which is lutcous. Rostrum and abdomen chocolate brown,
abdomen beneath and above with a fine reddish pilosity. Head,
pronotum and hemelytra with a sparse long pilosity.

Length: 6-8 mm.

Locality: Tasmania; one male in tussocks, New Norfolk, A. M.
Lea; one male, Hobart, 6-16 November 1928, C. Cole; one female No,
2218, Seamander (8.A.M.); Maglehawk Neck, 12 February-3 March
1913, R. EK. Turner (B.M.). South Australia: Cooper Oreek,
W. BE. Hodson (B.M.).

Walker records the species from Tasmania and South Australia
(Adelaide), Stal from New South Wales (Sydney).

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 379

Fontejus westraliensis sp, nov.
Plate 14, fig. C

Very similar in general appearance to F. collaris Walker. Choco-
late brown, yes and first and fourth segments of antennae black,
the latter with a pale luteons subbasal ring.

Pronotum with a dark median longitudinal stripe and sometimes
the very lateral margin infuscated. Scutellum mostly black, but with
reddish-chocolate basal angles and a luteus tip.

Henielytra chocolate, with a pattern of paler and darker patches,
two feebly marked pale lateral fasciae near apex of hemelytra.

Upperside of abdomen reddish-chocolate and black variegate,

Underside of head, pronotum and abdomen black. Luteous
immediately above fore and hind coxae, reddish-chocolate patches on
the hind margin of the abdominal segments, lateral margin of abdomen
also reddish-chocolate variegate. Middle and hind femora and all
tibiae and tarsi apically infuscated.

Underside of abdomen with a fine golden silky pilosity, pronotum
and on hemelytra with long sparse hairs.

Length: 7 mm,

Locality: Western Australia: Holotype male and allotype female,
Katanning, 2 May 1938, K, R. Norris (C.8.1.R.0.).

This species ts easily distinguished from F. collaris by the
variegated hemelytra, which contain several areas of black, by the
brown head, and the wholly brown pronotum, which has a darker
longitudinal median streak,

Fontejus multicoloratus (Distant) noy. comb.

Albanyaria multicolorata Distant, 1918: Ann. Mag. nat, Hist., (9)

2: 258.

‘‘Tlead, anterior lobe of pronotum, and the seutellum black; the
narrow posterior pronotal lobe and the extreme apex of scutellum
greyish white; antennae ochraceous, apex of third joint and more than
apical half of fourth black; corium ochraceous, the lateral marginal
areas with the three prominent black spots, the smaller near base, the
largest near middle, and the third at apex, the exposed apical area
of the abdomen black; body beneath black; posterior sternal segmental
margins very pale ochraceous; legs reddish ochraceous, apical halves
of the anterior femora and apices of the tibiae and tarsi black;

380 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

antennae with the second joint slightly longer than the third and about
subequal with the fourth; scutellum more or less rugosely punctate;
clavus linearly somewhat coarsely punctate; rostrum ochraceous, the
basal joint black, remaining joints imperfectly seen in carded type.”’
(Distant’s original description.)

Length: 5% mm.

Locality: Western Australia: Albany (J. J. Walker) Distant’s
type (B.M.) King George Sound, no collector (G. G. EH. Seudder,
Vancouver).

I have not seen this species. Fontejus multicoloratus along with
Cryptocoris fasciata seems to mark the next step forward in the
divergence of certain Australian Myodochines from the characteristic
facies of the group. In these two genera the pronotum is considerably
shortened and is barely longer than wide and this is also typical of
all the following forms treated in this paper.

Genus Zygocoris gen. nov.

Head elongate, rather acuminate, eyes not very prominent and
placed well in front of pronotal margin. Pronotum hardly wider than
head with eyes, with an incipient transverse sulcus placed only a
short way in front of the hind margin. Anterior margin of pronotum
concave, posterior margin almost straight, lateral margins almost
straight from forward of sulcus curving in just before apex and also
in region of suleus. Margins of posterior lobe somewhat divergent
from suleus backwards. Collar flattened, not very distinct.

Seutellum small, about as long as wide. Hemelytra very
coriaceous and ‘‘elytra like’’, corium and clavus not separable and no
trace of membrane, abbreviated, not reaching behind middle of
abdomen.

Fore femora very expanded, only twice as long as wide, not quite
circular in cross section but feebly flattened laterally with three
moderate teeth and a number of only slightly smaller ones on the
underside in the apical half. Fore tibiae shorter than femora, strongly
curved, apices expanded, with two rows of denticles on their under
surfaces. Hind tarsi with the first segment not longer than apical
pair together.

Type of genus: Zygocoris tindalei sp. nov.

This genus has affinities with the previous one, Fontejus, but
differs from it in its longer head and pronotum and massive front

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 381

femora, It also appears to be quite close to Fontejanus Breddin from
India. Like F'ontejanus it has massive front femora, curved and armed
front tibiae, a suleus on the pronotum placed just in front of the hind
margin and very abbreviated hemelytra, It differs from Fontejanus
in not having the eyes touching the anterior margin of the pronotum;
it does not appear to have ocelli; the mid femora are unarmed and the
first segment of the third tarsi is shorter than the apical pair together.
Fontejanus must be considered a member of this new group of
Myodochini by virtue of the brachypterous condition of the hemelytra,
although the transverse sulcus of the pronotum is strong and gives
it a more typical Myodochine pronotum than others of these Australian
genera, The link between typical Myodochini appears to be either
through Zygocoris and Fontejanus or through Euander.

Zygocoris tindalei sp. nov.
Plate 15, fig. E

Chocolate brown with hind lobe of pronotum and ground colour
of ‘elytra’? Inteous white. ‘‘Elytra’’ with a T-shaped fuscous patch
with the head of the T laying along the inner margin, and the stem of
the T reaching the outer margin at about the middle. Middle and
hind femora, all tibiae and tarsi, extreme apices of fore femora,
second segment of antennae (except at apex), and base of third
segment, yellowish or yellowish brown.

Head smooth and shining, with sparse long hairs. Anterior lobe
of pronotum sparsely punctate, otherwise smooth and shining and also
with sparse long hairs. Hind lobe of pronotum and ‘‘elytra’’ sparsely
punctate, the punctations are brown in the pale areas.

Sentellum black, with pale tip, feebly transversely impressed in
front of middle. Hemelytra very abbreviated into coriaceous
‘‘elytra’’, apical margin truncate, feebly sinuate, outer apical angles
rounded,

Body beneath shining brown, with a short sparse white pilosity.
Length: 4-5 mm.

Locality: South Australia: Holotype male, allotype female and
three paratype females, Mount Lofty Ranges, N, B, Tindale (S.A.M.),
Paratype male and two paratype females, ex soil Gile’s Corner, July
1950 (W.A.R.I.), Australia: Four paratypes, with Camponotus or
Iridomyrmex (Formicidae) (8.A.M.).

382 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Genus Cryptocoris gen, nov.

Head about as long as wide, feebly convex, eyes not very
prominent, almost touching anterior margin of pronotum. No ocelli.
Pronotum as wide as or slightly narrower than head with eyes, widest
at anterior and posterior margins, Anterior margin of pronotum
straight, posterior margin feebly concaye. Lateral margins straight
and converging as they run back towards constriction which is placed
well posteriad, thence diverging again to hind margin. No collar.

Seutellum fairly small, almost equilateral. Hemelytra coriaceous
and elytra-like, corium and clavus not separable and strongly but
sparsely punctate: a very reduced membrane present. Hemelytra
reach a little behind middle of abdomen,

Fore femora somewhat enlarged, with some terminal teeth beneath.
Fore tibiae feebly curved. First segment of hind tarsi longer than
remaining two together,

Type of genus: Cryptocoris fasciata sp. nov.

This genus appears to have some aflinities with Zygocoris. The
fore femora are neither so markedly expanded nor so conspicuously
armed. In common with several other genera in this section it has
abbreviated hemelytra, but the pronotum is not so elongate and in this
feature it appears to be allied to the next genus.

Cryptocoris fasciata sp. nov,
Plate 15, fig, C

Shining black. Hind lobe of pronotum and a spot on the lateral
margin of hemelytra luteous. Membrane milky white. Basal
exterior margin of hemelytra, tibiae, tarsi and second segment of
antennae pale brown infuseated at apex. Eyes, third and fourth
segments of antennae and basal two-thirds of first segment dark
brown, Beneath black, hind margin of prothorax and metathorax
broadly, and a spot on the mesothorax above insertion of coxae,
luteous.

Head smooth and shining, with several long sparse hairs.
Anterior lobe of pronotum likewise smooth and shining, with a few
shorter pale hairs. Hind lobe with a few pale brown punctations near
transverse constriction, Seutellum and coriaceous portion of hemelytra
also smooth and shining. Scutellum and hemelytra with a moderate
number of course punctations arranged in rows. Hind margin of

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 383

abbreviated and fused corium and clavus straight. Oblique lateral
margins broadly convex. Hemelytra with short and sparse pilosity.

Beneath with a fine short pilosity.
Length: 3-4 mm.
Locality: South Australia: Holotype, Lucindale, Fenerheerdt

(S.A.M.), A.C.T.: Allotype and one paratype, Blundell’s’, under
stones, 16 September 1930, W. K. Hughes (C.8.I.R.0.).

Genus Euander Stal.

Euander Stal, 1865, Hemiptera Africana 2: 154, 1874, K. svenska
Vetensk Akad. Handl, 12 (1): 156.

Pronotum at apex as wide as head with eyes, as long as wide or
a little longer, lateral margins obtuse, narrowed towards apex, behind
middle slightly sinuate. Anterior margin of pronotum slightly elevated
and forming a feeble collar, pronotum with an obsolete transverse
suleus behind middle, hind lobe paler than fore lobe.

Scutellum distinctly longer than wide. Corium and clavus with
distinet rows of punctations with scattered punctations between them.

Fore femora moderately incrassated, beneath with three largish
teeth and many smaller ones, fore tibiae of male curved and with a
large tooth towards apex. First segment of hind tarsi as long as
apical pair together.

Type of genus: EF. lacertosus (Hrichson)

Euander marks the next step forward in the development of the
peculiar endemic group of Australian genera, the transverse con-
striction of the short pronotum has moved anteriad to the middle,
changing the whole facies of the insect.

Euander lacertosus (Erichson)
Plate 16, fig. A
Pachymerus lacertosus Erichson, 1842: Archiv fiir Naturges., 8 (1):
279, Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc. Qld., 1: 50, figs.

Rhyparochromus lacertosus Dohrn, 1859, Catalogus Hemipterorum:
34,

1 This locality, which appears in several other places in this paper, was a farm 18 miles
west of Canberra at the eastern foot of Mount Coree, since resumed for water conservation
purposes, and now largely planted in pine forest,

384 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Euander lacertosus Stal, 1867, Berlin ent. Ztg., 10: 161. 1874: K.
svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl., 12 (1): 158.

Rhyparochromus pictipennis Dallas, 1852: List. Hem. Ins., 2: 571.
(new synonomy)

Dieuches pictipennis Distant, 1901; Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 504,
Dieuches rafaeli Evans, 19389: Bull. ent, Res., 30: 305, (new synonomy)

The species is also mentioned and figured but not named by Lea,
1908, Insect & Fungus Pests of Orchard and Farm (Hobart 3rd Ed.,
73-74,

Black, with brown and yellowish white markings, Head and eyes
mainly black, head has patches of heavy pubescence. First segment
of antennae black with a few small strong spines, second segment
mostly brown, apex black, third segment with basal third brown, distal
two-thirds black, last segment black with a pale band near base,

Anterior lobe of pronotum black with hoary punctations near edge,
collar brownish with three conspicuous yellowish points, Hind lobe
luteous with black punctations. Hind margin of pronotum excavate
in front of seutellum, lateral margins with a whitish- or yellowish-spot
in the position of the sulcus.

Scutellum black, with extreme apex white and usually two orange
points near the apex on the disc. A few scattered punctationgs on
the dise.

Corium and clavus in the main yellowish—testaceous with several
rows of dark punctations, mostly following the curve of the veins,
and many other scattered punctations. There are several small
fuscous spots and a large black spot on the dise of the corium two-
thirds of the way back. Also the extreme apex is black. Reflexed
margin Iuteous, Membrane blackish or brownish with veins pale,
together with many pale points, Hemelytra always fully developed,

Body beneath black, with a very fine adpressed silky pilosity,
episterna and epimera of each thoracic segment pale. Trochanters,
bases of second and third femora, tibiae except at apices and tarsi
brownish. Fore tibiae always curved expanded at apex, and in the
males with a prominent tooth at base of expansion.

Length: 5-7 mm,

Foodplants: Common in dry selerophyll forest in Sonth Australia;
a pest of strawberries in Tasmania.

Our figure checked by Dr, T, E, Woodward in Enrope, against
Erichson’s type.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 385

Locality: Queensland; Cedar Creek, Mjéberg; Mount Tambourine,
Mjéberg; Herberton, Mjéberg (R.M.S.). New South Wales: Three,
Bombala, January 1930, Rev. A. J. Barrett (Reg. Nos, K 61432 and
K 61180); Mount Irvine, 31 January 1944, B. A. Messmer; Nepean
River, Glenbrook Creek, 25 February 1923, A. Musgrave; Sawpit
Creek, Mount Kosciusko, 8 January 1929, A. Musgrave (A.M.)
Dorrigo (S.A.M.); two, Nullo Mountain, 20 m. N.B, of Rylstone, 20
November 1950, T, G. Campbell; two, Island Bend, Snowy Mountains,
20 Oetober 1951, D. J. Wimbush (C.S.LR.0.). Australian Capital
Territory: Six, attacking strawberries, 4 December 1940, A. J.
Nicholson; three, Blundell’s, 7 January 1930, J. Evans; Canberra,
May 1929, J. Evans; Canberra, February, G. F. Hill; Cotter River,
24 (month not distinct), 1929, M. Fuller; Jervis Bay, 18 September
1951, T. G, Campbell (C.8.1,B8.0.), Victoria; Toora, 16 December
1987, R, V, Fyfe (C.S.LR.0.); near Melbourne, G. F. Hill; Kewell
(S.A.M.); Mallee District 1913, donated 5 October 1922 by F, P. Spry
(N.M.); Ferntree Gully, 16 October 1927, F. E. Wilson (A.M.),
Tasmania: Three, Launceston (No, 2218); Launceston 12 February
1914; Launceston, 1 March 1914; Launceston; Launceston, 1 April 1916,
F. M, Littler; five Hobart (Nos. 7-6-.16/1, 3-6-17/21, 23, 24 and 25—
possible these are dates), C. E. Cole; in fallen leaves, Hobart, Lea
(S.A.M.) Lake St. Claire, 13 Jannary 1937, G. and ©, Davis;
Rinadeena Siding, Mount Lyell Line, 11 January 1937, G. and C. Davis;
Lake Margaret, 12 January 1937, H. and C. Davis (A,M.); Moogara,
January 1938, T, Raphael (coll. G. G, EK. Scudder, Vancouver).
South Australia; Thirty-seven, by sweeping undergrowth, Fucalyptus
obliqua dry sclerophyll forest, Naracoorte Cave Reserve, 25 October
1958, G. F. Gross; on Poa caespitosa scrub, Hundred of Joanna, 28
October 1958, N. B. Tindale; three, Clare, 19 April 1884, J. G, O.
Tepper; two, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo Island, Museum Expedition,
February 1926; St. Marys (8.A.M.); in large numbers on Cape Weed,
Cryptostemma calendulaceum, Inman Valley, 25 Jannary 1955, P. M.
Grosveuor; attacking strawberries; Ashton, November 1945, Mr. Hook
(W.A.B.1.). Western Australia: King George Sound (B.M.); Collie,
13 January 1957, A, Snell (N.M.).

Euander cicero sp. nov.
Plate 14, fig. A
Black with brown and yellowish-white markings. Head black,

with patches of hoary pubescence, more elongate than in 2. lacertosus.
First segment of antennae black, second black at apex and third black

386 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in terminal half, otherwise brown, fourth segment black with a Inteous
band near base,

Anterior lobe of pronotum velvety black with three pale points on
anterior margin. Hind lobe likewise velvety black except for two
large Iuteous areas along each lateral margin and two obsolete brown
longitudinal bars, one on each side of mid line,

Scutellum completely velvety black, Corium and eclavus velvety
black with most of the basal half of corium and outer half of clavus
contiguous to it luteous, also a large oblong luteous area on each
lateral margin near apex, Some brownish marks on apical exterior
angle of clavus and apical interior area of corium. Membrane dark
grey with some lighter points, very reduced, Distinction between
corium and clavus clear,

Body beneath black, abdomen and underside of head with a hoary
white pubescence. Propleurae and mesopleurae strongly punctate
and with a trace of a pale lemon yellow around each punctation.
Metaplenrae basally strongly rugulose. A spot above insertion of
coxae on propleurae and metapleurae to dorsum luteous.

Second segment of rostrum, basal third of all femora, tarsi (except
apically), and tibiae brown. Apices of fore tibiae expanded.

Length: 4-5 mm.

Locality: New South Wales: Holotype female and one paratype
(head and thorax only), Hotel Kosciusko, Snowy Mountains, October
1957, D, J. Wimbush (C.8.I.R.0.); three paratype females, Mount
Kosciusko, January 1957, H. J. Carter (A.M.), Australian Capital
Territory: One paratype female, Mount Gingera, 5 December 1950,
H. Cane (0.8.LRB.0.).

Evander torquatus (Erichson) nov. comb.
Plate 16, fig, C

Pachymerus torquatus Erichson, 1842: Archiv fiir Naturges. 8 (1): 280.
Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc, Qld., 1: 52, figures.

Rhyparochromus torquatus Dohrn, 1859; Catalogus Hemipterornm:
34,

Black with brown and yellow markings. Head black, with traces
of a heavy pubescence, more elongate than FE. lacertosus. First
segment of antennae black, brownish at apex, second segment and
extreme base of third segment pale brown, third segment otherwise
and fourth black.

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 387

Anterior lobe of pronotum black with a faint tinge of brown, collar
a shade paler. Hind lobe pale yellow, with a few brownish puncta-
tions and a few blackish spots one of which is largish and runs along
the midline into the black of the fore lobe, Hind margin broadly
excavate, lateral margins fairly straight, narrowing towards head,

Seutellum black with extreme apex white and two orange points
near the apex on the disc. Sometimes these run into the white tip.

Corium and elavus yellowish-white with nomerous blackish-brown
punctations which coalesce to form a longitudinal black streak on the
clavus and a vaguely triangular black pateh in the basal third of the
corium, The corium also has a large blackish patch just behind middle
connected by one or two black bars to the black apical area of the
corium, In the maeropterous specimen the black on the corium is very
much more extensive. Membrane complete or very reduced, if the
latter then distinction between clavus and corinm not obvious and
hemelytra apparently hardened and rather ‘elytra’? like,

Body beneath black, episterna and epimera of each thoracic
segment pale. Trochanters pale, bases of second and third femora,
tibiae, except at apices, and tarsi brownish. Apices of tibiae not
expanded,

Length: 4-5.2 mm,

Locality: Australian Capital Territory: One macropterous
specimen, Canberra, November 1929, J. Evans. Victoria: In moss,
Ferntree Gully, 1 November 1918, F, E. Wilson; two in tussocks,
Ringwood, F, B. Wilson (S.A.M.); Millgrove, 13 April 1927, F. EH.
Wilson (A.M.); Ferntree Gully, 27 July 1919, I. P. Spry; six same
locality and collector, without date; two same locality and collector,
7 October 1920; fourteen, same locality, 17 and 24 July 1920, 26 July
1924 and 26 April 1925, F. EH. Wilson; Eltham, September 1927, ¥. E,
Wilson; six, Upway, J. E. Dixon; five without exact date or locality,
J.B, Dixon; five also without exact locality or date, F. P. Spry (N.M.).

Onur figure was checked, in Europe, by Dr. T. E. Woodward,
against Erichson’s type, from Tasmania.

Genus Porander gen. nov.

Pronotum at apex narrower than head with eyes, wider af base
than length, dise somewhat flattened with an incipient transverse sulcus
well behind middle. Anterior margin raised to form a conspicuous
collar which has two short lateral tooth-like processes, Lateral

388 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

margins curved in just before collar, sinuate in region of sulcus, obtuse
in front of sulcus, with an acute margin behind.

Scutellum about as long as wide, hemelytra with abbreviated
membrane and dividing line between corium and clavus obscure.
Punctations on hemelytra numerous but not so obviously placed in
lines as on Huander.

Head, anterior lobe of pronotum and scutellum with numerous
large pit-like punctations, each containing a short white hair.

Fore-femora much more incrassated than Euander with four
prominent teeth beneath and many smaller ones. Fore-tibiae curved.
First segment of tarsi longer than remaining two together.

Type of genus: Porander scudderi sp. nov.

This genus is apparently closely related to Euander. It differs
from it in the curious punctations of the head, fore lobe of pronotum,
and scutellum, and the much more incrassate fore femora. The
pronotal constriction is well posteriad and Porander, although related
to Euander, appears to be also on a side branch from the main line of
development.

Porander scudderi sp. nov.

Plate 15, fig. D

Black with luteous white markings. Head black, eyes dark brown.
Head has a rather short white sparse pubescence mainly located in the
punctations. First, third and fourth segments of antennae black,
second segment brown.

Anterior lobe of pronotum black with numerous coarse deep
punctations each bearing a hair and with odd small smooth areas
scattered over disc. Collar narrow, brownish-luteous with a single row
of punctations across it. Hind lobe of pronotum luteous with numerous
coarse brownish punctations many of them concentrated into about five
longitudinal fuscous areas.

Scutellum black, with same hair bearing pit-like punctations as
head, extreme apex white and also two white points on disc near apex,
sometimes confluent with it.

Hemelytra with a vestigial membrane, luteous with numerous
blackish-brown punctations and some odd small infuscated patches.

Body beneath black, rostrum brownish. A luteous spot on the
propleurae on the frontal margin beneath and marking the end of sulcus
above. Visible portion of connexivum (except for a transverse dark

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 389

bar), hind margin of metapleura (except for a cluster of dark puncta-
tions), and patches on upper hind corners of abdominal pleurae V, VI,
and VII, luteous. All tibiae and tarsi brownish, extreme apices of
femora and bases of tibiae luteous,

Length: 4-6 mm,

Locality: South Australia: Holotype male, allotype female, two
paratype males, sweeping undergrowth, Eucalyptus obliqua dry
sclerophyll forest, Naracoorte Cave Reserve, 25 October 1958, G. F.
Gross; two paratype males, one nymph, Vivonne Bay, Kangaroo
Island, Museum Expedition, February 1926 (S.A.M.). New South
Wales: One paratype male, Gosford (S.A.M.); Sydney, 2 November
1930, K. Spence; Waverley, Sydney, 1 November 1901, W.G.B.;
North Bondi, October 1930, K.K.S. (A.M.), Australian Capital
Territory: Three paratype males and one paratype female, sweepmg
vegetation, Black Mountain, Canberra, 26 November 1959, G. F’, Gross
(S.A.M.). Victoria: One paratype female, Woori Yallock, F. BK.
Wilson; two paratype females, Eltham, J. H. Dixon (N.M.). Tasmania:
One paratype, Bridport, October 1913 (8.A.M.); in fallen leaves,
Hobart, Lea (G. G. BE, Scudder Coll., Vancouver).

Genus Udeocoris Bergroth
Udeocoris Bergroth, 1918: Ann, hist, nat, Mus, hung., 16: 310.

Head oblong, with eyes a little wider than apex of pronotum.
Byes touching or not anterior margin of pronotum, ocelli present, close
to eyes, Pronotum wider than long, without a collar or any trace of
a suleus; anterior margin straight, lateral margins straight, con-
verging towards apex, fairly acute or almost carinate. Humeral angles
of pronotum rounded, hind margin shallowly coneave. Dise of
pronotum nearly flat, a little more arched in the anterior region,

Scutellum about as long as wide or longer; very flat, sometimes
finely punetate, just a trace of longitudinal keel. Hemelytra with or
without an abbreviated membrane, when membrane is abbreviated the
hemelytra become coriaceous and the division between corium and
clayus obseure.

Fore femora moderately incrassated, with a row of four to seven
robust spines on the apical half on the inner ventral margin, the teeth
becoming regularly smaller from apex of femora to middle. Hind and
middle femora flattened, first segment of last tarsus longer than the
apical pair together.

390 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Type of genus: Udeocoris nigroaeneus (Erichson)

The genus is evidently close to Euander which it resembles in
general coloration, in the black fore portion of the pronotum and
stramineous but darkly punctate hind region. It differs in showing
not the slightest trace of a transverse constriction on the pronotum,
It therefore seems to be the first member of a sub-line of genera of
these peculiar Myodochini in which the typical Myodochine constriction
is completely lost. Udeocoris is the apparent link between Euander
and Telocoris,

Udeocoris nigroaeneus (Erichs)
Plate 15, fig. B

Pachymerus nigroaeneus Erichson, 1842: Arch, fiir Naturges., 8 (1):
280. Woodward, 1962: J. ent. Soc. Qld., 1: 54, figures.

Rhyparochromus nigroaeneus Dohrn, 1859: Catalogus Hemipterorum:
34,

Udeocoris nigroaeneus Bergroth, 1918: Ann. hist. nat. Mus. hung.,
16: 311,

Shining black, with or without yellowish-brown markings. Head
shining black with scattered long hairs, eyes dark brown, First and
last segments of antennae dark chocolate brown, second and third
segments brown. Last three segments with scattered long hairs and a
fine adpressed pilosity.

Pronotum shining black, very sparsely punctate. Sometimes the
humeral angles are obscurely brownish.

Seutellam black, sparsely punctate, extreme tip usually pale.
Hemelytra occasionally developed but generally with very reduced
membrane and distinction between clavus and corium obscure. When
humeral angles of the pronotum are pale the costal margin is also
narrowly brown along the basal half. In one macropterous specimen
there is also a pale spot on the costal margin just before the apex,
Membrane when developed hyaline, brownish near apical margin of
corium. In the fully winged form the punctures on the clavus are not
in three regular rows.

Beneath shining black, connexivium, bottom edges of epimera and
episterna, trochanters, apices of femora, tibiae and tarsi yellowish-
brown. Tibiae with scattered black spines. Rostrum dark brown.
The Rockhampton specimen is castaneous.

Length: 4.5-6 mm,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 391

Locality: Torres Straits: Three, Moa Island, C. T. McNamara
(S.A.M,), Queensland; Cairns; Townsville (S.A.M.) Serubby Creek,
1 mile EB. of Fairy Bower, Rockhampton, 3 August 1950, T, G.
Campbell (C.S.LR.0.). This last specimen is wholly castaneous, with
pale eyes, antennae, tibiae and tarsi. New South Wales: Two, Island
Bend, Snowy Mountains, 20 October 1957, D. J. Wimbush; Hotel
Kosciusko, Snowy Mountains, 10 October 1957, D, J. Wimbush
(C.S.LR.0.); Mount Kosciusko, 5,000ft., February 1926, H. J, Carter
(A.M.). Australian Capital Territory: Blondell’s, 10 Oetober 1930,
W. K. Mughs (C.8.1.R.0.), Victoria: Bogong Plains, 5,600-6,000ft.,
January 1928, F, E. Wilson; Mildura (N.M.). Tasmania; In tussocks,
Stanley; Lake Margaret, 12 January 1937, G. and C, Davis—this
specimen is fully winged; Magnet, G. P. Whitley; Cradle Mountain,
Carter and Lea; same locality, 27 December 1915, Prof, Flynn; twelve,
Great Lake, December 1906 and 1907, J. W, Mellor; in tussocks, Huon
River, Lea; Waratah, 12 March 1916 (8.A.M.). South Australia:
Berlese Funnel out of leaf debris, Naracoorte Bog, February 1959,
P, Aitken (S.,A.M.), Western Australia: Boyup Brook, March 1936,
D, Q. Norris; Fremantle, 15 November 1934, K. R. Norris (C.8.1.R.0.) ;
Warren River, W. D. Dodd; Swan River; two without exact locality
(S.A.M.), Timor: There is a species hardly distinguishable from this
in Timor, but all specimens I have are macropterous, whereas
macroptery is very rare in the Australian specimens. A larger series
igs needed from the island before its identity can be established, these
I hope to obtain from a coming second expedition to the island.

Our figure was checked by Dr. T. KE. Woodward against Hrichson’s
type and specimens labelled ‘‘Udeocoris (n.g.) nigroaeneus’’ in
Bergroth’s handwriting, in the collection of the British Museum, from
Fremantle, Western Australia,

Udeocoris rolandi (Distant)
Plate 16, fig. B

Naudarensia rolandi Distant, 1918: Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (9) 2: 492.

Black, with luteous and brown markings. Head black with sparse
black hairs, finely rugulose, eyes brown. First segment of antennae
(except at apex, which is paler) and fourth segment dark brown,
second and third segments yellowish-brown. Tirst, second and third
segments with long hairs.

Anterior two-thirds of pronotum shining black, densely punctate,
but extreme anterior margin yellowish-brown, Hind portion of

392, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

pronotnm Iuteons but with numerous black or brown punctations
tending to darken the whole area, five vague fuscous longitudinal bands
further darken the area.

Seutellnm black, feebly arched with punctations arranged in two
longitudinal rows, apex white sometimes with odd white points on the
dise in the apical region.

Hemelytra may be normal, or brachypterous with membrane very
reduced, Ground colour of eorium and clavus Iuteous but with many
brown or black punctations making the whole appear darker, there
are seven fuscous areas, the largest being on the apical margin of the
corium and the other in the apical angle. When the membrane is
reduced the ‘‘elytra’’ leave uncovered the last two, and half of the
third-to-last abdominal segments. Membrane black with white veins.

Beneath black with some long white hairs and an extremely fine
white adpressed pilosity. Rostrum, rostral canal, the anterior ventral
portion of the prothorax, posterior margin of pro-, meso-, and meta-
plearae, coxae and femora brown. Epimera and episterna of all three
thoracic segments, trochanters, tibiae and tarsi -yellowish-brown,
connexivum Inteous.

Length: 4-6 mm,

Locality: New South Wales; Bogan River, October 1981, J.
Armstrong; Euralie, Narrandera Road, 9-19 October 1932, K. C.
McKeown (A.M.); Broken Hill (S.A.M.); two, Coolabah, November
1905, W.G.B. (C.S8.1.R.0.), Vietoria: Melton, 25 October 1917, F.E.W.
(S.A.M.), Bass Strait; Cliffy Island, 25 November 1949, D, J. Tughy
(N.M.). South Australia: Tapanappa near Cape Jervis, 5-9 December
1949, G. F, Gross and N. B. Tindale; two, roadside swamp, Myponga,
26 November 1947, G. F. Gross; Yurgo, M. H, Hopgood; Port
Wakefield; two, Flinders Island, F. Wood Jones; [ka Creek, Flinders
Ranges, 24 November 1948, D, R. Hall; Italowie Gorge, Flinders
Ranges, 30 October 1955, EH. T. Giles; Leigh Creek; Flinders Ranges,
September 1925; twenty-five, Moolooloo, 2,000ft., Flinders Ranges,
1921, H, M. Hale; Upper Arcoona Creek, Gammon Ranges, 18
September 1956, G. F. Gross; Purple Downs; Miller Creek, F. Wood
Jones; two, Blow Hole entrance, near Koonalda, 1 Jannary 1960, P,
Aitken (8.A.M.); Blowhole near Ooldea, Troughton and Wright
(A.M.), Western Australia: Mullewa, Miss F. May; Beverley, BH. F.
du Boulay 8.A.M.). Port Hedland, October, Mjéberg (R.M.S.).
Northern Territory: Fourteen, Double Punch Bowl meteorite crater,
Henbury, 15-17 October 1953, G. F. Gross; six, near Alice Springs,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 393

M. W. Mules; Finke River, J. W. Roe; Coniston Station near Alice
Springs, M. W. Mules (S.A.M.).

Udeocoris scudderi sp. nov.
Plate 16, fig. D

Black with dark brown and creamy white markings, Head shining
black with a few long black hairs. Hyes, and first and last segments
of antennae dark brown, third segment brown, second yellowish-brown.

Anterior two-thirds of pronotum likewise shining black with a few
sparse long hairs, extreme anterior margin reddish-brown. Hind third
ereamy-white with scattered pale brown punctations.

Scutellum shining black, with sparse long black hairs, apex white.

Corium and clavus creamy-white in the main, with brown puncta-
tions, a small brown spot on clavus just behind middle. On corium
two-thirds of the way back a wide transverse irregular brown band
which may or may not be joined along the apical margin to the brown
apical angle, Membrane when developed hyaline, otherwise hemelytra
hardened and distinction between corium and clayus obscure.

Beneath shining black, punctate, pilose, hind margins of all
thoracic pleurae, all epimera and episterna and connexivum creamy
white. Anterior portion of prosternum reddish-brown. Coxae,
trochanters, fore femora and apical halves of mid- and hind-femora
dark brown, remainder of legs yellowish-brown, tarsi darker.

Length; 2.5-4 mm.

Locality; Western Australia: Holotype male, seven paratypes
(three of them larvae), Beverley, E. F, du Boulay (8.A.M.).
Victoria: Allotype female, fully winged, Lake Hattah, J. EK. Dixon,
donated January 1940 (N.M.). New South Wales: Paratype, Bogan
River, January 1932, T. Armstrong (A.M.).

Differs from U. rolandi in its smaller size and the different
pattern on the hemelytra.

Genus Telocoris gen. nov-

Head triangular, eyes not very prominent, touching anterior
margin of pronotum. Pronotum a little wider than head with eyes,
lateral margins faintly curved, obtuse, no trace of a transverse sulcus.
Collar indistinct.

Scutellum relatively large, longer than wide, Hemelytra normal
and fully developed, clavus with punctures in three regular rows.

394 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fore femora somewhat incrassate, without spines. Mid- and
hind-femora not noticeably expanded. Fore-tibiae about as long as
femora, hind-tarsi with first segment about as long as apical pair
together.

Type of genus: Telocoris vittata (Distant)

This genus seems to stand naturally at the end of the line of
these modified genera. The pronotum is absolutely without trace of a
transverse constriction, the fore-femora although still somewhat
thickened, are unarmed, and the habitus is much more like that of a
Lethaeine than a Myodochine. Its nearest relation would appear to
be Udeocoris.

Telocoris vittata (Distant) nov. comb.
Plate 15, fig, A.
Lamprodema vittata Distant, 1901: Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 500.

Black or dark castaneous; hind angles of pronotum, antennae,
basal two-thirds of corium and the whole anterior margin, outer half
of clavus, and tibiae and tarsi, paler, almost luteous. Apical third of
corium and immer half of clavus castaneous may be coarsely punctate,
the latter then is laevigate along the central longitudinal area.

Length: 4-5 mm.

Locality: North Western Australia: Parry Harbour, Cape
Bongainville, J. T. Walker (Distant’s type—B.M.); Broome, Mjéberg
(R.M.S.); Northern Territory: Roper River, N. B. Tindale (S.A.M.).
Queensland: Clermont, K. K. Spence (A.M.).

REFERENCES

Bergroth, E., 1918: Hendecas Generum Hemipterorum novorum vel
subnovorum, Ann. hist. nat. Mus. hung., 16: 298-314.
Dallas, W. 8., 1852: List of specimens of Hemipterous Insects in the
collection of the British Museum IT: 369-592, four plates,
Distant, W. L., 1901: Rhynchotal Notes—XT Heteroptera: Fam.
Lygaeidae. Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 497-510,
1903-4: The Fauna of British India, including Ceylon and
Burma. Rhynchota—2. i-xvii, 1-503, 319 text figs,
1918: Contributions to a further knowledge of the Rhyn-
chotal Family Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., 9 (2):
257-470,

GROSS—AUSTRALIAN MYODOCHINE BUGS 395

Dohrn, R., 1859: Catalogus Hemipterorum,

Erichson, W. F., 1842: Beitrage zur Insecten—Fauna von Vandiemans-
land mit besonderer Berucksichtigung der geographischen
Verbreitung der Insecten. Arch. Naturgesch., 8 (1):
83-787. Pls. 4 & 5,

Evans, J. W., 1939: A new species of Dieuches, Dohrn (Hem.
Ly gacidae) injurious to strawberries in Tasmania. Bull.
ent. Res., 30 (3): 305-6. 1 text fig.

Gulde, J., 1984: Die Wunsen Mitteleuropas 3. Frankfurt.

Seudder, G. G. E., 1957: The Higher C ‘lassification of the Rhyparo-
chrominse (Hem. Lygaeidae). Ent. mon. Mag., 4 (18):
152-156.

Slater, J. A., 1957: Nomenclatorial Consideration in the Family
Lygaeidae (Hemiptera: Heteroptera). Bull. Brooklyn
ent. Soc., 52 (2): 35-38.

Slater, J. A, and M, W. Sweet, 1961: A contribution to the Higher
Classification of the Megalonotinae (Hemiptera: Lygaei-
dae), Ann. ent. Soc, Amer., 54: 208-209.

1961: A Generie Key to the Nymphs of North American
Lygaeidae (Hemiptera: Heteroptera). Ann. ent. Soe.
Amer., 54: 333-340. Text figures.
Stal, C., 1859: Konelign svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa Omkring
Jorden, under Beful af G. A. Virgin 1851-1853. Zoologi
I. Insecta Hemiptera Species novas descripsit, 219-298,
Stockholm.

1862: Hemiptern mexicana enumeravit speciesque novas
descripsit. Stett. ent. Ztg., 23: 81- 118, 273-281, 289-825,
437-462.

1865: Hemiptera africana, 2: 1-181.

1872: Genera Lygaeidarum Europae disposnit. Ofvers.
Vetensk Okad. Férh. Stoekh., 29 (7): 87-62.

1874: Bnumeratio Hemipterorum. Bidrag till en Fortech-
ning ofver all hittills Kirda Hemiptera, jemte system-
atiska Meddelanden 4. K. svensk Vetensk Akad, Hand1.,
12 (1); 1-186.

Walker, F., 1872: Catalogue of the Specimens of Heteropterous-

Hemiptera in the Collection of the British Museum. 8
Volumes.

Rec, S.A. Musern Vou, 14, Pruare 14

eo ~ <£ is

Ta fire qeege |

Rec. S.A. Museen Vow, 14, Pouare 15

Rec. S.A. Messer Vou. 14. Phare 16

SACRED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA TRIBE,
WESTERN CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records twenty sacred objects (kulpidji) of the Pitjandjara tribe who inhabit
the western deserts of central Australia. Seventeen of them are associated with Kikingura,
the totemic place of the Windulka (mulga-seed) aborigines, on the western end of the
Petermann Ranges, and three are from Katatjuta, a group of isolated monoliths about
twenty miles west of Ayers Rock.

Being unable to visit Kikingura, the totemic place of the mulga-seed people, I could not
link the designs on the kulpidji with the associated topography. To a limited degree,
however, I was able to do so with those associated with Katatjuta, and even more fully
with a series belonging to the totemic groups of Ayers Rock.

SACRED OBJECTS OF THE PITJANDJARA TRIBE, WESTERN
CENTRAL AUSTRALIA

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary Associate IN
Erxunotocy, Sovran Ausrratian Museum

Fig. 1-5

INTRODUCTION

This paper records twenty sacred objects (kulpidji) of the
Pitjandjara tribe who inhabit the western deserts of central Australia,
Seventeen of them are associated with Kikingura, the totemic place of
the Windulka (mulga-seed) aborigines, on the western end of the
Petermann Ranges, and three are from Katatjuta, a group of isolated
monoliths about twenty miles west of Ayers Rock.

Being unable to visit Kikingura, the totemie place of the mulga-
seed people, I could not link the designs on the kulpidji with the
associated topography. To a limited degree, however, I was able to
do so with those associated with Katatjuta, and even more fully with
a series belonging to the totemic groups of Ayers Rock.”

BELIEFS ASSOCIATED WITH THE KULPIDJI

Spencer and Gillen (1899, Chap. 5), give a particularly full
account of the beliefs and functions of the sacred objects, the churinga
(¢jurunga) of the Aranda tribe of Central Anstralia, which, in some
respects, perform the same functions as the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara.

Among other things, the Aranda believe that the child spirit leaves
the tjurunga and entering the body of a woman that happened to be
passing, starts life as a human being. At death, the spirit of the dead
returns to the tjurunga from which it had emerged previously.

My research into the Pitjandjara beliefs of conception and life
after death, although far from complete, indicate that the kulpidjr
is neither associated with the life cyele of the Pitjandjara in the same
manner as the tjwrunga is with the Aranda, nor does it ocenpy such
an important place in the philosophical beliefs.

(1) A description of the Ayers Roek kulpidji will be published elsewhere.
(2) Por the purpose of this paper, this belief has been much simplified.

398 RECORDS OF THE §8.A. MUSEUM

Nevertheless, the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara are objects of con-
siderable sanctity and value. ‘They are a record, in particularly limited
symbolism, of the mythical beliefs of the tribe, and occupy an
important part in the ceremonies (belonging to the same totem as the
kulpidyi), when the old men, laying the sacred object on the ground,
relate the myth and explain the meaning of the designs engraved on
its surface,

The aborigines, also, believing that the kulpidji is impregnated
with a life essence (kurunba or kurunita; Mountlord, 1948, pp.
111-113), often press the sacred objects against their body, believing
that some of the kuwrunba, by leaving the kulpidji, and entering their
body, gives them increased strength and vitality, The kulpidji, too,
are particularly sacred, and all knowledge of them rigidly confined to
the fully initiated men. Under no condilions must they be seen by
the women or the uninitiated youths, or even mentioned within their
hearing.

DESIGNS

Spencer and Gillen (1899, p. 145) when referring to the Aranda
tjurunga, point out that ‘the whole design consists, with few
exceptions, of a conventional arrangement of circular, semi-circular,
spiral, curved and straight lines, together with dots’’, As one travels
from central to north-eastern Australia, however, the concentric circles
of the Aranda change, first to concentric squares, then to the inter-
locking key pattern, a characteristic of the art of north-western
Australia (Davidson, 1937, p, 78, fig. 57).

The majority of the designs on the kulpidji in this paper are of
the typical Aranda type, those on figs. 1 and 2 being typical, There
are two examples of the concentric squares, fig, 30, and 4QGH
(Davidson, 1937, fig, 55),

A number of the kulpidji, however, figs. 3AB, 3HK, 8D, 40D, 5A,
and 5B, are engraved with unusual designs which, so far as T am
aware, previously haye not been recorded, On these kulpidji, the
irregular designs are outlined with shallow holes, about three-sixteenth
of an inch in diameter, and the spaces of the designs filled in with
a series of straight, parallel lines.

METHODS OF ENGRAVING

When carrying out research among the aborigines of the
Ngadadjara tribe of the Warburton Ranges of Western Australia, I

Vig. 1, AD, Unecircumeised Windulka (mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura. B. Muna Sisters

at, Kikinguya, C, Paratata (wallaby) men at Kikingura. FH, Uncireumcised Windulka

(mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura. Q. Paratata (wallaby) tien at Kikingura, J, Yoong
Windulka (mulga-seed) boys at Kikingura,

400 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

watched an aboriginal engrave a spiral design on a spearthrower.
Using, as an engraving tool, the incisor tooth of an opossum, still in
the skull, the aboriginal held and operated the tool in somewhat the
same manner as that of the modern engraver in metals. He was able
to maintain such an efficient control over his primitive engraving tool
that, not once, during the engraving of the design, did he allow the
tool to slip and over-run his cut. Further east, however, the aboriginal
engravers I have watched, apparently not so sure of their skill, placed
their thumb-nail at the end of the cut to prevent any damage to the
design should the tool slip,

DESCRIPTION OF SACRED OBJECTS FROM KIKINGURA

There are seventeen saered objects (kalpidji) desertbed in this
paper that belong to the totemie place of Kikingura. They are:—
(A) The Windulka (mulga-seed) men, women and uncireumecised
youths (eleven),
(B) The Tjukula men (one),
(C) The Paratata (wallaby) men (two).
(D) The Maua sisters (two),
(E) The Kaduna women (ore),

(A) The Windulka (mulga-seed) People

Hight of the kulpidji belong to the adult mulga-seed people of
Kikingura: (i) fig, 2DE; (ii) 2AH; (iii) 80D; (iv) 3NF; (v) 4AF;
(vi) 4BE; (vii) 4CD; and (viii) 4GH, and three to the uncircumcised
boys: (1) IAD; (ii) 1FH; and (iii) 1J,

(i) The kulpidji illustrated on fig. 2DK, pictures the camps of
the mulga-seed women (the wives of the men shown on kulpidja,
fiz, 4GF),

On 2D, the three large groups of concentric cireles, a, b, e, are
the camps of the married women, and the four small groups, g, d, and
h, e, their breasts. The donble lines joining these groups of smaller
concentric circles are the sears hetween the breasts of the women, and
the smaller series of triple lines, mostly curved, that join the larger
to the smaller concentric circles, the scars on their arms. The
crescents on either end of the kulpidji represent the windbreaks of
the camps of the mythical women.

On the reverse side of the hulpidji (fig. 2E), the larger groups
of concentric circles represent the camps of the married women; the

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 401

smaller a, b; ¢, d, their breasts, and the lines joining them, the sears
between the breasts. The designs, n, t, are the windbreaks of the
camps of the women, and the crescents on the edges of the kulpidgi,
the hoomerangs of their hasbands.

(ii) This kulpidji (fiz, 2AT1), illustrates a group of young and
old Windulka men at. Kikingura.

The larger groups of concentric circles on fig, 2A, represent
the older Windulka men, and the smaller groups, the younger men,
The lines joining the smaller circles together are the chest scars of
the young men and the groups of short marks on the edge of the
sacred objects, the scars on their upper arms. The curving lines
throughout the whole of the engraved design represent the boomerangs
of both the older and the younger men.

On the reverse side (fig. 2H), the larger concentric circles, as
before, are the old men, the smaller, the young men; the horizontal
group of lines joining the smaller concentric circles, the chest sears
and the triple groups of lines, the spearthrowers of both the old and
the young men,

(iii) The engraved designs on this kulpidyi (fig. 8CD), represent
a gronp of Mulga-seed people travelling northward from a soakage
at Kikingura,

Fig. 3D deals with the first section of that journey from the
soakage at Kikingura to a spring in the side of a hill at Tjukula, The
design b, on the top of 3D, is the soak af Kikingura, and a, on the
bottom, the spring at Tjukula, The meandering design, W, running
up the middle uf the kulpidji, symbolises the track made by the
mythical people as they travelled from one locality to the other, and
the irregular shapes, on either side of the design W, the footmarks
of the travelling people.

On 3C, the obverse side of the kalpidji, the larger groups of
concentric squares represent groups of mulga-seed men at Kikingura
sitting eross-legged in the ground, The smaller groups of concentric
aqnares, q,m; p, 1; and x, o, refer to twin peaks in the mountains of
Kikingura.

(iv) The kulpidji Wustrated by fig. 3EF refers to mythical mulga
trees that grew at Kikingura during the time of creation.

The irregular designs on fig. 83E (made up of a series of holes
drilled in the surface of the kulpidji, and filled with a series of

(3) This is a point of some interest, because the Pitjandjara aborigines do not use the
hoomernang.

402 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. AH, Old and young Windulla (mulga-seed) men at Kikingura, BC.
Mana Sisters at Kikingura. DE, Windulla (mulga-sced) women at Kikingura.
EG. Kaduna women at Kikingura.

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 403

parallel lines), symbolise groups of Windulka men sitting quietly in
their camps at Kikingura. The design, o, on the top, indicate a group
of living mulga trees (almost certainly of totemic importance),

On the other side of the kulpidji (fig. 8F), the irregular designs
(similar to those on 3B), indicate the eamps of the M ulga-seed men at
Kikingura and the short meandering design at k, a track made by the
people as they walked from camp to camp.

(v) The kulpidji illustrated on fig. 4AF, refers to a number of
Mulgs-seed men who had always camped at Kikingura. The series
of concentric cireles on both sides of this kulpidji show the adult men
seated mm their camps; the vertical parallel lines, the spearthrowers
of the Windulka men leaning against their windbreaks, and the
diagonal lines, the men earrying their spearthrowers in the erooks of
their arms, The designs on the top of fig. 4A illustrate the
boomerangs and shields of the men.

(vi) Fig. 4BE illustrate a group of Windulka men and boys in
their camp at Kikingnra. The largest groups of concentric cireles on
both sides of the kulpidji are the camps of the adult men; the inter-
mediate size, those of the adolescent youths ready for initiation, and
the smallest, very young boys.

The central group of triple lines on the sides of both 4B and &,
indicate the spears of the aborigines, and the diagonal lines, their
spearthrowers. There is a slight variation in the design on fig. 41,
the horizontal groups of lines representing the chest scars on the
bodies of the men and the older boys.

(vii) Fig. 40D also deals with the mythical Mulga-seed men
camping at Kikingura, The irregular designs at fig. 4C symbolise
groups of men seated on the ground and the euryilimear lines on the top
of the kulpidji, their windbreaks. The lines of holes separating the
groups of parallel lines, indicate the piles of mulga seed which had
been collected by the wives of the mythical mulga-seed men.

The designs on the reverse side: (fig. 4D), represent mniga trees,
the seed of which, during the early days of the world, fell to the
ground in such quantities that the men and women of those times
always had an abundance of food, As on the obverse side (fig. 40),
the lines of holes on the surface of the kylpidji symbolise piles of
mulga seed,"

(4) Mulga seed when ground into flour, made into a eake and baked in the ashes of the
camp fire, is a favourite food of the aborigines.

404 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(viii) Both sides of the kulpidji illustrated on fig. 4GH have
identical meanings. ‘lhe diamond shapes indicate the camps of the
Mulga-seed men and women at Kikingura, the lines of holes, the sticks
in the windbreaks of the camps, and the horizontal parallel lines, the
scars on the upper arms of the men.

Three kulpidji, figs. 1AD, 1FH, and 1J, deal with the mythical
uncireumeised boys of Kikingura.

(i) On fig. LAD, the larger of the concentric circles, a, b, e, d, on
fig, 1A, are the camps of the elder uncireameised boys (called bulga
at this stage of their life), and the groups e, f, ¢, hb, those of the
younger boys. The triangular patterns on the borders of the kulpidji
symbolise the boomerangs of the older boys. The designs on the
reverse side (fig. 1D), althongh slightly different, have similar
meanings.

(ii) Mig. JF also deals with the mythical uninitiated Mulga-
seed boys at IGkingura, The concentric circles on the obverse side
(fig. 1), are the boys in their camps, and the two designs at @ and h,
pairs of boys playing see-saw on a log balanced across a tree trunks,
The hoomerangs of the youths are indicated at a, b, and ¢; and their
body sears by group of triple lines at d.

On the reverse side of fig, 1H, the series of coneentric circles,
a, b, ¢, d, are the camp-fires of the mythical youths and the groups of
curved lines e, f, g, h, the hoys lying beside their fires. The groups of
concentri¢ circles at i, k, indicate other boys resting in the shade of
the trees.

(iii) On the third hulpidji of the mythieal boys (fig, 17), the
groups of concentric circles, a, b, e, d, ete., are the eamp fires, and the
groups of curving lines, g, h, and j, the uninitiated boys warming
themselves beside those fires. The smallest cirele, f, on the extreme
left represents a small child sitting by himself,

(B) The Tjukula Men

One kulpidji (fig. 3AB), over five feet long, deals with the journey
of a group of mythical (unidentified) Tjukula men, The obverse side
(fig. 3A), illustrates a journey from Kikingura northward to Tjukula,
where there is a spring of that name in the side of a hill, and the
reverse side, the journey from 'ljukula to a rock-hole called Pulitjilda,
From this point, according to my informants, which was the end of
the Tjukula line of songs, the mythieal men ‘flew’? away, and the
owners of the kulpidji had no further knowledge of them.

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDIARA SACRED OBJECTS 405

My
L

rf Nc

i i

“i i )
i ik

i)
al

Fig. 3. AB, Journey of Tjukula men from Kikingura. CD, Windulka (mulga-seed)
mun at Kikingora, EP. Windulka (mulga-seed) men at MKikingura.

406 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

On fig. 3B, the meandering pattern, o, outlined with small holes
and filled in with short parallel lines, symbolises the track made by
the mythical Tjukula men as they travelled from Kikingura, a, to
Tjukula, «. The irregular designs covering the remainder of the
kulpidji represent the tracks made by the Tjukula men as they
travelled from one locality to the other.

The other side of the kulpidji (fig. 3A), the irregular patterns
represent the footmarks of the Tjukula men as they continued their
journey from the spring at Tjukula, a, to the rock-hole at
Pulitjilda, b.

Two kulpidji, figs. 1C and 1G, belong to the totem of the mythical
wallaby (Paratata) men. These mythical creatures, relatives of the
Mulga-seed men, lived permanently at Kikingura.

(i) Fig. 1C, a beautifully-engraved, stone kulpidji, deals with an
old wallaby man at Kikingura. The concentric circles at m is the
place where the Paratata man once camped. The cireles, q and o are
his feet, and the groups of parallel lines a, b, his legs. The U-shaped
design, p, was onee his windbreak, and the groups of crescents, young
wallabies lying down. It is likely, although my informants did not say
so, that these young wallabies were the children of the old man.

The camp of the wallaby is now a large spring of water; his feet
are two rock-holes; his legs, stony ridges, and the bodies of the young
wallabies, outcrops of stones,

(ii) On the small stone kulpidji (fig. 1G), the concentrie circles
at m,n, are places at Kikingura where a Paratata man once camped.
At u, rand v, s, are his feet, and the parallel straight lines joming
them to m and m respectively, his legs. The designs, k, w, x and y,
are the painted decorations on the back of the Paratata man. The
designs on this side of the kulpidji, like those on fig. 10, almost
certainly refer to topographical features,

(D) The Mana Sisters
Two kulpidjis (fig. 1B and fig, 2BC), deal with the Mana sisters
who lived at Kikingura during creation times.
(i) The four series of concentric circles, on fiz. 1B, are the Mana
wamen sitting on the ground; the triple diagonal lines, symbolising
their legs, The smaller pairs of circles, indicate their breasts; the

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 407

short transverse lines along the edge of the kulpidji, the scars on
their chests, and the triple parallel horizontal lines, the windbreak
behind which the Mana women slept. The engraved designs on the
reverse side have similar meanings.

(ii) The four large groups of concentric cireles on fig. 2C, again
represent the Mana women seated on the ground; the paired groups
of concentric circles, q, j; p, k; and o, m, their breasts, and the short
transverse lines joining the smaller circles their chest scars. The
diagonal lines on this kulpidji represent the outstretched legs of the
women (see fie. 1B).

On fig. 2B, the five series of concentrie circles represent the Mana
women sitting down and the meandering lines, the hair-string
ornament whieh the women wore around their neck and over their
shoulders,

(KX) The Kaduna Women

The kulpidji (fig. 2FG), belongs to a group of Kaduna women,
the wives of the Mulga-seed men (see fig. 8CD),

The large concentric cireles j, k, on 2F, are two of the Kaduna
women; q, a, and ¢, 1, their breasts and the three crescent designs
on the wpper part of the kulpidji, the scars on their arms. The body
of a third Kaduna woman is indicated at m.

On the reverse side (fig. 2G), a, b, e, d, are places where four of
the adult Kaduna women sat down and e, that of a young girl. The
paired concentric circles are the breasts of the older women.

SACRED OBJECTS FROM KATATJUTA

Three kulpidji are associated with Katatjuta, a group of enormous
domes of rock about twenty miles west of Ayers Rock, the highest. of
them, Mount Olga, rising to almost eighteen hundred feet above the
surrounding plain, One kulpidjz (fig. 5A), belongs to the myth of the
viant Pungalunga men of the western side, and two, fig. 5B and 5C,
to the mythical Mingiri (brown desert mouse) women of the
eastern face.

(A) The Pungalunga Men

(i) The irregular designs, j, k, ] and m, on one side of fig. 5C
(the other side is plain) symbolise the footmarks of the giant
Pungalunga men of creation times, whose camps, at the close of the
‘“ereation’’ period, were transformed into a series of huge monoliths
on the western side of Katatjuta, Mountford (1948, p, 98) gives a

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

155)
ty is rth
a
aD He et Bath
‘ ‘) hy
i =
el in :

ayer

ns
\\
SF
Sates

se
sph
5 Seetne
ch Ms —s
: SS
—
Ne

Fig. 4 AF, Windulka (mulga-seed) men at Kikingura. BE, Mindutka (mulga-seed)
men at Kikingura, CD, Windulka (mulga-seed) man and poye ut Kikingura,
Windulka (wwulga-sed) men at Kikingura,

GH.

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 409

short description of the Pungalunga myth. The engraved rectangles
at a, b, ¢, ete, and g, h, i, refer to unidentified trees associated with
the Pungalunga myth,

(B) The Mingire Women

Two kulpidji (fig. 5A and fig, 5B), belong to the myth of the
Mingiri (mice) women who lived on the eastern side of Katatjuta.

(i) The kulpidji, 5A, like 5B, is engraved only on one side. The
meandering design, a, along the middle of the kulpidji represents a
watercourse at Katatjuta, ealled Gundundura, which is associated with
the myth of the Mingirt women, The irregular patterns are piles of
the yellow-fruited solanum jirtunba, which the Mingiri women
collected as food. At the close of the creation period these piles of
food were transformed into high rocky monoliths.

(ii) Fig. 5B is a kulpidji with a series of simple circles that is
associated with the Mingiri myth of Katatjuta, Those at a, a, repre-
sent the camps of the women; b, b, the breasts of one of the women;
e, ¢, a pregnant Mingiri woman who gave birth to her child, d, d,
under the mulga trees, e, e,

At present, a, a, are high rocky domes, b, b, patehes of level
ground, ¢, ¢, small rock-holes, d, d, a cave and e, c, mulga trees.

Fig. 5. Katatjuta, AB. Mingiri (mico) women at Katatjuta. Q, Pungalwnaga men
at Katatjuta.

410 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

An examination of the Pitjandjara kulpidji and of others I have
studied among the Aranda, Ngalia and Walpiri (Wailbri) tribes of
Central Australia has shown that the aborigines of this area use a
remarkably limited number of art motifs to illustrate the mythical
stories they engraye on their sacred objects, motifs which are
particularly simple, being almost entirely limited to circles, spirals,
parallel straight and meandering lines, rows of dots, and little else.
Figs. 1 and 2 in this paper are typical of these motifs.

Among the kulpidji of the Pitjandjara, however, are two different
motifs, concentric squares, fiz, 83C and 4GH, and another curious and
previously unrecorded motif, i.e, 83AB, 3HF, ete. The motifs on these
kulpidji are even more limited than the curvilinear designs on the
remainder,

This paucity of design elements has meant that the same motif,
will, on different and sometimes on the same kulpidji, have different
meanings. Until, however, we have a much wider range of fully
interpreted kulpidji or other sacred objects available for study, it is
not possible to make an analysis of the designs and to find out the
stability, or otherwise, of any particular motif.

TECHNIQUES OF RECORDING

The method employed for recording the engraved designs was to
first make a rubbing with black lumber crayon of the design on strong
tissue paper. On this rubbing I wrote the meanings of the engraved
designs and in my field note book, details of the associated myth.

The drawings on figs. 1-5 were traced from the rnbbings made in
the field. By this method, a much more accurate record is possible
than by any other means.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

I wish to acknowledge my indebtedness to the Minister for
Territories (The Hon, Paul Hasluck, M.P.) and hig staff for their
unstinted help in making this research possible, to the South Australian
Museum for the use of their facilities, and to Miss Brenda Hubbard
for her excellent drawings of the kulpidji,

(5) Although the aborigines were willing to part with the majority of these sacred objects,
departmental regulations did not allow me to aceept them. However, the rubbings and tho
associated data gave mo the information I required,

MOUNTFORD—PITJANDJARA SACRED OBJECTS 4i1

SUMMARY

This paper records the designs, the meanings, and to a limited
degree, the myths belonging to twenty-one sacred objects of the
Pitjandjara tribe of western central Australia.

LITERATURE CITED

Davidson, D. 8., 1937: A Preliminary Consideration of Aboriginal
Decorative Art. Memoirs of American Philosophical
Society, Philadelphia, 9.

Mountford, ©. P., 1948: Brown Men and Red Sand. (Melbourne.)

Spencer, W. B. and Gillen, F. J., 1899: Native Tribes of Central
Australia. (London.)

voLUME 14 No. 3
1963

de
;

:
|

RECORDS
OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Published by the Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale

Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide.
Registered in Australia for Transmission by Post as a Periodical.

FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS OF THE LATE TERTIARY
OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ALDEN H. MILLER, MUSEUM OF PALEONTOLOGY,
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

Summary

Two kinds of ratite birds occur in the late Tertiary of the Lake Eyre region of Australia.
These fossils are part of the Palankarinna fauna, tentatively referred to the early Pliocene,
and were found in the Mampuwordu Sands at Lake Palankarinna. One specimen is
described as a new species of emu, Dromiceius ocypus, which shows foot specialization
equivalent to that of the modern emus of the continent. It is a smaller species than the
living emu of the area but has foot proportions like the even smaller insular species of
Pleistocene and Recent times. The other specimen is a fragmentary pelvis which is
referred to the genus Genyornis. It is equivalent in size to the giant extinct Genyornis
newtoni of the Pleistocene.

The fossils here reported extend the paleontologic record of the avian families
Dromiceiidae and Dromornithidae from the late Pleistocene back to the Pliocene.

FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS OF THE LATE TERTIARY OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ALDEN H. MILLER, Museum or PatsontoLocy, UNIVERSITY
or CALIFORNIA

Fig. 1-2

SUMMARY

Two kinds of ratite birds occur in the late Tertiary of the Lake
Eyre region of Australia, These fossils are part of the Palankarinna
fauna, tentatively referred to the early Pliocene, and were found in
the Mampuwordu Sands at Lake Palankarinna. One specimen is
described as a new species of emu, Dromiceius ocypus, which shows
foot specialization equivalent to that of the modern emus of the
continent. It is a smaller species than the living emu of the area but
has foot proportions like the even smaller insular species of
Pleistocene and Recent times. The other specimen is a fragmentary
pelvis which is referred to the genus Genyornis. It is equivalent in
size to the giant extinct Genyornis newtoni of the Pleistocene.

The fossils here reported extend the paleontologie record of the
avian families Dromiceiidae and Dromornithidae from the late
Pleistocene back to the Pliocene.

INTRODUCTION

The discovery of Tertiary fossil-bearing deposits in the Lake Eyre
basin of South Australia was made known in 1954 by R. A. Stirton.
One of the fossil assemblages found was of late Tertiary age and has
been tentatively referred to the early Pliocene. It has been designated
the Palankarinna fauna (Stirton, Tedford, and Miller, 1961, p. 37).
In our preliminary listing of this fauna, a ratite bird was mentioned
(p. 38). This may now be described as well as an additional ratite
from the same formation that was obtained in the course of the field
expedition of 1961.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Work on fossil vertebrates of South Australia has continued to
receive the generous support and encouragement of the South

414 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Australian Museum and its staff, In 1961 we were especially aided
by Mr. Norman B, Tindale and Paul F, Lawson and in the field by
Lawson and Harry J, Bowshall. The expedition in that year was
made possible by a grant from the National Science Foundation of
the United States. For opportunity to examine Pleistocene and
Recent emu bones I am indebted also to Edmund D, Gill and Allan
Mefvey of the National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne, and to
H. T. Condon of the South Australian Museum.

DESCRIPTIONS
Family DROMICEIIDAE

The tarsometatarsus of an emu was obtained at the Lawson
Quarry (U.C.M.P. locality V 5769) at Lake Palankarinna in 1957.
It is essentially complete and lacks only the tip of the intercotylar
prominence, The surface of much of the shaft is checked and in
places eroded, but the distal articular area is complete and well
preserved as is the hypotarsus, ‘he shapes and relative sizes of the
trochleae, the configuration of the plantar surface, the presence and
location of the distal foramen, and the details of the hypotarsus all
conform to those of the modern emus (Dromiceius) and in no respect
suggest the conditions in the cassowaries (see fig. 1). The shortness
and relative stoutness of the fossil is somewhat like the condition in
cassuwaries (Casuarius wnappendiculatus) but in proportions it is
even closer to the extinct forms of Recent and Pleistocene emus of
the islands off the southern border of the Australian continent, namely
Dromicetus diemenianus and Dromiceius minor,

Comparisons huve been made with seven skeletons of the modern
emn of the continent, Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, and with measure-
ments I have taken of 14 tarsometatarsi of mimor, including those
labelled as ‘‘hypotypes’’ at Melhourne and with two complete tarso-
metalarsi of diemenianus in the South Australian Museum, The
measurements show that the Pliocene emu was significantly shorter-
legged than the modern continental bird and larger than the insular
forms while possessing the relatively greater width of the latter, The
Plineene species may be known as:

Dromiceius ocypus sp. nov.

Type: Right tarsometatarsus, essentially complete. South
Australian Mus, No, P 13444; Univ. Calif. Mus, Paleo. locality No.
V 5769, Mampuwordu Sands, Lake Palankarinna, late Tertiary,
apparently early Pliocene.

MILLER—FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS 415

*1
i
fa:

2
3
13
3
nt

Fig. 1. Right tarsometatarsi of emus and cassowaries, plantar view, & 4. a. Ob.
Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, large and average individuals. ¢. Dromiceius ocypus, type.
ad, Casuarius unappendicilatus,

416 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Diagnosis: Similar in foot structure to Dromiceius novae-
hollandiae but relative breadth of distal end of tarsometatarsus
greater and linear dimensions less. Ratio of width across trochleae
to length of tarsometatarsus 15.7 per cent as contrasted with 13.3 to
14.5 (average 13.6) per cent in novae-hollandiae and length 15 per
cent less.

Analysis and comparison: Individual variation in size in emus
is rather great as casual examination reveals. One can readily set
aside the tarsometatarsi of individuals that are not yet fully grown
by reason of the evidence of immaturity in the incomplete fusion of
the tarsal region, the imperfect ossification in the area of the distal
foramen and at the junction of the trochleae, and the roughness of
the surfaces of the shaft. But even in bones of adults linear
dimensions show considerable range of variation. For example, the
coefficient of variation in tarsal length of the seven adult modern emus
is 4.6 per cent. The bones of Dromiceius minor and of D. diemenianus
represented in table 1, as well as the tarsometatarsus of D. ocypus,
are those of adults. The departure of the fossil from the modern emu
in tarsal length and relative width of the distal end of the tarso-
metatarsus was found to be significant (t test, P — < 0.02 and
< 0.01, respectively).

Although the individual measurements of the series of Dromiceius
minor were not recorded, the range of the 14 specimens and the values
for D. diemenianus are such that there seems to be no possibility of
overlap of either with D. ocypus. The latter exceeds the maximum of
D. minor by 4.7 em. or 16 per cent. The ratio of the width across the
trochleae to tarsal length is, however, the same in minor, diemenianus,
and ocypus.

Table 1
Measurements of Tarsometatarsi of Emus (Dromiceius) in Millimeters
D. novae-hollandiae D. ocypus D. minor D. diemenianus
(7 specimens) (14 specimens) (2 specimens)
Mean Standard
and Range deviation Mini- Maxi-
(N-1) mum mum
Total length ............. 399 (377-431) 18-2 337-0 231-0 290-0 252-0 250-0
Distal width across trochleae 54-5 (51-0-58-9) 2:8 53-2 42-0 45-0 42-7 42:8
Proximal width .......... 53-2 (51-1-56-7) 2-4 50-5 36-5 42-0 35-8 37-8
Least depth of shaft ...... 13-5 (12-5-14-8) 0-85 12:6 8-4 10-5 10-4 9-9
Ratio of distal width to
length (per cent) ........ 13-6 (13-3-14-5) 046 1567 155 166 17:0 171

Three names have been created for late Pleistocene emus from
the continent of Australia by De Vis (1884, 1888, 1892). Two of these

MILLER—FOSSIL, RATTITE BIRDS 417

are based on very unsatisfactory fragments, Dromiceius queenslandiae
(De Vis, 1884) is known from a proximal part of a left femur.
Hntton’s report (1893) on this brings out characteristics of shape
which seem to relate it either to the emus or the Dromornithidae
rather than {0 the moas, contrary to the original view of the describer.
Oliver (1949, pp. 80-88, 183) makes no appraisal of Hutton’s allocation
and returns yueenslandiae to the moas. Oliver’s photographs and
description of this fossil compared with bones of moas (Pachyornis),
emus, and eassowaries at hand do not convince me that his assignment
is well established, In any event the bird was roughly 50 per cent
larger than Dromiceius novae-hollandiae and thus it is wholly distinet
from 2D. oeypus,

DPromiceius gracilipes (De Vis, 1892) was based on a very
fragmentary distal end of a tarsometatarsus that should never have
beer nained. Because it, lacks the distal tarsal foramen characteristic
of emus, it may not even belong to this group. The figure of it suggests
that there has been consideruble abrasion of the specimen and. there-
fore evidence of immaturity may have been lost. The specimen could
have been part of an immature emu iy which the distal foramen had not
yet formed, or it could be from a small cassowary, Clearly it has no
close affinity with D. seypus.

Dromiceius patricius (De Vis, 1888) was based on a tibiotarsus;
a coracoid was also deseribed and provisionally referred to it. The
tibiotarsus was stated to reflect a heavier, more muscular leg than
that of the modern emu. De Vis’ description of differences in
configuration leave one in doubt as to their significance, and examina-
tion of his figures of tibiotarsal fragments gives no assurance of the
validity of the differences. The size of patricivs as measured from
the figures is not greater than in large individuals of modern emus,
nor is the hone heavier. Much other Pleistocene material has been
referred to patricius, including remains from the Pleistocene of the
Lake Eyre region. Whether or not patricius or this referred material
in fact represents a distinct Pleistocene form close to movae-hollandiae
cannot be determined until the Pleistocene fossils are assembled and
fully analyzed for variability and significance of differences. At
present the validity of patricius seems questionable, but it is safe to
say that it shows no features that suggest identity with ocypus.

The geveral conclusion to be drawn from the discovery and
analysis of Dramiceius ocypus is that the structure of the foot of
amus of the late Tertiary had alresdy reached the level of specializa-
tion seen in the group today, The changes to be noted sinee then in

418 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

this group of birds on the mainland have been an inerease in size and
moderate slenderizing of proportions. The insular emns, if direct
descendants, did not, change proportions and either became small or
represent persistence of a line of small forms.

Family DROMORNITHIDAE

At the Lawson Quarry (locality V 5769) in 1961 a Fragment of a
pelvis (U. C. Mus, Paleo. No, 60613) was obtained which, although
very incomplete, shows features distinctive of the giant Pleistocene
bird Genyornis. The fragment consists of the base of the left pubis
and ischiun: surrounding the obturator foramen, the posterior and
ventral parts of the acetabulum, and the ascending bar of the ischium.

These parts of the pelvis have been compared with those of emus,
with photographie plates of Genyornis newtoni (Stirling, 1913; pls.
XXXVI and XXXIX), and with a large moa (Pachyornis
elephantopus). The Pliocene fossil shows (fig. 2) the following
features characteristic of Genyornis which distinguish it from
Dromiceius: The pubis at its base, below the obturator foramen, is
broader (25 per cent greater) than the isehinm rather than the
converse (50 per cent less); the ascending bar of the ischinm is
relatively longer and more slender, and the external surfaces are much
more rugose. In these respects the moa is like Dromiceius and not
Genyornis, The fossil from Lake Palankarinna matches Genyornis in
size rather closely, It differs somewhat in the angle of the ascending
bar of the ischium to the axis of the pubis. In Genyornis newtont
this is a somewhat obtuse angle posteriorly whereas in the Pliocene
bird it is essentially a right angle, The har also shows greater taper
dorsally and some differences in surface configuration. These features
may well suggest that a different species is involved but the
fragmentary nature of the material affords imadequate basis for
naming it as new. The pelvis can be referred with confidence to the
genns (renyorms, although no comparison is possible with the one
other genius of this extinet family, namely Dromornis, of which the
pelvis is unknown,

This Pliocene fossil has significance in demonstrating that the
giant birds of the family Dromoruithidae existed as massive specialized
ratites in the late Tertiary as well as in the late Pleistocene of Australia
and that, in so far as the meagre evidence shows, they have changed
little over the considerable time interval involved.

Fig. 2. a. Pelvis
Genyornis from Lake
Genyornis newton,

MILLER—FOSSIL RATITE BIRDS

of Dromiceius novae-hollandiae, X %. b, Fragmentary pelvis

Palankarinna,

xX £€.

Partial reconstruction based on figures

419

of
of

420 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

LITERATURE CITED

De Vis, C. W., 1884: The moa (Dinornis) in Australia. Proc. Roy.
Soe. Queensland, Brisbane, vol. 1, pp. 23-28, 2 pls.

1888: A glimpse of the post-Tertiary avifauna of Queens-
land. Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W., Sydney, vol. 3, pp.
1275-1292, 4 pls.

1892: Residue of the extinct birds of Queensland as yet
detected. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., Sydney, vol. 6, pp.
437-456, 2 pls.

Hutton, F, W., 1893: On Dinornis (?) queenslandiae. Proce. Linn. Soe.
N.S.W., Sydney, vol, 8, pp. 7-10, 1 fig.

Oliver, W. R. B., 1949: The moas of New Zealand and Australia.
Dominion Museum Bull. No. 15, Dominion Museum,
Wellington, New Zealand, x + 206 pp., 143 figs.

Stirling, E. C., 1913: Description of some further remains of Genyornis
newton, Stirling and Zietz. Mem. Roy. Soc. 8S, Aust.,
Adelaide, vol. 1, pp, 111-126, 4 pls.

Stirton, R. A., 1954: Digging Down Under. Pacifie Discovery, San
Francisco, vol. 7, No. 2, pp. 3-13, 28 figs.

Stirton, R. A., Tedford, R. H., and Miller, A. H., 1961: Cenozoic
stratigraphy and vertebrate paleontology of the Tirari
Desert, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., Adelaide,
vol. 14, pp. 19-61, 4 figs.

A TURTLE SHELL MASK OF TORRES STRAITS TYPE IN THE
MACLEAY MUSEUM, UNIVERSITY OF SYDNEY

By GRAEME L. PRETTY, ASSISTANT CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper describes a hitherto unpublished turtle-shell mask of Torres Straits type. Study
of the records suggests a provenance of Darnley Island. It is possible that some of its
constituent parts may have been re-used from other masks. General features suggest a
human face but general form compares with the animal head masks of these islands. The
mask is surmounted by a crest of fretted turtle shell plates which bears comparison with
feathered head ornaments of Torres Straits. One such ornament, registered No. A40566 in
the South Australian Museum collection, is figured and described.

A TURTLE SHELL MASK OF TORRES STRAITS TYPE IN THE
MACLEAY MUSEUM, UNIVERSITY OF SYDNEY

By GRAEME L. PRETTY, Assistant Curator or ANTHROPOLOGY,
Sours AusrraLiAN Museum

Plates 17-18

SUMMARY

This paper describes a hitherto unpublished turtle-shell mask of
Torres Straits type. Study of the records suggests a provenance of
Darnley Island. It is possible that some of its constituent parts may
have been re-used from other masks. General features suggest a
human face but general form compares with the animal head masks of
these islands. The mask is surmounted by a crest of fretted turtle shell
plates which bears comparison with feathered head ornaments of
Torres Straits. One such ornament, registered No. A40566 in the
South Australian Museum collection, is figured and described.

INTRODUCTION

The Macleay Museum collection came to the University of Sydney
in 1889 from the estate of the late Sir William Macleay. Although
rich in Macleay’s main interest, Natural History, it contained a small
but significant collection of Australian and Melanesian ethnology of
the period around 1875-1885. Most of it was obtained on his collecting
expedition to Torres Straits and New Guinea in 1875, and was added
to hy collectors in various parts of Australia, Fiji, and the Solomons.
It includes a complete mummy from Darnley Island, Torres Straits,
a description of which 1 am preparing for publication.

In past years, the trend of the Museum’s major activities has
been somewhat at the expense of the ethnological collection. It is
now receiving the full attention of the Curator, Miss B. Hahn, who
is anxious that its existence should become more widely known.

Although the mask is unlabelled, its general appearance suggests
it to be of Torres Straits type (Meyer 1889 plates 1-4). A search of
the Macleay Museum papers and correspondence in the Sydney

422 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

University archives yielded no references to it. Maeleay in his Journal
of the expedition, recorded ethnological collections from Mokatta, at
the mouth of the Katan (now Binaturi) River, Warrior and Darnley
Islands in the Straits, and Hall Sound in the Gulf of Papua, Since, of
these localities, most time was spent at Darnley, it would seem the
most likely provenance for this specimen. Although there are several
masks in his collection, Macleay nowhere made specific mention of
them. Darnley (Mrub) is one of the eastern islands of the Straits.

DESCRIPTION

The mask (plates 17 and 18, fig. 1) has been constrneted of plates of
turtle shell, which are drilled at the margins, and sewn together with
hoth two strand rolled and three strand plaited vegetable twine 0.2 em.
in width, It is crested hy an arch of plates of fretted turtle shell,
supported by a central strip of the same material, Beneath and
forward, a rod of wood has been lashed to the lower margins.
According to Haddon (1912, y. 4, p. 303) this would have been clasped
between the teeth by the wearer. It would also have served to
strengthen the mask.

The mask measures 87 om, in length and is 18.5 em, in width. The
total height is 45 em. Some of the plates of which it is composed
show signs of previous use. The holes that have been drilled in them
are so placed as to rule out any useful function, e.g. the lashing
together of the plates. Presumably they had formed parts of earlier
masks. Other plates seem, at some previous time, to have been
engraved and lime-filled, though they are now cut down, drilled, lashed
and painted over like the rest of the mask. Other holes, e.g., around
the margins of the ‘‘ears’', have elearly been nsed to tie on tufted
and stringed decorations, as may be seen on other masks from the
same area and referred to by Linton and Wingert (1946, pp. 124, 127).

Turtle shell has been used to form a well made aquiline nose
10 em, long. A thin strip, projecting from its tip, has been brought
underneath, giving the semblance of a pierced nose,

The pierced ears, quite cliaracteristic of these islanders, have been
represented by ovoid plates of turtle shell, 10 em. long, with the lower
halves cut out. These margins, as aforementioned, have been drilled,
probably for tufted decoration,

The mask was originally fitted with two artificial eyes of shell
nacre, 3.0 x 1,5 em. One of these has since been lost, A blob of some
black resinous substance, perliaps the isau or black beeswax mentioned

PRETTY—-TURTLE SHELL MASK 423

by Haddon (1934, v. 1, p. 325), forms the pupil. The same substance
has been used to fill and strengthen the joints between the plates on
either side of the eye cavities.

The snot has been furnished with a white painted double row
of turtle shell **teeth’*.

A strip of serrated turtle shell runs along the basal margin, on
each side of the mask, probably to represent a beard. From the rod
beneath, hangs another fretted and serrated strip of turtle shell of a
type, Which according to Haddon (1912, v. 4, p. 303) usually
represented animal teeth, Probably re-used from a previous mask,
it may have been meant to strengthen the impression of a beard,
however, it has been attached to the rod with modern Kuropean string.

The whole mask, except for the facial parts, has been covered with
red ochre, As an upper boundary on the face two bands of white run
up from the bridge of the nose, branching out parabolically, each
meeting the periphery of the mask at the ear. Ina similar fashion
a double row of stitching sweeps out from below the tip of the nose,
each meeting the white line at the ear, The space in between,
including the nose, has been left free of paint.

The erest is made from plates of fretted turtle shell, decorated
with white lime-filled engravings. These designs have the zig-zags
and handed decoration, adjudged by Haddon (1894, pp. 14-21, 63-66)
to be characteristic of the Torres Straits—Kiwai cultures. If taken
in conjnnetion with the bands of white paint sweeping out from the
bridge of the nose, the whole bears a strong resemblance to the
feathered head ornaments worn in some Torres Straits dances.
According to Ray (1907, pp, 137, 140) these were called dri, or
d(a)ri, in the eastern islands, One such ornament, specimen numbered
A40566 in the South Australian Museum collection, is illustrated for
comparison (pl, 18, fiz. 2).

Behind there has been affixed a shell of the egg cowrie,
Amphiperas ovum Linnaens 1758. This has been painted red with
the rest of the mask. Probably if served as a rattle.

CONCLUSION

In general form this mask compares with the animal head masks
once common in the Torres Straits. Nevertheless, the over-riding
intention seems to have been to represent features of the human face,
perhaps adorned with one of the feathered head ornaments typical of
this area.

424 RECORDS OF THE. S.A. MUSEUM

Haddon (1912, v. 4, p. 302, pl. 34) illustrates a turtle shell mask
from Mount Ernest Island (Nagir) where a crocodile head form is
surmounted by a human face, fashioned on its upper surface. In the
Macleay Museum specimen, the human face is dominant and only the
generalized long-snouted animal form remains to point to its possible
morphological origins.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Acknowledgement is made, first of all to Miss EB. Hahn, Curator
of the Macleay Museum, for her many efforts on my behalf. Thanks
are offered to Mr. S. Woodward-Smith, Illustration, New Medical
School, University of Sydney, for photographs, and to Miss
I. Allpress, Librarian of the Linnean Society of New South Wales,
and Mr. D. 8. Maemillan, Archivist, University of Sydney, for making
available documentary material. Mr. N. B. Tindale, Curator of
Anthropology, South Australian Museum, and Mr. H. M. Cooper, Hon.
Associate in Anthropology, have read the manuscript and made
helpful suggestions and comments,

REFERENCES CITED

Haddon, A. C., 1894: Decorative Art of British New Guinea.
Junningham Memoirs 10, Dublin, pp. 1-278, pl. 1-12.

Haddon, A. C. (Ed.), 1904-1935: Reports of the Cambridge Anthro-
pological Expedition to Torres Straits, Cambridge. Vols.
1-6 (especially vol. 4, 1912: Arts and Crafts).

Linton, Ralph and Wingert, Paul S., 1946: Arts of the South Seas.
New York.

Macleay, William, 1875; Journal of his New Guinea Expedition,
commencing 29th May 1875, ending 28th August 1875.
(Manuscript in the Library of the Linnean Society of
New Sonth Wales.)

Meyer, A. B., 1889: Masken von Neu Guinea und dem Bismarck
Archipel. Kdénigliches Ethnographisches Museum zu
Dresden, 7; pp. 1-14, pl. 1-15,

Ray, Sidney H., 1907: Linguistics im Reports of the Cambridge
Anthropological Expedition &e. (ed. A. C. Haddon,
Cambridge), Vol. 3.

PRETTY—TURTLE SHELL MASK 425

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 17 AND 18

PLATE 17.

The mask, full face, showing the features described in the text. Specimen, without
registration number, in Macleay Museum, University of Sydney. Scale to be read in
centimetres.

PLATE 18.

Fig. 1. The mask, rear view, showing the re-used and engraved plates, the posterior
surface of the centrepiece of the crest, and the Amphiperas ovum shell affixed behind. Scale
to be read in centimetres.

Fig. 2. Head ornament, from Torres Straits (no specific locality). Greatest length
42 em., greatest width 31 cm. White feathers. Frame coloured blue, vermilion and white.
Specimen No. A40566 in South Australian Museum collection. Scale to be read in
centimetres.

Ree. S.A. Musrun Von. 14, Pare 17

To juve puge 426.)

Rec, 8.A. Museum Von. 14, Prarn 18

THE AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI
(HEMIPTERA: LYGAEIDAE)

By GORDON F. GROSS, CURATOR OF INSECTS, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM
AND G. G. E. SCUDDER, UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA

Summary

This paper deals with the systematics of the tribe Rhyparochromini (Hemiptera:
Lygaeidae) in the Australian region. Twenty species, six of them new, belonging to five
genera are described and figured. Most of the species belong to the genus Dieuches;

species from this area formerly ascribed to Aphanus are shown all to belong either to
Dieuches or to Elasmolomus.

THE AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI
(HEMIPTERA: LYGAEIDAE)

By GORDON F. GROSS, Curator or Insscts, Sourn AusTRaLiaNn
Moussevum, anv G. G. E, SCUDDER, University or Britise CoLuMBIA

Plates 19-24

SUMMARY

This paper deals with the systematics of the tribe Rhyparo-
chromini (Hemiptera: Lygaeidae) in the Australian region. Twenty
species, six of them new, belonging to five genera are described and
figured. Most of the species belong to the genus Dieuches; species
from this area formerly ascribed to Aphanus are shown all to belong
either to Diewches or to Elasmolomus.

INTRODUCTION

The insects considered in this paper belong to the Lygaeid sub-
family Rhyparochrominae, which is characterized by having the suture
between sterna IV and V laterally curved anteriorly and not reaching
the lateral margin of the abdomen. The tribe Rhyparochromini is
distinguished by having the spiracles on abdominal segments IIT and
IV dorsal, whilst all other segments of the abdomen have ventrally
placed spiracles: in Scudder (1957) the group is considered as the
subtribe Rhyparochromina, but now the taxon is considered to be a
full tribe (Scudder 1962b).

Only five genera so far are known to oceur in Australia, namely
Bosbequius Distant, Dieuches Dohrn, Elasmolomus Stal, Narbo Stal
and Poeantius Stal.

All Australian and Eastern Pacific Island species formerly con-
sidered to belong to the tribe Gonianotini and described as species of
the genus Aphanus Laporte or Pachymerus Lepelletier—Serville are
shown to belong to the tribe Rhyparochromini and are treated here.
This results in the elimination of the Gonianotini in this sub-region.
Australian and Eastern Pacific Rhyparochrominae belong only to
the tribes Cleradini, Drymini, Lethaeini, Rhyparochromini and

428

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Myodochini in the present arrangement of the tribes. Sweet (personal
communication) indicates the imminent erection of some additional
tribes but these will not alter the disposition of genera treated in
this paper.

KEY TO GENERA OF AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI

Lateral margins of pronotum gently convex
and corium without a pale subapical spot
Pronotum usually with lateral margins
straight or concave; corium with a more
or less distinct pale subapical spot... ..

. Lateral carinae to pronotum narrow but

distinct; corium brown with irregular
ochraceous maculae; scutellum without dis-
tinct ochraceous marks apically ..
Lateral carinae to pronotum broad and
expanded in middle; corium ochraceous
with irregular brown maculae; scutellum
with distinct ochraceous marks apically ..

. Elongate insects with lateral margins of pro-

notum lacking a distinct laminate carina;
male genital capsule with a small tubercle

Robust insects, the pronotum with distinct
lateral laminate carinae, although some-
times rather narrow .. .. .. .

. Basal half of the corium pale, apical half

ceastaneous with a pale subapical spot;
pronotal lateral carinae narrow; middle
femora in male unarmed; male genital cap-
sule without a small tubercle; membrane
if with pale spots then these basal... ..

Basal half of corium distinctly marked with
eastaneous; pronotal lateral carinae
usually broad and turned slightly dorsal;
middle femora in male armed with small
spines; male genital capsule with small
tubercle; membrane if with pale spot then
this apical .. .. lees oe ak Ld, oe

Bosbequius Distant

Elasmolomus Stal

Narbo Stal

Poeantius Stal

Dieuches Dohrn

GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 429

Bosbequius Distant 1903
Bosbequius Distant 1903, Faun. Brit. Ind. Rhynch, 2: 64.

Head triangular, minutely punctate, and with antennal tubercles
visible from above; clypeus extending well beyond paraclypeal lobes;
antennae with stiff semierect hairs; first segment of antennae extend-
ing beyond apex of head, second the longest; rostrum with first
segment extending less than half way to base of head.

Pronotum wider than long; dise flat and without distinct trans-
verse impression; lateral margins continued laterally as a laminate
carina; lateral margins gently convex; posterior margin slightly
concave; dise in anterior half more or less impunctate; lateral and
anterior margins and posterior part of pronotum with distinet
punetures,

Scutellum longer than wide; basal half of disc slightly excavate;
distinetly punctate.

Fore femora incrassate and with small spines more or less along
the whole length, terminal ones the most prominent; posterior tarsus
with basal tarsomere longer than combined length of the two distal
tarsomeres,

Hemelytra without distinct and contrasting dark and pale mark-
ings and without a distinct pale subapical spot to coriam; clavus with
three or more rows of punctures; corium quite densely punctate.

Type species: Bosbequius latus Distant 1903, from Tenasserim.

Bosbequius australis Distant 1918
Plate 19, fig, A
Bosbequius australis Distant 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)2: 260,

Colour. Head brown-black with apex of elypeus— slightly
ferruginous; antennae pale ferruginous with first segment and apical
parts of second and third brown; rostrum ferruginous.

Pronotum with anterior and lateral margins and lateral areas of
posterior part, ferrngino-ochraceous; rest of dise ferrnuginous, with
anterior part brown black.

Seutellum brown with apical part slightly ferruginous. Legs
brown or dark ferruginons with tibiae and tarsi ferrugino-ochraceons.

Hemelyitra ferruginous to dark brown with irregular ochraceous
maculae, usually along apical margin of corium and near Cu;
membrane fuscous with basal parts of veins and smal] spots near their
apex, somewhat pale.

430 RECORDS OF THE S.A: MUSEUM

Venter dark ferruginous.

Structure. Head finely punctate; antennal ratio 7: 22: 17: 20;
rostrum reaching between fore and middle coxae.

Pronotal width; Length, 48:34. Total length: 7 mm.
Distribution; Queensland, Northern Territory.

Australian records: N,W. Australia, Adelaide River, J. J. Walker
(B.M,); Cape York, Coen, 1921-1922, W. McLennan (A.M.),

Dieuches Dohrn 1860
Dieuches Dohrn 1860, Stett. ent. Z. 21: 160.
Dieuches Stal 1872, Ofvers. Vetensk. Akad. Férh,, Stockholm, (7): 58.
Dieuches Stal 1874, K. Vetensk, Akad. Handl., 12(1): 161,
Dieuches Seudder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94 (7); 766.
Abavus Distant 1909, Ann. Mag, nat. Hist., (8)3: 493.
Maxaphanus Distant 1918, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist., (9)2: 265.

HKlongate robust inseets; head and much of pronotum fuscous;
head triangular with antennal tubercles clearly visible from above;
eyes more or less touching anterior margin of pronotum; finely
punctate; first antennal segment surpassing apex of head.

Pronotum with lateral margin carinate, the earina laminate, often
broad and usually upturned; dise usually with a distinct transverse
impression uear middle; distinctly punctate; posterior margin slightly
concave,

Seutellam usually longer than broad; distinetly punctate; with
basal half of dise flat or slightly excavate; often with a vague Y-shaped
elevation.

Legs with fore femora moderately swollen and with subapical
ventral spines; middle femora in male usually with small ventral
spines; tibiae with stout outstanding setae; posterior tarsus with basal
tarsomere 1wice as long as the combined leneth of the two distal
tarsomeres.

Hemelytra distinctly marked with brown or black and ochraceous;
usually with a distinct subapical pale spot to corium; membrane if
with pale spots, then these apical; clavus with more than three rows
of punctnres; corium distinctly punctate. Venter fuscous; often with
postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae, coxal covers and lateral spots
on abdomen, ochraceous. Male genital capsule with a small ventral
tubercle,

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 431

Type species: Dieuches syriacus Dohrn, from Syria and the
Mediterranean area.
Dieuches leucoceras (Walker) was recorded from Murray Island
by Carpenter (1891): 189, ‘one of the specimens from Murray Island
seems to me to be identical with Walker’s type from Ceylon, in the
British Museum,’ but it would appear that this record is based on a
misidentification; we have seen no specimens of this species from this
Tsland.

KEY TO AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA SPECIES OF DIEUCHES

. Large insects; over 10 mm. in length; pro-

notum conspicuously broad and with a
raised central line Bosiealuery Banks
Island . ere

Smaller insects, dintadty uid 9 mm, in
length, if longer then pronotum not con-
spicuously broad and with a raised
central line posteriorly ..

. Dorsum and/or legs with long waiisbandting

hairs .. a. 4

Insects not fhixdyte: without ib ute tatu
ing hairs .

. Inner angle of pals sibugiont Sith of

corium, truneate .. .. ...

Inner angle of pale subapical spot of
corium, acute .......

. Anterior two-thirds of siranatal lateral

carinae white and often translucent, if
black, then only extreme anterior part
so coloured . ign 2

Anterior third to fifth of pronotal fateral
carinae, black .

. Klongate insects, with lage and esitenneie

appearing long and slender; subapical
pale spot of corium constricted in middle
Insects not greatly elongate; legs and
antennae not appearing conspicuously
long and slender; subapical pale spot of
corium not constricted in middle. .. ..

grandicus sp. nov.

consanguineus
Distant

hirsutus sp. noy,

longicollis (Dallas)

432

10.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

. Inner angle of pale subapical spot of

corium, truneate: . ce es he de oe

Inner angle of pale subapical spot of
corium, not truncate .. .. .. .. .. ..

. Pronotum longer than wide, conspicuously

constricted laterally and not conspicu-
ously tapering anteriorly; inner angle of
corium with a pale triangular spot . ..

Combination of characters not as above ..

. Pronotum with posterior lobe without pale

markings or with a central pale streak
and sometimes also one pale spot on
each side of streak, near transverse
impression ..

Pronotum with posterior lobe with a central
pale streak and two pale spots on each
side; anterior margin of corium, seen
from side without fuscous spots in basal
half; sterna V and VI with pale lateral
BPOES copies nah ghey wd eS Retr acer Pele

. Anterior margin of corium, seen from side,

without fuscous spots in basal half;
dorsum of insect chocolate brown .. ..

Anterior margin of corium, seen from side,
with fuscous spots in basal half; dorsum
of insects rather black .. .. .. .. 2...

Anterior margin of corium, seen from side,
with two pale spots in basal half and
apically a large pale area coincident with
pale subapical spot of corium, and the
pale spot laterally on sternum V .. ..

Anterior margin of corium, seen from side,
with three pale spots in basal half and
apically a large pale area coincident with
the pale subapical spot of corium, and
the pale spot laterally on sternum V ..

oceanicus (Distant)

torpidus sp. nov.
8

finitimus Van Duzee

obscurtpes (Walker)

scutellatus Distant

enigmaticus sp. nov.

GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 433

11. Inner angle of pale subapical spot of
corium truncate or acute and continued
to inner angle of corium through a
fainter and generally more ochraceous
spot; pronotal lateral carinae aiient ory,
rather narrow .. .. . : 12

Inner angle of pale ssieribeed abot of
corium not truncate and not continued
to inner angle of corium; pronotal
lateral carinae not much narrower
anberiotle 2. ain oh HE. Bann G8

12. Hemelytra reaching almost to apex of
abdomen .. .. .. notatus (Dallas)

Hemelytra not conahing pikoes to end of
abdomen, but leaving apical segments

of abdomen exposed .. .. .. .. .. .. mudus sp. nov.
13. Terminal sean of antennae completely
black . Cieen rae maculicollis (Walker)
Terminal Secret of datennne with basal
part white... ................ .. distanti Bergroth

Dieuches grandicus sp. nov.
Plate 20, fig. A

Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous
with whole of first segment, apex of second and third, and extreme
base and apical half of fourth ferruginous brown; fourth antennal
segment with an ochraceous basal annulation ; rostrum with first
seement ferruginous brown, second and third rather ochraceous and
fourth ferruginous with brown apex.

Pronotum with lateral carinae in basal third brown black, in
middle ochraceous and in anterior third pale ferruginous; disc dark
ferruginous brown to black with pale markings posteriorly consisting
of a very short median raised longitudinal line and an ochraceous spot
each side situated near transverse impression; anterior margin of
pronotum with two vague pale spots.

Scutellum dark ferruginous brown to black with apex slightly pale
and with two distinct lateral luteo-ochraceous spots.

434 RECORDS OF THE §$.A. MUSEUM

Legs ochraceous with coxae and most of femora dark ferruginous
brown to black; tibiae fuseous; tarsi more or less ferrugino-
ochraceous,

Hemelytra luteo-ochraceous with dark brown to black markings;
clayus except for streak and spots at base, and corium except for
subapical pale spot and four complete or broken streaks in basal half,
dark brown to black; pale subapical spot to corium with inner angle
rather obtuse, basal side slightly concave and apical side convex;
membrane fuseous, the apex slightly pale.

Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Insects not
hireante.

Antennal ratio 20: 44: 40: 40; rostrum reaching posterior coxae.
Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent
anteriorly and concave at level of transverse impression of disc;
pronotal width: length, 60; 57, Hemelytra reaching apex of abdomen.
Fore femora with seven or eight small spines and a single long spine
ventrally in anterior row; middle femora of female with four small
setigerous spines.

Total length female 10.4 mm,

Type: Holotype a female, Moa 1., Torres St. (S.A.M.). Para-
types: 2 females, Moa, Banks I, Torres St., 18 December 1919, W.
MeLennan; 1 female, id., 17 December 1919 (A.M.).

A species easily recognized by its size. Only D. obscuripes
(Walker) is also known from this island and this latter species is
only about 7.5 mm, in length, is much narrower and on the posterior
part of the pronotum, the pale central line is not conspicuously raised,

Dieuches consanguineus Distant 1904
Plate 21, fig, B
Dieuches consanguineus Distant 1904, Ann. Mage. nat, Hist, (7)13: 268,
Head dark ferrnginous brown with clypeus flavescent; antennae
ferrugino-ochraceous with apical part of first and third segments
slightly fuscous; fourth segment with extreme base and apical 2 dark
brown, the rest ochraceous to white; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous.

Pronotum with lateral earinae, except for extreme posterior
corners ochraceous; anterior part of dise dark ferruginous; posterior
part of dise ochraceous with punctures, humeral angles and patches
each side of mid-line, dark ferruginous. There is a very distinct line

GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 435

of transverse punctures just behind collar and a faint longitudinal
keel on both lobes.

Sentellum dark ferruginous brown with apex and two large lateral
irregular spots luteo-ochraceous.

Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical parts of femora dark
brown; apex of tibiae and tarsi usually fuscons.

Hemelytra ochraceous with dark ferruginous-brown markings;
subapical pale spot to corium distinet and with inner angle truncate,
basal side concave, apical side convex; bagal half of anterior margin of
corinm, seen from side, completely pale; much of clavus, apical halt
of corinm and eorium adjacent to claval suture, castaneons; membrane
fuscous with apical pale spot; sterna V, VI and VII with lateral
pale spots. Specimens oceur which have the darker parts of pronotum,
sentellum and hemelytra a deep chocolate with a velvet texture,

Insects distinctly hirsute; dorsum with long upstanding hairs;
femora with long outstanding hairs. Antennal ratio 15; 33: 30: 33;
rostrum reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae;
lateral margins convergent anteriorly and slightly concave at. level
of distinct transverse impression of dise. Hemelytra reaching tip
of abdomen; fore femora with row of 11-12 short spines; middle
femora with three or four short spines in male. Pronofa] width:
length, 45: 35. Total length 6,2-8,.2 mm,

Distribution: Australia.

Australian records: Queensland: Cooktown, 1939 J. L. Mrben
(Prague); 1 female, Almaden, Chillagoe District N.Q,, June-Sept.
1929 W. D. Campbell (A.M.); 1 male, 1 female, Ayr, 25 July 1954
G, Saunders (U.Q.); 1 male, attracted to light, Cairns District A. M.
Lea; Birri, Mornington 1, 8 May 1960, P. Aitken, N. B, Tindale
(S.A.M,); 1 female, Redlynch, 14 Ang. 1938, R. G. Wind (C.A.8,).
Torres Straits: 1 male, Prince of Wales L, 21 Feb, 1989, R. G, Wind
(C.A.S.), Northern Territory: Daly R. (G. G. EB. Sendder, Vaneouver) ;
1 male, Stapleton, G. F. Hill; 1 female, Port Darwin: 3 males, §
females, 6 nymphs, Darwin Botanie Gardens, 6 Jan. 1961 G. F’. Gross;
1 female at light, Mitchell Street, Darwin 5 Jan. 1961. G. I’, Gross
(S.A.M.); 6, Northern Territory Administration Grounds, Darwin, 21
Sept. 1956 L. D. Crawford; 1, Darwin 8 Oct. 1956 L, D. Crawford
(A.N.I.C.).

Similar to D, oceanieuws (Distant) but dorsum and femora with
long outstanding hairs.

436 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dieuches obscuripes (Walker 1872)
Plate 22, fig. D
Rhyparochromus obscuripes Walker 1872, Cat. Het. B.M. 5: 104,

Rhyparochromus obscuripes Carpenter 1891, Proce. R. Dublin Soc,
1891: 139,

Dieuches obscuripes Distant 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 509.

Head dark ferruginous; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apex
of fourth segment dark brown; rostrum ferruginous with tip brown.

Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous in middle and with
extreme anterior and posterior parts fuseous; dise dark ferruginous
with pale markings posteriorly consisting of a short longitudinal
median streak and one pale spot on each side near transverse
impression.

Seutellum dark ferruginous with apex and two lateral spots
ochraceous.

Legs ferruginous brown with base of middle and hind femora
ochraceous.

Hemelytra dark ferruginous with a distinct subapical ochraceous
spot and in basal half, with anterior margin of corium pale and with
three ochraceous spots in transverse series in middle of ecorium;
clavus with a short basal ochraceous streak; subapical pale spot to
corium with inner angle acute, basal side more or less straight and
apical side slightly coneave; basal half of anterior margin of corium,
seen from side, without fuscous spots except for extreme base; apical
margin of corium dark brown especially in anterior half; extreme
apical angle luteous; membrane fuscous with a pale tip.

Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral ochraceous patches.

Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 14: 30: 31: 32; rostrum
reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral
margins slightly convergent anteriorly and slightly concave at level
of transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 37: 33. Fore
fernora with nine small and one large spine ventrally in anterior
row; middle femora of male with about six small spines basally.
Hemelytra reaching tip of abdomen, Total length 7.4 mm.

Distribution: New Guinea, Murray Is,, Banks Is.

Australian records: Moa, Banks Is., Torres St., 18 Dee. 1919
W. MeLennan (A.M.),

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 437

Similar to D. finitimus Van Duzee but with posterior part of
pronotum with different colouration,

There is an Australian series, many specimens of which approxi-
mate the type of Aphanus oceanicus Distant, but which are very
close in certain details to obscuripes. They are very similar in shape
and size and the pronotum is on the whole flatter than in the average
Australian Dieuches. The large apical spot is somewhat truncate
along the inner margin in extreme Northern and North Western
examples (pl. 23, fig, C) but tends to be more rounded on the interior
margin in Central Australian and Western examples (pl. 22, fig. C).
In North Eastern examples, this large spot is narrower and. very like
a New Guinea example of obscuripes in the South Australian Museum.

The South Australian Museum specimen from New (Guinea and
the Banks Island specimens of obacuripes both have the basal half
of the corium almost devoid of prominent pale markings although a
faint pattern appears as a trace and seems to he of the oceanteus
type, Both specimens of obscuripes have only a single pale streak
on the elavus along the corial commissure.

These Australian specimens are being provisionally kept distinet
as the next species, Diewches oceanicus, but it may be that oceanicus
is only a subspecies of obscuripes. All these specimens have two
pale spots on the clavus, the longer along the claval commissure and
ihe shorter along the seutellar margin, and prominent pale markings
in the basal half of the clavus,

Dieuches oceanicus (Distant 1901)
Plate 22, fig. C and plate 238, fig. C.
Aphanus oceanicus Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist, (7)8: 502.
Dieuches oceanicus Scudder, 1962a, Canad, Ent., 94(7)< 767.

Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae dark ferruginous brown
with basal half of second segment ochraceous and fourth segment with
a sub-basal whitish annulation; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous with
apex brown.

Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous and with extreme
posterior part fuscous and extreme anterior slightly ferruginons;
dise dark ferruginous brown with pale markings posteriorly consisting
of a median longitudinal ochraceous streak and two ochraceous spots
on each side near transverse impression,

Sentellum dark brown with an apical and two lateral ochraceous
spots.

438 RECORDS OF THF S.A, MUSEUM

Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical parts of femora dark
brown; posterior tibiae ferruginous brown.

Hemelytra dark ferrnginous brown and ochraceons; corium with
a (istinet pale subapical spot and basal half of corium almost eom-
pletely pale; clavus with two short basal pale streaks; subapical spot
of corium with inner angle truncate; basal side concave and apical
side slightly convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen
from side without fuseous spots; membrane fuseous with pale apex.

Thoracic yenter with coxal covers and posterior margin of meta-
pleurae pale ferruginons; abdominal sterna V, VI and VII with
lateral ochraceons patelics. Sometimes the colour pattern is more
varied than here described with more cream and castaneous colours
in place of the nsual darker eolours.

Inseets not hirsnte; antennal ratio 12; 87: 27: 28; rostrum
reaching middle coxae. Pronetum generally rather flattish and with
broad lateral margins convergent anteriorly and more or less straight ;
dise with distinct transverse impression; pronotal width; length 42: 30.

Wore femora with seven small and one large subapical spine in
antero-yertral row. Hemelytra reaching end of abdomen.

Total length: 7.8-8.5 mm,

Instribution: Australian.

Australian records: Northern Territory: Indinda Well, 3 miles
west of Andado Stn.; Newcastle Waters, 5 May 1929 T. G. Campbell
(A.N.LO,); Darwin, Jan, 1939 M, Kamper (A.M.); Darwin, 30 Jan,
1914 G, FP, Will; Hermannsburg Capt. 8. A. White; Macdonald Downs
(S.A. Mus. Exped. Aug, 1980) (S.A.M.); Mt, Olea, Sept, 1948
Bechervaise (N.M.), Queensland; Mt, Isa, Feb, 1954 Lamberts; Coen,
14-27 May 1951 ©, Oke (N.M.) Bathnrst Head, Jan, 1927 Hale &
Tindale; Stewart R., Jan.-Meb, 1927, Hale & Tindale (S.A.M,); Olsen
Cave, Rockhampton, Oct. 1924, A, Musgrave; Thargomindah, Apr.
141 N. Geary; Clermont, Dr. K, K. Spence (A.M.); Torres St.: Prince
of Wales Is., 21 Nov. 1939 R, G. Wind (C.A.S,). Western Australia
(North): Cossack, J, J, Walker (B.M.); Kimberley Dist., Mjéberg
(Stockholm). Western Australia (Central): Nicol Bay Distriet,
Clement (G. G. E. Scudder, Vanconver); Tambrey Stn., 24-96 July,
1958 F, J. Mitchell; Pilgangoora near Pilbara, 5 May 1953 N. B.
Tindale (S.A.M,); 6, Cocoa Beach, Trimouille Is., Monte Bello Ts., 12
Nov. 1953 T, G, Campbell (A.N.L.C.). South Australia: At light,
Goyder Lagoon Ruins, 28 July 1957 B. Daily; Fowler Bay (S,A.M.).

Plate 22 fig. C shows a dark example, plate 23 fig. C1 a chocolate
coloured specimen from Darwin.

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 439

Dieuches hirsutus sp. nov.
Plate 21, fig. ©
Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae dark ferruginous brown
(colour of terminal segment unknown) ; rostrum ferruginons brown.

Pronotum with lateral ecarinae dark brown anteriorly and
posteriorly and ochraceous in centre; dise dark brown to black with
pale marks posteriorly consisting of an ochraceous central streak and
two pale spots on each side near transverse impression.

Seutellum dark brown to black with apex pale, no pale spots on
dise, Legs with base of femora ochraceous; coxae and most of femora
dark brown to black; tibiae dark ferruginous and tarsi ferrugino-
ochraceous.

Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown to black markings;
clavus dark brown with a pale basal streak; corium dark brown with
a pale subapical spot, three basal pale streaks and a pale central spot;
subapical pale spot with inner angle acute, hasal side concave and apical
side convex: membrane dark brown to black with apical third to half
pale and with a luteous spot near apical angle of corium and a luteous
spot on base of inner eurved vein.

Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots.

Dorsum and legs with long outstanding hairs; antennal ratio
18: 38: 35: ?; third antennal segment thicker than second and both
densely hirsute; rostrum reaching posterior coxae. Pronotum with
broad lateral carinae; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and
concave at level of transverse impression on disc; pronotal width:
leneth, 47; 42. Fore femora with a long subapical ventral spine.

Total length: Female 10,0 mm,

Type: Holotype female, Northern Territory, Darwin G. F. Hill
(S.A.M.).

Paratype; Female, same data (G. G. EH. Scudder, Vancouver).

tn general appearance similar to D. finitimus Van Duzee, but with
distinet upstanding hairs on dorsum and on femora.

Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee 1940
Plate 24, fig. A
Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee 1940, Pan-Pacif. Ent, 16: 184.
Dieuches finitimus Scudder 1958, Nat. Hist. Rennell Is., B.S.I. 2: 138.

440 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Head dark ferruginous brown; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous
with apical part of first three segments ferruginous; fourth antennal
segment with apical half dark brown and basal half luteo-ochraceous:
rostrim ferruginous with apex brown.

Pronotum with lateral carinae pale ochraceous with extreme
anterior and posterior parts brown to black; dise dark ferruginous
brown to black with pale markings on posterior lobe eonsisting of a
central longitudinal ochraceons streak and two ochraceous spots, on
each side of streak near transvérse impression.

Seutellium dark ferruginous brown to black with apical and two
lateral lnteo-ochraceous spots.

Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical half of femora dark brown;
apical half of fore tibiae and most of middle and hind tibiae dark
brown; tarsi ferrugino-ochraceous.

Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown markings; apical two-
thirds of clavus, most of apieal half of corinm and basal half of corium
partially, dark brown; corium with a distinct transversely elongate
subapical pale spot, with inner angle somewhat acute, basal side
slightly concave and apical side convex; basal half of anterior margin
on corium seen from side, without fuseous spots and with apex
slightly pale.

Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous;
abdominal sterna V, VI and VII with lateral pale spots.

Insects not greatly hirsute; antennal ratio 13: 28: 28: 30; rostrum
reaching middle eoxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral
margins convergent anteriorly and more or less straight; dise with a
distinct transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 38: 30,
Hemelytra almost reaching apex of abdomen,

Total length: 7.4 myn.

Distribution; Solomon Is,, New Guinea, New Britain, and
Australia,

Australian records: Queensland: Alice River, Mjoberg (Stock-
holm); 1 male, Horn Is., 2 April 1940 R, G. Wind. Torres St.: 3
males, 1 female, Prince of Wales Is.,.3 Nov, 1939 R. G. Wind; 3 males,
same data but 28 Nov. 1939 (C.A.8.), The figure is based on a series
from Misima Island, Louisiade Archipelago, collected by the Rev.
If, K, Bartlett and in the S. A, Museum,

Somewhat similar to D. obscuripes (Walker), but with two pale
spots on each side of pale median streak on posterior lobe of
pronotum, instead of just one on each side, as in obscuripes.

GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI dal

Dieuches torpidus sp. nov.
Plate 24, fig. B

Head dark brown with anterior part rather ferruginons; antennae
ferruginous with fourth segment basally ochraceous and apically dark
brown; rostrum ferrugino-ochraeceous with first segment and apical
segment dark brown,

Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous, narrowly margined
with black and posteriorly fuscous; dise dark brown with ferrugino-
ochraceous markings posteriorly consisting of a short median longi-
tudinal streak and two spots on each side near transverse impression.

Sentellum dark brown with apex and two obscure lateral spots,
ferrugino-ochraceous,

Legs ferruginous brown with base of middle and hind femora and
middle and hind trochanters, ochraceous.

Hemelytra dark brown and Inteo-ochraceous; corium with a
subapical pale L-shaped spot and a C-shaped mark proximally; inner
angle of corium with a pale triangular spot; basal half of corium with
anterior margin ochraceous and margined with dark brown, with a
longitudinal streak and two spots on each side, in middle, and with
two or three pale spots along claval suture; clavus with a pale streak
along basal party of suture margin and with an obscure ferruginous
spot basally; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side,
with a median fuscous spot; membrane fuscous and with an obseure
basal pale area,

Venter with coxal covers and postero-dorsal corner of meta-
pleurae pale ferrnginous; abdominal sterna IV, V, VI with distinet
lateral ochraceous patches and sternum VII with indistinct pale spots
laterally. Dorsum of insect not hirsute; antennal ratio 20-23; 3438:
35-87: 35-40, with third segment thicker than fourth and densely
covered with short semi-erect hairs; rostrum reaching middle coxae.
Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral margins not convergent
anteriorly, but deeply coneave at level of transverse impression on
dise; pronotal width: pronotal length, 38-46; 39-438, that is sometimes
longer than broad. The longest ratio is 38-43 (in the type), the widest
ratio is 46:40; these differences are due to differences in development
of the wings. Seutellum with basal half deeply excavate, Fore
femora with about eight small spines, Hemelytra with much of basal
area and a subapical spot appearing ‘‘frosted’’; membrane reaching
middle of tergum VII but not beyond.

Total length: 8.5 mm.

442 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Type: Holotype male, New Guinea, Madang, W. Lohe (S.A.M.).
Allotype female, Finschhafen, Apkr. 1944 B. 8. Ross, Paratypes: 2
males, Finschhafen, Apr. 1944; 1 male, 1 female, same loc., 20 Apr.
1944; 2 females, same loc., 21 Apr. 1944; 1 male, same loc. 15 May
1944, all E. S. Ross (C.A.8.).

This species differs from obscuripes and all other specimens by
the shape of the pronotum and the colour of the hemelytra,

Dieuches scutellatus Distant 1904
Plate 24, fig, C
Dieuches scutellatus Distant 1904, Ann. Mag, nat. Hist. (7)13: 268,

Head black; antennae brown to black with a distinet whitish sub-
basal annulation to terminal segment; rostrum ferruginous brown with
black apex,

Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous and with extreme
posterior part black and anterior part obscurely fuscous; dise black
with ferrugino-ochraceous markings posteriorly consisting of a short
median longitudinal streak and one spot on each side near transverse
impression.

Seutellam black with apex ochraceous and with two lateral
ferrugino-ochraceous spots.

Legs brown to black with basal part of middle and hind femora
ochraceous.

Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown to black; corium with a
distinct subapical pale spot and in basal half with two pale spots on
anterior margin and two pale spots near claval suture; elaviis with
two short pale streaks; subapical pale spot of corium with inner angle
somewhat acute and with both basal and apical margins conyex; basal
half of anterior margin of corium, seen [rom side, with a median
fuscous spot and base black; membrane fuscous with a pale apex,

Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous;
abdominal sternum V with distinct lateral ochraceous patch and
sternum VI sometimes with an obseure ferrugino-ochraceous small
spot laterally.

Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 11: 25; 25: 28; rostrum
reaching middle coxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae; lateral
margins convergent anteriorly and concave at level with transverse
impression of disc: pronotal width: pronotal length, 42: 32. Fore

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 443

femora with four or five short spines in anterior row. Hemelytra just
reaching apex of abdomen,

Total length: 7.3 mm.

Distribution; Australian and possibly New Guinea,

Australian records; North-western Australia :—Derby, Kimberley
District and Noonkanbah, Mjéberg (Stockholm); Flora Valley Stn.,
12 Oct, 1953 N, B. Tindale (G. G. E. Seudder, Vancouver). Onslow,
Nov. 1955 KE. T. Smith; North-west Australia, from C. French Jn.
Collection (N.M.), Central Western Australia: 3, Pilgangoora, 5, 6
& 9 May 1953 N. B. Tindale; Tambrey, 24-26 July 1958, I’, J. Mitchell
(S.A.M.) Tambrey Stn, 28 July 1958 R. P. MeMillan (W.A.M.),
Northern Territory: 2, Katherine, 26 Sept, 1953, G. F. Gross; 2,
Tennants Ck. J. K. Field; Finke R,, MacDonnell Ranges, Capt. 8. A.
White; Macdonald Downs, §.A. Museum Exped. Aug. 1930; Taast
Bluff Stn., 2,000 feet, 62° F., at mercury vapour light, N. B. Tindale
(S.A.M.), Queensland: Laura and Alice River, Mjéberg (Stockholm),
Townsville Distr. (S.A.M.); 2, Almaden, Chillagoe, 10 Oct. & Oet-Nov.
1927, W. D. Campbell (A.M.), South Australia: Madigan Gulf, L.
Eyre, 5 Nov, 1955, at light, HK. T. Giles (G. G. BH, Sendder, Vancouver),

Similar to D. distanti Bergroth, but with anterior part of lateral
pronotal carinae pale instead of broadly black anteriorly. A very
variable species; the hind lobe dise of the pronotum is generally
black or concolorous with the dise of the fore lobe. However examples
oceur with the fore lobe black on the dise and the hind lobe chocolate.
Several examples also have three colours on the corium, black or deep
brown, ochraceous and luteous; such an example is figured,

Dieuches enigmaticus sp. nov.
Plate 21, fig. D

Head brown-black; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with apical
part of segments fuscous, the fourth segment quite brown with a basal
pale annulation; rostrum with basal segment brown, other segments
ferrngino-ochraceous.

Pronotum with lateral carinae pale except for extreme posterior
corner; dise brown-black with three spots posteriorly near transverse
impression,

Scutellum brown-black with an apical and two lateral pale spots.

Legs ochraceous with apical part brown-black and with a distinct
pale subapical spot; subapical spot to corium with inner angle rather

444 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

obtuse and sides convex; basal half on anterior margin of corium seen
from side, with three or four fuscous spots; membrane fuscous with
tip pale.

Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots. Fore femora
and midfemora in male with a row of short spines beneath, hind
femora with several fine spines.

Anterior lobe of pronotum, scutellum, and a long patch on head
between eyes, finely punctate.

Total length: 7-8 mm,

Type: Northern Australia, Marrakai Stn,, 28-31 July 1929
I. M. Mackeras & T. G. Campbell (A.N_LC.). Paratypes: 1 female,
Western Australia, Wyndham, 4 Oct. 1929 T. G. Campbell; 1 female,
Western Australia, Wyndham, 16-28 Feb. 1931 H, J. Willings; 1 male,
Monte Bello Is., Trimonille Is., Cocoa Beach, 10 Nov. 1953 T. G.
Campbell (A.N.1.C.),

Similar to D. scutellatus Distant, but slightly smaller and with
basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen from side, with more
than a single fuscous spot.

Dieuches distanti Bergroth 1916
Plate 22, fig. B
Dieuches distanti Bergroth 1916, Proc. Roy. Soc, Vict. (n.s.) 29: 10.

Head dark brown to black; antennae dark ferruginous to brown,
the fourth segment with a basal pale annulation; rostrum ferruginous-
ochraceous with apex brown,

Pronotum with lateral carinae pale only in middle; dise dark
brown to black, the posterior part with a short median pale longi-
tudinal streak and usually one pale spot on each side.

Seutellum dark brown to black; sometimes with apical and lateral
pale spots.

Legs ochraceous with coxae and apical part of femora dark brown
to black; tibiae fuscous; apex of tarsi brown.

Hemelytra ochraceous with apical half of clavus and corium dark
brown to black, the latter with a distinet pale subapical spot; subapical
pale spot of corium with inner angle obtuse, and with both basal and
apical sides convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen in
side view, with a single fuscous spot; membrane fuscous with an
apical pale spot.

GROSS inp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 445

Abdominal sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots.

Insects not distinctly hirsute; antennal ratio 14: 30: 32; 33;
rostrum reaching middle eoxae. Pronotum with broad lateral carinae;
lateral margins conyergent anteriorly and more or less straight; dise
with transverse impression; pronotal width: length, 43: 82, Fore
femora with seven to nine short spines in anterior row; middle femora
in male with six or seven spines, the basal four longer than apical
ones, Hemelytra just reaching tip of abdomen.

Distribution: Northern Australia.

Australian records: Western Australia:—Pilgangoora Well, 8
June 1953 N. B. Tindale (G. G. E. Scudder, Vancouver). Pilgangoora,
5 Apr, 1953 N, B. Tindale; Meekathara-Billilina Pool, Canning Stock
Route Expedition, Apr. 1930-Aug, 1931 (S.A.M.), Northern Terti-
tory; Areyonga, 1958 A. G. Wooleock; Finke Crossing, 1933, J. W.
Rose (S.A.M.). Queensland: Mt. Isa, Jan. 1954 Lamberts (N.M.);
Clermont, Dr. KK. K. Spenee (A.M.),

In general appearance similar to D. oceanicus (Distant) but with
anterior part of pronotal carinae distinctly and broadly fuscous
instead of white.

Dieuches maculicollis (Walker 1872)
Plate 22, fig. A

Rhyparochromus maculicollis Walker 1872, Cat. Het. B.M. 5: 111,
Dieuches atricornis Stil 1874, K. svenska, Vetensk. Akad. Hand.

12(1): 161.
Dieuches maculicollis Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 508.
Dieuches maculicollis Seudder 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7) : 767.

Head, rostrum and antennae, including fourth antennal segment,
dark brown to black.

Pronotum with lateral carinae dark brown to black on anterior
and posterior thirds and ochraceous in middle; disc dark brown to
black with posterior pale markings consisting of a short median
longitudinal streak and two ochraceous spots on each side near
transverse impression.

Seutellum dark brown to black with apical angle ochraceous and
with two lateral pale spots.

Legs dark brown to black with base of femora and trochanters of
second and third pairs of legs only ochraceous.

446 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown or black; clavus dark with
a basal pale streak; corium with a subapical pale spot and basal half
with anterior margin pale and with four or five pale spots; subapical
pale spot of corium with inner angle more or less acute and basal and
apical sides convex; basal half of anterior margin of corium, seen
from side, without fuscous spots; membrane opaque yellowish with
basal and apical margins broadly dark brown,

Venter with postero-dorsal corner of metapleurae ochraceous;
abdominal sternum V laterally with distinct ochraceous spot and
sternum VI laterally with obscure small ferruginous spots.

Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 19; 25: 27: 30; rostrum
reaching middle coxae, Pronotum with broad lateral earinae; lateral
margins hardly convergent anteriorly and more or less straight;
pronotal width; length 33: 29; dise with distinct transverse impression
and with anterior lobe distinctly convex, Fore femora with five or
six small spines and one or two large subapical spines, Hemelytra
alinost reaching apex of abdomen,

Total length: 6.6 min,
Distribution; Anstralia,

Australian records: Queensland:—1 female, Nangram Lagoon,
12m. H & 3 m, N of Condamine, 16 Ang, 1954 R. A. Stirton (C.A.8.);
2 males, Somerset Dam, 24 Oct. 1953 T.E.W.; Deception Bay,
25 March 1954 Y. P, Beri; Brisbane, Feb, 1954 N. J. Thompsou (U.Q.) 5
Cunnamulla, 1, 17 Dee. 1940, 2, Oct. 1941, 1, Nov. 1941 N. Geary (A.M.),
New South Wales; Sydney, Apr, 1931 K, K. Spence; Como, Dee. 1951
J, Freeman (A.M.), Anstralian Capital Territory: Molongolo, 4
Apr, 1930 L. Graham (A.N.LC.). Vietoria: Mildura, Feb, 1955
C. Flynn (U.Q.), 5, Kerang, 28-30 Apr. 1946 R.E.T.; Redeliffs,
presented 18 Apr. 1925 A, 8S, Cndmill (N.M.). South Australia:
Adelaide distr., Mar, 1920 W. E. Hodson; Prospect, 5 Aug. 1954 G. FB,
Gross (G. G. E. Sendder, Vancouver); 2, same data; Prospect, 22
Mar, 1952 G. F. Gross; Prospect, 6 Sept, 1952 G. F, Gross; 7, Highgate,
23 July 1959 KE. C. Lindsay; Wild Horse Plains 10-16 Apr. 1956
C, J, Martin; Upper Arcoona Ck., Gammon Ranges, 16 Sept, 1956
G. F. Gross; Italowie Gorge, 30 Oct, 1955 EK. T. Giles; no locality
Mar, 1921 (S.A.M,). At roots of vine, Barossa Valley, 2 Apr, 1949
(W.A.B.1).

A species easily recognized by the completcly black terminal
segment to the antennae and black bases of the fore femora.

GROSS aNb SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 447

Dieuches notatus (Dallas 1852)
Plate 23, fig. A
Rhyparochromus notatus Dallas 1852, List. Hem. B.M. 2: 569.
Dieuches notatus Stal 1874, K, svenska Vetensk, Akad, Handl, 12(1):

161.

Head dark brown to black with two small ferruginous spots on
vertex on level with anterior margin of eyes; antennae dark brown to
black with a basal ochraceous annulation to fourth segment; rostrum
ferruginous to dark brown.

Pronotum with lateral margin dark brown to black in anterior
and posterior thirds aud ochraceous in middle; dise on anterior half
black; posterior half of dise ochraceous with fuseous punctures, with
humeral angles black and with four longitudinal fuscous streaks.

Scutellum black with apex ochraceous and with two lateral
ferrugino-ochiraceous spots.

Legs ochraceous with coxae and most of femora dark brown to
black; fore and middle tibiae with apex and base fuseous, the hind
tibiae more or less completely ferruginous to dark brown; tarsi with
apical part of tarsomeres fuscous, the posterior tarsi almost com-
pletely dark ferruginous.

Hemelytra ochraceous with ferruginous and dark brown to black
markings; clayus with punetures and irregular intervening areas
ferrnginous, the extreme base black; eorium with a distinct pale sub-
apical spot, apieal margins and an almost complete transverse band,
black; basal half of corium with punctures and streaks dark
ferruginous brown; subapical pale spot to eorimm if continued to
iijer angle of eorium then with inner angle of spot aeute, if not
continued to inner angle of ecorium then with inner angle of spot
truneate; basal margin of spot slightly concave, the apical margin
straight; basal half of anterior margin of corinm, seen from side,
without fuscous spots; membrane completely fusecous,

Abdominal sterna V, VI, and VIL with lateral pale spots.

Insects not hirsute; antennal ratio 15: 27: 27: 34; rostrum
reaching middle ecoxae, Pronotum with lateral carinae very narrow
towards anterior; lateral margins strongly convergent anteriorly and
sligltly concave at level of transverse impression of disc; pronotal
width: length 88:33. Fore femora with about six small and one large
ventral spine. Hemelytra almost but not quite reaching apex of
abdomen.

448 RECORDS OF THF S.A. MUSEUM

Total length: 6.9-8 mm.

Distribution: Australia, Tasmania, Lord Howe Island, and New
Zealand,

Australian records: Queensland:—13, Brisbane, Mar, 1957 J. H.
Martin; same loc, 10 Feb. 1951 M. Carpenter; same lue,, 8 June 1951
J. Denmead; same loc,, Ang. 1955 N. J. Thompson; same loe,, 3 Mar,
1956 8. Sekon; Lawes, 20 Feb, 1956 W, F. William; 'ambo, 16 Ang.
1955 B, R. Grant; Mbore, Jan. 1951 Lipsett; Beaudesert, 5 Jan, 1954
R, EH. Harrison; Stanthorpe, 1 June 1956 J, Bonner (U,Q.); same loe.;
Dalby, Mrs. F, H, Wobbler; Mt, Tambourine, A. M. Lea; Cunnamulla,
H, Hardeastle (S.A.M.); same loc., Oet. 1941 N. Geary; Miles, 10 Jan,
1939 N. Geary; Olsen's Caves, Rockhampton, Oct. 1924 A. Musgrave;
Rockhampton, Oct, 1926 A, Musgrave; Warwick, Sept. 1947 Mrs.
Miller, (A,M.) 1 male, 5 females, Roma, 5 Ang, 1954 R. A, Stirton;
1 male, Taloona Stn., 48 miles north of Roma, 6 Aug. 1954 R. A.
Stirton (C.A.8.), New South Wales: Ganowindra 7 Jan. 1955 F. EB,
Wilson (S.A-M.) Caldwell, 30 Dee. 1951, V. Robb; Deniliquin, 1914
B, Reeves (N.M.) 5, Bombala, 4 Mar. 1931 Rev. A. J. Barret; Bogan
River, Sept. 1931 J. Armstrong; same loc, & collector, no date; Nyngan
7 Apr. 1981 J. Armstrong; Hornsby, G. Gibbons; Sydney, 24 May
1925 W. W, Froggatt (A.M.); Sydney, ridge between Mossman’s Bay
and Middle Harbour J, Langhans (G. G. E. Sendder, Vaneouver) ;
4, Gunnedah, 23 Aug. 1950 A. Dyce; 2, Pilliga, 1925 W. W. Froggatt;
5, Forbes, 20 May 1925 and 24 May 1925 W. W. Froggatt; Tweed R.,
17 July 1904 W. W. Froggatt; Coolibah, 20 Oct 1905 W. W, Frogeatt;
ur, Bourke, 26 Oct. 1949 8. J. Paramanov (A.N.LC.). Australian
Capital Territory; 3, Canberra, Jan. & May 1930 J. Evans (A.N.I.C.).
Victoria: Bamawn, W. F. Hill (S.A.M,) 10, Studley Park, 2 Aug.
1923 J. EH. Dixon; 3, Kerang, 2 May, 25 Ang., 8 Oct, 1946 R. B. Tillyard;
Redeliffs, 18 June 1925 A. S. Cudmore; Fern Tree Gully, J, E, Dixon;
loc.?; (N.M,) Melbourne (Stockholm). Tasmania; 3 (one a nymph),
E. point of Babel J., 16 Mar. 1960 T, G. Campbell (A.N,1C.);
Launceston (S.A.M.). South Australia: 2, Whyalla, 16 & 23 Ang.
1947 DS. (N.M.); Underdale, 18 Jan. 1959 G, PF, Gross (G. G. E.
Scudder, Vancouver) ; 2, same loc & collector, 1 & 21 Jan. 1959; Fulham
Gardens, Jan. 1959 G. F. Gross; ‘*Kurlge’’, Blackwood, 850ft., at
merenry vapour light, 84° I, 27 Feb. 1957 N. B, Tindale: Blackwood,
13 Dec, 1959 M. Kenny; Mylor, 5 May 1948 G. F, Gross; 2, Coomandook,
4 June 1948 G, F, Gross; 2, Maitland, 1M. R. Waite; Curramulka, 3
Dee. 1954, G, F, Gross; Kielpa, Aug. 1958, P. W, Greeufield; Nth, End,

GROSS ANp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 449

Pt. Lincoln, 20 Nov. 1957 M. Garrick (5.A.M.). Western Australia:
2, Warren River, W. D. Dodd (8.A.M.); Lord Howe I., 2, A, M. Lea
(S.A.M.).

whe species is also represented by a series of six specimens from
New Zealand collected amongst litter on the ground at P.D.P,
Owairaka, Anckland, 19 May 1960 Mrs, B. M. May (Plant Diseases
Division, D.S.T.RB.),

A distinet species recognized by the slightly brachypterous
condition, the very narrow pronotal earinae, usually pale truncate
inner angle to spot on corium subapically, and the two ferruginous
spots on vertex.

Dieuches nudus sp. nov.
Plate 23, fig. B

Similar to D. notatus (Dallas) but with head lacking the pale
spots; with a narrower pale annulation to fourth antennal segment;
with anteunal ratio 18: 35: 32: 38; pronotal lateral carinae broad
anteriorly and not distinctly narrowed; lateral margins of pronotum
not distinctly convergent anteriorly and more or less straight;
posterior half of pronotal dise more or less completely pale and
without fuscous markings except on humeral angles; corium without
distinet fuscous markings except in apical half; inner angle of subapical
pale spot to corium always truncate; hemelytra reaching only onto
fergum VI and not beyond; fore femora in both sexes with two
prominent spines, one near apex, and a series of smaller spines.
Venter with coxal covers and posterior margin of metapleurae pale.

Total length: Male 7.7 mm., female 8.5 mm,

Loe. Holotype male, Whittata, Andamooka Ranges, South Aus-
tralia, 22 Aug, 1948 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.). Allotype female, Whyalla,
South Australia, 7 Sept. 1947 D.S. (N.M.). Paratypes: South Aus-
tralia:—2 females, Whittata, Andamooka Ranges, 20 Aug. 1948 G. F.
Gross; 1 female, same loc. 22 Aug, 1948 G. F, Gross; 1 male,
Andamooka Ranges, Aug.-Sept. 1948 G. F. Gross; Leigh Ck., (S.A.M.)
4 males, 3 females, Ooldea, July 1921 J, A, Kershaw (N.M.) 1 male,
2 females, same data (G. G. BE. Seudder, Vancouver). Vietoria: 1
male, 2 females, Kewell, Nov, 1892 (N.M.), Western Australia: 2
males, Clampton 46—1922 & 1923 (W.A.M.). Northern Territory:
Double Punch Bowl, Henbury, 15 Oct. 1953 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.).

450 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dieuches longicollis (Dallas 1852) comb. nov.
Rhyparochromus longicollis Dallas 1852, List, Hem. B.M. 2; 570.
Plate 19, figs. B, C

The badly damaged type of this species is said to come from
Australia but we have seen no other specimens from here. In the
Paris Museum is a female specimen purported fo be the same species
from Sumatra (Padang), and in the South Australian Museum is a
male from Timor which appears to have the necessary characteristics
ol the species, but is at first sight rather different in appearance to
the Sumatran specimen.

A close comprison of the basic elements of the colour pattern
of the Sumatran and the Timor examples suggests that the two may
be the same species. A comparison of various dimensions in com-
parison to one measurement (the total length) adjusted to the same
value (1,000) gives a close correlation, except that the Timor example
has a much shorter rostrum; we are of the opinion that these are
the same species. Mr. R. Izzard of the British Museum kindly
supplied a similar set of measurements from the head and thorax of
the type (all that remains) in the British Museum. These measure-
ments do not agree as closely, especially in that the thorax is longer
than wide, whereas in the other two it is wider than long. Neverthe-
less as the one species appears to oeeur with fair differences from
opposite ends of the Indonesian Archipelago it seems reasonable that
an Australian race of the same species would be more divergent.
The Sumatran and Timor examples are therefore considered to be
probably races of the Australian longicollis and both are figured
(Timor plate 19 fig. B; Sumatra plate 19 fig. C).

The actual measurements considered in the comparison were -—

Example Sumatra Timor Tyne
Measurement (Australia)

Length Antennal Segment T..., , L:30mm, 01mm. missing
Length Antennal Segment If ., , , 2-38mm. 163mm. missing:
Length Antennal Segment IIL... 2:19mm. 163mm. Missing
Length Antennal Segment I'V..., missing 2-38mm. missing:
Length Rostral Segment [.... |, 123mm. 0-63mm. 140mm,
Length Rostral Segment IT .,.., 1-3)mm. 0-8Imm. 1-87mm.
Length Rostral Segment LIT ..., 119mm. 0-69mm, ‘| 2:13mm.
Length Rostral Segment IV ..... 0-68mm. 034mm.

Length of head ....,,...022.455 1-30mm. 1-l6mm, 1-73mm.,
Width of head across eyes .... 1-30nmm, 119mm. 1-60mm.
Length of Pronotum.....,,..... 1-88mm, 163mm. 2-93mm.
Width of Pronotum ..,.. thedees 2:25mm., 1-84mm. 280mm.
Total Length ...........-....-- 9:18mm. 7-36mm, app. 10-5mm. (Cale,

from Dallas’ cited
length)

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 451

The adjusted measurements for closer comparison are :—

Example Sumatra Timor Type
Factor Ryepiece Byepiece Tzzard's
Divisions Divisions Eyepiece Divisions
KO734 0-63 x 1-05
Measurement
Length Antennal Segment I ...:, 142 129 missing
Length Antennal Segment IT .... 260 230 missing
Length Antennal Segment TIT ... 240 230 missing
Length Antennal Segment [V.... missing 302 missing
Length Rostral SegmeniT,...... 132 90" 133
Length Rostral Segment If ..... 143 103* 178
Length Rostral Segment [It .... 128 s7* 203
Length Rostral Segment IV ...., 68 41*
Length of head .......+5 bed anbs 142 148 165
Width of head across eyes 64-5) 142 150 1h2
Longth of pronotum ......-.--- 202 206 279*
Width of pronotum ......------ 243 233 269*
Total Length .....- 1,000 1,000 1,000

Measurements which are noticeably divergent from the other two are marked *.

The description of the species given here is based on the Sumatran
and Timor examples.

Head black; antennae black with an ochraceous sub-basal
annulation to fourth segment; rostrum brown to black with second
segment ochraceous.

Pronotum with lateral carinae ochraceous; dise black with two
luteous spots on anterior margin or absent. (Timor example) and
posterior part with luteous or ochraceous markings consisting of a
pale spot on transverse impression laterally, a median longitudinal
narrow streak and a pale streak on each side, sometimes divided into
anterior and posterior spots.

Seutellum black with apex luteous and with two lateral Inteous or
ferrugino-ochraceons spots.

Legs ferrugino-ochraceous with base of femora and trochanters
ochraceous; apical part of femora dark brown to black; base and apex
of tibiae fuscous.

Hemelytra ochraceous and dark brown to black; clavus fuscons
with scutellar and commissure margins narrowly pale and with a pale
streak emitted from base; corium with most of anterior margin pale
and with a pale subapical spot, the latter constricted in middle; base
of corium with a long streak and a spot. near claval suture, the streak
often incomplete; another streak between this and the luteous exterior
margin with a spot on either side behind level of apex of scutellum,

452 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

the outer spot continuous with the pale costal margin. Membrane
fuseous and without a pale apical spot,

Venter with lateral parts of sterna V to VII predominantly and
narrowly pale,

Dorsum of insect non-hirsnte; elongate insect with relatively
long legs and antennae; rostrum reaching to or almost to hind coxae.
Pronotum appearing rather elongate, lateral carinae broad and
distinct; lateral margins convergent anteriorly and slightly concave;
dise with distinet, transverse impression behind middle, Fore femora
(female) with about eight small and a large subapical spine ventrally
in anterior row; middle femora with five or six small spines.
Uemelytra reaching to, but not beyond middle of tergum VII,

Total length: 7,9-10.5 min.
Distribution; Sumatra, Timor and Australia.

Specimens seen; 1 fomale Sumatra, Padang (Paris Museum);
1 male Uato Lari, Portuguese Timor, 19 May 1959 [. B. Freytag
(S.A.M.).

This species is easily recognized by relatively long legs, antennae
and general appearance and by the constricted pale subapical spot to
the corium. The species is rather similar to Narbo biplagiatus
(Walker), but may be distinguished by having distinct laminate lateral
earinae to the pronotum.

Elasmolomus Sti] 1872
Elasmolomus Stil 1872, Ofvers. Vetensk, Akad. Férh. 1872 (7): 58.
Klasmolomus Stal 1874, K. svenska Vetensk, Akad. Handl. 12(1): 160,
Aphanus Barber 1958 (nee LaPorte), Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 215.

Elongate oval inseets; head triangular with antennal tubercles
visible from above; eyes more or less in contact with anterior margin
of pronotum; finely punctate; antennae with first segment exceeding
apex of head.

Pronotum wider than long with anterior half of dise dark brown
or black and posterior half pale with fuscous punctures; dise some-
times with a median transverse impression, but lateral margin of
pronotum with a distinct larninate carina and gently convex through-
out; posterior margin slightly concave; distinctly punctate with
punctures on anterior half of disc smaller than those on posterior part.

GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 453

Sentellum longer than wide; dark brown with an apical V-shaped
pale mark; distinctly punctate; basal half of disc shallowly excavate.

Legs with fore femora moderately swollen and with a few small
ventral well spaced spines; tibiae with distinct outstanding stout
setae; posterior tasi with basal tarsomere more than twice combined
length of the two distal tarsomeres.

Hemelytra pale with brown mottling and punctures, the anterior
margin with a distinct fuscous bar in apical half and with apical angle
fuscons; clavus with more than three rows of punctures; corium rather
densely punctate; apex of membrane just reaching or almost reaching
tip of abdomen,

Venter dark brown with coxal covers and postero-dorsal corner of
metapleurae pale; sterna laterally usually with pale spots.

Type species: Cimex sordidus Fabricius 1787.

Key to Australian species of Elasmolomus.
1. Over 6.5 mm.; pronotal dise with distinet
transverse impression .. .. ..

vy we sordidus (Fab.)
Under 6.5 mm.; pronotal dise without a distinet

transverse impression .. .- --:- ss +. e205 2
2. General colour brown or ferruginous, 6-6.5 mm.
Toner. ns te! (3. Bn papuanus (Dist.)

General colour black, 5.5-6 mm. long .. .. .. v-album (Stal)

Elasmolomus sordidus (Fab. 1787)
Plate 21, fig. A
Cimex sordidus Fabricius 1787, Mant. 2: 302.
Lygaeus sordidus Fabricius 1794, Ent. Syst. 4: 164.
Lygaeus sordidus Fabricius 1803, Syst. Rhynch.: 231.
Rhyparochromus sordidus Dallas 1852, List. Hem. B.M. 2: 566.
Beosus sordidus Stal 1868, Hem. Fabr. 1: 78.
Pachymerus (Elasmolomus) sordidus Stal 1874, K. Vet. Akad. Handl.
12(1); 161.

Aphanus sordidus Distant 1903, Faun, Brit. Ind. Rhyneh. 2: 79.
Aphanus littoralis Distant 1918, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)2: 262.
Aphanus sordidus Hoffmann 1932, Lingnan J. Sci. 11(1): 130.
Aphanus littoralis Corby 1947, Bull. ent. Res. 37: 611.

454 RECORDS OF THE 5.A, MUSEUM

Aphanus littoralis Lindherg 1958, Comment, biol. Helsingf. 19(1): 66.
Aphaaus sordidus Barber 1958, Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 216.

Head dark brown; antennae ochraceous with a few spots at apex
of first segment, apical parts of second and third, and apical half of
fourth, dark brown; rostrum ferrugino-ochraceous with apex dark
brown,

Pronotum ochraceous with anterior half of dise and punctures,
fark brown; luteral carinae and posterior part of pronotum
ochraceous, the extreme posterior part ol carinae fuseous, and the
anterior part of carinae also sometimes fuscous.

Sentellum dark brown with apical half with a more or less distinct
broad ochraceous V-shaped area and with fuseous punctures.

Legs ochraceous with apical half to third with two fuscous annula-
tions, these sometimes united; apex of tibiae and tarsi frequently
fuscous. Hemelytra, like posterior part of pronotum, ochraceous
with fuscous punctures and with odd and irregular brown maculae;
membrane with brownish maculae and with tip rather pale.

Antennal ratio 15; 31: 30: 31; rostrum reaching middle coxae.
Fore femora ventrally with an anterior and posterior row of five or
six small spines; fore tibiae of male with two small blunt projections
on apical half, Pronotal width: length, 50; 38; dise of pronotum
with a distinct transverse impression.

Total length: 7.7-9.2 mm.

Distribution: Throughout the tropical regions of the Bastern
Hemisphere, Specimens seen from Cape Verde Is., Senegal, Guinea,
Rodriquez Is., Nigeria, Blue Nile, Sudan, Tanganyika, 8. India, Indo-
China, Laos, Bengal, Burma, Assam, Ceylon, Hong Kong, China,
Malay Archipelago, Philippine Is., Okinawa, 8. Mariana Ts., Sumatra,
Molnecas, N. Australia.

Australian records: Northern Territory:—13, C.8.1.R.0. Experi-
mental Station, Katherine, Mar, 1951 W. Arndt; 2, Katherine, 18
Apr. 1956 L. D, Crawford; 4, Berrimah, N.T., 80 Aug. 1956 L. D.
Crawford; 1, N.T.A. grounds, Darwin, 29 Sept. 1956 Th. D. Crawford
(A.N.LC.); Darwin Botanic Gdns., 6 Jan, 1961 G. F. Gross (S.A.M.),
The Waite Agricultural Research Institute in Adelaide is now main-
taining an experimental colony of this species originating from a
series from Katherine, N.T., taken 16 July 1960, collected by P. W. M.

Our friend and colleague Mr. L. D. Crawford kindly passed on
the following notes and extracts from index cards on the habits of

GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 455

this bug kept while working as an entomologist with the Northern
Territory Administration. We quote—

““Prawur Trasw Buas’’, From Annual Report—Entomologist, N.T.A.,
L July 1955-80 June 1956.

“This loeal species is universally present wherever peanuts
and other oil crops are grown and stored on Northern Territory
farms, and it is quite obvious that, left unchecked, as is usually
the ease, they cause serious losses in oil content, and adversely
affect the germination. These bugs are able to extract all the
oil out of unshelled peanuts, and have also been observed
(feeding on sunflower seeds and even sorghum grain. It would
seem that the use of control measures should be considered for
all oil erops, as these bugs appear to be equally at home out in
the field under plants or in storage sheds, where they feed on
the bagged peanuts at night time.

‘““Gammexane dust has been found to control them, but,
owing to the risk of tainting, lindane dust would be preferable.
The bugs have also been observed in and under matured bnt
inpicked Jettuees and Chinese cabbage at the Berrimah Farm.
Lygacid bugs (Aphanus spp.) with similar habits have been
observed from Nigeria, where they eanse poor germination, loss
of oil content, and make the remaining oi] in the peanuts
rancid’,

From Monthly Report, April 1956. (Visit to Katherine.)

‘*Peanut Storage. A number of bags of peanuts kept in
the one place for two years in a shed at the N.T.A. Farm were
crawling with peanut trash bugs, which were also present on
the walls of the shed and the surrounding grass. Most of the
peanuts were soft and spongy, being devoid of oil. At night the
bugs were observed feeding on unshelled peanuts, and even on
sorghum grain. As this pest is common wherever peannts are
harvested and stored, it would appear that it is of considerable
importance, and control measures are therefore justified on all
peanut farms. It was reported later that a dusting with 4 per
cent Gammexane dust had given an adequate control of the bugs
at the N.T.A, Farm.’’

Extracts from index eards kept while working as Entomologist,
N.T\A,, Darwin.

456 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSEUM

Peanuts, Storace,

‘Aug, 1955, Bill Alexander, Daily River farmer, reported
that the black peanut trash bugs were in swarms amongst his
bagged peanuts, and that he was sure that they were living on
fhe oil in the nuts, In previous years he had found that many
of the nuts had been dry and shrivelled when he was ready to
plant.’?

20 Feb. 1956. Stored peanuts and sorghum at Katherine
N.T.A. Farm swarming with black bugs according to manager,
Several bags of peanuts at Berrimah sent up from Katherine
a month or so previously, showed heavy insect damage . . .’
(Mainly Rice Moth and yarious beetles. Some buys present.)

‘17 Apr. 1956. Inspection of dozen bags of peanuts stored
for two years in shed at 205 mile farm (Katherine N.T.A.
Farm), Thousands of peannt trash bugs swarming oyer bags,
over tin walls of shed, and in and over nearby machinery and
grass. Many of them actively feeding on peanuts, even in the
shell. Most of the peanuts are depleted of oil, and are spongy
and white.’’

“2 May 1956. Peanut trash bugs at Katherine migrating
out of sheds to house. Gammexane 4 per cent dust applied
heavily around sheds—gave good control.’’

Peanut Trasu Bucs (Lygaeidae).

“These bugs seem to be present whereyer peanut trash or
peanuts shelled or unshelled are stored on N.T. farms, and it
ig quite obvious that they cause serious losses in oil content,
being able to feed right through the shell into the interior of
the kernals. Also observed feeding on sorghum grains.

“RAH (A) 35: 216; 86: 44. Aphanus (Lygaeidae) in
Nigeria 24 May 1956, Also present in and on ripening sunflower
heads at Berrimah N.'l.A. Farm.

“27 July 1956. Bugs still present at Berrimah Farm, also
being found in lettuce plants.

“8 Aug, 1956. Visit to W. Christie’s, Katherine, by T.
Officer Moore. Reports that there bugs have been bad, and he
considers that growing sunflowers has bred them up. They are
even attacking pumpkins, which they honeycomb. When a
pumpkin is kicked, large numbers of bugs fly ont!’’ (1 can’t
think of anything else that could have been confused with the
bugs by this person.)

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 457

‘‘Oct. 1956. Bill Alexander reports that he has had very
little trouble with peanut trash bugs this season. Late rains
prevented him from either drying out his dug crop, or digging
out the remainder. The previous season there were many bugs
about, and seed used for planting had numerous small bruises
in the kernels.”’

SuNFLOWER.

‘(94 May 1956. Sunflower plants at Berrimah Farm with
heads almost mature. Heads infested with moderate number of
peanut trash bugs.

“8 Aug. 1956. Sunflower heads from Banyan Farm,
Bachelor, very poor. .. . (caterpillar damage) . . . quite a
number of peanut trash bugs also in sample.’’

Peanut Trasn Bucs Aphanus sordidus (‘Groundnut Bug’’).
‘Groundnut Cultivation in India.’ Farm Bulletin No. 2. Indian
Council of Agricultural Research.

‘‘The Groundnut bug has been reported to cause appreciable
damage to groundnut in Bombay. The bugs appear in large
numbers and suck the oil out of the kernels both in the field and
on the drying floor and occasionally from stored material.’’

‘‘Recorded from Madras on stored groundnuts, from Burma
in millet heads. From Bombay, attacking groundnuts both
during and after the harvest, also infests Sesamum and
Carthamus tinctorius. Attacks may be prevented by putting
the nuts into thick sacks immediately they are gathered. RAE
(A)5: 101.’’

Elasmolomus v-album (Stal 1859)
Plate 19, fig. D

Rhyparochromus v-album Stal, 1859, Kongl. svenska Fregatten

Eugenies Resa Om. Jordan ete. 1851-1853. Zool. 1, Insecta: 247.
Pachymerus (Elasmolomus) v-album Stal, 1874, Kongl. svenska

Vetensk. Akad. Handl., 12(1): 161.
Aphanus v-album Barber 1958, Insects of Micronesia 7(4): 215.
Aphanus australis Distant, 1901, Ann. Mag. nat. Hist., (7) 8: 502.
Elasmolomus australis Scudder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 767.
Elasmolomus imsularis Kirkaldy, 1908, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 33:

360.

458 RECORDS OF 'THE S.A. MUSEUM

Aphanus (Elasmolomus) insularis China, 1930, Insects of Samoa 2(3):
138.

We have seen specimens of this species from Java (which Barber
equates with the Philippine and Micronesian v-albwm), Timor, North
Queensland, and Fiji and all are certainly the same species. The
Javan specimen and one Australian tend to be brownish, and the
others blacker, but this is hardly a specifie difference. The Australian
specimens have a general transverse darkening on the corium inwardly
from the dark spot on the margin 3 of the way back, but so also
does one of the three Timor specimens. In all other respects the
specimens are identical, Pachymerus nerceis was described from Lifu,
but Wirkaldy’s generie placing and his description leave little doubt
that his material belongs to this species, or to the next.

Head dark brown to black with a silvery pilosity; eyes con-
eolonrous, ocelli reddish. First segment of antennae black or brownish
with five or six robust spines, one near base on interior margin,
another on the same margin about halfway, another between this and
apex but on the superior margin, and an apical inner vluster of three
or four; second sogment yellowish brown vaguely infuseated at apex,
third black or brown, pale at base; fourth with basal half pale
yellowish brown, apical half blackish or brown,

Pronotum luteous to vellowish brown with anterior lobe within
the reflexed margins (except two small lnteous points or streaks along
anterior taargin), {wo spots on each lateral reflexed margin, one near
apex and the other almost at base, and numerous punetations on the
hind Jobe blackish or brown,

Scutellum black or brown with a prominent V-shaped apical
luteous or yellowish brown mark which bears a few fuscous
punetations.

Legs yellowish, apices of tibiae, fore femora (except at apex),
and a broad sub-apieal band to the second and third femora black or
dark brown.

Hemelytra luteous to yellowish brown with numerous fuscons
punctations for the most part arranged in longitudinal lines but also
some areas of scattered punctations. Corium with four distinct black
spots two on the exterior margin, one past the half way mark towards
the apex and the other at apex, a third spot in the middle of the dise
in the apical quarter and a fourth near inner margin and its apex.
Membrane fuscous, with elongate lightenings, principally on the veins.

GROSS snp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 459

Underside dark brown to blackish with light patches above
insertions of coxae, hind upper angles of pro- and metasterna, and
extreme lateral margins of abdomen on segments V and VI.

Rostrum reaches mid coxae, mainly pale. Antennal ratio 30-35:
75-82: 65-71: 75-90.

Length: 4.90-5.40 mm.

Specimens seen from Java, Timor, Fiji, Northern Australia,

Distribution: Indonesia, Philippines, Micronesia, Australia, I"iji,
Tonga, Solomon Is. (but see note under next species).

Australian records: N.W. Australia, Troughton Is., J, 0. Walker
(B.M.). 1 female, Claudie R., N. Queensland, May 1914, 0.
MacGillivray (N.M.). 1 female, Daly R., Northern Territory (8.A.M.).

It may very well be that the distribution of v-albwm is much more
extensive than we have claimed here. An examination of the types of
Fi, transversus (Signoret) from Madagasear, 2. consocialis (Dist.)
from Seyehelles and FF, lineosus Dist. from Burma and Ceylon,
indieates that a single species may be involved, ranging from Africa to
Tonga. In this case, the oldest name in the complex appears to be
v-album, Such a distribution is quite credible in view of the almost
parallel distribution of EF. sordidus. This problem is being considered
further by G.G.E.8.

Elasmolomus papuanus (Distant 1901) nov, comb.
Plate 24, fig, D

Aphanus papwanys Distant, 1901, Ann, Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 502.

Head chocolate brown, with silvery pilosity. Eyes concolorous,
ocelli reddish. First segment of antennae brown with eight or nine
robust spines, four or five of them at apex. Second and third apical
half of fourth segment a paler brown; basal half of fourth yellowish,

Pronotum luteous yellow with anterior lobe between the reflexed
margins (except two obsolete luteous marks on the anterior margin),
two spots on each lateral reflexed margin, one at middle of fore lobe
and the other almost at the hind angles, and numerous punctations
on the hind lobe brown.

Seutellum brown and with a V-shaped apical yellowish mark
bearing a few brown punctations.

Levs yellowish, fore femora (except at apex) and a broad sub-
apical band on the second and third femora brown,

460 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hemelytra brownish with numerous fuscous punctations for the
most part arranged in longitudinal lines but also some areas of
scattered punctations. The basal half of the lateral margins, a pre-
apical spot and a basal streak running back paralleling the outer
margin paler, yellowish. Membrane pale brown, extreme tip yellowish.

Underside chocolate brown with light patches above insertions of
coxae, hind upper angles of pro- and meta-sterna and two small
patches on margin of abdomen on segments V and VI.

Rostrum reaching mid coxae, mainly pale. Antennal ratio (to
same seale as v-album) 42; 95: 85: 100,

Length: Female, 6,25 mm.
Distribution: Australia,

Australian record: 1 female, Dunk Is., North Queensland, Dee.
1932 P. MaeIndoe (S.A.M.). Distant’s type of this species cannot be
found in the British Museum; it came from Peak Downs, also in
Queensland. The species described here fits Distant’s deseription
fairly well although the head and anterior lobe of the pronotum and
the underside of the tibiae and tarsi seem to be rather paler in colour.
The size is about right,

This species is very little different to v-albwm; it is 25-80 per cent
larger, paler overall and with much less contrast in its coloration,
It could be a sub-species of v-album were it not that v-album already
occurs in Queensland. It shares with both the Australian specimens
of v-album a similar pattern of infuscation in the apical area of the
corium, but this is also present in one Timor specimen of the latter
species.

This distribution is quite credible in view of the almost parallel
distribution of EB. sordidus,

Note: Elasmolomus nereis (Kirkaldy 1905) nov, comb, Pachymerus
mereis Kirkaldy, 1905, Trans. ent. Soc. Lond.: 647, pl. 18, fig. 7,
described originally from Lifu, was recognized by one of us (G.F.G,)
from several specimens in the Institut Francais d’Oceanic in Nouméa
during a recent visit to New Caledonia. It is a distinct species of
Elasmolomus, and differs from the other three in the very narrow
pronotal laminae and more shiny appearance, It is small like papuanus
and v-album and would run down to the former in our key.

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 461

Poeantius Stal 1865
Poeantius Stal 1865, Hem. Afr. 2: 154, 163. 1874, Kongl. Vetensk
Akad, Handl. 12 (1); 159, 162. Distant, 1903, Faun, Brit, Ind.
Rhynch. 2; 85. Breddin 1907, Dtsch, ent. Z.: 208. Bergroth 1918,
Philipp. J. Sei., 13 (2 & 8): 84.

Naudarensia Distant, 1904, Faun. Brit, Ind. Rhynch, 2: 86.

Head triangular and with antennal tubercles not visible from
above.

Pronotum with narrow lateral laminate carinae; dise with a
distinct transverse impression; posterior margin concave; anterior
lobe with punctures finer and denser than on posterior lobe.

Scutellum longer than wide; deeply punctate.

Fore femora not greatly swollen and with a small sub-apical spine
and a few stiff hairs; posterior tarsi with the basal tarsomere twice
as long as the combined length of the two distal tarsomeres.

Hemelytra usually with the apical half more or less castaneous
and with a subapical pale spot to corium; membrane if with pale spots,
then these basal; clavus with more than three rows of punctures;
corium with rather dense punctuation.

Venter dark brown with coxal covers and posterior margin of
metapleurae ochraceous.

Type species: Rhyparochromus nigropictus Stal, from Africa.

Both Breddin and Bergroth regarded Poeantius and Naudarensia
as synonymous and we are accepting their opinion here. The species
described by Distant (1918) as Naudarensia rolandi does not belong
in the genus Naudarensia, but in Udeocoris Bergroth which is in the
tribe Myodochini (Gross, 1962, Rec. 8. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 14(2) ;
391),

Poeantius australopictus sp. nov.
Plate 23, fig. D

Female. Head dark brown; antennae pale ferruginous with basal
part of first segment, apex of second and most of third, dark brown;
terminal segment of antennae without a distinct pale annulation;
rostrum dark brown.

Pronotum with anterior half dark brown; anterior margin
ferrugino-ochraceous; lateral carinae ochraceous with extreme
b

462 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

posterior part dark brown; transverse impression laterally pale
ferrugino-ochraceous, but centre distinctly fuseous; hind lobe of
pronotum ochraceous with dense dark brown punctures.

Scatellumn dark brown to black with tip ochraceous; apical half
laterally slightly ferruginous to brown.

Legs dark brown with base of middle and hind femora ochraceons,

Hemelytra ochraceous with dark brown punctures; clavus with a
dark brown longitudinal streak; corium with apical half from inner
angle to anterior margin, dark brown, but with slender subapical
ochraceous spot; membrane suffused with brown, but with a distinct
pale spot near apical angle of corium.

Venter dark brown or slightly ferruginous, with coxal covers and
posterior margin of metapleurae ochraceous.

Mead inclined ventrally; antennal ratio 5: 13-14: 11-12: 1617 H
rostrum almost reaching middle coxae, Pronotum not greatly wider
than long, the width: length as 23-27: 20; dise with a distinct trans-
verse impression near middle, ratio length of anterior lobe; length of
posterior lobe, as 9-10: 8; lateral margins of pronotum distinetly
concave near middle, Hemelytra macropterous.

Total length: 4,5 mm, (4.0-5.0 mm.),

Male, Similar to female, but usually a little smaller. Total
length: 4.8 mm,

Type: A female, Queensland, Townsville, 1902 F. P, Dodd (B.M.).
Paratypes: 1 sex undetermined, NW. Australia, Kimberley district,
Mjoberg (Stockholm); 1 female, Queensland, 17 Jan. 1929 Dr. K, K.
Spence (A.M.); 1 female, Brisbane, 31 Apr, 1957, 8. S. Sekhon (U.Q.) ;
1 male, 1 female, Normanton, R. Kemp (S.A.M.), 1 male, Northern
Territory, Darwin, G. F. Hill (G. G. BE. Seudder, Vancouver); 1
female, Townsville, 18 Apr, 1902 W. W. Froggatt (A.N.L.C.),

This species is similar to P. variegatus Distant from Africa in
general appearance, bat has the pronotum less tapering anteriorly and
the claval white streak less evident. P. australopictus differs from
P. lineatus Stil from the Philippine Is. by the shape of the pronotum
and the coloration of the corium, In the latter species, the pronotum
lacks a distinct transverse impression and the fuscous markings on
the apical half of the corium do not extend to the anterior margin,

A single brachypterous female specimen in the Naturhistoriska
Riksmuseum in Stockholm, with the data ‘Queensland, Alice River
(Mjéberg)’ has the coloration of the corium similar to P. lineatus but

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 463

on structure of the pronotum appears to be conspecific with the
specimens of australopictus listed above.

It would appear that the specimens here considered to be a new
species were, by Distant (1918) considered to conspecific with
P. lineatus. This is not so as has been pointed out above.

Narbo Stal 1865

Narbo Stal, 1865, Hem. Afr. 2: 154, 163. 1874, Kongl. svenska Vetensk.
Akad. Handl., 12(1): 159. Distant, 1903, Fauna Brit. Ind.
Rhynch., 2: 85. Breddin, 1907, Dtsch. ent. Z., 208. Bergroth,
1918, Philipp. J. Sci., 13 (2 & 7): 84. Barber, 1958, Inseets of
Micronesia, 7(4): 216. Sendder, 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 769.

Laxamana Distant, 1906, Ann, Soc. ent. Belg. 50; 416,

Wlongate insects; head porrect, eyes removed from anterior
margin of pronotwmn; antennal tubercles clearly visible from above;
antennae long and slender; first antennal segment extending beyond
apex of head and subequal to head length,

Pronotum wider than long; distinctly punctate; with a
conspicuous transverse impression; lateral margins weakly carinate
and without a distinct laminate carina; lateral carmaé ending abruptly
on humeral angles; lateral margins deeply concave at level of trans-
verse impression on disc; posterior margin slightly concave.

Seutellum longer than wide; distinctly punctate; basal half of
dise excavate; dise with a vague Y-shaped elevation,

Legs slender and elongate fore femora slender and with a row
of short spines along ventral surface; hind tarsi with basal tarsomeres
more than twice combined length of the two distal tarsomeres; tibiae
with short fine hairs and longer, outstanding, stout hairs; apex of
tibiae with a circle of stout setae,

Hemelytra distinetly marked with brown and ochraceous; corium
with a more or less distinct pale subapical spot; membrane with a
faint pale spot apically; clavus with more than three rows of
punctures; corium rather densely punctate.

Abdomen ventrally with a median longitudinal vague keel; male
venital capsule with a small tubercle ventrally.

Type species: Narbo longipes Stal, from Borneo and Sarawak.

464 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Narbo biplagiatus (Walker 1871)
Plate 20, fig. B
Noliphus ? biplagiatus Walker 1871, Cat, Het. B.M, 4; 177.
Rhyparochromus terminalis Walker 1872, Cat. Het, B.M. 5; 105.
Dieuches terminalis Lethierry & Severin, 1894, Cat. gén, Hém., 2: 220.
Narbo biplagiatus Distant 1901, Ann. Mag. nat, Hist. (7)8: 510,
Narbo biplagiatus Seudder 1962a, Canad. Ent., 94(7): 769.
Narbo metochoides Bergroth 1918, Philipp, J. Sei, (D) 13: 82. Barber
1958, Insects of Micronesia 7 (4); 217, fig.

Head dark brown to black; antennae ferrugino-ochraceous with
first segment, apical parts of second and third, extreme base and apical
part of fourth, dark brown; terminal antennal segment with a broad
pale ochraceous annulation; rostrum ferruginous to brown.

Pronotum dark brown to black with lateral margins ochraceous
and posterior lobe with a median longitudinal short pale streak on
anterior part.

Seutellum dark brown to black with apex ochraceous and with two
medio-lateral pale spots.

Legs ferrugino-ochraceous with apical parts of femora, apex of
tibiae and tarsi dark brown.

Hemelytra dark brown to black with basal half of anterior margin
and a subapical spot to corium, ochraceous; a short basal streak to
clavus, an interrupted streak on corium near claval suture and a
median spot to corium, ochraceous; membrane with basal part of some
veins and apex, vaguely pale.

Venter dark brown with extreme postero-dorsal corner of meta-
pleurae ochraceous and sterna V and VI with lateral pale spots,

Antennal ratio 13: 22: 18: 23; rostrum reaching middle coxae.
Pronotal width: length, 23:17. Fore femora with five or six ventral
spines. Total length 10-10.3 mm.

Distribution; Ceram, Gilolo, Philippine Is., Palan Is., New Guinea,
New Britain, Celebes, Sumatra, Queensland, Samoa, Caroline Is.,
Borneo, Sarawak, Assam, Indo-China, Samboangan and Java,

Australian records: New South Wales (Munich); Queensland,
Cairns District, A. M. Lea (G. G, E. Scudder, Vancouver); Queens-
land, F. P. Dodd; Stewart River, Queensland, Jan. Feb. 1927 Hale &
Tindale (S.A.M.).

GROSS anp SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 465

TYPES EXAMINED AND THEIR DEPOSITION.

In the course of this work, the following types have been examined
by one of us (G.G.E.S8,)+ their location is noted,

Boshequius australis Dist. in B.M.

Dieuches consanguineus Dist. in B.M.

D. distanti Bergr. not examined, deposition of type unknown,

D, finitihus Van Duzee in C.A.8.

D. longicollis (Dallas) in B.M.

D. maculicollis (Walk.) in B.M. (D. atricornis Stal in Stockholm).

D. notalus (Dallas) in B.M,

D, obscuripes (Walk.) in B.M.

D. oceanicus (Dist.) in B.M,

Elasmolomus nereis (RKirk.) type not examined, deposition unknown.

E. papuanus (Dist.) type not examined, not in B.M,.

E. sordidus (Fab.) represented by two specimens, one male, one
female, in the collection of Kiel examined by G.G.H.S. in Copen-
hagen. The female has been selected as lectotype and so labelled.
(Aphanus littoralis Dist. also examined in B.M.)

E. v-album (Stal) in Stockholm (Z. insularis Kirk in Hawaiian Sugar
Planter’s Association; 2. australis (Dist.) in B.M.).

Narbo biplagiatus (Walk) in B.M. (N. metochoides Bergr. in Helsinki),

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

This work was done while one of us (G.G.E.S.) was in receipt of
a grant from the National Researeh Council of Canada and University
of British Columbia. We wish to thank the following for loan of
material and/or permission to study types in their care: Dr. W. E,
China, Mr, R. J. Izzard and the Trustees of the British Museum
(Nat. Hist.); Mr. H. B. Leech (California Academy of Sciences) ;
Dr. BE, Kjellander (Naturhistoriska Riksmuseum, Stockholm); Dr.
W. Forster (Zoologische Sammlung des Bayerischen Staates, Munich) ;
Dr. J. W. Evans (Australian Museum Sydney); Dr. L, Hoberlandt
(Narodni Museum, Prague); Dr, K. H. L. Key (0.8.1-B.0., Canberra) ;
Mr, A. N. Burns (National Museum of Victoria, Melbourne); Dr. W.
D, L. Ride (Western Australian Museum, Perth); and Dr. T. HE.
Woodward (University of Queensland, Brisbane).

ABBREVIATIONS

The following abbreviations of names are used for collections
from which material has been obtained for studies in this paper.

466 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

A.M.—Australian Museum, Sydney; A.N.I.C.—Australian National
Insect Collection, formerly the collection of the C.S.LR.0., Division of
Entomology, Canberra; B.M.—British Museum (Nat. Hist.) London;
C.A.S.—California Academy of Sciences, San Francisco; Munich—
Zoologische Sammlung des Bayerischen Staates, Munich; N.M.—
National Museum, Melbourne; Prague—Narodni Museum, Prague;
S.A.M.—South Australian Museum, Adelaide; Stockholm—Naturhis-
toriska Riksmuseum, Stockholm; U.Q.—University of Queensland,
Department of Entomology, Brisbane; W.A.M.—Western Australian
Museum, Perth; and W.A.R.I.—Waite Agricultural Research Institute,
Adelaide.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Barber, H. G., 1958: Insects of Micronesia, Heteroptera: Lygaeidae.
B. P. Bishop Mus. Insects of Micronesia, 7 (4): 173-218,
11 text figs.

Bergroth, E., 1916: New genera and species of Australian Hemiptera.
Proce. roy. Soc. Vict. (N.S.) 29(1): 1-18.

1918: Studies in Philippine Heteroptera, 1. Philipp. J. Sci.
(d) 13(2&3): 43-126.

Breddin, G., 1907: Berytiden und Myodochiden von Ceylon aus der
Sammelausbeute von Dr. W. Horn. Rhynch. Het, Dtsch.
ent. Z., 34-37 & 203-220, 9 text figs.

Carpenter, G. H., 1891: Rhynchota from Murray Island and Mabniag.
Sci. Proc. R. Dublin Soe. 1891: 137-146.

China, W. H., 1930: Hemiptera-Heteroptera. Insects of Samoa 2(3):
1-162, 28 text figs.

Corby, H. D. L., 1946-47: Aphanus (Hem. Lygaeidae) in stored
Ground-nuts. Bull. ent. Res., 37: 609-617, 11 text figs.

Dallas, W. S., 1852: List of the Specimens of Hemipterous Insects in
the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus. Pub.,
Pt. 2: 369-592, 4 plates.

Distant, W. L., 1901: Rhynchotal Notes—xXT. Heteroptera: Family
Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)8: 464-486 &
497-510.

1903 & 1904: The Fauna of British India including Ceylon
and Burma. Rhynchota. 2: i-xvii & 1-242 (1903) and
243-503 (1904). 319 text figs.

GROSS ann SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI 467

1904; Rhynchotal Notes—XXII. Heteroptera from North
Queensland. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (7)13: 263-276.

1906-7: Oriental Heteroptera. Ann. Soc. ent. Belg., 50;
405-417.

1909: Oriental Rhynchota Heteroptera. Ann. Mag. nat.
Hist. (8)3: 491-507.
1918: Contributions to a further knowledge of the Rhyn-
chotal Family Lygaeidae. Ann. Mag. nat. Hist. (9)1:
416-424 & (9)2: 173-179, 257-270 & 486-492.
Dohrn, F. A,, 1860: Hemipterologische Miscellaneen. Stett. ent. Ztg.
21: 99-109, 1 plate, 158-162, 208.

Fabricius, J, C., 1787: Mantissa Insectorum.

1794: Entomologia Systematica 4: 1-6, 1-434, 435-462,
463-472.

1803: Systema Rhyngotorum.

Gross, G. F., 1962: Aberrant Australian Brachypterous Myodochine
Bugs (Lygaeidae Rhyparochrominae), Ree, 8, Aust.
Mus., Adelaide, 14(2): 371-396, 3 plates.

Hoffman, W, E., 1932: The Economic Status of the Lygaeids and
Notes on the Life History of Lygaeus hospes Fabr. and
Aphanus sordidus Fabr. (Hemiptera, Lygaeidae). Ling-
nan Sei. J., 11(1): 119-135. Pls. 1-2.

Kirkaldy, G. W., 1905: Memoir on the Rhynchota collected by Dr.
Arthur Willey, F.B.S., chiefly in Birara (New Britain)
and Lifu. Trans. R. ent. Soc. Lond., 327-362. Pl. 17.

1908; A catalogue of the Hemiptera of Fiji. Proc. Linn.
Soe. N.S.W., 33(2): 345-381. Pl. 4.

Letherry, L. and Severin, G., 1892-6: Catalogue générale des
Hémiptéares. Bruxelles. Tome 1 (1893): 1-x & 1-286 pp.
Tome 2 (1894): 1-277 pp. Tome 3 (1896): 1-275 pp.

Lindberg, H., 1958: Hemiptera Insularum Caboverdensium. Sys-
tematik Okologie und Verbreitung der Heteropteren und
Cicadinen der Kapverdischen Inseln. Comment. biol.,
Helsingf, 19(1) : 1-246, 114 text figs.

Scudder, G. G. E., 1957: The Higher classification of the Rhyparo-
chrominae (Hem. Lygaeidae). Ent. mon. Mag., 93:
152-156,

468 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

1958: 24. Lygaeidae (Hemiptera) of Rennell and Bellona
Islands. Nat. Hist. of Rennell Is., Brit. Solomon Is.,
Copenhagen, vol. 2: 135-142, 2 text figs.

1962a: The World Rhyparochrominae (Hemiptera: Lygaei-
dae). 1. New Synonymy and Generic Changes. Canad.
Ent., 94(7): 764-773.

1962b: The World Rhyparochrominae (Hemiptera: Lygaei-
dae) II. New Genera for Previously Described Species.
Canad. Ent., 94(9): 981-989.

Stal, C., 1865: Hemiptera Africana, 2.

1859: Kongliga svenska Fregatten Eugenies Resa omkring
Jorden, under Befal af C. A. Virgin Aren 1851-1853.
Zoologi I, Insecta. Hemiptera species novas descripsit
219-298, Stockholm.

1868: Hemiptera Fabriciana. Fabricianska Hemipterater
efter de i Kopenhamm och Kiel forvarade type-
exemplaren. granskade och beskrifne. Fase. I-II K.
svenska Vetensk Akad. Handl., VII, No. 11, 1868, pp.
1-148; op. cit. VIII, No. 1, 1869, pp. 1-130.

1872: Genera Lygaeidarum Europae disposuit. Ofvers.
Vetensk Akad. Foérh., Stockh., 29(7) : 37-62.

1874: Enumeratio Hemipterorum 4. K. svenska Vetensk
Akad. Handl., 12(1): 1-186.

Van Duzee, H. P., 1940: New Species of Hemiptera collected by the
Templeton Crocker Expedition to the Solomon Islands in
1933. Pan.-Pacif. Ent., 16: 178-192.

Walker, F., 1871: Catalogue of the Specimens of Hemiptera Heterop-
tera in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus.
Pub., Pt. IV: 1-211.

1872: Catalogue of the Specimens of Hemiptera Heteroptera
in the Collection of the British Museum. Brit. Mus. Pub.,
Pt. V: 1-202.

LEGENDS TO PLATES

PLATE 19.
Fig. A. Bosbequius australis Distant.
Figs. B and C. Dieuches longicollis (Dallas).
Fig. D. Elasmolomus v-albwm (Stal).

Ree. S.A. Mussum Vou. 14, Phare 19

Yo fdee paige 470.)

Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Prater 20

Rec, §8.A. Museum Vor. 14, Puare 21

Rec, S.A. Museum Von. 14, Prare 22

Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Phare 28

Ree. S.A. Museum Vou, 14, Puarn 24

GROSS AND SCUDDER—AUSTRALIAN RHYPAROCHROMINI

PLATE 20.

Fig. A. Dieuches grandicus sp. nov.

Fig.

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Uap Sop

SonP

Narbo biplagiatus (Walker).

PLATE 21.

Elasmolomus sordidus (Fabr.).
Dieuches consanguineus Distant.
Dieuches hirsutus sp. nov.
Diewches enigmaticus sp. nov.

PLATE 22.

Diewches maculicollis (Walker).
Dieuches distanti Bergroth.
Dieuches oceanicus (Distant).
Dieuches obscuripes (Walker).

PLATE 23.

Dieuches notatus (Dallas).
Dieuches nudus sp. nov.
Dieuches oceanicus (Distant).
Poeantius australopictus sp. nov.

PLATE 24.

Dieuches finitimus Van Duzee.
Dieuches torpidus sp. nov.
Dieuches scutellatus Distant.
Elasmolomus papuanus (Distant).

469

AQUATIC AND SEMIAQUATIC HEMIPTERA TAKEN IN
PORTUGUESE TIMOR BY G. F. GROSS OF THE
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM”

By HERBERT B. HUNGERFORD AND RYUICHI MATSUDA

Summary

Since the material sent us by the Basel Museum in Switzerland turned up several new
species from Timor, we knew that this lot would at least add new distributional records.
This it has done although only four familes are represented: Notonectidae, Gerridae,
Hydrometridae and Micronectidae.

AQUATIC AND SEMIAQUATIC HEMIPTERA TAKEN IN
PORTUGUESE TIMOR BY G. F. GROSS OF THE
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM"

By HERBERT B. HUNGERFORD ann RYUICHI MATSUDA

Since the material sent us by the Basel Museum in Switzerland
turned up several new species from Timor, we knew that this lot
would at least add new distributional records. This it has done
although only four families are represented.

NOTONECTIDAE

Anisops nasuta Fieber. ‘‘Pantai Macassar, QOe-Cusse, Timor
Portugués Feb. 14 and 18, 1961 G. F. Gross*’ 4 males, 4 females.
A new record for Timor.

Anisops timorensis Brooks. Same label as above. 1 male, 1 female,
1 nymph.

GERRIDAE

Limnometra ciliata Mayr. ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor
Portugués Feb. 14 and 15, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 1 male, 1 female.
While this is a new record for Timor it is to be expected to occur,
for we have previously recorded it from the Lesser Sunda Islands.

Limnogonus australis (Skuse). ‘‘Pantai Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor
Portugués Feb. 14 to 23, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 64 adults, both
apterous and macropterous; four of them are kept at the
University of Kansas. 90 nymphs.

Tenagogonus robustus Hungerford and Matsuda. ‘‘Hstacao Zootée-
nica and foot of Mundo Perdido nr. Ossi, Timor Portugués, Mar,
9, 1961 G. F. Gross’? 1 male, 1 female: ‘‘Pantai Macassar,
Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 19, 1961 G. F. Gross’’ 1 male,
1 female. All of these are apterous. Timor is a new record for
this species which was previously known from Hast Java and
West Sumba.

(1) Contribution No. 1166 from the Department of Entomology, The University of Kansas.

This is a by-product of a research project aided by a grant from the National Science
Foundation,

472 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

HYDROMETRIDAE
Hydrometra maidii Hungerford and Evans. ‘‘Pantai Macassar,
Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 14 to 23, G. F. Gross’? 3 males,
3 females. This species was described from Sumatra and Java,
and this is a new record for Timor.

MICRONECTIDAE
Micronecta sp. ‘‘Pante Macassar, Oe-Cusse, Timor Portugués Feb. 18,
1961 G. F. Gross’? 3 females. While this is a new record for the
genus occurring in Timor, males are needed to determine the
species.

A NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM
(ACARINA, LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE) FROM BAT GUANO

By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A new species of larval Neotrombidium, N. gracilipes (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) is
described from a single specimen obtained from bat guano from Fig Tree Cave,
Wombeyan, New South Wales.

Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov.
Fig. 1

Holotype larva: Shape, slightly engorged, broadly oval. Length of idiosoma 960, width
580y.

A NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM (ACARINA,
LEEUWENHOEKIIDAE) FROM BAT GUANO

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sours Avusrrauian Museum
Fig. 1

SYNOPSIS

A new species of larval Neotrombidium, N. gracilipes (Acarina,
Leeuwenhoekiidae) is described from a single specimen obtained from
bat guano from Fig Tree Cave, Wombeyan, New South Wales.

Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov.
Fig. 1

Holotype larva: Shape, slightly engorged, broadly oval. Length
of idiosoma 960n, width 580p.

Dorsum: With the scutum triangular with a broadly rounded
anterior apex, furnished with three pairs of ciliated setae and a pair
of fine filamentous sensillae shortly and sparsely ciliated distally, no
trace of a crista, the lateral margins do not run in a straight and
oblique line, but are roughly longitudinal and parallel from the antero-
median setae to the antero-lateral setae which they contour, and then
similarly to the postero-lateral setae which they outwardly surround,
posterior margin lightly convex. The antero-median setae, AM, and
postero-lateral setae, PL, are fairly short and blunt, but the antero-
lateral, AL, are long and tapering, the sensillae are shortly ciliated
distally and arise from fairly large alveolae a little in front of PL.
Dorsal surface posterior of the scutum with 31 pairs of tapering finely
ciliated setae to 60% long and arranged in irregular transverse rows
of 4 to 6 setae. The Standard Data in micra are as follows: AW 29,
LW 52, PW 89, SB 38, ASB 87, PSB 20, SD 107, AM-AL 35, AL-PL 70,
AM 41, AL 64, PL 35, Sens. 90, SW 96.

Venter: As figured; coxae I and IT separated by the width of the
urstigma, all coxae with only one pair of slender ciliated setae,
between coxae I with one pair of setae situated just off the inner
margins of coxae, a single pair of setae between coxae III and posterior
coxae III with 10 pairs of setae, all coxae with slight porosity.

474 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 1. Neotrombidium gracilipes sp. nov. Larva. A. dorsum, B. venter, C, dorsal
scutum, D, mandible, E. palp, F. tibia and tarsus, leg I., G. same of leg III.

WOMERSLEY—NEW LARVAL NEOTROMBIDIUM A75

Mandibles (fig. D) long and narrow, with strong simple cheliceral
blade. Palpi slender as figured, tibial elaw bifid and tarsus small.
Legs unusually slender, I and IT 526» long, III 6204. Tibia and tarsi
about 8 times longer than high, all tarsi with a single claw, tarsi I
154» long by 17» high, without any solenidia as far as can be seen,
tibia I 994 long, tibia and tarsi II] as figured, tarsi 168» long by
17» high, and tibia 128, long.

Locality: A single specimen from bat guano from Fig Tree Cave,
Wombeyan, New South Wales, 21st August 1960.

Remarks: This species differs from the other deseribed larvae
of Neotrombidiwm, barringunense Tlirst, tenuipes (Wom.) and
tricuspidum Borland, in the very slender legs. It also differs from
the first larva to be described, barringunense (Southeott, 1954) in that
coxae I and II are separated by the width of the urstigma, as is also
the case in tenwipes and tricuspidwm, These coxae are also similarly
separated in Monimguls streblida Wharton, the genus of which
Southcott 1954 synonymised with Neotrombidium, but which the
writer has shown in a current paper on other grounds to be valid.
It seems therefore that the separation or otherwise of coxae I and IT
is not of generic importance,

Adults of a new species of Neotrombidium, N. gracilare Wom.
and described in a current paper (Trans. Roy. Soc, 8. Austr., Adelaide,
1962) are known from bat guano from other bat caves in Hastern
Australia and it is probable that the larva described above is that of
N. yracilare. The occurrence of two different species of Neotrom-
bidiwm in such a localized specialized biotope as bat guano seems
extremely unlikely. However, until the larva and adult can be
correlated by rearing, a new specific name is proposed.

REFERENCES

1. Borland J. G., 1956: The genus Neotrombidiwm (Acarina, Trom-
bidioidea) in the United States. J. Entom. Soc, Kansas
29(1); 29-35,

8, Southcott, R-V., 1954: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina, Leouwen-
hoekiidae), I. Description of the ovum and larva of
Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst 1928, with an account
of the biology of the genus, Traris. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr.,
Adelaide, 77: 89-97.

3, Wharton, G, W., 1938: The Acarina of Yucatan Caves, Carnegie
Inst. of Washington, Publ. 491: 137-152.

476 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

4, —_—_—— 1947: The relationship between Trombiculid and Trom-
bidiid Mites. J. Parasitol. 33, sect. 2.

5. Womersley, H., 1954: New genera and species apparently of
Apoloniinae (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae) from the
Asiatic-Pacific Region. Malaysian Parasites VII;
Studies, Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No. 26: 108-119.

6. ————— 1962: Two new species of Acarina from bat guano from
Australian caves. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide.
7. ————— 1962: Monunguis Wharton 1938, a valid genus (Acarina,

Trombidioidea). Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 14(3).

“MONUNGUIS” WHARTON 1938, A VALID GENUS
(ACARINA, TROMBIDIOIDEA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The genus Monunguis Wharton 1938 was erected for a new larval species of mite,
Monunguis streblida Wharton, found parasitic on bat flies (Diptera, Streblidae) from
caves in Yucatan, Mexico. Considered by recent workers as synonymous with the genus
Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 (fam. Leeuwenhoekiidae) it is now shown, on re-
examination of a paratype, to be valid and that while probably more nearly rated to
Neotrombidium it does show some relationship to Johnstoniana George 1909 = Rohaultia
Ouds. 1911 (fam. Johnstonianidae).

“MONUNGUIS” WHARTON 1938, A VALID GENUS (ACARINA,
TROMBIDIOIDEA)

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sovrn Avstranmn Musrum
Fig. 1-2

SYNOPSIS

The genus Monunguis Wharton 1938 was erected for a new larval
species of mite, Monunguis streblida Wharton, found parasitic on bat
flies (Diptera, Streblidae) from caves in Yucatan, Mexico. Considered
by recent workers as synonymous with the genus Neotrombidiwm
Leonardi 1901 (fam. Leeuwenhoekiidae) it is now shown, on
re-examination of a paratype, to be valid and that while probably
more nearly rated to Neotrombidium it does show some relationship
to Johnstoniana George 1909 — Rohaultia Ouds. 1911 (fam.
Johnstonianidae).

The paratype examined, one of the three specimens comprising
the type and two paratypes in the United States National Museum,
is redescribed and refigured.

Genus Monunguis Wharton

Wharton G. W. 1938, Acarina of Yueatan Caves. Carnegie Institute
of Washington, Publ. 491, pp. 150-151, fig. 25-28.

Type Monunguis streblida Wharton.

In 1938 Wharton (loc. cit.) erected the genus Monunguis for a
curious larval trombidiform mite, Monunguis streblida found parasitic
upon bat flies, Péerellipsis araneae Coq. and Trichobius dugesti Towns.
(Diptera, Streblidac) from the Cinque de Mayas Cave, Tekax, Yucatan,
Mexico.

The description was very brief and the figures, especially that of
the dorsal seutum, somewhat crude and puzzling. Since the original
description few references have been made to the genus and species,
and it was overlooked both in Vitzthum’s big work in Bronn’s
Tiereich, vol. 6 Acarina, 1943, and in Sig Thor and Willman’s work

478 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in Das Tiereieh, Lfg. 71b. 1947, In a brief note in 1947 Wharton (9)
suggested the possibility of the synonymy of Monunguis with
Neotrombidiwm Leonardi 1901, The next reference appears to be that
of Baker and Wharton 1952 (1) when they listed the genus in the
subfamily Trombellinae,

In 1954 Southeott (5) in describing the larva of Neotrombidium
barringunense Hirst, discussed its generic affinities with Monunguis
but without having had access to any of the original material. He
concluded that Monuwnguis was synonymous with Neotrombidium
Leonardi 1901. Borland J. G. 1956 (2) was the first and only one who
has in any degree re-examined a specimen of the original material and,
although he gave little or no further data and no figures, on com-
parison with the larva of Neolrombidium tricuspidum he was of the
opinion that as more data became available the two genera might be
validly separated.

With a view to clearing up the question I have been endeavouring
for some time to trace the deposition of the original material and
lately, through the good offices of Dr. D. E, Johnston of the Institute
of Acarology, Agricultural Kxperiment Station, Wooster, Ohio, I
have heen privileged to receive on loan from Dr. J. F. Gates Clarke
and Dr, Hi, W. Baker of the Division of Insects, Smithsonian Institn-
tion, Washington, D.C., a paratype slide of Monunguis streblida
Wharton, and I am indeed grateful to these gentlemen for the
opportunity of redescribing the species.

The paratype slide examined is labelled as follows:
on the let hand side as—
““Mononyx streblida n.g. n.s.p, G, W. Wharton, Duke U.
Co-type”’
Alongside this label is another red one marked—
“*Co-type No, 1393, U.S.N.M.”
on the right hand side as—
“On Trichobius dugesti, Cinque de Mayas Cave, Tekax,
Yueatan, A.S. Pearse coll. no. 162, July 29-1936 Lot. 36-31564"",

Dr, Baker informs me that the other two slides in the collection
are similarly labelled, except that both specimens were from
Pterellipsis araneae. One of these is marked “Type’’, the other
“*Co-type’’.

WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 479

The generic name used on the slides ‘‘Mononyx’’ was evidently
changed before publication on realization of its having been used
earlier. Before considering the affinities and validity of the genus,
the species is redescribed and refigured from the paratype specimen
seen, as follows:

Monunguis streblida Wharton

Wharton, G. W. 1938, Acarina of Yucatan Caves. Carnegie Institute

of Washington, Publ, 491, p. 150-151, fig. 25-28.

Fig. 1, A-B, 2, A-E

Larva: Body elongate oval (pear shaped; Borland), nearly twice
as long as wide, 514p by 298». Scutum triangular with anterior apex,
with 3 pairs of blunt ciliated rod-like setae and one pair of long
filiform nude sensillae arising from large alveolae, a crista is distinctly
present extending from the more or less straight posterior margin

Fig. 1. A-B. Monunguis streblida Wharton. A. dorsum, B, venter (Original, from
paratype).

480 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. A-E. Monungwis streblida Wharton. A. dorsal scutum, B. palp, ©. chelicerae,
D. tibia and tarsus of leg I, E. dorsal setae (Original, from paratype).

WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 481

to the anterior apex of the seutum, it is more clearly defined anteriorly,
between the sensillae bases and at the posterior end; in between these
areas it is less demarcated and bulbous. The Standard Data in micra
are AW 9, MW 46, PW 73, SB(p) 35, A-P 67, AL 26, ML 29, PL 15,
Sens. 58, SD 78, The eyes are large, two on each side, on ocular
shields in line with the sensillae bases, posterior eyes the smaller.
Chelicerae with well selerotised and strongly angled blade without
teeth, Galeal seta short and as far as ean be seen shortly ciliated.
Palpi stout, feraur with a loug strongly branched seta as figured, genu
with a similar shorter seta, tibial setae not clearly seen but elaw
strong thick and hilureate, tarsus not clear.

Dorsum with approximately 50 pairs of ciliated tapering setae,
lengthening posteriorly from 17 to 30x, in irregular transverse rows.
Ventrally with the coxae as figured, I and IT separated (as stated by
Wharton (6)), but only narrowly so and for not more than the width
of the urstigma, IT and IIT widely separated, all coxae with a long
tapering ciliated seta. Between coxae I with a pair of setae, between
coxae IIT with two pairs of setae, and posterior of coxae TIT with
approximately 30 piars of setae similar to dorsal.

Legs: All 6-segmented, although there is an indefinite division
of the femur, leg I 293 long, I] 283, IIT 2370p, tarsus I 72 long,
each tarsus with a single strong claw 24 long, tarsi I and [T each with
a long solenidia and other sensory setae as in fig. 2D.

AFFINITIES OF THE GENUS

In his original description of Monunguis, Wharton considered
it to be closely related to Rohaultia Ouds. 1911 (4) (now regarded as
synonymous with Johnstoniana George 1909) agreeing with it in the
possession of two pairs of eyes, a crista, a rostrnm, divided femora
aud a single scta on each coxa, but differing in having only a single
pair of psendostigmata and a single claw on each tarsus, In a brief
research note in 1947 (7) however, he raised the possibility of
Monunguis being synonymous with Neotrombidium Leonardi 1901 as
follows: ‘The larvae of Neotrombidium have not been previously
recognized, THowever they have been described under the generic
name Monunguis . .. .”’

In 1954 Southeott (5) described the larva of Neotrombidiwm
barringunense Hirst, and in discussing the relationship with Monunguis
streblida Wharton stated that ‘There are so many resemblances

487 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

between these larvae that there appears little doubt that Monunguis
and Neotrombidium are congeneric and as the latter genus has priority
it must take precedence aver Monunguis.”?

In 1956 Borland (2) in disenssing the genus Neotrombidium in
the United States, described a new larval species N, tricuspidum as
well as the adults reared from the larvae. In this paper he also
refers to two larvae of a second but undeseribed species, He had the
opportunity of examining a ‘‘eo-type’ of Monunguis streblida
Wharton, and concludes ‘it is the opinion of the writer that while
reeognition of the synonymy (with Neotrombidium) may be expedient
af this time, as more data becomes available the two genera may be
validly separated, At present consolidation of the group appears
desirahle.’’ Borland unfortunately did not give any fresh figures of
the specimen examined and only made the following comments on
morphological features: ‘The larval seutum of M,. streblida bears an
incipient crista which is not present in the known larvae af
Neotrambidinm although upon earefal comparison faint traces can
be seen in Neotrombidium, Therefore with respect to the scutum,
M, streblida differs [rom Neotrombidinm larvae in degree only.
However both the form of the body setae and the body shape seem to
set M. streblida apart from the lurva of Neotrombidium. The setae,
particularly those of the sentum, are much more plumose, hearing
strong branches, and are more numerous on the dorsum than in either
M, tricuspidum or N, barringunense, whose setae are sparse and with
indistinct barbs. Monwnguis streblida is pear-shaped, as opposed to
the ovoid body form of N. triouspidum and N. barringunense. The
cheliceral blades of M, streblida are peculiarly modified’.

Sonutheott in lis 1954 paper (5), and again in 1957 (6), notes that
althongl Wharton did not figure the vertral surface he did state that
eoxae IT and IL were separated as in ““Rohaullia’’. We also noted
that the single tarsal claw and the shape and chactotaxy of the seutum
strongly resembled that of Neotrombidiwm, Wat that the curious
structure between the sental sensillae figured by Wharton has no
comparable structure in Neotrombidium and might from its appearance
be an artefact, From the figures now given, of the paratype specimen
examined it will be seen that while the shape and chaetotaxy of the
sentum do resemble those of Neotrombidium there is a very definite
erista whieh is moderately wide posteriorly, narrows between the
posterior sensillae and then swells ont, narrows again and then
expands to a rounded knoh on which are situated the anterior median
pair of setae. From this shape it is easy to trace that shown

WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 483

diagrammatically by Wharton. The anterior pair of setae on the
erista are not sersillary in form but stiff and shortly ciliated as are
the ML and PL sental setae, whereas the posterior sensillae laterad
of the erista are sensilliform. In Johnstomana (Rohaultia) the
anterior pair are sensilliform and on a fairly well defined sensillary
area, shaped very much as in M. streblida.

In his intensive study of the Johnstonianidae, Newell 1957 (3) has
shown fairly conclasively that the anterior pair of setae, although
very much modified and resembling the other setae of the seutum are
but modifications of the anterior pair of seutal sensillae. In this
feature then, plus the presence of a distinct crista, M. streblida
resembles Jahnstoniana rather than Neotrombidiwm.

In Neotrombidium coxne I and II are not separated, except
outwardly, by the urstigma while in M, streblida they are separated
for the whole length and for the width of the urstigma, In
Neotrombidium spp. and also the genera of Johnstonianidae coxae I
carries two pairs of fine ciliated setae, one at the anterior lateral
corners and one on the extreme inner margin (off, but close to in a
new species at present being studied by the writer), with the exception
of Johnstoniana errans (Jolmst.) which from Ondemans figure of 1912
lacks the inner setae of coxae I (this is the only figure I have been
able to see and I have not seen actual specimens). Oudemans also
does not figure any setae in the intereoxal area of coxae I. In
M. streblida, however, coxae I bear only one seta, rather strongly
ciliated at the anterior lateral angles, and there is a pair of similar
setae in the intercoxal area. Here Moniwiguis appears to be distinct
fram both Neotrombidium and the genera of the Johnstonianidae.

The palpal tibial claw is bifid in Monunguis as in Neotrombidium
while in Johustoniana errans it is simple, but in J, latiscuta Newell, it
ig terminally bifid, and in Centrotrombidiwm distans Newell it is
simple. In Diplothrombium monoense Newell and D. cascadense
Newell (Johnstonianidae) it may be simple or bifid. This character
therefore seems to be of little, if any value generieally.

Tn having only a single tarsal claw on all legs, Monwnguis agrees
with Neotrombidium, The various larval species of Johnstonianidae
possess tarsi with two or three claws,

The dorsal setae in the species of Neolrombidium are generally
long and sparse, and abont 12-15 pairs, whereas in Monunguis
streblida they are shorter, much more numerous and about 50 pairs
in number. In this respect the chactotaxy resembles that of the many

484 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

species of Acomatacarus, family Leeuwenhoekiidae, to which the genus
Neotrombidium has been assigned.

CONCLUSION

Monunguis must therefore be considered as a valid genus distinct
from Neotrombidium. It does, however, show some features relative
to Johnstonianidae, but on the whole its affinities lie more with
Neotrombidium than elsewhere as shown by the following table of
larval characters.

Johnstonianidae Neotrombidium Monunguie
Crista 2, cteta ager dhe. abe.. + _ +
A.M. setae .. 0.0... eee sensilliform setiform setiform
Coxae I and IT touching ....... — + (1) _
Comal setae ....... cc. eee eee L.AL.L. or 2.1.1. 2.1.1, Lid,
Tarsal claws .....,6::.4.-.0.. two or thres one one
Palpal tibial claw ............. simple or bifid bifid bifid
Dorsal setao ............2.-.. sparse sparse numerous
Leg segmentation ....,........ 7.6.6. 6.6.6.

(2) Only in barringunense Hirst; separated by width of urstigma in tenuipes (Wom.) and
tricuspidium Borland, as well as in a new speeies being deseribed elsewhere.

Until such times as the adults should be known, Monunguis must
be considered as a valid genus belonging to the Leeuwenhoekiidae
different form, but closely allied to Neotrombidium Leonardi.

REFERENCES

1. Baker, EK. W. and Wharton, G. W., 1952: Introduction to Acarology.

. Borland, J. G., 1956: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina Trom-
bidioidea) in the United States. J. Entom. Soc. Kansas
29(1) : 29-35.

3. Newell, J. M., 1957: Studies on the Johnstonianidae (Acari,

Parasitengona). Pacific Science 11: 396-466.

4. Oudemans, A, C., 1912: Die bis jetzt bekannten Larven von
Thrombidiidae und Erythraeidae. Zool. Jahrb. Supplt.
14.

. Southcott, R. V., 1954: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina,
Leeuwenhoekiidae) I. Description of the ovum and larva
of Neotrombidium barringunense Hirst 1928, with an
account of the biology of the genus. Trans. Roy. Soe. S.
Austr., Adelaide, 77: 89-97.

WOMERSLEY—MONUNGUIS WHARTON 1938 485
6. ——_——— 1957: The genus Neotrombidium (Acarina, Leeuwenhoek-
iidae). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 80: 157-164.

7. Wharton, G. W., 1938: Acarina of Yucatan Caves. Carnegie Inst.
of Washington, Publ. 491: 187-152.

8, ————— 1947: The relationship between Trombiculid and Trom-
bidiid Mites. J. Parasitol. 33, sect. 2.

NEW RECORDS OF DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA)
WITH THE DESCRIPTION OF THE HITHERTO UNKNOWN
LARVAL STAGE

By H. WOMERSLEY, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

A small collection of Diarthrophallidae (Acarina) in the Coll. Samsindk in the
Entomological Institute of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences in Praha has been
submitted to the author by Dr. K. Samsindk. The specimens, seven in all, were collected
from Passalid beetles from Brazil and India in the National Museum in Praha, all of
which were of long standing.

Five of the specimens were from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil, all of which can be
referred to known species. One of these however, is a larva of Diarthrophallus
duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) and the first larval Diarthrophallid to be described.

NEW RECORDS OF DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) WITH
THE DESCRIPTION OF THE HITHERTO UNKNOWN LARVAL
STAGE

By H. WOMERSLEY, Sourn Ausrratin Muszum
Fig. 1-7

SYNOPSIS

A small ecolleetion of Diarthrophallidae (Acarina) in the Coll.
Samsinak in the Entomological Institute of the Czechoslovak Academy
of Sciences in Praha has been submitted to the author by Dr.
K. Samsinak. The specimens, seven in all, were collected from
Passalid beetles from Brazil and India in the National Museum in
Praha, all of which were of long standing.

Five of the specimens were from the vicinity of Sao Paulo, Brazil,
all of which can be referred to known species. One of these however,
is a larva of Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) and the first
larval Diarthrophallid to be described.

The other two specimens from Coimbatore, India are a female and
a larva of a new species, Brachytremella epiphenus, the first record
of the family from India.

The specimens are all figured in detail and are to be returned to
the Academy of Sciences in Praha.

Family DIARTHROPHALLIDAE

The following small but extremely interesting collection of mites
of the family Diarthrophallidae has been submitted to me for study
and determination by Dr. K. Samsinaék of the Biological Institute of
Czechoslovakia and I tender to him my sincere thanks for the
opportunity of so dong.

The specimens, seven in all, were recovered by Dr. Samsinak from
old specimens of Passalid beetles in the collections of the National
Museum in Praha. Five of them, all from beetles from the vicinity of
Sao Paulo, Brazil can be referred to known species; one specimen
however, is the first true Diarthrophallid larva to be described. The
other two specimens are from a Passalid from Coimbatore, India, one

488 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

a female, the other a larva. These are the first Diarthrophallids to
be described from India, and belong to a new species Brachytremella
epiphenus sp. nov.

Genus Diarthrophallus Trigirdh
Tragardh I. 1946. Ent. Meded., 24 (6), 371.
Type: Uroseius quercus Pearse et al, 1936.

Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse ef al.)
Fig. 1 A-C, 2 A-B
Uroseius quercus Pearse et al 1936, Ecol. Monogr., 6: 478, fig. 31-34.

Diarthrophallus quercus Tragirdh 1946, Ent. Meded., 24(6): 371-380,
fig. 1-2, 4-5; Womersley 1961, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 84: 11,
29-32, fig. LA, 2A-B.

——— 113

Fig. 1, A-O Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse et al) female. A, dorsum; B, venter;
C, tarsus of leg I. (Specimen from Coll, Samsinak.)

WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 489

This species is represented in the collection by two specimens, one
a female from a Passalid Veturius cephalotes from Sao Paulo, Brazil,
the other a deutonymph from Passalus (Petrejus) sp., also from Sao
Paulo. Both specimens are figured. The female, fig. 1 A-C, unfor-
tunately lacks all the long dorsal setae; it measures 573» (idiosoma)
in length. The deutonymph, fig. 2 A-B measures 386» in length.

Fig. 2. A-B Diarthrophallus quercus (Pearse et al) deutonymph. A, dorsum; B, venter.
(Specimen from Coll. Samsinfik.)

Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.)
Fig. 3 A-B, 4 A-B, 5 A-B

Passalobia duodecimpilosa Lombardini 1938, Mem. Soc. ent. ital.,
17(1): 48, fig. V, VII.

Diarthrophallus simitis Tragardh 1946, Ent. Meded. 24(6): 380-384,
fig, 6-7.

Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa, Womersley 1961, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.
Aust., 84: 32-34, fig. 3 A-G.

490 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Three specimens in the collection are referred to the species; one,
a deutonymph was from the Passalid, Veturius cephalotes (ex Col.
Nicker) and just labelled ‘‘America’’, but as this beetle is a South
American species, it was most likely from the vicinity of Sao Paulo,
Brazil, as with the host of the female of D. quercus. Of the other two
specimens, both of which are from Passalus (Phoronaeus) clypeo-
marginatus from Brazil, one is a tritonymph, the other, the hitherto
first larval Diarthrophallid to be described, The tritonymph, fig.
3 A-B measures 433. (idiosoma) in length, and the deutonymph, fig.
4 A-B, 445», The larva is described as follows:

Larva morphotype, fig. 5 A-B. Idiosoma 249,» long, 192» wide;
gnathosoma 81» long.

Dorsum: Fig. 5 A, with only two pairs of long slender ciliated and
apically capitate setae, the anterior pair at about the mid-length of
the idiosoma and 316» long, the second pair subposterior and marginal
to 2204 long. The dorsal shield covers most of the dorsum and is
somewhat truncate posteriorly.

Pig. 3. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) tritonymph. A, dorsum; B, venter.
(Specimen from Coll. Samsinak.)

WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA)

491

del

&
Fig. 4. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) deutonymph. A, dorsum; B,
(Specimen from Coll. Samsindk.)

492 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 5. A-B Diarthrophallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.) larva.
(legs on left side shown dorsally). (Specimen from Coll, Samsin&k.)

A, dorsum; B, venter

WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 493

Venter: Fig, 5B. Sternal shield 200p long, 48» wide between coxae
II then contracting before widening to 62u between coxae Il and ITI
and again contracting before expanding to 96 posterior of coxae TV,
its posterior margin is broadly rounded and fairly close to the margin
of the anal shield; the sternal setae are all off the shield, two pairs
between coxae II, one between ecoxae ITT, all are small and fine to
172 long. Anal shield a transverse ellipse 534 wide by 11p deep, and
furnished with two long slender apically capitate setae to 300» long;
there is a pair of short setae between the sternal and anal shields.
Gnathosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in the later stages. Legs all
rather thick and stout and directed forwards, I 6-segmented, tarsus
apically bifureate with long apical taetile seta, dorsally with a long
strong and ciliated seta to 2004 on genn, and a rather shorter one on
the femur, legs IT and [HI 7-segmented, IT with a long seta on
telofemnr, [TT with two long setae on telofemur and one on basifemur,
tarsi of legs [LIL with large pad-like ambulacra, without claws; legs
T 178 long, TL and IL 200s. Peritreme entirely absent,

Remarks: This larva, the first true larval Diarthrophallid to be
nown is associated with D. duodecimpilosa only because it was from
the same host, Veturius cephalotes from Brazil, as the deutonymph;
it may however be that of D. qguercus,

Genus Brachytremella Tragardh
Trigirdh, 1. 1946, Ent. Meded, 24(6): 384; Womersley H. 1961 Trans.
Roy. Soe. 8. Aust., 84: 11.
Type: Brachytremella spinosa Trag.

Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov.
Fig, 6 A-B, 7 A-D

Types: Holotype female and morphotype larva in the ‘Col.
Samsinak’’, a part of the collections of the Entomological Institute
of the Czechoslovak Academy of Sciences, Praha,

Localities: Both female and larva from specimens of Epiphenus
stoliezghae in collections of the National Museum of Czekoslovakia in
Praha, from Coimbatore, India.

Female holotype: fig. 6 A-B. A broad oval shape, with idiosoma
442. long and $124 wide.

Dorsum: With the dorsal shield 389, long, almost entirely
covering the dorsum with the posterior margin truncate, furnished
with two pairs of short tapering and apparently nude setae anterior

494 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 6. A-B Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. female, A, dorsum; B, venter (legs
on left side shown dorsally). (Specimen from Coll. Samsinak.)

of the mid-length, the anterior pair 38» long, the other pair 58» long,
and at the postero-lateral corners of the shield with a long slender
nude seta to 216» long.

Venter: Sternal shield 307» long extending well past coxae IV,
144» wide at greatest width between coxae II and III, contracted
between coxae II and again between coxae IV, with rounded posterior,
furnished with 5 pairs of strong sternal setae, anterior pair 38» long
and between coxae II, second pair 34» and third pair 29n, these between
coxae III, fourth pair of setae rather close to third but between
anterior margins of coxae IV to 24» long, fifth pair 291 long and
posterior of coxae IV. The genital shield is large, situated in the
middle of the sternal shield between coxae II and III, 144. long by
96» wide and open posteriorly, or rather without a clear cut hinge line.

WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 495

Endopodal shields distinct as figured, Anal shield small, transverse,
with a pair of long slender setae to 192» long and sparsely and shortly
ciliated; on the cuticle and lateral on each side is a short fine seta.
Gnathosoma as in the genus. Legs short and stout, directed forwards,
I 163, long, II 221, IIT 230n, IV 240; tarsus of leg I apically
bifureate, with terminal tactile seta, coxae fragmented as figured, tarsi
of legs I-IV with large pad-like ambulacra without claws; the long
dorsal setae on the femur and genu of legs II-IV relatively short.
Peritreme short, in line with anterior margin of coxae TV.

Larva, morphotype. A rather smaller species than the larva of
D. duodecimpilosa described above. Idiosoma 268» long, 165% wide;
enathosoma 72» long.

del #,

Fig. 7. A-D Brachytremella epiphenus sp. nov. larva, A, dorsum; B, yenter (legs on
left side shown dorsally); C, leg I; D, ambulacra of leg III. (Specimen from Coll,
Samsinak.)

496 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Dorsum: Fig. 7 A, with only two pairs of long slender ciliated
and apically knobbed setae, the anterior pair at about the mid-length
of the idiosoma, 125 long, the second pair subposterior and marginal
to 115» long; the dorsal shield covers most of the dorsum except
posteriorly, and its posterior margin is widely truncate and sinuous,

Venter: Fig. 7 B, as figured; sternal shield 168 long, 29. wide
between coxae II, then gradually expanding to 67» between coxae IT
and III, then contracting slightly before widening to 72» behind
coxae III, posterior margin broadly rounded and fairly widely
separated from anal shield, with four pairs of sternal setae all situated
off the sternal shield, setae I are small and fine and elose to base of
gnathosoma, IT to TV are long, 294, and stont, a pair of medium setae
between anal and sternal shields. Anal shield a transverse ellipse
43 wide by llp deep, furnished with two ciliated capitate setae to
192» long, Gnathosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in the preceeding
species. Leys all rather stout and directed forwards, I 6-segmented,
IT and IIT 7-segmented, tarsi of leg I apically bifurcate, with long
apical tactile setae, the long seta on genu only 33», no very long setae
on IT, and only one to 48» on telofemur of ITI; tarsi of legs I] and
IIT with large pad-like ambulacra without claws; leg I 115, long,
TI 182», ITT 192,,

Remarks: From the larva of the preceding species, Diarthro-
phallus duodecimpilosa (Lomb.), it differs strikingly in the smaller
size, the less constricted sternal shield, and the very much stronger
and stouter sternal setae IT-IV.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Sincere thanks are expressed to Dr. K. Samsinak for submitting
his material to me for study and to my assistant Miss B. Hubbard for
her careful drawings of the specimens and the typescript,

REFERENCES

Camin, J. TH. and Gorirossi, F, E., 1955: Revision of the Suborder
Mesostigmata (Acarina) based on New Interpretations
of Comparative Morphological Data. Spec, Bull. II,
Chicago Acad. Sei., pp. 1-70.
Lombardini, G., 1926: Duo noya genera acarorum. Boll. Soc. ent. ital,,
58 (9-10); 158-161.
1938: Acari novi, Mem. Soe. ent. ital., 17(1): 44-46,

WOMERSLEY—DIARTHROPHALLIDAE (ACARINA) 497

1938, Acari novi II. Mem. Soe. ent. ital., 17(1): 118-120.

1943: Acari. Il maschio adulto e larva di femina della
specie Passalobia quadricaudata Lomb. 1’Agricoltura
Coloniale, 27(3): 3-6.

1951: Acari nuovi. Redia, 36: 245-250.

Pearse, A. 8. et al, 1936: The Ecology of Passalus cornutus Fabr., a
beetle which lives in rotting logs. Ecol. Monogr., No. 6:
455-490.

Trig&rdh, L., 1946: Diarthrophallina, a new group of Mesostigmata,
found on Passalid beetles. Ent. Meded., 24(6): 369-394.

Womersley, H., 1961: Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea
paraphagic upon Millipedes and Cockroaches and on
Beetles of the Family Passalidae. Trans. Roy. Soe. S.
Aust., 84: 11-26.

1961: On the Family Diarthrophallidae (Acarina-
Mesostigmata-Monogynaspida) with Particular Reference
to the Genus Passalobia Lombardini 1926. Trans. Roy.
Soe. S. Aust., 84: 27-44.

TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA
PART II”

MUSICAL ROCKS AND ASSOCIATED OBJECTS OF THE
PITJANDJARA PEOPLE

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Large static (“kondala) or musical rocks, of the Pityandjara tribes-people of the Western
Desert of Australia are described.

Kondala stones may be incorporated either in arrangements of a formal character or stand
alone. They may be given totemic names and identities; groups of them can denote
families of ancestral beings. During ceremonies they may be decorated with painted
designs and covered with the secret (‘mina) blood taken from a vein in the arm. They are
the “voices” of totemic ancestors and may be played by striking with hammerstones
during male initiation, during female puberty ceremonies and as part of “increase” or
“fattening” ceremonies, at which dances are enacted for the stimulation of growth of
totemic animals of economic importance. A notable series of such musical rocks are
described from Makurapiti, near Mount Agnes on the border of South and Western
Australia.

TOTEMIC BELIEFS IN THE WESTERN DESERT OF AUSTRALIA
PART IL

MUSICAL ROCKS AND ASSOCIATED OBJECTS OF THE
PITJANDJARA PEOPLE

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or ANTHROPOLOGY,
Soura AusrraLian Muszeum

Plates 25-26 and text fig. 1-11

SUMMARY

Large static [’kondala] or musical rocks, of the Pitjandjara tribes-
people of the Western Desert of Australia are described.

Kondala stones may be incorporated either in arrangements of a
formal character or stand alone. They may be given totemic names
and identities; groups of them can denote families of ancestral beings.
During ceremonies they may be decorated with painted designs and
covered with the secret [’mina] blood taken from a vein in the arm.
They are the ‘‘voices”’ of totemie ancestors and may be played by
striking with hammerstones during male initiation, during female
puberty ceremonies and as part of ‘‘increase’’ or ‘*fattening’’
ceremonies, at which dances are enacted for the stimulation of growth
of totemic animals of economic importance. A notable series of such
musical rocks are described from Makurapiti, near Mount Agnes on
the border of South and Western Australia.

Small portable stone kondala also are used, A specimen of such
from the Everard Ranges is described, and details are given of the
part played by wooden kondala; both plain ones for secular use, and
carved ones made for ceremonies associated with male initiation.

INTRODUCTION

In May 1957 the present writer, while on a visit to the Western
Desert discovered that aborigines of the Pitjandjara tribe used
musical sounds made by striking large rocks with hammerstones.

(1) Part I appeared in these Records, vy. 13, 1959, pp. 805-332,

500 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

These bell-like tones represented the ‘‘voices’’ of ancestral totemic
beings, at initiation and ‘‘increase’’ ceremonies.

Therefore it was with some interest he discovered, on his return
from the expedition, that similar discoveries of ‘‘rock gongs’? had
been made in Africa and published by Fagg (1956, 1957). The
observations in Africa and Australia were made quite independently
of each other, and are not likely to be related in any way. More
recent references to African rock gongs have been made by Lanning
(1958), Robinson (1958), Conant (1960) and Vaughan (1962).

MUSICAL ROCKS AT MAKURAPITI

On 13 May 1957 we were examining the sandhill country around
Mount Agnes in the Blyth Range near the border of South and
Western Australia (129° 5’ E. Long. x 26° 50’ S. Lat.). The writer
was in the company of Messrs. W. B. MacDougall and R. Macaulay,
with two Pitjandjara aborigines, Peter and Willy. We had broken
a new land-rover track across sandhill country from Mount Davies
while in search of a family group of aborigines, strange to the
Pitjandjara, who had been reported to have come into the area from
the south-west. The signs of their presence had been of the nature of
the smokes of distant fires.

Passing around the south-western extremity of the Blyth Range
we came upon an ordered arrangement of stones, which our native
companions said was the ceremonial place of Makurapiti, and used
for the ‘‘inerease’’ or ‘‘fattening’’ of the [’walkurari]. The phrase
used by informants was ‘‘fattening the [’mako]’’.

Walkurari are the large, larvae [’mako], of several species of
Cossid moths. One of them is Xyleutes leucomochla Turner 1915.
These larvae live in silk-lined tubes about a foot underground and
feed externally on the roots of wattle shrubs, including Acacia
Kempeana, A. victoriae and A. ligulata (Leguminosae). A good
harvest of the grubs is a matter of vital concern since they form an
appreciable part of the diet, not only of young children but also of
adults (Tindale 1953).

The ceremonial ground of Makurapiti is in a flat sandy area, with
an underlying pediment of the rocks of the Blyth Range. The place
is in a shallow basin some 80 feet long varying in width between 20
and 40 feet. The basin runs in a N.W. to S.E. direction, expanding at
the southern end into a circular area with a diameter of some 40 feet.

TINDALE—PITJANDIARA MUSICAL ROCKS 501

The hollow evidently had been man made; debris repeatedly had been
swept away to the margins so creating a shallow depression which
formed the dancing area.

Near its northern eud stood a single subrectangular erect stone
block, two feet, high, with a red and white painted figure on one face;
the design was an inverted U-shape figure in white enelosing red
(plate 25, fig, A). There was a vertical white line down the middle of
the design on the stone, Beside this painted stone lay three smaller
ones similar to native hanimerstones. Ou one corner of the big stone
and facing away [rom the painted design was a shallow eup-shaped
depression about three inches across. This had been rather freshly
battered into the rock and therefore showed up in marked coutrast
io the russet red eolour of the weathered surface of the undecorated
parts of the stone,

At the opposite end of the cleared area, in the centre of a circular
expansion of it, was a complex arrangement of stones including as
centve pieces two long semieylindrical stones, apparently the halves
of a once still larger boulder, originally about nine feet long. This
had fractured so that one half was about six feet long and the other
somewhat shorter (three feet), The two halves either had moved
apart or the space between had weathered so that there was a gap
hetween them in which lay a cylindrical stone of smaller size with
batter marke at one end. Other stones were piled on one side of the
arrangement, Tn addition there were either thirteen or fourteen heaps
of rounded stones arranged around in a circle at intervals of five to
six feet, so that the central pile formed the hub of a large circle of
stones,

The two main stones are shown in plate 25, fig. B, They had
been painted with narrow vertical stripes forming alternatively red
and white bands. As on the stone at the northern end there were
fresh-looking shallow eup-shaped battered impressions on the ends of
the big stones as well as on the smaller one lying between ther.
Some smaller rounded and subeylindrical stones with which the cups
in the rocks had heen made were lying nearby.

Our first reaction to the fresh-looking batter marks was that some
vandal had mutilated these ceremonial objects. However we were
several hundred miles removed from the haunts of such persons in
virtually unexplored country and the native informants at once put
our minds at ease. They indicated the marks were related to the
ceremonial arrangement of stones, and demonstrated how they had
been caused,

502 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The large rocks were rock bells, musical stones, or rock gongs,
the [’wonka], ‘‘voices’’ or ‘‘talk’’ of ancestral beings; they were
[’kondala], [’kondala ’bulka], [’japu ’kondala], or [’kondali] gongs,
big gongs, rock gongs, or gongs.

Old man ‘‘Peter’’ showed us how [’mina] or blood from a pierced
small vein in the arm had been allowed to run down the rocks during
their decoration, the stream of blood being directed so as to form a
red line between each white one. Red ochre was also used. The white
paint was made by crushing the white parts of the dung of the
Australian eagle. This yields an intense white colour which photo-
graphs well even when almost obliterated by time and weathering.

Of the pair of large stones at the southern end, the larger
decorated stone was the [’walkurari mama] or [‘’walkururi] grub
father, in his human aspect as an ancestral being, and the smaller
one the [’nondjo] or mother. Other smaller stones represented their
[’kata] or children. The heaps of stones at a distance represented
other [’walkurari] people of the past. Plate 26, fig. A shows two
battering marks on the end of the [’mama kondala] and at the left in
the general photograph may be seen one of the striker stones as left
by the users. The striker stones are subspherical hammers each
weighing several pounds.

At the opposite end of the ground the single upright painted stone
was the [’malu kondala] or [’kondalu] of the kangaroo, and had been
placed there by the [’Wati Malu ‘tjukur] or ancestral kangaroo man
being.

The whole ceremonial ground gave the impression that it might
have been intended as a gigantic representation of a Cossid larva
[‘mako ’witjuti], or witchety grub, but this may be a fanciful idea.

Fifty yards to the W.N.W. and forming part of the same sacred
place was a large vertical rock slice some twelve feet long and probably
weighing several tons, leaning against a larger mass and resting, with
a blunt point downward on another rock. This was a gigantic
[’kondala bulka] of the [’windaru], or desert bandicoot totem. Plate
26, fig. B shows a long pole-like white design which had been painted
on it, with traces of red between. The red was human blood again
from the arm vein of one of the owners of the site. The ‘‘voice’’ of
the [’windaru] was evoked by striking at the base of the stone where
the shallow cup-shaped battering mark is evident (plate 26, figs. B
and C). With the informants’ permission I tapped the big [’kondala]
just as the [’windaru ’tjokoratja] being had first struck it and heard
the clear bell-like note it gave out.

TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 503

The {'windaru] or [’wendari tjukur] of Makurapiti was an [‘Inma
‘bulka] or important ceremony and belonged to the [’tamm] —
|‘tjamu], father’s father of my informant. Peter spoke the words of
the following songs which had come from his [’tam:u]:—

1, Song. ’Warta ‘be:re ‘be:re ‘mina ‘mina ‘kanei:djara
spear hook hook arm _ blood flowed out(?)
2, Song. ‘Koro:to ‘pimpa ‘jararo ‘wa:ni ja ‘murturfu na

3. Song, ‘Wanigi ‘tio :ko ‘jono ‘mani “bulka
Thread eross attotem place cameout pole large
In singing the last-named song the words were modified to—
3a. Song. ‘Wanigi ‘tjoka’bei ’tjoka’bei ‘mani ‘bulka
On the large rock, against which the [’kondala] rests are a few
rock carving marks, principally single cireles, concentrie circles
[’kurikuri], U-shaped marks, and a meandering lines of dots, These
ire [‘wati ‘mere ‘walku], the ‘‘marks made by men now dead".
On the great flat rock above this [’kondala ’bulka] is a rounded
{lat stone, several fect across, on which a shallow groove is present;
this groove may be natural, at least in part. According to Peter this
stone received applications of blood and human semen, The mixture
was rubbed all over it.

The whole stone [’kondala] appears to represent an aneient
ceremonial pole called [‘mani]; it is a [guru ‘mani “bulka], a phrase
for which I could not get an exact meaning, and the vertical painted
red and white design on it represents the central pole of a [‘wanigi
(thread cross) of the [’windaru ‘tjukur] or desert bandicoot totem.
The painted marks were [’walka Jamal kutn].

During the eeremony of the [’windarn tjukur] a large [/wanigi]
made of [‘pudurn], fur-and human hair-strings, was set up and
displayed to [’ulparu] or youths about to undergo circumcision.

Kodachrome photographs were taken on 13 May and others of
larger size in black and white were made early on the following
morning,

Having examined country to the west of Mount Agnes and
unsuccessfully searched for some aborigines of another tribe from the
south-west, who had lately visited the area, we camped near
Makurapiti for the night and much of the detail given above was told
to us around the camp fire, Our Pitjandjara men, who had not visited
this, the western limit of their country, for many years were indignant
that strange aborigines had trespassed on their territory.

504 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

On the 14th, just before we left the area, our older informant,
Peter, carefully cleared away all dead twigs, dry grass, Salsola kali
bushes and other debris from around the large [/walkurari] arrange-
ment of stones, paying partieular attention to the groove between the
two halves of ihe stone. He said the place belonged to his people and
that keeping it clean was a proper attention, even though it had been
some fifteen years or more since his own folk had been able to visit
the area,

Not all of our informant’s statements could be understood at the
time, because some words were new or strange, In particular the
fnll meaning of the word [‘talundja] was not clear—it appears to
relate to a place associated with the ‘‘increase’’ or, as Peter said. it
in English, ‘‘fattening’’ of food animals. Another phrase not clearly
understood was ["Kudutupiti]. This may be a place name, The word
(’piti] appears to relate to the hole, eave or other site where an
ancestral heing, having changed state remains today ‘inside the
eround’’, |’Kudntu] we could not translate. We had already visited
[‘Kalaiapiti], an important place in the Sir Thomas Range (129°
47’ 1, Long, x 27° 10’ 8. Lat.), where the spirit of the great Emu
ancestor of the Pitjandjara, |’Kalaia ‘tjnkur], still remains, living in a
place so important that no-one may visit the actual spot, although
initiated men, as we did, were permitted to approach the nearby spring
and soak at [‘Tpi:lina] and were able to examine other secret objects,
such as the painted rocks of [’Minma ’tjuni ‘bulka], literally ‘‘big-
bellied woman’, associated with the [’Wati ‘Kutjara], and with the
[’Kuyka’ronkara), These are Beings who already have been referred
to in Part J of this series of papers. Tpilinga is a place where special
rites were performed, in part by women, They were considered
important in stimolating the onset of puberty and the growth of
breasts in young Pitjandjara girls, A few details of these ceremonies
will he given in a subseqnent part of this series of papers.

In later discussions we learned that not only were there large
static |’kondala] in many places, inelnding ones near Kalaiapiti, but
there were smaller, more portable stone [‘kondala] in use in many
places where large musical rocks were not available.

No opportunity came to examine one of the portable examples
other than the casual observation of severa] smaller ones present at
Maknurapiti. However the indication that such smaller stone examples
did exist was confirmed shortly after return to Adelaide when one was
identified among specimens received recently at the South Australian

TINDALE—PITJIANDJARA MUSICAL, ROCKS 505

Museum. It had been collected by the late Capt. 8. A. White. This
specimen, labelled as from the Everard Ranges, presumably had been
obtained during his visit to the Eyerards in 1914 when he spent some
time among the Jankundjara people, being the first white man to do so.
During that stay he had as helper a young native whom he called
“William”, now an elderly man, with whom I talked diving my 1957
visit, William showed me one of the rock shelters with paintings in
it whieh White also had examined. Unfortunately this was before
White's specimen became known to me and there is no mention of the
elone in his writings. In the cirenmstances it is identified as a
[’kondala] hy inference only; 1 base my identification on the existence
of the familiar battering marks and on the fact that when struck it
emits the expected musical tones.

White (1916, p, 115) did witness, and deseribe a ceremonial dance
which he called ‘‘Aboo-Warroo’’, In this performance three decorated
men took part. This may be recognized as the [’Japu "Waru], an
(inma /laka] of the semi-secret type and related to several witnessed
in 1933 and during Jater visits among the Jangkundjara, The vame
means ‘stone fire’’, In such a dance men prepare for the performance
in a secret camp by bleeding one of their number, taking [’mina]
blood from a vein in his arm and decorating their bodies with paint
and blood, The mode of obtaining this blood is withheld from the
knowledge of women as a great seeret. On the other hand the blood
obtained by stabbing the under side of the subincised urethral stem
with a sharp stick is less secret, After dark the non-secret part of
the performance takes place in the presence of women and children,
who may take part also in the singing. They see the dancers by the
light of stage fires of T'rvodia grass and brushwood set alight for the
purpose, According to my informant it is in the background of such
dances that [‘kondala] may be struck. Since White made no mention
of such a happening at the dance he witnessed it seems likely that the
stone which came into his possession was a casual find, when aborigines
were not about to indicate its funetion.

Fig. 1 and 2 show two views of the Everard Range specimen,
This is now A51658 in the Sonth Australian Museum collection, It
is composed seemingly of an indurated sandstone or quartzite, and
is in the form of an elongated pebble or small bonlder, Its length
is 47.5 cro. and it is flattish-oval in section with diameters respectively
of 8.5 em. and 6.0 em.

The specimen probably originated as a waterworn boulder and
was selected because it rang with a clear note when strnck. There is

506 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig, 1-2. Two views of supposed musical stone, kondala, from Everard Ranges, South
Australia. Speeimen A,51658 in S.A. Museum.

The scale in this and following drawings is to be read in centimeters,
(Collected by 8. A. White.)

evidence for only a minimum of deliberate shaping. The two ends
appear to have been trimmed by battering; some of this may be of
natural origin. A shallow, slightly oblique groove on one face may be
due to a natural softer layer in the stone but seems to have been
abraded a little after it became a musical instrument.

The principal evidence for use takes the form of concentrated
battering marks on one flat face, and other lesser marks which exist
at the ends of both of the narrower faces. The last-named batterings,
being fewer, suggest that the stone was not as often struck near the
ends as on two areas on the upper flat face. At a point one-third
from one end of the latter is a coneentrated area of coarse batterings,
which have developed into a shallow cupped depression. When struck
at this point the stone emits a clear musical tone. At a point one-
third of the distance from the other end is a similar area, occupied by
very much more delicate batterings and the surface of the stone here
has a high degree of polish on it.

The fundamental note emitted when the stone is struck has been
identified for me by a musician as C. Higher notes are A flat and
E sharp.

By comparison with bruise marks on known larger [’japu
‘kondala] it seems evident that the coarser batterings were made by
using another stone as striker. It seems equally plausible to suggest

TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 507

that the more delicate batterings at the other end were made with a
hardwood striker. The effects could have been produced by tapping

ris

sticks of the kind which have a ball of resin on one end, Experiments
show that the batterings are focussed on the several places on the
stone where tapping will evoke the purest and best ringing tones and
that a wooden striker works best on the place where the delicate
bruising is most evident.

My conversations with Peter and Willy during other days of our
association served to augment observations I had made in 1933 about
two types of decorated wooden sticks, both of which are called

Fig. 3-5. 3-4, Two views of tapping stick, South Central Australia (A.21577)-
5. Ceremonial kondala of cylindrical type, W. Australia (A,.50022).

508 RECORDS OF THE 8.4. MUSEUM

[‘kondala] or [’bunu ‘kondala], #.¢., ‘‘wooden kondala*’, and. used in
ceremonies which precede the Pitjandjara initiation rites witnessed
in 1933 at Konapandi (Tindale 1934). T also saw similar ones among
the Ngadadjara tribespeople at Warupnju, in the Warburton Ranges,
Western Australia, in 1935. Some details of the ceremonies at which
they were used are published in the form of 16 mm, motion picture
films by the Board for Anthropological Research, University of
Adelaide (film Nos, 20, 26-28, and 38-39).

At Konapandi on 22 June 1933 the elderly [’maijada] or leading
old man of the Pitjandjara imitiation ceremonies then being held,
whose name was ['Tgaryjgal, gave me three carved music sticks of
eylindrical form; these he called [’kondala] (fig, 6-8). The speci-
mens, A21648-21650, are now in the South Australian Museum,
They functioned as musical sticks at an [’inma ‘laka ‘tinari], or
secret ceremony seen only by initiated men. This ceremony was
known as an [‘inma ‘kondala|. The men present had not made these
particular examples which had been passed along from people living
west of Peltadi in the Mann Range, The song which was sung when
they were struck was :—

Song. ‘Kondala ‘meil “neil ‘wagganda
Music sticks meil meil make talk

The term |’meilmeilba] can mean secret or sacred, and ig applied
to anything which must not be known to women and children. At this
time the full significance of these [‘kondala] was not apparent, but
during the progress of the |’Puruka] ceremonies which we then
witnessed (Tindale 1934), at which men ritually broke avoidance rules,
several men spent time decorating fnrther tapping or nimsical sticks,
this time making them very mueh like wooden lair pins, each with a
ball of resin at one end but of wood which rings when struck, whereas
hairpins are often of non-resonant wood, The designs they placed on
these [‘inma ‘kondala] were patiently burned into the wood by
applying and gently blowing a glowing twig. Terminal rings, burned
near the pointed end of these sticks, were considered to be of
particular importance because of the circumcision rites which were
about to take place, Several of the examples made on the occasion
are now present as A21652-21654 in the South Australian Museum
collection and one A21653 has been depicted (fig. 9). Hach has a ball
of Triodia resin at one end. In addition to their function as mnsical
sticks they may serve also as hair pins or head scratchers, being part
of the elaborate coiffure with chignon foundation which is worn by

TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 509

young initiated men when in full dress. An example of the more
normal wooden pin of the Pitjandjara men is shown as fig. 11. It was
made at Pital, a place on the plain between the Marm and Musgrave
Ranges, by a man who had taken part in the initiation ceremonies at
Konapandi only a day or so earlier. The burning of such a design is
shown in Reel 3 of ‘Day in the Life of Pitjandjara natives’ by
N. B. Tindale, 1938.

——
=——

Fig. 6&7, ‘Two wooden kondala from Peltadi, Minn Ranges, South Australia, used
in initiation ceremonies ae Konapandd (A.21648-A, 21649),

The cylindrical wooden [’kondala] bear rings carved on them,
usually at both ends, It was learned that the number of earved rings
may correspond to the number of young initiates who are to be
cireumeised at the initiation ceremony for which they were made.
They also may be sent out as message sticks. The specimen illustrated
in fie. 5 very closely resembles the type used among the Ngadadjara.
It can be interpreted to tell us that the [‘tjindulakalnuru] people,
those who ‘sit in the sun’’, might provide three youths, while the
[‘wiltjalanuru], the people of the other generation, those who “‘sit in
the shade’? would be providing two for the coming rites. During the
1925 circumcisional ceremonies seen at Warupuju, eylindrical wooden
musical sticks had been specially carved for the occasion, the designs
on them being incised by means of an engraver made from the lower
jaw of an opossum. The long incisor tooth with its tip broken off
served ag a burin, ‘These music sticks, called [‘kondala] and
‘kundala] by the Ngadadjara, were used as time beaters in

510 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the singing associated with the showing of [‘inma] or secret
objects to the [’maliki] or initiates. At this time special marks
called [’wa:li] were painted on the chests of the [’maliki]. There is
probably much more to be learned about these wooden [’kondala] and
their association with the stone ones.

Fig. 8-9. Fig. 8. Wooden kondala from Peltadi used in initiation ceremonies at
Konapandi (A.21650). Fig. 9. Hairpin made during Puruka ceremony at Konapandi
(A.21653),

To round out this report on [’kondala] it should be noted briefly
that wooden musical sticks, or tapping sticks, also called time beaters,
are used at evening dances in many parts of Australia, and are of
varied form. There are many published references to them. In some
areas such as coastal Arnhem Land, where the boomerang is unknown
as a weapon, they may be made from pairs of traded Central
Australian hunting boomerangs; the surface of the wood on these may
be so worn, by generations of use as time beaters, that the original
fluted design is only made evident by holding them against the light.

Specially made tapping sticks are fashioned from particular hard
woods which ring when struck. Some have prolongations at one end
like the arms of a tuning fork. Fig. 3 and 4 show two views of a
typical example of ones in secular use from South-Central Australia.
It was collected by the late Dr. Herbert Basedow and bears a partly
illegible india ink label which appears to read“ . . . S.A. 1904”? but
the beginning is lost and the last figure of the year date could be read
almost equally well as an 8 (specimen A21577 in South Australian
Museum). The style suggests that this example originally had been
traded down from further north in Central Australia. Pitjandjara
ones of hardwood, with a ball of resin at one end, and used in
ceremonies, have already been mentioned.

TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS St

Fig. 10-11, Fig, 10, Wooden kondala, Eruabella, Musgrave Ranges, Sonth Australia
(A.21667), Fig, 11. Wooden hairpin for young adult male Pitjandjara. coiffure;
mado at Pital, between Mann and Musgrave Ranges, South Australia (A.21655),

DISCUSSION

Pitjandjara nomenclature classes all objects for evoking musical
sounds, whether of stone or wood, as [‘kondala). When it is necessary
to differentiate, stone ones are [’japu ‘kondala] and wooden ones are
(*bunu ’kondala]. Nomenclatorially the question of portability is not
significant. Large static ones are [‘japu ‘bulka ‘kondala], ‘‘stone big
musical’? or [’kondala ‘bulka].

Archaeologists may not be satisfied with this degree of
differentiation, For their benefit I propose that the term kondala
should apply to archaeological stone examples, many of which will
undoubtedly be found in the future. Archaeological wooden ones,
being less likely to be found may be known as bunu kondala. I
nominate the example described and figured herein, from the Everard
Ranges as a typical kondala. Large static ones which will also be
discovered may be classed as kondalabulka.

It is frequently noticed that there is a strong tendency for words
associated with related objects and ideas to occur in widely separated
parts of Anstralia, permitting the assumption there is an old element
in common over large areas, The term [’kondala] is no exception.
Attention may be drawn to the following casually noted examples :—

Tn the Western Desert a [’kondala] is a stone or rock struck for
musical purposes, also a musical stick. The Ngadadjara term varies
as [’kundala], Among the Darumbal of Rockhampton, Queensland,
kundala is an upper stone of a pair for pounding particular foods
(Roth, 1904, p. 23).

In the voeabulary of the Pangkala natives of the country south-
west of Port Augusta there is a phrase walgi kundatanna about which

512 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

little is remembered except that it relates to a ‘‘mysterious song’’;
their verb kundata means to beat or to strike and the noun walki is
applied to ‘‘something hard, swollen, or of rounded shape’’. Is it
possible to link this with the idea of a musical stone? Archaeologists
should note this possibility. It does draw attention to how little we
really know about our aborigines and points up the fact that we may
yet be able to learn something if all sources of primary information
on the living are gleaned and exploited before it becomes too late.

In Africa the rock gong complex is linked with rainmaking
(Lanning 1958), also with initiation into manhood, and there may be
rock paintings associated with the gongs. Fagg (1957) considers that
rock slides also may be an associated feature. In Australia musical
rocks are associated with initiation and with ‘‘increase’’ ceremonies,
of which one type at least is linked with the ‘‘increase’’ of rain.
Despite these similarities it is unlikely that there is any direct
connection between the practices of the two areas.

From earliest times men everywhere have been concerned with
initiations, and with the betterment of their circumstances by
performance of magical rites using song, dance, rhythm, and paint.
Therefore it is not surprising that parallel customs and ideas may
have arisen in places as far sundered as Africa and Australia,

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer is indebted to the authorities of the Long Range
Weapons Establishment for permission to accompany their field
officers, Messrs. W. B. MacDougall and R. Macaulay on patrols into
the Western Desert, and to the Range Superintendent and these
officers for their unstinting aid.

Mrs. C. J. Hillis kindly identified the musical sounds emitted by
the Everard Range [’kondala] stone when struck.

Earlier portions of the work was done as leader of two Board for
Anthropological Research Expeditions, one to the Mann Range, South
Australia in 1933 and the other to the Warburton Ranges, Western
Australia, in 1935. Both these expeditions were supported by grants
from the Rockefeller Foundation, the University of Adelaide and the
South Australian Museum.

The present paper owes much to discussions with my colleagues,
in particular with the Hon. Associate in Anthropology at this Museum,
Mr. H. M. Cooper. The opinions expressed and any shortcomings in
presentation are the author’s own.

TINDALE—PITJANDJARA MUSICAL ROCKS 513

REFERENCES CITED

Conant, F. P., 1960: Rocks that ring: their ritual setting in Northern
Nigeria. Trans. New York Acad. Sci. 23: 157-199.

Fagg, B. E. B., 1956: Rock Gong complex today and in prehistoric
times. Journ. Hist. Soe. Nigeria I: 31.

1957: Rock gongs and rock slides. Man, Feb. 32.

1957: Cave paintings and rock gongs of Birnim Kudu.
Proc. III Pan-African Congress on Prehistory, London
1955 (1957): 306-312.

Lanning, H. C., 1958: A ringing rock associated with rainmaking,
Uganda, Sonth African Archaeological Bulletin 13:
83-84.

Robinson, K. R., 1958: Venerated rock gongs and the presence of
rock glides in Southern Rhodesia. S. African Archaeol.
Bull. 13(50) : 75-77.

Roth, W., 1904: North Queensland Ethnography, Bulletin 7: 1-34.

Tindale, N.B., 1933: Day in the life of Pitjandjara natives. 16 mm.
Films nos. 17-19. Board for Anthrop. Research,
University of Adelaide.

1933: Initiation ceremonies at Konapandi. 16 mm. Film no.
90. Board for Anthrop. Research, University of Adelaide.

1935: Initiation among the Pitjandjara natives of the Mann
and Tomkinson Ranges in South Australia. Oceania,
Sydney 6; 199-224.

1953: On some South Australian Cossidae including the
moth of the witjuti (witchety) grub. Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Austr., Adelaide, 76: 56-65,

1959: Totemic beliefs in the Western Desert of Australia,
Part I. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide 13; 305-332.

White, S. A., 1916: In the Far North-West. Adelaide, 1-200,
illustrated.

Vaughan, J. H. jr., 1962: Rock paintings and rock gongs among the
Marghi of Nigeria, i» Man, London 62: 83.

514 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM
EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES 25-26
PLATE 25

Fig. A. [’Kondala] musical stone of the [’Wati "Malu 'tjukur] at north-western end
of ceremonial ground of the [’walkurari] totem, Makurapiti, eastern end of Mount Agnes,
Blyth Range, showing the face of the upright stone with the inverted U design and the
median vertical line; note the battered corner at the right.

Fig. B. [/Mama ‘kondala] (left) and [’ngondjo kondala] stones of the [’walkurari]
grub totem at the south-eastern end of the Makurapiti ceremonial ground; the painted stripes
are evident; in the background may be seen two of the many heaps of smaller stones.
(Photos., 14 May 1957, by Norman B. Tindale.)

PLATE 26

Fig. A. Close view of two battered places on the [’mama ‘kondala] stone of the
Walkurari totem, showing also some detail of the decoration of red blood and white eagle
dung paint.

Fig. B. The giant musical [’kondala] of the desert bandicoot ['windaru ‘tjukur], with
the painted vertical [’mani] design; the striking place is near the base.

Fig. C. Close view of the cup-shaped battering place on the giant [’kondala] of the
(’windaru ’tukur] at Makurapiti. (Photos. 14 May 1957, by Norman B. Tindale.)

Re, S.A. Moseuat Vou. 14, Pare 25

Tu free page BLA

Rec. S.A. Musrum Von. 14, Phare 26

PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF THE ABORIGINAL RENIFORM
SLATE SCRAPERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper places on record the results of an examination of 226 slate scrapers.

The literature has been reviewed; typical forms of the implement described and figured,
and their manufacture discussed.

The preliminary survey shows that the implements appear to have had a limited South
Australian distribution and to have been used exclusively to scrape skins when preparing
them for making rugs and cloaks. Some scrapers are decorated with surface markings and
in a few cases they are the only surviving art forms of the aboriginals of the area in which
they were found.

PRELIMINARY SURVEY OF THE ABORIGINAL RENIFORM
SLATE SCRAPERS OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS
Plates 27-29 and text fig. 1

SUMMARY

This paper places on record the results of an examination of 226
slate serapers.

The literature has been reviewed; typical forms of the implement
deseribed and figured, and their manufacture discussed.

The preliminary survey shows that the implements appear to have
had a limited South Australian distribution and to have been used
exclusively to scrape skins when preparing them for making rugs and
cloaks. Some scrapers are decorated with surface markings and in a
few cases they are the only surviving art forms of the aboriginals of
the area in which they were found.

INTRODUCTION

For many years various investigators have been collecting
reniform or kidney-shaped stone implements from abandoned
aboriginal camp-sites in many localities in South Australia (map,
fiz. 1). Hach specimen found has increased our knowledge of these
implements and widened the area of their known distribution, The
collection now available is considered sufficient to enable the writer
to make a preliminary survey.

Campbell (1924), Basedow (1925), Hossfeld (1926), Howchin
(1934), McCarthy (1946) and Cooper (1959) have described and
figured some of these implements and their findings will be considered
with the additional knowledge gained from the survey of this
considerably larger collection of specimens than was hitherto available.

Basedow (1925, pp. 173-176) described the implement as a skin
scraper and from observations of its general form it seems reasonable
to assume that it was so used, although no published record exists of
any person actually seeing one in use,

Sift RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

TYPICAL FORM

A typieal example of this slate implement is reniform in shape
(plate 1, A and B) with an average length of 11 em., 7 em. in width
and 0.7 em, in thickness. The coneavity of the reniform outline is
reduced to a relatively thin margin to form the functional edge of the
implement, Its size is such that it can be conveniently held in the
hand and is sufficiently robust to provide support for the thin working
margin when in use.

Measurements of the illustrated specimens are given at the end
of this paper.

MATERIAL EXAMINED

This investigation revealed that at least 260 reniform slate
scrapers have been found in South Australia and of this number it
has been possible to examine 226 specimens; most of these are in the
collection of the South Australian Museum, the remainder being in
the possession of private individuals, including the author. The only
specimens not available for this investigation are either in interstate
collections or otherwise dispersed, These are 34 in number, but the
localities where they were found have been recorded as South
Anstralian by Basedow (1925, p, 1738); Hossfeld (1926, p. 291);
Howcehin (1934, p. 79) and Tindale’,

CLASSIFICATION

The 226 slate serapers which comprise this survey vary widely in
shape, size and thickness according to the particular quality of the
material used (plate 29, A to H).

The various shapes can be tentatively classified into four groups.
Kighty-three haye a typical reniform outline (plate 27, A and B);
thirty-eight are rounded, having almost the same width as length
(plate 27, C and D); 18 are elongate, the length being approximately
twice the width (plate 27, E and F), and 48 are of varied, irregular
shape,

Many of the specimens examined were found to be damaged and
only a small proportion have survived in perfect condition. Thirty-
nine are recognizable fragments which are too small to allow even
tentative classification.

(1) Mr, N. B, Tindale provided extracts from his unpublished journals on ‘ ‘Camp-sites and
Tmplements’’ (vol, 1-3, 1940-1961) which refer to scraper finds.

EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 517

Ii seems likely that this particular implement existed in greater
numbers than present collections from camp-sites would indicate. The
fragile material from which they were made makes them liable to
damage by stock movement and other factors. Only by increased
knowledge can the recognition and recovery of fragmentary specimens
be effected.

DISTRIBUTION

Although Hossteld (1926, p. 291) placed on record P. de.
Btapleton’s discovery of four reniform slate implements near the
Patawalonga Creck in 1898, the first specimens actually recorded were
found by Campbell (1924, pp. 74-78) at Moana, south of Adelaide,
where a large camp-site is situated in an area of red sand-hills near
the mouth of Pedler Creek. Extensive field work, carried out upon
this eamp-site over a long period, has yielded a comprehensive series
of stone implements.

Basedow (1925, pp. 173-175) found 19 scrapers at Normanville,
two at Woodville and suggested a distribution restricted to the tribes
which originally oceupied the area between Adelaide and the River
Murray, Hossteld (1926, pp. 287-297) extended the distribution to the
Eden Valley aud Angaston distriets by finding a number of reniform
implements when studying previous native occupation of that area.
Thirty-nine specimens have been recovered from camp-sites in those
districts.

The formation of the Anthropological Society of South Australia
in 1925 gave added stimulus to collecting and studying local aboriginal
relies, {1 a meeting of the Society in March 1927 Stapleton exhibited
a slate scraper collected from a camp-site near Hookina Siding in the
Flinders Ranges’, This specimen (plate 29, C) appears to he the
first recorded from northern Sonth Australia and was an early
indieation of the wider distribution now accepted after the collection
of many additional specimens,

From 1927 until 1934, when Howchin (1934, pp. 79-82) reviewed
the subject, a number of scrapers were added to the collection of the
South Australian Museum® by T. D. Campbell, N, B. Tindale,
II. L. Sheard and P, deS, Stapleton. These scrapers had been found
on the Adelaide Plains and in the Angaston District. This area
Howchin defined as the limit of their distribution.

(2) Minutes of the Anthropological Society of South Australia 1926-1929,
(8) Register of the South Australian Museum.

518 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

McCarthy (1946, pp. 56-57) described the reniform slate implement
as a specialized type of reniform seraper-knife and reiterated the
general opinion that its distribution appeared to be limited to the
Adelaide Plains. It is only sinee detailed field-work has progressed
that the number of sites where they have been found and their spread
has greatly increased, These finds have made possible the preparation
of a map (fig. 1) co-ordinating all the known slate seraper localities.
This map shows a far wider range of distribution than that recorded
by Howelun.

MATERIAL USED

To the choice of suitable materials for the manufacture of his slate
scrapers, the aboriginal showed his intimate knowledge of the qualities
and texture of stone necessary for the successful production of his
implements,

Most of the specimens examined are made from fine grained rocks
such as siltstones, shales, phyllites and all the rocks commonly grouped
under the term, slates. Besides being readily available, these rocks
were admirably suited for producing reniform skin scrapers. In the
case of shale it splits easily along its bedding planes into thin, regular
layers, while slate separates in a similar manner, along its distinct
cleavage planes. Once obtained, these thin, flat slabs were of con-
venient proportions to be fashioned into implements of desired shape
and size while still retaining sufficient strength for practical use.
When slate was not available, either locally or by trade, mica schist
and occasionally gritty quartzite were used, but as these materials
were not so suitable, the resultant implements were erude and
unshapely compared with the typical reniform slate specimens.

MANUFACTURE

There is no published record of anyone having observed the
manufacture of a slate seraper, but the procedure seems fairly obvious
from the implements themselves. The author has a piece of slate from
a camp-site at Hdeowie, east of Lake Torrens, which had been roughly
shaped to a reniform outline, The entire peripheral margin, including
the coneavity, appears to have been shaped by pereussion with a light
hammerstone. Most of the specimens examined for this survey still
yetain evidence of the removal of small flakes from the edges of their
rounded sides.

Tt seems likely, therefore, that the entire edge of the implement
was shaped at the same time until the desired reniform outline had

519

EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS

CREEK

ai
a

BRACHINA

a
—
uw
>
o
=
_q
—
i
AN
ANY

Distribution of slate scrapers in South Australia,

Fig. 1.

520 RECORDS OF THE $.A. MUSEUM

been achieved, The concavity, after having been roughly shaped,
appears to have been reduced by a rasping or rubbing action with
some harder material to form a relatively thin, funetional edge.
Evidence of this smoothing down is indicated by the marks left on the
flat surfaces of the implement. Some serapers (plate 27, A and B)
have had the entire peripheral margin finished in this way, so
removing traces of the original trimming.

Cooper (1959, pp. 55-60, plates 4, 20 and 21), who has been largely
responsible for extending the area of distribution of slate scrapers,
sugeests that many small pieees of slate, variable in shape, which he
has fonud on a camp-site at Hallett Cove, show evidence of wear
suggestive of skin scraping, and may be early equivalents of the slate
scrapers described in tlis paper.

INCISHD MARKINGS

As already shown, many of the incised markings on slate scrapers
were obviously due to the method of fabrication of the implement.
Other deeper markings however appear to have a deliberate purpose.
These could be simple decorations or have some totemic significance.

Ji was the deliberate incised markings on the first specimens found
by Campbell (1924, pp. 75-76) that led him to suggest they might be a
simple form of tjurunga and Howehin (1934, p. 82) to suppose they
were a ‘‘charm’’, These suggestions were not unreasonable as some
years ago the author placed a similar interpretation on a number of
small pieces of heavily meised slate which have since been recognized
as definite portions of slate serapers, At the time of their recovery
on a camp-site discovered by Cooper at Willochra, far beyond the then
aceepted area of distribution of slate scrapers, the explanation that
they were portions of some sacred object seemed a likely one.

A comparative study of the collection of slate serapers now avail-
able showed that, while over 60 per cent have surface striations, only
10 per cent or 22 specimens appear to have a definite pattern formed
from straight lines of varying length and degree of complication;
some others suggest dog and emu tracks. Plate 28, A to F, illustrates
both surfaces of three of the best examples of deliberate surface
markings on slate serapers. It is possible that the incised markings
on other specimens could have been obliterated by weathering.

Cooper (1947, pp, 292-298 and 1954, pp. 97-103) has recorded
small, flat, water-worn pebbles from northern and north-eastern South

EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 521

Australia bearing somewhat similar markings to those found on slate
scrapers. In the case of Cooper’s finds, however, the incised markings
have a regular pattern formed by a series of more or less parallel
straight limes, The origin and meaning of these markings is unknown.

USE

Basedow (1925, p. 176) was the only person to describe and
illustrate reniform slate implements as skin scrapers. Although he
gives the following detailed aceount of their use to scrape fat and
fleshy tissue from opossum skins whilst preparing them for making
rugs and cloaks, this was not a personal observation. His informant
was an old aboriginal of the ‘River Murray’’ tribe whom he
considered reliable.

‘““The freshly removed skin was laid, fur downward, over
a eylmdrical rod and drawn tightly around it with the fingers
of the left hand. The implement was then gripped by the
opposite hand in such a way that the convex edge was against
the palm and the flat surfaces between the fingers and thumb.
Holding the rod in a vertical position, the eonvave (or straight)
cutting edge was placed against the skin over the rod and
worked at an angle downwards, the cutting edge shaving off all
adherent pieces of fat and other soft tissue in doing so. The
position of the skin, relative to the rod, was frequently changed
and the process continued until the whole inner surface of the
pelt had been prepared and cleaned in a similar way.

“The advantage of a concave cutting edge obviously was
that by an accommodation of the two curves, presented by the
implement and the rod, respectively, a greater area of skin was
seraped with every downward movement of the hand; and the
process was performed without so much risk of cutting the skin
as would have been the case with the ordinary convex or
straight-edged stone scraper or a plane surface.”’

DISCUSSION

Monntford (1960, pp. 505-508, 1963, pp, 625-548) has shown that
the Australian aboriginals, over a wide area of southern Anstralia,
employed a number of different methods in dressing skins of animals
for making rugs and cloaks. Mountford describes and illustrates
(1963, plate 33, C), a large stone flake being used for this purpose in
the Northern Pijudéra Ranges. This is outside the area of known

522 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

distribution of reniform slate scrapers. Schiirmann (1879, p. 210)
describes how the aboriginals of the Port Lincoln Tribe, South
Australia, gently pulled or shaved off fleshy substances adhering to
skins, with a sharp-edged piece of quartz. In the south-east of
Australia, Howitt (1904, p. 742) records that skins were not dressed
but merely dried and made pliable by cutting marks on them with
mussel shells.

As far as the present investigation shows, the occurrence of slate
scrapers appears to have been somewhat circumscribed and limited
to the central area of South Australia, its southern and eastern
boundary being the River Murray, and its northern approximately at
Lat. 31° South (map, fig. 1).

A description, recorded in Adelaide in 1842, of the manner in
which skins were prepared for making garments, shows that the
large, coarse skins had their inner layers shaved off with a digging
stick, club or the handle on which stone adzes were mounted, while
the smaller ones were rubbed slightly with stones to make them loose
and flexible.

It is suggested that the reniform slate implements were specially
designed and ideally suited for scraping the smaller and more delicate
skins, such as those of the opossum. The smooth, relatively soft,
use-polished functional edge enabled them to be scraped effectively
without damage.

Flanagan (1888, pp. 56-58) states that the Australian aboriginal,
when making his rugs and cloaks, his only articles of clothing, showed
a very distinct preference for the skin of the opossum because it was
of superior quality for his particular purpose. If this is so and the
reniform slate scrapers were, as has been suggested, a specialized
implement for scraping these delicate skins, this may indicate that the
number and area of their distribution has some relation to the
production of these garments in those areas.

In the design, choice of material, manufacture and use of reniform
scraping implements the aboriginal again illustrated his skill and
craftsmanship in the art of converting simple, basic materials into
efficient tools.

A purpose of this paper is to give an account of this interesting
implement so that it will be correctly classified among the implements
of the Australian aboriginals. It is also hoped it will encourage their

(4) Transactions of the Statistical Society published in South Australian News, 15 October,
42, p. 46.

EDWARDS—RENIFORM SLATE SCRAPERS 523

collection, so enabling a more comprehensive survey to be made and
the area of distribution further defined.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The author wishes to express appreciation to the following :—

The Board of the South Australian Museum for permission to
work on the Museum Collection and for publication of this paper.

Mr. Norman B. Tindale, Curator of Anthropology of the Museum,
who expedited the examination of the collection and supplied extracts
from his personal journals which contributed greatly to the completion
of the distribution map.

Drs. P. 8. Hossfeld and W. I. North; Messrs. R. D. J. Weathersbee
and R, EK. Teusner made their private collections of slate scrapers
available for examination.

Special acknowledgment is made to Dr. T. D. Campbell, Messrs.
C. P. Mountford and H. M. Cooper, all of whom gave assistance by
supervising the preparation of this paper. Mr. Mountford also helped
with the illustrations,

REFERENCES CITED

Basedow, H., 1925: The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide.
1925: Slate Scraping Implements of the Extinct Adelaide
Tribe. Man, London, 25: No. 106.
Campbell, T. D., 1924: An Account of a Hitherto Unrecorded Type
of Aboriginal Stone Object. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr.,
Adelaide, 48.
Cooper, H. M,, 1947: Incised Stones of South Australia. Mankind,
Sydney, 3(10).
1954: Incised Stones from South Australia. Rec. S. Austr.
Mus., Adelaide, 11: No. 2.
1959: Large Archaeological Stone Implements from Hallett
Cove, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. of S. Austr.,
Adelaide, 82.
Flanagan, Roderick J., 1888: The Aborigines of Australia. Sydney.
Hossfeld, Paul 8., 1926: The Aborigines of South Australia: Native
occupation of Eden Valley and Angaston Districts,
Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Austr., Adelaide, 50.

$24 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Howchin, Walter, 1934: The Stone Implements of the Adelaide Tribe
of Aborigines, Adelaide.

Howitt, A. W., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-east Australia.
London.

McCarthy, F. D., 1946: The Stone Implements of Australia. Sydney.

Mountford, C. P., 1960: Decorated Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Ree. 8.
Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 13(4).

1963: Australian Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Rec. 8. Austr.
Mus., Adelaide, 14(3).
Schiirmann, Rev. C. W. 1879: The Port Lincoln Tribe. The Native
Tribes of South Australia. Adelaide.

DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES 27-29

PLATE 27
A-B. Slate scraper. Paradise, South Australia, K. 8. Parsons, collector, length 10.8 cm.,
breadth measured from notch, 6.7 cm., specimen Reg. No. A.42813 in 8. Austr. Museum,
O-D, ditto. Braehina Creek, 8. Austr., D. N, George, length 9.8 em., breadth 9.0 cm.,
A.30685.
B-F, ditto. Paradise, 8. Austr., EK. §. Parsons, length 11.5 em,, breadth 5.5. cm,
A.48090,
PLATE 25
A-B. Slate scraper. Findon, 8. Austr., E. J. Copley, length 12.0 em., breadth 6.0 em.,
A,21329,
G-D. ditto. Paradise, S. Austr., K. §. Parsons, length 11.2 em,, breadth 7.5 cm,,
A.42814,
E-F, ditto, Windon, 8. Austr., E. J. Copley, length 11.8 em., breadth 6.3 em., A.21340,

PLATE 29
A. Slate scraper. Jutland, S. Austr., N, B. Tindale, length 10.4 cm., breadth 6.3 cm.,
A.28972,
B. ditto. Christies Beach, S. Austr., N. B. Tindale, length 12.0 cm,, breadth 6.5 em..
A,28898,
C. ditto. Hookina, 8. Austr., P. Stapleton, leugth 7.2 em., breadth 6.6 em., 4.21311.

D. ditto. Sandy Creek, S. Austr., Adelaide Bushwalkers, length 11,0 em., breadth
7.5 em, A.36622,

E. ditto. Port Augusta, S. Austr., H. K. Bartlett, length 9.2 em., breadth 6.7 em.,
A.52925,

F. ditto. Brachina Creek, 5S, Austr., D. N. George, length 9.8 em., breadth 7.3 em.,
A.30686.

G, ditto. Glenelg, 8S, Austr., P. Stapleton, length 12.0 em., breadth 6.9 em., A.17326.
H. ditto. Cowandilla, 8. Austr., P. Stapleton, length 13.0 em., breadth 7.3 em., 4.17328.

Ree. S.A. Musnum Vou. 14, PLare 27

Sh dai i
* Paradise sa
KS Parsons
Mer se.
ALBA Go°

te
i

\-B Reniform. O-D Rounde E-F Elongate.
Slute Scrapers—Typical Forms.

Ta face pave a24.j)

Rec. S.A. Musnum Von. 14, Pharr 28

Slate Serapers~ Examples va

Surface Markings,

Ree, S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Poatn 29

* h4b622
Sahoy c

Slate Serapers—Typleal Forms and Variations,

AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, HONORARY ASSOCIATE IN ETHNOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

When the first Europeans visited the southern parts of Australia, they found both the
Tasmanian and the mainland aborigines wearing capes or rugs made from the skins of the
indigeneous creatures.

Although, in those early days, there would have been many thousands of those rugs in
use, few have survived the ravages of time. Two main factors are responsible for this; the
fact that, at death, everything belonging to the deceased, including his skin rug, was
buried with him (Howitt, 1845, p. 189) ; and that, during those boisterous days of
colonization, there were no institutions equipped, even if they were interested, in
preserving those highly perishable examples of aboriginal handicrafts.

AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS

By CHARLES P. MOUNTFORD, Honorary AssociaTs IN
Erunovosy, Soura Austratian Museum

Plates 30-33 and text fig. 1-5

INTRODUCTION

When the first Europeans visited the southern parts of Australia,
they found both the Tasmanian and the mainland aborigines wearing
capes or rugs made from the skins of the indigeneous creatures.

Although, in those early days, there would have been many
thousands of those rugs in use, few have survived the ravages of time.
Two main factors are responsible for this; the fact that, at death,
everything belonging to the deceased, including his skin rug, was
buried with him (Howitt, 1845, p. 189); and that, during those
boisterous days of colonization, there were no institutions equipped,
even if they were interested, in preserving those highly perishable
examples of aboriginal handicrafts.

As far as ean be ascertained, there are only seven rugs and two
decorated skins in existence. There are two complete rugs and a
single decorated skin in the National Museum of Victoria, two rugs
in the South Australian Museum, a complete rug in the Smithsonian
Institution of Washington D.C., another in the Western Australian
Museum, a badly damaged rug in Berlin and a single decorated skin
in the British Museum.

As it seems unlikely that many additional examples of skin rugs
will be located, this paper will reeord all known examples, discuss
their general distribution, the methods of manufacture and the function
of the designs on their surface. At the same time the writer will
assemble and discuss relevant information gathered from the writings
of early explorers and colonists about these articles of aboriginal
clothing.

DISTRIBUTION

Those early writings show that the aborigines of Tasmania,
Victoria, New South Wales, the southern half of South Australia and

526 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

the south-western districts of Western Australia all wore skin rugs
to keep themselves warm during the inclement weather. A number
of illustrations made by these early writers have been chosen to show
the rugs in use; plate 80 A, Peron and Freyeinet (1807-16, plate 15),
showing southern Tasmanians seated behind their wind-break; plate
30 B, Dumont D'Urville (1833, plate 24) depicting aboriginal groups
from King George’s Sound, southern Western Australia; plate 32 A,
Mitchell (1838, plate 31), two men on the Bogan River of northern
New South Wales wearing skin rugs; plate 82 B, Angas (1847, plate
18), an aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe of south-eastern South
Australia; and plate 31 B, Ratzel (1896, p. 364), a painting by G. Murtz
showing a family group, probably Victorian, resting in their camp.
The writer has also located in the collection of the British Museum,
a much-laded photograph of a Muriz sketeh (plate 31 A), showing
aborigines (probably in the same lveality as the Ratzel illustration)
capturing opossums, skinning them and drying their pelts, pegged to
rectunzular pieces of thick bark, in the front of their camp fire,
Mountford and Harvey (1941, facing p. 162), illustrate how the women
of the Adnjamatina tribe of the northern Flinders Ranges of South
Australia carry their children in a skin rug, and Tindale and Lindsay
(1963, plate 15) an aboriginal of the Jambina tribe of the Logan
Creek, east-central Queensland, wearing a decorated skin rng.

Monntlford (1960, fig. 1) depicted a decorated skin rug from
Condah, Victoria. In this paper he deseribes and illustrates five
additional rugs and two decorated skins; fig. 2, a rug from Echuea,
northern Victoria; fig. 8, from the Hunter River, New South Wales;
fig. 4, from the northern Flinders Ranges of Suuth Australia; fig. 5, a
skin cloak from Jarramungup, south-western Australia; plate 33 D,
from Yorke Peninsula, South Australia; plate 383A, an wnlocalized
skin from New South Wales, and plate 83B, another from the northern
Minders Ranges of South Anstralia.

On fig. 1, T have noted the localities where, according to records
both in literature and in museum registers, the aborigines used skin
rugs for clothing.

(1) Geographe Bay, south-western Australia (Peron, 1809,
p. 60).

(2) Jarramungup, south-western Australia (rug in Western
Australian Museum),

(3) King George’s Sound, southern Western Australia
(D’Urvyille, 1833, plate 24).

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 527

(4) Parnkalla tribe, Eyre Peninsula (Angas, 1847, plate 59,
no, 1).
(5) Marion Bay, Yorke Peninsula (rug in South Australian
Museum),
(6) Flinders Ranges, South Australia, skin in National
Museum of Victoria; rug in South Australian Museum.
(7) Lower Murray, South Australia (Angas, 1847, plate 42,
no. 3).

(8) Tatiara Tribe, south-eastern South Australia (Angas,

1847, plate 4, no. 3).

(9) Echuca, northern Victoria (rug in National Museum of
Victoria).

(10) Condah, south-western Victoria (Mountford, 1960, fig. 1).

(11) Gippsland, south-eastern Victoria (Howitt, 1904, p. 742).

(12) Yandah Station, northern New South Wales (Dunbar,
1943, p. 142).

(13) Narran, northern New South Wales (Parker, 1905, plate
31, p. 121).

(14) Bogan River, northern New South Wales (Mitchell, 1838,
p. 742).

(15) Kamilaroi Tribe, northern New South Wales (Greenway,
1910, p. 196).

(16) Hunter River, eastern New South Wales, rug in Smith-
sonian Institution.

(17) Maria Island, Tasmania (Peron, 1809, p. 75).

(18) South-west Cape, Tasmania (Peron and Freycinet,
1807-16, plate 18),

(19) Logan Creek, east central Queensland (Tindale and
Lindsay, 1963, plate 15).

This data suggests that the aborigines throughout Tasmania,
Victoria, New South Wales, central Queensland, the southern part of
South Australia and the south-western district of Western Australia,
all utilized the pelts of animals for clothing. Although there are no

records that the aborigines of the Great Australian Bight used skin
rugs, it is reasonable to expect that they did so,

528 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

NORTHERN
TERRITORY

WESTERN AUSTRALIA

SOUTH AUSTRALIA

e
cen

Fig. 1. Localities of aboriginal skin rugs mentioned in literature.

There is no evidence however, that the aborigines of northern
Queensland, the Northern Territory or north-western Australia used
skin rugs. This is understandable, for in those parts of the continent
the average temperature would be much higher than in the southern
half of the continent.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL, SKIN RUGS 529

TYPES OF SKIN RUGS

The skin rugs used as clothing by the aborigines of Australia vary
considerably in size and shape,

Tasmania

Peron (1809, p. 175), when describing a woman he saw at South-
west Cape, Tasmania states ‘‘She was almost entirely naked, with the
exception of the skin of a kangaroo, wherein she carried a little
female infant.’’ Later, on p. 217, when describing a number of men
he saw on Maria Island, eastern Tasmania, Peron refers to a man
‘©. older than the rest . . . had a skin of a kangaroo over his
shoulders’’.

Plate 30 A, which is a copy of Peron and Freycinet’s drawing
(1807-16) Atlas No. 1,") shows a number of Tasmanian aborigines,
most of them wearing small skin rugs; the woman with an infant is,
almost certainly, the same as mentioned by Peron (1809, p. 175),

South-western Australia

Peron (1809), described two meetings with the aborigines near
Cape Geographe, on the extreme south-west of Western Austraha. On
page 60, he wrote, ‘‘The native was an old man. . . he was entirely
naked except that he had the skin of a kangaroo over his shoulders,
which hung half way down his back’’. Later, on page 75, he noted,
when describing a larger group of aborigines, that, ‘‘. . . the savages
were entirely naked, excepting for a cloak made of the skin of a dog or
kangaroo, which covered the shoulders of a few of them”’,

Peron’s information was supported by a drawing of another early
explorer, D’Urville (1833, plate 24), (plate 30 B is a copy), which
shows the aborigines in King George’s Sound, southern Western
Australia, wearing what appears to be a cape (fig. 5) held by a cord
around their necks.

(1) This drawing, with the addition of another aboriginal, carrying a barbed spear in one
hand, a mainland type parrying shield in the other, and a stone axe in his belt and
titled ‘Aborigines of New South Wales’! was used as a frontispiece for the English
translation of Peron’s book, Foyage of Discovery to the Southern Hemisphere
(1801-04), Luckily, Peron’s detailed account (p. 75) of the aboriginal camp he saw at
South-west Cape, Tasmania, removes oll doubt that Peron and Freyeinet’s plate 18,
in vol, 1 of their atlas, is the original avd authentic drawing.

530 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Hammond (1933, p. 30), states that the rugs worn by the
aborigines of southern districts of Western Australia were made from
one to three skins, according to the size of the wearer, hanging as low
as the knees.

Hassel (19385, p, 276), when writing about the kangaroo of this
area writes that it ‘‘. . , contributes his skin for making cloaks and
rugs’’, Calvert (1894, p. 25), in his book on ‘The Aborigines of
Western Australia’ states that ‘‘in the colder parts of the continent
he (the aboriginal), sometimes wears a small kangaroo-skin cloak’?

Bates (1938, p. 60), states that the cloak of the aborigines in
southern Western Australia consisted of the skins of seven kangaroos,
The rug in the collection of the Western Australian Museum (fig. 5),
is also made of seven skins, sewn together in the form of a cape.

South Australia

Angas (1847, plate 8, no. 1), illustrates a mother and child from
the Adelaide tribe; another, his plate 18, no, 4 (plate 32 B is a copy),
shows an aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe of south-eastern South
Australia, and a third, his plate 8, no. 3, from the Parnkalla tribe of
Hyre Peninsula, all of whom are shown wearing skin cloaks that reach
below their knees. The skin rug from Marion Bay, Yorke Peninsula,
(plate 33 D), in the collection of the South Australian Museum, is
about four feet square, while the example from the Flinders Ranges
(fig. 4), made up of 36 skins, is approximately five feet long and
three feet wide.

Victoria
In Victoria, the skin rugs were much larger than those already
described, The Condah rug, described by Mountford (1960, fig. 1),
made up of 50 opossum skins, is approximately six feet long and five
feet wide, and the Echuca rug, described in this paper (fig. 2),
consisting of 81 skins, is seven feet, six inches long and five feet, six
inches wide,

In the Murtz sketch (plate 31 A), the rng worn by the aboriginal
on the left reaches well below his knees. On the other hand, the man
in the Ratzel illustration (plate 31 B), has only a single skin fastened
around his waist. The two women on the right, however, are wearing
voluminous decorated rugs.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS oa

V7:
Nh

Fig, 2. Aborigion! shin rug lrom Behies, northern Victorit

532 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

=—— ip =
2 E NN
== SSS = a
= SS - <K =
ECs 4
mA Se SS :
ES SE SEE
= em
S ae

\
ot, Aifdafe. DAM AT
il ih raen’ FE
AV 4 '
&/)\ COV at
EN a > © 7
=. (A i =
aN
US AMVC”
iS, Ne e 4
AE
f : vil i a e: |
Y IN % ‘ 71
) WS \ ge
\ sin Ki &S iy a
H1())))) Ks, f Ne
oy DK Wg 4
Of) AVE
OCS. yy RIE
\ ” Ni WW Al
0 ( BK ; i
oN a
ANN Mids f v="
AN SU ( =
A
UN)
\ KN =
uu Y) NLS ye
> J) fy y
@ 3
S )

MOUNTFORD—ARORIGINAT SKIN RUGS

7 oo
Pitre
Piy ry

AP
anne

cH
a a “aan

ry
ami
eo

= Ls ts t
gael erate Ata { iat
ai i ait Iwi fia ai
Bi Viavigralines: iguana
: ] a oH He a Hae
(midi, MN as

Loo :

534 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

New South Wales

The rug (fig. 3), from the Hunter River, New South Wales, made
up of 22 skins, is approximately five by four feet in area. Mitchell
(plate 32 A), depicts two aborigines on the Bogan River area of New
South Wales, one whose rug reaches to his knees, and the other
wearing what appears to be a single skin barely covering his body.

This survey shows that, although the rugs worn by the aborigines
of Victoria, New South Wales, Queensland and South Australia were
usually large enough to cover the whole body down to the knees, those
used by the Tasmanians and the natives of southern Western
Australia appear to have been considerably smaller in area. According
to Tindale and Lindsay (1963, plate 15) the skin rugs worn by the
aborigines of the Logan River of Queensland were almost as
voluminous as those worn by the Victorians.

TECHNIQUES OF MANUFACTURE

Seattered throughout the early Australian writings are many
details and several excellent descriptions of the techniques used by
the aborigines in the manufacture of their skin rugs.

The earliest of these records was by Daniel Bunce (1857, p. 75),
who, when describing his experience in Victoria wrote:—‘‘Many
opossums had been caught during our excursion, and the skins were
now pegged out on sheets of bark and stretched to their fullest
extent with wooden pegs . . . The points of these pegs, previously
hardened in the fire, had been scraped with a piece of broken glass
bottle . . . After the skins had been sufficiently stretched and dried,
they were curiously marked, the work of the men, animals, kangaroos,
emus, as well as human figures frequently represented by a piece of
glass, or when not, by the bowl of a metal spoon, filed sharp for the
purpose of scratching the skin when in the soft state. Prior to the
introduction of needles and thread, they (the aborigines) used the
finer tendons of the kangaroo and opossum for thread, and the
sharpened bone of a fish or kangaroo as a needle for sewing their
skin rugs’’.

Bunce’s evidence is supported by several independent sources.
Krefft (1862, p. 362), when writing of the customs of the aborigines
of the Murray and Darling Rivers states, ‘‘Nearly all the trees along
the river showed more or less, . . . where square pieces of bark for
drying their opossum skins on had been cut, often to the height of
30 feet above the ground’’.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS S35

An examination of the two Murtz sketches (plate 31), shows some
of the techniques mentioned by Bunce and Krefft. Ini the background
of plate 81 A, some men ave capturing opossums. On the extreme
left, one man has lita fire at the base of a holluw tree, while another
is waiting at (he top te club the opossnuin as it endeavours to escape
from {he sruoke. In the centre vf the illustration another aboriginal
is ascending the tree by means of a climbing vine in pursnit of an
opossum, whilst his companion, stick in hand, is waiting to kill the
creature when it jumps to the ground.

In the lelt foreground, a man, returmng to camp, is carrying a
uunther of Gpossums, other aborigines are skinning the ereatures,
Whose pelts, held on reetangles of thick bark of the gum tree with
wooden pegs, are drying around a camp-fire. These rectangles of
bark, similar to those previously mentioned by Krefft, have been
removed from the tree on the extreme right,

On plate 81 B, a Martz sketeh in Ratzel (1896, p. 364), a number
af opossum skins, now decorated with simple designs, but still pegged
out on the sqnares of bark, are drying beside the fire.

Although Bunce states that the skins were decorated with a piece
of glass or a sharpened spoon (obviously the effeets of civilization),
Smyth (1878, p. 349), states that ‘The mussel shell, v-born, is used
by the natives for scraping and preparing the skin for bags, rugs,
ete." Howitt (1904, p. 742), who claims that the aborigines did not
dress their skins, but merely dried them, states that ‘to make them
more pliable, they eut markings in the skin sides with mussel shell
(nanduwung).””

Dunbar (1948, p. 142), when deserihing the skin rugs of the
Ngemba tribe of the Darling River writes: ‘‘Skin rungs were made of
the skin of the doe kangaroo, murraway; this was stretched and dried
in the shade, rubbed with ashes, then with emu oil or goanna fat, and
pulled backwards and forwards over a stuooth-harked tree to make it
pliable. Other than this, no attempt was made at tanning. The skins
were ronghly trimmed and sewn together by threads of kangaroo-tail
sinews, and, in the cold weather, the cloak was worn with the fur side
inwards’’. Dunbar makes no reference to decorations on the inside
of the rugs.

Worsnop (1897, p. 15), described the manufacture of the skin rugs
of the South Australian aborigines thus, ‘‘Their opossum rugs, or
clonks of kangaroo skins, after having been stretched and dried before
a fire, or in the sun, are roughly trimmed and sewn together by

536 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

kangaroo sinews, the edges of the skin are pierced with a sharp-
pointed bone for the sinews to pass through. When a sufficient number
of skins are sewn together, the next operation is to ornament the inner,
or flesh side of the cloak, which is done by doubling over a part of the
skin, a few inches at a time, and scraping the narrow edge with a
flint, or the sharp edge of a shell. The design usually partook of a
zig-zag, or diamond pattern (see plate 32 B and plate 33 D), according
to the taste of the wearer’’?.

During the writer’s investigations of the Adnjamatana tribe of
the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia, the aborigines
showed him how they folded and scored their skins in a similar manner
to that described by Worsnop (1897). Plate 33 C also illustrates a
northern Flinders aboriginal demonstrating, on a completed rug, the
method of using a large stone implement, wtuna, to dress a skin.

Fig. 5. Rough sketch of kangaroo-skin cape from Jarramungup, south-western Western
Australia.

(2) The writer feels sure that Worsnop is wrong in one particular. The skins are decorated
before being sewn together. This is evident on an examination of the skin rug from
Marion Bay (plate 33 D), the skins from the northern Flinders Ranges (plate 33 B),
the Murtz illustration in Ratzel (plate 31 B), and the Condah rug (Mountford,
1960, fig. 1).

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 537

Edwards (1963), has deseribed a large series of kidney-shaped
stones, most of them from southern South Australia, whieh the
aborigines had used when preparing skins for their rugs.

Hammond (1933, p. 30), in deseribing the methods adopted by the
aborigines of Western Australia when making their bouka or
kangaroo skin capes (fig. 5) wrote: ‘After the kangaroo had been
skinned, the skin is pegged out in the usual way and left until half
dry. It is then smeared all over with grease. Using a small sharp-
edged stone, the natives would then scrape it until it was quite
flexible, occasionally working it with grease. When finished, it was as
pliable as any tanned skin. In making the bouka, the chosen skins
would be laid, side by side, on the ground, and the adjoining edges
would be trimmed with a sharp stone so that they met evenly. The
trimmed edges were sewn together with kangaroo sinews . . . The
sewing would be done by pricking holes in the skin with a wooden
needle . . , then pushing the sinews through with the fingers, The
stitehes were from a quarter to three-eighths of an inch apart, and
looked like a sort of blanket stitch. The children wore one-skin
boukas except in hot weather’,

Summarizing the available evidence on the manufacture of
aboriginal skin rugs, it wonld appear that the animal was skinned, its
pelt stretched on a sheet of bark, or on the hard ground, until dry,
or partly so. The skin was then dressed and on most, but not on all
occasions, decorated before it was trimmed and sewn together in the
form of a cape or a rug.

METHODS OF WEARING RUGS

In general, the aborigines on the mainland of Australia (plate
31 A, B), and in Tasmania (plate 30 A), wore their skin rugs by
passing one edge under the right arm and fastening it to the other
edge with a bone skewer on the left shoulder. This method of wearing
the cloak allowed perfect movement for both arms.

D’'Urville’s sketch (plate 30 B), of the aborigines of King Georges
Sound, Western Australia shows that skins were worn across the
shoulders in the same manner as a cape.

(3) The child in the foreground of D’Urville’s illustration (plate 30 B) is Wearing 4
single skin.

538 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Gouger (1838, p. 50), when writing of the Adelaide tribe says,
‘‘The women carry their children behind their backs in the part of
the kangaroo rug enveloping them, so tied that the upper part forms
a sort of a hood’’. Mountford and Harvey (1941, facing p. 162)
illustrated an aboriginal woman from the Adnjamantana tribe of the
northern Flinders Ranges, carrying her child in a similar manner.
The Tasmanian mother on plate 30 A, with her rug around the
shoulders, is holding a child in her arms; others are wearing their
rugs across their left shoulders.

DECORATIONS AND THEIR MEANINGS

There is no evidence that the aborigines of Tasmania or south-
western Australia used any designs on the inside of their skin rugs.
Those, however, who inhabited the southern districts of South
Australia decorated their rugs with diamond-shaped patterns (plates
32 B and 33 D), and in the northern Flinders with square designs
(fig. 4, and plate 33 B, C).

The few available illustrations, specimens in museum collections
and references in literature all show that the aborigines in both
Victoria and New South Wales decorated the inner surfaces of their
skin rugs with elaborate designs. Dawson (1881, facing page 8);
Ratzel (1896, p. 364), (plate 31 B); Murtz (plate 31 A, and Mitchell
(1888) (plate 32 A), all illustrated aboriginal men and women wearing
these decorated skin rugs. Ratzel (1896, p. 364) figures an unlocalized
skin rug; Mountford (1960, fig. 1) a rug from Condah, southern
Victoria and in this paper describes and illustrates a skin (plate 33 A),
from an unlocalized locality in New South Wales; a rug from Echuca,
northern Victoria (fig. 2), and another from the Hunter River, New

South Wales (fig. 3).

Many writers have made passing references to these decorated
rugs. Strutt (1858, p. 62), states, ‘‘The fur rugs were made from
opossum skins and decorated with various devices (designs), on the
inside in red and black;’’? Parker (1905, p. 121) records that “*. . .
Their opossum skin rugs used to have designs scratched on their
skin sides and also painted patterns . . .’’; Hull (1858, p. 62) also
stated that ‘‘The opossum-skin rug and cloak was much ornamented
with rude engravings of rivers, camps, animals, ete., ete., scratched on
the skin with a mussel shell’’.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 539

Smyth (1878, p, 228), when referring to the Victorian rugs, notes
that, ‘The inner sides ol! the opossum rugs . . . were usually
oTmanented, They (the aborigines) inscribed lines on the skin and
darkened them with powdered charcoal, fat and with other colours,
he figures were the same as those on their weapons, uamely, the
herring-bone, chevron, and saltier, with representations of animals
in outline . . . When an animal was figured, it is common, as in the
drawings | have given (fig. 48), to fill in the space around it with
lines’’, Later Smyth (1878 p. 294), quoting Bulmer said, ‘‘In
ornamenting their rugs, they copied from Nature. One man .. . got
his ideas from natural objects . . . the markings of a grub, called
Krag, and from the snakes and from the markings of lizards he
derived new designs. The natives, in adorning their rugs, and
weapons . . . inntated the forms of the plants and trees’’,

Bunee (1858, p, 103), writes, ‘*After the sking had been sufficiently
stretehed and dried, they were curiously marked, the work of the men,
animals, kangaroos, emus as well as human figures frequently
represented”.

There ave many different opinions among the early writers
regarding the meanings of the desizns which the aborigines inseribed
on their rugs. ‘The following is a selection of the opinions expressed;
Parker (1905, p. 21) records ‘*. . . have designs seratched on their
skin rugs, alsu painted patterns. Some say tribal marks, others, just
to look pretty and to distinguish one rom another’s’’; Frazer (1898,
p. 201), when speaking of body searring writes, “I think it is likely
.. . that eaeh family had its own mombarai which belonged to each
clan of the tribe, for a friend of mine tells me that . . . he had an
opossum me made for him by a man of the Kamilaroi tribe, who
marked it with his mombara. When the rug was shewn to another
black some time later, be at onee exclaimed, ‘I know who made this,
here is his mombarai’.’’ Greenway (1910, p. 198), when referring to
the burial customs of the same tribe states, ‘‘On the bare part of the
tree, certaim marks were cut to correspond with the marks on the
dead man’s "possum rug or cloak, for each man’s rug is particularly

marked to signify its partienlar ownership’? Howitt (1904, p. 741),
says that, ‘The markings are called waribruk and each man had his
own. Fig. 50 shows examples of the waribruk known to me’’,

This selection of writings from the early observers suggest that
some, but not all, of the symbols engraved on the skin rugs of eastern
and south-eastern Australia were the personal marks of the owners,
There must have been occasions, however, when the artist, to satisfy

540 RECORDS OF ‘THE S.A. MUSEUM

his aesthetic sense, would have decorated his rug with designs that
had no totemic meaning. ‘The simple designs on the South Australian
rugs were, without donbt, used only for decoration and to make the
skins more flexible.

DESCRIPTION OF RUGS

Fig. 2 illustrates an opossum skin rug colleeted at Echuea, on the
River Murray in 1853, Approximately 83 inches long and 69 inches
wide, it is made up of 76 decorated and seven undecorated skins, laid
in 11 rows. The individual skins have been skilfully sewn together
with fine sinews and the designs cut into the surface with some sharp
tool, possibly, as recorded by Smyth (1878, p. 349), with the sharp
edge of a mussel shell, A few of the skins in the lower left-hand corner
have been coloured with red oehre. Although this rug, which is
in the National Museum of Vietoria, hag been torn almost in halves,
it has been possible by means of photography, to obtain an almost
complete record of the designs engraved on its inner surface,

There is little doubt that some, if not all of the designs were
personal symbols or totemie marks of the owner, a number of them
being similar to those which Ilowitt (1904, fig. 50), stated belonged to
aborigines with whom he was acquainted.

Fig, 3, from the Hunter River, eastern New South Wales,
collected by Commander Wilkes on the United States exploring expedi-
tion of 1838-42, is now housed in the Smithsonian Institution in
Washington, D.C,

The rug, which is 58$ inches long and fifty inches wide contams
22 reecularly cnt skins of the brush-tailed opossum, ‘'richosurus
vulpecula, a smaller piece of the same material and a skin of the ereat
grey kangaroo (Macropus cangaru)™?.

The skins were laid in two rows of five skins, and two rows of
four, the kangaroo skin and the small piece of opossum skin filling in
the upper right-hand corner to complete the rectangle. The skins
are sewn edge to edge, with very fine stitching of cotton cord. The
number of designs on this rug that resemble each other suggest that
they too, like those on the Eechnea rug (fig. 2), may have represented
the personal marks of the owner’?

(4) These skins were identified by Dr, David Johnson, Curator of Mammals, Museum of
Natural History, Smithsonian Institution, Washington D,C,

(5) This rug has been figured by Schuster (1961, essay 27, fig. 7).

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 541

Fig. 4 illustrates a skin rug collected by the writer from the
aborigines of the northern Flinders Ranges of South Australia, It 18
made up of 41 rabbit skins, laid in six rows and sewn together with
sinews, probably thoge from the tail of a kangaroo. Hach skin had
been decorated with a varied and interesting series of square designs,

The aborigines explained that opossum skins would have made a
warmer and much more durable rug, bat, as, in more recent years,
these creatures had become scarve, they had been forced to use the
skins of rabbits,

Plate 33 D, from the collection of the South Australian Museum,
is a section of a skin rng made from opossum skins in recent years
by an old aboriginal woman of Yorke Peninsula in South Australia,
This rug, about four feet square, is decorated with diamond-shaped
patterns typical of southern South Australia (see plate 32 B),

Plate 33 A, is a single decorated skin from New South Wales.
Its specific locality is not recorded in the register of the British
Museum, where the specimen is housed. The diamond-shaped patterns
on this skin, partly coloured with some pigment, possibly red ochre,
are unlike those used in South Australia.

Plate 33 B is a single skin, collected in the northern Flinders
Ranges of South Australia, and now in the collection of the National
Museum of Victoria, The designs consist of squares similar to those
on the Flinders Range rug (fig. 4),

SUMMARY
This paper illustrates and describes all the known examples of
aboriginal skin rugs and decorated skins in existence, surveys and
early literature which describes the types of skin rugs used by the
aborigines of Australia, gives the techniques employed in their manu-
facture, the methods of wearing, the decorations inscribed on their
surfaces, and their possible meanings.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

For assistance in this research IT wish to acknowledge help
received from the Board of Governors of the Sonth Australian
Museum and for the use of their facilities; to the National Museum of
Victoria for permission to photograph and deseribe the aboriginal rugs
in their collection; to Mr, A. Massola, the Curator of Anthropology
of that Institution for his ever-ready help; tu Mr, IT, Crawford, the
Curator of Anthropology of the Western Australian Museum, for his
sketch of the Jarramungup rug, and tu Mr. B. Cranstone, Curator of
Oceanic Ethnography of the British Museum, for his kindly assistance-

542 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

BIBLIOGRAPHY
Angas, G. F., 1847: South Australia Illustrated.
Bates, D., 1938: The Passing of the Aborigines.
Bunce, Daniel, 1857: Australasiatic Reminiscences.
Calvert, Albert F'., 1881: The Aborigines of Western Australia,
Dawson, J., 1881: The Australian Aborigines.
Dunbar, G. K., 1943: Notes of the Ngemba Tribe of the Central
Darling River. Mankind, 3(5).
D’Urville, D., 1833: The Voyage of the Astrolabe.

Edwards, R., 1963: Preliminary survey of the aboriginal reniform
slate scrapers of South Australia. Ree. S. Austr. Mus.,
Adelaide, 14(3), pp. 515-524.

Frazer, John, 1893: The Aborigines of New South Wales. Journ.
Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 16.

Gouger, Robert, 1838: South Australia in 1837.

Greenway, Canon, 1910: The Kamilaroi Tribe. Science of Man,
N.S.W., 11(10).

Hammond, J. E., 1933: Winjan’s People.

Hassell, EH. in Davidson, D. S., 1935: Myths and Folk-lore of the
Wheelman Tribe of South-western Western Australia.
Folk Lore, 44.

Howitt, A. E., 1904: The Native Tribes of South-eastern Australia.

Hull, W., 1859: Evidence, Report of Select Committee of the Legisla-
tive Council of Victoria on Aborigines.

Krefft, G., 1862: Customs of the Aborigines of the Lower Murray.
Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 3.

Mitchell, T. L., 1838: Three Expeditions into the Interior of Eastern
Australia,

Mountford, C. P. and Harvey, Alison, 1941: Women of the Adnja-
matana Tribe. Oceania, Sydney, 12(2).

Mountford, C. P., 1960: Aboriginal Skin Rugs. Ree. 8. Austr. Mus.,
Adelaide, 13(4).

Parker, K, L., 1905: The Euahlayi Tribe.

Peron, M. F., 1809: A Voyage of Discovery to the Southern
Hemisphere.

MOUNTFORD—ABORIGINAL SKIN RUGS 543

Peron, M. F. and Freycinet, L., 1807-16: Voyage de Decouvertes Aux
Terres Australes, Atlas No. 1.

Ratzel, F., 1896: The History of Mankind.

Smyth, R. B., 1878: The Aborigines of Victoria, 2 vol.

Strutt, C. E., 1858: Report of the Select Committee of the Legislative
Council of Victoria on Aborigines.

Schuster, C., 1961: Observations on the Painted Designs of Patagonian

skin rugs. Essays in Pre-Columbian Art and
Archaeology, 27.

Tindale, N. B. and Lindsay, H. A., 1963: Aboriginal Australians,
Brisbane.

Worsnop, T., 1897: The Prehistoric Arts, Manufactures, Works,
Weapons, Etc. of the Aborigines of Australia.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES 30-33

PLATE 30

A. Tasmanian aborigines at South-West Cape, Tasmania, wearing skin rugs (Peron &
Freyeinet).

B. Aborigines of King George Sound, south-west of Western Australia, wearing skin
eapes (Dumont D'Urville).

PLATE 31
A, Aborigines (probably Victorian), catching opossums and drying skins (Murtz).

B. Family group (probably Victorian) in eamp, with decorated opossum skins, on
squares of bark, drying beside the camp fire (Murtz, in Ratzel).

PLATE 32
A, Aborigines of the Bogan River, New South Wales, wearing skin cloaks (Mitchell).
B. Aboriginal from the Tatiara tribe, South Australia, wearing skin rug (Angas).

PLATE 33
A. Decorated skin, New South Wales.
B. Decorated skin, Northern Flinders Ranges, South Australia.
C. Method of fleshing skin with stone implement, northern Flinders Ranges,
D. Section of decorated skin rug, Yorke Peninsula, South Australia.

Ree. S.A. Museum Von, 14, Puare 30

2abie =

cs =a

Tasmanians and Western Australians wearing skins,

To fae page Bada.)

Rec, S.A. Musnuat Vor. 14, Phare 31

Preparation of opossum skins.

Ree, SwA. Museum

Australians wearing skins.

Von. 14, Parr

Ree. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Para 33

Divoration of skins in Australia.

THREE NEW SPECIES OF THE GEKKONID LIZARD GENUS
DIPLODACTYLUS GRAY FROM AUSTRALIA

By ARNOLD G. KLUGE”), DEPARTMENT OF BIOLOGY, UNIVERSITY OF
SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA, LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

Summary

In preparation for a revision of the large and complex gekkonid lizard genus
Diplodactylus Gray a study was made of all the specimens deposited in Australian
university and museum collections. During this study a few specimens were discovered
which apparently represent three undescribed species. It is not surprising that these
populations appear to be restricted to two regions already supporting a large number of
plant and animal relicts. Two of the species are known only from the Carnarvon and
North-West Natural Regions of Western Australia and the third from central Australia.
All the new forms belong to the vittatus species group which at present includes byrnei
Lucas and Frost, conspicillatus Lucas and Frost, pulcher (Steindachner), steindachneri
Boulenger, tessellatus (Gunther), and vittatus Gray. This species group is characterized
by relatively long and slightly expanded digits with moderately large subapical plates,
preanal pores either present or absent and a cloacal spur consisting of a cluster of ridged
spine-like scales.

THREE NEW SPECIES OF THE GEKKONID LIZARD GENUS
DIPLODACTYLUS GRAY FROM AUSTRALIA

By ARNOLD G, KLUGE, Deparrmant or Biotocy, UNIVERSITY OF
Souruern Catrrornia, Los ANGELES, CALIFORNIA

Plates 34-35

In preparation for a revision of the large and complex gekkonid
lizard genus Diplodactylus Gray a study was made of all the specimens
deposited in Australian university and museum collections. During
this study a few specimens were discovered which apparently represent
three undescribed species. It is not surprising that these populations
appear to be restricted to two regions already supporting a large
number of plant and animal relicts. Two of the species are known
only from the Carnarvon and North-West Natural Regions of Western
Australia and the third from central Australia. All the new forms
belong to the vittatus species group which at present includes
byrnei Lucas and Frost, conspicillatus Lucas and Frost, pulcher
(Steindachner), steindachneri Boulenger, tessellatus (Gunther), and
vittatus Gray. This species group is characterized by relatively long
and slightly expanded digits with moderately large subapical plates,
preanal pores either present or absent and a cloacal spur consisting
of a cluster of ridged spine-like seales.

I wish to extend my gratitude to the curators of the following
institutions for their assistance during my study tour and for the
opportunity fo describe specimens under their care: Harold G, Cogger,
Australian Museum (A.M.), F, J. Mitchell, South Australian Museum
(S.A.M.) and Glen M, Storr, Western Australian Museum (W.A.M.).
I also wish to thank A. R. Main of the Department of Zoology,
University of Western Australia (U.W.A.) for reading the manuscript.

Diplodactylus galeatus sp. nov.

Holotype: S.A.M. R973. Collected in the Stuart Range, South
Australia by Henry Greenfield on 15 October, 1920.

(1) Postgraduate Fulbright Scholar, during 1961-62, at the University of Western Australia.

$46 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Diagnosis: Diplodactylus galeatus can be distinguished from all
ether members of the vittatus species group by the following combina-
tion of characters: (a) dosal body scales moderately large and
swollen; (b) tail relatively long, round in crogs section, covered
dorsally with regular annuli of slightly enlarged tubercles; and (rc)
a colour pattern consisting of a continuons post-orbital streak over
occipital region and a series of large conspicuous. circular marke on
dorsum of body (plate 34, A).

Description of holotype: Wead moderately deep; eye large: snout
relatively long; rostral rectangular, slightly more than twice as wide
as high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent; nostril small, directed
posterolaterally, surrounded by rostral, first supralabial (broadly in
contact), two supranasals and four postnasals; anterior-most anpra-
nasal large, meeting counterpart on midline (internasal absent);
scales immediately posterior to supranasals slightly enlarged and
swollen; seales of snout moderately large, 9/11 between postnasals
and preocular granules (left and right sides respectively); 8/9 supra-
labials, slightly decreasing in height posteriorly; 24 seales between
centrolateral margins of orbits (excludine those of dorsal eyelids) ;
2/4 extremely small spinose scales on posterior border of dorsal
eyelid; mental almost qnadrangniar, longer than wide; 10/11 infra-
labials; scales bordering mental and infralabials slightly enlarged and
flattened, gradually grading into small conical granules of throat
region; external ear opening relatively small, almost round, slightly
below level of angle of jaw; occipital and ternporal regions of head
covered with moderately large conieal scales; dorsal surface of body
eovered with large swollen scales separated by minute triangular
granules (pl. 84, A); enlarged dorsal body scales rapidly grade into
conical granules of sides and venter; granules of venter slightly
imbricate, one-half times as large as swollen dorsals; limbs covered
with relatively small imbricate conical scales; digits relatively long,
narrow and depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with single row of
enlarged swollen seales; 7/7 swollen seales covering inferior surface
of fonrth finger, 9/8 covering fourth toe; subapical plates large, much
wider than more proximal width of digit; nails extremely short,
strongly curved, not projecting distally beyond claw sheath; tail
moderately long, slightly swollen at base; tail covered above with large
spinose tubercles in regular annuli which are in contact or separated
by one or two rows of smaller conical scales; subcandals approxi-
mately one-half times as large as dorsal tubercles; male; cloacal spur

KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS S47

consists of cluster of 8/6 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines;
preanal pores absent.

Dorsal ground colour uniform yellowish-brown (probably slightly
faded due to preservation); dark brown postocular streak continuous
behind occipit, encloses uniform yellow region (plate 34, A); small
yellow spot on side of neck; four large light diamond-shaped marks
on dorsum of body (one pectoral, two midbody and one pelvic) ; dorsal
surface of tail with faint indication of four irregular enclosed or open
large circular marks; all dorsal body and tail colour patterns bordered
by very dark brown; all ventral surfaces immaculate white,
chromatophores absent.

Snout-vent length 52.7 (all measurements given in millimeters) ;
length of tail 27.0; length of head 14,8; length of snont 5.4; diameter
of orbit 4.1; distance between eye and ear 4.8; width of head 10.2;
distance between axilla and groin 23.4; length of fore limb 20.3; length
of fourth finger 3,8; length of hind limb 25,0; length of fourth toe 4.2.

Variation: In addition to the holotype, Diplodactylus galeatus is
known from the following specimens: (a) S.A.M., 21563,
Hermanneburg, Northern Territory and (#) A.M. R11995, 4 miles north
of Alice Springs, Northern Territory. These specimens agree with
the holotype in all important characters and exhibit the following
variation: dorsomedian rostral crease one-fourth total height of
rostral; two to five, ave. 3.2, postnasals; eleven to twelve, avg. 11.5,
scales between postuasals and preocular granules; nine supralabials;
twenty-four to twenty-eight, avg, 26.0, scales between centrolateral
margins of orbits; three to four, avg. 3.5, extremely small spinose
scales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; mental lanceolate, slightly
to much longer than wide; ten to twelve, avg. 11.0, infralabials; scales
bordering mental and infralabials small to slightly enlarged; external
ear opening very small; dorsal surface of body covered with moderate
to very large swollen scales; minute triangular dorsal granules absent
or extremely small; sides of body and venter covered with small
slightly flattened imbricate scales; seven to eight, avg. 7.8, swollen
seales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, eight to eleven, avg.
9.3, covering fourth toe; nails extremely short to long, not or but
slightly extending beyond claw sheath; tail relatively short in S.A,M,.
R1563 (absent in A.M. R11995); annnli of large spinose tubercles of
tail in contact or separated by one to four rows of smaller conical
scales; subeaudals slightly smaller than dorsal tubereles of tail; both
males; cloacal spur consists of cluster of five to six, avg, 5.3, spines;
dorsal ground ecolonr uniform yellow or dark reddish-brown; no

548, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

indication of spot on side of neck; four to five large light almond-
shaped or irregular circular marks on dorsum of body (one pectoral,
two to three midbody and one pelvic); dorsal surface of tail devoid
of colour pattern,

Relationships: Within the vittatus species group, galeatus appears
to be most closely related to tesseliatus. This relationship is inferred
from their similar head and body proportions and the type of midbody
and tail scalation. Diplodactylus galeatus can easily be distinguished
from tessellatus by its peeuliar colonr pattern (in tessellatus the
dorsal surfaces of the head and body are uniform or marbled grayish-
brown). Diplodactylus tessellatus is known from the Fiverard Ranges,
South Australia and Newcastle Waters, Northern Territory.

Htymology: The specific name is derived from the past-participle
of the Latin word galeu, meaning covered with a helmet, thus drawing
attention to the occipital cap formed by the continuous dark brown
postocular streak (plate 84, A).

Diplodactylus wmitchelli sp. nov.

Holotype: WAM. R14828. Collected at Coolawanyah home-
stead, Pilbara Division, Western Australia, by F. J. Mitchell on
17 July, 1958,

Diagnosis: Diplodactylus mitchelli can he distinguished from all
other members of the wvittatus species gronp by its larger size,
relatively large and flattened dorsal body seales and colour pattern
(plate 34, B),

Description of holotype: Wead slightly depressed; eye large;
snout long; rostra) rectangular, almost two and one-half times wider
than high; dorsomedian rostral crease slightly more than one-fourth
total height of rostral; nostril moderately large, directed dorso-
laterally, surrounded by rostral, first supralabial (broadly in contact),
two large supranasals and three postnasals; anterior-most supranasal
extremely large, broadly in contaet with counterpart on midline (inter-
nasal absent); single very large flat scale iromediately posterior to
supranasals; scales of snout moderately large and swollen, 10/11
between postnasals and preocular granules (left and right sides
respectively); 8/7 large supralabials, of equal height to below pupil;
24 scales between centrolateral margins of orbits (excluding those of
dorsal eyelid) ; frontal region strongly concave; 4/3 very small spinose
scales on posterior border of dorsal eyelid; mental lanceolate, slightly
more thau twice as long as wide; 10/10 infralabials, rapidly decreasing

KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS 549

in size posteriorly; two rows of large flattened postmentals, rather
sharply defined from small conical granules of throat region; external
ear opening very small, oval, at level of angle of jaw; occipital and
temporal regions of head covered with moderately large oval scales;
mid-dorsal surface of body covered with very large slightly
imbricate plate-like scales, two to two and one-half times larger than
small imbricate cycloid ventrals; enlarged plate-like scales of dorsal
body surface vradually grade into smaller and more imbricate scales
of sides of body (plate 34, B); limbs covered with moderately large
slightly imbricate conical scales; digits very long, narrow and
depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with single row of enlarged
swollen scales; 8/9 swollen seales covering inferior surface of fourth
finwer, 8/0 covering fourth toe; subapical plates very large, much
wider than more proximal width of digit; nail very short, strongly
eurved, not projecting distally beyond claw sheath; tail regenerated—
very short and bulbous, covered with large swollen square scales
forming regular annuli (plate 34, B); male; cloacal spur consists of
cluster of 7/6 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines; preanal
pores absent.

Dorsal ground colour reddish-brown; dorsal surface of head
uniform light brown; dark brown postocular stripe very conspicnous,
ending abruptly above ear opening; vertebral region of body white,
projecting laterally in form of serration, bordered by dark brown
(pl, 34, B); dorsal surfaces of fore limbs almost uniform light brown,
obvious irregular dark brown spots on dorsal surfaces of hind limbs;
throat region immaculate white, all other ventral surfaces sparsely
eovered with brown chromatophores, most heavily concentrated on
palms and soles.

Snout-vent. length 60.5 (all measurements given in millimeters) ;
length of tail 27.2; length of head 17.1; length of snout 6.2; diameter
of orbit 4.4; distance between eye and ear 5.8; width of head 11.3;
distance between axilla and groin 27,8; length of fore limb 23.3;
length of fourth finger 4,9; length of hind limb 29.4; length of fourth
toe 5.3,

Variation: In addition to the holotype, Diplodactylus mitchellt is
known from the North West and Pilbara Divisions from the following
specimens: (a) U.W.A. (uneatalogued), Shothole Canyon, 12 miles
north-northwest of Learmonth, North West Cape, (b) 8.A.M. R4280 and
W.A.M, R14824, Coolawanyah homestead, and (c) S.A.M. R4281, at
waterhole in Tambrey Creek at Tambrey homestead, These specimens

$50 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

agree with the holotype in all important characters and exhibit the
following variation: rostral slightly more than twice to more than two
and one-half times wider than high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent
to one-fourth total height of rostral; two supranasals and one to four,
avg. 2.3, postnasals; scales immediately posterior to supranasals
moderately large and flat; ten to thirteen, avg. 11,3, scales between
postnasals and preoenlar granules; seven to eight, avg. 7.4, supra-
labials, equal or slightly decreasing in height posteriorly; twenty-four
to twenty-eight, avg. 25.5, seales between centrolateral margins of
orbits; one to four, avg. 2.5, spinose seales on posterior border of
dorsal eyelid; nine to eleven, avg. 10.4, infralabials; postmentals only
slightly enlarged to very large and flat; mid-dorsal surface of body
covered with moderately large tu very large, slightly swollen or plate-
like scales, one and one-half to three times larger than ventrals;
seven to nine, avg. 8.0, swollen seales covering inferior surface of
fourth finger, eight to ten, avg. 91, covering fourth toe; tail of
specimen from North West Cape unregenerated—relatively short,
slightly swollen, dorsal surface covered with large oval slightly
imbricate or juxtaposed scales forming regular annuli, subcaudals
more flattened and imbricate (tails of all other specimens absent or
regenerated and similar to holotype); W.A.M. R14824 juvenile female,
remaining epecimens adult males; cloacal spur in males consists of
cluster of seven to ten, avg. 8.2 spines} dorsal ground colour yellow
to dark reddish-brown; postocular stripe absent; vertebral region of
body white with lateral serration or an overall reticulation; dark
brown spots either present or absent on dorsal surfaces of fore and
hind limbs; ventral surfaces of body and limbs with or without sparse
covering of brown chromatophores; tail of North West Cape specimen
with light brown reticulation similar to dorsum of body,

Relationships; The specific relationship of mitchelli within the
vittatus species group is not clear. Superficially, mitchelli appears to
be most closely related to wittatus, however, there are obvious
similarities to both galeatus and tessellatus.

Etymology: This species is named in honour of Mr. F, J, Mitchell,
who collected the holotype and who has made many valuable
contributions to Australian herpetology.

Diplodactylus savagei sp. nov.

Holotype: W.A.M. R143269. Collected at Marble Bar, Pilbara
Division, Western Australia, by Glen M. Storr on 22 September, 1960.

KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS S51

Diagnosis: Diplodaciylus savagei can be distinguished from all
other members of the vittatus species group by the following combina-
tion of characters: (a) rostral large and hexagonal, (b) rostral crease
absent, (c) anterior nasal present (rostral excluded from nostril),
(d) only anterior-most supralabial enlarged (not in contact with
nostril), all other labials replaced by granules, (¢) dorsal eyelid
undifferentiated, (f) spinose scales on posterior border of ocular orbit
absent, and (9) colonr pattern of large irregular white spots
(plate 35, A).

Description of holotype: Head moderately depressed; eye small;
snout relatively long; rostral very large, hexagonal, slightly less than
twice as wide as high; dorsomedian rostral crease absent; nostril
large, direeted dorsally, surrounded by anterior nasal (rostral
excluded), single supranasal and four postnasals; anterior nasal very
large, borders first supralabial; supranasal large, meets counterpart
on midline (internasal absent); seales of snont small and conical,
11/13 between postnasals and preocular granules (left and right sides
respectively); anterior-most supralabial large, remaining labials
replaced by 19/20 small grannies; 32 scales between centrolateral
margins of orbits (ineluding those of dorsal eyelid); dorsal eyelid
undifferentiated; spinose scales on posterior border of ocular orbit
absent; montal very large, slightly more than twice as wide as long,
bordered by seven seales (including first infralabial granule); infra-
labials absent, replaced by 26/26 small granules; scales bordering
mental moderately large, gradually grading into conical granules of
throal, region; external ear opening incoispicuous, represented by
small depression slightly below angle of jaw; dorsal and lateral
surfaces of head and body covered with small conical granules (plate
35, A), equalling size of moderately imbricate ventrals; limbs covered
with small slightly imbricate conical granules; digits moderately short
aud broad, very depressed; subdigital surfaces covered with two raws
of enlarged swollen seales (plate 35, B); 6/7 transverse series of
swollen scales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, 6/6 covering
fourth toe; subapical plates large, slightly wider than more proximal
width of digit; nail short, strongly curved, not projecting distally
beyond claw sheath; tail regenerated; male; cloacal spur consists of
cluster of 12/11 sharply pointed strongly projecting spines; preanal
pores absent.

Dorsal ground colour dark brown; large irregular white spots
randomly scattered over dorsal and lateral suriaces of neck and hody

552 RECORDS OF THE §.A. MUSEUM

(plate 35, A); canthus rostralis and supralabial margin white; inter-
orbital and occipital regions covered with irregular white marks; some
indication of small white spots on dorsal surfaces of limbs; ventral
surfaces of head and body immaculate white, devoid of chroma-
tophores; ventral surfaces of limbs covered with some chromotophores,
becoming heavily concentrated on palms and soles,

Snout-vent length 42.7 (all measurements are given in milli-
meters); length of head 8.2; length of snout 3.8; diameter of orbit 2.0;
‘listarice between eye and ear 2.4; width of head 6.5; distance between
axilla and groin 20,7; length of fore limb 13.8; length of fourth finger
2.6; length of hind limb 14.5; length of fourth toe 3.2,

Variation: In addition to the holotype, Dipladactylus savaget is
known from the Pilbara Division from the following® specimeris:
(a) S.A.M, R3464 (2 specimens) Pilgangoora Well and (b) S.A.M.
R4282 Coolawanyah homestead, These specimens agree with the
holotype in all important characters and exhibit the following varia-
tion; rostral slightly less to more than twice as wide as highs; four to
six, avg, 4.5, postnasals; anteriornasal and supranasal separated from
counterparts by one to two, avg. 1.3, internasals; fourteen to fifteen,
ave. 14.2, scales between postnasals and preocular granules; fifteen to
seventeen, avg. 16.2, granules bordering supralabial margin; thirty-
one to thirty-six, avg. 33.0, scales hetween centrolateral margins of
orbits; mental slightly less than twice as wide as long, bordered by
five to six, avg. 5.3 scales; twenty-five to twenty-seven, avg. 26.5,
granules bordering infralabial margin; external ear opening very
small; scales covering dorsal and lateral surfaces of head and body
slightly imbricate; six to seven, avg. 6.7 transverse series of swollen
scales covering inferior surface of fourth finger, seven to nine, avg.
7,8, covering fourth toes tails absent; all females; cloacal spur consists
of a cluster of five to fourteen, avg, 9.7, slightly enlarged soft scales;
moderately large irregular white spots distinct or beginning to become
confluent; only faint indication of chromatophores on palms and soles.

Relationships: Diplodactylus savagei appears to be closely related
to consyrcilatus, This assumption is inferred from their similar
rostral shape and absence of a rostral crease, type and arrangement
of seales hordering the nostril, absence of enlarged labials,
undifferentiated dorsal eyelid, absenve of spinoge seales on posterior
border of ocular orbit, and size and shape of mental. Diplodactylus
savaget can be distinguished from conspicillatus by the size of its
subapical plates and the size and arrangement of its infradigital

KLUGE—NEW AUSTRALIAN GECKOS 553

lamellae (plate 35, B) and its colour and colour pattern (conspicillatus
is a marbled brown). In the Pilbara Division conspicillatus has been
collected at Yandeyarra and Mundabullangana Stations.

Etymology: This species is named in honour of Dr. Jay M.

Savage, whose interest in herpetology has stimulated all those students
who have come in contact with him.

DESCRIPTIONS OF PLATES 34-35

PLATE 34
A. A dorsal view of the holotype (S.A.M. R973) of Diplodactylus galeatus.
B. A dorsal view of the holotype (W.A.M, R14823) of Diplodactylus mitchelli,

PLATE 35
A. A dorsal view of the holotype (W.A.M. R14369) of Diplodactylus sawaget.

B. A yentral view of the fourth toe showing the comparative sizes of the subapical

plates and subdigital lamellae of Diplodactylus conspicillatus and Diplodactylus sawvaget
(right).

Rie. SAL Mirseun Vou. 14, PLarr 34

To face pode Soa

Vou. 14, Prarr 35

S.A. Museum

Rec.

—

el Mee esa Nea Mes IOS MeNNe maT |

A TJURUNGA-LIKE STONE PENDANT FROM
NEW SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, CURATOR OF ANTHROPOLOGY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

This paper records a stone tjurunga-like object or pendant with carved designs, from
Coolamon in the Albury district, New South Wales. The finding also of portion of a stone
tjurunga, without markings, from the Boulia district of Queensland is reported

In July 1960 the Rev. H. K. Bartlett drew my attention to the report of the finding of a
stone tjurunga-like object, by Mr. William Eisenhauer, while he was slashing burrs on his
father’s property at “Bonnie Doon”, three miles west of Coolamon, in the Albury district
of New South Wales.

A TJURUNGA-LIKE STONE PENDANT FROM
NEW SOUTH WALES

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Curator or AnTHROPOLOGY,
Sourn AvustraLiAN Museum

Fig. 1-4

SUMMARY

This paper records a stone ¢jurunga-like object or pendant with
carved designs, from Coolamon in the Albury district, New South
Wales. The finding also of portion of a stone tjurwnga, without
markings, from the Boulia district of Queensland is reported.

INTRODUCTION

In July 1960 the Rev. H. K. Bartlett drew my attention to the
report of the finding of a stone tywrunga-like object, by Mr. William
Hisenhauer, while he was slashing burrs on his father’s property at
‘Bonnie Doon’’, three miles west of Coolamon, in the Albury district
of New South Wales. A photograph showed the specimen to be of
interest and Mr. Bartlett, having corresponded with Mr. Eisenhauer,
received it as a gift in January 1961. In July 1962 he presented the
specimen to the South Australian Museum, where it is now registered
as No, A.54131, The specimen is described herein. Opportunity also
is taken to record another stone ftjurwnga-like object from the Boulia
district of Queensland (fig. 1-2).

DESCRIPTION

The Coolamon specimen (fig. 3-4) is fashioned from a natural
pebble of indurated gritty mudstone, reddish-brown in colour, both on
the weathered surface and below it; broken places show there is little
change of colour within the stone. The specimen has been lying in
the surface soil of land which has been ploughed periodically for
some years and bears score marks either of tines or of plough shares
which have passed over it and mutilated parts of the surface,
fortunately without seriously interfering with rather deeply incised
designs carved on its surfaces. The length of the stone is 17.3 em.,
its greatest width is 5.0 cm. and its general thickness ranges between
1.9 and 2.2 em.

556 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

a a N.B.T.

Fig. 1-4. Stone tjurunga-like objects.
1. Portion of an example from Boulia River, Queensland (specimen in Nielsen Collection).
2, Transverse section through it.

3-4. Two faces of specimen from Coolamon, New South Wales (specimen A.54131 in
8.A. Museum). Seale is to be read in centimeters.

TINDALE—ABORIGINAL STONE PENDANT 557

The pebble from which it was fashioned had rounded margins
and tapered to one extremity where, in manufacture a hole was drilled
by boring cup-shaped depressions from eaeh side until they met in the
middle of the substance of the stone, The diameter of this circular
hole is 24 mm. In drawing the accompanying illustrations (fig. 3
and 4) the superficial injuries caused by plough marks have been
ignored. The effeets were chiefly confined to abrasion and incisions
alfecting the continuity of the transverse marks; where the original
lines have been obscured or lost the missing portions are indicated by
dotted lines. The damage in no way affects the interpretation of the
markings. The margin distant from the pierced hole bas reeeived
some damage; this probably was done before its defacement by the
plough, Designs from the two surfaces ure shown in the illustrations;
these are reproduced at about two-thirds natural size; the seale with
the drawings should be read as indicating centimetres. The markings
on the stone are rather crudely incised, varying in depth of cutting
from slight scratches to scovings up to 2 mim. in depth, The deepest
cutting is in the cirealar figure with its radiating lines, The lateral
margins bear faint well-worn traces of short incisions; these are
placed not quite symmetrically in midline, so that viewed from a flat
faee they tend to be visible only on one of the two lateral margins.
The exception is that at least three of the long transverse lines on the
face with the civenlar design continue faintly over the edge to link
with those faint margmal notches, which otherwise chiefly are visible
from the opposite face and from the side.

Recently (September 1962) a visit was made to Lake Menindee
with Dr. R. Tedford and Mr, G. Pretty, At Menindee township Mr.
J. H. Nielsen showed ime a broken portion of a stone tjurunga in his
collection (fig. 1-2), Lt is made from a smooth, fine-grained sandstone
of dark colour, is without ornament, but has been pierced with a hole
at one extremity, As in the Coolamon eéxample, this hole was bored
by drilling in from both surfaces, until the holes met in the middle.
The locality given for the specimen was Boulia River, Queensland;
it remains in Mr. Nielsen’s possession,

The length of the preserved portion of the Boulia specimen is
15.1 em., its greatest diameter being 8.8 cm., and its thickness 0.7 em.
When intact the tjurimga may have been about 25 em, in length with
a maxinumn width close to 9 em. The general thickness was rather
uniform suggesting that the sandstone from which it was made is of
a rather regularly fissile nature.

538 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

DISCUSSION

The use of the term tjurunga in association with the stone pendant
from Coolamon, New South Wales, relates purely to its physical form,
It is tjurunga-like but it could conceivably once have been either an
ornamental pendant or an object of magical significance. Because of
its thickness it does not seem effective as a sound-making bull-roarer
and would be clumsy if swung in the fashion of such an instrument.
When first mentioned in the press report it was regarded as a form
of cylindro-conical stone.

It is rather a crudely conceived object made on a natural pebble
of rather soft mudstone. It has been drilled for suspension by a cord
or string.

The designs on it were possibly engraved with a piece of stone,
using a sawing action; the euts often suggest multiple tu and fro
movements of the tool with occasional change of position or perhaps
ulteration to edge of the incising tovul by fracturing, leading to varia-
tions in the scratches in the grooves.

The parallel series of incised lines cut on it are similar to ones
on some ¢ylindro-eonical stones from the Darling River district and
also match others found on flat slate pebbles, from the Flinders
Ranges, South Australia, such as have been recorded principally by
Cooper (1947, 1954).

The bird tracks depicted are similar to ones found on wooden
weupous, on slate scrapers, as rock carvings in many places, and as
tracks painted in rock shelters. Because they depict and symbolize
usually specific birds there is not much reason for stylistic departure
from actual tracks. No attempt has been made to identify the specific
bird registered by the tracks,

The circular figure with radiating lines which is a prominent
feature of the stone is yery reminiscent of a large carving present on
the roof of Devon Downs rock shelter in South Australia, as may be
noted by comparing it with the figure published by Hale and Tindale
(1930, fig. 246). Descriptively this was called a ‘‘sun’’ design,
following the conventions of our own culture, A Maraura tribe
aboriginal, in 1938, drew a design reminiscent of it while telling a
story about Hayle and the Crow. His version is figured by Tindale
(1939, p, 256, fig. 5). It there happened to represent men sleeping
around a magic tree, It would appear that the design could have had
any one of a number of interpretations; one suggestion from our own
culture is that it possibly is intended to depict female genitalia.

TINDALE—ABORIGINAL STONE PENDANT $59

The specimen from Boulia River is not critically localized ; it was
received by Mr. Nielsen indirectly from a third party. It may suggest
an eastward extension of the use of tjurunga-like stone objects and
records the employment of a stone type other than the phyllitic
material favoured by Aranda, Kukatja and kindred people of the
MacDonnell Ranges.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

We are indebted both to Rev. H. K. Bartlett for his efforts on
our behalf and to Mr. Hisenhauer for consenting to have the specimen
lodged in the Museum collection.

Mr. J. H. Nielsen kindly permitted the examination of his
collection and assisted us in other ways.

Opportunity is taken to note the several courtesies extended to us
by Mr. N. O. Farrar of Bootingee Station, by Mr. R. May and by
Mr. G. Packer, on whose land we collected specimens during our visit
to Lake Menindee district. Mr. A. L. Blight reported to us several
archaeological and palaeontological finds which are now being studied.

REFERENCES CITED
Cooper, H. M., 1947: Mankind, Sydney 3(10) : 292-298.
1954: Ree. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 11: 97-103.
Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1930: Ree. 8. Austr. Mus., Adelaide,
4: 145-218.
Tindale, N. B., 1939: Rec. 8S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 6: 243-261.

YOUNG FEMALE PIGMY SPERM WHALES (KOGIA BREVICEPS)
FROM WESTERN AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By HERBERT M. HALE, HON. ASSOCIATE,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Kogia breviceps is recorded from Western Australia for the first time. Also, a juvenile
female from South Australia is described; this has a conspicuous bracket-like marking
behind the eye, considered by some to be a characteristic of the genus, and differs
considerably in skeletal characters from the western young female.

YOUNG FEMALE PIGMY SPERM WHALES (KOGIA BREVICEPS)
FROM WESTERN AND SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By HERBERT M. HALE, Hon. Associate, Sourn AvusTRALIAN
Museum

Plates 36-41 and text fig. 1-11]

SUMMARY

Kogia breviceps is recorded from Western Australia for the first
time. Also, a juvenile female from South Australia is described;
this has a conspicuous bracket-like marking behind the eye, considered
by some to be a characteristic of the genus, and differs considerably
in skeletal characters from the western young female.

INTRODUCTION

T am indebted to my friend Dr. W. D. L. Ride, Director of the
Western Australian Museum, for the opportunity of describing a
young female Kogia from the south-west coast of Australia and also
for the information concerning it recorded below.

On the evening of September 18, 1959, two men observed a school
of ‘‘porpoise-like animals’’ in the neighbourhood of Leighton Beach,
near Fremantle, the port of Perth, in Western Australia. At 10 a.m,
on the following day passers by saw a small whale ashore and still
alive on the Leighton Beach. Mr. N. Steward reported the occurrence
to Dr. Ride who, with some members of his staff, collected the
specimen at 4 p.m. on the same day—September 19, 1959. It proved
to be a female approximately 220 cm. in length. A fibre-glass cast
of the whale and its skeleton are preserved in the Western Australian
Museum.

In the small hours of the morning of September 12, 1961, a young
female Pigmy Sperm Whale, reported by some observers as a
‘“norpoise’’, or the calf of a Humpback seen swimming nearby, was
stranded on a soft sandy beach, two miles north of Grange, on the
eastern side of St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia. This Kogia was
photographed by the press on the same morning, and I am indebted to

562 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The News and The Mail of Adelaide for the photograph reproduced
on plate 36, B. Soon afterwards the whale was brought to the Museum
by members of the staff. It exhibited no barnacle sears, but numerous
recent short cuts were present on the lateral and, particularly, ventral
surfaces, possibly caused by the nearby extensive Pinna beds.

This example came ashore during calm weather, Its complete
skeleton is housed in the South Australian Museum.

As with other small whales, kogias are sometimes referred to by
casual observers as ‘‘blackfish’’ (for example see Gunther, Hubbs and
Beal, 1955, p. 263 and 269; also Hale, 1959, p. 337) or ‘‘porpoises”’
(Manville and Shanahan, 1961, p. 270), one of the reasons why
strandings are not always immediately reported and, indeed, probably
often disregarded.

WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FEMALE, APPROXIMATELY 220 cm. IN
BODY LENGTH (W. AUST. MUS. REG. NO. M.4519),

External Characters

According to measurements kindly supplied by Mrs, Kaye Thies
of the Western Australian Museum, and to photographs taken by
Dr. Ride of the animal on the beach, the snout was very short, about
2.0 per cent in the body length, while the dorsal fin was situated a
little anterior to the middle of the body length, The greatest length
of the pectoral limbs was about three times that of the width,

The snout was blunt and deep, rounded above and descending
steeply and only slightly obliquely, before curving back only a short.
distance ahove the most anterior point of the mouth (pl. 36, A and
text fig, 1), As already suggested (Hale, 1962, p, 200) a relatively
short snout and small skull account for a more forward position of the
dorsal fin in relation to the body length, Yamada’s measurements
(1954, pp. 41 and 45) of a Japanese female, 2,200 mm. in length,
indieate that this had a short snout, the origin of the dorsal fin in
advance of the middle of the body, and the skull less than one-eighth
of the body length.

As shown by Dr. Ride’s photographs the blowhole was semi-
circular and obliquely inclined towards the rear, terminating on the
right side at a distance from the snout considerably greater than in
the case of the left end.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 563

Fig. 1-4. Young female, near Fremantle, Western Australia; 1, head; 2, mutilated
dorsal fin; 3, pectoral limb; 4, caudal fin (not to same stale).

According to the photographs the dark dorsal colour extended
down to occupy the greater part of the snout and, as seen from the
side, merged into the white of the underside not far above the upper
jaw. Behind the mouth the dark pigmentation was crossed by an ill-
defined white streak, curving upwards to the neighbourhood of the
ear; from the dorsal end of this marking an irregular streak ran
towards the axilla of the pectoral limb (cf. pl. 36, A herein, and
Yamada, 1954, fig. 5, b). The dark colour, as far as can be judged,
oceupied the whole of the dorsum and extended far down on the sides,
the white of the underside, however, extending upwards to the rear
of the insertion of the pectoral limb.

Skeleton

Skull (pl. 37, A and 38, A). Relatively small, more than eight times
in the given body length of the animal. The rostrum, from tip to
anterior wall of the left nostril, is much less than half of the total
length of the skull and measured to the posterior level of the antorbital
notches it is slightly less than half; it is distinctly wider than long, in
fact its breadth between the antorbital processes is almost half of the
total skull length,

564 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The supraoecipital has a shallow longitudinal median depression
in the dorsal half with a short median carina at the apex, Its upper
margin is broadly rounded with a tiny median projection bent down
between the maxillae (pl. 37, A and 39, A); the bone at its narrowest
part, between the posterior borders of the temporal fossae, is less
than twice its height.

The prominent occipital condyles are widely separated dorsally;
ventrally they are separated by a distance equal to about one-fifth of
their height.

The foramen inagnum is oval in shape, its width equal to three-
fourths the height.

The lateral surfaces of the maxillae are low and rounded, before
descending to form the great fossae; the right (measured from the
posterior end of the maxillomalar suture) is 20 mm., and the left
28 mm.,, in depth.

Tle malar on both sides is not fused with the frontals or with
the maxillae, The maxillo-malar sutures form a V, deeper and more
acute on the left side, and barely recurved posteriorly; they do not
rise to the level of the dorsum of the antorbital processes.

The dorsal crest is only slightly elevated above the level of the
supraoccipital, The right premaxilla is considerably expanded behind
the nares, where it is two-ninths the length of the bone. The
prefrontal forms a high crest between the nares, is elevated above the
right premaxilla alongside the right nostril, and has the notch in the
margin bordering this nostril V-shaped and well defined,

On the palatal surface the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear
on both sides for a distance of 21 mm. and, with the vomer, reach
slightly beyond the anterior ends of the maxillae. The maxillary
alveolar grooves are smooth, well defined, somewhat widened
anteriorly, and 58-66 mm. in length.

The postorbital processes are tapering and apically subacute while
the distance between them slightly exceeds that between the antorbital
processes,

The full number of teeth presumably is not available, 15 only
being sent separately from the mandibles; on the whole these show
greater curvature than those of a calf previously figured (Hale, 1947,
fig. 10). The largest is 21 mm. in length, and all are anically aente.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 565

Fig. 5, Ventral (left) and dorsal views of manubrium of sternum of Western Australian
young female (4%; nat. size).

Sternum. The bony portion of the manubrium is the only com-
ponent available. It is unusually narrow anteriorly, where its width
is less than the length. Wing-like expansions are poorly developed
in the bone but doubtless were present and cartilaginous, as evidenced
by the thickness of the antero-lateral margins. No median suture or
foramina are present, although indications of the latter appear on the
dorsal face; see fig, 5 which shows proportions, anterior notch, ete.

Vertebrae. The cervicals (pl. 41, A and B), as is most usual in
the genus, form one solid mass, the height of which (89 mm.) is less
than that of the greatest width (104 mm.); the spinous process is low
and wide as in Yamada’s No. 5 example (Yamada, 1954, fig. 8, upper)
but unlike it has no indentations, when viewed from the side, near
the obtuse apex.

The first of the 13 thoracic vertebrae, like all the others, has the
neural arch complete, its neural canal is not much wider than deep
and its dorsal spine is apically subacute, inclined forwards, and is
two-sevenths the total depth of the vertebra. The second thoracic
spine is also slightly forwardly inclined and tapers to a subacute apex,
The dorsal process of the last thoracic, measured from the upper
limit of the neural canal, is one-fifth longer than the distance

566 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

between the venter of the centrum and the apex of the canal, and
more than one-half of the depth of the vertebra (pl. 41, C and D).
The apex of the dorsal process is subtruncate and more or less slightly
convex in the second to ninth thoracics, subtruneate and slightly
concave in the last three.

In the anterior five of the nine lumbar vertebrae the dorsal spine
is also more than half the total depth of the vertebra; in the sixth and
seventh it is subequal, and in the eighth and nine a little shorter. The
neural canal from the tenth thoracic, and in all the lumbars, is
approximately twice as deep as wide, although a progressive reduction
in the size of the canal begins with the first lumbar.

The anterior fifteen of the caudal vertebrae are available, the rest
being in situ, as the caudal fin as well as other parts, were preserved
by Dr, Ride. Metapophyses are paired on the first four, are fused on
the fifth and, as an anterior projection, do not entirely disappear until
the eleventh caudal, but as usual become successively shorter. The
neural canal becomes a wide, open groove on the fourteenth and
fifteenth.

The epiphyses are completely free on the posterior face of the
cervicals and on both faces of the centrum of all the remaining
vertebrae available,

Only eleven chevrons, all with the members united, accompany the
disarticulated skeleton.

Ribs, Thirteen pairs, the anterior eight with a double
articulation.

Length of ribs taken in a straight line from
head to free end of bony portions,

Rib Right. Left.
No. mm, mm,
1 210 212
2 281 285
3 305 315
4 322 322
5 323 325
6 316 316
7 Tip abraded 315
8 280 290
9 263 289
10 Tip abraded 271
ll 253 260
12 232 Tip abraded
13 Dorsal end 192

broken

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 567

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN FEMALE, 192 cm. IN BODY LENGTH
(S.A. MUS. REG. NO. M.6310).

I am indebted to Miss M. Boyce, of the Museum staff, for the
photographs reproduced on plates 37 to 41 and also for the text figures
of this specimen.

Parasites and Stomach Contents

The fore and main stomachs contained an astonishing mass of
worms, large and small, and beaks of small examples of the Southern
Squid, Sepioteuthis australis (identified by Mr. B. C. Cotton, Curator
of Molluses at the South Australian Museum).

External Characters
In the photograph on pl. 36, B, the apparent depression beneath
the snout is an optical illusion. The length of the body was fully
four and one-half times its greatest depth. The snout was rounded,
with the front curving backwards to the mouth. The crescentie blow-
hole was large, 50 mm. in diameter, oblique, and with the left end of

Y \ saree

\s8

10 ) Se

Fig. 6-10, Young female, St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia; 6, head; 7, blowhole;
8, pectoral limb; 9, dorsal fin; 10, caudal fin (all \ nat. size).

568 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

the opening 205 mm,, from the vertical level of the snout, that of the
right 230 mm. (fig. 6-7). The dorsal fin was three times as long as
high and situated slightly in advance of the middle of the length
(fig. 9).

When first stranded the colouration was as follows. Grey on
upper part of snout, the dark area extending back to three inches
helow the eye, thenee to the axilla of the peetoral fin. The white of
the underside extended upwards, however, to form a_bracket-like
marking behind the eye (exactly as in the photographs of a Californian
adult published by Hubbs, 1951, p, 406, pl. 3) and again beneath the
pectoral fin in the form: of an almost cireular patch, which was
margined dorsally with grey as dark as that of the back of the animal.
The grey otherwise extended from the axilla to beyond the anus, when
it curved down, leaving only a small part of the underside of the base
of the tail white,

The pectoral fins were dark grey externally and on the inner
edges. The candal flukes were dark grey above, the underside with
the edges margined with similar colour and the remainder white with
irregular dark spottings.

The bracket-like marking and the patch behind the pectoral fin
had become pinkish, but were still discernible, 48 hours after the
animal was stranded.

Body Measurements,

Measurements. mm. percent,
Total length to uoteh of tail flukes .. 2. 6. 6. 6. ce ee ee ye 4, 7,920 100
Greatest depth of body .. .. wb se we -. 6480 22.4
Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior corner of rye tf 2 5% a BBG 13.0
Tip of mandible to vertical level of anterior corner of aye ,. .. .. 160 8.3
Tip of snout ta most anterior point of blowhole .. . ~~ 205 10,6
Tip of snout to vertical level of anterior end of base of dorsal fin... 965 50.2
Tip of mandible to axilla of pectoral lim 6... 4. ce ee ee pe ee) 420 21.8
Tip of mandible to anterior point of vulyt . 2 6. ee ee ee a, 1,200 62.5
Tip of mandible to anterior point of anus .. 2. 2. 6. ee ve oe vy 1,250 65.1
Length of gape to ma ate FOV 16) 0s ee, ie ae oye ote ee Tp loa. ha od LEE 5.8
Tength of eye .. .. os wie awe 34 Se OW we cee tee le et 25 1.3
Depih of oye .. wt jee Ot Hel ole ee ak 96 cue eee ou 12 0.6
Greatest width of caudal flukes .. 2. 2... ta 0s ow oe er eo en as 810 26.5
Hoight of dorsal fin .. .. eat De Ge we ey a ok TX Ro do PS 4.9
Length of hase of dorsal Oi, FF geqeoides at Quad ot wi ah oh 18D 16.4
Greatest length of pectoral fin 2... 2. 2. -. 8. ee we ye ge ae) 290 16.1
Greatest width of puetorul fin 2. 2. 6-0 6. ee ee eke ce ge ee ee) 105 5.4

Skeleton

Skull (pl. 37, B to 39, B). This is less than one-seventh of the body
length. The rostrum, from tip to anterior wall of the left nostril,
is less than half the length of the skull but measured to the posterior

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 569

level of the antorbital notches is more than half. The skull is about
as wide as long, and its greatest breadth, between the antorbital
processes, is distinctly more than half its length.

The supraoecipital has a shallow median depression near the
vertex only. Its upper margin is produced and broadly triangular
medianly, a feature apparent in pl, 38, B, but, because of its forward
inclination not evident in pl. 39, B; the width of the bone, at ite
narrowest part, between the posterior borders of the temporal fossae,
is more than twice its height,

The frontal is free for the whole of its visible length, while the
shape of the squamosal (as compared to that of the Western Aus-
tralian example) is best illustrated by reference to pl. 38,

The occipital condyles are elongate, widely separated dorsally,
and ventrally by a distanee equal to less than one-seventh of their
height.

The foramen magnum is as wide as deep,

The dorsal edges of the maxillary fossae are sharply defined
ridges (pl. 37, B). The lateral surfaces of the maxillae very consider-
ably in height, as measured from the posterior end of the maxillo-
malar suture, being on the right side 25 mm. and on the left 45 mm,
in depth.

The malar on both sides shows no indication of fusion with the
maxillae or frontals, he maxillo-malar suture forms a shallow U
on both sides, reeurved downwards to frontal and anteriorly rising
to above the level of the dorsum of the antorbital processes.

The dorsal erest is elevated a little above the level of the supra-
oecipital. The expanded portion of the right premaxilla, posterior
to the nares, is at ils widest part one-fifth of the length of the bone.

In the palatal region the anterior ends of the premaxillae appear
for a length of 20 mm., and reach slightly beyond the anterior ends of
the maxillae, The alveolar grooves, smooth and well defined, are
50 mm. in length on both sides,

The subtriangular and apically narrowly rounded postorbital
processes are wider than in the Western Australian female (pl. 38);
the width between them is distinctly more than the breadth of the
skull between the antorbital processes.

No upper teeth are present; there are 15 teeth in the left ramus
of the lower jaw, 16 in the right; the longest teeth are 16 mm. in
length, and all are apically aeute. As in the western specimen the
rami are not fused at the symphysis.

570 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Tongue bones (pl. 40, A). The basihyal is roughly hexagonal in
shape and wider than long; the anterior margin has a shallow median
notch, on both sides of which is a relatively wide articular area, to
which is attached a short cartilage, articulated with the cartilaginous
ceratohyal; the posterior part has a distinct angular notch on each
side, near the concave posterior margin. The bony portions of the
stylohyals are considerably longer than the ceratohyals or the
thyrohyals. The latter are irregularly oval in shape and surrounded
by cartilage, which separates them very markedly from the basihyal.

Sternum (pl. 40, B, ventral view). This consists of four segments,
the first three of which are entire. The ossified part of the manubrium
is not much wider than long, with a narrow and short median notch
at the anterior edge; thick oval portions, 18 mm. and 22 mm. in
length, are fused antero-laterally with the main body of the manubrium
(fig. 11); the ragged suture of the left, and larger, suggests that at
least this element was previously separated from the rest of the
manubrium (cf. also Hale, 1962, pl. 4, fig. A and B, where these parts
are cartilaginous) ; the wing like expansions of the anterior half are
well developed and the posterior margin has a shallow median notch,
alongside which the articular surfaces slope forwards. The second
and shorter segment, as in the posterior half of the manubrium, has
markedly concave sides; the third segment, likewise with concave

Fig. 11. Ventral view of manubrium of sternum of South Australian young female
(5 nat. size).

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 57]

sides, is four-fifths the length ol the second and less than half the
length of the manubrinm (85:50:40). As in a young male from South
Australia there is a fourth small segment, but in this young female
only the element of the right side is ossified (ef, Hale, 1962, pl. 4, A
and pl, 40, B herein).

Vertebrae. Counted in situ, with the animal partly fleshed, these
are; cervical, 7; thoracic, 13; lumbar, 9; caudal, 25—a total of 54.

The first caudal is regarded as that in which the anterior corners
of the first chevrons are attached to the hinder end of the centrum,
The last two cavdals are very small.

In other young examples from South Australia the vertebrae
(counted in like manner) range from 53 to 57 and in adults 52-50.

The height of the cervical mass is less than the width (86: 100);
the dorsal process is short, arrow in cranial view, and seen from the
side is apically rounded and with two shallow notches in the anterior
margin (pl. 41, H and F).

All the thoracic vertebrae have the neural arch complete; the
first has the neural eanal wider than deep (87; 25), and its dorsal
process very short, less than one-sixth the depth of the vertebra.
The secoud thoracic has a much longer dorsal process but still falling
far short of that of the western female. In the sueeeeding thoracies
the dorsal process becomes successively longer; the dorsal process of
the last (thirteenth), measured from the upper limit of the neural
canal is only half the depth of the vertebra, its width is four-sevenths
its length, and as with the other thoracics the apical margin is sub-
truncate and convex (pl. 41, G@ and H).

In the nine lhimbar vertebrae the dorsal process is similar to that
of the thoracics in shape; in the first the process is one-half the depth
of the vertebra, m the others less than half, the ratio in the ninth
being 40: 108.

The neural canal becomes progressively smaller from the fifth
thoracic vertebra; it is wider than deep in the first four but posterior
to the fourth is deeper than wide (21: 18 in the thirteenth; pl, 41,
G and H); in the ninth lumbar the depth of the canal in relation to
its width iy 14: 8.

Tn the 25 caudal vertebrae metapophyses are paired on the first.
four, fused on the fifth, and are distinguishable as an anterior pro-
jection until the ninth, he neural canal becomes a completely open
groove on the thirteenth, The last two caudals are extremely small,
being, without the epiphyses, 4 mm, and 2 mm, in length.

572 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

The vertebral epiphyses are quite free on the posterior face of
the cervicals and on both posterior and anterior faces of the centrum

of all other vertebrae.

There are 13 chevrons, all the members united excepting in the

last pair.

Ribs. Thirteen on both sides, the last pair rudimentary; they
were counted before dissection of the animal was completed, the eight

anterior pairs have a double articulation.

Length of ribs, taken in a straight line from

head to free end of bony portions.

Rib

Cordarone

Right.
mm.

155
230
265
275
287
287
279
265
249
230
210
182

Left.
mm.

163
230
264
280
282
283
275
264
253
231
212
186

Skull measurements of the two young females.
Western Australia

Measurements,

Total condylobasal length .. .. .. ..
Height to vertex .. .. *
Width between postorbital processes o.
Hinder edge of occipital condyles to
posterior wall of left naris
Height of supraocccipital from upper
margin of foramen magnum ..
Width of supraoceipital at narrowest
part between posterior moraine of
temporal fossae .. .:
Length of rostrum from ‘tip, to
anterior wall of left naris ..
Tip of rostrum to anterior margin
of palatines ..
Width of rostrum between antorbital
processes .. . bo en te
Greatest length of pterygoide «atte “ahs
Length of left naris . ..
Width of left naris .. .. ...
Height of foramen magnum ot

(M4519).
Per cent Per cent
length. breadth.
100.0 113.8
63.1 71.8
87.8 100.0
50.9 58.0
36.1 41.1
61.2 69.7
41.4 47.1
35.3 40,3
49.8 56.7
45.6 51.9
12.9 14.7
8.3 9.5
13.6 15.5

South Australia
(M,6310),

Per cent
length.
100.0
62.9
92.6

48.1
31.8

Per cent

breadth.
108.0
68.0
100.0
52.0

d4.4

68.5
50.0
38.0

58.0
52.0
15.2
10.8
13.6

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 573

EMulL measurements of the two young females—continned.

Wastern Australia South Australia
(M4519). (M6310),
Measurements, Per cent Percent Percent Per cent
mu, length. breadth, mm, length. breadth.
Width of foramen magtiun », 5. 5. 87 1.2 11,6 34 12.6 13.6
Height of occipital condyles . 2... 52 19,7 22.5 60 22.2 24.0
Width of oceipital condyles . .) .. TO 26.6 30,3 70 23,9 28,0
Length of righk ramus of muandibly
(condyle to unterisr eu of ym
Pliysis) ., se ve ee pe ee ee ee BBA R8Y 101,3 244 90,8 97.6
Depth of right Tamus at coronoid ,. 70 26.6 30.3 68 26.2 27,2
Length of symphysis .. ou. ye oe ee 82 12.1 13,8 45 16.6 18.0
Length of alveolar portion .. .. .. 90 34,2 38.9 97 35,9 38.8
DISCUSSION

The above table, with pl. 87 and 38, show that there is quite
marked variation between the two skulls. Plate 87 illustrates the
considerable difference in the maxillary fossac, In the Western
Australian female these are excavate evenly to the vertex, whereas in
the South Australian female the surfaces become flattened (indeed on
the right slightly convex) towards the vertex, where the fossae are
therefore mueh shallower. The premaxilla of the western skull is
shorter; the malar is more acute distally and has the anterior third
slender and not eurved upwards to above the level of the antorbital
processes, as is the case in the South Australian skull. Plate 38
illustrates also the difference in the distinetly separated maxillo-malar
sutures. ‘The posterior edge of the frontal is fused with the supra-
occipital in the western skull, but is free in the other,

In the South Australian example the exposed anterior portions of
the palatines are very small, whereas they occupy a very much larger
area in the other skull, with which, unlike the former, they are fused.

The Western Anstralian female appears to be older than the
southern female; this is indicated by the greater body length of the
former, the fact that some of the bones of the skull have fused, and
the prefrontal is longer, as also are the teeth. As noted above, how-
ever, in the former the skull is shorter in relation to the body length.

Of the juveniles previously examined by me the skull of the
Western Australian example, although 20 mm, longer, in some respects
resembles that of a male (S. Aust. Mus., Reg, No. 6186, Hale, 1962,
p. 200), 193 em. in length and taken in St. Vincent Gulf, South
Australia; as mentioned in the description of this male the skull is
relatively short, A comparison of the skeletons of these two specimens
again indicates the impossibility of separating K. simus (Owen, 1866)
as a distinct species,

574 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The main differences between the skull of the abovementioned
young male and the Western Australian young female are that in the
latter :—a, the supraoccipital, while similar in shape, is narrower in
proportion ,cf, Hale, 1962, pl. 2, C and pl. 89, A herein); b, the height
to vertex is lower; ¢, its greatest width, between the postorbital
processes, is narrower in relation to the condylobasal length; d, the
rostrum, measured to level of posterior ends of antorbital notches is
longer, 47.5 per cent of length of skull as against 35.3 per cent, and
the lower jaw is correspondingly of greater length; e, the maxillo-
malar suture is of different shape on the right side—a variable
character in any case; f, the expanded part of the right premacxilla,
posterior to the nares, is wider; g, the maxillary fossae are shallower.

It has been suggested that in K. breviceps the dorsal spine of the
cervieal vertebrae is mich longer than in Owen’s simus and that the
spinous processes of the other vertebrae may be correspondingly long
(Yamada, 1954, pp, 43 and 48, ete.). In both the abovementioned
South Australian male and the Western Australian female this
process is short and in general the cervical mass is similar,

In the two young females herein recorded the western specimen
has the dorsal process of the cervicals wider in eranial view than that
of the South Australian example and seen from the side it is broadly
subtriangular instead of irreenlarly rounded (pl. 41, ef. A and B with
FE and F), while in the thoracic and lombar vertebrae the dorsal
process is distinctly longer (pl, 41, ef. C and D with G and H), and
see also table below),

Locality Height of Height Louality Height of Height
West. Australia Dorsal of Per Cent South Australia Dorsal of Per Cent
Process Vertebra Process Vertebra.
Thor, ....,.18 15 139 63-9. Thor. ..... i3 63 128 49
Lumb. ....., 2 80 153 62-3 Limb. —.... 2 62 126 49:2
Height of Greatest, Height of Greatest
Locality Dorsal Width of Per Cent Locality Dorsal Width of Per Cent
Weet. Australia Process Dorsal South Aiistralia Process Dorsal
Prooess Process
Thor, - .13 75 29 258-6 Thor. ..,,,18 63 38 165-8
Lumb. ...... 2 80 34 235:3. Lumb, ..,,.2 62 38 163-1

While Yamada’s studies (1954) did not convince him that simus
of Owen can be satisfactorily characterized as a second species of
Kogia he states (p. 52) ‘‘two rather distinet types apparently do
exist,’’ but are not connected continuonsly by all characters.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES S75

Of the Japanese material available to him, Yamada examined in
detail six specimens, of which his numbers 2 and 6 show some features
of simus, as outlined by Ogawa in 1936-37 in an attempt. to distinguish
simus trom breviceps. The main difference noted by Yamada is that
tlie dorsal process of the cervieal vertebrae, as suggested by Ogawa
also, is much longer in simus, as also is this process in the thoracies,
lumbars and anterior candals (Yamada, 1954, fig. 8-10).

As noted above, the dorsal spines of the cervicals do not differ
much in height in the two Australian females herein discussed, but
there is a marked difference in this process in the thoracies and
Jumbars, as well as in the anterior caudals,

The differences in the skeletons of the two young females now
described lead again to the question as to whether the Pigmy Sperm
Whale migrates in small herds,

Tt would seem that F. T. Bullen, in the Cruise of the “‘Cachalot”’,
was the first to suggest that Kogia is not a solitary whale (see also
Palmer, Journ, Mamm., 29, 1948, p. 421). According to information
supplied by a whaler, Yamada’s examples 4 and 5 were taken from a
different school than his number 6—the last separable from 4 and
5 by some characters (Yamada, 1954, p. 52).

During June to September, 1959, schools, or possibly the same
school, of small, blunt-nosed whales were seen moving slowly at the
surface near the coast of Encounter Bay and in St. Vincent Gulf. In
June of this year a female and calf were stranded on the beach at
Encounter Bay while in September an adult male came ashore in St.
Vineent Gulf, (Hale, 1962, pp. 203-211 and 216.) In these three
examples the dorsal process of the thoracic and lumber vertebrae is
jugh, ag in the Western Australian young female, and likewise is
more than half the total depth in the last thoracic. However, the
Glenelg male has a short cervical dorsal spitie (as in both of the
females herein recorded) whereas in the Eneounter Bay female and
calf this provess is distinctly higher in relation to the depth.

Dr. Ride now supplies the information that on the day prior to
the stranding of the young Western Australian female a school of
porpoise-like animals was observed in the vicinity.

What may be further evidence of schooling is provided by a
photograph secured from a ‘plane, at 500 feet, close inshore at
Burleigh Heads, sonth of Brisbane in southern Queensland, by Mr.
Robert Anthony of The Daily News, Murwillumbah, New South Wales.
This was in January, 1962, and Mr. Anthony in litt, supplied the

576 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

information that ‘‘the school was moving in a northerly direction in a
very lazy fashion’’. An opinion was expressed that the animals were
one of the species of Whaler Sharks (Carcharhinus) but my colleague,
Mr. T. D. Scott, Curator of Fishes at the South Australian Museum,
supplies the following comment:

“‘T have examined carefully the photograph and am of the opinion
that the animals shown herein are definitely not Whaler Sharks. In
the first place, these sharks do not travel in schools as shown in the
photograph but are usually of solitary habit except in the mating
season, when two or three sharks are seen together. Furthermore,
the general proportions of the body, which is much shorter and deeper
than the Whaler Shark and the single centrally placed dorsal fin on
the back, together with the horizontal tail flukes indicate that these
creatures are a species of small whale. In addition, the second dorsal
fin, which is rather large in the Whaler Sharks is not obvious in the
photograph. I would be quite prepared to state definitely that these
animals are not sharks.’’

Mr. Anthony’s description, and the photograph, which he sent to
me, possibly constitute a record of a herd of more than a score of
Pigmy Sperm Whales, all in parallel formation and moving slowly
in the same direction.

If Kogia does in fact move from place to place in coherent small
groups, the point arises as to whether or not individuals of a herd
have in common a combination of some of the obviously variable
characters (osteological and/or external), and that these would serve
to distinguish them from members of other schools, all having an
appreciable different aggregation of the variables.

REFERENCES CITED
Gunther, G., Hubbs, C. L., and Beal, M. A., 1955: ‘‘Records of K ogia
breviceps from Texas, with remarks on movements and
distribution,’’ Journ. Mammalogy, 36, pp. 263-270, pl. 1
and 2.

Hale, Herbert M., 1947: ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps,
Blainville) on South Australian Coasts.’?? Rec. South
Aust. Mus., VIII, pp. 531-546, pl. XIV-XVIII and text
fig. 1-17.
1959: ‘‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale on South Australian
Coasts—continued.’’ Rec. South Aust. Mus., XII, pp.
333-338, pl. 40, and text fig, 1-2.

HALE—PIGMY SPERM WHALES 577

1962: ‘The Pigmy Sperm Whale (Kogia breviceps,
Blainville) on South Australian Coasts. Part 3.’’ Rec.
South Aust. Mus., 14, pp. 197-230, pl. 1-4 and text fig. 1-12.

Hubbs, C. L., 1951: ‘‘Eastern Pacific Records and General Distribu-
tion of the Pygmy Sperm Whale.’’ Journ. Mammalogy,
32, pp. 403-410, pl. 1-3.

Manville, R. H. and Shanahan, R. P., 1961: ‘‘Kogia stranded in
Maryland.’? Journ. Mammalogy, 42, pp. 269, 370.

Yamada, M., 1954: ‘‘Some Remarks on the Pygmy Sperm Whale,
Kogia.’? Sci. Rep. Whales Research Inst., Tokyo, Japan,
No. 9, pp. 37-58, fig. 1-13 and plate.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 36-41

Two Young Females of Kogia breviceps

PLATE 36
A. Head of female, Western Australia; B, female on beach, South Australia.
PLATE 37

Dorsal views of skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females
(to same scale).

PLATE 38
Skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females, as seen from the
side (to same scale).
PLATE 39
Rear views of skulls of (A) Western Australian and (B) South Australian females (to
same scale),
PLATE 40

A. Tongue bones and (B) sternum of South Australian female (not to same scale).

PLATE 41

Vertebrac, Western Australian female; A and B, cranial and side views of cervicals;
C and D, anterior and side views of last (thirteenth) thoracic. South Australian female;
BE and F, cranial and side views of cervicals; G and H, anterior and side views of last
(thirteenth) thoracie, (All to same scale.)

Reo. SA, Mouser 40
S.A, Musi Vou. 14. Prars 86

Po feew page TS]

Rre. S.A. Mi

Vou. 14, Poare 37

Ree. S.A. Mesnen Vou. 14, Puatre 3s

Rec. S.A. Museuat Vor. 14. Puarre 39

Ree, S.A. Meseua Vou. 14, Puarr 40
a |

Rec. §..A. Museum Von. 14. Phare 41

THE FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION ON
FLEURIEU PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By BRIAN DAILY, UNIVERSITY OF ADELAIDE

Summary

Adelaide Supergroup and Marino Group are proposed to replace the terms Adelaide
System and Marinoan Series.

Arising from the discovery of Lower Cambrian fossils in metamorphosed rocks at
Delamere a conformable sequence from the Precambrian Tapley Hill Slate to the
Cambrian Carrickalinga Head formation has been established for the Delamere region.
Comparison of this Precambrian-Cambrian sequence with that found north of
Normanville indicates that only minor facies differences exist between the two regions.
The Cambrian-Precambrian boundary is placed below the oldest fauna near the top of the
Mount Terrible Formation, which is stratigraphically above the Marino Group.

THE FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION ON FLEURIEU
PENINSULA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By BRIAN DAILY, Untversrry or ADELAIDE
Plate 42 and text fig. 1

SUMMARY

Adelaide Supergroup and Marino Group are proposed to replace
the terms Adelaide System and Marinoan Series.

Comparison of this Precambrian-Cambrian sequence with that
found north of Normanville indicates that only minor facies differences
exist between the two regions. The Cambrian-Preeambrian boundary
is placed below the oldest fauna near the top of the Mount Terrible
Formation, which is stratigraphically above the Marino Group.

The marble on Mount Rapid is equated with the Brighton Lime-
stone and the Rapid Bay marble is tentatively regarded as being the
same formation,

INTRODUCTION

The stratigraphy, structure and age relationships of the pre-
Permian sedimentary sequences developed on Fleurieu Peninsula have
given rise to much speculation among geologists.

Historically, Fleurieu Peninsula is important in that the discovery
by Sir Edgeworth David of a Cambrian fauna in the Normanville
district and the extension of this fauna to the Sellick Hill district by
Howchin (1897) has provided the only means of dating the folded
sediments comprising the Mount Lofty Ranges. Until recently, all
subsequent fossil discoveries had been confined to this narrow belt of
unmetamorphosed Cambrian rocks outcropping from a point three
miles south-west of Willunga to just north of Normanville.

580 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

To the south of Normanville an extensive belt of Permian glacial
deposits effectively conceals any southward continuation of the
fossiliferous Cambrian and older rocks. Further south in the Rapid
Bay-Second Valley area there are marbles which strike across the
Bay towards the fossiliferous Cambrian in the north. After mapping
the lowgrade metamorphics occurring on the coastline between Sellick
Hill and Victor Harbour, Madigan (1925) concluded that the marble
occurring on Rapid Head could be correlated with part of the proven
Cambrian sequence and that ‘the structure is simple and the field
relations are all in favour of the Cambrian age of the Fleurieu
Peninsula.’’

Sprigg and Campana (1953) were able to show that the structure
is not simple but reported that as anticipated Adelaide System rocks
(including Sturt Tillite) formed a closure around the south end of the
Yankalilla Archaean inlier and that the Rapid Bay Marble and over-
lying calcareous phyllites which they correlated with the Archaeocyatha
limestones and overlying phosphatic shales of the Sellick Hill area,
“falso nosed irregularly around the structure’’. In addition, they
indicated that sediments typical of the Kanimantoo Group succeeded
the phyllites and occurred ‘‘on both the east and west limbs of the
locally overturned regional fold.’’ A Cambrian to Ordovician age was
suggested for the Kanmantoo Group. Later, these observations were
supported or reaffirmed by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954a,
1955), Campana (1955), Campana and Wilson (1955). This correla-
tion of the Rapid Bay Marble with the Cambrian limestone has been
generally accepted by most South Australian geologists.

In 1962, at the suggestion of Mr. J. L. Talbot, Geology Depart-
ment, University of Adelaide, five post-graduate students within the
Geology School were assigned geological mapping projects between
the Yankalilla Archaean inlier and the Rapid Bay-Delamere region.
A reason for choosing this region was that it appeared to be
structurally interesting. When consulted about the possible age
relationships of these metamorphosed rocks the author decided to
demonstrate the well known Cambrian sections at Sellick Hill and
Carrickalinga Head so that the knowledge gained could be applied to
the south. Subsequently, a traverse was made along Stockyard
Creek, Delamere, the intention being to predict our way through the
section. The metamorphosed equivalents of ten Cambrian rock units
occurring between Sellick Hill and Carrickalinga Head were all
recognized and located in their correct stratigraphic positions thus

DATLY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 581

establishing lithological correlation between the two regions. Subse-
quently, when demonstrating the same seetion to third year geology
students Cambrian fossils were found in two of the three units where
fossils might reasonably be expected to occur in these metamorphosed
rocks,

The fossil discoveries appeared to confirm Madigan’s contention
that the Delamere-Rapid Bay marbles were in faet Cambrian in
age. They also indicated that the core of the overturned anticline
between Startish Hill and Delamere as mapped by Campana and
Wilson did inelude rocks of Precambrian age, thus confirming the
suggestion made by these workers on their map legend and in the
necompanying explanatory notes. However, subsequent investigations
carried out by the author have indicated that this anticline, as shown
on the Jervis sheet, does not exist and that there is apparently a
complete sequence from laminated phyllites, herein equated with the
Tapley Hill Slate, up to and ineluding the Kanmantoo Group. In
addition, evidence, although inconelusive at present, indicates that
the Rapid Bay Marble ilself may not be Cambrian in age but may
approxiinate to the Brighton Limestone of the Adelaide region.

I. THE CAMBRIAN NORTH OF NORMANVILLE

Abele and McGowran (1959) have given an excellent account of
the Cambrian geology of the Normanville-Sellick Hill region, They
divided the sequence into five formations, four of which they formally
named, For mapping purposes, the base of the Cambrian was drawn
at the base of the thin Hyolithes sandstone member of the Wangkonda
Formation, Horwitz, who mapped the continnation of the Sellick
Hill Cambrian to the north-east on the Milang sheet (Tlorwitz and
Thomson, 1960), extended the Cambrian boundary down to the base
of an arkose more than 200 feet stratigraphically below that
determined by Abele and McGowran.

Stratigraphy

In fig. 1 the stratigraphic columns for the Sellick Hill and
Carrickalinga Head areas and the accompanying explanations briefly
summarize the author’s present knowledge and opinions of the geology
of the region. A terminology somewhat different from that used by
Abele and MeGowran has been erected and reasons for this are given
in following paragraphs.

582

z
H
£
£
.
3
“
3
3
%
>

Fic.
Sellick

oo =I

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

STOCKYARD
SELLICN HILL. CARRICKALINGA CREEK

DELAMERE

24
Heatherdale Hyollthids ,
Shale — 23 gattropads
Hyedithide, if. 22

12 gastropods

" 7 2) Archadocyathe
Fork Tree pas
Limestone [| 1 | Arehaeacyatna Hyolithids and
worm castings
near base

43 yollthids,
45 Worm castings

{beSandstone
ag. with hyolithids
38

Sellick Hifl
Limestone

Hyolithids,
Wangkonda worm costings

Limestone

Mount Terrible “oo ~Sandstone
Formation iA ported

Marino

Group

1. CORRELATION OF CAMBRIAN SECTIONS, FLEURIEU PENINSULA,
Will area,

, Olive-coloured siltstones passing to chocolate shales below.
. Massive quartzite, flaggy sandstones and siltstones.

Thin siltstones interbedded with flaggy quartzite, and thin massive light blue
quartzites.

. Arkosie sandstones, siltstones.
. Dark grey siltstones with increasing carbonate content towards top.
. Sandstones, with carbonate rich pods, hyolithids, gastropods, sponges and other

organisms.

. Flaggy argillaceous limestone.
. Massive pale blue grey limestone, massive mottled limestone and thin sandstones.
. Mottled and banded argillaceous limestones and cale-shales, coarse sandstone lenses

near base. Hyolithids, gastropods, brachiopods and other organisms.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 583

10. Massive non-argillaceous limestones with Archaeoeyatha, brachiopods and abundant
phosphatie shelled organisms,

11. Mottled argillaceous limestone with hyolithids, sponges and brachiopods.

12, Flaggy argillaceous limestones and dark coloured cale-shales with carbonate and
phosphate nodules. Hyolithids, Heleionella,

13, Black shales with phosphate nodules. Scenella,

Carriokalinga Head arca.

20. Sandstones with worm castings and burrows, cale-shales, mottled and banded lime-
stones with hyolithids and other organisms.

21, Massive, generally dolomitised, clean limestone with Arehaeocyatha.

22. Massive and mottled argillaceous limestone.

23. Rubbly banded argillaceous limestones with interbedded eale-shales.

24. Cale-shales with carbonate and phosphate nodules. Helcionella, hyolithids, sponges,

25. Thin alternating bands of shale and graywacke. (Lingulella in shale near base.)
Stockyard Creck area.

30. Finely laminated black eale-phyllites.

31. Dark blue argilliceous limestones; eream, buff and light blue-grey banded marble.

32. Dark coloured siltstones with quartzites, especially near top.

33. Cross-bedded coarse to pebbly caleareons sandstone, quartzite, marble (‘‘ gritty
marble?!)

34. Laminated siltstones, eross-bedded quartzites, siltstones,
35. Massive quartzite,
36. Green to grey siltstones, phyllites with siltstones and graywacke,

37. Thin flaggy and rippled clean quartzites and siltstones with thin bands of massive
quartzite.

38. Massive arkose.
39. Grey phyllites with thin cale-sandstones.

40. Cale-sandstoue with hyolithids and gastropods; grits; arkose; unit is very calcareous
near fo).

41. Mottled argillaceons limestone.
42. Banded marbles with sandstone (similar to item 40) and conglomeratic sandstone,

43, Mottled und banded argillaceous limestones, marbles, eale-phyllites, Lenses of sand-
stone with worn castings aud hyolithids near base.

44. Massive banded marbles.

45. Massive and mottled argillaceous limestone,

46, Dark phyllite with argillaceous limestone nodules,
AT, Dark phyllite with phosphate nodules.

4%, Alternating bands of phyllite and graywaeke.

Marino Group (Adelaide Supergroup)

W. Howchin in many publications prior to 1922 referred to all of
the rocks of the Adelaide region above the ‘Archaean’ complex and
below the Permian as the Cambrian Series.

David (1922) tentatively suggested ‘‘that all the strata from the
base of the Archaeocyathinae limestones to the basal conglomerates
overlying the Archaean(?) schistose rocks of Aldgate in the Adelaide

584 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

region, be given some local name such as ‘the Adelaide series’, and,
for the present I would suggest that they may be classed, provisionally,
as Proterozoic(?). It is quite possible that more than one series of
rocks are included in the suggested Adelaide series.’’

I believe that David’s intention in using Adelaide Series was to
overcome the need to call these beds Cambrian. In this way he
discarded the unwanted time sense of Howchin’s terminology and
used Adelaide Series in the sense that we would now use Group or
Supergroup. Without any accompanying explanation, Howchin (1923)
restricted the term Adelaide Series to the Brighton Limestone and
underlying strata. In all subsequent publications he used the term
in this restricted sense, but his opinions regarding its age varied from
Upper Precambrian to Lower Cambrian. David (1927) after review-
ing world occurrences of the Archaeocyatha concluded that ‘‘the
Lower Cambrian age of the greater part, if not the whole of the
Adelaide Series (in David’s original sense; B.D.) is rendered very
probable’. However, David (1932) finally accepted Howchin’s
subdivisions but regarded the Adelaide Series as Newer Proterozoic.

Subsequent to Mawson (1940), the use of the term Adelaide Series
has largely depended on the definition of the base of the Cambrian.
In the Flinders Range, Mawson broke with the Howchin tradition by
including all strata below the Pound Sandstone in the Adelaide
Series. Sprigg (1942) working in the type area included the
‘*Pre-Archaeocyathinae Grey Quartzites’? in the Adelaide Series.
These he regarded as ‘‘the equivalent of Mawson’s Pound Quartzite’’.

Mawson supports the contention that David used the term
Adelaide Series in a rock-stratigraphic sense. Mawson (1939) stated,
‘“‘Thus it was then suggested to Howchin by the late Sir Edgeworth
David and the writer that a local name should be applied, non-committal
as to age, and with the understanding that as knowledge of the forma-
tions progressed it should be dropped in favour of divisional names.
Thus the term ‘Adelaide Series’ was created as a temporary working
tool’’.

The term Adelaide System was first used by Clarke (1938) and
not by Mawson (1948) as generally believed. System was used to
replace Series in Howchin’s restricted sense. His choice of the term
System was influenced partly by the subdivision of the Adelaide
Series into the Para and Narcoota Series by Hossfeld (1935), and by
Mawson’s work in the Wooltana district (Mawson, 1934) which was
subsequently modified (Mawson, 1948). Wilson (1952) regarded

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 585

Hossteld’s Para Series as the equivalent of the more recently defined
Torrensian Series but the mapping of the Gawler Sheet (Campana,
1953) indicated that the Nareoota Series embraced rocks belonging to
the Para Series and ranging as high as the Kanmantoo Group, I is
regrettable that Mawson and Sprigg (1950) did not consider Mossfeld's
terminology when disenssing the subdivision of their Adelaide System.
It is quite clear that the Para Series as defined by Hossfeld (1935,
p. 44 and geological map) is not only synonymous with the Torrensian
Series but that it also embraces the same type area originally mapped
by UWowehin,

David (1950), and Jater Mawson and Sprigg (1950) formally
defined the term Adelaide System. David, following Tlowehin,
restricted the System to the Brighton Limestone and underlying beds,
He divided the sequence into Lower and Upper Series, with accompany-
ing Stage names, some of which were used by Sprigg (1946). Mawson
and Sprigg rejected this subdivision and erected an independent
terminology for a System extending from the Aldgate Sandstone to
the top of Sprigg’s ‘‘Pre-Archaeocyathinae Grey Quartzites’’, They
subdivided the System as found in the Adelaide Region—the type
area—into three Series, the Torrensian, Sturtian and Marinoan, This
subdivision has been accepted and used extensively by South
Australian geologists, Quite erroncously, another and presumed older
series, the Willonran Series (type area about 350 miles north of
Adelaide), has since heen included im the System,

System and Series are time-stratigraphie terms based on a column
of rocks to which geological time significance is attached. The System
(Series) in its type area is based on a sequence of rocks but recogni-
tion of the System (Series) elsewhere must be based on some reliable
means of correlation, normally fossils, The general lack of fogsils in
Precambrian rocks implies that correlation can be rarely attained for
these rocks.

The term, Adelaide System (Marinoan Series), in the type area
has been aceepted but its application elsewhere immediately implies
a correlation which generally cannot be substantiated, Jt is
proposed that we abandon the use of the term Adelaide System and
the accompanying Series terms and substitute for them the more
acceptable rock-stratigraphic terms, Supergroup and Group, These
terms then could be legitimately used beyond the type area sinee they
do not imply correlation, Such a move would be in keeping with the

586 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM

recommendations contained in the American Code of Stratigraphic
Nomenclature (1961) and in the proposed revision of the Australian
Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature.'”

Mawson and Sprigg inferred that their Marinoan Series ended at
the beginning of the Cambrian. In redefining these rocks as a group
it is necessary to define the upper limit. This I have taken as the
sequence of thin light colonred massive quartzites interbedded with
rippled siltstone and flaggy quartzites that form bold outerops along
the front of the Willunga Searp. Lower in the sequence, green to
olive coloured siltstones pass gradually into chocolate slates with
mud-cracks and ripples. The sequence is interpreted as a shallow-
water deposit which, during the time of deposition of the red beds,
experienced short periods of emergence, On the Milang sheet,
Horwitz (in Horwitz and Thomson, 1960) mapped laminated purple
and green shales at the top of the Marino Gronp, but the unit is not
present at Sellick Hill, where Thomson and Horwitz (1961) have
proposed an unconformity between the Marino Group and an over-
lying arkose ‘‘marking the onset of a new sedimentary cycle’. This
contact cited as evidence for unconformity is a ent and fill contact
with the cut made in unconsolidated sediment. The contact cannot
be accepted as evidence of unconformity. Further south, near
Carrickalinga Till, in a tectonically complicated area, evidence cited
for an unconformity is best interpreted as due to faulting.

Mount Terrible Formation

This new name is proposed for a sequence of dominantly clastic
rocks above the Marino Group and below the Wangkonda Limestone.
The name is taken from the rise ealled Mount Terrible, 4 miles south-
west of Willunga.

Three members can be distinguished and together these constitute
an easily recognizable unit. The formation is well exposed on the
new Sellick Hill- Myponga road and in the deep creek immediately
south of the road. The basal part of the lowest member, about
40 feet thick, is a cross-bedded coarse-grained arkose with thin silty
partings. The upper part of the member is quite silty but contains
thin beds of coarse sandstone some of which have been leached of
their carbonate content. This part of the member is lithologically
similar to the uppermost member (Hyolithes sandstone) and weathers

(1) During a discussion at a meeting of the Geological Boviety, South Australian Diyision,
Dr. A. W. Elecnian independently proposed the use of tle term Group instead of Series,

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 587

giving a characteristic intermittently cavernous appearance parallel
to the bedding. The bedding is quite irregular and gives every indica-
tion of being reworked by organisms. Worm castings are common on
bedding planes but no other fossils have been found in the member.

The middle member is a sequence of dark grey siltstones
(weathering yellow) about 200 feet thick which towards the top
hecome more noticeably cavernous in weathered outcrop. In places,
disruption of the bedding by worms leads to a characteristic spotted
appearance of the rock. (Kraaksten type bedding of Kuropean
authors; Dr, A, A, Opik, personal corumunication.)

The upper member, the Hyolithes sandstone of Abele and
McGowran (1959) consists of 45 feet of sandstones and coarse silt-
stones. The most conspicuous feature of the unit is its strongly
cavernous natire (plate 42, C). The cavities are elongated parallel
to the bedding and many contain pockets of residual clay, The
hyolithids oewuwr in a band of clay in weathered sandstone twenty
feet below the top of the member. The fauna is rich and includes
sponges, two genera of gastropods and many unidentified organisms,
It is the oldest Cambrian fauna located in the region, Intensive
re-working of parts of the unit by worms has given rise to a
kraaksten rock,

The cavernous nature of the weathered outerop of all members
has resulted from the leaching of carbonate rich patches and nodules,
observed only in fresh outcrops, as in the deep creek below the new
Selick Hill-Myponga road.

As pointed out by Horwitz (1960) and Thomson and Horwitz
(1961) the arkose marks the beginning of a new sedimentary eyele.
It separates the essentially non-carbonate red beds of the Marino
Group from the dominantly carbonate rich rocks of the Lower
Cambrian, Its significance is discussed in later paragraphs,

Wangkonda Limestone

The Wangkonda Formation was erected by Abele and MeGowran
(1959) for the Hyolithes sandstone and the limestones below the
flagey Sellick Hill Limestone, In this paper the Wyolithes sandstone
is included within the Mount Terrible Formation and the term
Wangkonda limestone is applied to the limestone member, The
lowest unit is a flaggy and mottled argillaceous limestone which
contains an assemblage of fossils similar to that found near the top of

588 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the underlying formation. The limestones above are massive and
generally clean, but mottled argillaceous limestones are also present.
A prominent caleareous sandstone with some kraaksten structure is
also included. The Archaeocyatha recorded by Campana, Wilson and
Whittle (1955) have been examined and found to be oolites. Oolitic
and fragmental limestones occur commonly within this formation.

Sellick Hill Limestone

The contact between the Wangkonda Limestone and Sellick Hill
Limestone on the new road is a cut and fill contact (plate 42, A).
At the contact hyolithids, gastropods and other organic remains are
found in the basal coarse sandy facies of the Sellick Hill Limestone.
Faunas occur throughout the formation but are sparse in comparison
with those found in the lower 30 or 40 feet, where worm castings and
burrows are prominent in quartz sandstone. Strong current action is
not only indicated by the nature of the contact (which in some ways
suggests it has been cut in lithified rock) but also by the current-
sorted and serially inserted hyolithids. The sandy facies is a
persistent feature over a large area but is not developed in some
sections. It is quite an important feature from Myponga Beach to
over a mile to the south-west along the coastline where carbonate
cemented sandstones are well developed. Although the base of the
formation is there below sea level, about 100ft. of coarse angular
sandy sediments with hyolithids and abundant worm castings (some
over two inches wide) are exposed.

Higher in the section are several continuous bands of intra-
formational conglomerates, generally less than a foot thick. These
conglomerates are composed of the limestone pebbles that remained
after the interbedded muds were winnowed out by strong current
action. Abundant fossils, also concentrated, sorted and oriented by
this current action, are frequently associated with these conglomerates.

The lithological variation of the Sellick Hill Limestone has been
described by Abele and McGowran (1959). The lower part is
essentially a calcareous shale, but above, banded and nodular
argillaceous limestones alternating with cale-shales are characteristic,

(2) Dr, A, A. Opik (personal communication) has suggested that this contact is due to
submarine solutional effects. This idea is supported by the fact that the upper surface
of the Wangkonda Limestone is differentially phosphatized (residual phosphate on a
corrosion surface).

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 589

making the recognition of these mottled beds comparatively easy.
The Sellick Hill Limestone is similar to the Parara Limestone of
Yorke Peninsula, but unlike that formation contains no trilobites.

Fork Tree Limestone

This formation ig divided into two members, the thicker and
lower one being a massive partially recrystallized clean limestone
containing Archaeoeyatha, phosphatic shelled organisms and sponge
remains, The limestone is variously dolomitised. The upper member,
4 massive strikingly mottled limestone, is only sparsely fossiliferous,

Heatherdale Shale

This formation was divided hy Abele and McGowran into a lower
caloareous member and an upper member which is a black shale almost
free of carbonate, The boundary between the two members is really
a subjective issue. The lower part of the formation is extremely
variable lithologieally and the thickness of the carbonate developments
vary as do also the type of limestone. In the Sellick Hill region thin
weathered shale with phosphate nodules separates flaggy limestones
from the underlying mottled member of the Fork Tree Limestone.
Above this there is a gradual transition through shales with inter-
bedded lentieles and nodules of limestone to essentially non-caleareous
phosphate rich shales, At Carriekalinga Head above the Fork
Tree Limestone is a thick sequence of rubbly argillaceous lime-
stone which gives way to cale-shales containing large carbonate
nodules, Phosphate nodules occur in both the rubbly limestone and
cale-shales. The upper member, as recognized in the Sellick Hill
region, cannot be recognized in this section. Hyolithids, sponges,
brachiopods and gastropods, which include Welcionella, ocour
sporadically throughout the formation.

Carrickalingu Head formation

This term is here used informally for a sequence of alternating
thin olive-coloured shales and thin graywackes that occur in the
Carrickalinga Head region. The base of the formation is marked by
the first band of olive-coloured shale that appears above the carbonate
rich member of the Heatherdale Shale. Abele and McGowran (1959)
have erroneously included this band as the upper member of the
Heatherdale Shale. Lingulella is the only fossil found in the forma-
tion, within 30 feet of the base, The contact with the underlying

"we

590 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Heatherdale Shale is sharp and the formation represents the
beginning of a new cycle of deposition. The top of the formation is
concealed below the sea.

1. THE CAMBRIAN OF THE RAPID BAY-DELAMERE REGION

Geological investigations were concentrated in the strip of country
bounded by the Stockyard Creek and the main road linking Delamere
and Rapid Bay, The observations were also supplemented by work
carried out between this area and Myponga reservoir,

Stockyard Creck Section

Stratigraphic observations were initiated in Stockyard Creek.
Here, Mr. W. ©. Leslie, University of Adelaide, who is currently
mapping the area, assured me there were good exposures. As a
knowledge of this section is vital for the understanding of the geology
of the region a considerable amount of detailed work was carried out
along this creek. The results are summarized in fig. 1,

Thicknesses given for this column have been computed from the
aerial photographs except for those mentioned in the text which have
been measured.

On the Jervis sheet, along Stockyard Creek, Campana and Wilson
have delineated an overturned anticline with Cambrian rocks on both
limbs. Examination of this section reveals that the stratigraphy on
the two limbs of the alleged anticline ig so vastly different that even
neglecting facings (these are not readily available), it is not possible
to interpret the sequence as an anticline, The phosphatie phyllites,
which Campana and Wilson used to delineate the structure not only
for this part of the alleged anticline but also to the north in the Rapid
Bay region (see especially Carnpana, 1955, fig. 1) could not be located
on the overturned limb. Phyllitie rocks do occur there but they are
not phosphatic, Later search revealed that all the heds on the “over-
turned’ limb were right way up according to the many facings
obtained on cross-hedded rocks, Further, it was found that the
phyllites are faulted against south-east dipping arkosic beds mapped
as overturned Kanmantoo Group rocks. These also face east and so
are not overturned, The stratigraphic position of these *Kanmantoo
Group” rocks has not yet been established, The details of this section
along Stockyard Creek are shown below.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 591

Sturt Group

The oldest rocks found along the line of section are laminated
black phyllites with well developed lineations and bondinage structure,
These rocks are faulted against south-east facing arkosic rocks which
strike into them, The actual contact occupies the bed of the creek and
is not observable. These black phyllites can be correlated with the
Tapley Hill Slate. Thicker developments of these phyllites occur
to the north-east where they are particularly well exposed in No
Where Else Creek, The phyllites are ealeareous and pass gradually
into a thick flaggy limestone-marble sequence which approximates to
the Brighton Limestone of the Adelaide region. The boundary as in
the Adelaide region is a gradational one and I lave made no attempt to
define a position for i. The limestones vary from dark blue grey
argillaceous limestones and cale-shales to very pure banded cream,
buff and light blue grey marbles. The upper part contains evidence
which indicates that the beds were of shallow water origin, They are
rippled and contain mud cracks and mud pellets, The beds are quite
lenticular,

Marmo Group

Difficulty was found in establishing a boundary between the Sturt
and Marino Groups and the lowest unit inelnded in the Marino Group
might well be included with the Brighton Limestone, This lowest unit
is a well laminated dark blue-grey to black calcareous siltstone, It is
succeeded by dark-coloured current bedded siltstones and silty
quartzites with thin interbeds of cleaner quartzites. Mud eracks were
found not only in this but also in a quartzite-siltstone sequenee which
lies stratigraphically above. Higher in the section there is a coarse
to pebbly caleareons sandstone with clean and sandy marble lenses.
This important unit is quite useful for mapping purposes and is
hereafter referred to as the “gritty marble’, Above is a thick
sequence of laminated siltstone with minor quartzite interbeds. The
lower part of the unit is banded in such a way that it recalls the type
of banding in the Marino Group siltstones of the wave eut platform
north of Black Point, Hallett Cove. About 50 feet of massive dark
grey pebbly quartzite underhes about 1,400 feet of soft and poorly
outcropping siltstones and phyllites which become coarser in their
upper part. Thin greywackes are included in the upper part of this
unit, The phyllites are strongly lineated and some are rich in
magnetite. The uppermost unit of the Marino Group consists of a
sequence of alternating flaggy and ripple marked quartzites, laminated

592 RECORDS OF THE 8.A, MUSEUM

siltstones and at least three massive clean quartzite bands which form
prominent outcrops throughout the district. This unit is equated with
the uppermost anit of the Marino Group found in the Sellick Hill
district.

Mount Terrible Formation

A massive arkose band five feet thick is overlain by a thin
sequence (about 60 feet) of light grey phyllites which include at least
two thin bands of calcareous sandstone. The beds, particularly the
sandstones, weather with a characteristic cavernous appearance
identical to that found in the same formation at Sellick Hill, The
bedding is quite irregular in the sandstones and worm activity is
evident on their bedding planes, The uppermost unit included in the
formation is a sandstone, 40 feet thick, which forms a hard band
across the hed of the ereek. It varies from a fine to coarse grained
sandstone and contains pebble lenses and coarse arkose. The rock is
patchily calcareous throughont, the uppermost 6 feet (poorly exposed)
being a sandy marble. Twelve feet above the base is a three to four
inch cale-sand band containing abundant hyolithids and scanty
gastropod remains. Away from the creek the sandstone assumes a
strong cavernous character on weathering (plate 42, D).

Wangkonda Limestone (Marble Phase)

A blue-grey argillaceons limestone outcrops in the bed of
Stockyard Creek, It is correlated with the lowest member of the
formation at Sellick Hill and is overlain by massive light blue-grey
to pink marbles which are split by a band of sandstone, twelve feet
thick, similar to that which contains the hyolithids in the Mount
Terrible Wormation. The uppermost part of the sandstone is a fine
grained conglomerate with well rounded quartz grains. Some fine
crystalline dolomite bands occur within the formation.

Sellick Hill. Limestone.

The boundary between the Wangkonda Limestone and Sellick Hill
Limestone is visible in a road entting on the south side of the creek
and also in a small quarry 100 yards to the south (plate 42, B),
The basal portion of the unit in the quarry consists of a thin white
gritty sandstone eight inches thick which lenses out within the length
of the quarry. It contains worm castings and numerous serially
inserted hyolithids, About five feet of the weathered formation, mainly
leached calcareous shale, cale-siltstones and lenticular limestones, are
exposed above the marble, One cale-shale band up to three inches thick

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS. CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 593

contains numerous hyolithids. In the road cutting, the Wangkonda
Limestone is overlain by leached grey to yellow cale-shales. Thin
sandy interbeds contain evidence of worm activity. The weathering
pattern is strikingly similar to that seen in the same formation on the
old Sellick Hill-Myponga road, Hyolithids occur within three feet of
the contact.

The remainder of the formation is mainly seen in small quarries
and in a large road cutting on the Cape Jervis-Yankalilla road, The
lower part is a laminated calcareous shale becoming more calcareous
above and developing imto banded and nodular mottled limestone.
The only apparent difference between this formation here and the
Sellick Hill region is that there is a decided drawing out with
consequent flattening of the limestone nodules and bands. This is a
tectonie affect. As well some of the purer limestone bands have
been altered to marbles, the shales to phyllites.

Fork Tree Limestone (Marble Phase)

Both members of the formation are located on the east side of
the Cape Jervis road. The thiek lower member is represented by very
pure, banded and coarse-textured, light-coloured marbles. The upper
unit, a dark coloured and mottled argillaceous but massive limestone,
is well exposed in a quarry on the north side of the creek.

Heatherdale Shale (Phyllite Phase)

Above the mottled limestone is a blue-black weathered phyllite
containing flattened caleareous nodules which weather ont and cover
the ground, This corresponds to the lower member of the formation
as recognized in the Sellick Hill region, The upper member is a dark
phyllite which contains abundant carbonaceous and phosphatic nodules.
The best ontcrops are found high on the slopes above the ereek.

Carrickalinga Head formation

This formation is easily recognized and consists of alternating
thin bands of soft brown phyllite and massive dark graywackes of
similar order of thickness to the beds found on Carrickalinga Head.
The contact with the underlying Heatherdale Shale was not observed,
This formation is accepted in this paper as the lowermost unit, of
the Kanmantoo Group.

594 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

III. DISCUSSION

Regional metamorphism has affected the rocks, particularly the
finest clastics and the purer limestones, but the grade is low and no
difficulty is experienced in establishing lithological correlations with
the Cambrian-Precambrian sequence to the north of Normanville.

Pure limestones were the most noticeably affected, going to
banded, generally coarse-textured marbles, the banding being a meta-
morphic effect. It parallels the axial plane of the folds which in turn
approximates to the true bedding as seen in other rock types. Massive
mottled limestones with little original argillaceous components have
been recrystallized to produce marbles, with thin schistose bands.

Flaggy, mottled and banded argillaceous limestones such as the
Sellick Hill Limestone were apparently little affected structurally,
but their textures were variously changed, depending on original
composition. Calcareous shales have been altered to phyllites, the
more argillaceous limestone bands and nodules being flattened and
drawn out parallel to the fold axis with little increase in grain size.
(Very strong lineations, plunge 30°, direction 140°, remarkably
constant, are recorded throughout the Rapid Bay—Delamere area.)
The purer limestones have altered to marble.

The fossils found near Delamere in the sandstones have not been
greatly affected by the regional movements, the most conspicuous
effect being flattening with distortion in the axial plane.

One of the most obvious things that emerges from the considera-
tion of the stratigraphy of the region, for that portion of the geologic
column studied, is the remarkable constancy of facies. Certainly,
minor facies differences do occur but these do not detract from the
overall picture.

The only facies changes of any particular note are related to the
lower portion of the Heatherdale Shale, where both laterally and
vertically there is variation in the shale-carbonate ratio. A practical
expression of this variation are the various types of mottled, nodular
and flaggy limestones that are encountered in the various sections.
There is also some variation in the lower part of the Sellick Hill
Limestone where coarse sandy lenses are frequent. In some sections
the sands are entirely missing, whereas in others such as in a quarry
immediately east of Fork Tree Homestead, the lower part of the
formation is a thick sandstone with leached cale-shale interbeds.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 595

A glance at fig. 1 indicates that the Mount Terrible Formation
rests on Marino Group quartzites and siltstones in both Stockyard
Greek and at Sellick Hill and that this nnit is underlain by siltstones
which pass down into thick sequences of finer grained rocks. These two
units are equated in both sections.@ Hxamination of the uppermost
unit of the Marino Group indicates that the sediments are lenticular
and are of shallow water origin; periods of temporary exposure are
indicated by mud cracks, A paralie environment is suggested for the
deposition of the unit. Rocks similar to those of the Marino Group
were deposited during the Lower and Middle Cambrian elsewhere in
the State and a comparable environment of deposition for them has
been invoked by Daily (1956). Tt is worth noting here that these
proven Cambrian rocks are devoid of all animal life except trilobite
tracks and bnrrows and therefore represent an environment
apparently unsuitable for the preservation of skeletal material, One
must keep these facets in mind when final consideration is being given
to the determination of the Cambrian-Precambrian boundary.

The Mount Terrible Formation introduces a new cyele of deposi-
tion dominated by the presence of carbonates, It is interpreted as a
transgressive unit deposited under full marine conditions. The trans-
gression does not imply unconformity and on the evidence presented
it seems unlikely that there is unconformity between tt and the
Marino Gronp as proposed by ‘Thomson and Horwitz (1961).

The Kanmantoo Group also imitiates a new cycle of deposition
and is marine, at least near its base, as indicated by the presence
of brachiopods, The interfingering of the greywacke-shale sequence
with the underlying Heatherdale Shale, suggested by Abele and
McGowran (1959), cannot be supported, the Heatherdale Shiale-
Carrickalinga Head formation contact being one of the sharpest within
the Cambrian sequence, The initiation of Kanmantoo Group sedi-
mentation is interpreted as having commenced simultaneously every-
where within the region studied. Whether it is necessary to invoke
a time break between the two formations tou explain the absence of the
non-calearcons member of the Heatherdale Shale at Carrickalinga

(3) A comparison of tha stratigraphic column for the Stockyard Creel Precutnbrian sequence
(fig. 1) with that given for the Willinga senyp by Madigan (1927, fig. 4) indicates
striking lithological agreemont hetween these live nveas, provided due allowance 1s
made for regional metamorphir effeets. CAs there ir ro little Interal lithological
variation in the Cambrian-Preeambirija sucecssion on Mleurien Peninsnla there appears
to be hore an excellent rescarch project far Nive Metamorphic petrologist mterceted in
the progressive metamorphism of a sedimentiry subeession.)

596 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Head, is questionable. Rather, the initiation of its deposition may be
related to the uplift (not orogenic) within the ‘‘geosyncline’’ during
the Lower Cambrian (Daily, 1956, p. 99, pp. 125-128, p. 139).

IV. THE BASE OF THE CAMBRIAN SYSTEM, SOUTH OF ADELAIDE

Abele and McGowran (1959) discovered Cambrian fossils a short
distance below the position of the Precambrian-Cambrian boundary
as defined by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1955). For mapping
purposes they placed the boundary at the base of their Hypolithes
sandstone and related all beds below this level to the Adelaide System.

Daily (1956), after discussing the problem of fixing the base of
the Cambrian in South Australia, concluded that comparative faunal
studies were necessary to define the base of the Cambrian and that
‘‘perhaps then we shall find that the base of the Archaeocyatha lime-
stone will approximate the base of the Cambrian.’’? These faunal
studies have not yet been made and we are no further advanced
towards solving this problem. Only comparative faunal studies of
our oldest faunas with those from other continents, can provide a
solution.

In any discussion on the boundary problem several factors must
be considered before possible finality can be reached. We are not
certain how far down in the stratigraphic column we will find
Cambrian fossils. Perhaps our searches have in the past been too
limited. Another factor already cited above concerns the environment
of deposition and available conditions for fossilization. The Marino
Group rocks have not been given the study they warrant and we can
only guess as to their depositional history. Certainly they are not
likely looking rocks in which to search for fossils. Nevertheless,
fossils do occur and to these we ascribe a Precambrian age, not
because we know they were Precambrian animals, but because the
fauna is ‘‘without any known Lower Cambrian elements.”’ (Glaessner,
in Glaessner and Daily, 1959, Glaessner, 1960.) Another factor which
clouds the issue is the proposed unconformity between the Marino
Group and the Mount Terrible Formation on Fleurieu Peninsula.
Unconformity or disconformity at the top of the Pound Sandstone in
the Flinders Range has also been cited. Added to this the earliest
shelly fauna on Fleurieu Peninsula contains such a variety of animals
that one might expect to find traces of them lower down in the column.
Further they may be older than Lower Cambrian faunas found
elsewhere.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION a97

It has been the practice in this State to make time boundaries
coincide with mapped rock unit boundaries, This is contrary to
established stratigraphic principles and any attempt to define the base
of the Cambrian as a rock unit boundary should be resisted. For
this paper the Cambrian-Precambrian boundary is placed within the
Mount Terrible Formation below the first appearance of the Hyolithes
and associated fauna. Future study may decide that this position
is incorrect but the boundary proposed is more realistic and com-
patible with known fact than one which is forced to fit the lithology.

Vv. THE AGE OF THE RAPID BAY MARBLE
Previous workers in the Rapid Bay-Delamere region have
assumed the presence of only one major marble formation and have
correlated this lithologically with the fossiliferous Lower Cambrian
limestones found near Normanyille.

The present investigations have shown that the seqnenece contain-
ing the Delamere marbles can be correlated with the Lower Cambrian
succession both on lithological and faunal grounds, In addition, it
has been shown that the marble on Stockyard Creek near Starfish Hill
is not overturned but faces cast, does not form the west limb of a
postulated anticline of which the Delamere marble forms the east
limb, nor is it Cambrian in age, It is about 2,500 feet stratigraphically
below the Cambrian beds and eqnates with the Brighton Limestone
and is therefore Precambrian in age.

Conformably below the marble are phyllites whieh can be
correlated with the Tapley Hill Slate. These phyllites do not contain
phosphatic nodules. The Jervis sheet indicates that these phyllites
and marbles oceupy a syneline between Starfish Till and Mount Rapid
and an anticline between Mount Rapid and Rapid Head, Continuity
of outerop is indicated for both units although in the hinge area of
the syncline younger cover thasks the marble. Investigations have
suggested that the marble band on Mount Rapid is overturned and
faces west whilst stratigraphieally above is the ‘‘gritty marble"
(Imit 33 of Stockyard Creek section) and other beds referred to the
Marino Gronp, and below, beds lithologically similar to the Tapley
Hill Slate, For these reasons the marble is correlated with the
Brighton Limestone, If this band is then linked with the Starfish Hill
marble as seems the logical thing to do, we would have an anticline
with Tapley Hill Slate in the core but with closure to the north-east.
This seems improbable as the closure of the regional anticline around

598 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the Yankalilla Archaean inlier is to the south-west. However, a fault
bringing the two marbles close together could be postulated to explain
the relationships. The closure of the Mount Rapid marble band with
the large mass to the north, the Rapid Bay Marble, cannot be estab-
lished, both bands being cut off by a fault west of Mount Rapid (Mr.
R. D. Drayton, personal communication). If closure could be effected
then we would have a syncline closing to the south-west which again
is contrary to the structural interpretation of the region. No satis-
factory facings have been found in the sequence below the Rapid Bay
marble to assist in the interpretation of the complex structure but a
few suggest that it is facing east and hence right way up. Possibly
a fault separates the two marble bands").

It is impossible with the present data to establish the true
stratigraphic position of the Rapid Bay marble. It still could be
Cambrian in age but there are not many points of resemblance between
these sequences and the established Cambrian sequence at Delamere.
It is tentatively suggested therefore that the Rapid Bay marble is a
tectonically thickened phase of the Brighton Limestone.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Portion of expenses in connection with this work were defrayed
from the University Research Grant. Most of the observations in the
Sellick Hill-Carrickalinga Head region were made whilst at the South
Australian Museum. I am indebted to Messrs. R. D. Drayton and
W. C. Leslie for helpful discussions. They will contribute a joint
paper with accompanying map on the geology of the Rapid Bay-
Delamere region; also to other members of the Geology Department,
especially Dr, A. W. Kleeman, who have criticized parts of the manu-
script. I wish to express my sincere thanks to Mrs. H. Auvaart for
typing the manuscript and to Miss A. M. C. Swan for the excellent
drafting of fig. 1.

(4) The above arguments assume that the closure of the regional anticline to the south-west
around the Archaean as mapped by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954, 1954a) is
correct, The author believes that the evidence for a south-west closure might be
disputed. Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954a, fig. 3) in a block diagram indicate
a closure for the basal conglomerates to the south-west around the Archaean,
Mr, J. L. Talbot and the author have together examined the section along the
Congeratinga River and found that the basal conglomerates occur as fault slices within
the Archaean. Facings on all slices of these conglomerates proved that they were
not overturned and belonged to the east limb of the fold and not the west limb
as indicated. Further, the Sturt Tillite and underlying quartzites are faulted against
the Archaean and are overturned (according to B.D.). Practically the whole of the
thick pre-tillite sequence found on the east limb is faulted out.

If the regional closure for this anticline is to the north-east (a critical reappraisal
of the region should indicate this), then many of the existing difficulties such as the
faults postulated for the Rapid Bay region would become unnecessary.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 599

REFERENCES

American Code of Stratigraphic Nomenclature, 1961: Am. Assoc.
Petroleum Geologists Bull., 45, No. 5, pp. 645-665.

Abele, C., and McGowran, B., 1959: ‘‘The Geology of the Cambrian
South of Adelaide (Sellick Hill to Yankalilla).’’ Trans.
Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 82, pp. 301-320.

Campana, B., 1953: Geol, Atlas S. Austr., Gawler Sheet; Geol. Survey
S. Austr.

1955: ‘‘The Structure of the Eastern Sonth Australian
Ranges: The Mt. Lofty-Olary Are.’’ Journ. Geol. Soc.
Austr., 2, pp. 47-61.

Campana, B., and Wilson, R. B., 1955; ‘‘Tillites and Related Glacial
Topography of South Australia.’’ Hcl. Geol. Helv., 48,
no. 1, pp. 1-30.

Campana, B., Wilson, R. B., and Whittle, A. W. G., 1954: Geol, Atlas
S. Austr., Yankalilla Sheet; Geol. Survey S. Austr.

1954a: Geol. Atlas S. Austr., Jervis Sheet; Geol. Survey
S. Austr.

1955: ‘‘The Geology of the Jervis and Yankalilla Military
Sheets.’’ Rept. Investigations No. 3; Geol. Survey S.
Austr.

Clarke, E, deC., 1938: ‘‘Middle and West Australia.’’ Regionale
Geol. d. Erde, Bd. 1, Abs. VII. Akad. Verl. M.B.H.,
Leipzig.

Daily, B., 1956: ‘‘The Cambrian in South Australia.’?’ XX Congreso
Geol. Internacional, Mexico, 1956. El] sistema Cambrico
su Paleogeografia y el problema de su base, 2, pp. 91-147.

David, T. W. E., 1922: ‘‘Oceurrence of Remains of Small Crustacea
in the Proterozoic(?) or Lower Cambrian(?) Rocks of
Reynella, Near Adelaide.’’ Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Austr.,
Ad@laide, 46, pp. 6-8.

1927: ‘‘Note on the Geological Horizon of the Archaeo-
eyathinae.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 51,
pp. 410-413.

1932: ‘‘Explanatory Notes to Accompany a New Geological
Map of the Commonwealth of Australia.’’ London,
Arnold, 177 pp,

600 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(ed. Browne, W. R.), 1950: ‘‘The Geology of the Common-
wealth of Australia.’? London, Arnold, I, 747 pp.

Glaessner, M, F’,, 1960: ‘‘Precambrian fossils from South Australia,”
Rept, XXI Int. Geol. Congr., Norway, Pt, 22, pp. 59-64.

Glaessner, M. F., and Daily, B., 1959: ‘*The Geology and Late Pre-
cambrian Fauna of the Ediacara Fossil Reserve.’’? Ree.
S. Austr. Museum, Adelaide, 13, No. 3, pp. 369-401.

Horwitz, R, C., 1960: ‘‘Geologie de la region de Mt. Compass (fenille
Milang), Australie Meridionale. Kel. Geol, Helv. 53,
No. 1, pp. 211-263,

Horwitz, R. C. and Thomson, B. P., 1960: Geol. Atlas S. Austr.,
Milang Sheet; Geol. Survey 8. Austr.

Horwitz, R. C., Thomson, B. P. and Webb, B. P., 1959: ‘The
Cambrian-Precambrian Boundary in the Eastern Mt.
Lofty Ranges Region: South Australia.’”’ Trans. Roy.
Soc. 8, Austr., Adelaide, 82, pp. 205-218,

Hossfeld, P. 8., 1935; ‘*The Geology of Part of the North Mount Lofty
Ranges.’”’ Trans, Roy, Soc. 8. Austr, Adelaide, 59, pp.
16-67.

Howchin, W., 1897: ‘On the Occurrence of Lower Cambrian Fossils
in the Mount Lofty Ranges.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr.,
Adelaide, 21, pp. 74-86.

1923: ‘‘A Geological Sketch—Section of the Sea-Cliffs on
the Eastern Side of Gulf St. Vincent, from Brighton to
Sellicks Hill, with Deseriptions.’’ Trans. Roy. Soe. §,
Austr,, Adelaide, 47, pp, 279-315,
Madigan, C. T., 1925: ‘*The Geology of the Fleurien Peninsula, Part
{: The Coast from Sellick Hill to Vietor Harbonr."’
Trans, Roy Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 49, pp. 198-212.
Madigan, C. T., 1927: ‘The Geology of the Willunga Searp,’’? Trans.
Roy. Soe. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 51, pp. 398-409.
Mawson, D., 1934; ‘*The Munyallina Beds. A Late Proterozoic
Formation.’? Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 58,
pp. 187-196,
1939: ‘The First Stage of the Adelaide Series: As Tns-
trated at Mount Magnificent.’’ ‘Trans. Roy. Soe, 8.
Austr,, Adelaide, 63, (1), pp. 69-78.

1940: ‘The Adelaide Series.’’ Aust. J. Sci., 3, pp. 25-27.

DAILY—FOSSILIFEROUS CAMBRIAN SUCCESSION 601

1948: ‘‘Sturtian Tillite of Mount Jacob and Mount Warren
Hastings North Flinders Ranges.’’ Trans. Roy. Soc. S.
Austr., Adelaide, 72, 2, pp. 244-251.

Mawson, D., and Sprigg, R. C., 1950: ‘‘Subdivision of the Adelaide
System.’’ Aust. J. Sci., Sydney, 13, No. 3, pp. 69-72.

Sprigg, R. C., 1942: ‘‘The Geology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block.’’
Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 66, (2), pp. 185-214.

1946: ‘*Reconnaissance Geological Survey of Portion of the
Western Hsecarpment of the Mount Lofty Ranges.”
Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., Adelaide, 77, (2), pp, 313-347.

Sprigg, R. C. and Campana, B., 1953: ‘*The Age and Facies of the
Kanmantoo Group, Eastern Mount Lofty Ranges and
Kangaroo Island, 8.A.’’ Aust. J. Sei, Sydney, 16,
No. 1, pp. 12-14.

Thomson, B. P. and Horwitz, R. C., 1961: ‘‘Cambrian-Pre-Cambrian
Unconformity in Sellick Hill-Normanville Area of South
Australia.’’? Aust. J. Sci., Sydney, 24, No. 1, p. 40.

Wilson, A. F., 1952: ‘‘The Adelaide System as Developed in the
Riverton-Clare Region, North Mount Lofty Ranges,
South Australia.’”’ Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 75, pp.
131-149.

HXPLANATION OF PLATE 42

Fig. A. Cnt and fill contaet (chalked) between massive light-grey limestone of the
Wangkonda Limestone (right) and the Sellick Hill Limestone, new Sellick Hill-Myponga
road, Wyolithids oeeur abundantly above the contact. in the Sellick Hill Limestone.

Fig. B. Contact between the fossiliferous Sclliek Hill Limestone and the underlying
massive marble (Wangkonda Limestone) in a small quarry, about 100 yards south of
Stockyard Creek, Delamere. Hyolithids oceur in sandstone at the contact indicated by the
hammer head,

Fig. C. The eavernous weathering typical of the upper calearcous sandstone member of
the Mount Terrible Formation, new Sellick Hill-Myponga road.

Fig, D. Cavernous weathering in the upper calcareous sandstone member of the Mount
Terrible Formation, Stockyard Creek, Delamere. Hyolithids oceur in beds ahout 4 feet above
those in the photograph.

Photographs taken by Mr, J. L. Talbot, Geology Depurtment, University of Adelaide.

Tiec, SoA Mirsieiem Von. 14, Poatr 48

Te fire page B02.)

Coron X oa Ng.

Age Mau 9&4
4

volume 14. No. 4
1964

RECORDS

OF THE

SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Published by the Board and edited by Norman B. Tindale

Printed in Australia by W. L. Hawes, Government Printer, Adelaide.
Registered in Australia for Tronsmission by Post es a Periodical.

OBITUARY NOTICE:
HERBERT WOMERSLEY, A.L.S. (Honoris causa), F.R.E.S.

10.iv.1889-14.x.1962

(ENTOMOLOGIST, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, 1933-1954;
ACAROLOGIST, 1954-1959; HONORARY ACAROLOGIST, 1959-1962)

Summary

Herbert Womersley was born on April 10", 1889, at Warrington, Lancashire, England.
Warrington was an ancient town, an industrial centre with some 50,000 inhabitants, its
most important industries being then the manufacture of iron and iron goods, wire,
leather, soap and beer. It derived its importance from being situated on the River Mersey
and the Manchester Ship Canal, an artificial watercourse separating Warrington from the
county of Cheshire, and allowing large ocean-going vessels to reach the docks in the
heart of Manchester. Warrington had a museum (which housed the free library) and a
municipal art gallery. The town’s moment of greatness was from 1757-1783, when the
famous Dissenting Academy existed there, numbering among its teachers Joseph
Priestley (1733-1804), also Aiken, Taylor and Wakefield.

Obituary Notice]
HERBERT WOMERSLEY, A.L.S. (Honoris causa), F.R.E.S.
10,iv.1889-14.x.1962

(Iinromonoaist, Sourm AusrrauiAN Musaum, 1933-1954; Acaroroarst,
1954-1959; Honorary Acarotoatst, 1959-1962)

Herbert Womersley was born on April 10th, 1889, at Warrington,
Laneashire, England, Warrington was an ancient town, an industrial
centre with some 50,000 inhabitants, its most important industries
being then the manufacture of iron and iron goods, wire, leather,
soap and beer. It derived its importance from being situated on the
River Mersey and the Manchester Ship Canal, an artificial water-
vonrse separating Warrington from the county of Cheshire, and
allowing large oeean-going vessels to reach the docks in the heart of
Manchester. Warrington had a moseum (which housed the free
library) and a municipal art-gallery. The town’s moment. of greatness
was trom 1757-1783, when the famous Dissenting Acadamy existed
there, numbering among its teachers Joseph Priestley (1733-1804),
also Aiken, Taylor and Wakefield.

Womersley was a true son of Laneashire, and never quite lost all
trace of the North Country accent. Apart from a short sojourn in
South Wales, his boyhood was spent in Warrington, where he was
educated, At an early age he became interested in insects, an interest
no doubt fostered by his father, Fred Womersley, an enthusiastic
amateur lepidopterist. Young Womersley’s early interests in this
group were the Lepidoptera, and later the Diptera. In his early
twenties he became interested in microscopy, and had the good fortune
to come in contact with Abraham Flatters, a well-known British
microscopist, Who was later one of the founders of the firm of Matters
and Garnett, makers of entomological requisites. Until the end of
his life Womersley remembered F'latters with affection, WUWnder his
puidanee, he was able to take a night course at the Manchester School
of Technology in the staining, clearing and eutting of botanical
sections. Out of this came Womersley’s first scientific publication
(1912), on the use of terpineol as a clearing agent, which was
published in Flatter’s own journal, The Micrologist,

In 1907 Womersley had joined the staff of J. Crosfield and Sons,
soap and chemical manufacturers, where he served the equivalent of
an apprenticeship, specializing in fuel economy (coal) and water

604 RECORDS OF THE 5.A. MUSBUM

softeners. Before the 1914-1918 war he had begun to collect Diptera
to some purpose, coming in contact with sueh well-known workers as
A. A. Austen and F, W. Edwards. A number of new loeality records
were added to the British fauna, and notable among these was the
collecting in Britain for the first time of the march-fly Tabanus
(Atylotus) plebijus Wallen, 1817 in 1911 at Abbots, Moss, Delamere,
Cheshire, Ilis attention beeame at that stage attracted to the
primitive insect groups, the Thysanura and more particularly the
Collembola, groups in which he was able to make use of his flair for
microscopy. He entered into correspondence with a number of other
workers, both in England and on the Continent, including the Belgian
workers M. Goetghebuer and A. L, Tomnoir, the latter of whom later
came to Australia and worked with R. J. Tillyard in Canberra, (The
present writer did not manage to find any of this early correspondence
of Womersley’s in the mass of material Womersley turned over to
him in 1962, when a request was made for access to biographical
material; possibly it did not survive World War 1.)

With the outbreak of hostilities, Womersley joined the Royal
Army Medical Corps in 1914, initially through the St, John’s
Ambulance Brizade at Manchester, On account of his training im
microscopy he was placed in charge of a laboratory at Fort Chatham,
under the control of Charles Singer, later to become famous as &
medical historian, Womersley’s duties included routine clinico-
pathological tests, including bacteriological, and even extended to
routine pharmaceutical dispensing, A man of resource, no doubt be
rose to the occasion under these varying demands. For some months
Wowersley was in daily contact with Singer, getting to know him and
Mrs, Singer well, and on one occasion the trio journeyed to
Folkestone together, Their love of natural history was no doubt a
bond in common,

In 1915 calls were made for persons trained in chemistry to join
the Chemical Corps of the Royal Engineers, and. Womersley volun-
teered and was transferred to one of the newly formed gas companies,
Womersley looked hack in later life samewhat wryly upon this period.
No real use was made of his training in chemistry, and the duties
allotted to these troops consisted mainly of Ingging heavy eylinders of
chlorine, phosgene and other gases into suitable situations in the
trenches, and, when the wind was suitable, releasing the gases upon
(he enemy, He participated in the first British gas attack upon the
Gormans at Loos, snd acain at the Battle for the Hohenzollern Redoubt,
and on the Somme, These attacks were relatively ineffective, as the

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H, WOMERSLEY 605

Germans were well ahead in this field and had effective respirators,
In addition the meteorological forecasts were unreliable, and the
British gas companies sometimes found the gases they had released
rolled back upon fliemselves when the wind changed. Womersley
himself was affected by gas in this way on several occasions.

With the heightening tempo of war many industrial chemists
were put into the munitions industry, Womersley being recalled from
the trenehes and transferred to explosives manufacture, Formal
discharge oceurred in 1917. He served in factories in Chester and
Mauchester, and later at Dornoch in Seotland, being concerned with
the mannfaeture of 'L.N.T., nitroglycerine, acids, as well as. the
recovery Of aleohol and ether vapour in cordite stoves. During this
period there was no time for entomology.

In 1920 he left, Warrington to take up an appointment as manager,
uel and Steamraising Department, in Christopher Thomas Bros.,
soup tnanufacturers, at Bristol. He was now able to devote his spare
time seriously to entomology, and entered into correspondence ayain
with other workers. He worked with assidnity, concentrating upon the
Apterygota, with a occasional inenrsion towards the Diptera and
other groups. In the study of the Apterygota he found evidance in
Lubbock’s (1873) monograph on the Collembola in the Ray Society's
volomes, and was also able to get lelp from a number ol colleagues
both in Ingland and on continental Europe. For some years most
help was probably derived from J, M. Brown, F.L.8., F.E.8., who
identified Collembola and Thysanura sent to him in Sheffield. Others
of his eorrespondents were J. R, Denis, of Dijon, Franee, W. M.
Linnanicmi (who later changed hig name to W. M. Axelson) in
Seandinavia, Professor F, Silvestri in Italy, J. Stach in Poland, and
the eollembologists J. W. Folsom and H, B. Mills in the United States
of America. His Knglish colleaynes interested in these insects were
J. W, Shoebotham and R, 8. Bagnall.

Womersley becaine closely associated with the Bristol Museum,
his industry and enthusiasm impressing itself npon the then Direetor,
Dr. OU. Bolton. th Bristol also he identified himself with waturalists’
interests. He joined the Bristol Naturalists’ Society, taking a
prominent part in its activities, including a term as President. THe
wus also one of the promoters of the South-Western Union of
Naturalists, and served as Secretary from its inception nntil he left
KMingland in 1930, His Presidential address to the Bristol Naturalists’
Society in 1923 intreduced his survey of the Apteryyota of the south-
west of England, which appeared in three parts, over 1924-1926. He

606 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

was highly esteemed by his colleagues in Bristol, and on departure
was made an Honorary Member of the Naturalists’ Society. Cordial
relations were enjoyed with many other naturalists, particularly
entomologists, and the correspondence Womersley received from them
remains in existence, The co-operation of these workers was both
genuine and considerable, and these letters are a pleasure to read over
30 years later on the other side of the world. One finds among it
such gems as this from the Rev. A. Thornley, M.A., F.L.8., F.ELS.,
F.R.Met.Soc., F.R.H.S., written from St. Anael’s, Carbis Bay,
Cornwall on 3rd September, 1929:

. Just at present . . . our little Bay, where I get your
nice Petrobius, is almost a solid mass of trippers, and bathing
tents right up against the Petrobial Cliffs!!! But as soon as ever
they clear off to dulce domuwm my wife and I will make a special
expedition and try to send you a tube-full . . .”’

He did this despite his own preoccupation with the Diptera and other
groups, his rheumatism and his age. In another letter he mentioned
he had been an entomologist for 50 years.

Womersley had the capacity for lasting friendship, and another
friend of that period who stands out is J. V. Pearman, who later
joined the staff of the British Museum, specializing in Psocoptera.

In these years he published a number of short papers on the
Apterygota, showing an increasing grasp of the group, and among
these were sandwiched short notes on Diptera and Dermaptera. In
the course of several years he became the British authority on
Collembola, and collections were referred to him from South Africa,
New Zealand, the New Hebrides and British Guiana for study, the
last of these originating in the Oxford University’s expedition there
in 1929. His most important publication was a monograph upon the
Collembola of Ireland (1930, Op. 34). That work was the result of
collecting done in a long week-end in Ireland, which he spent in
company with G. W. Stelfox of the Dublin Museum, a friend and
admirer of Womersley. The collecting was done mainly in County
Wicklow and around Dublin Heads, the trip being supported
financially by the Royal Irish Academy, through its Fauna and Flora
Committee; the Academy later published the monograph.

While still in Bristol Womersley became a Fellow of the
Entomological Society of London (later F.R.E.S.), this being in 1926.
He attended the meetings in London, going up from Bristol. The two
occasions on which he attended a ‘‘Verrall Supper’’—quite a famous

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 607

institution—stood out in his memory in his old age. At these meetings
he met sueh well-known entomologists as Karl Jordan and A. D. Imms.
In 1929 G, P, Bidder, F.R.S., Zoological Secretary of the Linnean
Society of London proposed him as an Associate, Honoris causa, of
the Society, and Womersley won the keenly contested election for this
honour, which le valued greatly,

In 1927 Womersley decided to transfer to entomology in a
professional eapacity as soon as opportunity permitted, and hoped to
combine this with emigrating with his family to New Zealand, His
abilities had by this time come to the notice of R. J. Tillyard, who was
later appointed to the position of Chief, Division of Beonomie
Entomology, O.S, & I, R. (later C.S.1.R.0.), Commonwealth of
Australia. In 1930 Tillyard had Womersley appointed as Entomolo-
gist, Seetion of Pasture and Field Pests. At that time two arthropods
were causing much damage to Australian pastures, the ‘lucerne flea”’
Snimthurus viridis (Linnaeus) (Collembola) and the Redtegeed Barth
Mite, /Talotydeus destructor (Tucker, 1925); the worst infestations
were in Western Australia, Owing to Womersley’s lack of formal
training in biology, at the university level, it was insisted that he was
to spend a period of training in museum work, He was therefore
posted to the British Museum from January to May 1930, for the
purpose of getting as wide a knowledge as possible of the ‘‘group
Acarina of the class Arachnida’? and the ‘‘Order Collembola’’. As
time was clearly ltmited, he was instructed to concentrate his attention
upon two groups within the stated range, these being ‘‘the family
Wupordidae [s.1.] of the Acarina’’ and the ‘‘farnily Sminthuridae"’’ of
the Collembola, THis work was defined as being to complete ag far as
possible a catalogue of these two families, to study and collect material,
both in the field and moseums, making both slide and spirit collections,
and mounts of disseeted material. In the Collembola he was to
concentrate on ‘the genera of the most economic importance, viz.,
Sminthurus, Sminthurinus, Bourletiella, and make microscopic moynts
of as many species as possible’’. Furthermore, he was to:

“Make a special study of the green and yellow species of
Sminthurus, with a view to determining as accurately as possible
the type characters of 8. viridis L., and also of clearly distinguish-
ing from it all the more closely allied species. This study should
include the immature stages as lar as possible, also caren
measurements of adults of both sexes (S. viridis reaches a large
size in Australia) . . .’’.

608 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Finally, under ‘Control measures’, Womersley was instructed by
Tillvard to:

“Draw up a report to me on the position in England at the
present time as regards tlie mechanical, chemical and biological
methods of control in use or being studied in connection with any
of the above.’’

In a more personal note of the same date (January 3rd, 1930)
Tillyard told Womersley that he had written to Dr. Tate Regan, then
Director, British Museum (Natural History), asking him to provide
every facility for Womersley'’s study in these groups. He asked
Womersley to attempt to locate any of Stanley Hirst’s type material
in Mngland, Tf he found it necessary he was to remain in England
throughout the summer; this was to be decided after consultation with
Dr, A. J. Nicholson, Deputy Chief of the Division, who was to visit
England in May 19380. A fortnight later illyard forwarded a
collection of mites aud Sininthuridae, from Tasmania and other
Australian localities, for Womersley’s study, with the proposal that
if the material were of sufficient interest the sminthurids were to be
written up ‘tin a yery short paper entitled ‘Clover springtails of
Tasmania’, with figures carefully drawn to show how the different
species can be distinguished’’, All the material had been collected
from clover species in the field,

In due course Womersley sent back the required paper, lt waa
not published however, until 1932 (Op, 47), when the addition of fresh
material necessitated some change of title. Womersley was able to
list 32 species or subspeeies of Collembola considered economically
important in Britain, The same letter (undated, apparently May,
1930) refers also to MaeLagan’s studies on the possible control of
Sminthurus viridis at Farnham Royal, as then unpublished (published
in 1982, in the Bulletin for Extomolagical Research). Amoug
predators obseryed by MacLayan were six species of spiders, five
species of beetles, and one hemipteron (Anthocoris sp. )s An additional
note of Womersley’s in the same letter to Tillyard is of interest, as
heralding his eventual econmmplete preoccupation with acarology:

“T have now beeone very interested in the Acarina and am
vetting quite familiar with the different genera and more common
species. What about the Tetranychidae (Red Spider)? Are these
not of importance in Australia as well as the Eupodidae?’’

On 6th March 1920 Tillyard wrote to say that all the formalities
had been completed for Womersley’s appointment with C.8. & LR,
for a period of three years, It is apparent that even at this early

SOUTHCOTT-—-OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 609

stage a considerable bond of mutual esteem and affection had
developed between the two men, Tillyard had already commenced to
send nnoficial letters to Womersley, explaining the local background
to him in a way which could not be dealt with in the more official
correspondence. These letters are most revealing of the personalities
of the two men, are helpful to the memorialist, and possibly also will
be so to future historians. It is fortunate that this correspondence has
been preserved, Tillyard wrote privately to Womersley on the Ist
April 1930:

**T should advise you to bend all your energies while in
Kngland to equipping yourself for your major problems, which are
pretty tough ones, as you will readily admit, These other things
| Devonian Collembola and insect phylogeny], interesting as they
tmdoubtedly are, mnust be taken as hors d’oeuvres by those who
sit at the Commonwealth’? Banqueting Table! The tighter the
finances grow, the londer will come the ery of ‘Results, results,
for our money!’ And you know we simply cannot run without
this money; so there we are! You will find the economic problems
intensely fascinating on their own, The pure science must he
developed more at leisure and in spare times,”’

Atter five months spent in training at the British Museum and in
gaining familiarity with field control methods (from D, 8. MacLagan,
Farnham Royal, and W. M. Davies at Rothamsted), Womersley, with
bis family, left for Austraha. As Dr, A. C. D. Rivett of the 0.8. & TR.
had proposed, a short period was spent in South Africa en route, to
make a study into the distribution and habits of Hualotydeus
(**Penthaleus’’), and any other aspects that might be relevant to his
duties in Western Australia, This pleasant interlude of seven weeks
was greatly enjoyed, and Womersley was able to colleet Collembola
in various localities, and out of this was eventually to come his
revision of the South African proturan fauna (Op. 45, 1931), the
collembolan fanna (Op. 46, 1981; Op. 58, 1934), and also papers on the
Thysanura (Op. 51, 1932) and Acarina (Op. 57, 1933; Op, 66, 1935),
with the additional material from other collectors.

Tt was in South Africa that Womersley was thrown upon his
mettle in economic entomology, He told the writer in 1961 that he
also regarded this short period as his real introduction to the Acarina,
Both in Mnegland and in South Africa his collecting of Acarina was
very limited, and much less effective than his approach to the
Collembola and the other Apterygota; probably also his interest

{) of Australia, for those actuatomod to m wider usnge of this term,

610 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

in their taxonomy was not fully awakened. Thus the South Australian
Museum collection of Acarina contains only a few slides of any other
than the families Penthaleidae and Bdellidae (plus Cunaxidae)
collected before he arrived in Australia. It was in South Africa that
Womersley made his initial observations upon the predation of the
bdellid mites upon Sminthurus. This the present writer has referred
to in more detail in an account of Womersley’s acarological work in
‘*Acarologia’’; it will not be repeated here. The letter to Tillyard,
which preserves a record of these early studies on the subject, refers
also to many other matters of entomological interest including some
which Tillyard had brought up earlier, these being largely related to
the distribution of the Protura and Collembola, the collecting of
Psocoptera, and more particularly, the phylogeny of the insects, with
which Tillyard was then greatly preoccupied. From this letter, as
well as later ones, it is obvious that Tillyard was relying heavily
upon Womersley for information on the structure and homologies of
primitive and fossil insects.

Womersley and his family arrived in Perth on September 25, 1930.
The hope that both Tillyard and Womersley had entertained of their
meeting in Perth at the arrival was not fulfilled, owing to the financial
stringency of the period, and the difficulties with which the Division of
Economic Entomology, with Tillyard as Chief, had to contend. On
arrival, the following letter was waiting from Tillyard, written on
18th September:

“Unfortunately Australia’s finances are just now in a parlous
condition and are likely to remain so for some time to come.
However, I have done my best to see that your work should not
be hampered in any way by this circumstance, and a reasonable
amount is still retained on the Estimates for your travelling about
Western Australia looking at the Red-Legged Earth Mite and
Clover Springtail or Lucerne Flea’’.

(Tillyard detested the common name ‘‘Lucerne flea’’ for Sminthurus
viridis and made strenuous efforts to supplant this with ‘‘Clover
Springtail’’). In the same letter Tillyard elaborated:

“To come . . . to your . . . research work, I expect you
will find it convenient to divide your work on the Mite into sections
under some such headings as the following :—

(1) Distribution in Western Australia;

(2) Control by natural enemies;

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 6hi

(3) Control by sprays and dusts;
(4) Control by cultural methods,

“You will find that Mr, [L. J.] Newman, the State Govern-
ment Entomologist, has already done a good deal of work under
(3) and (4). We are hopeful that you may have discovered some-
thing under (2) in South Africa and that you may also have set.
up some kind of eo-ordination with South African authorities
which will enable supplies of it to be shipped to you from time
to time. If not, then you will have to concentrate on other
methods , . ,

‘Mor second line researches, which may be undertaken when
the main problem is hanging fire for any reason, I want you to
look into the Sminthurus problem in Western Australia and also
to collect and study Acarines, Collembola and related insects
generally, paying special attention . . . to those likely to be of
economic importance . . .’’,

Initially laboratory accommodation was made available at the
Department of Agriculture, Western Australia, and after consultation
with the Department Entomologist, L. J. Newman, Womersley was
able to write to Tillyard on 80th September :

“With regard to the Mite itself, from my talks with Mr.
Newman it appears to be a far more serious problem here than
in South Africa, I shall be able to say more about this later, It
does not, however, appear to have been introduced here much
more recently than the Cape Weed itself, which takes back to
1837), the mite not having appeared before 1916. Something like
this may be the case in South Africa. Thus its association with
Cryptostemma can only be secondary. Its possible mode of
introduction, therefore, is still uncertain . . .’’.

In a more personal letter of the same date, Womersley (who had
adopted this custom of Tillyard’s), commented:

‘We are intensely taken with the fauna and flora here, and
as we are on the edge of King’s Park, 1 have a happy hunting
ground at the very door’’

(2) J, M. Blaek, in the ‘‘Flora of South Australia’! (1929, 1957) records that Cryptostemma
calendula (Ly 1758) Druce, 1914 = C. calendulaceum, (1a. 1768) RK. Br. 1818 originated in
South Afries and was first volleeted in Austrdlia at King George's Sound, Western
Australia, in 1833. (The wame of this species is now Aretotheca calendula (L, 1753)
Levyna, 1942,)

612 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

and continued that it was proposed to use the Department of Agricul-
ture laboratory as a town office, while accepting the offer of Dr.
(1. KE. Nicholls of the facilities of his Department at the University of
Western Australia for research, and possibly using Beverley, which
he had not yet seen, as a field station.

“Tf ] work at the University and live near [as he was hoping}
I shall be able to work out all my South African Apterygota there
in the evenings . . . I found Protura in Capetown the weekend
before we left’’.

The remainder of the letter discusses the phylogenetic relations of
the insects with which Tillyard continued to be preoeenpied, with the
Devonian Rhyniella, the Protura, the Collembola and the Machilidae
taking prominence.

By October Womersley had visited the Denmark, Guildford,
Beverley and Bunbury districts, and was able to write a preliminary
report on the presence ol I7alotydeus destructor and Penthaleus
bicolor (Froggatt, 1921) (= Penthaleus major (Dugés 1834) (teste
Womersley 1935d (Op, 67) p. 163) as being present everywhere in the
State. By now he was living at Claremont, fairly close to the
University, and was hoping soon to be able to devote some of his
evenings to working there. Perth was to be the centre of his activities.
Further Tasmanian Collembola were forwarded by Tonnoir, and
Womersley set about getting all his Tasmanian material together for
a paper to go in the Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society
of Tasmania. Tillyard, who was a tmernber, had offered to
eommunicate the paper for him.

By 3rd November 1930 Womersley was able to report that he
had completed the study of the Tasmanian globular springtails. The
same letter contained:

‘“‘Now for some news! Protura have been discovered in
W.A. Mr. Dnnean Swan of the University has found them in
humus in the University grounds, We has handed his mounts over
to me for determination and verification, As he found them entirely
by himself and only came to me for confirmation he is to be
congratulated, They are a species of Acerentulus as are those
that I was able to collect in 8. Africa’’,

and continued that he had also reeeived Neelus (= Megalothorax)
from D, GC, Swan in Western Australia, and had also a good many
sminthurids from Western Australia, which he considered were mostly

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 613

new. He commented on being unable to find the predators he had
noted in South Africa:

‘The species of Bdellid and Trombid™ which conditions in
8. Africa suggested might be controlling predators, so far as
present observations go, do not appear to occur here.’

Tillyard (letter to Womersley, 15th November, 1930), in referring
to the last sentence commented:

“Tt is very important that you should let me know, as soon
as possible, whether, after a more extensive survey of W.A.,
you are still of that opinion,”’

He further suggested that it might be desirable for these species of
mites ty be considered for introduction into Australia for study, in
quarantine.

Another locality visited by Womersley was Bridgetown, where he
spent Ist-4th December, 1930, and some collecting resulted.

On 12th January 1931 Tillyard wrote to Womersley stressing the
importance of his finding out as much as possible about the eggs of
both economic pests (the springtail and the mite) during the summer.
He requested that Womersley should attempt to duplicate the findings
of F, G. Holdaway, under varying climatic conditions, that in normal
oviposition in Sminthurus viridis the animal defaecated over the newly
laid eye with moist soil previously eaten, but to be on the alert for
abnormal methods of oviposition:

“*T think that you ought at some stage duplicate this work
under varying climatic conditions, so as to make quite sure that
this habit is fixed in Western Australia, as well as in South
Australia [where J. Davidson Was studying the problem]. The
climatic conditions are not altogether parallel, as you know”’.

Womersley replied to the effect that he hoped to do this. At the
time he was working with great industry, In addition to his formal
duties, he had nnder control a vast taxonomic programme for the
Apterygota, and papers on these were in preparation or going through
the press, dealing with members of this group from England, South
Africa, Krakatau, Japan and Australia, and not long before he had

() At that stage Womersley used this term very loosely, eg., to cover the whole of the
Trombilioiden snd the Erylthraeoiden. The mite ecopeernel was probably a species of
Anystia (Anystoidua: Anystidue) with whose identification he was not at that stage
famliar, Soo the comments by Womersley (19380, p. 111; Op. 57), under Anystis
baccarum (Th).

614 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

published his accounts of the apterygote faunas of Ireland and New
Zealand, and had dealt with various collections from Britain and
elsewhere. At this stage his enthusiasm for the Apterygota was quite
unbounded. In his letter to Tillyard of 15th February 1931 he wrote:

‘“‘T am exceedingly interested to hear of the species of
Collembola from Mt. St. Bernard [Victoria]. Fancy asking me

if I would like to see it! . . . I am only too keen on seeing
Springtails from anywhere on this earth or the next if they exist
there’’.

The voluminous correspondence between Womersley and Tillyard
continued for several years, and provides many an illuminating
commentary on the time and on their colleagues, as well as upon
their own attitudes and working methods. The mutual esteem and
affection were quite genuine, and due to a natural affinity of
character. The bond was cemented further when Tillyard was able
to visit Womersley in Western Australia.

The love of both men for their subject shines through this
correspondence. Tillyard, through his access to the higher circles of
government, writes more revealingly. He was clearly quite perceptive,
and a good judge of character. We find this comment in a letter to
Womersley, written on 15th October 1931:

‘“‘The other day we had an interesting visit from the M.P.
for Fremantle, Mr. J. Curtin. I found him an exceedingly well
informed and interesting man, and ventured to mention you to
him, whereupon he said that he was shortly returning home to do
some work in his electorate, which is by no means a safe one for
him, and that he would look you up! So do not be surprised if
he calls round at Marita Road [Claremont], as you are actually
in his electorate. He is a very brilliant debater and a most
interesting personality; quite good enough to be in the Ministry,
I think. I hope you will do your best to interest him in your
particular problems if he comes along.’’

Being in high position in Canberra, Tillyard realized the importance
of the political aspects of economic entomology far more than
Womersley could in Western Australia. The politician John Curtin
became Prime Minister in 1941.

Womersley continued his work for nearly three years with the
Division of Economic Entomology, when his appointment was drawing
towards completion, Unfortunately, the period of financial stringency
which Australia had been undergoing had not abated, and although

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H,. WOMERSLEY G15

the work was considered promising, all appointments were being
terminated ag soon as coutracts were completed. Although Womersley
had hoped to continue his work under Tillyard, such was not possible,
and he applied for the position of Entomologist, South Anstralian
Museum, which had become vacant with the death of Arthur M. Lea.
With Tillyard as his champion, Wowersley had no diffenlty in getting
this appointment. Although he had not given np hope of working
under Tillyard again (with the added attraction that the CLS, & LR,
salaries were well above those offered in Sonth Anstralia), it
was in this position that his major contribution to scienee lay, and he
stayed there until his retirement, and subsequently. Nevertheless,
it was considered that the work on the predator control of Sminthurus
wirulis was most promising, and Tillyard subsequently set G, A, Currie
to continue in the field which Womersley had pioneered, and after
Currie had lett this work, another officer, K. R. Norris, was also given
this field of study, and other studies have continued subsequently,

What had Womersley yetually achieved in hia work for the
CS. & LR. in Western Australia? As 'Tillyard's early correspondence
indicated, the study of the possible chemieal and cultural methods of
control of Sminthurws and IHalotydeus had been pursued previously,
notably by L, J. Newman, ‘The study of the actual life history of
Sminthurus was under study by J. Davidson in the Waite Institute
in Adelaide, with effective and extensive equipment, also technical and
other assistance, Davidson was not in the position ol being under
pressure to solve a major task affeeting an area as large as Korope.
In collaboration with the Western Australian Department of Agri-
culture, though with limited finanees, more precision was given to
the knowledge of the chemical attack upon the pests, The new aspect
was the study of predator coutrol of one of these pests, Sminthurus.
These results were summarized in two papers (Op, 50, 1932; Op. 58,
1933), in which guarded claims were made. Methods of transporting
the predator mites were studied, and attempts to establish them in
various pastures were made, which were considered suecessful,
allhough criticism is possible of the methods adopted, there being
no experimental design that would provide sufficient evidence for firm
conclusions to be drawn. In fairness, however, it should be realized
that a technical service for this was not really available, nor were its
potentialities capable of being applied under the circumstances as
they were then, It is donbtful if the taxonomy of the Australian
Bdelloidea was at a stage advanced enough to be an instrument of
precision. From a long range viewpomt, among the more important

616 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

results of the work were the numerous taxonomic papers Womersley
produced on the Collembola. Among these was his Opus 52 (1932),
a preliminary account of the Australian Collembola, published as a
pamphlet by the C.S. & LR. It is notable in another regard, in
being the first taxonomic paper ever published at the expense of the
C.S. & LR., through the Division of Entomology.

In subsequent years large batches of the predatory bdellid mite,
Biscirus lapidarius, were sent to localities in other Australian States,
where there was a heavy infestation with Sminthurus. In the absence
of sufficient finances to do fully controlled experimental trials, it was
considered that this was the most effective means of testing out the
effect of this predation. Initially hundreds, and later, thousands of
mites were sent, and were placed at Riverton, Murray Bridge, Glen
Osmond, and Woodside in South Australia, as well as in Victoria and
Tasmania; also earlier in Western Australia (see Op. 53). In this
work Womersley acted in a consultative capacity on the taxonomy of
the Collembola and of the mites. These activities by the C.S. & LR.
continued for some years. Over 1934-1936 increasing claims were
made for the effectiveness of this method. By 1937 newspapers were
carrying headlines, claiming that the bdellid mites had controlled the
‘‘Incerne flea’’, written in a florid journalistic style. In fairness to
Womersley it should be pointed out that he was in no way responsible
for these widely publicized and perhaps exaggerated claims, and this
blaze of publicity was not of his designing. Although gratified that
his work should be considered a success, he remained unmoved by it,
at least outwardly, and continued his taxonomic work without
interruption. His friend and colleague, D. C. Swan, wrote in 1940
(J. Agric. S. Austr. 43: 466) that the results of predator control of
Sminthurus were not striking, possibly with the newspaper treatment
of the subject in 1937 in mind. K. R. Norris, who had taken up the
subject for C.S. & IR. in Western Australia, studied the subject for
several years, and concluded (1938, C.S. & LR., Pamphlet 84):

“The population graphs for Smynthurus™ viridis may differ
widely for different situations and also for the same situation in
successive years. The numbers of Biscirus lapidarius are shown
to have a probable relation to those of Smynthurus, accounting
at least in part, for a rapid decline in the number of springtails
at the end of the season.’’

(4) The name Sminthurus has now been placed on the Official List of Generic Names in
Zoology (1954), and Smynthwrus is invalid and rejected (1958).

SOUTHCOTT—OBITUARY OF H. WOMERSLEY 617

A further appraisal of this subject will be found in Wallace,
M. M. H., Austr. J. Agric. Res.: 1954, 5 (1): 148-155, and 1959,
10 (2); 160-170, These papers will give further references for those
interested in this subject.

Womersley took up his duties at the South Australian Museum
on January Ist, 1933. He worked there until the end of his life,
although af times he considered the possibility of moving to London,
or clsewhere in Australia, It is fortunate for the taxonomy of the
Australian Apterygota and Acarina that he did not do so, as it is
umikely he would then have been able to devote himself so whole-
heartedly to these tasks. Initially he concentrated on the taxonomy
of the Apterygola, producing a large uamber of short papers, and in
1939 published “The Primitive Insects of South Australia’? in the
British Science Guild Handbooks series, where, in actual fact, the
whole of the Australian Apterygota, as then known, were monographed,

In 1932 he published a short note with L, J, Newman (Op. 50) in
which he made his first reference to the Acarina in print, and in 1933
published three papers (Opp. 58, 56, 57) in which Aecarina were
considered, Rapidly, more extensive inroads into the taxonomy of the
Agarina were made, The story of Womersley’s aearological studies
has been told in Acurologia (5 (3): 328-3384) of July 1968, and there-
fore will not be elaborated here, It may be said however, that the
collection of Acarina at the South Australian Museum is one of the
great collections of the world, and his series of papers on the taxonomy
of the Aearina have seldom been equalled. His magnum opus, over
his whole field of work, was undoubtedly his monograph of the
Trombiculidae of the Oriental and Australasian regions, published in
the Records of the South Australian Museum in 1952 (Opp. 188, 139).
It ran to 673 pages. Gradnally, as the immense collections of these
Aearina, the veetors of serub typhus, and related forms kept being
referred to him, all groups other than mites were dropped from his
studies, Onee that major work was completed he was free to produce
a long series ol shorter papers.

Ie retired in 1954 as Entomologist, but was immediately appointed
as Acarologist, a position that had been created specially for him.
At thie age of 70 years, in 1949, he retired again, but beeame Honorary
Acarologist, and worked on as before, By now he was dogged by
inereasing Hl-health, aud could not work such long hours. He continned
the study of his beloved Acarina until a fortnight before his death. In
the Apterygota, and more particularly the Acarina, his industry and

618 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

regular habits enabled him to produce an immense amount of work,
and he did a great deal for descriptive taxonomy, where his services
will be greatly missed.

He was also active in scientific affairs in England and Australia,
particularly on the organizational side and in the field of wild-life
conservation. This is referred to in more detail elsewhere (Trans.
Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 87: 249-252 (1963)). He was the Verco
Medallist of the Royal Society of South Australia in 1943, served as
President in 1943-1944, and was gratified by the Society’s electing him
to Honorary Fellowship in 1962.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The writer wishes to acknowledge Womersley’s own help in
providing biographical details when requested in 1961 and 1962,
and in providing information and correspondence, particularly of the
period before 1933. In addition the letter files of the South Australian
Museum have been consulted in particular points. The correspondence
of 1923-1932, and also some of subsequent years, which Womersley
entrusted to the writer, will be deposited later in the South Australian
Archives.

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 619

Bibliography of Herbert Womersley

(1) 1912 Terpineol, a new clearing agent. The Micrologist 1(8) :
115-116,
(2) 1922 Diptera from the Bristol district. HKnt. Mon. Mag. 58: 234.
(3) 19242 The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part I]
(pp. 28-37) wm Presidential Address, 1923, ‘‘The Modern
Study of Entomology’’ (p. 28). Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol
Nat. Soe.: (4) 6: 28-37.
(4) 1924b The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part IT].
Ann, Rept. Proe. Bristol Nat. Soc, (4) 6 (2): 166-172.
(5) ix 1924e Anisolabis annulipes and Prolabia arachidis [Derm-
aptera] at Bristol. Ent. Mon. Mag. 60; 213.
(6) xi 1925 (With R.S. Bagnall). Two new British Collembola.
Hint. Mon. Mag. 61: 250-252,
(7) 1926a The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part
II]. Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soe. (4) 6 (3): 217-221.
(8) 1926b The Apterygota of Somerset. Proce. Somerset Archaeol.
Nat. Hist. Soc., Taunton 71: lix-lxiii,
(9) 1926c¢ Insect pests and their biological control. Ann. Rept.
Proc. Bristol Nat, Soc, (4) 6 (4); 297-302,
(10) 1 1926d Protanurophorus pearmani Womersley: additional
note. Ent. Mon, Mag. 62: 23.
(11) iv 1926e Protanurophorus pearmani Womersley—new locality.
Ent, Mon. Mag. 62: 99.
(12) vi 1926f British species of Protura—a request. Ent. Mon.
Mag. 62; 141,
(13) 1927a The Apterygota of the South-west of England [Part
IV]. Ann. Rept. Proc. Bristol Nat. Soc. (4) 6 (5): 372-379,
(14) vi-vii 1927b Notes on the British species of Protura with
descriptions of new genera and species. Ent, Mon. Mag.
63: 140-148 (pp. 140-144, June; pp. 145-148, July),
(15) vii 1927¢ A study of the larval forms of certain species of
Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63: 149-153.

(6) Thore is some difficulty in establishing the order and date of publication with some papers.
The estimates given are the best after considering all the evidence available to me. Month
of publication is estimated similarly, where available,

(8) See text of that article, and comment in Womersley (1926d).

620 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(16) vii 1927d Notes on the mounting of Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag.
63: 153-154,

(17) x 1927e A new British species of Petrobius (Leach) Carpenter.
Ent. Mon. Mag. 63; 231-233.

(18) x 1927f On the habitat of the early stages of some Tipuloidaea
[sic]. Ent. Mon. Mag. 63: 235.

(19) x 1927¢ <A note on Petrobius modestus Bagnall. Ent. Mon.
Mag. 63: 236.

(20) 1 1928a Note on the British species of Lepismatidae. Ent.
Mon. Mag. 64: 15.

(21) 1 1928h Thermobia domestica Pk. (furnorum Rovelli) im
Bristol. Ent. Mon. Mag. 64: 15.

(22) iii 1928e Notes on the antennal sensory organs of Campodea.
Ent. Mon. Mag. 64: 65-66.

(23) iii 1928d Note on a nematode parasite of Campodea. Ent,
Mon. Mag. 64: 66,

(24) v 1928e Further notes on the British species of Protura. Ent.
Mon. Mag. 64: 113-115.

(25) 1928f Apterygota from the New Hebrides. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (10) 2 (7): 55-61.

(26) 1928 Some records of Apterygota from Lundy Island,
Devonshire, with the description of a new species of
Entomobrya (Collembola). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10) 2
(7): 62-65.

(27) x 1928h Additional notes on the Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag. 64:
230-233.

(28) xi 19281 Sinella myrmecophila Reut. (Collembola) in Britain,
Ent. Mon. Mag. 64: 247.

(29) xii 1928] A new British species of Collembola. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (10) 2 (12): 593-595.

(30) 41 1929a Further British records of Protura. Ent. Mon. Mag.
65: 39.

(31) vii 1929) Some records of Collembola from Southern
Rhodesia. Ent. Mon. Mag. 65: 152-158,

(32) ix 1929¢ Hntomobrya atrata, nom. novo [sic] for EH. nigrina,
Womersley. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10) 4 (21): 304.

(33) xii 1929d Additions to the Collembola of New Zealand. Ent,
Mon. Mag. 65: 272-273.

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 621

(34) 1 1930a The Collembola of Ireland. Proe. Roy. Irish Acad.
39B (2): 160-202,

(35) i1 1930b Notes on some new and rare British Collembola. Ent.
Mon. Mag. 66; 33-41,

(36) ii 1930e Contributions to a study of the British species of
Machilidae—I. [The genus Premachilis, Silvy.]. Ann.
Mag, Nat. Hist. (10) 5 (26); 217-224.

(87) ii 1930d A further collection of Collembola from New
Zealand, Ent. Mon. Mag, 66: 57-61.

(38) ii 1930e Contributions to a study of the British species of
Machilidae—IT. A new species of Machilis, Silv.
(Trigontophthalmus Verhff.). Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10)
5 (27): 278-281.

(89) tv 1980f Contrihbutious to a study of the British species of
Machilidae—OT, The genus Patrobius [sic, for Petrobius],
Leach, Ann. Mag. Nat. Ilist. (10) 5 (28): 888-394,

(40) vii 1930g Lake Distriet Apterygota. Ent. Mon, Mag. 66: 166,

(41) vii 1980h Some additions to the Collembola of Britain, Ann,
Mag. Nat. Hist. (10) 6 (31): 149-153,

(42) ix 19301 On the Apterygota collected in British Guiana by the
Oxford University Expedition of 1929. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. (10) 6 (83): 305-317,

(48) 1931a <A short account of the Collembola and Thysanura of
Epping Forest, Essex Nat, 23: 116-120.

(44) vi 1931b An additional record of Pogonognathus beckeri
Borner (Colembola) from Japan, Ent. Mon. Mag. 67: 142,

(45) 1931e A South African species of Protura. Ann. 8. Afr. Mus.
30(1): 89-91.

(46) 1931d Some Collembola of the family Sminthuridae from South
Africa, Ann, S. Afr. Mus. 30(1) +: 137-156.

(47) 1932a Tasmanian Collembola of the family Sminthuridae
(globular springtails). Pap. Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. 1931:
1-11,

(48) Iv 1932b Collembola from Krakatau. Ent. Mon, Mag. 68: 88,

(49) 16 v 1932¢ A preliminary account of the Protura of Australia,
Proc, Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 57 (1-2): 69-76.

(50) vi 1982d (With L, J. Newman). Clover springtail (lucerne
flea) (Smynthuris [sic] viridis) investigation. J. Agric.
West Aust, (2) 9 (2): 289-290.

622 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(51) vi 19382e Some South African Machilidae. Ann. 8. Afr. Mus.
30(2): 171-178.

(52) 1932f The Collembola-Symphyleona of Australia: <A pre-
liminary account. Pamph. Coune. sci. ind. Res. Austr.,
Melbourne, 34: 9-47 (with a foreword by R. J. Tillyard,
pp. 5-8).

(53) v 1933a A possible biological control of the Clover Springtail
or Lucerne Flea Sminthurus viridis L. of Western Australia.
J. Coune. sci. ind. Res., Melbourne, 1933 6(2): 83-91.

(54) 15 xi 1933b On some additions to the Sminthurid fauna of
Australia. Stylops, London 2(2): 241-247.
(55) 23 xii 1933c A preliminary account of the Collembola-

Arthropleona of Australia. Part I—Superfamily Podur-
oidea. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 57: 48-71.

(56) 23 xii 1933d <A preliminary account of the Bdellidae (Snout
mites) of Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 57: 97-107.

(57) 23 xii 1933e On some Acarina from Australia and South
Africa, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 57: 108-112.

(58) iii 1934a On some Collembola-Arthropleona from South Africa
and Southern Rhodesia. Ann. 8S. Afr. Mus. 30(3): 441-475.

(59) 31 vii 1934b A revision of the Trombid [sic] and Hrythraeid
mites of Australia with descriptions of new genera and
species. Rec. S. Austr. Mus. 5(2): 179-254.

(60) xi 1934e Collembola (Spring-tails). Victorian Nat. 51: 159-165.

(61) 15 xi 1934d Notes on some Australian Collembola. Stylops,
London 3(2): 244-246.

(62) 22 xii 1934e On the Australian species of Japygidae (Thy-
sanuray. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 58: 37-47.

(63) 22 xii 1934f A preliminary account of the Collembola-Arthro-
pleona of Australia. Part I1—Superfamily Entomobry-
oidea. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 58: 86-138.

(64) i & iv 1935a Insect and allied pests of the home. Public
Health Notes, Bull. Dept. Publ. Health S. Austr. No. 13
(Jan.); 5-6, No. 14: (Apr.), 5-7. (Subsequently (?date)
revised and re-issued in pamphlet form by Central Board
of Health, S. Austr., 4 pp.).

(65) iv 1935b A new species of Japyx from Australia. Ent. Mon.
Mag. 71: 86-87.

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 623

(66) 15 v 1935¢ On some Australian and South African species of
Aearina of the genus Stereotydeus (Penthalodidae). Proce.
Linn. Soc, N.S.W. 60(1-2): 79-82,

(67) vi 1935d On the name of the ‘‘Blue Oat Mite’’ of Australia.
Bull. ent. Res. 26(2): 163,

(68) vii 1935e On some Cryptognathid and Nicoletiellid Acarina
from Australia and New Zealand. Ann, Mag, Nat. Hist.
(10) 16 (91): 151-154.

(69) vii 1985f A species of Acarina of the genus Holothyrus from
Australia and New Zealand, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (10)
16 (91): 154-157.

(70) 30 ix 1935g On the occurrence in Australia of Acarina of the
family Teneriffiidae (Trombidoidea) [sic]. Rec. S. Austr.
Mus. 5(3): 333-338.

(71) 23 xii 1935h On some new species and records of Australian
and New Zealand Collembola, Trans. Roy, Soe. 8. Austr.
659: 207-218,

(72) iti 19362 A new species of Protara from Australia. Ent. Mon.
Mag. 72: 65-66.

(73) viii 1936b On a new family of Acarina, with description of a
new genus and species, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (10) 18 (104):
312-315,

(74) 30 x1 1936¢ An interesting chironomid Telmatogeton aus-
tralicus sp. n. from a South Australian reef. Ree. 8. Austr.
Mus. 5(4): 489-443,

(75) 30 xi 1936d Further records and descriptions of Australian
Collembola. Ree, S. Austr. Mus. 5(4): 475-485.

(76) 30 xi 1936e Additions to the Trombidiid and Erythraeid
acarine fauna of Australia and New Zealand. J. Linn. Soe.
Lond, (Zool.) 40(269) ; 107-121,

(77) 23 xii 1936f Studies in Australian Thysanura, No, 1. A new
species of Lepismatidae from South Australia. Trans. Roy.
Soc. 8. Austr. 60: 112-113.

(78) 1936g Insects of the National Park. South Austr. Nat. 17(1-4)«
76-82.

(79) 1936h On the collembolan fauna of New Zealand. Trans, Roy,
Soc, N.Z. 66: 316-328.

(80) 20 viii 1987a Collembola (springtails). Rept. Brit. Aust. N.
Zealand Antarct. Res. Exped. (B) 4 (1): 1-7.

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

20 viii 1937b Coleoptera. Rept. Brit. Aust. N. Zealand
Antarct. Res. Exped. (B) 4 (1); 23-36.

1 x 1987e Studies in Australian Acarina Laelaptidae. IL—
New records and species of Laelaps and allied genera.
Parasitology 29(4) ; 530-538.

30 x 1937d Diptera. Rept. Brit. Austr. N. Zealand Antarct.
Res. Exped. (B) 4 (8): 59-79,

30 x 1937e Miscellaneous Insecta. Rept. Brit. Austr. N.
Zealand Antarct. Res. Exped. (B) 4 (3): 80-82.

30 x 1937 (With Norman B. Tindale.) Lepidoptera. Rept.
Brit. Austr. N. Zealand Antarect. Res, Exped. (B) 4 (3):
83-86.

15 xi 1937g On Some Apterygota from New Guinea and the
New Hebrides. Proc. Roy. Ent. Soe. (B) 6 (11): 204-210.

20 xi 1937h On the distribution of the Collembola of the genus
Ceratrimeria Borner, with special reference to the Tas-
manian and New Zealand species described by Lubbock in
1899. J. Linn, Soe, Lond. (Zool.) 40(272): 373-382.

19371 A revision of the Australian Trombidiidae (Acarina).
Ree. 8. Austr. Mus. 6(1): 75-100.

20 xi 1937] Acarina. Sci. Rept. Australasian Antarct. Exped.,
1911-14 (C) 10 (6): 1-24.

24 xii 1937k Studies in Australian Thysanura. No. 2.—
Lepismatidae. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 61: 96-101.

24 xii 19371 A new marine chironomid from South Australia.
Trans, Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 61: 102-103.

24 xii 1937m On some Australian Coleoptera of the subfamily
Cossoninae (Curculionidae). Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust.
61: 104-106.

24 xii 1937n New species and records of Australian Collem-
bola. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr. 61: 154-157.

24 xii 19370 Studies in Australian Thysanura. No. 3.
Campodeidae. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 61: 166-172.

24 xii 1937p A new species of marine Hydrachnellae from
South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr, 61: 173-174.

24 xii 1937q Australian Acarina of the genus Megisthanus
Thorell. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Austr. 61: 175-180.

1937r The Collembola (springtails) of Victoria. Vict. Nat.
54: 114-116.

are

(98)

(99)

(100)
(101)

( (02)

(103)

(104)

(105) 2

(106)
(107)

(108)

(109)

(110)

(111)

(112)

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 625

1937s On the collembolan (Lntomobrya emeraldica Rayment

oy
ait hat

1937) from Victoria. Arb, physiol, angew. Ent, Berl. 4(4):
296.

vii 1938a Studies in Australian Thysanura. No. 4.
Machilidae (bristle-tails). Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr.
§2(1): 3-8,

vii 1938b On two new species of Protura from Iowa, U.S.A.
Bull, Brooklyn Ent. Soe. 33 (4): 219-228,

xi 1939a Primitive Insects of South Australia. Handb. Fauna

and Flora 8. Austr., Adelaide, Govt. Printer, 322 pp.

xii 1929b Further notes on the Australian Trombidiidae,
with deseription of new species. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr.
63(2): 149-166.

vii 1940a A new species of Ceratrimeria (Collembola) from
Tasmania, Trans, Roy. Soc, 8. Austr, 64(1): 137-138,

xii 1940b Studies in Australian Acarina. Tetranychidae
and Trichadenidae. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Austr, 64(2):
233-265,

xii 1940e A new termitophilous collembolan from South
Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8. Austr. 64(2): 330.

ii 1941a Studies in Australian Acarina. (2) Tyroglyph-
idae (s.1.). Ree. S. Austr. Mus. 6(4): 451-4838.

vii 1941b Rediscovery of one of Canestrini’s Australian
acarids, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8. Austr. 65(1): 28-29.

vii 1941¢ Revisional notes on the Australian species of
Tenuipalpus (Acarina, Tetranychidae). Trans. Roy. Soc.
8S. Austr. 65(1); 42-45.

vil 1941d (With R. V. Southcott.) Notes on the Smarididae
of Australia and New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8S. Austr.
65(2): 61-78.

x 1941e Notes on the Cheyletidae (Acarina, Trombidoidea
[sic]) of Australia and New Zealand, with descriptions of
new species. Rec. 8S. Austr. Mus. 7(1): 51-64.

xii 1941f The red-legged earth mite [sic—mites was
intended] (Acarina, Penthaleidae) of Australia. Trans,
Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 65(2): 292-294.

xii 1941¢ New species of Geckobia (Acarina, Pterygosom-
idae) from Australia and New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Soe.
8, Austr. 65(2): 323-328.

626 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(113) 8 vii 19422 A new species of silver-fish from Lord Howe
Island. Rec. Austr. Mus. 21(2): 116-117.

(114) 31 vii 1942b The Anystid mites of Australia. Trans. Roy.
Soe. S. Austr. 66(1): 15-22.

(115) 31 vii 1942c New genera, species and records of Collembola
from Australia, New Zealand and New Guinea. Trans. Roy.
Soe. S. Austr. 66(1): 23-31.

(116) 31 vii 1942d A new apterous dipteron (Scatopsidae) from
South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Austr. 66(1): 74.

(117) 31 vii 1942e Miscellaneous additions to the acarine fauna of
Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 66(1): 85-92.

(118) x 1942f Mosquitoes spread disease. Health for South Aus-
tralia, Quart. Bull. Dept. Health, S. Austr. No. 44: 26-27.

(119) 18 xii 1942 Additions to the Acarina-Parasitoidea of Aus-
tralia, Part I. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 66(2): 142-171.

(120) 24 xii 1942h Additions to the Acarina of Australia (Trom-
bidiidae and Calyptostomidae). Rec. 8. Austr. Mus. 7(2):
169-181.

(121) 30 v 1943a Australian Acarina of the family Trichadenidae.
Ree. 8S. Austr. Mus. 7(3): 245-248.

(122) 30 v 1943b A revision of the spiders of the genus Missulena
Walckenaer 1805. Rec. S. Austr. Mus. 7(3): 249-269.

(123) 30 vii 1943¢ Australian species of Listrophoridae Canest.
(Acarina) with notes on new genera. Trans. Roy. Soc. S.
Austr. 67(1) : 10-19.

(124) 30 vii 1943d (With W. G. Heaslip.) The Trombiculinae
(Acarina) or itch-mites of the Austro-Malayan and oriental
regions. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 67(1) : 68-142.

(125) 13 xi 1943e (With H. W. S. Laurie.) Noctuid larva in the
nasal passages of man. Med. J. Austr. 2(20): 401-402.

(126) 30 xi 1943f A modification of Berlese’s medium for the micro-
scopic mounting of Acarina and other small arthropods.
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 67(2): 181-182.

(127) 30 xi 1943¢g On Astacopsiphagus parasiticus Vietz 1931
(Acarina-Halacaridae) parasitic in the gill chambers of
Euastacus sulcatus Clark M.S. Rec. S. Austr. Mus, 7(4):
401-403.

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 627

(128) 28 vii 1944a Notes on and additions to the Trombiculinae and
Leeuwenhoekiinae (Acarina) of Australia and New Guinea.
Trans. Roy. Soe, 8. Austr. 68(1) : 82-112.

(129) 28 vii 1944b Australian Acarina, families Alyeidae and
Nanorchestidae, Trans, Roy, Soc. 8. Austr, 68(1): 183-143.

(180) 30 vi 1945a Australian Acarina. The genera Brachychthonius
Berl, and Cosmochthonius Berl. (Hypochthonidae-
[sic] Oribatoidea). Ree. S. Austr. Mus. 8(2): 219-223.

(131) 30 vi 1945p An interesting and primitive new genus of Laelap-
tidae (Acarina) from Australia and New Guinea. Ree. 8.
Austr. Mus, 8(2); 225-228,

(132) 30 vi 1945¢ <A revision of the Microtrombidiinae (Acarina,
Trombidiidae) of Australia and New Guinea, Ree, S.
Austr. Mus. 8(2): 293-358.

(133) 27 vii 1945d Aearina of Australia and New Guinea. The
family Leeuwenhoekiidae, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr.
69(1): 96-113.

(134) 30 xi 1945e New species of Diplura (Insecta, Apterygota)
from Australia and New Guinea, Trans. Roy. Soe. 8.
Austr. 69(2): 223-228.

(135) 25 vii 1947 (With G. M. Kohls.) New genera and species of
Trombiculidae from the Pacific Islands. Trans. Roy. Soe.
8S. Austr, 71(1): 3-12.

(136) 23 viii 1948 The genus Tragardhwa Berlese 1912 (Acarina,
Trombiculidae). Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Austr. 72(1): 83-90.

(137) 30 vi 1950 On the female of the dipteron Scatopse aptera
Womersley 1942. Ree. S. Austr. Mus. 9(3): 331.

(138) 1 iii 1952a The serub-typhus and serub-itch mites (Trom-
biculidae, Acarina) of the Asiatic-Pacifie region. Part I
(text). Ree, 8, Austr, Mus. 10(1); 1-435, with unnumbered
pages interpolated between pages 2 and 3.

(189) 1 iii 1952b The sernb-typhnus and scrub-itch mites of the
Asiatic-Pacific region. Part 2 (Plates). Ree. 8. Austr.
Mus, 10(2); 437-673.

(140) vii 1952¢ Our largest South Australian spider. S. Austr, Nat.
26(3 & 4): 38.

(141) 8 v 1953a On the sareoptid or mange-mites of the wombat.
Ree. S, Austr. Mus. 11(1): 69-73.

628 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(142) vi 1953b An interesting marine spider Desis kenyonae Pocock
from South Australia, S. Austr. Nat. 27(4): 63-64.

(143) 4 x1 1958¢ An interesting new larval species of Panisopsis
(Thyasidae, Acarina) from New Zealand. Ree, Canter-
bury Mus, 6(3) ; 233-235.

(144) xii 1953d A new genus and species of Speleognathidae
(Aearina) from South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe, §.
Austr. 76: 82-84.

(145) iv 1954a Malaysian parasites. VII. New genera and species,
apparently of Apoloniinae (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae),
from the Asiatic-Pacifie region. Stud. Inst. Med. Res.
Malaya, No. 26: 108-119.

(146) iv 1954b Malaysian parasites. VIII. On the validity of those
genera of Trombiculidae (Acarina) with posterolateral
setae off the seutum, Stud. Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No. 26:
120-122,

(147) 28 v 1954¢ Two new species of mites (Acarina: Mesostig-
mata: Ascaidae) associated with bark-boring beetles from
South Australia. Ree. 8. Austr, Mus. 11(2): 113-116.

(148) 28 v 1954d Two new species of ectoparasitic mites from
pouched mice, Sminthsepsis from South Australia. Ree, S.
Austr. Mus. 11(2): 117-120.

(149) 28 v 1954e On the subfamily Trombellinae Sig Thor 1935
(Acarina: Trombidiidae) with the diagnosis of the nymph
of Audyana thompsoni Womersley, 1954. Ree. S. Austr.
Mus. 11(2): 121-128.

(150) v 1954f Species of the snbfamily Phytoseiinae (Acarina:
Laelaptidae) from Australia. Austr, J. Zool. 2(1): 169-191.

(151) 21 vi 1954¢ (With EF. H. Derrick.) The serub-itech mite of
south-east Queensland, Austr. J. Sci. 16(6): 238-239.

(152) vii 1954h Another new species of Boydaia (Speleognathidae;
Acarina) from Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 77:
65-66,

(153) vii 19541 Hight new species of Trombieulidae (Acarina) from
Queensland, Trans, Roy, Soc, 8. Austr. 77: 67-80.

(154) xi 1954) A new species of Trombicula (Acarina: Trombicul-
idae) from bats from northern Australia. Ann. Mag, Nat,
Hist. (12) 7: 827-828.

(155)

(156)

(157)

(158)

(159)

(160)

(161)

(162)

(163)

(164)

(165)

(166)

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 629

x 1955 The Acarina fauna of mutton birds’ nests on a Bass
Strait Island. Austr. J, Zool. 3(8): 412-488.

i 19564 On some new Acarina-Mesostigmata from Australia,
New Zealand aud New Guinea. J. Linn, Soe, Lond, (Zool.)
42(288) : 505-599.

25 iv 1956b A new genus and two new species of Acarina
from northern Australia. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 80(3):
214-216,

v 1956¢ Some additions to the Acarina-Mesostigmata of Aus-
tralia. Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Anstr. 79: 104-120,

vy 1957a New genera and species of Acarina from bats from
New Guinea, Philippines and Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc.
S. Austr. 80: 67-72.

vy 1957h A new species of Tuckerella (Acarina, Tetranychoidea,
Tuekerellidae) from South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soe. 8.
Austr. 80: 73-75.

1957e A fossil mite (Acronothrus ramus n. sp.) from Cainozoic
resin at Allendale, Vietoria. Proce. Roy. Soe, Vict. (N.S.)
69: 21-23.

1957d Malaysian parasites—XX. Whartonia penthetor n. sp.,
from a Malayan bat (Acarina, Leeuwenhoekiidae). Stud.
Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No, 28: 103-104.

1957e Malaysian parasites—XXI. <A small collection of larval
mites (Acarina: Trombiculidae & Leeuwenhoekiidae) from
rats from Hong Kong. Stud. Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No,
28: 105-112,

1957f (With J. R. Andy.) Malaysian parasites—XXVII. The
Trombiculidae (Acarina) of the Asiatic-Pacifie region: a
revised and annotated list of the species in Womersley
(1952), with descriptions of larvae and nymphs, Stud.
Inst. Med, Res. Malaya, No, 28: 231-296.

1957e (With J. R. Andy.) Malaysian parasites—XXIX. New
species of oriental and Australian Trombiculidae (Acarina).
Stud. Inst. Med. Res. Malaya, No. 28: 359-382.

iii 1958a On some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea
paraphagie upon millipedes and cockroaches, and on beetles
of the family Passalidae. [Pt. 1.—The family Diplo-
gyniidae (Mesostigmata, Trigynaspida)]. Trans. Roy. Soc.
5. Austr. 81: 15-29,

630 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(167) iii 1958b Some new or little known Mesostigmata (Acarina)
from Australia, New Zealand and Malaya. Trans. Roy. Soe.
S. Austr. 81: 115-130.

(168) 14 iii 1958e Notes on the Haemolaelaps marsupialis Berl.
complex, with the description of a new species of the genus
(Acarina, Laelaptidae). Proce. Linn. Soe. N.S.W. 82(3):
297-302.

(169) 1958d Acarina. Australian Encyclopaedia, Angus and Robert-
son, Sydney. 1: 108-110.

(170) 1958e Centipedes. Australian Encyclopaedia 2: 321-322.

(171) 1958f Harvest-man. Australian Encyclopaedia 4: 440.

(172) 1958g Pseudo-scorpions. Australian Encyclopaedia 7: 300.

(173) 1958h Description of the male of Garmania nesbitti Wom.

(Acarina, Phytoseiidae) and the first record of this species
in New Zealand. Trans. Roy. Soc. N.Z. 85(4) : 685-686.

(174) 10 vi 1959a Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea
paraphagic upon millipedes and cockroaches and on beetles
of the family Passalidae [Pt. 2—The family Fedrizziidae
(Mesostigmata-Trigynaspida)]. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.
82: 11-54.

(175) 2 vii 1959b Redescription of two of Canestrini’s 1884 species
of Australian Acarina. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus. 13(3): 339-347.

(176) 2 vii 1959¢ A new species of Urodiscella (Acarina, Uropo-
didae) from Australia. Rec. 8. Austr. Mus. 13(3) : 349-353.

(177) 2 vii 1959d (With R. Domrow). A new Asternolaelaps from
Australia (Acarina, Ichthyostomatogasteridae). Rec. S.
Austr. Mus. 13(3) : 355-358.

(178) 2 ix 1959e Klinckowstroemiella helleri (Ouds., 1929) nov.
comb. for Fedrrigzia helleri Ouds. 1929 (Acarina—
Klinckowstroemiidae). Zool. Meded. 36(19): 281-288.

(179) iii 1960a Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea para-
phagic upon millipedes and cockroaches and on beetles of
the family Passalidae. [Pt. 3—The family Heterocheylidae
(Acarina-Trombidiformes)]. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 83:
21-24.

(180) iii 1960b New records of species of Leptolaelaps (Acarina,
Mesostigmata) from Australia and New Zealand. Trans.
Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 83: 25-29,

SOUTHCOTT—BIBLIOGRAPHY OF H. WOMERSLEY 631

(181) iti 1960¢e A new genus and species Laelaptoseius novae-
zelandiae from New Zealand (Acarina, <Aceosejidae).
Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Austr, 83: 31-32,

(182) iii 1960d A second species of Pristolaelaps (Acarina, Laelap-
tidae) from Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. 8, Austr. 83:
33-35,

(183) 19 viii 1960e A new eoprophilons uropodid mite, Cuilliba
coprophila sp. nov. from a bat eave in South Australia
(Acarina-Cillibidae), Ree. S, Austr. Mus. 13(4); 471-479,

(184) tx 1960f Comment, ix W. I. China: Proposed use of the
plenary powers to designate a type-species for the nominal
genus Blankaartia Oudemans 1911 (Nematoda) [sie—later
amended to ‘Acarina’| ZN, (8.) 330. Bull. Zool.
Nomenel, 17(9-11) : 301-312.

(185) iii 1961a Some Acarina from Australia and New Guinea para-
phagie upon millipedes and coekroaches and on beetles of
the family Passalidae. [Pt. 4. The family Diarthrophal-
lidae]. Trans. Roy. Soc, 8, Austr, 84: 11-26,

(186) 111 1961b The family Diarthrophallidae (Acarina-Mesostig-
mata-Monogynaspida) with particular reference to the
genus Passalobia Lombardini 1926, Trans, Roy. Soc. 8.
Austr. 84: 27-44,

(187) tii 1961e Description of the female of Trichonyssus womersleyi
Domrow (Acarina, Macronyssidae). Trans. Roy. Soc. S.
Austr, 84; 79-81,

(188) 8 viii 1961d Studies of the Acarina fanna of leaf-litter and
moss from Australia. No. 1—A new gents and species of
Phaulodinychidae, Corbidinychus corbicularis from Queens-
land (Acarina, Uropodina), Ree, 5. Austr. Mus, 14(1):
107-113.

(189) & viii 1961e Studies of the Acarina fauna of leaf-litter and
moss from Australia. No. 2.—A new Trachytid mite,
Polyaspinus tuberculatus, from Queensland (Acarina,
Traechytina). Ree, 8. Austr. Mus. 14(1): 115-123,

(190) 8 viii 1961f A new record of the little known Calotrachytes
sclerophyllus (Michael, 1908) from New Zealand (Acarina,
Polyaspidae), with description of the male and nymph.
Ree. S. Austr. Mus, 14(1): 125-129.

(191) 28 ix 1961e New species of Acarina from the intertidal zone
in Netherlands New Guinea. Zool, Meded. 37(12) : 189-209.

632 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

(Posthumous publications)

(192) iii 1963a Two species of Acarina from bat guano from Aus-
tralian caves. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. 86: 147-154.

(193) iii 1963b A new species of Forcellinia Ouds. (Acarina, Tyro-
glyphidae) from bee hives in Western Australia. Trans.
Roy. Soc. 8. Austr. 86: 155-157.

(194) 23 viii 1963c A new larval Neotrombidiwm (Acarina, Leeuwen-
hoekiidae) from bat guano. Ree. S. Austr. Mus. 14(3):
473-476.

(195) 23 viii 19638d ‘‘Monunguis’’? Wharton, a valid genus (Acarina,
Trombidioidea). Ree. 8. Aust. Mus. 14(3): 477-485.

(196) 23 viii 1963e New records of Diarthrophallidae (Acarina)
with the description of the hitherto unknown larval stage.
Ree. S. Aust. Mus. 14(3): 487-497.

R. V. Sourscorr

ABORIGINAL FACTORY SITES AT MOONEE BEACH,
NEW SOUTH WALES

By W. I. NortTH, M.B.B:S.

Summary

This paper records a site at Moonee Beach, on the coast of New South Wales (153° 40° E.
Long. X 30° 10’ S. Lat.), where wind erosion has revealed an ancient aboriginal factory-
camp. The implements are principally pebble choppers, together with a small proportion
of edge-ground axes, the latter being concentrated in a relatively confined area,
suggesting the possibility of more than one period of occupation. Notes on another minor
site are included.

One of the implement types, believed to be new, is described herein as the Moonee Adze.

ABORIGINAL FACTORY SITES AT MOONEE BEACH,
NEW SOUTH WALES

By W. I. NORTH, M.B.B.S.
Fig. 1-8
SUMMARY

This paper records a site at Moonee Beach, on the coast of New
South Wales (158° 40’ E. Long. x 30° 10’ S. Lat.), where wind erosion
has revealed an ancient aboriginal factory-camp. The implements ure
principally pebble choppers, together with a small proportion of edge-
ground axes, the latter being concentrated in a relatively confined
area, suggesting the possibility of more than one period of occupation.
Notes on another minor site are ineluded,

One of the implement types, believed to be new, is described herein
as the Moonee Adze.

THE SITES

The area was discovered by the author while on holiday in July
1959, revisited in January 1962, and in May and July 1963. From
the south end of Moonee Beach the extensive wind-eroded dunes,
about three miles north, could be clearly seen with binoculars. Access
was at that time difficult, but as a housing estate is being opened up
on the adjacent headland, roads are now being laid almost to its edge.

Site I is situated at Part Lot 44, Parish of Moonee, County of
Fitzroy, at the northern end of Moonee Beach, 12 miles north of
Coffs Harbour and about one mile east of the Pacific Highway. The
road turn off to the site is exactly beside the 400 mile post from
Sydney.

The site consists of an extensive area of wind-eroded high dunes
situated immediately behind the present 12 to 15 foot beach dunes.
These inner fixed dunes are covered by low bushes. Where intact,
they are 30 to 40 feet high and where deflation has taken place show
a layered implement-bearing midden horizon some 10 or 15 feet
below their former summits. The moving sand has buried the heavily
wooded scrub as far as a 150 yards inland, and exposed an implement
bearing area approximately 400 yards long and 70 yards wide;
roughly six acres in extent (fig. 1 and 2),

634 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Towards the beach no implements whatever occur below the
10 foot terrace or in the 15 foot dunes bordering the present sea-shore.

Site IT is much smaller, occupying an area of less than two acres.
It is situated on the narrow neck of a headland about two miles north
of Site I, and four miles south of Woolgoolga (fig. 3). It is

THICK scrus ¢ 4
Sand moving inland --—~\ a™

wr se Kagel am
=\er7 f™ “—N\ My
s\—) 8 fs uot 7 ™ TN
= = — ~ VV
c Ti — ~ |—dune VG
a —/— a\~ \/= dune
e —_ / a een om es
£ {| (VATS ra —< ; f-
za SAE Shell heaps >= 30 ft. ridge 47
ur wes SINS eae eos a7
Sle le eee eee
- = Oe tS
a\e
~
7S

Fig. 1. Ground plan of Site I at Moonee Beach, New South Wales.

approximately 100 yards long and 50 yards wide. High fixed dunes
border its landward side. The implements lie on the basic ironstone
ridges of the peninsula and on sand remaining in the central parts.
Water has washed some towards the beach, otherwise again no
implements occur lower than the 10 foot level. They are the same
in type and relative numbers as those of Site I, and are classified
together. Most ready access to this site is by walking along the
beach from Site I.

NORTH—MOONEE BEACH ABORIGINAL SITES 635
E 40 ft. dune Ww

BSNS ete VAS

Midden Layer

Fig. 2, Elevation (not to seale) of Site I. (Heavy line indicates implement horizon; heavy
dots sand cover; circles indicate old fixed dune).

Head-land

sven 15 ft.
—_ ee =e ee a ee ee ee a iL — =— me eS — <a — ==
Sea level

Fig. 3. Plan and elevation of Site IL at Moonee Beach, New South Wales,

636 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

STONE MATERIAL

All implements found on the sites are made from pebbles, mainly
fawn to dark gray silicified mud, silt and sand-stone, with a few
specimens of fine and coarse clastic greywacke. One fine quartz
side chopper was found. There is an abundance of these large and
small water-worn pebbles available locally at the junction of the
beaches and headlands along this coast.

IMPLEMENTS

The following is a classification of the implements found at these
two sites, with some notes on those of particular interest.
Epce-Grounp Axzes: 18—3% of total.

Heaviest—1,200g. (24 Ib.).
Lightest—240g. (4 lb.).
Average weight—720g. (14 Ib.).

Fig. 4. Sumatra type implement, Moonee Beach. (In this and succeeding figures the scale
is to be read in centimeters.)

Fig. 5. Edge ground axe of windang type, Moonee Beach.

Types: 16 roughly flaked one side, the so-called windang axe;
2 flaked on both sides, biface ground (fig. 5).

The two last named closely resemble the typical axe of south-
eastern South Australia.

NORTH—MOONEE BEACH ABORIGINAL SITES 637

Stone material: 16 of mud- or silt-stone; 2 of greywacke.
Some of these axes are well preserved, others are rather sand-
blasted and weather worn.
Smpe-Fitaxep Prssie CHoppsrs: 340 + estimated 100 remaining on
sites—709% of total (fig. 6).
Heaviest—1,680g. (3% ]b.).
Lightest—150¢. (5o0z.).
Average weight—465g. (1540z.).
Types: 15 also flaked at one end; 2 also flaked at both ends.

Stone material: Elongated pebbles of mud- and silt-stone, mostly
in very good condition, a few of soft sand-stone are well weathered
(fig. 6).

CS
— 7

fs rae Fein,
3 .
Hr *

Fig. 6. Side-flaked pebble chopper, Moonee Beach, New South Wales.

Ewn-FLakep Pessite Coorprrs: 68—10% of total.
Heaviest—540g. (180z.).
Lightest—105g. (340z.).
Average weight—300g. (100z.).

Types: 5 also flaked on both margins (fig. 7); 1 flaked at both
ends on opposite sides.

Stone material: Ovoid flat pebbles of grey silt-stone.

638 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sumatra Type: 32—5% of total (fig. 4).
Heaviest—1,800g. (3% lb.).
Lightest—420g. (140z.).
Average weight—720g. (14 lb.).
These were generally well made, typical ‘‘sumatras’’, in good
condition. Two showed a cortical remnant on the worked side.

Pianes: 7—1% of total.
Average weight—840g. (1 lb. 120z.).
Type: Upright ‘‘horsehoof’’ nuclei. Two had a right angle curved
base.

MisceELLANEOUS CHoppERs: 20 + —3% of total.

This ill-defined group comprises biface and uniface irregularly
flaked pebbles, coroids and slices. Some are heavy, with large
percussion bulbs and step flaking along several edges and were
probably fabricators. Others are long ‘‘pick’’ type implements with
a pointed end worked on both sides. Many showing some flaking and
fracture may be rejects.

23 Fa

ap A a .
$a AVG SAI ye ay yne

Fig. 7. End-flaked pebble chopper, Moonee Beach.

NORTH—MOONEE BEACH ABORIGINAL SITES 639

Wig, 8. Moonee adze. Moonee Beach, New South Wales.

Moonrr Apze: 55—8% of total (fig. 8).
Weight from 50g. (1.60z.) to 240g. (80z.).
Length from 7 em. (2.7in.) to 12 em, (4.7in.).
Width from 4.5 em. (1.8in.) to 6.8 em. (2.7in.).
Maximum thickness from 8 mm. (0,3in,) to 26 mm. (1.0in.),
Average weight—110g. (3.750z.).
Average length—9.5 em. (3.75in.).
Average width—5.5 em. (2.15in.).
Average maximum thickness—15 mm. (0.6in.).

Stone material: Hard light gray to black mud-stone,

This interesting and extremely well made implement, of which 1
have not seen a previous description, has been for obvious reasons
called the ‘‘ Moonee Adze’’.

It consists of a flat oval pebble or slice fully flaked on one side
only, with secondary flaking along the margins. Twenty-five of these
were found intact. The remaining 30 showed varying degrees of
reworking by step flaking at one end, up to three-fifths of the original
oval being flaked away. Four were worked back at both ends. A
typical but large specimen is illustrated as fig. 8.

640 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

These implements were made either from a very flat pebble or
from a thin slice from the flat side of a large stone. In three specimens
a smal] area of cortical surface remains near the centre of the worked
side, and in two others a definite percussion point and bulb can be
seen midway along one lateral margin.

In spite of the wide disparity in size of the whole series, by far
the greater proportion of specimens conform closely to the average
measurements noted above, namely an implement of just under four
ounces in weight, four inches in length, two in width and half an inch
thick, tapering off flatly to all margins on the worked side.

An interesting series can be shown with all degrees of wear from
the initial stages right back to the extreme two-fifths remnant. From
this fact, and from its unsuitable shape, if used as a hand tool, arises
the suggestion that this implement may have been used as a mounted
adze in the manner of the resin hafted tula adze of Central and South
Australia and that the hafting medium covered two-fifths of the stone.

The distribution of the Moonee adze and the edge-ground axes was
limited to two relatively small areas on Site I and one on Site II,
whereas all other implements were scattered indiscriminately over
hoth sites.

The high proportion of intact specimens may be due to the [act
that these sites were factories as well as camps. Several unworked,
partly worked or broken slices and pebbles were found of the dark
stone nsed in making the Moonee adze.

OTHER REMAINS

Ovhre: Red and yellow lumps up to 1202.
Quartz Crystal; One large example,

FOOD REMAINS

Shells lie seattered thickly over both sites, mainly pipis, whelke
and turban shells.

In addition, rather disintegrated midden bases occur, a small one
on Site II and a larger area on Site I. These are situated along the
25 foot ridge connecting the remaining fixed dunes and may he
indicative of the original camp level. Different shells predominate in

NORTH—MOONEE BEACH ABORIGINAL SITES 641

heaps along this ridge from north to south in this order—pipis,
periwinkles, small oysters and mud whelks. In all, the following shells
were identified ;

Ninella torquata (Sydney Turban).
Plebidonaz deltoides (Pipi).

Pyrazus ebeninus (Mud Whelk).
Saxostrea commercialis (Rock Oyster).
Dicathais orbita (Cart rut Purple).
Melanerita melanotragus (Periwinkle).
Cellana tramoserica (Limpet).
Patellanaz peroni (Limpet).

Scutus antipodes (Elephant Snail).
Cymatilesta spenglert (Triton),
Cymbiola rutila (Volute).

A little charcoal and ealeined bone from a midden was collected.

NOTES AND COMMENTS

Whole pebbles, split pebbles, rejected flakes, partly made imple-
ments and broken ones lie in profusion everywhere.

There were no microliths, points, seements, entting tools, pounding
or mull stones oceurring on either site.

There is little evidence of secondary use on any tool, in particular
on the side choppers which comprise 70 per cent of the total. These
implements resemble the Kangaroo Island specimens collected by Mr.
lf. M. Cooper, except that they are generally narrower and lighter,
and show few examples of use at either end concurrently with the side,
and no examples of subsidiary use as hammer-stones. Only one pebble
showing percussive pitting was found, and this was otherwise
unworked.

Some of the side choppers are similar to the historically known
choppers for bungwall-fern-root-gathering reported by Jackson (1939)
from the Kabi tribal area of Southern Queensland.

Fresh water is available in adjoining springs and swamps behind
rach site,

From local information it was learnt that the Jita-Jita people
oceupied this general area about 100 years ago. They were a branch
of the Kumbainggiri tribe which extended from the Clarence or the
Richmond River south to the Nambucca. It is believed also that at
certain times of the year inland tribes came over the mountains and

642 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

were given access to the local foods, in particular to the fleshy
dicotyledonous seeds of the mangrove and the large shoals of sea
mullet passing along the beaches.

A representative series of the implements listed herein has been
lodged in the South Australian Museum, where data is available under
the number A.54565.

The evidence shows so far that the implements are associated only
with the old fixed dunes, thought to be those formed 3,700 years ago
or earlier. Implements are im situ in the highest parts of the eroded
ridge and ean also be seen buried in the upper slopes of the old dunes
in association with blackened sand and shell remains.

It was considered worthwhile, therefore, before carbon fourteen
dating with its attendant delays can be applied, to publish this article.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

In the preparation of this paper I wish to acknowledge with thanks
the help of the following persons: Mr. Norman B. Tindale, Curator
of Anthropology, South Australian Museum; Dr. D. Corbett, Geologist,
South Australian Museum; Dr. H. M. Laws, Conchologist, South
Australian Museum; and Mr. G. England of the Coffs Harbour
Historical Society.

REFERENCE CITED

Jackson, G. K., 1939: Aboriginal middens of Point Cartwright district.
Mem. Queensl. Mus., Brisbane, x (3): 289-295.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AND STONE IMPLEMENTS OF
PITCAIRN STATION, NORTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS

Summary

This paper describes the rock engraving sites on Pitcairn and adjoining Hill Grange
stations in north-eastern South Australia. The sites and their distribution are defined and
considered in relation to topography. The marked weathering of the rocks and the
engraved surfaces is discussed. Associated camp-sites and the stone implements collected
from them are briefly described. Typical examples of engravings and implements are
figured; evidence of considerable antiquity and of engraving techniques is given.

ROCK ENGRAVINGS AND STONE IMPLEMENTS OF PITCAIRN
STATION, NORTH-EASTERN SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By ROBERT EDWARDS
Plates 43-45 and text fig, 1-9

SUMMARY

This paper deseribes the rock engraving sites on Pitcairn and
adjoining Hill Grange stations in north-eastern South Australia, The
sites and their distribution are defined and considered in relation to
topography. The marked weathering of the rocks and the engraved
surfaces is discussed, Associated camp-sites and the stone implements
collected from them are briefly deseribed. Typical examples of
engravings and implements are figured; evidence of considerable
antiquity and of engraving techniques is given.

INTRODUCTION

Early in 1962, a field excursion to Pitcairn station (map, fig. 1)
wis made by Professor G. H. Lawton, Department of Geography,
University of Adelaide, Mr. ©. P. Mountford, Honorary Associate in
Ethnology, South Australian Museum, and the author, to record a
group of rock engravings at a locality known by the station owners as
the Twelve Mile. The discovery of jaw fragments of a Procoptodon
or Giant Kangaroo in the bank of a local creek by Brian K. Sawers,
one of the owners, had first drawn attention to the area as meriting
examination,

Subsequent investigation by the author revealed other rock
engravings and camp-sites. These relies of aboriginal occupation form
the subject of this paper.

LOCATION

Pitcairn station, about 170 miles north-east of Adelaide, oceupies
an area of 180 square miles fringing the semi-arid parts of South
Australia, The average rainfall of approximately eight inches is
usually associated with thunderstorm conditions.

The largest watercourse on Pitcairn station is the Manunda Creek
which collects the run-off from Poreupine Range (plate 43, fig. A),
dominant geographical feature of the area. This range is rugged and

644 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

steep, its highest point, Waite Hill, being 2,405 feet above sea level.
There are a number of shelters among the outcrops of rock on the
slopes of the range, but examination failed to reveal evidence of
prolonged aboriginal occupation,

oy ES BULYANINNIE
e Ge Y= CHAINS 250

Procoptadon bones”
alound here

Twuvea
HILL fh

nd
TUILKILIKEY
STATION

SOUTH &
AUSTRALIA ~
0 mites 200
a)

CAMP-SITES <=> r *% = FIRE ~HEARTHS

Big. 1. Map of Piteuirn stition indicating the relative positions of rock angravings
aud camp-2) les,

WATER SUPPLIES

A permanent ronning spring in the bed of the Manunda Creek
(map, fig. 1) provides a good supply of fresh water, Smaller semi-
permanent eprings in the steep ¢orges of Porcupine Range (plate 43,
fig, C) and roeckholes, some capable of holding many gallons of water,
oceur on the stony bills of both Pitcairn and adjoining Hill Grange
station, The openings of some of these rockholes have been eovered
with flat slabs of stone, probably by the aboriginals, to prevent
animals drinking the water, and to reduce contamination and
evaporation.

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 645

FLORA AND FAUNA

The flora of the area, characteristic of the dry parts of South
Anstralia, appears to be a northerly extension of the Murray belt of
serubland, The evealypts are, for the most part, the dwarf varieties
venerally classified under the name ‘‘Mallee’’, Serub Sheoak,
Casuarina distyla; Sandal-wood, Santalum laneceolatum, and mulga,
Acacia aneura, grow on the open flats, and the native pine, Callitris
glauca, on the ranges. Native peach trees (quandong), Santalum
acuminatum, whose fruit was much favoured by the aboriginals, are
occasionally seen on both the plains and the sides of the stony hills.
Salt-bush, Atriplex vesicarium, and blue-bush, Kochia sedifolia, cover
the undulating countryside, and tussocks of T'riodia the higher hills
and ranges, In the early days of white settlement this grass was
known as ‘porcupine’? because of its needle-like spines—hence the
nume, Porenpine Range. Spear-, and other native grasses fourish on
the open flat country after the errati¢ rains.

Kangaroo, euros, emus, echidnas, lizards, snakes, goannas and
many sorts of birds frequent Piteairn station, but wombats, wallabies
and dingoes, once present in considerable numbers, have become almost
extinct since the Sawers family aequired the sheep station in 1895,
It will be seen from this that there would have been an adequate supply
of food to sapport an aboriginal population in recent and probably
also in prehistoric times,

ROCK ENGRAVING SITES

The rock engravings on Pitcairn and Hill Grange stations have
been divided into five groups, i.¢., Twelve Mile; Porcupine Range;
Mafeking Mills; Manunda Springs and Hill Grange station (map,
fi. 1). The first three of these groups are somewhat isolated from
the others, while the latter two are sitnated on the continuous line of
hills extending from Manunda Springs, across Hill Grange station,
into the adjoining property. The present survey has been confined to
Piteairn and Hill Grange station; the engravings at other sites located
in this north-eastern area are at present being Investigated.

Twenive Mrue

This site, a rocky outcrop near an ont-station, is about twelve
miles south-east of Pitcairn station homestead. At the present time
the only indication of a water supply is a few minor rockholes near
the engravings and possible soaks in the bed of a watercourse some
distance away.

646 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Fig. 2. Rock engraving designs from the Twelve Mile site, Pitcairn station.

The engravings are confined to the smooth surfaces of an uneven
outcrop situated at the eastern end of the low line of hills rising out
of the broad plain to the west of Levi Range (map, fig. 1). Although

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 647

the number of engravings is not large, the proportion of apparently
unfinished designs is greater than those found among the other groups
examined, Many of these engravings at the Twelve Mile are well
preserved (plate 44), while others have been almost entirely worn
away by erosive action of water and wind-blown sand.

There are few unusual designs at this site. Most depict animal
tracks (fig. 2D, E, N, Q. X) and cireles (fig. 2B, C, HB, I, H, I, L, M,
P,Q, T, U, V and X), all of them characteristic of South Australian
rock engravings, The tracks include those of an adult emu with
chicks (fig. 24). There are a number of human foot and handprints
with peenliar outlines (fig. 2M, R, 8, U,), the feet having four, five or
six toes, and the hands four to six fingers.

Porcupmne Ranauk

A semi-permanent spring is located in a secluded, steep-sided gully
on the northern slopes of Waite Hill (map, fig. 1). As it flows towards
the open plain the water from this spring fills many rockholes (plate
43, fig. C). Hvidence of aboriginal visits to this isolated valley ts
indicated by the designs engraved on rock surfaces adjacent to the
water supplies,

The most unusual and extensive group is an intricate collection
af eireles and tracks on one large pavement near a creek (fig. 6),
Other designs (many badly weathered), include crescents (fig. 41, F,
K, L, R), a number of small engraved disc-like designs (fig. 4P), emu
tracks (fig, 4H, J, M, 8S) and some human footprints (fig. 4G, O, Q).
Several of the engravings of emn tracks (fig. 4J, 8) may have been
intentionally distorted. Mountford (personal communication) states
that the aboriginals of the Wailbri tribe of Central Australia, depict
the tracks of a mythical lame emu, kalaia, in a similar manner.

Marexine Hiis

Near some small rockholes among these hills, a few portions of
engraved circles and tracks were found. here may have been other
engravings at this site at some time, but the surface of the rocks has
been broken into so many fragments that any other designs would
have been obliterated.

Manunpa Sprtnos anp Hitz, Grance Station

The aboriginals engraved many designs on the outcropping roeks
in the line of hills (plate 45, fig. A) which extends in a general north-
easterly direction from Manunda Springs across Pitcairn to the Hill
Grange station (map, fig, 1).

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 649

_ Although there are a number of simple engravings at the Manunda
Springs (fig. 4A, B, C, D), the designs are more numerous and
complex near the Hill Grange boundary (plate 45, fig. B). Here are
many circular designs (fig. 3A, B, C, D, E, F, J, L, P, T, W, AA, BB)
and several examples of the barred circle (fig. 3H, AA), Fully intag-
liated lizard designs (fig. 30, V), common in the Panarammitee area
(Mountford and Edwards, 1963), are rare at this locality. As at
the Twelve Mile site, animal tracks form a large proportion of the
engravings. There are poorly executed human footprints (fg. 31, M,
«), R, BB, CC), several small marsupial tracks with large crescents
(fig. 300) and a few dise-like designs (fig. 3N, BB).

Fig. 4. Hock engraving designs from Manunda Springs and Porcupine Range.

During the examination of some rock engravings on the slopes of
a hillside on Hill Grange station, a group of partly covered circles
was noticed in the bed of a shallow gutter. The removal of soil and
rubble to a depth from six to twelve inches revealed more engravings
(fig, 5, plate 43, fig. B). Other buried rock faces probably exist, but as
the deposition of the debris took place at irregular intervals of time,
auch detrital cover is not likely to supply evidence of age, but serve
merely to protect the engravings from weathering and erosion, Similar
oceurrences of buried engravings have been recorded from sites in the
Northern Flinders Ranges by Hale and Tindale (1925), in Deep Creek,

650 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

near Burra, by Campbell (1925) and Biddle (1925), and from
Panaramitee North, by Mountford and Edwards (1963), and stated as
being adjacent to, or in, creek beds, partly covered by a layer of soil.

TECHNIQUES

There is no published record of any white person having witnessed
an aboriginal making an actual rock engraving in South Australia,
and the tools are unknown. Basedow (1914, 1925), Hosking (1926),
Mountford (1935) and Mountford and Edwards (1963) have suggested
that rock engravings were produced with a sharp-pointed piece of hard
stone, either hand-held or used as a chisel-like instrument,

Experiments on typical rock face material have shown it is
possible to produce suitable pits by both methods. The use of a
hammer-stone and chisel however enables a more controlled application
of the force to the rock surface; as many of the designs were engraved
with fine detail and accurately and sharply portrayed, some carefully
directed use of the tools employed would have been necessary. The
measure of exactness and regularity seen in many of the engravings
(plate 44, fig. C) would have been difficult to achieve with a single hand-
held implement. A search in the vicinity of rock engravings for
specialized tools has been undertaken without success by a number of
investigators, Basedow (1914, 1925); Stapleton (1931) and Mountford
and Edwards (1963). As quartzite and the milky variety of quartz are
the hardest materials available and occur in abundance near all the rock
engravings, some fragments of these may have been used in one of the
methods adopted. If struck with the correct amount of force and at
a suitable angle, selected pieces of these materials have sufficient
hardness and toughness to penetrate the softer rock surface a number
of times without damaging the point. There are instances where
variations in the size and shape of the individual punch marks can
be seen, suggesting a difference in tool point and in the action of
striking the rock surface to produce an engraving. Several of these
variations are seen in plate 44, fig. C, D. Heavy blows from an
implement of some weight would have been required to make the large
circular pits which comprise the design on plate 44, fig. A. The
detailed study being undertaken of the various kinds of depressions
forming the designs of the engravings may help to provide evidence
of the techniques employed.

Only a few examples of straight line markings (plate 44, fig. B)
were found similar to those recorded from other sites by Basedow
(1914); Tindale and Mountford (1926); and Mountford (1929).

651

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION

\ . \ \ N

'Cx\

N
Rock engravings revealed by excavation on Hill Grange station.
Fig. 6. Extensively engraved rock pavement in the Porcupine Range, Pitcairn station

Fig. 5.

652 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

WEATHERING

Most of the sites so far examined have presented instances of
engraved surfaces in an advanced state of deterioration due to the
effects of long weathering. As there is insufficient evidence to
determine the rates of this weathering process if cannot be used as a
reliable basis for estimating age.

The engravings on outcropping rock surfaces situated on Hill
Grange station provide striking evidence of the effects of weathering
and disintegration. Chemical and mechanical weathering, aided by
erosion by water and wind, appear to be the principal factors causing
fragmentation of the rocks in this region, In some places only small
portions of the designs remain While there are instanees where prac-
tically the whole surface has been broken into fragments and many of
them washed down the hillside. Por example, a large group of circles
(fig. 37, T; plate 45, fig, B) has been so affected that some of them have
obviously disappeared and nearby slabs of the engraved, outer layer
of the rock have become detached and rest loosely on the underlying
mass.

ANTIQUITY

Many of the authors who have recorded rock engravings in South
Australia have speculated on their age (Basedow, 1914, 1925; Campbell,
1925; Biddle, 1925; Hale and Tindale, 1925, 1929; Hale, 1926; Tindale
and Mountford, 1926; Mountford, 1929, 1935, 1960; Stapleton, 1931;
Tindale, 1935; Cooper, 1941; Mountford and Edwards, 1962, 1963).
The general opinion is that they are of some antiquity. This suggestion
is based on the weathered eondition of the rock surfaces, evidence of
minor earth movements, patination, the presence of engravings of hoth
extinet creatures and thei tracks, and the faet that living aboriginals
of the Flinders Ranges and other areas where such engravings exist
have asserted that they are not the work of their people, bat. of mythical
ancestors who lived during ereation times.

The engravings have been cut into the hardened and heavily
patinated surface layers of the loeal rock masses, Such rock altera-
tions probably involve a long period of time. It is therefore important
to determine, if possible, to what extent patination of the rock snrface
has oceurred subsequent to the engraving of the designs. The strongest
evidence of age must rest upon the extent of deterioration of engraved
markings or their patination, While some have the appearance of
marked ‘fageing’’, others present a sharpness in the eut margin
suggesting a later origin,

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 653

Mountford and Edwards (1962) recorded their observation of the
apparent absence of dingo tracks among the large number of engraved
animal and bird tracks recorded in the north-east of South Australia.
This may imply that some of these engravings predate the arrival of
the native dog on this continent. No representations of dingo tracks
were found among the engravings examined in the Pitcairn area. It
is of interest that dingo bones were recovered in a recent archaeological
excavation at Fromm Landing, South Australia, by Mulvaney, Lawton
and Twidale (1964), Carbon 14 tests have dated the levels of these
remains at between 1000 + 91 B.C. and 1220 + 94 B.C. and to be the
oldest dated dingo remains recorded for Australia.

The engravings examined during this survey are comparable with
olhers so far recorded from adjacent regions. There is a resemblance
in the detail of the designs; weathering has advanced to a like degree
and the same techniques appear to have been employed, Tt is there-
fore reasonable to suggest that the whole series (map, fig. 9) are
the work of related groups of aboriginals, and may be comtemporary.

While searching for rock engravings in the Pitcairn area, many
rounded piles of fire-bnnit stones (plate 43, fig, D) were observed along
the Manunda and other watercourses (map, fig. 1), Gray (1930) at
Orroroo aud Meyer (1846) at Encounter Bay note the use of heated
stones for cooking by the aboriginals, and it is likely that the blackened
stones located indicate fireplaces. During the survey of Panaramitee
station in 1961 (Mountford and Edwards, 1963) similar hearths were
noticed along the Yunta and Winnininnie Creeks and their tributaries.
Such watereourses, snpplemented by associated permanent springs,
would have been sufficient to support hoth the people who made the
neighbouring rock engravings and the game which would have provided
them with a food supply, Consequently it appears that the water-
courses of this region and the nearby exposed rock surfaces, were
the main factors determining the situation of these rock engravings.
The map (fig. 9) shows such a distribution in and around the Manunda-
Yonta Creek drainage area,

The possibility that the Manunda Creek and its tributaries were
once semi-permanent watercourses, flowing towards the Murray as
part of the north-eastern drainage system, cannot be discounted if
the present aridity of the climate of northern South Australia is of
comparatively recent origin, as has sometimes heen suggested
(Howehin, 1914),

654 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

IN.

Cc 0 cM 5 Brenoa K. Hussar

Fig. 7. Large stone implements from the Manunda Creek, camp-site A, Piteairn station.

A, Large, trimmed flake implement, arapia in form, with a flat base and
characteristic working platform, Specimen Reg. No, A54666 in South
Australian Museum.

B. Trimmed core implement with a slightly convex or keeled base and secondary
trimming around the periphery. .A54667.

C. Horsehoof-shaped core implement with two working edges, A54668,

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION G35

OCCUPATION SITES

In many instances where hearths were observed, the banks of the
watercourses are almost devoid of vegetation, apart from occasional
clumps of salt-bush and blue-bush, Some of these areas have been
undergoing continuous surface erosion by wind and water, leaving a
mass Of stones strewn about on the bared areas of red clay, In some
places, much of the land surface is disintegrating and being carried
away in newly forming erosion gutters, Low rainfall and the effects
of pastoral activities currently inhibits the growth of a cover of
veectation. Frosion has not only been responsible for exposing
hearths and implements—some can be seen embedded in the banks of
the watercourses—hut it is likely that it has also caused some to have
been washed away into the creeks.

he search for stone implements in these areas produced discarded
flakes and implements of varying sizes. At three particular localities
(map, fig. 1 A-B; C and D) the number of implements collected was
sufticient to indieate More than a casual stopping place.

Manunpa Creek (Site A)

This camp-site is located on a well-drained position on the high
western bank of the Manunda Creek (map, fig. 1A). The now
temporary spring at the base of some slate outcrops in the ereek bed
may account for the presence of the nearby camp-site, Here erosion
has removed the more friable surface soil leaving an assemblage of
stones, including many implements, discarded flakes and fire-hearths.
The collection of artifacts made from this site consists of 231 large
implements, mainly trimmed cores (e.g., fig. 7) made from coarse
grained quartzite readily available in the bed of the Manunda Creek;
90 smaller flakes of irregular shape with varying amounts of trimming;
18 worked cores; two geometric microliths; two microlithie end
scrapers made from australites; 114 discarded quartzite flakes and
63 seraps of milky qnartz and chaleedonic material.

Manunpa Creek (Site B)
Some eroded clay flats, a little to the north, form an extension of
the main Manunda site (map, fig. 1B), Here fireplaces were located
and a few large implements and uwntrimmed stone flakes collected.

Manunpa Creek (Site C)
This eamp-site is on the banks of the Manunda Creek about a mile
up-stream from the main site (Site A). Only a small number of

656 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

implements were found, but an interesting feature was some well-
defined areas strewn with great quantities of milky quartz fragments,

apparently broken up during the manufacture of implements from this
material.

Boanoa K. Hunsane
Fig. 8. Large trimmed core implements from Albert Hill, camp site D, Pitcairn station.

D. Core chopping implement showing the functional edge sharp and intact.
A54669.

KE, Core chopping implement with functional edge re-worked or sharpened as
a result of continued use. A54670.

F. Core chopping implement re-worked to such an extent that the implement is
almost worn out and of little further use. A54671.

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 657

Twenty-eight artifacts were recovered, including 14 semi-discoidal
adze-stones of milky quartz; 24 indefinitely shaped flakes of the same
miaterial (all bearing evidence of secondary trimming), three geometrie
and one semi-discoidal microliths,

Auspert Hin (Site D)

This rather isolated camping ground, covering some 50 acres of
the banks and adjoining flats of a Manunda Creck tributary, is midway
between the Piteairn homestead and the Twelve Mile rock engravings
(map, fig, 1D),

The variety in the implement types collected differ from those of
the main Mannunda Creek e¢amp-site (Site A). Thirty-eight large core
implements were reeovered; microliths comprised 15 geometries, one
diseoid and three semi-discoids, one nosed scraper, seven end-scrapers
and some small worked cores. There were approximately 800 scrap
flukes; six of these show trimming. Some of the large implements are
good examples of their respective types, three in particular (fig. 8)
clearly exhibit the stages of modification of the shape of a core
implement when it was continuously re-sharpened,

DISCUSSION

There is no conclusive evidence to indicate the density or
permanence of the prehistorie population of the Piteairn region, The
number of artifacts found is small when compared with the quantity
recovered from other parts of northern South Australia (Mitchell,
1949; Cooper, 1954). This suggests that this particular area was not
permanently oceupied by a large community at any period.

The predominance of large implements among the material
collected on the Manunda Oreck indicates a similarity to the Kartan
camp-sites recorded at Flallett Cove (Cooper, 1959), near the River
Wakefield (Cooper, 1961), and to a limited extent on Kangaroo Island
(Tindale and Maegraith, 1931; Cooper, 1960) where the proportion of
such implements was also high in comparison with smaller types.
Other massive implements were retrieved by Cooper (1943) from eamp-
sites near the rock engravings at Mount Chambers Creek, Oratunga
and on Boorloo Creek near Marree (Cooper 1941), Most of the
implements from all these sites are similar in size, form, material and
technique of manufacture,

Assuming these are Kartan implements and are ancient, as has
been suggested, they may belong to the same period as the rock
engravings. If so they provide further indications of the possible
antiquity of the engravings,

658 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Many of the trimmed core implements recovered from the Pitcairn
area bear evidence of constant use, some having been sharpened a
number of times by trimming the functional margin with blows by a
hammer-stone (figs. 7 and 8). The edges of some tools have been
re-worked in this manner so often, that further sharpening would have
been impossible and they were obviously discarded. Cooper (1961)
states that the high proportion of core chopping implements found
along the banks of the River Wakefield—also worn to the limits of
their usefulness—may represent an accumulation of tools discarded
over an extended period by a relatively small population. This may
also be the explanation for the findings of the Pitcairn area.

FLORINA @
e @ MANNAHILL
WABRICOOLA WINNININNIE SNAKY HILLS @
WINNININNIE
@ SPRINGS
OULNINA
YUNTA @ e
SERneS PANARAMITEE
CHARITY NORTH
Wwe @ ~.\ge®
OLD NETLEY
@ Wet STATION

a
ROCK @® r) “¢
WHYDOWN @ HOLES A
PARATOO CREEK
NACKARA e TIVERTON 6
SPRINGS
v ae
Men?

HILL GRANGE

MANUNDA @

SPRINGS @ 0 MILES

PORCUPINE @ RANGE bain MILE SCALE

Fig. 9. Map showing the general distribution of known rock engraving sites in
or near the Manunda-Yunta Creek drainage area.

Certain rock painting sites in Central Australia are situated well
away from regular camping places and forbidden to all but the fully
initiated. In contrast to this, the groups of rock engravings in the
north-east of South Australia occur in places where good water and
food supplies were available and therefore may have been near regular,
general occupation sites. If so, the engravings may not have had any
particular restricted sacred or ceremonial significance but rather

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 659

represent the efforts of the aboriginal inhabitants of the long past,
reminding themselves of their mythical and legendary staries in both
naturalistic aud abstract styles, Interpretation of such a vast array
of stylized figures is not an easy matter. Certain of these, such as
simple or concentric vireles, wavy lines and crescents, are not
uncommon among designs exeented by living aborigines and may thus
he decipherable. But in addition there are many other designs and
patterns which could probably be designated as expressions of abstract.
aboriginal art, Further disenssion of this aspect is beyond the scope
of the present paper, the purpose of which is to record the available
information about the rock engravings and stone artifacts of the
Pitcairn and Hill Grange stations.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author acknowledges the interest and enthusiasm of Mr.
Brian K. Sawers and his family who provided accommodation, supplied
transport for field work and generally assisted in the collection of
implements and tracing of engravings. Without thei generous help it
would have been impossible to carry out the survey. Mr. 8, R. C. Lang
of Hill Geange station kindly gave permission to continue the
survey on his property, The encouragement and advice of Mr, C, P.
Mountford, Professor G, H. Lawton and Drs. TT’. D. Campbell and
P. 8. Hossteld daring the preparation of this paper is appreciated,
Mr, H. M, Cooper gave assistance in comparing the various
implements from Piteairn with those he has collected, and his advice
was invaluable in other ways.

The Board for Anthropological Research of the University of
Adelaide granted funds towards the expenses of field work of this
research, Mr. M. R. Marchant, of the South Australian Lands
Department, provided details needed for the preparation of maps.
The plates, figures and maps have been prepared by the author, and
the outlines of implements drawn by Miss Brenda Hubbard,
Acknowledgment is also made to the Board of the South Australian
Museum for publication of this paper and to Mr, Norman B. Tindale,
Curator of Anthropology, for his consideration and advice. The
figured specimens have been placed in the South Australian Museum
collection,

REFERENCES CITED
Basedow, H,, 1914: Aboriginal rock carvings of great antiquity in
South Australia, J.R. Anthrop. Inst., London 44.
————. 1925: The Australian Aboriginal. Adelaide.

660 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Biddle, J. P. E., 1925; Aboriginal markings on rocks near Burra
(Kooringa)), Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 49.

Campbell, T. D., 1925: Detailed notes on the aboriginal intaglios near
Burra, Trans, Roy Soe. 8. Austr., Adelaide, 49.

Qooper, H, M., 1941: Rock carvings and other aboriginal relies from
near Marree. S. Austr, Nat., Adelaide, 21,
1943: Large stone implements from South Australia, Ree,
S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 7(4).
1954: Material culture of Australian aboriginals. Ree. 8.
Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 11(2).
1959: Large archaeological stone implements from Hallett
Cove, South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soe. 8S, Austr.,
Adelaide, 82.
1960; The archaeology of Kangaroo Island, South Australia.
Ree, 8, Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 13(4).
1961: Archaeological stone implements along the Lower
River Wakefield, South Australia. Trans. Roy, Soc. 8.
Austr., Adelaide, 84.
Gray, J., 1930: Notes on native tribe formerly resident at Orroroo,
South Australia. S. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 12(1).
Hale, H. M., 1926: Aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia. 8.
Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 8(1).
Hale, H. M. and Tindale, N. B., 1925: Observations on aborigines of
the Flinders Ranges, and records of rock earvings and
paintings. Ree. 8. Austr, Mus., Adelaide, 3(1).
1929; Further notes on aboriginal rock carvings in South
Australia, S. Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 10(2).
Hall, F. J., MeGowan, R. G, and Guleksen, G. F., 1951: Aboriginal
rock carvings: a locality near Pimba, South Australia.
Ree. 5. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 9.
Hosking, J. W., 1926: Native rock carvings at Pekina Creek, Orroroo,
South Australian, S, Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 8(1).
Howchin, W., 1914: The evolution of the physiographical features of
South Australia. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 14.
Meyer, H. BK. A., 1846: Manners and customs of the aborigines of the
Encounter Bay Tribe, South Australia. Adelaide.
Mitchell, 8S. R., 1949: Stone-age craftsmen, Melbourne.
Mountford, ©. P., 1929: Aboriginal rock carvings in South Australia.
Aust. Assoe. Adv, Sci,, Hobart, 19.

EDWARDS—ROCK ENGRAVINGS OF PITCAIRN STATION 661

1929: A unique example of aboriginal rock carving at
Panaramitee North. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Austr., Adelaide,
53.
1935: A survey of the petroglyphs of South Australia.
Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., Melbourne, 22.
1960: Simple rock engravings in Central Australia. Man,
London, 60.
Mountford, C. P. and Edwards, R., 1962: Aboriginal rock engravings
of extinct creatures in South Australia. Man, London, 62.
1963: Rock engravings of Panaramitee station, north-eastern
South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., Adelaide, 86.
Mulvaney, D. J., Lawton, G. H. and Twidale, C. R., 1964: Archaclogi-
cal excavation of rockshelter no. 6, Fromm Landing,
South Australia. Proce. Roy. Soe. Vic., Melbourne, 77.
Stapleton, P., 1931: Aboriginal relies in the Blinman District. S.
Austr. Nat., Adelaide, 12(2).
Tindale, N. B., 1935; Rock-markings in South Australia. Antiquity,
London, 9.
1951; Comments on supposed representations of giant bird
tracks at Pimba. Rec. S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 9.
Tindale, N. B. and Mountford, C. P., 1926: Native markings on rocks
at Morowie, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Austr.,
Adelaide, 50.
Tindale, N. B. and Maegraith, B. G., 1931: Traces of an extinct
aboriginal population on Kangaroo Island. Ree. S. Austr.
Mus., Adelaide, 4(3).

662

Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.

Fig.
Fig.

powP

SayPp

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 43
Hill Grange station looking south with the Poreupine Range in the background.
Rock engravings revealed by excavation on Hill Grange station.
Semi-permanent spring situated in the Poreupine Range, Pitcairn station.
Fire blackened pile of stones on the Manunda Creek camp-site, Pitcairn station.

PLATE 44
EXAMPLES OF Rock ENGRAVINGS, TWELVE MILE SITE, PITCAIRN STATION
A cireular design composed of rounded pits.
Straight line markings.
An unfinished emu track with variations in size of the peck marks.
Typical South Australian rock engravings,
PLATE 45
Hill Grange station, looking north.
A weathering, engraved rock surface, Hill Grange station.

Rec. SAL Musi Vor J4, Phare 48

Vu fave vane Wind

Rec. S.A. Meseum Vou. J4 Prharke 44

Rie, SwAL Messen Vou. 14 Phare 49

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS (LEPIDOPTERA
HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)”

PART VIII

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Two new species of Oxycanus are described, O. buluwandji Tindale from Lake Barrine,
Queensland and O. hildae Tindale from the Victorian Alps. The hitherto unknown female
of Trictena argyrosticha Turner is reported from Stanthorpe, Queensland, and some
observations are given on other species of Oxycanus.

REVISION OF THE GHOST MOTHS (LEPIDOPTERA
HOMONEURA, FAMILY HEPIALIDAE)‘’?

PART VIII

By NORMAN B. TINDALE, Sours Avustratian Museum
Plates 46-47

SUMMARY

Two new species of Oxycanus are described, O, buluwandji
Tindale from Lake Barrine, Queensland and O. hildae Tindale from
the Victorian Alps. The hitherto unknown female of Trictena
argyrosticha Turner is reported from Stanthorpe, Queensland, and
some observations are given on other species of Oxycanus.

INTRODUCTION

The present paper describes several new or noteworthy Australian
species belonging to two genera, Oxycanus and Trictena which have
been dealt with in earlier pages of this Revision.

I am indebted again to Mr. C. G. L. Gooding for opportunities
to see some material discussed herein; he has again been good enough
to deposit types in the South Australian Museum collection.

Oxycanus buluwandji sp. nov.
Plate 46, fig. 1

Male. Antennae brown, pectinations rather long, slender, 2,
tapering rather suddenly to tip, each pectination with an apical tuft of
ejliae; head and thorax ochreous with a greyish-green tinge, abdomen
at base brightly ochreous, becoming duller and greenish-tinged towards
apex. Forewings warm brown with bright ochreous patches which
tend to be concentrated in a zig-zag from the termen near forewing tip
to inner margin at one-half, then extending towards base; a series of
small, paired golden yellow spots each ringed with brown tending to
run in lines across the wing, generally parallel to termen, with a rather
greater number concentrated in a subterminal area where the linear
arrangement is rather disturbed; there is also a subterminal series of
semi-Iunate brown spots between each of the veins from the apex to

(1) Part VII of this series was published in these Records, Vol. XIII, pp. 157-197.

664 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

the inner margin. Hindwings ochreous at base, dark brown on distal
half; in life the base of the wings may have had a fugitive pink tinge.
Wings beneath ochreous with (he outer margins darker,

Forewing length 54 mm., expanse 121 mm.

Loe, Queensland: Lake Barrine, 1928, K. J. D. (type, a male,
unique, 1.19112 in S.A. Museum),

This is a large and outstanding member of that group of
Australian species within the genus Oxycanus which centre around
O. beltistus, In these the male genitalia, when obliquely viewed, are
seen to possess a series of spines of equal length along the latus of
the teguinen. This is the seventh species which falls into the group.
In general appearance it is closest to QO. beltistus Turner particularly
in the rather broadly pointed forewings, showing a suggestion of
subfaleation; in markings it seems to be most like O, natas Tindale,
but that species has well rounded fore wing tips.

Except for the rather aberrant O, aedesimus (Turner) from the
Kungella Plateau, Queensland, this is the first species of the genus to
be taken at a point intermediate between the mountains of New Guinea
and the Brisbane district of Queensland. In life it must he a very
striking insect.

When compared with New Guinea species O. buluwandji probably
falls nearest to O. lamsi Tindale, from Mount Goliath, in the form of
the genitalia and in the suggestion of subfaleation of the forewings,
but the peculiar shape of the hindwings of O, tamsi, the different,
shorter antennae, and the distinctive markings set the two apart;
O. tamsi is much the smaller of the two species.

The name chosen is based on the tribal name of the negrito people
who claim Lake Barrine as their territory. Mr. C. G. L. Gooding, in
whose collection T noticed the specimen, has kindly passed the type to
me for preservation in the South Australian Museum colleetion,

Oxycanus rosaceus Tindale

Oxycanus rosaceus Tindale, 1935, Ree, S. Austr. Mus., Adelaide, 5:
306, fig. 33, 82-83.

The only known Victorian specimens of this interesting species
were those taken in various years by Mr. ©. G. LL. Gooding near
Moe, Victoria, the last, oecasion being on 24 April 1944. The restricted
area where they oceurred was cleared of vegetation and ploughed up

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 665

immediately after the 1944 emergences and no further specimens have
been noted in the district. In Mr. Gooding’s opinion the larvae are
external root feeders on a species of Hucalyptus.

Oxycanus diremptus (Walker)
Plate 47, fig. 1
Porina dirempta Walker 1865, List. Lep. Ins. Brit. Mus., 82: 597,
Oxycanus diremptus Tindale 1935, Rec, 8, Austr, Mus,, Adelaide,
5: 289.

Most of the species of the genus Oxycanus tend to be variable in
Wing markings, with a wide range from melanie forms through well-
marked, often silvery-spotted and banded forms to rather highly
decorative paler forms in which fiashes of ochreous and white are
present, O, diremplus is 10 exception in being variable as to markings,
although forms possessing an abundance of silvery while are unusual.
The striking example figured (plate 47, fig. 1) was taken by Mrs.
Margaret Coulson at Moe, Victoria, on 21 April 1951, and is in the
collection of Mr. C. G. L. Gooding.

The specimen has a forewing length of 58 mm. and expanse of
84 mm., being a rather large male specimen but falling within the
normal limits of variation in size, of the species,

The forewing has the costa narrowly chocolate-brown and the
terminal area is a somewhat lighter shade of the same colour. ‘The
discoidal markings are ochreous, narrowly margined with brown, as
are also the more obscure markings between the greatly expanded area
of silvery-white which oceupies the greater part of the forewing; the
anal area is mottled with fine gray scales and hairs. The hindwings
and the underside of wings are as in more normal specimens of the
species, The genitalia in no way differ from the more normal members
of the species. The character of the latus of tegumen clearly indicates
its specifie identity with O. diremptus, In wing pattern it probably
is the extreme development of that form of the species which has been
named QO. diremptus form kershawi (Lucas).

Tn a former paper in these Reeords (11, 1955, pl. 82 f, 8) I depicted
one ol three specimens ol a similar silvery extreme form of the species
Oxycanus sordidus (Ilerrich-Schaeffer) taken at Red Hill, Victoria.

Oxyeanus hildae sp, nov.
Plate 46, fig. 2-3

Male, Antemae yellowish-ochreous, slender, pectinations 2.
Head and thorax pale brown, abdomen pale ochreous fawn, a. little

666, RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

darker towards apex. Forewings subhyaline, pale brown with rather
obscure markings in pale fawn, indistinctly margined with brown;
veins and margins of wings appear darker and contrast with the
yellowish-ochreous of ciliae; base of wings posteriorly clothed in
ochreous yellow hairs, Hindwings subhyaline, pale brown with the
veins margined with pale ochreous yellow, ciliae also ochreous yellow;
base of wings clothed in ochreous yellow hairs, Wings beneath dusky
brown, darker along the veins with termen and portions of veins of
hindwings tinged ochreous.

Forewing length 29 mm., expanse 63 mm,

Female. Antennae yellowish-ochreous, slender, scarcely pectinate.
Head and thorax pale brown, abdomen pale ochreous fawn, Forewings
subhyaline, pale ochreous fawn with brown markings, some of which
show vague traces of a paler centre, veins emphasized by yellow scales,
sometimes bearing patches of darker scales, ciliae ochreous. Hind-
wings subhyaline with traces of same markings as in forewing, veins
strongly margined in yellow, margins and ciliae brightly ochreous;
base of wings with ochreous yellow hairs. Wings beneath dusky
brown, veins emphasized with ochreous towards termen and margins
and ciliae brightly ochreous yellow.

Forewing length 38 mm,, expanse 84 mm.

Loe. Victoria: Jacob Creek (holotype male and allotype female
25 April 1946, collected by C. G. L. Gooding) 1.19113 in 8.A, Museum;
also one specimen from New South Wales: Cathcart (paratype,
1.19114, male, 11 March 1958, collected by N. B. Tindale).

Tt is with pleasure that this species is named as O. hildae after
Mrs. C. G. lL. Gooding who shares with Mr. Gooding such enthusiasm
for the discovery of new and interesting Lepidoptera,

This species, by reason of the possession of a simple arenate latus
of the tegumen, keys to the vicinity of O. perditus Tindale found in
Western Australia. The wing markings of the male are somewhat
similar to those of O. perditus but the species differs in being smaller,
less opaquely clothed in scales and in having the evanescently pink
hairs (which fade in preserved specimens to an ochreous yellow)
confined to the bases of the wings,

The paratype male is slightly smaller (expanse 60 mm.) and the
markings tend to be somewhat more obscure but it is evidently the
same species. The last named example was taken in a mercury vapour
lamp light trap on a night when the 11 p.m, temperature was 53°F.

TINDALE—REVISION OF GHOST MOTHS 667

Trictena argyrosticha Turner
Plate 47, fig. 2

The female of 7. argyrosticha has not previously been described
or figured. I am indebted to Mr. C. G. L. Gooding for an opportunity
to record a very fine example taken by Miss Jean Harslett in April
1949 at Stanthorpe, Queensland.

Female. Antennae ochreous, slender and incipiently tripectinate.
Head, thorax, abdomen and legs pale brown. Forewings brown, costa
ochreous-tinged towards apex, wing covered with scroll-like markings;
a well defined oblique white fascia from apex to My at 2ths, bordered
with dark brown; traces of a discoidal fascia reduced to a single patch
of white scales, a dark brown blotch and some ochreous-tinged scroll-
like lines in the position of the silvery-white fascia of males. Hind-
wings pale brown with the costa narrowly ochreous-tinged.

Forewing length 75 mm., expanse 160 mm.

Loc. Stanthorpe, Queensland (allotype female 1.19115 in South
Australian Museum).

Like the male, the female of this species differs in well marked
fashion from females of the only other known species of the genus,
Trictena argentata (Herrich-Schaeffer). The key based on male
specimens given in a former description (Tindale, Rec. 8. Austr. Mus.,
Adelaide, 4: 1932, 500) will serve, save that the sub-terminal white
band, although it tends to be continuous, as in the male, is rather
wider than the key indicates as usual in the male.

668 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

EXPLANATION OF PLATES

PLATE 46

Fig. 1 Above. Oxycanus bulwwandji Tindale. Holotype male, Lake Barrine, Queensland.
Fig. 2-3 Below. Oxycanus hildae Tindale. Holotype male and allotype female, Jacob Creek,
Victoria.

PLATE 47

Fig. 1 Above. Oxycanus diremptus (Walker). Unusually marked example, Moe, Victoria,
21st April, 1951.

Fig. 2 Below. Trictena argyrosticha Turner. Allotype female, Stanthorpe, Queensland,
April, 1949.

Reo. S.A. Museo Von. 14, Puare 46

To feces qatue BOS |

Rec. S.A. Museum Vou. 14, Pharr

—
~ Fl
med se
sae — son A _ - nth ae
aa i
ee 1 bites

NOTE ON FLINT IMPLEMENTS FOUND NEAR
NIPA, CENTRAL PAPUAN HIGHLANDS

By H. K. BARTLETT

Summary

In September 1960 I paid a short visit to Nipa on the Nenbi River in the Central Papuan
Highlands. (This river is called the Nemb or Nembi by the local people.) The area was
described briefly by the late F. E. Williams in the Annual Report of the Territory of
Papua for 1938-39. Williams wrote about the Wela valley and its inhabitants as “the
grasslanders”.

A small landing strip, suitable only for tiny Cessna aircraft, had been cleared in the dense
wild sugar cane (pit pit) covered valley. Ninety points of rain in 48 hours were sufficient
to close the airstrip.

NOTE ON FLINT IMPLEMENTS FOUND NEAR NIPA,
CENTRAL PAPUAN HIGHLANDS

By H. kK. BARTLETT
Fig. 1-3

In September 1960 I paid a short visit to Nipa on the Nenbi
River in the Central Papuan Highlands. (This river is called the
Nemh or Nembi by the local people.) The area was deseribed briefly
by the late F. EH. Williams in the Annual Report of the Territory of
Papua for 1938-39, Williams wrote abort the Wela valley and its
inhabitants as ‘‘the gragslanders’’.

A small lauding strip, suitable only for tiny Cessna aircratt, had
been cleared in the dense wild sugar cane (pit pit) eovered valley.
Ninety points o! rain in 48 hours were sufficient to close the airstrip.

A Government outpost liad been established a few months before
my arrival and a Methodist missionary and his family were living in
a temporary house near the strip.

The area largely was ‘‘uncontrolled’’, and travel was not
permitted for more than a mile and a quarter beyond the Government
station,

Flint flakes exposed ou the strip attracted my attention. Deep
drains had been dug on both sides of the airstrip, and numerous
flakes could be seen protruding from the walls of the drains at a
depth of three feet. Few of the flints showed signs of secondary
chipping. The primary flakes were sharp enough for general use.

When I had gathered a few flakes, small boys were eager to hunt
for more. Natives informed me that this flint was known as are (or
arer—see I", EH. Williams’ Vocabulary of the Augu language).

Taking a sharp flake I pretended to cut my arm. An old man
nodded vigorously and pointed to his right hip which was coated
generously with pig’s fat and dirt. Taking the stance of a bowman
he shot two imaginary arrows and indicated that he once had two
such arrows in his hip. A small boy spat on his hand and rubbed
the spot, removing the dirt, and revealing two scars.

The old man then took two flint pebbles, and using one as a

hammer, struck off a sharp flake with which he demonstrated how he
had removed the arrow from his flesh.

670 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

The Gold lip pearl shell (Pinctada maxima) is the greatest
treasure of the people. I saw a man engaged delicately in cutting
a breast ornament from a large shell. He used a primary flake of are
to deepen the groove made by long hours of cutting, After three days
there was little appreciable difference in the depth of the groove.

Women and girls displayed rows of cireular keloids between the
breasts, on artis from the shoulders almost to the elbows, on the
thighs, and on the calves of their legs, A piece of skin about the size
of a sixpence, had heen raised to form the keloid. A number of girls
came for treatment for infected euts on the leg. Tt appeared that
this was the last part of their body to be decorated with keloids. A
Mendij boy, who aeted as interpreter, explained that, before the white
men came, women raised keloids by cutting the skin with are, Now
they use razor blades!

Are appeared to be the material in general use where cutting
edves were required, Evidence of its nse was seen in some elaborately
carved arrows, which, | was told, were shot only at ‘special men’’.

Several ‘‘eores’’, similar in shape to the ‘‘horsehoof’’ used by the
Australian aborigines, were found at Puril, an old fighting ground
ahout one and a quarter oiiles from Nipa, and a fine example of a
chopper formed hy extensive secondary flaking was found at the
same site,

Flint pebbles are found in abundance in ereeks and ave plentifully
distributed in the soil,

Comments (by Norman B, Tindale)

The Rev. H. K. Bartlett is an experienced collector of aboriginal
implements and has presented to the South Australian Museum
material from many surface archaeological sites in Australia, His
eyes did not fail him on a brief visit to New Guinea,

The Nipa record adds one to the relatively few reported sites Tor
archaeological implements on the island of New Guinea. It is one
of the first mining places for flaked implements to be recorded and is
of particular interest because the use of primary flakes seems to have
persisted up to the present time.

The three types present among the five significantly reworked
flake implements found by Mr, Bartlett have been figured.

The largest specimen (fig. 1), from Puril, is a uniface cleaver-
like implement worked on a large flake, The secondary working is
concentrated at one end; the original material remains on the upper

BARTLETI—PAPUAN FLINT INSTRUMENTS 671

half of the worked face. Study of the cutting edge shows that at the
angle at which an adzing cut would be effective but at no other, the
stone would have presented an almost flat and level cutting edge
against the wood or other substance being eut. Therefore, reasonably,
it is suspected to have been an adze. Coneentration of the flake sears

= a

Pig. 1-3. Implements from Nenbi River, Papuan Highlands
1, Cleaver-like implement from Puril.
2, Disevidal high-backed implement from Nipa.
3, Long-bladed adze or chisel from Nipa.

implies hafting and if techniques similar to those of Australian
aborigines can be inferred to have been applied the implement had
been re-edged by further flaking while in the haft. The material of
this implement, as of all the implements and flakes from this site, is
a fine-grained gray chert, which may have been deposited from a

672 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

voleanie sonree, since the cortex present on part of this specimen
appears like a voleanic grit. The very acute cutting edge (50° angle)
may suggest that the implement was. used to cut some relatively soft
substance. Both faces of the eutting edge show much silica-polish as
if they had been chopped into a pithy substance such as sago containing
hard fibres, or into stems such as those of sugar cane. ‘Iwo small
flake sears at the eutting edge are injuries sustained after the
implement had been in use for some time and their surfaces lack
the high degree of polish present on the rest of the edge.

The second specimen (fig. 2) is a diseoidal high backed implement
made on a block, The effectively trimmed part of the margin is
confined to less than one-half of the periphery. The original block
had two flakes easually removed fvom the upper surface and there are
traces of a few scars at the opposite end of this surface which probably
were made when the block was broken out; these seem a little more
weathered than the rest of the work suggesting that the block may
have been lying about for some time before being fashioned into its
present form, The second of the three views of this implement shows
the most highly trimmed edge and it is evident that the rather obtuse
eutting margin (of approximately 75° angle) met the work with a
straight edge, I have elsewhere suggested that in Australia imple-
ments like this probably were hafted in the manner of the kod) (kod ja)
axe of the present-day aborigines of South Western Australia,
Objections have been made to this suggestion by those who have not
had opportunities of studying the majority of the snrviving hafted
specimens of kody axes.

There is a second specimen very similar to this high backed
implement in the series from Nipa.

The third specimen (fig. 3) has heen fashioned on a flake strnek
from a prepared platiorm to form a parallel-sided long blade, There
ig an angle of 114° between this platform and the upper or flake surface
of the implement. This has been developed at the end opposite the
striking platform to form a long-bladed adze or chisel, At the angle
of use, if it were hafted as a chisel in the Australian manner, it would
have presented an even and very slightly convex entting edge to the
work, A second example of a small long-bladed chisel or adze is not
quite so parallel-sided but probably was made and used in the same
way as the figured one. Its surface is polished, partly from use and
possibly partly also from rolling in water after being discarded.

BARTLETT—PAPUAN FLINT INSTRUMENTS 673

The collection contains ten other flakes, all without more than
casual secondary trimming. Four of the flakes are semi-discoidal and
thin, three others are stouter, and the rest are nondescript blades;
they range up to 5 cm. in length.

The material from this Nenbi River site has been presented to

the South Australian Museum and is registered under the number
A.54132.

SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GUINEA FROG
HYLELLA WOLTERSTORFFI WERNER

By MICHAEL J. TYLER

Summary

Examination of the holotype of Hylella wolterstorffi Werner has revealed firmisternal
characteristics. The species is therefore transferred from the arciferal Hylidae to the
Microhylid genus Oreophryne. The holotype is redescribed and figured, and its
relationships to other species discussed.

Hylella wolterstorffi Werner (1901) is based on a single specimen collected in New
Guinea by Tappeubeck. The exact type locality is unknown, for the data labels
accompanying the collection in which the specimen was included were either detached or
illegible (Werner, 1901, p. 602).

SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GUINEA FROG
HYLELLA WOLTERSTORFFL WERNER
By MICHAEL J. TYLER
Fig. 1
SUMMARY

Examination of the holotype of Hylella wolterstorfi Werner has
revealed firmisternal characteristics. The species is therefore trans-
ferred lrom the arciferal Hylidae to the Mierohylid genus Oreophryne.
The holotype is redeseribed and figured, and its relationships to other
species discussed.

INTRODUCTION

Tylella wolterstorfi Werner (1901) is based on a single specimen
collected in New Guinea by Tappeubeck. The exact type locality is
unknown, for the data labels accompanying the collection in which the
specimen was included were either detached or illegible (Werner, 1901,
p. 602),

After several authors had expressed the opinion that Hylella
Reinhardt and Lutken was a polyphyletic assemblage, wolterstorfi and
the other New Guinea members of the genus were referred to Hyla
by Barbour (1912). Van Kampen (1919) suggested that wolterstorffi
might be based on a juvenile Tyla arfakiana Peters and Doria, but
when revising the Indo-Australian members of the genus (1923)
continued to regard the former a valid species.

Through the kindness of Dr. Gunther Peters of the Institut fiir
Spezielle Zoologie und Zoologisches Museum, Berlin, the author had
the opportunity of examining the holotype. As the shoulder girdle
was found to be firmisternal, the presence of wolterstorfi in a
Hylid genus cannot be maintained. The species has therefore been
redeseribed and figured, and its systematic position revised.

DESCRIPTION OF THE HOLOTYPE

The presence of a firmisternal girdle with reduced development
of the clavicles, the absence of vomerine teeth and maxillary teeth,
and the presence of T-shaped terminal phalanges indicate that
wolterstorffi is very closely allied to the Microhylid species Oreophryne
(Hylella) brachypus (Werner), and should also be referred to
Oreophryne.

676 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Oreophryne wolterstorffi (Werner)

Holotype: Z.M. 16853. One adult specimen collected in New Guinea
by Tappeubeck.

There are neither maxillary nor vomerine teeth. The tongue is
oval, entire and half free behind, and there is a single, denticulate
pre-pharyngeal ridge. The eye is prominent, its diameter greater than
the distance separating it from the naris; the snout is truncate. The
tympanum is indistinct, with a horizontal diameter which is slightly
more than one-third of the eye diameter.

Fig. 1. Lower surface of hand and foot of Oreophryne wolterstorff.

The shoulder girdle was found to be partially dissected, and only
those portions of the procoracoids separating the eclavicles from the
eoracoids are now present. The clavicles are in such close proximity
to the coracoids that it is considered unlikely that the procoracoids
could have extended as far as the secapulae, The posterior margin
of each clavicle is obtusely angled, and the anterior margin evenly
rounded, The clavicle may also be divided into two portions; the
proximal portion subtends to the coracoid at an angle of approximately
40°, and the distal half lies parallel to the coracoid.

TYLER—NEW GUINEA FROG 677
The hand is unwebbed, and the fingers bear large, truncated discs
(lig. 1). There is a short basal web on the foot, and very narrow
fringes to the toes. The toe dises are very much smaller than the
finger dises (fig. 1), The terminal phalanges are T-shaped.

Werner described the colouration of the specimen as follows:
“Whitish brown aboye, with grey blotches. A dark brown stripe
stretches from the posterior edge of the eye above the tympanum
towards the back; this stripe does not extend over the head, Anterior
part of head to middle of eyes light-coloured, posterior part of head
dark brown (both of these colours being distinet and clearly divided),
Limbs indistinetly flecked with brown, Belly and thighs marbled with
white and light brown.”’

The holotype is now a very pale brown, and few of the markings
reported by Werner can be distinguished.

Dimensions: Snout to vent length 22.5 mm.; tibia length 9.7 mm. ;
head breadth 7.4 mm.; head length 7.1 mm.; eye diameter 3.1 nm.,;
éye to nuris distance 1.8 mm.; internarial span 1.6 mm.; tympanum
diameter 0.8 mm.

RELATIONSHIPS

It is possible to divide Oreophryne into two groups according to
the extent of the development of the procoracoids (Parker, 1934), In
one group the procoracoids extend to the seapulae, and in the other
the distal half or one-third is replaced by a slender ligament. In view
of the large number of species currently comprising the genus, this
separation is a convenient taxonomic characteristic, It is therefore
extremely unfortunate to find that the procoracoids of wolterstorffi
have been destroyed.

The presence of webbing between the toes is shared by relatively
few species. Oreaophryne kampeni Parker has one-third webbed toes,
but differs from wolterstorfi in having the third toe shorter than the
fifth. Oreophryne erncifera (Yan Kampen) and O, albopunctata (Yan
Kampen) have similar webbing, but the third and fifth toes are of
equal length, The tympamm of O. anthonyi (Boulenger) is half the
diameter of the eye (approximately one-quarter in wolterstorfi),
whilst O, biroi (Méhely) has very much larger finger dises,

Oreophryne brevicrus Zweifel may be distinguished from
wolterstorffi by smaller finger discs and a slightly protruding snont.
Oreophryne idenburgensis Zweifel has a much larger tympanum but

678 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

exhibits many characteristics common to wolterstorffi, as does O.
brachypus (Werner) which is distinguished by more extensive toe
webbing.

DISCUSSION

The evidence supporting the recognition of many Oreophryne
species frequently consists of differences in the diameter of finger and
toe dises, and similar minor features. Although it is sometimes
possible to demonstrate the statistical significances of such differences
in freshly preserved material, it is extremely difficult to make accurate
comparisons when the specimens are old and dehydrated.

Although a revision of the genus may reveal that wolterstorfi is
synonymous with one of the many species currently recognized, it is
clearly distinct from those which take priority by date of publication,
and should therefore remain a valid name.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
I wish to acknowledge my gratitude to Dr. Gunther Peters who
made it possible for me to examine the holotype, and to Professor
R. F. Whelan of the University of Adelaide for helpful suggestions
during the preparation of the manuscript.

REFERENCES

Barbour, T., 1912: A contribution to the zoogeography of the East
Indian Islands. Mem. Mus. comp. Zool., Harvard 44(1):
1-203.

Parker, H. W., 1934: A monograph of the frogs of the family Micro-
hylidae. London. viii + 208 pp.

Van Kampen, P. N., 1919: Die amphibienfauna von Neu-Guinea.
Bijdr. Dierck., Amsterdam 21(1): 51-56.

1923: Amphibians of the Indo-Australian Archipelago.
EK. J. Brill Ltd., Leiden, 304 pp.

Werner, F., 1901: Ueber reptilien und batrachier aus Ecuador und
Neu-Guinea. II Reptilien und Batrachier aus Deutseh-
Neu-Guinea. Verhandl. Zool. bot. Gesell. Wien, 51:
602-614,

PIGMY RIGHT WHALE (CAPEREA MARGINATA)
IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN WATERS, PART 2

By THE LATE HERBERT M. HALE, HONORARY ASSOCIATE,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

Skeletal parts of four of seven Pigmy Right Whales stranded on South Australian coasts
are discussed in some detail; three are of juveniles, one of an old adult. Body
measurements of one young male are given.

The skull of an old example, compared to that of juveniles about nine feet in length,
exhibits considerable growth changes. In all material in hand the length of the skull is
approximately one-fourth of the length, or estimated length, of the entire skeleton.

PIGMY RIGHT WHALE (CAPEREA MARGINATA) IN SOUTH
AUSTRALIAN WATERS, PART 2‘

By tHe Large HERBERT M. HALE, Honorary Assocratn,
Sourn Austrauian Museum

Plate 48 and text fig. 1-4

SUMMARY

Skeletal parts of four of seven Pigmy Right Whales stranded on
South Australian coasts are diseussed in some detail; three are of
juveniles, one of an old adult. Body measurements of one young male
are given.

The skull of an old example, compared to that of juveniles about
nine feet in length, exhibits considerable growth changes. In all
material in hand the length of the skull is approximately one-fourth
of the length, or estimated length, of the entire skeleton.

INTRODUCTION

The known strandings of Caperea on South Australian coasts
occurred in a restricted area bounded by the north coast of Kangaroo
{sland and the southern part of Eyre Peninsula. Also, at Victor
Harbour, near the western end of Encounter Bay, and not far from
Kangaroo Island, one juvenile became fouled in a fishing net in shallow
inshore water. The localities are adjacent to, or at, the entrances to
Spencer Gulf and Gulf St. Vincent. Although a good number of whales
of other species have been seen in these gulls, or have come ashore,
there is to date no record of the Pigmy Right Whale travelling north
into them, or coming to grief in the shoals there as have many other
whales.

Seven definite records of Caperea in South Australia are now
available; two are from the north coast of Kangaroo Island, the one
accidentally netted at Vietor Harbour, three from Port Lincoln Bay,
on the western side of the wide entrance to Spencer Gulf (south-
eastern coast of Kyre Peninsula) and one from Coffin Bay on the
west coast of the Peninsula, opposite to, and only 30 miles from, Port
Lincoln, which is one of South Anstralia’s foremost fishing ports,
situated on Boston Bay, immediately north of Port Lincoln Bay.

(1) Part 1, see Records South Aust. Mus., iv, 1931, pp. 314-319, fig. 4.

680 RECORDS OF THE $.A, MUSEUM

‘he last example to be observed was an adult female which eame
ashore on August 16, 1960, on mud flats near ‘*Tulka’’ (referred to
below) in Port Lincoln Bay, in an advanced stage of decomposition,
Unfortunately, because of urgent commitments, this specimen could
not be secured at the time, and subsequently if disappeared.

On July 7, 1960, a Caperea accompanied by its calf was seen in
Port Lincoln Bay and it seems probable that the female was the one
stranded five weeks later.

Cuiler (1961, p, 297) records a preguant lemale stranded on a
Tasmanian const towards the end of June, 1961.

Some vears azo the writer prepared a popular article, published
in country newspapers, detailing the characters by which whales,
particularly small and insufficiently known species, tay be recognized.
Following this, and the 1960 stranding, officers of the Fisheries and
Game Department at Port Lincoln stated that it is not uncommon for
Pigmy Right Whales to appear in ‘‘Proper Bay’’ (the local name for
Port Linco Bay) during the winter and that from time to time several
had been stranded near **Tulka’? but had not been reported.

Port Lincoln Bay shoals towards its western end, where extensive
mud flats ure exposed at low tide. Whales occasionally come ashore
on these flats, particularly in the vieinity of ‘Tulka’’, a homestead at
the south-western part of the Bay and eight miles from Port Lincoln
town. ‘he same thing occurs in Coffin Bay,

J. H, Tlamilton (1952, p, 2) suggests that Byron Sound in the
West Falkland Island may act as a ‘‘sort of trap’’ and ‘‘that panic
at finding themselves in narrow and shoaling waters may have resulted
in the stranding of these whales’’, viz, Globicephala, Physeter,
Orcinus, Balaenoplera and the Pigmy Right Whale, This pertinent
suggestion might well apply to the bays of southern Eyre Peninsula,
while the Kangaroo Island strandings of Caperea occurred in shoal
waters partly enclosed by a long sand bank loeally known as
“The Spit’’.

An eighth record is afforded by a tympanie bone recorded by
Zeitz (1890, p. 8) who stated, after recording the occurrence ol the
juvenile from Victor Harbour ‘‘besides whieh there is an ear bone
from the former locality’. This bone has not yet been located in the
Museum collections, but the identification is assumed to be correct as
Zeitz had the advantage of direct comparison with the tympanics of
three other skulls,

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 631

MATERIAL IN SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

The specimens housed in the Museum, dealt with herein and in
Hale, 1931, are as follows:

M.1593. Sex unknown, Mounted skeleton with some bones
missing. Brownlow, north-east coast of Kangaroo Island.
Stranded October 21, 1884.

M.2966. Young male. Disarticulated skeleton and _ baleen.
Victor Harbour. Entangled in fisherman’s net. September
13, 1887.

M.2967, Young male. Plaster east of head. Point Marsden,
north-eastern coast of Kangaroo Island. Stranded October
21, 1889.

M.5743. Juvenile, sex unknown, Skull and part skeleton. South-
western end of Port Lincoln Bay. Stranded prior to 1948,
M.6110. Young male. Disarticulated skeleton. South-western

end end of Port Lincoln Bay. Stranded December 26, 1955,

M.G111. Adult, sex unknown, Coffin Bay. Stranded about 1950.

M.1593. Brownlow, Kangaroo Island

Neobalaena margmata Hale, 1931, p. 314.

The artieulated skeleton previously briefly described by me is that
of one of **three individuals in the flesh . . . recetyved at the Museum’’
(Zeitz, 1890, p. 8). The skeleton now hangs in a position where it is
more easily accessible than before. In 1931 the vertebral counts was
given as cervical, 7; thoracic, 17; lumbar, 3; caudal, 14. In view of the
faet that the sternum, first chevron and bones of the left limb are
missing, it is probable that a seventeenth short and slender pair of.
ribs were also lost through careless maceration, Im such ease the
thoracics number 18 and the lumbars 2, an attachment for the first
and missing chevron being present posteriorly on the centrum of the
second lumbar,

This Kangaroo Island example was about 16 feet in length.

The skull of this example is in general as shown in Beddard’s
firures (1908, pl. VII-TX), with the vertex not much posterior to the
nasal bones.

M.2966. Victor Harbour, young male
Neobalaena marginata Hale, 1931, p. 315, fig. 1.

Skull 70 cm. in length (see table 1). A specimen nine feet in body
length.

682 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Shull. Viewed from the side the supraoccipital rises in the
posterior half to form a rounded elevation, so that the vertex of the
skull is well behind the middle of the length of the supraoeetpital, In
{ront of the tumidity the contour is concave, with a median longitudinal
ridge extending from the anterior end of the supraoecipital to the
vertex, About 2 om. anterior to cach oceipital condyle there is a well
marked low elevation, 3-4 em, in diameter,

The nasals, where exposed, are symmetrical, the inner faces fused
ventrally but separated above by a deep groove for the whole length
of the bones, including the anterior ends.

Vertebrae. in my first record of this example [ stated that the
epiphyses are “not, or not completely, anchylosed’’, In fact, as far
as can be made out, the epiphyses are all free but several show traces
af a composition which had been used to fasten them to the centra,

The cervicals are fused but are not thoroughly coalesced. The
posterolateral portions of (he neural arches of the last two are
incompletely anchylosed while between the centra of five to six there
is on the left side a slit through which may he seen the edges of the
remnants of the epiphyses. Again, the centra of the sixth and seventh
are completely fused only in the ventro-lateral parts of the lett side,
while fusion has begun on the right side in the same position; other-
wise the centra are narrowly separated and between them can be seen
the remains of the two epiphyses; the upper portions of these last,
comprising the dursal halves of the epiphyses, are fused ventrally,
while below the visible lateral edves of the lower parts of the epiphyses
are anchylosed, The cervical mass is wider than high (165: 130) ;
(he combined dorsal processes are equal in depth to the neural canal,
with the contour of the upper edge convex.

The first thoracic, as in the other thoracies, has the neural arch
complete and has a short dorsal process, rounded apically and sub-
triangular when viewed from the side; the neural canal is very slightly
deeper than wide, its depth less than one-third the total height of the
vertebra (of, M.5793, ete.).

In the second to sixth thoracies the neural canal is deeper than
wide (ef. M.5753); the dorsal process of the third is wide, little more
than one-third of the total depth of the vertebra, with subparallel
sides, and the height less than one and one-third times the greatest
width (48:38),

The fourth to fifteenth thoracies haye the dorsal process longer
and wider, dilated towards the distal end which is subtruncate; the

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 683

tenth has a dorsal process which is one-half the total height of the
vertebra, and with its greatest width much less than half its height
(54: 80).

The neural canal becomes an open groove on the seventh caudal.
Ribs. See table 2.
Sternum. See fig. 1.

Remarks. It will be noted in table 1 that there is less difference
between the overall and condylobasal lengths of the skull of the Victor
Harbour male than that of other skulls described herein; this is due
to the lesser backward prolongation of the exoccipitals, ete.

Fig. 1-2. Ventral side of sterna of Caperea, from specimens nine and ten feet in body
Jength (x 56).

M.2967. Point Marsden, Kangaroo Island.

Neobalaena marginata Beddard, 1903, p. 107; Hale, 1931, p. 316,
fig. 2 and 3.

First five cervicals completely fused; neural arches and centra of
sixth and seventh partly free. Ipiphyses of vertebrae not fused with
centra, Seventeen pairs of ribs (vide Beddard). Young male, almost
11 feet in length (vide Hale following Stirling’s unpublished notes).

Skeleton in Cambridge University Museum. Plaster cast of head
in South Australian Museum.

684 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

M.5753. Port Lincoln Bay. Sex unknown.

Skull 67 em. in length (see table 1).

A young example stranded prior to 1948; judging by the length
of the skull the total body length would have been no greater than that
of the Victor Harbour young male (M,2966 herein) previously
recorded (Hale, 1931, pp. 315-316, fig. 1, and Davies and Guiler, 1957,
pp. 58-582.)

The following bones of specimen M.5753 were subsequently
brought to the Museum by Mr. G. Cramer.

Vertax

Fig. 3-4, Skulls of Caperea; 3, 670 mm., and 4, 1,575 mm,, in overall length
(scales very disproportionate).

Material. Skull, with squamosal and exoccipital of one side
missing; rami of lower jaw with distal portions missing. There were
seventeen pairs of ribs but in the first, sixth to eighth and fourteenth
only one of the pair was recovered. Cervical vertebra; eleven
thoracies, only one to four in sequence; six of the caudals, the first
five in sequence; a few chevrons.

Skull. Fig. 3. As in the Victor Harbour young male (M.2966),
the greatest height occurs in the posterior half of the supraoccipital,
where there is a similar marked rounded hump at the level of the

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 685

postero-lateral angles of the frontal; anterior to this the supra-
occipital is shallowly concave, with the median longitudinal ridge
short and becoming obsoleseent well in front of the abovementioned
tumidity. This supraoccipital hump rises above the dorso-lateral edges
of the supraoecipital when the skull is viewed from the side. There
is also a small and low dorsal tumidity in front of, and about 2 em.
from, each vecipital condyle.

Nasiils, where exposed, symmetrical, completely fused. the junetion
represented by a shallow {rroove which does not reach the anterior ends.

Vertebrac. EXpiphyses are completely free on the posterior face
of the centrum of the last cervical and on both anterior and posterior
laees of all other vertebrae available,

All cervicala are fused into a solid mass excepting that anehylosis
is asyminetrically not fully complete in the lateral parts of the
posterior neural arches, The mass is nearly ball as wide again as
deep (195:135) and the combine! dorsal processes are low, subequal
in depth to the neural canal, and in profile gently convex, highest at
anterior third of length.

The first thoracic has the neural arch complete, with a short
rounded dorsal process; the depth of the subtriangular canal is equal
to one-third of the greatest height of the vertebra and is distinetly
wider than deep. In the second thoracie the neural arches are
separated dorsally (3 to 4 mm,), The third and fourth have the
neural canal a little wider than deep; the dorsal process of the third
is narrow and tapering to the apex; it is approximately one-third the
depth of the vertebra and is about twice as high as its greatest width;
that of the fourth is longer and wider, rounded on upper edge, The
thoracic presnmed to be the tenth has the dorsal spine with upper
inirgin semicireular, the sides subparallel, and with greatest width
less than half its height (45:83); as with the other available thoracics
this process is not at all constrieted in the proximal half, and is equal
to about one-half the total depth of the vertebra; the neural canal has
become smaller than in the preceding vertebrae and is as wide as deep.

Ribs. See table 2, The first is less dilated at the distal end than
in older examples and also in one of the first pair in M2966, This
may be dne to erosion during maceration, or, possibly, the first ribs
in the young are not. necessarily symmetrical,

Scapulae. Deeper than in M.2966 and with acromion wider and
coracoid about twice as long.

686 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Remarks. Apart from the scapulae the most apparent differences
from the skeleton of the Victor Harbour young male, M.2966, which
is of comparable size, are the shorter anterior dorsal carina on the
supraoccipital, the completely fused nasal bones, and the larger
vertebrae in relation to the skull length, with the dorsal processes of
the thoracics dissimilar in shape; there is also some variation in the
ribs (see table 2).

M.6110. Port Lincoln Bay. Young male.

Skull 84 em. in total length (see table 1). A juvenile 10 feet in
body length, collected by members of the Museum staff.

This example was noticed swimming sluggishly on or about
December 25, 1955; it was stranded on December 26 near ‘“Tulka’’,
8 miles south of Port Lincoln, and was then photographed by Mr.
Howard W. Dorward and Mr. ©. L. Gill (see plate 48); these, as in
the other photographs published by me in 1931, show the white band
along the upper jaw and above the baleen, referred to by Davies and
Guiler (1957, p. 581).

A fisheries inspector, Mr. D. E. Barnes, informed us of the
stranding and the specimen was ‘‘fleshed’’ on the spot by two members
of the Museum staff on January 6, 1956. It was then noted that the
unfortunate creature had been peppered with bullets from a small
calibre rifle; the specimen by this time was considerably decomposed,
so no colour notes were possible.

Material. Complete skeleton, but with dorsal processes of six

thoracics damaged.
Measurements in the flesh.

Total length, in a straight line, to middle of tail flukes .. .. 38,050
Tip of snout to eye .. 6. se ee ee ee we te te ee ee te te ee 685
Tip of snout to genital slit .- +. 61 ee ee ee te te te es ee 2,140
Tip of snout to origin of dorsal fin... -. ee se se ee nese 2,230
Tip of snout to axilla .. ee ee ee ee ee ee ee re ee te ee ee 1,070
Length of eye 1. 66 ce we oe ee be be be ee ee te ee re ee 40
Length of gape .. 2. ee ee re ee ee te ee te te te te tee 610
Length of dorsal fin (approximately) .. -- ++ e+ s+ se tess 155
Height of dorsal fin .. 6. ee ee ee ee be te re te ne eens 155
Greatest length of pectoral limb .. «+ ++ ee ee ee te te sete 305

Width of caudal fin .. .. -

The above measurements were secured by the collectors, Messrs.

G. F. Gross and A. Rau. It was noted that the caudal fin had a
central notch.

Skull (see table 1). The supraoccipital is elevated in the posterior

half but distinctly less so than in the two smaller examples (M.2966

and 5753). Also, the median dorsal ridge is conspicuous, almost

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 687

continuous, fading out about three inches before the anterior end of
the bone and not quite reaching the foramen magnum. The anterior
part of the supraoccipital, in front of the low dorsal hump, is more
elevated than in that of the skulls of the two young about nine feet in
length. The dorso-lateral occipital edges are strongly produced, not
evenly curved as in the smaller skulls, but sinnous and slightly
upturned at about the middle of their length. The low dorsal
tumidities in front of the condyles are still apparent.

The exposed parts of the nasals are fused but the dorsal groove
is rather wide and deep, No suture is apparent between the fused
basihyal and thryohyals,

Veriebrae, Cervical, 7; thoracie, 18; lumbar, 2; caudal, 15;
ehevrons, 4,

The cervicals are fused together but net completely so; the lateral
processes of the last five are partly free on both sides while the eentra
of the sixth and seventh are defined by a pair of very short lateral
slits, inside which may be seen, in each, remnants of the two epiphyses ;
ventrally there is a short space between the sixth and seventh, again
with the fused remains of a pair of epiphyses. The greatest width,
across the lateral processes of the first cervieal, is much greater than
the height (202: 142) and the combined dorsal processes, which slope
forwards, are subequal to the depth of the distinctly wider than deep
neural canal.

Kpiphyses are completely free on the last cervical (posterior) and
all other vertebrae, both fore and aft.

The first thoracic has the neural arch complete, the distally
rounded dorsal process one-filth the total height of the vertebra and
the neural canal wider than high, In the second the width of the canal
is subequal to the height, iu the remaining thoracics it is higher than
wide. The dorsal process of the third to eleventh thoracies are broad,
slightly dilated and rounded at distal ends,

In the eaudals the neural canal becomes a short open groove on
the eighth,

Ribs (see table 2). The first rib, relatively, is more expanded than
in other young examples examined, inclnding that of the mounted
specitmen M.1593, and also in this rib as illustrated by Beddard (1903,
pl. IX, fig. 6). Its length is less than two and one-half times the
distal width, and its breadth distally exceeds the greatest width of any
of the other ribs.

688 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Sternum. Fig. 2. Irregularly subcordate, longer than wide,
coneave above for anterior three-fourths of length and with well
developed, elongate and asymmetrical articular facets for attachment
of first ribs.

Scapulae, As shown by Beddard (1903, plate VT) but with upper
edges not af all sinuons, but evenly curved,

Remarks. The photographs reproduced on pl. 48 herein show
the ‘*bowhead’’ character referred to by Davies and Guiler (1957,
p. 580, fig. 1).

M.6111. Coffin Bay, Eyre Peninsula, Sex unknown

Skull, 157.5 em. in total length (see table 1). Part skeleton of a
fully adult example collected by members of the Museum Staff.

Material, Skull and mandibles. Vertebrae: cervical, 7 and 30
other vertebrae. In the ubsence of a complete suite of ribs it is
assumed that 18 are thoracic, 2 lumbar, and caudal 10 plus ? Scapulae
are available but the sternum, pelvie bones and chevrons are missing.

he bones noted above, before recovery for the Museum, were
atanding under a tree on the property of the late Mr, J. Mortlock, A
fisherman who knew of the stranding of this large example stated that
it came ashore about 1950. Mr. J. G@. Haggarty, then caretaker of the
Mortlock station, later supplied a photograph of the animal secured
soon after it was stranded and this shows the ‘*bowhead’’ as illustrated
by Davies and Quiler (1957, fig, 1). In the paper of the last named
authors the locality, us supplied by me, is given as Port Lincoln, but
subsequent enquiry revealed that the animal was stranded on a beach
at the entrance of Coffin Bay, in the south-western coast of Myre
Peninsula and opposite to Port Tineoln on the south-eastern coast.
A Sperm Whale, 42 feet in length came ashore here in late May, 1956,
and from reports of a late officer of the Fisheries and Game Depart-
ment, then stationed at Port Lincoln, Coffin Bay also is a ‘‘trap”
for whales.

he length of the skull, as supplied to me (4 feet, 74 inches) and
sent, to Dr, Guiler, is obviously the length from the anterior margin
of the foramen magnum to the tip of the rostrum whereas the overall
length is 1,575 mm. Thus it is apparently the largest skull known to
date and it would seem that the body length of the animal may have
been somewhat in excess of 21 feet. The vertebrae indicate that it
was an old individual.

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 689

Tt is possible that there are other discrepancies in the lengths of
skulls given by Davies and Guiler, as for example in the Kawau Island
skull, in which the skull length was taken from ‘snout to occipital
foramen”’,

Skull (see table 1). There is a marked difference in the dorsal
profile with that of examples with skull 67 em. to 70 em, in total
length. The dorsal ridge is strongly elevated for almost the anterior
two-thirds of the supraoccipital and the vertex occurs immediately
behind the nasals.

The sharp-edged occipital expansions are much more prominent
than in smaller skulls, and for the posterior two-thirds of their length
are inclined upwards instead of slightly downwards, so that, viewed
from the side, the posterior part of the profile of the supraoeeipital is
nit visible, as if is in the small skulls.

Mor about one-third of the length of the supraoecipital the dorsum
is flattened and the pair of bosses immediately above the condyles are
obsolescent.

Vertebrae, The epiphyses are thoroughly fused, and incorporated
with, the centra of all vertebrae available.

The cervicals are fused into a solid mass excepting for the usual
elongate foramina between the lateral processes. There are traces
of the fusion of the dorsal processes in the last three, most distinct
in the sixth-seventh, The combined dorsal processes are more
elevated than in the young and the mass is relatively wider (420; 270);
the width in relation to the height remains approximately the same,
however, the greater elevation of the dorsal processes having been
accompanied by a proportional widening of the lateral processes af
the mass.

There is a prominent facet on each side of the dorsal processes of
the first and second vertebrae, oval in shape, and 30 to 40 mm, in depth,

The first thoracic, as in the other dorsal vertebrae, has the neural
arch complete; the neural canal is deeper than wide. The canal is
markedly deeper than wide in the second, and is deeper than wide in
all of the other thoracies. The dorsal processes, apart from that of
the cervieals, are much as figured by Beddard but from the eighth
backwards the apex is rounded, allowing for the fact that the seventh
is broken; in any case, this is a variable feature, The lateral processes
are relatively wider than in younger examples, particularly noticeable
from the tenth backwards.

690 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

In the eighth caudal the neural canal becomes a very short open
groove.

Ribs (see table 2). Only eight pairs, third to eighth, eleventh and
fourteenth, are amongst the total of twenty-two individual ribs in
hand; none is available posterior to the fourteenth. The eleventh to
fourteenth are damaged proximally and distally so that their lengths
given in the table must be taken as approximate.

There is a marked thickening of all ribs, particularly apparent in
the posterior ones as compared to the condition of the very young
in which the dilation is almost wafer-like as the hinder edge is
approached.

Scapulae. Much as figured by Beddard (1903, pl. VII). The
dimensions are: width 53 em.; depth 30 em.

SKULLS

Taste 1. Turere Juventces, 9 FEET TO 10 Freer in Lenatu, AND ONE ADULT, Cc, 21 Freer

Registration Number... . M.2966 M.5753 M.6110 M.6111
Measurements mm. |PerCent}mm. |PerCent|mm. |PerCent|mm. /Per Cent
fstnaeetoals es ARSEined Rae
Overall length .........2--.04 700 | 100-07 | 670 | 104-68 | 840 | 103-70 | 1,575 | 105-70
Condylobasal length ........-. 695 | 100-0 640 | 100-0 810 | 100-0 | 1,490} 100-0

Length from anterior margin of
foramen magnum to end of
TOStHrUM ...0eee cece cece eens 655 94-2 565 | 88-2 760 | 93-8 |1,420) 95:3

Length of supraoccipital from
anterior margin of foramen

MAGNUM cere eee eseveee 265 38-1 290 | 45-3 315 38-8 570 | 38-2
Anterior end of supraoccipital to

tip of rostrum ...........005 390 | 656-4 275 | 42-9 445 54-9 850 | 57-0
Postero-lateral processes of

maxillae to end of rostrum... | 475 | 68-2 430 | 67-1 570 70:3 |1,105 | 741

Postero-lateral processes of
maxillae to level of posterior of
exoccipitals .............46- 225 32:3 240 37-5 270 33-3 470 31-6

Depth of maxilla at level of
anterior margin of supra-

occipital ... 0.6... cece ee eee 98 14-1 100 15-6 98 12-1 195 13-0
Greatest height of skull ....... 205 29-5 205 32-0 210 25-9 470 31-5
Width between squamosals .... 370 53-5 -— — 410 50-6 770 51-6
Width between postero-lateral

processes of frontals ........ 330 47-4 365 57-0 380 46-9 750 50-3
Width of frontal at concave outer

MATPIN 2... eee eee eee eee 95 13-6 103 16-0 115 14-2 180 12-0
Width across occipital condyles. 115 16-5 125 17-9 120 14-8 205 13-7
Length of mandible .......... 550 79-1 — _— 680 83-9 | 1,280 85-9
Depth of mandible at coronoid. . 75 10-7 15 11-7 85 10-4 185 12-4
Depth of mandible at middle of

length 1... .ccee cece erences 60 8-6 80 12-5 80 9-8 225 15-1

M.2966 and M.6110 are young males ; the sex of the other two is unknown.

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE 691

M2966 and M.6110 are young males; the sex of the other two is
unknown,

In these young males, where the length of the animal is known
(nine and ten feet) the skull is less than four fimes in the total length
of the skeleton, while in a Kangaroo Island speciinen about 16 feet
in length (M,1593 herein), it is only slightly more than four times in
the length. Iv Beddard’s figure of a skeleton a little more than 13 feet
in length, the proportions are shown as four and one-half times in
the total length, although this author states ‘‘The proportions of the
length of the skull to that of the entire skeleton including the skull
are as 1:5%"’ (Beddard, 1903, p. 101, and pl. VIT).

All length measurements, and the heights of the skulls, in table 1
are parallel to, and at right angles to, a median base-lme, taken from
tlie level of the ventral angles of the squamosals to the anterior ends
of the premaxillae. The length along the curve of the arched profile,
obviously, ig In excess ol that of the base-line, but not to the extent
one would expect from the appearance of the skulls oriented as noted
above, There ig some variation in the degree of arching. The
percentage of the base-line distance from the foramen magnum to the
end of the rostrum, as against measurements from the same points
along the curve of the dorswm is 105 (M,2966), 114 (M.5753), 108
(M.6110) and 110 (M.6111), In the young male ten feet in length
(M.6110) the skull is more depressed than in the others and has the
supraoceipital considerably longer in proportion to the condylobasal
length, although less convex dorsally. The median length of the
dorsal eurve of the two smallest skulls is affected by the prominent
posterior supraoccipital hump, which ig much lower in M,6110 and
absent in the adult,

Tn the skull of M.2966 the distance between the occipital condyles
and the posterior level of the exoecipitals is very short, only one-sixth
of that im the other two small skulls,

The relative depth of the maxillae, measured from the point where
they reach the premaxillae at the anterior end of the supraoceipital,
is variable, and may differ in the right and left bones, in which ease
the zreater depth is cited in the table,

Measurements alone do not demonstrate adequately the
differences between the largest skull and that of juveniles, A review
of the limited number of South Anstralian skulls available shows that
the posterior supraoceipital hump, the rounded summit of which 1s
the vertex, is a character of the very young. This tumidity becomes

Ag2 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

far less prominent after a body length of ten feet is attaimed
(Beddard’s 1903 figures show little indication of it beyond a slight
elevation of the median dorsal ridge anterior to the ‘‘O'’ on his fig. 1
on pl. LX). In the larger of the Kangaroo Island specimens, with the
skeleton almost 16 feet in length, the vertex is not far back from the
unterior end of the supraoceipital and the carina behind this is
continuous, slightly convave and rising very little at the site of the
juvenile rounded hump,

In the skull, over 157 em. in length, of the old adult the posterior
part of the otherwise strong median dorsal ridge is flattened, with no
indication of an elevation—in faet the carina begins to curve upwards
at a point about one-third of its length from the foramen magnum;
thenee it is but little curved in profile and is slightly concave not far
posterior to the short gentle convexity before the anterior end of the
supravecipital,

The sharp-edged lateral occipital ridges also alter with growth.
The skulls 67 em, and 70 em, in overall length have their margins evenly
curved and very slightly bent down excepting near the anterior ends.
In the male ten feet in length, with 84 em. skull, the lateral ridges shaw
indications of uptnrning at about the middle of their length, The
123 em. skall of the Kangaroo Island specimen exhibits a more
apparent wpturn of the ridges, particularly in the exoecipital-
aquamosal part, so that in sideview the median dorsal carina is hidden
at the extreme posterior end (see also Oliver, 1922, pl. 1), In the
Old adult, with skull 157.5 em. in length, the uprising of this lateral
ridge hides the posterior half of the supraoeceipital when the skull is
viewed from the side (ef, fig, 3 and 4 herein), Tt must be noted that
the last-named drawings are from photographs taken to show the
dorsal contour of the skull: therefore there is some distortion of the
lateral parts, particularly apparent in the frontal and squamosal.

The mid-length depth of the mandibles increases, relatively, with
age, but on the other hand the bulla of the ear bones of the young is not
only smoother, but proportionately strikingly larger, than in the adult
or even in an example 16 feet, in length.

In the last pair of ribs the width-length is taken from the longer
uf the pair, The ribs of the young male M.6110 were tagged in
sequence as they were removed from the carcass.

Beginning with the eighth pair the widening of the posterior riba,
so marked in all but the last, becomes apparent; the length of the
ribs in table 2 is taken in a straight line from head to distal end,

693

HALE—PIGMY RIGHT WHALE

ms a — | OL 09% 61 | 68 08% o% ax =

a os — | OI Ore ce | G8r 0ze Ob | SL G0%

oF = — | O81 olt oo | Lt Oth 09 | 6-01 raK4

9-81 OL OF | L-€T OF | 29 | TSI OSt cg | LTT ore
LSI 008 ost | T-eI C6h gg | SOL | Gh | 89 | OST ale
LFI 0g8 OZ1 | OBI 008 09 | BPI Ott | 09 | L3r OIF
16 006 og | nit | ots 09 | S€I coro | 9-01 Bot
— | = — | Ter OF 09 | 6€T C68 ce | GTI 91h

= = — | 36 CSF cp | BI GRe ce | 0-01 Ott

6-9 018 eo | bb OSF ce | OOT O88 ge | LS 868

‘ON "893

IINGY ANQ GNV SATINGANL AAA, dO SHIY WOIUaLSOg 40 HLONG'T OL AGVIG dO HLGIM ISHLVAUL) “% WIAVY,

said ANOD

694 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

With the material in hand the data are too meagre to allow any
very definite conclusions, particularly as so many of the posterior ribs
of the adult are missing and those available are more or less damaged.
However, in the four examples the thirteenth rib is widest in relation
to the length while in general the eighth to eleventh tend to become
longer in proportion to the width.

REFERENCES CITED

Beddard, Frank E., 1903: ‘Contribution towards a knowledge of the
osteology of the Pigmy Whale (Neobalaena marginata).”’
Trans. Zool. Soc., London, XVI, 1903, pp. 87-110, pl.
VIIT-IX.

Davies, J. L. and Guiler, E. R., 1957: ‘‘A note on the Pygmy Right
Whale, Caperea marginata Gray.’’ Proc. Zool. Soe.,
London, 129, pp. 579-590, pl. 1-2.

Guiler, E. R., 1961: ‘‘A pregnant female Pygmy Right Whale.”
Austr. Journ. Sci., 24, pp. 297-298.

Hale, Herbert M., 1931: ‘‘The Pigmy Right Whale (Neobalaena
marginata) in South Australian waters.’’ Ree. S. Austr.
Mus., IV, pp. 314-319, fig. 1-4 (refs.).

Hamilton, J. H., 1952: ‘‘Cetacea of the Falkland Islands.’? Commun.
Zool. del Mus. de Hist. Nat. de Montevideo, IV (num.
66), pp. 1-6.

Oliver, W. R. B., 1922: ‘‘A Review of the Cetacea of the New Zealand
Seas -1.’’ Proc. Zool. Soc., London, pp. 559-561, pl. 1
(refs.).

Zietz, A. 1890: ‘‘A list of the whales and Dolphins of the South
Australian coast in the Public Museum, Adelaide.’’
Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., XIII, pp. 8-9.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE 48

A young male Caperea marginata, ten feet in body length, stranded on flat at Port
Lincoln Bay (upper photograph by courtesy Mr. If. W. Dorward, lower by Mr. GC. L. Gill).

Ree. S.A. Musktum

Ta face jaye

“—*
ood |

Teta

#
papi
£ a
ane,
ae c
_ ee
ws ee
iad i>

Vor 14, Puare 48

aa al

A NEW METEORITE FIND FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, CURATOR OF FOSSILS AND MINERALS,
SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM

Summary

The external features, mineralogy, and structure of a new aerolite from the Millicent area
of South Australia are described. Four stones, found within an area of a half-mile radius,
are evidently individuals of a meteorite shower. A fifth stone, discovered forty-two miles
to the north, shows certain external and textural differences from the remainder of the
group, but is believed to be a part of the same fall, which is here named the Lake Bonney
Meteorite.

A NEW METEORITE FIND FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA

By DAVID W. P. CORBETT, Curator or Fossms anp MINeErRAts,
Souta Austrrauian Museum

Plates 49-51 and text fig. 1

SUMMARY

The external features, mineralogy, and structure of a new aerolite
from the Millicent area of South Australia are described. Four stones,
found within an area of a half-mile radius, are evidently individuals
of a meteorite shower. A fifth stone, discovered forty-two miles to
the north, shows certain external and textural differences from the
temainder of the group, but is believed to be a part of the same fall,
which is here named the Lake Bonney Meteorite.

INTRODUCTION

A stony meteorite weighing 1.9 kg. was discovered by Mrs.
B. G. McDonald of Millicent on October 21, 1961, in sand dune country
between Lake Bonney and the sea, thirteed miler S.S.W, of Millicent
township in the South-Hast of South Australia. Three further stones
were discovered on subsequent visits to the area. The four stony
meteorites have a complete fusion erust and are not the broken
fragments of one large mass. One of the stones was found shattered
into several pieces and scattered over a distance of five square feet.
The pieces are easily put together, and the shattering is believed to
be of recent date.
Weights of the four finds are given below, and their locations
shown on the locality map. The numbers refer to specimens registered
in the Mineral Collection of the South Australian Museum,

G.7345 .. .. 1.96 kg.
G.7346... .. 538.64 grams—(total weight of fragments)
G.7347 .. .. 56.70 grams

— .. .. 205.55 grams
The four stones were all found within an area of a half mile radius,
close to the small peninsula known as Jacky Point, which projects
pected ds into Lake Bonney. The co-ordinates of Jacky Point
are 37° 45 §., 140° 18’ E. In addition, a further stone of 283.5 grams
(G.7579) was found, also by Mrs. McDonald, at Nora Creina Bay,
forty-two miles along the coast to the north-west.

696 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

S&S) MILLICENT AREA

fi. LAKE GEORGE
VN SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA

With inset map showing location of Lake
Bonney meteorite find.

MILLICENT ©

SOUTHERN OCEAN

@ METEORITE FIND

v2 Mie } Scale in miies.

| 5

Serena —— ease ——— teem — teomerat———— emt 3

Hig. 1. Map of Millicent area, South-East of South Australia, with inset map showing
location of Lake Bonney meteorite find.

CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 697

LOCATION OF FINDS

The strip of dune country between Lake Bonney and the sea
averages one mile in width. The more stable dunes carry a serub
vegetation, but most of the area is subject to drift. After leaving the
the road !rom Millicent, access at the northern end of the lake is
restricted to four- wheel drive vehicles, and the region is largely
unfrequented,

Beeause of the highly unstable environment in which the finds
have been made, stones lying on the surface can be uncovered and
covered again very quickly by drifting sand. It is highly probable
therelore, that other stones remain to be found in the area. The Nora
Creina find was loeated in a similay dune sand environment within a
half mile of the sea,

NATURE OF FALL

The eoneentration of four of the five finds in the Jacky Point
dren suggests that he original fall oceurred in this vicinity, and that
if was in the fort: of a shower of stowy meteorites. No evidence is
available for the direction of the fall, but it is probable that part of
the shower fell into the sea and part into the lake. Tf the Nora Crema
stone was found iz situ, and is also a part of the Lake Bonney fall,
the area of the strewn field was considerable, the long axis of the
distribution ellipse being over forty miles long. Alternatively, as
the general drift along the coast is to the north, it is conceivable
that the Nora Creina stone could have been transported northwards
and finally washed ashore. If this possibility is acknowledged, then
further stones could be found anywhere along the coastal strip north
from Lake Bonney,

A further possibility, considered to he the most likely, is that
the stones have been transported by aborigines at some time in the
past. Snpport for this view is given by the numerous native camp-
sites in the area, and the fact that one of the stones was found in close
proximity to one of these sites,

From the available evidence it is concluded that the Nora Creina
stone, althongh showing some differences from the Lake Bonney group,
is part of the same fall. Tt will therefore be included as an individual
stone of the group, which is here named the Lake Bonney Meteorite
and is described below.

698 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

DESCRIPTION OF THE LAKE BONNEY METEORITE

Fixrernat Features

The largest stone (G.7345, plate 49, A) is a roughly equi-dimensional
block, very tough and compact and brownish-black in colour, The
flat surface shown at the base of the photograph is believed to he a
fracture surface. The stone is completely covered by a fusion crust
with an average thickness of 0.5 mm. The orientation of the meteorite
during flight can be determined, and frontal, lateral and rear surfaces
identified. The flat fracture surface presumably developed late in
fight, modifying the original shape and giving the stone its
block-like form.

No well-marked apex is developed on the frontal surface, which
is smooth and close-textured, with a few nodular projections of fused
nickel-iron, There are a few fine ridges of fused material distributed
at random. Faint flow-lines ean be seen passing from the frontal to
the lateral surfaces. The lateral surfaces show regmaglypts with no
marked linear trend. The rear surface shows shallow regmaglypts,
and the generally smooth surface possesses areas pitted with small
circular depressions, These are well seen under low power microscopic
examination (x30). They occtir in isolated patches, and with one
exception (on a lateral face) are confined to the rear surface, Certain
portions of the rear surface show the development of a network of
fine cracks, These are well shown on plate 49, A.

G.7346 and G.7347 both show a fusion erust similar to G.7345.
Nodules of fused nickel-iron are more common, some of which are
broken and appear like burst bubbles.

The Nora Creina stone (G.7579) has a highly scoriaceous crust,
the nodular surface being greatly accentuated and producing a stone
of markedly different appearance from the remainder of the Lake
Bonney group.

MinenavoaicaL Composrrion

Thin sections cut from four of the five stones have been examined,
and the following minerals identified ;—
Opaque Minerals:

Nickel-iron; Nickel-iron occurs as irregular branching masses, as
grains, and as rims around the chondri.

Troilite; Troilite is present in amoeboid masses and as small
grains in all the thin sections studied. The largest mass observed

CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 699

measured 2x 1mm, It also oceurs in association with chondri as a
rim, or partially and sometimes completely enclosed within chondri.
Composite grains of troilite and nickel-iron are common.

The opaque minerals constitute approximately 15% of the stones,
Troilite is in excess of nickel-iron in the Lake Bonney group, and
equal in proportion with nickel-iron in the Nora Creina stone, The
smallest stone (G.7347) has very little nickel-iron.

Silicate Minerals:

The silicate minerals, olivine and orthopyroxene, constitute
approximately 75%-80% of the stones. Olivine is in excess of
orthopyroxene. They occur in both echondri and groundmass.

Olivine: The olivine, which shows little alteration, has a eomposi-
tion of 25 mole per cent FeaSi Os (determination by Dr. B. H. Mason,
American Museum of Natural History). It is predominant in the
Nora Creina stone.

Orthopyroxene: The orthopyroxene is non-pleochroic aud has low
birefringence. The fibrous structure is well shown in the chondri,
and in some individual crystals in composite olivine-orthopyroxene
ehondri.

Plagioclase feldspar: Single erystals of plagioclase were noted in
the stones G.7346, G.7347 and the Nora Creina stone.

Glass: The laths of olivine in the barred olivine chondri are
separated by glassy material, Some glass also oceurs in veins,

Tron Oxides:

Limonite is present in all the stones, as an oxidation produet of
nickel-iron, and it occurs in and adjacent to veins. It is most common
in the two smaller stones, where it colours much of the thin section.

Opaqne material, black under oblique reflected light, is found in
veins together with limonite, and also associated with the nickel-iron
and troilite. Occasionally it oceurs as isolated grains. It is believed
to be magnetite. Battey (1962) reports magnetite from the Wairarapa
Valley meteorite (New Zealand) and it has been reported from a
number of other chondrites,

Chloride;

Lawrencite: (ferrous chloride) was observed as a green exuda-
tion on the freshly cut surface of two of the stones.

700 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

Srructure

The Nora Creina stone differs from the others of the group in
showing well-developed chondri. They are of the followmg types :»—

i, Eecentrie radiating chondri of fibrous orthopyroxene.
ii. Granular olivine chondri,

iii. Barred olivine chondri,

iv. Composite olivine-orthopyroxene chondri.

The chondri of the first type are frequently almost spherical in
form with clearly defined margins separating them from the matrix.
They generally show ‘‘brush"’ or undulose extinction,

The granular olivine chondri are less well differentiated from the
matrix, and do not usually show the same spherical outline. The
individual olivine grains in the coarser chondri often show subhedral
form, and small irregular olivine grains oecur commonly between
larger grains in the chondrule. In one ease two granular olivine
chondri are merged together to form a double chondrule shaped like
a figure-of-eight. Barred olivine chondri are infrequent, Interstitial
material in these forms appears to be glass.

The composite olivine-orthopyroxene chondri comprise alternating
prismatic layers of the two minerals, or the chondrule consists of a
central section of fibrous orthopyroxene with marginal areas of
barred olivine.

Nickel-iron is found incorporated in some of the chondri. Many
are partially or completely surrounded by a rim of nickel-iron and
troilite. The average diameter of the ehondri is 1 mm.,, the largest
heing 3 mm.

The matrix consists of an aggregate of granular orthopyroxene
and olivine with interstitial areas of nickel-iron and troilite. The
Nora Creina stone does not show the brecciation common in many
chondrites. Veins are common, frequently showing an anastomosing
pattern. They eut both the matrix and the chondri and are filled with
iron oxides and glassy material.

The largest stone (G.7345) shows the chondrule types of the Nora
Creina stone (with the exception of the barred olivine chondri).
However the chondri are less well differentiated from the ground mass
into which they tend to merge. One distinctive chondrule consists of
a cross-hatched serics of ortho-pyroxene laths. This type of micro-
structure has been referred to by Krinov (1960) as a complex-grated
chondrule.

CORBETT—METEORITE FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA 701

Ohondritic structure is also poorly developed in the other stones
of the Lake Bonney group.

CLASSIFICATION

Determination of the olivine composition of the Lake Bonney
and Nora Creina stones places them in the group of olivine-
hypersthene chondrites (Mason, 1962). The fact that the olivine
composition of the Nora Creina stone is the same as that of the Lake
Bonney group supports the view put forward in this paper that all
the stones form part of the same fall.

CONCLUSIONS

From the available evidence it is concluded that the five stones
constitute a fall of stony meteorites in the vicinity of Jacky Point,
Lake Bonney. The Nora Creina stone is not believed to have been
found im situ, and its separation from the remainder of the group
by a distance of over 40 miles is thought to be due to removal after
fall by natural, or more probably, human agencies.

The differences in structure and external features observed
between the Nora Creina stone and the rest of the group are
interpreted as resulting from variation in the original meteorite mass
before disruption in the atmosphere, and to differences in their
terrestrial history. Development of iron oxides is variable within the
stones. ‘Two of them, however, show considerable oxidation, which
suggests that the fall is not a recent one.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

The author extends his grateful thanks to Mrs. B. G. McDonald
of Millicent, the discoverer, and to Mr. MeDonald, for making the
meteorite available for study, and for their hospitality and help in
the search for further finds; also to Mr. Dave Schultz of Rendelsham
for providing transport and leading a search party into the Lake
Bonney area.

Dr. Brian Mason of the American Museum of Natural History
kindly made available determinations of the olivine composition
incorporated in this paper.

“tt

702 RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

REFERENCES

Battey, M. H., 1962: ‘‘The Wairarapa Valley, New Zealand, Chon-
drite.’’ Miner. Mag. 33 (257), p. 73.

Krinov, EH. L., 1960: ‘‘Principles of Meteoritics,’’ Pergamon Press.

Mason, B., 1962: ‘‘The Classification of Chondritie Meteorites.’’
Amer. Mus. Novit. No. 2085.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES 49-51

PLATE 49

A. The largest stone of the Lake Bonney Meteorite group (G@.7345). View showing rear
surface with shallow regmaglypts, pitting and development of fine cracks. Plat
fracture surface shown at base of photograph,

B. Photomicrograph of G.7345 showing orthopyroxene chondrule (diameter 1.5 mm.) in ground
mass of nickel-iron and troilite (black), olivine and orthopyroxene. The large white
area is a hole in the thin section.

PLATE 50

A. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) showing on the left a granular
olivine chondrule with rim of nickel-iron, and a barred olivine chondrule on the right.
The latter (long axis 1.5 mm.) is traversed by a vein filled with iron oxides.

B. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) (x 40 approx.). A spherical ortho-
pyroxene chondrule, finely fibrous, with small embayments filled with nickel-iron,
appears on the left of the photograph; and an eccentrically radial fibrous orthopyroxene
tchondrule is seen on the right.

PLATE 51
A. Photomicrograph of the Nora Creina Stone (G.7579) showing granular olivine chondrule
in the centre (long diameter 1.6 mm.). A composite chondrule (olivine and ortho-
pyroxene) with nickel-iron rim appears at the top right of the photograph.
B. Photomicrograph of G.7347 (x 40 approx.). Chondritic structure is poorly developed.
Two chondri of orthopyroxene in the ceutre of the photograph merge into the ground
mass. The black areas are nickel-iron and troilite.

at. 14, Poarn 49

Mus

nyrt
me,

To fdew pate FOR)

Ree. S.A. Musecm Von. 14, Phare 50

Rue. SAL Mosreew Vou. 14, Piarne ot

704 RECORDS OF THE 8.A. MUSEUM
Pace Pact
Cassin .. -- othe ot we serve OP desertor, Gyomys ., -- coe on TTR

castaneothorax, ‘Cinclogoma .. 344, n47, 348,
349, 350, 363, 365, 466
eastanotuin, Cinclosoma , » "34, "346, 347,
348, 349, 853, 358, 360
castanotum, Cinclosoma castanotum 354, ae
Casuarina .. ee ee ee ee ee es oe 286, 287
enurinns, Eptesious pumilug .. .. .. 180
centralis, Smitthopsis erassicaudata 155, 156
cephalotes, Veturiug .. .. .. 489, 490, 493
corvinuc, Notomys «+ ve» 176, 177, a 191
Ghara ics cy dy Sy ed ale ee be oe BE, 68
Chlamydera os 6 cu be ve ee vt as sal
Chlenias +. 4+ 4. +. +» 182, 185, 188, 139
chrysogaster, Hydromys .. .. 178, 189, 191
cicero, Kuanider es ce ce ee ae ee BTA, BBS
ciliata, Limnimetrn io. vee. ee ee ee) 471
Cinclosoma ,, 337, 339, 340, ‘B41, 442, 348
einnamomeum, Cineloanma -. d42, B43, 344,
B46, 348, 349, 360, 368. 366

cinpa momen, Cinelosoma ‘etnnanno:
TACUM wey a ee os oe ae ee os BGO
elarum, Cinclosoma castanotum .. 343, B44,
od6, 337, pee 8 356, 357, 358
Clausadinyehus ,. ,. ey ve we ye ey) 118
clovedonense, Patarntomon ,. .. 44, 75, 76,

78, 79
elypeomarginatus, Passalus ., » ~, "490
Onemodus ¢. ee ee ae > oe ev O70

enleopteraldes, ** ‘Lamprodema'' o- or BIB
collaris, Fontejus .. a... as 875, 378, 379
colonicus, Chaerephon plicatus .. ., 181
comminrcitlis, Saxostrea .. .. .. -, 6414
eonditor, Leporillus .. 4. .. 175, 190, 191
confinis, Acerentulus .. 6... -+ ae ee © 90
consanguineus, Dieuches .. .. 431, 454, 465
consucidlis, Elasmolomus -. -. -. -. 459
conspicillatus, Diplodactylus . 545, 552, 553
eonspiciatus, Lagorthestus .. 44, 166, 188,

189, 190, 191

constricta, Sminthopsis murina .. .. 106
corbienlaris, Corbidinyebus 2. +. 107, 108
Corbidinyehus rege ce En og oh feet LO
cordata, Alloeador .. see 250
crassicauduta, Sminthopsis . 4 “458, 188, 191
cristicauda, Dasyeereus .. .. 1d, 137, 188,

189, 191
erucifera, Oreophryne .. 4. 9... 2. 677

Cryplocoris 2 4. .. 2. e. ATR, B74, B82
Cryptostemma = Arctatheca) vy oae GIL
evyiicnlus, Orvetolagus ., ,, .. 2. 183, 191
evelosticha, Chlenins .. .. .. 185, 196, 138
Cyfenus os be bl be cole: eof makes 48
eylindricus, Polyaspinus .. .. 115, 116

danitus, Acerentulus 2 .. 2. -. .. 76, 7
darlingtonil, Hvla ,- .- -, ,. os ye 858
BashegecOs +5 wr few es on ps oh us” ohOD
Daasyurops: yo oy. oe nsven oe as ew 4, 44
Dasyurus oa os sales ee ew ve Da 187, ‘190
deltoides, Plebidomax .. .. -. .- -.| 841

destructar, Walotydeus .. .. 2. .. 607, 612
Diarthrophallus .. 1 ee ve ee ee ve 488
diemenianus, Dromiccius .- .. .. 414, 416
Diouches .. .. 873, 427, 488, 430, 431, 487
dingo, Canis familiaris . 178, 187, 188,

189, 190, 191

Diplodactylugs .. .- wi pe ye wory G45
Diprotodon .. .. .. 2, 2 22, “41, 42, 46, 50
dirempus, Oxyeanng . .. 2. ac es ae BOB
distans, Centrotrombidium ,. .. .. -- 483
distanti, Dieuches ,, .. 443, 449, 444, 465
distyla, Casuarina... .. 2. -. -- 2. 645
doderoi, Acorentomon .. .. «. 63, 79, 81
domesticus, Melis cattns ,. .. 184, 188, 191
dovei, Cinclosoma punctatum .. .. 351, #52
drake, Tiagis wa es le wh vw ve ve BOO
Dromieeius ». .. .. +. to ce oy Yd, 418
Dromornis si: 1. 1. ve (es we ae ae 418
Drvimoag oe pe pe ee ee ee ee oBdA, BAT
dugesii, Trichobius .. 2. 2. 24 «. 477, 478
fundasi, Cinclosoma castonotum ., 354, 856
duodecimpilosa, Diarthrophallus .. 487, 489,

493, 495, 496

ecaudatus, Clhoeropus .. —- ., 160, 188, 191

obeainna, PYTASOR- ae avr et pe ey we G4
Elawmplomus o. 1. ay 2+ ee 487, 428, 452
clophantoyus, Pachyornis rk at oy A418
enigmations, Dieughes .. . 42, 440
Eosentomon .. we we we we ey “65, 69, 74
Epiceratodus .. 6. . Sa veers oP

epipbenus, Brachytremella .. 487, 488, 493
evemiann, Perameles 151, 159, 160, 188, 9
Brldeda oy ve on os ae ve ov oe O72, 873

errana, Johnatoniana .., vs y- va ne "483
‘‘erythrothorax?? apis sae eas-
tancothorax) . fey ge ae 2005

Buander «4 373, 374, $81, 383, 388, 390
Buculyptug ., .. .. +. S87, 280, 293, 858
Eucoametias see ee ae ea ce 2a 872, B77
Buowenia .. .. ss .. -. -- -. 89, 46, 50
Bupetes a. ve $o 38 42 92 Bal
cuphnes, Tiypsipyrgias .. ee se gs ce 5e BOL
everardensis, Notomys aleXis ., -. +. 177
eyroins, Notoniys fuseus ., +. 176, 177, 190
eyrensis, Epiceratodus ., ,. 2... a. aT

fallax, HyIa vs se ne wt ee ee ee te 856

fasciata, Cryptovoris . .. .. 875, 380, 382
fnsciatus, Myrmecobius . 157, 189, 190, 191
fasciatus, Povameler .. , -. -. oy 4. DAN
ferragua, Macropus . y. se we ue ee 50
fieldi, Peeudomys .. .. +. ++ «+ 172, 191
finitimus, Dienehes .. .« ‘432, 4387, 439, oe
Havipes, Platilen .. .. 2. 2) 2. ee

flaviventris, Taphozous .... -. ,- 181, 191

Fontejanus Sy Seto tre ew 351
FOnNt@jU8 +5 os es we oe 04 Olay ‘B74, 376
Forresti, Psoudomys . .. .: za ae 198

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 705

Page

frenatns, peer se ee aed 224. Bd
fulvolavatus, Flyé romys vhryaogagler . 178
fuseus, Notomys .s ou. ce ee ue ae DTZ, 191

. 545, 546, 547,
548, 550
Genyornis sss, se ve ay 48, 48, 413, 418
geoffroyi, Dasyurua .. 152, 153, 187, 188,
189, 191), 191

geoffroyi, Nyetophilus .- ++ +5 ys 180, 191
Reorginne, Acwein .. 4. see oe 861
gigas, Macroderma ss «+ 150, 180, + 187, 191
@lauca, Qullitris .. 2. 2. 2... .. G45
Globicephala Sue's gees eo te er we | 880
goldei, Cinglosoma ajux .. 2. 2. 6. BAT
goliath, Procoptodon ,. .. 1. . as 50
gouldi, Chalinolobus .. -. ., -. -. 180, 191
gracilare, Neotrombidium .. .. .. 4. 475
gtucilipes, Dromieeiug .. .. 4. -y +e 417
gracilipes, Neo{rombidium . .. ., .. 472
grandicus, Diouthes .. -. -. .. .. 481, 433

galeatua, Diplodactylus .

gregoryi, Fipieeratodus 2... 6. 4) ae AT

greyi, Bcoteinns .. 6. .) 6. +. .- 181, 191

halluentus, Dasyurus .. -. .- 158, 188, 190
Halotydeus +) ce ve ey ve ay oe GOD, G15
Helvionella .. .+ 2. te ev +e 383, 589

hemileucurua, Conilurus 4.4... 174
hermannsburgonsis, Pseudomys ., 173, 174,

182, 188
higginsi, Polyaspinus ., .. ae eee ts
hile 1G, Oxye: WUNUS ve et weet "862, 65, 666
hilliert, Dasyoe reus eristicauda -. 164

hirsutus, Tatieleas ss ey ee ae oe 431, 439
hirsutus, Lngorchestes .. ,. 151, 167, 187,

188, 191
hirtipes, Sminthopsis -. -. .. .. 155, 191
Be a 2 eye Lp ay 3 hse ». 858
Thylela io. 6. oe ee vere G75
Hyolithes s,s. + 2. vs B81, 586-7, 596-7
Hypsiprymnodon .. .. O68

idenburgenals, ccaphry ye ct owscnn OTT
Tmporata 2. 6. aa ee ee we we e. 286, 287
ingrami, Phase oale o% .. 54, 191
inkatu, Chleniax .. 131, 133, 135, 136, 137,

138, 189
inornuta, Petrogale ,, .. a 4a 165
insularis (== Elasmolomus v- -albun } +» 457,

458, 465
Tonesenelhime oy. 2. 46 oe th we aa 678
iowaense, Proturentomon we ce ae a. Gd, 78
lridomyrmex 2... 22 ee pe ne SBI

lig, HVA ee sys uae 1. a. 253, 26
Ts0odon ss ca ve ye we “187, 188, 159, 190
Jolnstoniana ., .. 2+ +. +. 477, 481, 483
kampeni, Oreophryne .. .- 5, -, -. 677

kershawl, Oxyeanis .. .0 +. ey. ce ey) 665
koebeli, Eritingis .. .. ., -, -, -, 260

Paar

Kogia ,, 197, 198, 202, 204, 215, 216, 217,
991, 299, 293, 227, 561, 576

lacertosus, Euander - 373, 374, 383, 385, 386
Lagorelestes ., ses. a ce ee ey ee) Hh
lagotis, Thalacomys .. 167, 187, 188, 189,

190, 191
“Qamprodema’’ 2. -, .. +e a: ve 373
lanceolatum, Santalum .. .. -. ey 4. 6645
lapidarius, Biseirus cove se ew ee we G16

larapinta, Sminthopsis .. .. 156, 188, 191
148

lasiandra, Melaleuca .. os seve

luteralis, Petrogale .. 164, 187, 18, 189,
191

latifrong, Lusiorhinus .. .. 2. -. .. 168

latisecuta, Johnstoniana .. .. .. .. 483
latus, Boshbequius .. 4. 4+ ve ve +s 429
Laxamana (—=Narbo) .. .. -. .- .. 463
leni, Allocader .. -. 4. ve ee ee ys 250
lefroyi, Compseuta ., .. 6. cee oe
Leggadino ., .. .. «. “179, 187, 189, 190
leiehardti, Lagorehestes conspicillatus 167,
168

lesneuri, Bettongia .. 49, 151, 169, 183, 187,
188) 189, 191

Jeucoceras, Diewehes - .2 6. 2. 2... 481
leueura, Thalaeomys 5. se ee ee ey ae 158
liueatus, Poeantius .. .. .. +. .. $62, 463
lineosus, Elasmolomus ., .. 2: 2 ae 459

Lingulella .. 4. -. -. -- 583
littoralis (—Plasmolomus ordidus) » Jae,

465
longienudatus, Notomys .- .. +» 12 191
longicollis, Dieuches ,. .. .. 431, 450, 465
longipes, Narbo .. ., ev pean 463

lunata, Onychogale .. .. 166, 189, 190, 191
lysiphloia, Acacia -. 6. es ve ve oe) 148

macdonnellensis, Phageogala .. ,, 158, 191
Nacroura, Bminthopsis .. .. -. -. «) 155

Macrovamia .. .,) ee ve oe - ++ 286
macnlicollis, Diewehes .. .. 433, 445, 465
maculosa, Nethersia .. -. .. .- 4, 850
maidlyi, Hydrometra ve ve ve ee oe 472
major, Penthaleus .. .. 1. 4. ey oe) 612

marginata, Neobalaena ., .. .. .. 681-694
marginatum, Cinelosoma .. .. 344, 347, 348,

349, 358, 362, 363, 366
marginatum, Cinclosoma’ marginatum . 364
Mastaromys .. .. 2-2 .- ee ee ee ee 172
maura, Lamprodema .. .. ., ., .. B78
maiwaoni, Meniscolophus .. ss ee es 89
Muxaphunus (== Dieuches) ., .. .. 480
maxima, Pinetada 2. e+ ve ev ee ae 870
muyri, Cinclosoma castanotum .. 354, 355
Mogalothorax (—Neelus) .- -. 613
Melaleuca ,, - 282, 283, 285, 287, 293
melanotragus, Melanerita .» .. 4. 6. G41
Meniseolophus .. .. .. «2 se -- ss 89
Mesoplodon .. 4. +4 e+ ++ ae te oe 204
metarhinus, Acerentomon , .. .. «+ 64, 87

706 RECORDS OF THE S.A, MUSEUM

Pade

metochoides (—Narbo biplagiatus) 464, =
Micronect& 11 ++ ee ve ee ee ne oe
millsi, Eosentomon .. os es ve es 63, ne 12
mimulus, Phaseogalo ., «+ ++ 154
minimum, Proturentomon .. 75, 76, 78, H
minimus, Averentulua .. -. -

minnie, Pseudomys .. .. «. 171, 139, int
minor, Dromiteiug +. ++ ee ve oe 41d, 416
minor, “¢Sthenurus’? coe wr ve ee oe
minor, Thalacomys .. .. .. 158, 190, 191
miselius, Thulaconiys minor ., », +, 158
mitehelli, Diplodactylus ., .. 548, 549, 550
mitehelli, Notomys .. .. 4. 177, 178, 191
MONNOETING, Diplothrombriam dap ae, We. 483
monunguis ,, 477, 478, 481, 482, 483, 484

morgani, Cinelosomn eastanatum . a47, 54,
856
morio, Chilinvlobus .. . - 181, 191

multicoloratus, Fontejus "375, "377, ores 880
murina, Sminthopsis nove fe ey 191
imiscatis, Cinelosoma ajax .. 1. 2. a, B67
musculus, Mus vs ey y+ +, 182, 189, 191
Myodoeha era ab iee ee we fee “TE

nanus, Pseudomys .. .. .. 172, 187, 191
Warbo os we ve ve ve on $27, 428) 463
nasuta, AnNISOPH 6. ve ve ue te ew gy ATT

Nundarensia (== Poeantius) .. .. .. 461
nos, Cinclosoma marginatum ,. .. 368, Bhd
Nuelaw vo er pees 20 ws sad STB
nogleetum (= Cinclasoma piincta tam) 340,
351

nomorale, Acerentomon .. .. +. fit, 82, 84
Nentrombidium ,, 473, 475, 477, 478, 481,
482, 483, 484

nereix4, Elasmolomus ., «. ++ 458, 460, 465

bealitbes, Alloecader 2... 44 , 249
newloni, Genyornis .. .. . £3, 412, 418
nigrn, Oncophysa yesioulata .- 250

nigroaenuus, Udeoeoris .. .- a76, 390, 397
nigropietus, Poeantius y+ +s rs vy =s 461

norvegiens, Rattus .. .. -. .. .. 188, 191
notntus, Dieushes ., .. 483, 447, 449, 465
Notomys .. .. .. 49, 175, 17, 187, 188

Nototherium .. .- .- -- 39, 50
novae-hollandine, Dromiceius » 414, 416, 417
novaehollandiac, Lobibyx ,. 4, +9 - 139
nudus, Dieuches ». 2. «1 se se ae 433, 449
Aullarborensis (—=Cinelosoma alisteri) 359

Nymphaea oe ne ee ck ka we oe oe 287
obesulus, Tsopdon .. +e ve - -- =- 159
obliqua, Eucalyptus ,. 6. <1.) . + 388, 389
oblongum, Acerentomon .. .. .. +. G4, 85
obacuripes, Dieuches .. 432, “44, 436, 437,

440, 442, 465
ocelidentulis, Aearantulds .. 6. wa ae 64
occidentalis, Sthenurus . .- 50

ocennicus, Dieuches . 432, 485, | 487, 445, 465
aeypus, Dromi¢aius ., » 413, x OE 416, 417
og, Protennodon .. .. .- ~» 50

PAGE

orbita, Dieathais ., .. <1 «. ++ ++ G4l
Orcinus .. <<. ee ee te oe te we oe (880
Oreophryn® 66 ce ci we wt ia 677, 678
oVum, Alnpliperas . -. .. .. ee
Oxyeamus 2. a. ce ve ee ey pe ve F3, BGS

Pachyhrachins .. 2. 2) se se 4+ 378, B77
Pachymeros -- .- -. 2, «= -+ e+ e+ 487
Pachvornis a Pesce skiers seine. SIF
palankarinalea, Porikonla so. es oe 20, 36
palankarinnieus, Prionofemnus ,, ». 39, 45

pullidior, Dasyuroides Byrnei .. .. -. 155
Palorehozstes .. 2. ae 4 . 37, 45
Pandanus ..oce ve ne 281, 286, 597, 293
papuanus, Klasmolomus .. .. 453, 459, 465

Purnentomou .s oes ye ee er ee ee) 8
Paromis is os os pene ee op re Bie
Passalud 11 ++ ne 0p ce pe ar oe oe 489
patricius, Dromiceings 2. 1. 2. ae ee 417

peduneulatus, Laomys .-.. -. .. 174, 191
penicillata, Bettongia .. 150, 168, 187, 188,
190, 194

peniciiata, Phaseognle .. .. 140, 153, 191
‘*Ponthaluus’? yn yes -. ee G09
Peramelea «6 4. ee ee 187, "188, 139, 190
porditus, Oxyeantta sc ee ae ee ee ee 666
Yorikoala 6. 6. we ve ee ae ee BO, 82, 34

pevoni, Patellanaxy ., .. .. .. -. -. G41
etrejus (= Pussalus) ,- +. +. =) 489
Prtrobius «car ee oe oe ee oe oe 608
Potrogale 2. 4. 62 ee ck te ae ew 1
Phalavrocorax .. .. .. -- -- «+ -- 4, 48
Phaseolonus .. 2. 55 ee ye ty pe 44, a9
Phoenicopteras .. 6. ee se ee ee ee OOD
Physeter 2... ete ew FRO
pietipennis (= Buander. lacertosus) . 384
pinus, Acerentomon «ey. en ee se 64, 91

pirate, Phascogale penicillnta . 2. +) 153
planifrons, Iyperoudon .. «. .- y+ Sal

Platalea .. . bene 48
plebijus, Tubanus “CAtylotin) | -- a BME
plicatus, Chacrephay .. tape ee ey DBT, 191
Poeantins «5 ++ 2. +. ++ +. $27, 428, 461

Polyaspinus «2.6 2. ec ye ee ee LOS, 116
Polyaspis ev cs ve os ooo 125
Porandor 1. +e vy ae 373, “ard, 387, 388
Prionoteminus 2.06. Ge nt ee we ae 39, 45
prisena, Varanus . .. 1 cs ve ae ve AF
Procoptodon «. sss. -- -- -- -+ SO, 648
Propleopus «. 66 ve ee ee re 44

Protemnodon .. .. +. +6 Tone ag, 45, 50
78

Proturentomon ++ oss 4+ ee ne ee oe

Prytanes .. ut tb ot ee, OO
psammophila, Sminthopsis -. ae ys 156, 191
Psendomys os vs se we =e ee =e ee 198

Ptochlomera 6... 2. 6s ey) ee e+ 372, 373
puleher, Diplodactylus o 40 08 ce ey G45
pumilus, Eptesiews .. +... +. +. 180, 197
punetatum, Cinclosoma » .. 343, 344, 348,

349, 350, 366
punctatum, Cinclosoma punctatum -- 350

INDEX TO GENERA AND SPECIES 707

Paor

pygmaca, Hylan .. .. .. .. ,, 253, 256, 257
pyrioldes, Stuphunitis .. 4... .. .. 250
queenslandiac, Dromiceius », .4 4) 2. 4lT
quercinum, Acerentomon -. 2... 2.) SL
quereus Diarthrophallus . ,. 438, 489, a“
quoll, Dagyurus 1. ue es ee ey we oe

rufacll (= Euander lavertosus) .. 373, ae
Fabia 8 4. cela ' oe 2, detew at

rattus, Rathug i.e. ce ee ae oe 182, 101
regia, Platulea .. 4. 4) ce ae pe ee 48

Rhyniella <r cn ae a -. G12
robustus, Macropus , .. 150, 164, 165, 187,
188, 190, 191

robustus, Tenagogonug » .. 4. 6, ay 471
Rohaultia (== Johnsetoninna) . .. 477, 481,
482, 483

rolandi, Udeovoris ,, .. 876, 391, 393, 461
rogaeeus, OXYCANUS 6. 6. we ee ee ee 6<GU4
rubieundus, Grus .. oy) .) ve ee ae 48
rufa, Meguleia .. . - 45

purus, Mavrofiue , + 150, 168, ‘164, 187, 158,

189, 190), jot
rufus, Myrmocoblus fasuiatus 2... 6. 157
rutila, Cymbiola.. 2... 4. 22 2. 2. G41

Satwuelu (<=Cinclosoma) .. 2. 2... 348
sumucli, Cinelosoma ¢innamomenm ., 362
Sarcophilus tort be we ae we =. 43, 44, 49

atvagei, Diplodavtylus .. .. 450, 551, ‘B52
scapulatus, Ptaropus .. 179, 187, 188,
183, 190, 191
Seenella .. 4. 4. ow 30 veae ss 538
selerophyllus, Calotrachy tes . 125, 126, 127
seudderi, Porandar .. 5, +, es ae 374, B88
soudderi, Vdeocoris . 2. 2. 2. 4. ATH, 393
seutellntus, Dieuches .. .. .. 432, 442, 444
sedifolia, Kurliia seis cs a6 20 au 845
semotu, Malandioln . .. -. .. -. .. 250
Sepiotouthis .. ye ee ae ee we ee oe BIB
Betonix ci 6. ce ce ee oe ee oe we Ad, 49
sexspinatus, Acorentulus .. .. .. 64, 102
sidnieus, Fontejus .. . ae 315, 377
simitis (— Diarthrophallus duodecime
DOOR) o> apse” om. oiy ear bitsy oe 459
simus, Kogla .. .. ,. 221, 573, 574, 575

BiwAMMOR so ve ee ce ee . 373
Sminthopsis .. 156, 157, 187, 188, 189, 190
Sminthurinug .. 4. ve se ae -. .. 807
Sminthurus .. .. 607, 610, 611, 615, 616
Smynthurus (= Sminthurus) re eee OLE
socium, Gonyuentrum .. ys se ae 248
sordidus, Hlasmolomus , . 453, 454, 457, 459,

460, 465

sordidus, Oxyeanus .. - 2.2. 65 4. 665
spenceri, Antechinomys 157, 187, 189, 191
apongleri, Cymatilesta wn) ga te oc toy HEL
spinosa, Brachytremetla ve ele) oe ee) | SOB
steindachneri, Diplodaetylua .) .+ 5 545
Sthomurus 6... ae ve ve ee oe as 45, 50
stoliezkae, Epiphenus .. .. .. -. -. 493

PAE

streblida, Monitnguis .. 475, 477, 478, 479,
481, 489, 483

superetliaris, Drymodes .. .. 2, 341, 342
swaui, Wogentomon .. ,, .. «. 83, 69, 74

syriacus, Dieuchegs .. .. .. 2. .- "431
tacniophora, Parada .. .. .. 2. 2. 2350
tainsi, Oxyeanus .- 2. 4s ve ae e. § 6664
tusmaniae, Euaulana .. .. 2. 2. .. 250

telumonides, Hypsipyrgias . .. ,, 250, 252
Telocoria ., ., s+ ae es 378, 390, 398
fenuipes, Nevotrombidiun or aw ea oe 495
terminalls (= Narbo biplagiutus) .. 464
tessellatue, Diplodavtylus .. 6545, 548, 550
Themeda 2, 2. 4. ye ee ue 280) 286, 287
WHOCUUFS ay ou ina te atelier tie oe 1FZ
Thryptomeue 2...) ye ck ua ee ue BGS

Thylacings .. 2. 41 2. 2. ws 2 U5, 43, 44
'Thylacoleo oh Yo ow ce Ye sean dd
tillyardi, Averentulus eS of Nee : 64, 99, 100
timorensis, Anisops . ,, .. ss us .. 471
tlidaloi, Gonyeentrum yore a 249

tindalei, Zygovoris .- 5. ., 375, 380, 381
todmordeni (= Cinelosoma v. cinna-
TAOIST) fs) coset cre an re Go WHET

torpidus, Dieuches .. .. .- 2... 498, 441
torquata, Ninvlla .. -. -. 4. es vs 641
torquatus, Buander . se ee ee 4. 874, B86
Traehytes .. ou. tp tye or (115
tramoseviva, Callana s,s, ce ce ce 641
transversus, Elasmolomus .. -. .. .. 459
Trichosurus .. .. 2, se sean ee ca OD
Trietona .. a. fee 663
lricuspiduin, Neotrombidium ' 478, 478, 482
trilobata, Diplouysta .. 250

Triodia .. 2. 5 Se 146, "83, 505, 645
trivirgata, Eritingis chive as euratce Sl
tubarculatus, Polyaspinus .. .., .. 115, 116
tunneyi, Rattus...) vs as 4... 17], 191
Turds yo .. - + rete S49
typhlops, Notoryetes re ” 161, 187, 188, 191

Udeoworis 6 .. -- 4738, 389, 390, 461
uivhancol, Phatnoma .. .. 2... 249
unappendiculatus, Casuaring », ., ., 414
unguifera, Onye uogate we 166, 189, 191

Uroaétus oy. . = ay ot emg, 1d
veulbul, Blasmulomus .. ., 453, 457, 459,

460, 405
varicgatus, Poeuntius ,. .- -- =. 462

yenatoris, Chitlinolobus gouldi ie vy. 280
vermiforme, Bosentomon ., .... .. 69

vesicurium, Atriplex .. 2. 4) 4, a) O45
yillosissimus, Rattus ., ., 170, 187, 188,

190, 191
vinceus, ‘*Halmaturus't ., ,. 44

viridis, Sminthurus .. ., 607, 608, 610, 613
vittata, Telovoris .. 6. 6k ee ke 370, B04
vittatus, Diplodactylus .. .. 545, 546, 584,

550, 551

708

Page

vulpecula, Trichosurus .. 150, 162, 187, 188,

vulpes, Vulpes .

waitei, Pseudomys ... .. ..

Wallabia .. .. .

westraliensis, Acerentulus .

westraliense, Eosentomon . .. ..

westraliensis, Fontejus

189, 190, 191

.. 184, 189, 191

173, 187, 191
. .. 45, 50

7.64, 95, 97,

99, 100
63, 64, 69
.. 375, 379

RECORDS OF THE S.A. MUSEUM

wheeleri, Eosentomon ..
wolterstorffi, Hyla .. .. ..
wolterstorfi, Oreophryne ..
womersleyi, Eosentomon .

woodwardi, Laomys ..
xanthopus, Petrogale ..
Xerotes .. ona

Zygocoris .. .. --

.. 65, 72, 74

PAGE

255
675-678

mn ee CONTE

174
165
282

373, 374, 380, 381, 382

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "Records of the South Australian Museum"

See other formats